JP2022089982A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of increasing an interest of a player.

SOLUTION: Game state setting means can set a first game state and a second game state which is more advantageous to a player than the first game state. Notification performance execution means executes a notification performance which can notify that a second game state is set after a privilege game executed by privilege game execution means is completed during the privilege game. The notification performance execution means executes the notification performance until a predetermined completion condition is satisfied when the privilege game in which the first game state is set is completed. Thereby, it can be made easy to notify that the second game state is set in the notification performance and an interest of a player can be increased.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is successful, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-217766

However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 dynamically displays a discrimination means capable of executing a predetermined discrimination and identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means for a predetermined period. A means, a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and a privilege game execution means. As the game state set after the end of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the first game state which is advantageous to the player and the second game which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. It has a game state setting means capable of setting a state, and at least during the execution of the privilege game, it is possible to execute a notification effect capable of notifying that the second game state is set as an effect result. The notification effect execution means has the notification effect execution means, and after the end of the privilege game in which the first game state is set, the notification effect can be executed until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. be.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 determines, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, a measuring means capable of measuring the number of discriminations of the discrimination means and whether the number of discriminations measured by the measuring means has reached a predetermined number of times. The end condition is satisfied when it is determined by the measurement determination means that the number of determinations since the first gaming state is set has reached the predetermined number of times. It is a thing.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is stopped in the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2 in a predetermined display mode in which the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is different from the specific display mode. Based on what is displayed, a special privilege game execution means capable of executing a special privilege game that can grant a special privilege different from the privilege that can be given to the player by the privilege game, and the privilege game or the special When the privilege game is executed, it has a variable means that can be changed from the first state to the second state, and the end condition is the special privilege in the state where the first game state is set. It is established when the game is executed.

The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the notification effect executing means is the first by the privileged gaming executing means by the time the end condition is satisfied. When the privilege game in which the game state is set is executed, the notification effect is executed until the end condition is satisfied after the end of the privilege game.

The gaming machine according to claim 5 can execute a special game for a predetermined period in the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4 when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. Special game execution means, special period setting means capable of setting a special period in which the special game is executed by the special game execution means, and remaining period of the special period set by the special period setting means can be discriminated. The special period notification means includes a remaining period determining means and a special period notifying means capable of notifying the remaining special period information for indicating the remaining period of the special period determined by the remaining period determining means. When the end condition is satisfied, the remaining special period information is notified.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a discriminating means capable of executing a predetermined discriminant, a dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information for showing a discriminant result of the discriminating means for a predetermined period, and an operation thereof. A privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the identification information dynamically displayed by the target display execution means is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and the privilege game execution means thereof. As the game state set after the end of the privileged game executed by, a first game state that is advantageous to the player and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state are set. A notification effect executing means having a possible game state setting means and capable of executing a notification effect capable of notifying at least that the second game state is set as an effect result during the execution of the privilege game. The notification effect execution means is capable of executing the notification effect until a predetermined end condition is satisfied after the end of the privilege game in which the first game state is set.

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it has a measuring means capable of measuring the discriminant number of the discriminating means and a measuring discriminating means for discriminating whether the discriminant number measured by the measuring means has reached a predetermined number of times, and the end condition is the above. This is established when it is determined by the measurement determination means that the number of determinations since the first game state is set has reached the predetermined number of times.

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the fact that the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode different from the specific display mode, it can be given to the player by the privilege game. A special privilege game execution means that can execute a special privilege game that can grant a special privilege different from the privilege, and when the privilege game or the special privilege game is executed, the state changes from the first state to the second state. It has a variable means that can be changed, and the end condition is satisfied when the special privilege game is executed in a state where the first game state is set.

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, if the privilege game for which the first game state is set is executed by the privilege game execution means by the time the end condition is satisfied, the notification effect execution means is after the end of the privilege game. The notification effect is executed until the end condition is satisfied.

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, a special game execution means capable of executing a special game for a predetermined period and a special period in which the special game is executed by the special game execution means. A special period setting means capable of setting, a remaining period determining means capable of determining the remaining period of the special period set by the special period setting means, and the remaining period of the special period determined by the remaining period determining means. It has a special period notification means capable of notifying the remaining special period information for indicating, and the special period notification means notifies the remaining special period information when the end condition is satisfied.

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the third symbol in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode displayed by a display device. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the button effect executed corresponding to each special symbol variation in 1st Embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow that the overlap button effect is executed as the button effect which is executed corresponding to each special symbol variation in 1st Embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the button effect period in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the button effect A is started on the display screen of the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents in the first embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content which is displayed when the button effect A is successful on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content which is displayed when the button effect A fails on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the button effect B is started on the display screen of the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents in the first embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content when the button effect B is finished on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when button effect C, which is a duplicate button effect, is started on the display screen of the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content when the button effect C which is a duplicate button effect ends on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which showed schematically the structure of various counters in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the ROM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table set in the ROM of. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 table set in the ROM, and (c) shows the contents of the special figure 2 table set in the ROM of the main control unit in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown schematically. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table set in the ROM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability change / time saving table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latent probability table set in the ROM of. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the general figure variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment. be. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the button effect selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the button effect hierarchy storage area set in the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surfaces B to D. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the back surface E. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation execution process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game number update process executed by the MPU in the control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation execution process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through-gate passage processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a variation start process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a variation start process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the holding ball number processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the state command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the hit-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot related processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 button effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the execution timing setting process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 button effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the button effect mode setting process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the button effect start processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the button effect update process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd frame button setting process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the button pressing process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the notification command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the hold effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the hold effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the normal 8 hold effect start screens which are displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 2nd Embodiment, and (b) is displayed by 3rd symbol display device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect result of the normal 8 hold effect. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a case where the super hold effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment is started, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the case where the third symbol display in the second embodiment is started. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content displayed at the end of the super hold effect displayed by the apparatus. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. It is a schematic diagram which showed the contents of the hold effect selection table which is configured in the ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the configuration of the staging layer storage area configured in the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the effect layer storage area configured in the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the contents of the set 1st staging hierarchy storage area 223 in a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the relationship between each hierarchical storage area and the set effect information. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a variation start process of FIG. 1 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure 1 variation start process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure 2 variation start process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the reserved ball number processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special hold effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the effect mode setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the related effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the button pressing process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the effect level selection process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a battle effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the third embodiment, and (b) is displayed by the third symbol display device in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the case of winning in a battle production. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a case where the battle effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the third embodiment is defeated, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the case where the third symbol display device in the third embodiment is defeated. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the case where the rematch is caused by the battle production displayed by. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a case where the battle effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the third embodiment is on the verge of defeat, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the case where the third symbol in the third embodiment is on the verge of defeat. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the case where the battle effect displayed on the display device is completed and the time saving state is notified. It is a schematic diagram which showed the structure of the ROM of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the 1st big hit random number 2 table set in the ROM of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of FIG. 2, and (c) is the special figure 2 jackpot type set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of a selection table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change start process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows 1st special symbol change start processing 3 executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the state command reception process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the battle effect update process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure variation start processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot start processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st modification. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device in the first modification, and (b) is an example of the variation effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the first modification. It is a schematic diagram shown. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the variation effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st modification. (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of a multi-reach effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the second modification. (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of a multi-reach effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the second modification. (A) and (b) are schematic views schematically showing the configuration of the ball entry unit. (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of a multi-reach effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the third modification. (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the third modification. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit end process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd modification. It is a flowchart which showed the battle effect update process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd modification. It is a flowchart which showed the number of times correction effect executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd modification. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure variation start process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd modification. It is a flowchart which showed the correction number correspondence processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd modification. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability change / time saving table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 4th modification.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 91, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having entry ports 63, 64b1, 64b 2, 640 and the like into which a large number of nails and balls can enter is detachably attached to the inner frame 12. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front area (game area) of the game board 13, and a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a in the front area of the game board 13. A launch rail (not shown) that guides the aircraft to is installed. The contents of a large number of entrances provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 9) by the inclination.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

Further, the lower plate unit 50 is provided with a first frame button 22a and a second frame button 22b as operating means that can be operated by the player. The first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b (hereinafter, referred to as a frame button 22 when both frame buttons are shown) are displayed by, for example, the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). It is operated by the player when changing the stage of the production to be performed or changing the production content of the super reach. In the present embodiment, the effect (button effect) is set so that the operation frequency of the first frame button 22a is higher than that of the second frame button 22b. The first frame button 22a, which is frequently operated, is arranged on the left side of the second frame button 22b in the front view of FIG. As a result, in the button effect executed while the player is operating the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the first frame button 22a, which is easy to be operated, can be easily operated with the left hand, so that the button effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the player from stopping the operation (launching game) on the operation handle 51 and reducing the operation of the game each time.

Although a detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, the second frame button 22b is likely to be an operation target in the button effect executed when a result (for example, a big hit) advantageous to the player is notified. It is configured to be. As a result, only the button effect targeting the second frame button 22b is executed, that is, the player is expected to win the jackpot even before the operation is performed on the second frame button 22b. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second frame button 22b is arranged at a substantially central position of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the button effect for the second frame button 22b is executed, the player can be enthusiastic to operate the second frame button 22b (for example, a pressing operation using both hands). can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the first frame button 22a, which is frequently operated, is configured to be smaller than the second frame button 22b. Specifically, the first frame button 22a has a radius of 3 cm and is the first. The two-frame button 22b is formed in a cylindrical shape with a radius of 6 cm. As a result, it is possible to make the second frame button 22b, which has a low operation frequency (a privilege is easily given to the player when operated), stand out.

In the present embodiment, the size of the frame button 22 is made different so that the second frame button 22b is more conspicuous than the first frame button 22a, but the player is second in the button production. The second frame button 22b may be configured to stand out more than the first frame button 22a at the timing of operating the frame button 22b. For example, the second frame button 22b may be configured to operate variably. When the button effect is executed, the variable operation of projecting the second frame button 22b upward (upward from the viewpoint of FIG. 1) may be executed. In this case, when the button effect is not executed, the first frame button 22a may be configured to stand out more than the second frame button 22b. As a result, when the button effect is executed, the effect that the second frame button 22b suddenly appears can be executed, so that the player can be provided with an unexpected game.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and general inserts. Ball opening 63, ball entry unit 64 (first entry port 64b1, left second entry opening 64b2), second entry opening 640, variable winning device 65, normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, variable display device The unit 80 and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general ball entry port 63, the ball entry unit 64 (first ball entry port 64b1, left second ball entry port 64b2), second ball entry port 640, variable winning device 65, and variable display device unit 80 are based on router processing. It is arranged in a through hole formed in the plate 60, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

A first symbol display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the return rubber 69. The first symbol display device 37 is arranged so as to be covered with the back surface (the surface opposite to the surface forming the game region) of the game board 13 made of transparent resin (for example, ABS). It is configured so that the fired ball does not collide with the first symbol display device 37.

The first symbol display device 37 is provided with first symbol display devices 37a and 37b including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b enter the ball into the first ball entry port 64b1 (winning), the left second ball entry port 64b2, or the second ball entry port 640. It is configured so that it can be used properly according to whether it is a ball (winning). Specifically, when the ball enters (wins) the first entry slot 64b1, the first symbol display device 37a operates, while the ball enters the left second entry opening 64b2 or When a ball is entered (winning) in the second entrance 640, the first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate. That is, the first symbol display device 37a is a display means for showing the lottery result of the lottery (special figure 1 lottery) executed when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64b1 and displays the first symbol. The device 37b is a display means for showing the lottery result of the lottery (special figure 2 lottery) executed when the ball enters the left second entry port 64b2 or the second entry opening 640.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate which of the gaming states (probability change state, latent probability state, normal state, etc.) of the pachinko machine 10 is, depending on the lighting state, or the first symbol fluctuates. Whether or not it is medium (during dynamic display to stop and display the combination of symbols to show the lottery result) is indicated by the lighting state, and the stopped symbol corresponds to the jackpot that is advantageous to the player or is disadvantageous. Whether the symbol corresponds to the jackpot or the symbol is off is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds during the jackpot and the error are displayed by the 7-segment display device. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. In the present embodiment, various gaming states are notified by a combination of emission colors of the light emitting means (7-segment display device), but any configuration is sufficient as long as the player can identify various gaming states. For example, various gaming states may be notified by varying the length (blinking mode) of the period in which the light emitting means is lit and the period in which the light emitting means is turned off.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery (special symbol lottery) is triggered by the fact that there is a ball entry (winning) in the first entry slot 64b1, the left second entry opening 64b2, and the second entry opening 640. Is done. Then, in the lottery of the special symbol, the winning / failing determination (big hit lottery) of whether or not it is a big hit is performed. Here, based on the determination that the jackpot has been won, the jackpot game that is in a privileged gaming state advantageous to the player is executed.

When the jackpot game is executed, the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is in an open state where the ball can be easily won, and by making the specific winning opening 65a win the ball, many prize balls are awarded for a short period of time. The jackpot game that can be obtained at is executed. During this jackpot game, the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and is executed. The ball is inserted into the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 for the opening period (for example, 1 second). A predetermined period (for example, a period in which a closed state is set in which it is difficult to enter a ball), a round game period in which an open state is set, and a predetermined period until the next round game is started after the end of one round game period (for example). , 0.5 seconds), an interval period in which the closed state is set, and an ending period in which the closed state is set for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the end of the last round game period. The period is set.

In this way, after the lottery result of the special symbol indicating the jackpot winning is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the opening period is set, so that the ball is set at the timing when each winning opening is opened during the jackpot game. Since it is possible to prepare for firing in any direction, the jackpot game can be smoothly performed. Further, since this opening period can be used as a period for notifying the player of the game content of the jackpot game this time, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, by setting the ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent the lottery of a new special symbol from being executed immediately after the end of the last round game, so that after the end of the jackpot game. Since it is possible to prepare for launching the ball in any direction toward the game to be executed, it is possible to smoothly switch the game.

Furthermore, if it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot lottery, the type of jackpot is also determined. A detailed explanation will be given later, but as the type of jackpot to be determined, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 16 rounds, and a probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is given after the jackpot game is completed. 16R probability variation jackpot, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 4 rounds, and the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is given after the jackpot game ends. 4R probability variation jackpot, jackpot game round. There are 4 rounds of 4 rounds, and a 4R time-saving jackpot is prepared in which a time-saving state (low-probability state of a special symbol, high-probability state of a normal symbol) is given after the jackpot game is completed.

That is, in the present embodiment, the 16R probability variable jackpot is the most advantageous privilege for the player (the number of prize balls that can be given during the jackpot game is the largest, and the gaming state set after the jackpot game is completed is the most advantageous for the player. ) Is given, and then the degree of advantage decreases in the order of 4R probability variation jackpot and 4R time saving jackpot. In this way, even when a big hit is won in the special drawing lottery, the degree of advantage of the privilege given to the player can be changed according to the type of the big hit to be set. You can be interested not only in whether or not you have won a big hit, but also in the type of big hit that is set when you win a big hit.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery is configured to determine two types of lottery results, that is, a jackpot and a missed lottery, but the lottery result is not limited to the above-mentioned jackpot. In some cases where it is determined to be out of order, there are fewer benefits given to the player than the above-mentioned jackpot (for example, a benefit of opening the variable winning device 65 for only one round), even if a small hit can be determined. good. As a result, the amount of benefits given to the player can be diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation (whether or not it is a small hit in a pachinko machine capable of determining a small hit). If it is a big hit, the design according to the big hit type is shown.

In the present embodiment, any of a "normal state", a "time saving state", and a "probability changing state" is set as the gaming state (see FIG. 16). In the normal state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to a low probability (1/250), and the hit probability of the normal symbol is set to a low probability (11/233) (hereinafter, special symbol: low probability state, Normal symbol: called low probability state), and in the time saving state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to low probability (1/250), and the hit probability of the normal symbol is set to high probability (232/233). In the gaming state (hereinafter referred to as special symbol: low probability state, normal symbol: high probability state), in the probability variation state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to high probability (1/50), and the hit probability of the normal symbol is set. Is a gaming state set to a high probability (232/233) (hereinafter, referred to as a special symbol: a high probability state and a normal symbol: a high probability state).

Here, the high probability state of the special symbol is a state in which the probability of becoming a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol is higher than the low probability state as described above, and in the present embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is set. Then, it is stipulated that the jackpot probability of the special figure 1 lottery and the jackpot probability of the special figure 2 lottery have the same high probability value (1/50). Not limited to this, for example, it may be specified that a high probability value is set only for the jackpot probability of the special figure 1 lottery, or a high probability value is set only for the jackpot probability of the special figure 2 lottery. , The high probability value when the high probability state of the special symbol is set may be specified differently between the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery.

Next, the high-probability state of the normal symbol is a state in which the hit probability of the normal symbol is higher than that of the low-probability state. When a winning game is won in a normal symbol lottery (normal pattern lottery), the electric accessory 640a is opened as a winning game, and the ball is easily entered into the second entrance 640.

Further, although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the present embodiment, a big hit is won in the lottery of special figure 1 (first special symbol) and a big hit is won in the lottery of special figure 2 (second special symbol). The setting ratio of the jackpot type is set differently depending on the case and the jackpot, and if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special figure 2 rather than the lottery of the special figure 1, the player is given a privilege that is advantageous to the jackpot. It is configured so that the type (for example, 16R probability variation jackpot) can be easily set. With this configuration, the special figure 2 lottery is more advantageous to the player than the special figure 1 lottery, and the special figure 2 lottery is more likely to be executed for the player. It is possible to have the player play the game while expecting that the time saving state (probability change state) is set.

In this embodiment, in order to make it easier for the ball to enter the second entry port 640 during the high-probability state of the normal symbol (high-probability state of the normal symbol), the low-probability medium state of the normal symbol is in progress. On the other hand, the first mode in which the hit probability of the normal symbol is high, the second mode in which the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for one hit game are increased, and the fluctuation time of the second symbol are short. Although it is configured to execute the third aspect that makes it easy to set the fluctuation time, the ball enters the second entrance 640 in the high probability state of the normal symbol than in the low probability state of the normal symbol. It suffices if it is configured so as to be in an easy-to-use state, and it may be configured to set at least one aspect out of the above-mentioned three aspects. Further, if the high-probability state of the normal symbol is configured so that the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640 than the low-probability state of the normal symbol, among the above-mentioned three modes. In any mode, the high probability state of the normal symbol may be configured so that the ball is less likely to enter the second entry port 640 than the low probability state of the normal symbol.

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. A game area on which the fired ball can flow down is formed on the surface of the game board 13, and the game area is partitioned by the variable display unit 80. Specifically, it was divided into a left gaming area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80 and a right gaming area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80, and fired at a predetermined first firing intensity. The ball flows down the left game area, and the ball fired at the second firing intensity, which is stronger than the first firing intensity, flows down the right game area. Hereinafter, the game in which the operation handle 51 is operated so that the fired ball flows down the left game area is referred to as a left-handed game (normal game), and the operation handle is used so that the fired ball flows down the right game area. The game of operating 51 is referred to as a right-handed game and will be described.

In the left game area, a general entry port 63 is provided in which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b triggered by the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64b1, the left second entry opening 64b2, and the second entry opening 640. To the third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays the fluctuation of the third symbol while synchronizing with the fluctuation display in the above, and to the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. There is provided with a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variablely display the second symbol triggered by the passage of the sphere. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 15 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment displays the gaming state according to the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37a and 37b. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device displays a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. It is a variable display that lights up alternately for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is predetermined. It is configured to be in the operating state (open state) for a period of time.

The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is attached to the game board 13 in the right game area, and among the balls launched on the game board, a part (about 50%) of the balls flowing down the right area can pass through. It is configured in. When the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is reserved up to a total of 4 times, and the number of reserved balls (normal symbol reserved number) is displayed on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). To. There are four second symbol hold lamps for the maximum number of hold lamps.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You may. Further, the number of assembly of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side (right game area) of the variable display device unit 80, and is also, for example, the left side (left game area) of the variable display device unit 80. good. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

As shown in FIG. 2, a lower game area in which the left game area and the right game area communicate with each other is formed below the variable display device unit 80, and a ball enters the substantially central portion of the lower game area. A possible ball entry unit 64 is arranged. The detailed configuration of the ball entry unit 64 will be described later, but the inside of the ball entry unit 64 can be entered through a first entry port 64b1, a left second entry port 64b2, and an opening through which a ball can enter. A distribution means for alternately distributing the ball to the first ball entry port 64b1 and the left second ball entry port 64b2 is provided internally.

When a ball enters the first entry port 64b1, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main cause is that the first entry opening switch is turned on. A big hit lottery (special drawing 1 lottery) is performed by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37a. Further, when the ball enters the left second entry port 64b2, the second entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by the on of the second entry opening switch. Then, a big hit lottery (special drawing 2 lottery) is performed by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37b.

In the present embodiment, the ball entry unit 64 is arranged in the substantially central portion of the lower game area, but the ball that plays the left-handed game and flows down the left game area plays the right-handed game and is on the right. It is configured so that it is easier to enter the opening of the entry unit 64 than the ball flowing down the game area. Specifically, the route from the left game area to the entry unit 64 via the lower game area by the game nail (ball guiding member) planted in the game board 13 is from the right game area to the lower game area. It is configured so that the ball can flow down more easily than the path facing the ball entry unit 64.

Therefore, in the normal state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set and the electric accessory 640a is difficult to open, the left-handed game is an appropriate game method. By defining an appropriate game method in this way, when it is determined that a right-handed game has been performed during a normal state (a region where only a ball flowing down the right region can pass (for example, a through gate 67)). When it is determined that the ball has passed), it is possible to notify the player that a game different from the proper game method is being performed.

Next, the configuration of the right game area will be described with reference to FIG. The above-mentioned through gate 67 is arranged in the right game area, and a second ball entry port 640 and an electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 are arranged on the downstream side thereof. .. Since the right game area is an area where the ball launched by the left-handed game and flowing down the left game area cannot flow down, the ball does not reach the through gate 67 or the second entrance 640 by the left-handed game. .. As a result, the ball passes through the through gate 67 in the right game area or the ball enters the second entrance 640 even though the left-handed game, which is an appropriate game method, is performed during the normal state. It is possible to suppress the situation of entering the ball. Therefore, it is erroneously determined that an inappropriate game method (a game method in which a right-handed game is performed in a normal state) is performed for a player who is playing a game with an appropriate game method, and the game method is changed. It is possible to solve the problem that the notification for making the player is executed and the motivation for playing is reduced.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the second entrance 640 (a part of the lower gaming area). This variable winning device 65 is opened during the jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in the special drawing lottery, and the number of balls paid out when one ball wins (the number of prize balls). Is configured to be 15.

Here, in the present embodiment, the right-handed game is configured to make it easier for the ball to reach the variable winning device 65 than the left-handed game, and the game state is advantageous to the player (time saving state, probability change). In addition to the state), it is configured to execute the right-handed game even during the jackpot game. As a result, when the game in the game state advantageous to the player and the jackpot game are alternately executed, it is only necessary to continue the same game method (right-handed game), and the game method is provided to the player. It is possible to eliminate the need for complicated changes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device by the MPU 201. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the first frame button 22a, the second frame button 22b, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes various drive motors for operating the driving accessory for the effect provided in the pachinko machine 10.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b, and when the player operates the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b, the third frame button 22b is operated. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed by the symbol display device 81 or change the effect content at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

When the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b are operated by the player, a character driving command may be transmitted to another device 228 in order to drive a character for effect (not shown), or a first. Set a voice output command to output the voice corresponding to the operation contents to the frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b to the voice output device 226, and display the lamp in a light emitting mode corresponding to the operation contents to the frame button 22. It may be configured to set a lamp output command for causing the device 227 to emit light.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 such as the variation effect of the third symbol is produced. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 4). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7 (a). 5 (a) and 5 (b) are schematic views schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol rows (upper, middle, and lower) ( L1 to L3) are displayed (see FIG. 5A). The third symbol (decorative symbol that fluctuates according to the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2)) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is Each is composed of 10 types of main symbols with identification information imitating the numbers "0" to "9".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the main symbol is formed by using different types of characters (animals and the like) for each identification information imitating numbers. In this way, by using the character corresponding to each identification information, it is possible to visually notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol, so that the player can play an easy-to-understand game. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777"), and the variable display is performed, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after the game is over. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3 are displayed, which are upper, middle, and lower, respectively. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and the symbol rows L1 to L3 are periodically scrolled in the left-right direction to perform variable display.

Specifically, the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 are configured so that the symbol rows are formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from right to left, and are scrolled from right to left and displayed in a variable manner. The lower symbol sequence L3 is configured such that the symbol sequence is formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from left to right, and the numbers are scrolled from right to left and displayed in a variable manner. Further, in each symbol row, a sub symbol (blank symbol) that does not show the lottery result of the special symbol is formed between the main symbols.

Then, as shown in FIG. 5A, the main display area Dm has three effective lines V1 to V3 formed in the vertical direction and two effective lines V4 and V5 formed in the diagonal direction. With each symbol row L1 to L3 stopped and displayed, the third symbol is stopped together on the effective line with a combination of jackpot symbols (in the first embodiment, the same combination of main symbols). For example, a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 5A, in the first embodiment, since each effective line (V1 to V5) is formed so as to include the symbol display position of each symbol row L1 to L3, the third symbol Until all of the symbol rows L1 to L3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the display device 81 are stopped and displayed, the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol can be obscured. Therefore, it is possible to be interested in the variable display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm until the last symbol row (in the present embodiment, the middle symbol row L2) is stopped and displayed.

The mode of variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol. The number of symbols in the column can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbol that is variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and a symbol that combines an image such as a figure or a character and a number may be configured as the third symbol. Further, the area in which the third symbol is variablely displayed may be varied. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol may be changed. By making the size smaller or moving the variable display area to a position that is difficult for the player to see (for example, the corner of the display screen), it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the third symbol is changed. You may try to do it. Further, during the period in which the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol are the same (to the extent that it is difficult for the player to identify). However, the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be different so as to correspond to the type of special symbol that is changing.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 5 (b). As shown in FIG. 5B, small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are formed in the upper right of the front view in the main display area Dm. The small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are areas in which identification information (fourth symbol) for showing the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result) is displayed. The fourth symbol (special figure 1 fourth symbol) for showing the lottery status of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and the lottery status of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is displayed. The fourth symbol (special figure 2 fourth symbol) for indicating the above is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm2.

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the lottery status of the special symbol in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed at the same time. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is shown in a display mode using numbers, and the fourth symbol is variablely displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2. (See FIG. 9A), the situation where the special symbol is fluctuating is shown, and the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by stopping and displaying the fourth symbol in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see FIG. 10). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a display mode that imitates a figure as a fourth symbol, a display mode that shows a plurality of colors, a display mode that deforms the figure, and a variable color are used. It may be configured to show the lottery result of the special symbol by showing that the special symbol is changed depending on the display mode to be made, and by stopping and displaying the display mode showing a specific symbol or color.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is in the lottery (changing). Further, as shown in FIG. 5B, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) in which the fourth symbol for showing the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is mainly displayed. An example of forming the fourth symbol display area on the upper right side of the area Dm is shown, but the position and size of the fourth symbol display area are determined according to the effect mode of the variable effect executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. You may make it different.

With such a configuration, the area in which the variation effect is executed is limited by the fourth symbol display area, and it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered. In this case, the fourth symbol display area is deleted from the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the variable display of the fourth symbol is displayed by using the light emitting means (LED or the like) provided in the variable display device unit 80. It is good to configure it to execute.

Further, a small display area Dm1a is formed in the vicinity (left side) of the small display area Dm1, and a display mode showing the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is displayed. Further, a small display area Dm2a is formed in the vicinity (left side) of the small display area Dm2, and a display mode showing the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is displayed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9 (a) described later, in the reserved number display area (small display area Dm1a, Dm1b), the number of reserved balls of each special figure is displayed in a numerical display mode. Although it is configured to be displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to display a display mode using a color or a symbol so that the number of reserved balls in the acquired figure can be identified.

A small display area Dm3 is formed in the upper left of the front view in the main display area Dm. In this small display area Dm3, a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is launched (game direction) is displayed (see FIG. 5B).

In this embodiment, the small display area Dm3 is used as the guide display area. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp to which area of the gaming board the ball should be fired by simply visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In this guidance display area (small display area Dm3), a "right-handed" display mode for guiding the player to perform a right-handed game and a left-handed game to be performed by the player are performed. The display mode of "left-handed" for guiding that is displayed, and the display mode of "right-handed" is a gaming state in which the right-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, It is displayed during the time saving state, the probability change state, and the jackpot game, and the display mode of "left-handed" is configured to be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the right-handed game is completed. There is. Further, even when it is detected that the left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, the right-handed game is being executed during the normal state, the "left-handed" is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). It is configured so that the display mode is displayed.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 5 (b). Small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a are formed on the left side of the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1 and Dm2). The small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a are areas in which the reserved number display mode for indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol is displayed, and the small display area Dm1a is the area where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (reserved) is displayed. The special figure 1 hold information for showing the number of stored balls) is displayed, and the special figure 2 hold information for showing the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm2a.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a, in addition to the value for indicating the number of reserved balls of the corresponding special symbol, the result of preliminarily determining the winning information stored in the holding (pre-reading result) is obtained. It is configured to display a display mode capable of suggesting and notifying the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player play the game while having expectations for the game to be executed in the future (the lottery result of the special symbol stored on hold).

Further, a sub-display region Ds is formed below the main display region Dm. As shown in FIG. 9A, the sub-display area Ds is configured to display a comment for the content of the game being executed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game. The sub-display area Ds may be used for another purpose. For example, information for indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol shown in the small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a may be displayed in the sub-display area Ds. It may be configured.

In this case, for example, the sub-display area Ds may be configured to display a hold display mode (for example, a hold symbol display mode consisting of a circle) for individually indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol. Then, it is preferable to configure the player so that the number of reserved balls of the current special symbol can be grasped by the number of displayed holding display modes. Further, it is preferable to determine in advance the winning information corresponding to each special symbol stored on hold, and to change the corresponding hold display mode based on the determination result.

With this configuration, the game is played with the expectation that a big hit will be won in the lottery of the special symbols corresponding to the reserved symbols whose display mode is changed among the reserved symbols that may exist in a plurality. Can be made. Further, unlike the present embodiment, since it is configured to display the reserved symbols corresponding to the individual reserved storage numbers, the display mode for showing the game result that may be advantageous to the player among the plurality of reserved symbols. It is possible to set the result display to easily display the variable reserved symbol display.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition, the game result suggestion mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player and the content of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm are shown. An effect explanation mode for explaining, a frame button-related display mode for showing the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the operation result, and a hit-related information display mode for displaying information about the jackpot game are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. It is configured to be displayed, and the ratio of the display area between the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds is set to be different depending on the content to be displayed in the sub display area Ds.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbol displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the deviation and the holding ball exists, the third symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the display mode indicating that the lottery result is out. After that, the confirmation is displayed, and then the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the state where the reserved ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. In this state, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, or a new ball enters the first ball entry port 64b1, the left second ball entry port 64b2, or the second ball entry port 640. Continue until you do. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demo effect indicating that the game has not been executed is displayed. Despite the fact that the player continuously shoots the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the first ball entry port 64b1, the left second entry port 64b2, and the second entry port 640 The situation where there is no entry is rare, and in many cases where the third symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the player quits the game and the pachinko machine 10 is used. This is due to the fact that no game is being played.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. As a result, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demo effect. On the other hand, when a new ball enters any of the first ball entry port 64b1, the left second ball entry port 64b2, and the second ball entry port 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. Is executed to display the variation of the third symbol corresponding to the new ball entry.

<Regarding the content of the production in the first embodiment>
Next, the contents of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 12. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured with a game specification (so-called simultaneous fluctuation machine) in which special figure 1 and special figure 2 execute a special figure lottery in parallel, and further, a ball is played during a normal state. The incoming ball unit 64 to be made to flow in is arranged so that the ball enters the first ball entry port 64b1 which is the lottery trigger of the special figure 1 and the left second ball entry port 640 which is the lottery trigger of the special figure 2 alternately. It is configured in. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the third symbol display device 81 has a variable display effect of the third symbol for showing the result of the special figure 1 lottery and a third symbol display effect for showing the result of the special figure 2 lottery. If the variable display effect of the symbols is executed at the same time, there is a problem that the variable display of a plurality of third symbols is mixed and the lottery result of each special symbol becomes difficult to understand. Further, since it is necessary to divide the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, which is a limited area, to execute variable display of the third symbol corresponding to each special symbol, the third symbol corresponding to each special symbol needs to be executed. There is a problem that the display area of the player becomes small and a variable display that is difficult for the player to understand is executed.

In addition, if the variable display effect of the third symbol showing the result of the special figure 1 lottery and the variable display effect of the third symbol showing the result of the special figure 2 lottery are executed at the same time, for example, each variable display is executed. It is possible to execute an effect (button effect) that causes the player to operate the frame button 22 (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) in the effect, and the variation of the third symbol showing the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Execution timing of the button effect (special figure 1 button effect) executed as the display effect and execution of the button effect (special figure 2 button effect) executed as the variable display effect of the third symbol showing the result of the special figure 2 lottery. When the timing and the timing overlap, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp which button effect the frame button 22 is operated on, and there is a problem that the effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed.

Further, in the simultaneous variable machine in which the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery are executed independently (in parallel) as in the present embodiment, the special figure 1 button effect and the special figure 2 button effect are executed in duplicate. If you try to limit it so that it is not done, since the fluctuation start timing of each special figure is indefinite, a period (prohibited period) in which the button effect cannot be set (executed) more than necessary is set, and the button effect is set. There was a problem that it became difficult to execute.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, among the plurality of special symbols on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, only the third symbol showing the lottery result of one of the special symbols ((special diagram 1) main variable symbol) is shown. It is configured to display fluctuations (main fluctuation display). As a result, the third symbol showing the lottery result of the main variable symbol can be variablely displayed using the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can easily understand the variable display effect. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the other special symbol ((special diagram 2) sub-variable symbol) that is not variablely displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit, the third symbol is displayed. It is configured to switch the target of the third symbol that is variablely displayed on the display screen of the device 81. As a result, even though the third symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 is being displayed in a variable manner), the game is suddenly executed based on the jackpot game (the jackpot was won in the special figure 2 lottery). It is possible to prevent the big hit game) from being executed.

In addition, if the button effect is executed as the variable display effect corresponding to the jackpot winning of the special figure 2 while the button effect is being executed by the variable display effect corresponding to the special figure 1, each special feature is executed. It is configured to execute a special button effect that fuses the button effect executed for the figure. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an effect that is difficult to understand because the plurality of button effects are duplicated and executed individually. Further, by executing the special button effect, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 can be switched to the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. can.

In the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the sub-variable symbol that is not variable-displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit, the target of the third symbol is switched from the main variable symbol to the sub-variable symbol. However, the fluctuation time is not limited to this, and is a part of the deviation fluctuation set when the lottery result of the sub-variation symbol is deviation (for example, the same fluctuation time as the fluctuation time selected at the time of winning the jackpot). It is preferable to configure the process to switch the target of the third symbol from the main fluctuation symbol to the sub fluctuation symbol even in the case of the deviation variation in which is set. As a result, when the effect of switching the target of the third symbol from the main variable symbol to the sub variable symbol (for example, a special button effect) is executed, the third symbol display device 81 is expected to win the jackpot. You can be interested in the variable display effect performed on the display screen of.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7, each special figure variation in the present embodiment and the content of the effect to be executed will be described. In FIG. 6, the button effect (button effect A) is different from the variable display effect of the special figure 1 (main variable symbol) and the button effect (button effect B) is used as the variable display effect of the special figure 2 (sub-variable symbol). It is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect when it is executed at the timing, and FIG. 7 shows a button effect (button effect A) and a special figure 2 (sub-variation) as the variation display effect of the special figure 1 (main variation symbol). It is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect when the button effect (button effect B) and the button effect (button effect B) are executed at overlapping timings as the variable display effect of the symbol).

Here, first, the specific flow of the button effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a timing chart showing the flow of the button effect. As shown in FIG. 8, during the effect period (button effect period) in which the button effect for causing the player to operate the operation means is executed, the player is enabled to operate the frame button 22 (operation means). The preparation period t1 for notifying that, the execution period t2 in which the operation for the frame button 22 (operating means) is effectively determined (the player can operate the frame button 22), and the frame button 22 during the execution period. It is formed from the result notification period t3, in which the effect based on the operation result is executed. Further, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the execution period, the operation period t4 for notifying that the frame button 22 is operated is set.

During the preparation period t1, a display mode for explaining the effect content displayed during the execution period is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, for example, when the effect shown in FIG. 9A is executed during the execution period, the comment "The effect of waking up the sleeping rabbit will start" is displayed and the operation is performed. The button 812 imitating the first frame button 22a is displayed without displaying the validity period gauge 812a indicating the validity period. As a result, the content of the effect to be executed later is notified to the player, and the player is notified in advance that the effect to be executed later is the button effect for operating the first frame button 22a.

By providing this preparation period t1, the player can be prepared to operate the frame button 22 (operating means), and the frame button 22 (operating means) can be smoothly operated during the execution period t2. be able to.

During the execution period t2, an effect for encouraging the player to operate the frame button 22 (operation means) is executed (see FIG. 9A). Here, with reference to FIG. 9A, the contents of the effect executed during the execution period t2 of the button effect will be described. FIG. 9A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect content executed during the execution period t2 of the button effect.

As shown in FIG. 9A, when the execution period t2 of the button effect (button effect A) is set, the character 811 imitating a rabbit is displayed in the main display area Dm in a display mode in which it is sleeping, and is displayed as a sub-display. In the area Ds, a comment of "wake up" for explaining the effect content (game content) of the button effect this time is displayed. Then, a button 812 imitating the first frame button 22a, which is the operation target of the button effect this time, and an validity period gauge 812a indicating the operation validity period t5 of the first frame button 22a are displayed.

The validity period gauge 812a indicates the entire length of the set operation validity period t5 by the length of the outer frame (rectangle), and the remaining period mode (FIG.) for indicating the remaining period of the operation validity period t5. The aspect shown by the diagonal line in 9 (a)) is variably displayed so that the display area of the remaining period aspect decreases from right to left. As a result, in the valid period gauge 812a, the display area in which the remaining period mode is not displayed (the mode shown by a blank in FIG. 9A) indicates the elapsed period of the operation valid period t5. Can be.

In this way, by displaying the length of the remaining period of the operation valid period t5 relative to the total length of the operation valid period t5, the remaining period of the operation valid period t5 is specifically shown in time. Even if it is not, it can be grasped by the player. Further, even when a different operation valid period t5 is set, it is set only by keeping the length of the outer frame (rectangle) of the valid period gauge 812a constant and changing the speed at which the remaining period mode is variably displayed. The operation valid period t5 can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the present embodiment, the validity period gauge 812a described above is used to notify the player of the operation validity period t5 in the button effect, but the operation is not limited to this, and is, for example, an operation to be set. The length of the valid period t5 and the remaining period of the operation valid period t5 may be notified by a specific numerical value (for example, the number of seconds). Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the display mode of the validity period gauge 812a is linearly formed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the validity period gauge 812a is formed in a circular shape, and the remaining period gauge 812a is the remaining period gauge 812a. May be configured to be variably displayed clockwise, and may be configured to indicate that the operation valid period t5 ends when the remaining period mode goes around the valid period gauge 812a. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it relatively easy to grasp the remaining period with respect to the set operation valid period t5, and it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, the start position where the remaining period mode is variably displayed (for example, the position indicating 12 o'clock of the valid period gauge 812a formed in a circle) and the end position where the remaining period mode is variably displayed (for example, formed in a circle). Since the position (position indicating 12 o'clock) of the valid period gauge 812a can be made the same, the effect pattern for one round of variable display in which the operation valid period t5 is the remaining period mode and the effect pattern for two rounds of variable display By providing the above, it is possible to set an unexpected effect for the player.

Returning to FIG. 8, the explanation will be continued. It is shown that when the player operates the first frame button 22a to be operated this time during the execution period t2 in which the effect illustrated in FIG. 9A is executed, the first frame button 22a is pressed. The operation period t4 at which the effect for the purpose is executed is set. During this operation period t4, the display mode of the button 812 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device is thinner than the display mode after pressing (the display mode shown in FIG. 9A). Display mode).

In this way, by setting the operation period t4 and configuring the display mode to be displayed after pressing, the operating means (first frame button 22a) that is the operation target of the button effect this time is operated by the player. It is possible to reliably notify that (pressed) has been performed. As a notification mode for notifying the player that the operation target to be operated has been operated, a configuration other than the above-mentioned configuration for displaying the display mode after pressing may be used, for example, a voice output device. The operation means (frame button 22) may be configured to output a pressing sound for indicating that the operation means (frame button 22) has been operated (pressed) from 226, or the operation means (frame button 22) may be provided with a light emitting means to emit light. It may be configured so that it can be determined whether or not the operation has been completed depending on the light emitting mode (light emitting color) of the means.

Further, in addition to the above-described configuration, when an operation means (second frame button 22b) different from the operation means (first frame button 22a) that is the operation target of the button effect this time is operated during the execution period, It may be configured to execute an alert notification to indicate that the operated operating means is not an operation target. As a result, in a gaming machine having a plurality of operating means, when a player operates an erroneous operating means, proper operation can be guided in an easy-to-understand manner.

When the execution period t2 of the button effect period ends, the result notification period t3 at which the effect based on the operation result during the execution period is executed is set. Here, with reference to FIGS. 9 (b) and 10, the contents of the effect executed during the result notification period t3 will be described. FIG. 9B shows an operation condition (for example, pressing the first frame button 22a twice during the execution period t2) as an example of the effect content displayed during the button effect result notification period t3. ) Is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode when the above is satisfied, and FIG. 10 shows an operation condition (for example, execution) during the execution period t2 as an example of the effect content displayed during the button effect result notification period t3. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode in the case where the first frame button 22a is pressed twice during the period t2).

As shown in FIG. 9B, when the operation condition is satisfied during the execution period t2, the character 811 sleeping during the execution period t2 gets up, and a comment of "SP reach" suggesting an effect mode to be executed later is made. Is displayed. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "success" indicating that the operation for the first frame button 22a during the execution period t2 was appropriate is displayed.

On the other hand, if the operation condition is not satisfied during the execution period t2, for example, if the player does not operate the first frame button 22a during the execution period t2, the player remains asleep as shown in FIG. The character 811 is displayed, and the comment suggesting the effect mode to be executed later is not displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a "sorry" comment indicating that the operation for the first frame button 22a during the execution period t2 was not appropriate is displayed.

In this way, by changing the display mode during the result notification period t3 based on the operation to the operating means during the button effect execution period t2, whether or not the operation during the button effect this time was appropriate (success). Whether or not it was done) can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the effect mode executed after the button effect period has elapsed (for example, the effect mode displayed during the reach period) can be changed according to the effect result of the button effect. It is configured to let you. Specifically, when the effect result of the button effect is "success", it is easier to set the effect mode with a lower execution frequency than when it is "sorry". As a result, the player can actively participate in the button effect while expecting that the effect of the effect mode having a low execution frequency is executed.

Returning to FIG. 8, the explanation will be continued. When the execution period t2 in which the operation for the frame button 22 (operation means) is effectively determined (the player can operate the frame button 22) is set in the button effect period, it corresponds to the execution period t2. Although the operation valid period t5 is set (displayed by a dotted line in FIG. 8), when the player operates the frame button 22 (operation means) during the execution period t2 and the operation condition is satisfied, the operation valid period is at that point. t5 ends (indicated by a solid line in FIG. 8). Then, in the difference period between the execution period t2 and the operation valid period t5, the operation condition establishment mode (for example, a comment of "operation completion") is displayed as a display mode indicating that the operation condition is satisfied.

Since the period during which the operation condition establishment mode is displayed is variable depending on the timing at which the operation condition is satisfied, for example, the operation condition establishment mode is configured to be variably set according to the length of the display period. Also, if the display period of the operation condition establishment mode is longer than the first period (for example, 3 seconds), a display congratulating the player for the quick operation, such as "operation completed, splendid". Set the mode, and if it is shorter than the first period (for example, 3 seconds), set a display mode indicating that the player did not perform the operation quickly, such as "operation completed, it's barely possible". In addition, information that is advantageous to the player (for example, the result of the special drawing lottery being executed) only when the display period of the operation condition satisfying mode is longer than the first period (for example, 3 seconds). Information suggesting, information suggesting the currently set gaming state, special video that is difficult for the player to experience) may be notified. As a result, the player can enthusiastically operate the operating means so that the operating conditions are satisfied as soon as possible.

Further, according to the timing at which the operation condition is satisfied in the execution period t2 (the timing at which the operation valid period t5 ends), the effect mode to be executed later (for example, the effect of the result notification effect executed during the result notification period t3). It may be configured to change the mode and the effect mode of the reach effect executed during the subsequent reach period).

In the present embodiment, even when the operation condition is satisfied, the result notification period t3 is not set until the predetermined execution period t2 ends (elapses). The operation valid period t5 and the execution period t2 may be terminated at the timing when the operation condition is satisfied, and the result notification period t3 may be set immediately. As a result, the button effect can be executed quickly, and the effect can be enhanced.

As described above, according to the example shown in FIG. 8, when the transition condition is satisfied based on the passage of time, each period (preparation period t1, execution period t2, result notification period) preset as the button effect period is established. Although it is configured to migrate t3), a migration condition other than the passage of time may be set. For example, it is set in advance that the operation condition is satisfied during the execution period as the migration condition. It may be configured to shift to the result notification period t3 before the execution period t2 of the length elapses. As a result, the result notification period t3 can be set in correspondence with the operation of the operation means (frame button 22) performed by the player, so that it is possible to provide the player with a natural effect.

Further, in this case, it is preferable to advance only the start timing of the result notification period t3 and set the end timing to remain at the predetermined timing. As a result, if the operation condition is satisfied early during the execution period t2, the period during which the display mode of t3 is displayed during the result notification period (the period during which the result notification effect is executed) can be lengthened. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of the effect result of the button effect this time in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, since the end timing of the button effect period is not variable, it is not necessary to change the effect mode (effect period) of the effect (reach effect) executed after the button effect period ends, and the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 is increased. It can be reduced.

Not limited to this, when the length of the execution period t2 in the button effect period is variably configured according to the operation content for the operating means, the end timing of the result notification period t3 (end timing of the button effect period). May be configured to be different from the predetermined end timing. In this case, for example, when the length of the execution period t2 is changed to be shorter, the end timing of the result notification period t3 (the end timing of the button effect period) arrives earlier than the predetermined end timing. It is good to configure it to do. With this configuration, the effect period after the end of the button effect period can be set longer, so that it is possible to execute an effect different from the usual one, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7, a flow in which the button effect described with reference to FIG. 8 is executed will be described. In FIG. 6, the button effect (button effect A) set as the variation effect of the special figure 1 variation and the button effect (button effect B) set as the variation effect of the special figure 2 variation are executed at different timings. The flow is shown. In the present embodiment, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the variation effect (special figure 1 variation effect) for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is mainly the third symbol display device. It is configured to be displayed on the display screen of 81, and when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit, or a fluctuation pattern with a high expectation of a big hit (for example, a fluctuation of 60 seconds). (Variation pattern in which the time is set) In a part of the selected case, the variation effect for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 is configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 6, when the special figure 2 variation in which the lottery result is out of order is executed with the button effect A set as the variation effect of the special figure 1, the button effect A (the operation target) is executed. The first frame button 22a) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the button effect B (the operation button to be operated) is displayed as the variation effect of the second variation (hit) of the special figure 2 variation. When the first frame button 22a) is set, the button effect B is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Here, with reference to FIG. 11, the effect content of the button effect B set as the variation effect of the second variation of the special figure 2 variation shown in FIG. 6 will be described. FIG. 11 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed when the button effect B is executed, and FIG. 11 (b) shows the display content displayed at the end of the button effect B. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example. As described above with reference to FIG. 6, the button effect B is a button effect that can be set in response to the variation in the special figure 2.

As shown in FIG. 11A, when the button effect B is executed, the character 811 imitating a rabbit and the character 813 imitating a turtle are displayed in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. A competition effect is displayed, and a button 812 imitating the operation means (first frame button 22a) to be operated by the button effect (button effect B) this time and a valid period gauge 812a are displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Aim for GOAL by repeatedly hitting the button" is displayed to indicate the effect content of the button effect B. In the example shown in FIG. 11A, as the display mode of the button 812, the button effect (button effect B) this time is a continuous striking effect in which the first frame button 22a needs to be operated (pressed) many times. This is displayed in a continuous striking effect mode (indicated by three arrows in FIG. 11A).

In this way, by displaying the display mode (button 812) indicating the operation means to be operated and the operation content during the button effect, the player is visually informed of the playability of the button effect in an easy-to-understand manner. Can be done. Further, although not shown, the character 811 is operated according to the operation mode of the first frame button 22a during the operation valid period of the button effect B (while the remaining period display mode of the valid period gauge 812a is displayed). It is configured to change the display mode and the display mode of the button 812. With this configuration, it is possible to change the effect mode (display mode) of the button effect being executed for each operation executed during the operation valid period, and to provide the player with an operation feeling. Can be done.

Then, when the operation valid period of the button effect B elapses, as shown in FIG. 11B, the result of the competition effect between the character 811 and the character 813 is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 11B, the effect result that the character 811 has passed the goal 814 first is displayed. Then, in the goal 814, a comment of "Gekiatsu" is displayed as a display mode indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the special figure lottery (special figure 2 lottery) that is the target of the button effect B is a big hit, and is executed in the future. An effect in which the character 811 has won a prize with a comment of "SP reach" for suggesting the content of the effect to be performed is displayed. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the character "GOAL" for indicating that the button effect B has ended is displayed.

Here, the relationship between each period set in the button effect period described with reference to FIG. 8 and the effect mode of the button effect B will be described. Of the button effect period, during the preparation period t1, the character The effect that the 811 and the character 813 are on standby at the start position is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the comment "Aim for GOAL" indicating the effect content of the button effect B is displayed in the sub display area Ds (Fig.). Not shown). During this preparation period t1, since the operation valid period t5 is not set, the valid period gauge 812a is not displayed, but the operation target (first button 22a) of the button effect B and the operation content (continuous hitting) are displayed. The button 812 is displayed in the display mode shown.

Then, during the execution period t2, the effect shown in FIG. 11A is displayed, and during the operation period t4 set when the operating means (first frame button 22a) is operated, the first frame button 22a is displayed. An effect of changing the display mode of the character 811 and the display mode of the button 812 is displayed according to the operation mode. Finally, during the result notification period t3, the effect shown in FIG. 11B is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 7, the explanation will be continued. In FIG. 6 described above, the button effect A, which is a variable effect for showing the lottery result of the special figure 1, and the button effect B, which is a variable effect for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2, are executed at different timings. In contrast to the above case, FIG. 7 shows a button effect A, which is a variable effect for showing the lottery result of the special figure 1, and a button effect, which is a variable effect for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2. The flow when B and are executed at the overlap timing is shown.

As shown in FIG. 7, while the button effect A is being executed as the variation effect of the first variation (off) of the special figure 1 variation, the second variation (off) of the special figure 2 variation is executed. When the button effect B is set as the variation effect of the second variation (off) of the special figure 2 variation, the effect mode of the button effect A being executed is the duplicate effect according to the start timing of the button effect B. It is executed by switching to the effect mode of the button effect C. Then, when the overlapping period of the button effect A and the button effect B elapses, the button effect B is executed.

In the present embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed at the same time (in parallel). Therefore, the variable display of the special figure 1 and the variable display of the special figure 2 are executed at the same time (in parallel). Since the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation are set independently, the start timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation and the start timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation are related. Never have. Therefore, the effect period of the variation effect (button effect) of the special figure 1 variation displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the variation of the special figure 2 variation displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The display (button effect) may overlap with the effect period.

In this way, if a plurality of button effects are set so that the execution periods overlap, the player can determine which button effect the operation on the operation means (frame button 22a) executed by the player corresponds to. It becomes difficult to distinguish, and the effect that is difficult for the player to understand will be executed. Further, in order to solve such a problem, if the button effect being executed is forcibly terminated and a new button effect is executed, the operation means is positively used for the button effect being executed. There was a problem that the player who was operating the game was dissatisfied and the motivation to play was reduced.

Further, if it is configured so that another button effect is not executed during the execution of the button effect, for example, the button effect being executed is a button effect with a low jackpot expectation (low effect effect), and the button effect is Even if a button effect with a high jackpot expectation (high effect effect) is set during execution, the button effect with a high jackpot expectation (high effect effect) is not executed, and the effect is reduced. was there.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, when the button effect B is set so as to overlap with the button effect A during the execution of the button effect A, the button that is the duplicate button effect is used. The effect C is configured to be executed, and even if a plurality of button effects are set in duplicate, the button effect is configured to be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Here, with reference to FIG. 12, the effect content of the button effect C, which is a duplicate button effect, will be described. FIG. 12 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed when the button effect C is executed, and FIG. 12 (b) shows the display content displayed at the end of the button effect C. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example. As described above with reference to FIG. 7, the button effect C is a duplicate (fusion) effect executed when the execution condition of the button effect B is satisfied during the execution of the button effect A.

As shown in FIG. 12A, when the button effect C is set, the effect that the character 811 imitating a rabbit executes training is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the character 811 is an obstacle imitating a rock. A production that jumps over the correspondence is executed. In the sub-display area Ds, a comment is also displayed, "Push the button to cross the rock during training" indicating the effect content of this button effect (button effect C). Further, in the main display area Dm, in order to show that the operation target of this time is the second frame button 22b, the button 818 imitating the second frame button 22b and the operation of the button effect (button effect C) of this time are performed. The validity period t5 and the validity period gauge 818a indicating the remaining period of the operation validity period are displayed.

Here, the button 818 imitating the second frame button 22b displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81b is larger than the button 812 imitating the first frame button 22a (see FIG. 11A). It is displayed in a large display mode. In this way, by varying the display mode displayed on the display screen for each operation means to be operated, it is possible to inform the player of what the operation target is this time in an easy-to-understand manner.

Then, when the button effect C is completed, as shown in FIG. 12B, the character 811 is displayed in a display mode indicating that the training is successful, and the button effect B is set after the button effect C. The comment "Training success, race participation decision" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Although not shown, it is configured to change the display mode on the end screen of the button effect C according to the operation content for the second frame button 22b during the operation valid period of the button effect C, for example. Whether or not to display a suggestion mode that suggests the lottery result of the special figure lottery (special figure 2) that is the target of the button effect C is determined according to the operation content in the button effect C. As a result, the player who wants to grasp the result of the special drawing lottery as soon as possible can be enthusiastically participated in the button staging.

As described above, the effect mode of the button effect (button effect A to button effect C) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has been described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 12, but in the present embodiment, the duplicate effect is described. As the effect mode of (button effect C), an intermediate mode between the effect mode of the button effect (button effect A) executed first and the effect mode of the button effect (button effect B) executed later is set. It is configured as follows. Specifically, in the button effect A, an effect mode for raising the character 811 is set (see FIG. 9A), and in the button effect B, an effect mode in which the character 811 performs a rail is set (FIG. 11 (a). )reference). Then, in the button effect C, as an intermediate aspect thereof, an effect mode in which the awakened character 811 trains for the race is set (see FIG. 12A).

In this way, by setting the intermediate mode as the effect mode of the duplicate button effect set when the plurality of button effects overlap, the effect mode of the button effect A does not give a sense of discomfort to the player, and the button effect B It is possible to shift to, and the staging effect can be enhanced. In the flow of the effect shown in FIG. 7, the remaining period of the button effect B after the overlap period of the button effect A and the button effect B is the first period (for example, the effect mode of the button effect B can be executed). Since it shows the case of 5 seconds) or more, the button effect B is configured to be executed again after the button effect C is executed. For example, the overlapping period between the button effect A and the button effect B is shown. When the remaining period of the button effect B after the lapse is less than the first period (for example, 5 seconds) in which the effect mode of the button effect B can be executed, the button effect B is used without executing the button effect B. It is preferable to execute the button effect C during the set button effect period, and to display the mode suggesting the effect to be executed later as the effect result of the button effect C.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the button effect B from being executed only for the remaining period to the extent that it is difficult for the player to identify, and the effect that is difficult for the player to understand is provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation target (second frame button 22b) of the button effect C, which is a duplicate button effect, is the operation target (first frame button) of the button effect A and the button effect B executed as a single button effect. It is configured to be different from 22a). As a result, the special feeling of the button effect C can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the present embodiment, the button effect A is set as the variable effect of the special figure 1, and the button effect B is set as the variable effect of the special figure 2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special figure 1 is not limited to this. The first button effect is set as the variable effect of, the second button effect is set as the variable effect of the special figure 2, and the button effect that is executed first is the effect mode of the first button effect and the second button effect. The button effect A may be set, and the button effect B may be set as the effect mode of the button effect to be executed later. With this configuration, even if the button effect set as the variable effect of the special figure 2 is executed before the button effect set as the variable effect of the special figure 1, a plurality of button effects are executed. Since the effect mode of the button effect can be set in chronological order, it is possible to perform an effect that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player.

In the present embodiment, when the button effect A and the button effect B are set to overlap, the button effect C is set as the duplicate button effect, but in addition to this, the button effect C is set independently. As the effect mode of the button effect, it is preferable to configure the effect mode in which the transition from the button effect A to the button effect C can be set. As a result, when the effect corresponding to the button effect C is executed, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not the current effect is a duplicate button effect. Therefore, the button effect B is executed after the button effect C. It is possible to have the player play the game while expecting that.

Further, a pachinko that sets the button effect A as the variation effect of the special figure 1 fluctuation, sets the button effect B as the variation effect of the special figure 2 variation, and sets the button effect C in the overlapping period of the button effect A and the button effect B. In the machine 10, if the timing of switching the effect mode of the button effect (timing of transition from button effect A to button effect C, timing of transition from button effect C to button effect B) is different from the timing at which the special figure change stops. It is good to set it so that it can be used.

Specifically, the operation valid period of the button effect C and the operation valid period of the button effect B (see FIG. 7) are set so as to straddle the stop timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation that is the target of the button effect A. Good to configure. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to understand that the special figure change that is the target of the button effect is switched during the series of button effects executed in the order of the button effects A, C, and B. It is possible to perform a button effect that does not give a sense of discomfort as if a predetermined predetermined button effect is being executed for one special figure variation.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 13, a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters and the like include a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device (not shown), and a third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to set the display in the above.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter (not shown) used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first random number counter C1 used for setting the initial value. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used.

Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4, and the variation used for selecting the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol. The type counter CS1 and is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 53). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a corresponding to entry into the first ball entry port 64b1 consisting of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and four holding areas (holding). The left second ball entry port 64b2 consisting of the first to fourth areas) and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the ball entry into the second ball entry port 640 are provided. 1 In the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a random number counter C1 per first, a type counter C2 per first, a stop type selection counter C3, and a variable type counter are set in accordance with the timing of entering the first ball opening 64b1. Each value of CS1 is stored.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is satisfied, various values stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are set to the first special symbol. It shifts to the execution area and starts special symbol fluctuation based on various stored values.

Similarly, in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the first random number counter C1 and the first hit type are set in accordance with the timing of entering the left second entry port 64b2 and the second entry opening 640. Each value of the counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the hold first area of the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b are shifted to the second special symbol execution area. , Special symbol variation based on various stored values is started.

As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol at the same time (in parallel), each special symbol is available. The holding ball storage area (first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b) is configured to have an execution area, respectively. As a result, when the start condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol change can be promptly executed.

Further, in the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, as in the case of the special symbol described above, the normal symbol hold corresponding to the entry (passing of the ball) into the through gate 67 composed of the four hold areas (hold 1st to 4th areas). A ball storage area 203c is provided, and in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, each value of the second random number counter C4 and the normal figure variation type counter CS2 is set according to the timing of entering the through gate 67. Each is stored.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the normal symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and various stored values are stored. Normal symbol fluctuation based on the value is started.

In this embodiment, each counter value (counter value related to the special figure 2 lottery) acquired based on the entry into the left second entry port 64b2 and the second entry opening 640 is reserved and stored. , And each counter value acquired based on the passage of the sphere through the through gate 67 is reserved and stored, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol) has a configuration. On the other hand, it may be configured not to provide a function (holding storage function) for storing each acquired counter value.

With this configuration, in order to execute an advantageous lottery in a gaming machine in which a lottery that is advantageous to the player and a lottery that is disadvantageous to the player are switched as a lottery of one special symbol type according to the set game state. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a different gaming state is set and a disadvantageous lottery is executed with one special symbol while a large number of reserved memories of one special symbol are acquired.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 499) and reaches the maximum value (for example, 499 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 499) and then 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 499, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 499. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 53).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball is the first ball entry port 64b1 or the left second ball entry port 64b2, and the first ball entry port 64b2. 2 The ball is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing of entering the ball entry port 640. The value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 15A. FIG. 15A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first random number table 202a. The first random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a big hit is defined in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2). ..

Specifically, in the first random number table 202a, the determination value determined to be a big hit is commonly defined for the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the special symbol Judgment values in a predetermined range are defined corresponding to the states (low probability state, high probability state). As shown in FIG. 15A, when the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol is set, "0,1" among the values of the first random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value. Other values are specified as judgment values other than big hits (that is, out of order).

Further, when the high probability state (probability change state, latent probability state) of the special symbol is set, "0 to 9" among the values of the first random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value. A value other than is specified as a judgment value other than a jackpot (that is, a miss). That is, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of the special symbol is set, it is stipulated that the jackpot is won with a probability of 2/500 (1/250), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set. If it is set, it is stipulated that the jackpot will be won with a probability of 10/500 (1/50). Therefore, the high-probability state is easier to win the jackpot than the low-probability state of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot is configured to be the same in the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol, but the probability is not limited to this. The jackpot probability may be different depending on the type of symbol. For example, the second special symbol may be configured to have a lower jackpot probability than the first special symbol. Further, in the present embodiment, two types of jackpot probabilities of the special symbol are prepared, that is, a high probability state and a low probability state, but one type may be used, or three or more types may be used. In this case, for example, the jackpot probability of the special symbol may be different for each of a maximum of four types of gaming states set by combining the state of the special symbol and the state of the normal symbol. You may simply make it possible to set three or more types of special symbol states such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, and set different jackpot probabilities for each state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery result of the special symbol is configured to be determined as either a big hit or a miss, but the lottery result is not a big hit (it is a miss). In some cases, a small hit may be won in which the privilege (for example, the number of prize balls that can be given during the winning game) that can be given to the player is smaller than that of the big hit. In this case, for example, the value of the first random number counter C1 may be referred to when determining whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit. The value of the random number that becomes the small hit of the special symbol is set by the small hit random number table stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the acquired first hit random number counter C1 is specified in the small hit random number table. If it matches the value of a random number that is a small hit, it is determined to be a small hit with a special symbol.

Further, the first random number counter C1 value that wins the big hit and the first random number counter C1 value that wins the small hit are configured to be different from each other, and one process (presence or absence of hit) for executing a special symbol lottery is performed. In the process of determining whether or not a big hit is determined, the determination of whether or not the big hit is successful and the determination of whether or not the small hit is successful are continuously (simultaneously) executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute a lottery for a big hit or a small hit with a predetermined probability for one acquired counter value (first random number counter C1 value).

In addition, in a gaming machine in which a small hit is provided as a result of a lottery of special symbols, the probability of winning a small hit is specified differently between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. May be. As a result, the privilege given to the player can be different between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. In addition, the player can be enthusiastically played in order to execute more lottery of special symbols that are more advantageous.

Further, as described above, the table referred to when executing the big hit lottery (first random number table 202a) and the table referred to when executing the small hit lottery (small hit random number table) are separately separated. It may be configured to execute a big hit lottery and a small hit lottery using one table (for example, the first random number table 202a). In this case, for example, the random number table 202a per first may be configured to specify the range of the counter value for winning the small hit for each type of special symbol. With this configuration, the number of data tables included in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning determination is executed according to the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 and the type of the special symbol, and the determination value predetermined in advance according to the value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a jackpot winning determination may be executed using different determination values according to the set gaming state, until a predetermined condition is satisfied. Depending on the number of jackpot wins within a specific period, the first random number counter C1 value defined as jackpot wins may be configured to be variable, or executed in a state where a predetermined abnormal condition is satisfied. As a data table for abnormal times referred to in the big hit lottery, a data table in which the determination value corresponding to the big hit is not specified may be provided.

Further, although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol at the same time (in parallel). Moreover, it is controlled so that the jackpot game is not executed at the same time (in parallel) based on both special symbol lottery. Specifically, when each special symbol duplicates and executes the jackpot fluctuation, one jackpot winning in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot first is enabled, and the other jackpot winning is performed. Is configured to be discarded (erased).

The configuration for preventing duplicate jackpot games from being executed based on the lottery result of each special symbol is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. During the period until the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot winning is executed, the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot is not specified so that the jackpot is not won in the lottery of the other special symbol, and the jackpot is dealt with. A special symbol lottery may be executed with reference to a dedicated data table in which only the determination value is specified.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball is the first ball entry port 64b1 or the left second ball entry port 64b2. And, at the timing of entering the second ball entry port 640, the ball is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

The value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In the present embodiment, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is used to refer to the jackpot type selection table 202d to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is won.

Here, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the jackpot type selection table 202d defines a random number value for determining the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by using the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2.

As shown in FIG. 16A, the jackpot type selection table 202d includes the special figure 1 table 202d1 for determining the jackpot type in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2). ) At least includes the special figure 2 table 202d2 that determines the jackpot type in the lottery.

First, with reference to FIG. 16B, it is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 1 table 202d1. The special figure 1 table 202d1 is a table referred to in the lottery of the first special symbol. As shown in FIG. 16B, in the special figure 1 table 202d1, a plurality of jackpot types are defined in association with the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2.

Specifically, "big hit A" is defined in the range where the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 19". In the range of "20 to 79", "big hit B" is defined, and in the range of "80 to 99", "big hit C" is defined.

Here, the opening operation during the jackpot game corresponding to each jackpot type will be described. In the present embodiment, the opening operation content (round game content) executed according to the jackpot type, that is, the operation content for a plurality of movable members (such as the opening / closing door 65b of the variable winning device 65) executed during the jackpot game (the opening / closing door 65b of the variable winning device 65). The timing and the number of times) are stored in advance in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 as an open operation scenario in which the time series is specified.

Then, the open operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won is read out and stored in the running scenario storage area (not shown) in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. When the open operation scenario is stored in the executing scenario storage area (not shown), the scenario content is updated every time the main process (see FIG. 53) of the main controller 110 is executed (every 4 milliseconds). In the jackpot control process (see S2404 in FIG. 54) for executing the control during the jackpot game, the current scenario content is discriminated and the process based on the discriminant result is executed.

In this way, by using the open operation scenario in which the operation contents of the movable member during the jackpot game in which the movable member is moved are defined in chronological order, the operation control for the movable member can be centrally managed. In this embodiment, a configuration is used in which one movable member (variable winning device 65) is opened as a jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of movable members are used during one jackpot game. (Variable winning device 65, second variable winning device) may be configured to execute an opening operation. In this case, as described above, by setting the open operation scenario and centrally managing the operation control for each movable member, for example, as compared with the case where the operation control is executed separately for each movable member, each movable member. It is possible to appropriately set the operation timing of the above, and it is possible to smoothly execute the operation process for the other movable member when a defect occurs in one movable member.

"Big hit A" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is 16 rounds and the variable winning device (first attacker) 65 is opened to execute the big hit game. This round game is a game in which the variable winning device (first attacker) 65 is continuously opened until the ball wins 10 balls or the opening period elapses for 30 seconds.

When "big hit A" is set as the big hit type, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (the time reduction counter 203h is set to 70) and the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the big hit game ends (the high probability state of the special symbol is set). Probability variation counter 203g is set to 70). That is, after the jackpot game based on "big hit A" is executed, the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is executed 70 times, or the special symbol is changed 70 times, or the special symbol is executed. It is set until the jackpot is won by the time the fluctuation is executed 70 times.

In the "big hit B", the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is 4 rounds as the big hit game, and the big hit game in which the variable winning device (first attacker) 65 is opened is executed. When the jackpot game based on "big hit B" is executed, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (the time reduction counter 203h is set to 70) and the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends (probability change). Counter 203g is set to 70). That is, after the jackpot game based on "big hit B" is executed, the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is executed 70 times, or the special symbol is changed 70 times, or the special symbol is executed. It is set until the jackpot is won by the time the fluctuation is executed 70 times. The game state of "Big hit B" is the same as that of "Big hit A" after the big hit game is completed, but since the number of rounds (the number of round games) is small, the player is better than "Big hit A". It will be a disadvantageous jackpot game.

In "Big hit C", the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is 4 rounds as the big hit game, and the big hit game of the round game 1 in which the first attacker (left variable winning device) 65 is opened is executed. It is a jackpot type. When the jackpot game based on "big hit C" is executed, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (the time reduction counter 203h is set to 70) and the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends (probability change). Counter 203g is set to 0). That is, after the jackpot game based on "big hit C" is executed, the time saving state (low high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is executed 70 times, or the special symbol change is executed 70 times, or special. It is set until the jackpot is won by the time the symbol variation is executed 70 times. Therefore, when compared with "Big hit A" or "Big hit B", it is a big hit game that is disadvantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot is won, a jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning device (first attacker) 65 is opened for the number of rounds according to the jackpot type regardless of which jackpot type is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of variable winning devices may be provided, and the variable winning devices determined for each winning jackpot type may be configured to open for the number of rounds. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with various playability.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game state set after the end of the big hit game is set according to the type of the special symbol won by the big hit. Therefore, the big hit is given to the player. Not only can you expect to win the game, but you can also be interested in the jackpot type that is set when you win the jackpot.

In the present embodiment, the number of types of jackpots is three, but the number of jackpots is not limited to two, and two or less may be used, or four or more types may be provided. Further, even if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is the same according to the gaming state at the time of winning, a different jackpot type may be selected. By configuring in this way, for example, when the game state at the time of winning is a big hit in the probable change state, by setting a big hit type in which a larger number of rounds is executed, the hit in the probable change state can be played more. You can make people expect. Therefore, it is possible to make the hit in the high-probability game state more advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the taste of the game in the high-probability state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly think that he / she wants to shift to the high probability state, and to make the player play the game for a longer time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the type of the jackpot type selected in the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type are made the same, and the first is to correspond to each jackpot type. Although it is configured so that only the range of the hit type counter C2 is different, the jackpot type selected between the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be different without limitation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first type counter C2 by aiming at a specific counter value from being executed in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Next, the contents specified in the special figure 2 table 202d2 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (c). FIG. 16 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special drawing 2 table 202d2. The special figure 2 table 202d2 is a table referred to in the lottery of the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 16 (c), in the special figure 2 table 202d2, a plurality of jackpot types are defined in association with the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2.

The special figure 2 table 202d2 differs from the special figure 1 table 202d1 in that it is referred to in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special figure 2). Therefore, "big hit A" is defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49", and "big hit B" is defined in the range of "50 to 79". The difference is that the range of "80 to 99" is defined as "big hit C".

That is, in the present embodiment, it is easier to select the "big hit A" that is most advantageous to the player when the big hit is won in the special figure 2 than when the big hit is won in the special figure 1. ing. Thereby, in the pachinko machine 10 which can execute the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery in parallel and can execute both special figure lottery evenly under the normal state, the advantage of each special figure lottery. The degree can be different. Therefore, when the display mode indicating that the jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed, it is possible to make an interest in whether the special figure type for which the jackpot is won is special figure 1 or special figure 2.

Returning to FIG. 13, the explanation will be continued. The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 53) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 17) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. Has been done.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 17, the variation pattern selection table 202e is used in the normal table 202e1 used in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, and in the state where the probabilistic change state or the time saving state is set. A probabilistic / latent probabilistic table 202e2 is specified. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, since the data table used for selecting the fluctuation pattern according to the gaming state is different, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected according to the gaming state is different. be able to.

Next, the detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the normal table 202e1 in a schematic diagram. The normal table 202e1 is a data table that is referred to when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and is a second special symbol with respect to the variable time set for the lottery of the first special symbol. It is stipulated that the fluctuation time set for the lottery will be longer.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "big hit (hit)", and the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 50". The normal jackpot fluctuation pattern A with a variation time of 30 seconds is associated with the range of "51 to 100", and the super reach jackpot variation pattern A with a variation time of 60 seconds is associated with the range of "51 to 100". A super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern B with a variation time of 60 seconds is associated with a range of "~ 150", and a super reach jackpot variation pattern C with a variation time of 60 seconds is associated with a range of "151 to 198". Has been done.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the present embodiment, the lottery result is "big hit (hit)", and there are three types of fluctuation patterns with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds (super reach jackpot fluctuation patterns A, B, C). ) It is provided. This is because when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command indicating each type, the effect mode of the variation effect is set differently according to the variation pattern type indicated by the received command. As described above, in the present embodiment, in the special drawing lottery having the same lottery result and the same fluctuation time, a plurality of types of fluctuation pattern types can be set on the main control device 110 side, and are based on the set fluctuation pattern types. The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to set the effect mode of the variation effect. As a result, since it is possible to set the effect mode of the variable effect by combining a plurality of parameters, it is possible to set a wider variety of effect modes, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

If the lottery result is "out of order" and the number of holdings is in the range of 0 to 2, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 70" and the variation time is out of range for a long time of 20 seconds. The pattern is defined in association with the normal reach deviation pattern of 30 seconds in the range of "71 to 150", and the super reach deviation of 60 seconds in the range of "151 to 198". Fluctuation patterns are specified in association with each other.

On the other hand, when the lottery result is "off" and the number of holdings is 3, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the short-time deviation variation pattern of 10 seconds in the range of "0 to 70". It is defined, and the range of "71 to 130" is associated with a long-time deviation variation pattern with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds, and the range of "131 to 170" is associated with a normal reach deviation variation pattern of 30 seconds. In the range of "171 to 198", a super reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with the above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the same fluctuation type counter CS1 value is acquired when the lottery result is “out of”, a different fluctuation pattern is selected. Specifically, it is stipulated that when the number of holdings is small, it is easier to select a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time than when the number of holdings is large, and when the number of holdings is large, compared to the case where the number of holdings is short. It is stipulated that the one with a short fluctuation time is easy to select. By configuring in this way, when the number of reserved balls is small, the number of reserved balls is quickly consumed, the period during which the lottery is not executed increases, and the player is prevented from getting tired of the game at an early stage. Can be done. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is large, it becomes difficult for the number of reserved balls to reach the upper limit, and the player has more chances to shoot balls continuously to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. Can be done.

In this embodiment, the same fluctuation pattern table is used regardless of the winning jackpot type, but the jackpot type is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is advantageous to the player (for example, jackpot A). A different variation pattern table may be used depending on whether the jackpot type is a jackpot type or the jackpot type indicates a jackpot (big hit B) other than that. In this case, for example, the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type showing other jackpots is won is shorter than the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type showing the advantageous jackpot (big hit A) is won. It is preferable to configure it so that the time fluctuation pattern can be easily selected. As a result, the longer the fluctuation time set in the execution fluctuation pattern, the more advantageous the game result can be expected to the player, so that the player is interested in the fluctuation time of the special symbol. be able to.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the normal jackpot is won is easier to select the fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the probability variation jackpot is won. This can be configured to provide the player with surprising gaming results when the jackpot is won with a short variation time, even if a short variation time is selected. , You can have expectations until the end.

Next, the contents of the probability variation / time saving table 202e2 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the probability variation table 202e2. As shown in FIG. 19, in the probability variation / time saving table 202e2, the symbol type, the lottery result, the range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "hit (big hit)", the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". In other words, the normal jackpot fluctuation pattern A with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in the entire range. In the case of "off", a short deviation fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in the range where the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 79", and the fluctuation time is specified in the range of "80 to 198". A 180-second long deviation variation pattern is defined in association with each other.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "hit (big hit)", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149" and the variation time is 5 seconds. A short jackpot fluctuation pattern is defined, and a super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern B having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in association with the range of "150 to 198". In the case of "off", a short deviation fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is defined in the range where the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 179", and the fluctuation time is specified in the range of "180 to 198". A 30-second super-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern is defined in association with each other.

As described above, during the probabilistic change state or the time saving state (during the right-handed game), it is easier to set a shorter fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol than during the normal state (during the left-handed game). It is configured. Further, during the probabilistic change state or the time saving state, since the normal symbol is in the high probability state, the electric accessory 640a is likely to be opened, and the gaming state is such that it is easy to obtain a new special figure 2 hold. Therefore, during the time saving state, it is easy to store the special figure 2 hold, and it is easy to set a short fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation, and the special figure 2 fluctuation can be efficiently executed.

Further, the fluctuation time that can be set as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is configured to overlap with the fluctuation time that can be set as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol in the normal state, and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set. By grasping the above, it may not be possible to easily determine whether the current gaming state is a normal state or a probable change state. Not limited to this, a variable time may be set so that the player can determine which gaming state is set.

Returning to FIG. 13, the explanation will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 232, the maximum value (that is, 232) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67. At that time, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number that is a hit of the normal symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is the second hit random number table 202c. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by, it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol (second symbol). Further, the second random number table 202c is divided into two types, one for the low probability time of the normal symbol and the other for the high probability time where the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than that of the low probability time, and they are included in each. The number of random numbers that are big hits is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be hit different, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability time of the normal symbol and the high probability time of the normal symbol.

The contents specified in the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (b). FIG. 15B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the second random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 15B, when the normal symbol is in a low probability state, the acquired second random number counter C4 is defined as a normal symbol in the range of "0 to 10", and the normal symbol has a high probability. In the case of the state, the acquired second random number counter C4 is defined in the range of "0 to 231".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 232), and is updated once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 32). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

The normal figure variation type counter CS2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order in the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the normal map variation type counter CS2 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Then, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined by the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2. Specifically, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined by referring to the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202f provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 by using the acquired value of the normal map variation type counter CS2. It is configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the contents specified in the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202f will be described. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202f. As shown in FIG. 20, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set when the value of the acquired normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 198". Will be done. Then, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set and the value of the acquired normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 198", it is specified that the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is set. is doing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is configured and set to be variable based on the game state of the normal symbol and the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2. It is configured so that the ease of entering the ball into the second entry port 640 differs depending on the fluctuation time. As a result, in each game state, it is possible to limit the lottery action of the second special symbol that makes it easy to obtain a lottery result that is advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege. Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 4, the explanation will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 4, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 53) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 52) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 51) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, and a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d. 2nd special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, time saving counter 203h, special figure 1 big hit flag 203i, special figure 2 big hit flag 203j, game state storage area 203k, special figure 2 variation It has a stop flag 203o, a special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r, a special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s, and other memory areas 203z.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has various counter values acquired based on the fact that a ball has entered the first entry port 64b1 (starting prize) up to the upper limit number (4 in the present embodiment). It is a storage area for storing. Further, in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, up to the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment), the game ball enters the left second entry slot 64b2 or the second entry opening 640 (the ball enters the second entry opening 640). It is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired based on the starting prize).

The first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and when the first special symbol stops the variable display, the first special symbol is stopped. When various counter values are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted and stored in the storage area. The second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are stored. For details, refer to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). (Not shown).

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) are started. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) with the detection of winning is stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the first entry port 64b1 (starting prize) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), the counter buffers C1 to C2 and CS1 each. Is acquired and stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has entered the left second entry port 64b2 or the second entry opening 640 (starting prize), each of them is detected from the counter buffer as in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. The values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 are acquired and stored in the corresponding areas (not shown) in the same manner.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the special symbol change (lottery), the MPU 201 executes a process such as a big hit lottery and a display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. One of the data (counters C1 to C2, CS1 values) stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b described above and corresponding to each start winning prize is started. The data corresponding to the winning is shifted to this special symbol reserved ball execution area. The shift in the present embodiment means that the data stored in one area is moved to another area.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is each of the second random number counter C4 and the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) when the ball passes through the through gate 67 (starting prize) is detected. A storage area where values are stored. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (starting prize) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained from the counter buffer. , The value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has four holding areas so that the data (values of the counters C4 and CS2) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (held) up to four times. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the data of the holding balls in the order of passing through the through gate 67 (starting prize) are stored in order from the holding area in which the data is vacant, in the order of the earliest digestion. ..

In addition, when it is detected that the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is the execution start timing of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol based on the start prize, each counter value is stored and the normal symbol winning lottery is performed. It is a memory for storing data (values of counters C4 and CS2) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation display effect of the normal symbol, the above-mentioned normal symbol holding ball is executed in order to execute processing such as a winning lottery and a display setting of the second symbol display device. Of the data corresponding to each start winning prize stored in the storage area 203c (value of the random number counter C4 per second, value of the normal figure variation type counter CS2), the data corresponding to one start winning prize is the normal symbol. Shift to the reserved ball execution area (not shown). The shift in the present embodiment means that the data stored in one area is moved to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are the first input detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (performed by the third symbol display device 81) based on the ball entering the ball opening 64b1, the left second entry port 64b2, or the second entry port 640. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display effect) up to 4 times each. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S2301 in FIG. 52). Then, each time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by 1 each time the variation display effect is executed.

Further, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d (that is, the number of reserved balls) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball based on the ball entering the first entry port 64b1 (starting prize). When the counter value is stored in the area 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1. Is.

Further, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the fact that a ball has entered the left second entry port 64b2 and the second entry opening 640 (starting prize). When the counter value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1. Is.

In the MPU 201, each value of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer is set in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), respectively. When stored, the data stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is stored in the first special symbol change start processing (figure). Refer to (see S207 of 35) or the second special symbol change start process (S209 of FIG. 41), perform a jackpot lottery based on the reference data, and determine the change pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result. In the first symbol display device 37, the fluctuation display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f allows the ball to pass through the through gate 67 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "starting prize"). ), This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the fact that the ball has passed through the through gate 67. Zero is set as the initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S2301 in FIG. 52). Then, each time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S1704 in FIG. 46). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed (see S2005 in FIG. 49).

The probability variation counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the probability variation state. A value corresponding to the type of jackpot won after the jackpot ends is set in the probability variation counter 203g. The value of the probability variation counter 203g is the game state update process (S308 (S910) of FIG. 40) of the first special symbol variation start process (S207 of FIG. 35) or the second special symbol variation start process (S209 of FIG. 41). )) Is subtracted. If the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, it is determined that the special symbol is in a high probability state (probability variation state), and the hit / fail determination of the special symbol is executed with reference to the table for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, it is determined that the special symbol is in the normal state (low probability state), and the hit / fail determination of the special symbol is executed with reference to the table for low probability.

The time saving counter 203f is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the high probability state (time saving state, probability variation state) of the normal symbol. At this time reduction counter 203f, a value corresponding to the winning jackpot type is set after the jackpot ends. Then, the time reduction counter 203f is subtracted by 1 in the game state update process executed immediately after setting the start of the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (see S308 in FIG. 40). When the lottery of the normal symbol is performed, if the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the high probability state, and the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is executed by referring to the table for the high probability time. To. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0, it is determined that the normal symbol is in a low probability state, and the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol is executed with reference to the table for the low probability time.

The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the entry into the first entry port 64b1 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. This is a flag to be set (see S406 in FIG. 36). The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is set to off when the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is set (S811 in FIG. 39).

When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol ends while the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is on, the process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol with the off symbol is executed (see S805 of FIG. 39). .. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that the first special symbol and the second special symbol execute the other jackpot game during one jackpot game.

The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203j is determined to match the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on entering the left second entry slot 64b2 or the second entry slot 640 to the jackpot determination value. If this is the case, the flag is set to ON (see S1006 in FIG. 42). The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203j is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S1510 in FIG. 45).

When the fluctuation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends while the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203j is on, the process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol with the symbol is executed (see S1504 in FIG. 45). .. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that the first special symbol and the second special symbol execute the other jackpot game during one jackpot game.

The game state storage area 203k is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set game state, and is a game state set after the jackpot game ends (setting status of the probability variation counter 203g and the time reduction counter 203h). The game state corresponding to is stored. Specifically, when the value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 0 and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0, the normal state is stored, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 or more. When the value is set to 0, the value of the probability change counter 203g is set to 0, and when the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 1 or more, the time reduction state is stored.

Further, in the state where the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot game state indicating that the jackpot game is being executed and the type information indicating the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game are also stored. It is configured in.

Then, a state command is set based on the information stored (stored) in the game state storage area 203k, and the state command is output to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 receives the output state command and temporarily stores it in the slave state setting area 223k.

The information stored in the game state storage area 203k is configured to be able to retain the information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In the start-up process (see FIG. 52), a state command corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203k is set. As a result, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to a power failure or the like, the current gaming state can be discriminated by the voice lamp control device 113 side.

In this embodiment, a flag for indicating that the special figure 1 is undergoing a jackpot fluctuation (special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i) and a flag for indicating that the special figure 2 is undergoing a jackpot fluctuation (special figure). 2 jackpot flag 203j) is configured separately, but it is not limited to this, and it is possible to identify which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol the jackpot fluctuation corresponding to is executed. It may be composed of one flag (for example, a jackpot flag). Specifically, the flag is composed of 2 bits, and "10" indicates that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is undergoing jackpot fluctuation, and "01" indicates that the second special symbol (special figure 2). Indicates that the jackpot is changing, and "00" indicates that none of the special symbols are undergoing the jackpot fluctuation. It may be configured to set a 2-bit value.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel), and both special symbols are big hits. If you win, the jackpot game based on the lottery result of the special symbol on the side where the special symbol change is stopped first (special symbol confirmation display) is executed, and the special symbol change is stopped first (special symbol confirmation display). ), Depending on the jackpot type, the other special symbol change is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is out of order.

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 that can execute lottery of a plurality of special symbol types at the same time (in parallel) wins a big hit in the lottery of each special symbol, which is excessive for the player at the same time. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a privilege (big hit game) is granted.

Furthermore, even if one of the special symbol lottery wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, by the time the winning result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the other special symbol lottery will be a jackpot that is advantageous to the player. It will be possible to win. In this case, it is advisable to use the variable time until the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed to execute a variable effect suggesting that the player has won a disadvantage. As a result, the player can be made to think that he / she has won the prize at a disadvantage, so that the other special symbol lottery can be enthusiastically executed during the fluctuation time.

In addition, it may be configured so that a short fluctuation time is more likely to be set when the jackpot which is advantageous to the player is won than when the jackpot which is disadvantageous to the player is won. As a result, while the one special symbol that has been won at the disadvantage is changed, the other special symbol lottery can be won at the advantage, and the winning result can be stopped and displayed (confirmed display) before the winning result at the disadvantage. can.

In this embodiment, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i and the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i are used as jackpot flags that can separately store the lottery result (winning) of the first special symbol and the lottery result (winning) of the second special symbol. The 2 jackpot flag 203j is used, but the jackpot flag is not limited to this, and a common jackpot flag is set for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol, and the lottery of the 1st special symbol and the lottery of the 2nd special symbol are used. On the other hand, if the jackpot is won, the jackpot flag may be set to on, and in the other special symbol lottery executed with the jackpot flag set to on, the jackpot may not be won.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is a flag for indicating that the jackpot game of the first special symbol is executed during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, and is a flag during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. It is set to be turned on when the jackpot game of the first special symbol is executed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S206 in FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 (FIG. 39 (S801: Yes), when it is determined that the special figure 2 is changing (S802: Yes in FIG. 39), it is set to on (see S803). Further, it is set to off in the process of S902 of the second special symbol change start process (see S209 of FIG. 41).

By using this special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol. It is possible to prevent the lottery from being executed again.

In the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the process related to the first special symbol is executed in one special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34), and then the process related to the second special symbol is executed. By configuring to execute, the variation processing for each special symbol is configured to be executed without delay.

Then, in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34), when any of the special symbols is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot, the jackpot control process is performed in the main process (see FIG. 53) of the main control device 110. (S2404 in FIG. 54) is configured to be executed. In addition, the special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 34) skips the special symbol variation processing (S203 to S212 in FIG. 34) when the current jackpot state (S201: Yes in FIG. 34). It is configured in.

That is, in the present embodiment, while the jackpot game is being executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, the new special symbol change (lottery) is not executed, but the special symbol change process (figure). When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode for indicating that the lottery result is a big hit by the variation processing for the first special symbol executed earlier in (see S104 of 34), the special symbol variation is performed. It is configured so that a new variation process for the second special symbol is performed in the process (see S104 in FIG. 34).

In the present embodiment configured as described above, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode for indicating that the lottery result is a big hit by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. It is possible to prevent a new variation process for the second special symbol from being executed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34).

The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern selected in the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 37). A value indicating the fluctuation time is set (see S509 in FIG. 37). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the first special symbol variation executing process (see S204 in FIG. 38) is executed, and whether the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34). Is determined (see S205 in FIG. 34). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is 0 (S205: Yes in FIG. 34), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process for stopping the first special symbol being changed (S205: Yes in FIG. 34). (See S206 in FIG. 39) is executed.

Further, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is cleared to 0 when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a big hit (see S1505 in FIG. 45). As a result, when the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the deviation when the jackpot stop display of the second special symbol is displayed, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r remains and is forcibly displayed. It is possible to suppress that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is restarted again based on the value left in the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s after the stop display is displayed.

The special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern selected in the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (see S906 in FIG. 43). A value indicating the fluctuation time is set (see S1209 in FIG. 43). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the second special symbol variation executing process (see S210 in FIG. 44) is executed, and whether the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34). Is determined (see S211 in FIG. 34). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is 0 (S211: Yes in FIG. 34), the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing for stopping the second special symbol being changed (S211: Yes in FIG. 34). (See S212 in FIG. 45) is executed.

Further, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is cleared to 0 when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a big hit (see S806 in FIG. 39). As a result, when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the deviation when the jackpot stop display of the first special symbol is displayed, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s remains and is forcibly displayed. It is possible to prevent the second special symbol from being restarted again based on the value left in the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s after the stop display is displayed.

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like are set (stored).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate 65b of a specific winning opening 65a as an axis. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening / closing drive is connected to the front side, and a solenoid 209 composed of other solenoids 209z or the like is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 51) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b), and the frame button 22 (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) is set by the player. When operated, the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect content at the time of super reach. , Instruct the display control device 114. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls to display the error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

As shown in FIG. 22A, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores at least the variation pattern selection table 222a and the button effect selection table 222b.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (out of alignment, out of reach, various reach, etc.) are set in counter values for selection of variation patterns (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of fluctuation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the fluctuation time and the type of fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

Here, a part of the contents specified in the variation pattern selection table 222a will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a. As shown in FIG. 23, in the variation pattern selection table 222a, the information (variation time, pass / fail determination result) included in the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is associated with the acquired value of the staging counter 223u. Therefore, the effect content (effect pattern) of the variation effect of the third symbol executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

Specifically, when the information included in the fluctuation pattern command received by the voice lamp control device 113 is normal reach (30 seconds) and the hit / fail determination result is correct, the value of the first effect counter 223u is set. "Staging A" is defined in the range of "0 to 49", "Staging B" is defined in the range of "50 to 89", and "Staging C" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". If it is out of the range, the value of the first staging counter 223u is in the range of "0 to 79" for "staging A", in the range of "80 to 94" for "staging B", and in the range of "95 to 99". "Direction C" is specified in.

Further, when the information included in the fluctuation pattern command received by the voice lamp control device 113 is super reach (60 seconds) and the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the value of the first effect counter 223u is "0". "Super staging A" is defined in the range of "29", "super staging B" is defined in the range of "30 to 79", and "super staging C" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". If is out of the range, the value of the first staging counter 223u is "super staging A" in the range of "0 to 49", "super staging B" in the range of "50 to 89", and "90 to 99". "Super production C" is defined in the range of ".

Finally, when the information included in the fluctuation pattern command received by the voice lamp control device 113 is out of alignment for a long time, the value of the first effect counter 223u is in the range of "0 to 89" and "out of effect A". However, "off-the-shelf effect B" is defined in the range of "90 to 99".

As described above, when the information indicating the fluctuation time included in the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is the same, the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a has the same type regardless of the result of the hit / fail determination. It is stipulated that the effect pattern of is selected, and the selection ratio of each effect pattern is configured to be different based on the result of the hit / fail determination. As a result, the degree of expectation of winning a big hit can be different depending on the type of effect pattern selected. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to which effect pattern the effect content of the variable effect of the third symbol to be executed is based on, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

Here, for each effect pattern (“effect A”, “effect B”, “effect C” ...) defined in the variable pattern selection table 222a, the type of the advance notice effect to be executed and the frame button 22 The presence or absence of an operation effect (button effect) for operating the player and the effect mode of the reach effect are set in association with each other. In the present embodiment, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a are described with reference to FIG. 23, but only a part necessary for explaining the contents of the button effect selection table 222b described later is described. The variation pattern selection table 222a is defined so that a more subdivided effect pattern can be selected corresponding to the received variation pattern command, and the description thereof is omitted.

The button effect selection table 222b is a table that defines the content of the button effect according to the winning / failing determination result of this lottery and the variation pattern type. Here, with reference to FIG. 24, the defined contents of the button effect selection table 222b will be described. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the button effect selection table 222b.

As shown in FIG. 24, the button effect selection table 222b stores button effect information indicating various button effects corresponding to the effect pattern (effect type) selected with reference to the variable pattern selection table 222a. .. The button effect information includes button validity period start timing information indicating the period from the start of the special figure fluctuation to the setting of the operation valid period (button valid period) corresponding to the button effect, and the button effect information is set during the button effect. The valid period information indicating the length of the operation valid period (button valid period), the priority information for indicating the execution priority of the button effect, and the button effect information indicating the effect content (mode) of the button effect are It is stipulated for each production type.

Specifically, when the effect type (effect pattern) selected with reference to the variable pattern selection table 222a is "effect A", "super effect A", or "off effect A", the button effect information is displayed. It is stipulated that the button effect is not executed. When the effect type is "effect B", "10 seconds" is specified as the button effect period start timing, "5 seconds" is specified as the effect period, "2" is specified as the priority, and "A" is specified as the effect mode of the button effect. Has been done.

Here, the priority of the button effect will be briefly described. As described above, the present embodiment is configured so that the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed at the same time (in parallel). It is configured so that the fluctuation effect can be set according to each special figure fluctuation. In the gaming machine configured in this way, a plurality of button effects are set by a plurality of different triggers (a trigger for setting the fluctuation effect of the variation in Special Figure 1 and a trigger for setting the variation effect of the variation in the special figure 2). In some cases, a plurality of button effects are executed in duplicate, and when the operation means (frame button 22) is operated, it becomes difficult to understand which button effect is supported, and the motivation for playing is reduced. There was a problem.

Further, in order to set a plurality of button effects without duplicating the execution timing in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, it is necessary to centrally manage a plurality of button effects set at different triggers, and the voice lamp control device. There is a problem that the processing load of 113 increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, priority is given to the button effect to be executed, and when a plurality of button effects are set in duplicate, the button effect having a high priority is executed. is doing. As a result, even if the button effects are set so that the execution timings overlap, only the button effects having a high priority are actually executed, so that it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand effect to the player. Further, since it is not necessary to centrally manage the settings of the plurality of button effects set at different triggers, it is possible to solve the problem that the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 increases.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same priority is given in advance to the button effects that can be executed at the same time without any problem, and a plurality of button effects having the same priority can be stored. It is composed. As a result, since the execution timing can be duplicated for the button effects that can be duplicated, it is possible to provide the player with a novel effect that is unexpected, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Here, the contents of the button effect to which the same priority is given will be described. In the present embodiment, as the effect mode of the button effect, the display range of the button effect on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the operation target (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b), and the operation content (1). Specify button effects that can be executed at the same time (duplicate) according to (double press, repeated hits, long press), and set the same priority for button effects that can be executed at the same time (duplicate). It is configured as follows.

Specifically, among the display areas of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the main display area Dm (see FIG. 5) is set as the display area, and the button effect in which the first frame button 22a is the operation target and the sub display. The button effect that uses the area Ds (see FIG. 5) as the display area is an operation means that is the operation target of each button effect while the player grasps the content of each button effect even if the button effect is executed in duplicate. Since the frame button 22) can be operated, the button effect can be duplicated.

Further, for each button effect having different display areas and the same operation target, if the operation contents are the same, the same operation (for example, repeated hitting operation) is performed on the operation target to display them in different display areas. Since it is possible to advance each button effect that has been performed, the button effect can be duplicated. On the other hand, each button effect having a different display area, the same operation target, and different operation contents cannot be duplicated (difficult) because the player cannot operate the operation means for each button effect. It will be a button production. Further, even when the display areas overlap, it is difficult for the player to grasp the effect mode (display content) of each button effect, so that the button effect cannot be duplicated (difficult).

It is not necessary to set the same priority for all the combinations of the above-mentioned overlapping button effects, and for example, the additional privilege provided by executing the button effects (for example, the pachinko machine 10). The privilege of variably operating the decorative variable member provided and variable (movable) from the predetermined first position to the second position, and the privilege indicated by the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81). Depending on the situation, even if the button effects can be duplicated, the priority may be given.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of button effects set based on one trigger (for example, an opportunity to set the variable effect of the special figure 1) are configured so as to be duplicated, and the plurality of button effects can be duplicated. Of these, the first button effect executed first is configured to have a higher priority than the second button effect executed later. Then, the above-mentioned first button effect is configured so that the player can positively (early) operate the operation means to end the operation before the start timing of the above-mentioned second button effect. ing.

With this configuration, if the first button effect with high priority is being executed at the start timing of the second button effect, the second button effect is not executed and the first button effect with high priority is executed. If it is not inside, the second button effect can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage because the presence or absence of execution of the other button effects can be changed depending on the operation content of one button effect.

In addition, when such a configuration is used, the second button effect having a lower priority is more valuable to the player than the first button effect having a higher priority (for example, it is usually seen). It is preferable to configure it so that a privilege video that cannot be played can be played, a privilege of notifying the current game state, and a privilege of notifying the result of a special figure change during execution) can be given. In this way, by setting a privilege button effect that can give a valuable privilege to the player as a button effect having a low priority to be executed, the execution period overlaps with other button effects. The frame button 22 can be enthusiastically operated while another button effect is being executed, with the aim of suppressing the privilege button effect from being executed.

In addition, it is preferable to provide a suggestion (notification) means capable of suggesting (notifying) the player that the privilege button effect has been set internally by the time the execution timing of the privilege button effect arrives. With this configuration, the suggestion (notification) means suggests (notifies) that the privilege button effect has been set, and as long as the execution timing does not overlap with other button effects, the privilege is given at a predetermined timing. It is possible to easily grasp that the button effect is executed. In addition, the frame button 22 can be positively operated so that the execution period of other button effects executed after being notified is as short as possible.

Returning to FIG. 24, the specific contents specified in the button effect selection table 222b will be described continuously. When the effect type (effect pattern) is "effect C", a plurality of button effects are defined, and the first button effect to be executed first has "10 seconds" as the button validity period start timing. The validity period is "5 seconds", the priority is "1", the effect mode of the button effect is "A", and the second button effect to be executed later is "14 seconds" as the button validity period start timing. The validity period is defined as "3 seconds", the priority is defined as "2", and the button effect is defined as "C".

Here, the button effect specified corresponding to the effect type "effect C" will be described. As described above, a plurality of button effects are defined in this "effect C", and the difference between the start timing of the first button effect executed first and the start timing of the second button effect executed later. Is specified to be 4 seconds. Since the valid period of the first button effect is defined as "5 seconds", the frame button 22 is not operated while the first button effect is executed, and the first button waits for the expiration of the valid period. When ending the effect, the first button effect is being executed at the start timing of the second button effect. That is, since the first button effect having a high priority is executed at the start timing of the second button effect, the second button effect is not executed.

On the other hand, by operating the frame button 22 during the execution of the first button effect, the first button effect is set early (for example, when 2 seconds have passed from the button validity period start timing, that is, 12 seconds after the start of fluctuation). When it is terminated, the second button effect is executed because the first button effect having a high priority has ended at the start timing of the second button effect (14 seconds after the start of fluctuation). Become. With this configuration, the frame button 22 can be positively operated for the first button effect while expecting that the second button effect is executed.

Next, when the effect type (effect pattern) selected with reference to the variable pattern selection table 222a is "super effect B", a plurality of button effects are defined as in the above-mentioned "effect B". For the first button effect to be executed first, the button valid period start timing is "10 seconds", the valid period is "5 seconds", the priority is "2", and the button effect is "A". Is specified, and in the second button effect to be executed later, the button effect period start timing is "14 seconds", the effect period is "3 seconds", the priority is "1", and the button effect effect mode is "C". Is stipulated.

Here, the difference between the content specified in the above-mentioned “Production B” and the content specified in “Super Production B” will be described. In the above-mentioned "effect B", it is stipulated that the second button effect executed later has a lower priority than the first button effect executed earlier, and at the start timing of the second button effect. When the first button effect is being executed, the second button effect is not executed.

On the other hand, the "super effect B" stipulates that the second button effect executed later has a higher priority than the first button effect executed earlier. Therefore, in the "super effect B", the first button effect is terminated and the second button effect is executed even while the first button effect is being executed. The effect mode of the first button effect to be executed first is defined so that the "effect B" and the "super effect B" have the same effect mode.

That is, when the first button effect is executed, the player corresponds to "super effect B" whether the first button effect this time is the first button effect set corresponding to "effect B". The first button effect proceeds without being able to determine whether it is the first button effect set in the above. Then, when the frame button 22 is operated so as to end the first button effect before the start timing of the second button effect, the second button effect is executed in both "effect B" and "super effect B". , You can experience multiple button productions, but whether the button production being executed this time corresponds to "Production B", "Super Production B" has a higher expectation of winning a big hit than "Production B". It will not be possible to determine whether or not it corresponds to the above, depending on whether or not the second button effect is executed.

On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first button effect so that the first button effect is being executed at the start timing of the second button effect, in the case of "effect B", the second button is displayed. In the case of "super effect B", the effect is not executed, and the second button effect is executed. That is, in this case, depending on whether or not the second button effect is executed, whether the button effect being executed this time corresponds to "effect B", the expectation of winning a big hit is higher than that of "effect B". It is possible to determine whether or not it corresponds to "super effect B", but in the case of "effect B", the second button effect is not executed and it is not possible to experience multiple button effects. ..

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is predicted which effect type (effect pattern) the button effect to be executed this time corresponds to, and the frame during each button effect is predicted based on the prediction result. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of selecting the button operation content by the player himself / herself.

Next, when the effect type (effect pattern) selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table 222a is "super effect C", the button valid period start timing is "10 seconds" and the valid period is "10 seconds". , "2" as the priority, "B" as the effect mode of the button effect, and "10 seconds" as the button valid period start timing and "5 seconds" as the valid period in the case of "off effect B". , "3" is specified as the priority, and "A" is specified as the effect mode of the button effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, various button effects can be set according to the effect type (effect pattern) selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table 222a, so that the effect can be enhanced. can. In addition, even for each effect type (effect pattern) selected based on fluctuation patterns with different jackpot expectations, the button effect period start timing of the button effect is unified, so this effect type depends on the button effect period start timing. It is possible to prevent the effect of the button effect to be executed later from being lowered because it is determined in advance what the item is.

Further, a plurality of button effects such as "effect B" can be set at a timing when the execution periods can overlap, and can be executed later according to the operation content in the button effect (first button effect) to be executed first. Since it is configured to change whether or not the button effect (second button effect) is executed, the player can actively participate in the button effect.

In addition, like "Direction B" and "Super Direction B", while unifying the contents of the button effects to be executed, the button effects that can be executed later by simply changing the priority of each button effect (No. 1). It is possible to make the presence or absence of execution of the two-button effect) different, and it is possible to provide the enjoyment of letting the player predict the type of effect this time.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 22 (b). As shown in FIG. 22B, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d. , Special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e, special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f, special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i, hold effect counter 223j, slave state setting area 223k, button effect hierarchy storage Area 223m, button valid timer 223n, special figure 1 button effect flag 223p, special figure 2 button effect flag 223q, second frame button effective flag 223r, operated flag 223s, press counter 223t, first effect counter 223u, second effect A counter 223v and other memory areas 223z are provided at least.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the processing for the command is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 59) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. , The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and each of these areas has. Stores the winning information respectively. From the information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the start of fluctuation.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a variation effect (and a third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. (Variation display), which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c manages the reserved ball number. It has become like.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the first ball entry port 64b1, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. , Stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the reserved ball number counter 203d.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c, and holds the first special symbol after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the ball number counter 223c, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, it holds the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of balls is displayed in the small area Dm1a (see FIG. 5B) of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed while synchronizing with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is based on the reserved ball number command in which the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is output from the main control device 110 to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Since it is different only in that it is memorized, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is set to. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is set to. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to on when the first stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to on when the second stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The hold effect counter 223j is a counter for counting the number of remaining hold balls used in the hold effect. The hold effect counter 223j determines in the hold ball number processing (S4208 in FIG. 63) that the number of hold balls is the upper limit value (S4503: Yes in FIG. 63), and determines that the hold effect is to be executed (S4504 :. Yes), the value is set to 8 (S4506), and the value is decremented by 1 each time the special figure fluctuation is started (the hold memory decreases) with the value of the hold effect counter 223j larger than 0. .. The hold effect is executed until the value of the hold effect counter 223j becomes 0.

In the slave state setting area 223k, data corresponding to the state command output from the main control device 110 is set. The current gaming state can also be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the data set in the slave state setting area 223k. The state setting command is output from the main control device 110 even when the power is turned on, and the backed up game state can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113.

The button effect hierarchical storage area 223m is a storage area for simultaneously storing a plurality of set button effects, and has a plurality of storage areas. In this button effect hierarchy storage area 223 m, information on the button effect such as the set start time of the button effect and the set value of the button enable timer 223n described later is stored in the storage area corresponding to the priority of the set button effect. Will be done. The details of the button effect hierarchical storage area 223m will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

Here, the contents of the button effect hierarchical storage area 223m will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the button effect hierarchical storage area 223m. As shown in FIG. 25, the button effect hierarchical storage area 223m is formed of four storage areas (hierarchical areas), and "priority 1" to "priority 3" are set as the priority for executing the effect. Has been done.

Specifically, the first layer area 223m1 in which the priority 1 in which the effect is executed with the highest priority is set, and the priority 2 in which the effect is executed with priority next to the priority 1 are set. It is composed of a second layer area 223m2, a third layer area 223m3, and a fourth layer area 223m4 in which the lowest priority 3 is set.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the button effect is executed, the stored information is read out in order from the hierarchical area having the highest priority, and the button effect is executed. Then, when the execution timing of the button effect is reached, it is determined whether the button effect having a higher priority than the priority corresponding to the button effect whose execution timing has arrived this time is executed, and the button effect with a higher priority is executed. It is configured to execute a new button effect when it is not executed. In addition, if a button effect with a lower priority than the button effect whose execution timing has arrived this time is being executed, the button effect with the lower priority is forcibly terminated and a new button effect is executed. is doing.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the storage area in which the same priority (priority 2) is set, the second layer area 223 m2 and the third layer area 223 m3 are provided, and the second layer area 223 m2 and the second layer area 223 m2. The button effects stored in the three-layer area 223m3 are executed at the same time even if the execution timings overlap. This embodiment is configured so that the button effect is set at different triggers, and when the button effect with priority 2 is set first, the information indicating the button effect is displayed in the second layer area 223 m2. When the button effect that is stored and then the priority 2 is set is set, the information indicating the button effect that is already stored in the second layer area 223m2 shifts to the third layer area 223m3, and then. Information indicating the button effect with the set priority 2 is stored in the second layer area 223m2.

Then, when the button effect with the priority 2 is newly set, the storage area is similarly shifted, and the information stored in the third layer area 223m3 is erased. In this way, when a predetermined number of button effects having the same priority (priority 2) can be stored, if the number of button effects having the same priority is set to the predetermined number or more, the oldest button effect is discarded. By configuring the above, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the most recently set button effect.

In this embodiment, a predetermined number of button effects having the same priority (priority 2) can be stored, and the oldest button effect is set when the number of button effects having the same priority is set to the predetermined number or more. Is configured to be discarded, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the latest button effect may be configured not to be newly stored. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to manage the execution timing and the erasure timing of the button effect stored in the storage area, so that the control process can be simplified.

The button valid timer 223n is a timer for measuring the operation valid period of the frame button 22 (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b), and a value corresponding to the length of the set operation valid period is set. Set. Then, the button effect update process (see S5802 in FIG. 74) in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see S4107 in FIG. 72) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 58). The value of the button valid timer 223n is decremented by 1 (S6003). The button activation timer 223 is configured to be capable of simultaneously measuring a plurality of operation validity periods. As a result, even when the button effects are executed in duplicate, the operation valid period corresponding to each button effect can be appropriately measured.

The special figure 1 button effect flag 223p is a flag for indicating whether or not the button effect is set as the variable effect of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and the button effect of the special figure 1 is set. It is set to on if. For the special figure 1 button effect flag 223p, the button effect is set in the special figure 1 button effect setting process (S5303 in FIG. 68), and the set button effect is executed in the execution timing setting process (S5405 in FIG. 69). It is set to on when the timing is set (see S5509 in FIG. 69), and the button in special figure 1 is set in the special figure 2 button effect setting process (see S5309 in FIG. 70) for setting the button effect in special figure 2. It is referred to when determining the effect setting status (S5602 in FIG. 70). Then, when the information indicating the corresponding button effect is deleted from the button effect hierarchical storage area, that is, when the corresponding button effect is executed, or when the corresponding button effect is executed, the corresponding button effect is executed. Is set to off when discarded (S5907 in FIG. 73).

In the present embodiment, the variation display based on the special figure 1 lottery is configured to be displayed (main variation display) using the entire surface of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the third symbol display device 81 is based on the special figure 2 lottery. 3 The fluctuation display of the symbol is not executed, or the fluctuation display (sub-variation display) is configured so as to be less noticeable than the main fluctuation display. Then, when the result of the special figure 2 lottery is a predetermined result (for example, when a big hit is won or a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is selected among the misses), the variation display based on the special figure 2 lottery is displayed. It is configured to switch from the sub-variation display to the main variation display.

The special figure 2 button effect flag 223q is a flag for indicating whether or not the button effect is set in the variable effect of the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the button effect of the special figure 2 is set. It is set to on if.

The second frame button valid flag 223r is a flag for indicating that the operation valid period (second operation valid period) for effectively determining the operation for the second frame button 22b is set, and the second operation is valid. It is set to on when the period is set.

The operated flag 223s is a flag for indicating that the operation content for the operation means satisfies a predetermined operation condition, and is set to be turned on when the operation content satisfies the predetermined operation condition. be. The operated flag 223s is determined at the timing when the button effect execution period t2 (see FIG. 8) has elapsed, and the result notification period t3 (see FIG. 8) is determined according to the determination result (setting status of the operated flag 223s). The production mode (success production, failure production) is set.

The pressing counter 223t is a counter for measuring the number of times the operation means (frame button 22) is operated during one operation valid period, and is an operation means (first frame) to be operated during the operation valid period. Each time the button 22a or the second frame button 22b) is operated, the value is incremented by 1, and when the operation valid period ends, the value is reset to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the press counter 223t during the operation valid period or at the end of the operation valid period satisfies the predetermined condition, and when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operated flag 223s is set to ON. Will be done.

In this embodiment, the number of operations (number of presses) is measured by using the press counter 223t as the operation content during the operation valid period, but the number of operations (press) is measured as the operation content during the operation valid period. It is configured so that the operation contents other than the number of times) can be discriminated, and whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied is determined based on the discrimination result, and when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operated flag 223s is set to ON. For example, when the operation means (frame button 22) is continuously pressed (long press period) for measuring the length of the period (long press period), or when a plurality of operation means are provided. , A means for measuring the order and number of times each operating means is pressed, a means for measuring a pressing force when pressing the operating means, or the like may be used.

The first effect counter 223u and the second effect counter 223v are counters used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223h is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, each time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed, the value is incremented by 1 and updated. Will be done.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It controls the production) and the advance notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 4). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 51).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

<About the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 26 to 32, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described. FIG. 26 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure, the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by 1. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory generally has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and is, for example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to read and write data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a in the NOR type ROM 234d, specifically, the first program stored in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (command code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initial setting process (see S8002 in FIG. 773) executed after the boot process (see S8001 in FIG. 78) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a is stored, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 32) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 79 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to the 235e and the error message image area 235f, at least the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and the third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a variable image at power-on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a variable effect when a ball entering the ball entry port 64b1b2 is detected.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S8003 and S8004 in FIG. 77).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 27. In FIG. 27, immediately after the power is turned on by the display control device 114, the power is turned on by the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 27 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is the instruction command for starting the variation, is received, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 27 (b). As shown in FIG. 27, on the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, a “○” symbol at the lower right position facing the screen and a variable image when the power is turned on, and “○” as shown in FIG. 27 (c). At the same position as the symbol, the image of the "x" symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 27 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 27 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, the player starts the game while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entry port 64b1, the left second ball entry port 64b2, or the second ball entry port. When the ball entering the 640 is detected, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and FIG. 27 (b). The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 so that the images shown in (c) and (c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball entering the first ball entry port 64b1, the left second ball entry port 64b2, or the second ball entry port 640 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 26, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 28, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a range of four types of rear images and a rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 28 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing " FIG. 28B shows the back side A corresponding to the "city stage", and the back sides B to D corresponding to the "forest stage", the "river stage", and the "sky stage", respectively. .. Further, FIG. 29 is shown with respect to the back surface E corresponding to the “island stage”.

As shown in FIG. 28, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A to D, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A to D (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The rear image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the change of the back type is decided based on the back type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "empty stage", MPU231 will be First, the area between the position a and the position a'of the corresponding rear image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c so as to flow toward the left with a smooth connection.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 29, the rear image on the back surface E has a third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... In FIG. 29 with the passage of time. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, on the back surface E, the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in a fixed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the sky image spreading on the mountain changes with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", the rear image shown in FIG. 29 (a) is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 29 (a), an orange sky indicating a morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the back image shown in FIG. 29 (b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 29 (b), a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black with the lapse of time, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 29 (c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 29 (c), a black sky indicating the night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually begins to turn white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 29 (a) is returned, and the back images of FIGS. 29 (a) to 29 (c) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 28A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 in which all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d are stored. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage "city stage" is displayed, so the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed "city stage" is displayed. By making all of them resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "empty stage" are a part of the back surface as shown in FIG. 28 (b). That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Further, the back surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 29 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 29 (a) to 29 (c) excluding FIG. 29 (b) is obtained after the power is turned on. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and is resident in the start-up process.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but if this is done, the resident video RAM 235 will be resident. As a result, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image first displayed when the stage is changed is the range from the position a to the position a'(or the range of FIGS. 29 (a) to 29 (b)). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 29 (a) and 29 (b)) is transferred to the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, when the stage change is decided by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back surfaces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone changes with the passage of time. It can be displayed while making it. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored in the back surfaces B to D, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surfaces B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is directed from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. While scrolling, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the image at the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, on the back surface E, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the images of FIGS. 29 (a) to 29 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 29 (a), so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 29 (b) to (c) and 29 (c) to (a) can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of (b) is set. As a result, while displaying the images of FIGS. 29 (a) to 29 (b), the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 29 (b) to (c) and 29 (c) to (a) are normally used. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images of FIGS. 29 (a) to 29 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the rear image, the images of FIGS. 29 (b) to (c) and FIGS. 29 (c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time. be able to.

In the backs B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 26) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the images between the positions b'and b. Image data to be stored is duplicated. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image controller 237 is controlled. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 26, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable effect after the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64b1, the left second ball entry port 64b2, or the second ball entry port 640. Nevertheless, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbol without the numbers "0" to "9", a main symbol imitating an animal character or a predetermined mark (for example, a triangular mark) is imitated. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol (blank symbol) is also resident. These image data are used for the demo effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", "girl", "monster", "rabbit", and "turtle" are displayed according to various productions. When the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e and the display control device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 corresponds to the character ROM 234. Instead of reading out new image data, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image by reading out the image data resident in advance in the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a definite display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , A display data table corresponding to the round effect, ending effect, and demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A or jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will start from now on. It is a production to notify the player of the number of rounds to be performed. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special gaming state.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α-blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as effects that express the insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is specified for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type is the back A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information is described that specifies whether to display either one or to display a rear image different from the rear images A to E. Further, as the back surface type, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to E, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to E, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be specified as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing by the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 30). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 32) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable staging images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of staging images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, it is resident. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 31). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist corresponding to the address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 31).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 31, in the example of FIG. 31). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is the display data table. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 32) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 31, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified in the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 77) (see S8005 in FIG. 77). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S9605 in FIG. 89 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S8301 in FIG. 79 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S8308 in FIG. 79 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 79B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 79 (b) S8309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 80 to 85) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 86 to 88) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S9501 in FIG. 89 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 89 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 90) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 32) described later, which describes drawing instructions, is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Null data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (see FIG. 32) that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 79 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S9205 in FIG. 88) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list to be described later. (See FIG. 32) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 32, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as (design). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, composition processing with other sprites is performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 has the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored) when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information to create an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 79 (b). ) Is executed, the time counting counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S9207 in FIG. 86). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S8002 in FIG. 77) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S9713 in FIG. 90). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S9714 in FIG. 90). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S9802 in FIG. 92).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when the value is "1", it is set to "0". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see S8306 in FIG. 79 (b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The rear image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the rear image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the rear image is changed, and if it is off, it means that the change is not performed. The rear image change flag 233w is set to on when the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S9001 in FIG. 85 (a)). Further, the rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S9709 in FIG. 90), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S9710 in FIG. 90). As a result, it is possible to display the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the effect mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The rear image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set rear image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to on for the rear image discrimination flag 233x (FIG. 85 (a). ) S9002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back type can be easily specified.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demo is being produced. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demo is being produced, and if it is off, it means that the demo is not being produced. This demo display flag 233y is set to on when the demo display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S9221 in FIG. 86), and the demo display data table is set. It is set to off when other display data tables other than are set for the display data table buffer 233d (S8505 in FIG. 81 (a), S8705 in FIG. 82 (a), S8805 in FIG. 82 (b). , See S8905 in FIG. 83). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demo is currently being produced.

The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmation display effect is being executed. Here, the definite display effect indicates an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the definite display flag 233z is on, it means that the definite display effect is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the definite display effect is not in progress. The confirmation display flag 233z is set to on when the confirmation display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 86) (S9214 in FIG. 86), and is other than the confirmation display data table. It is set to off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S8505 in FIG. 81 (a), S8705 in FIG. 82 (a), S8805 in FIG. 82 (b), FIG. See S8905 in 83). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the current confirmation display effect is in progress.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 33 to 57. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 479, 99, 239, 232), respectively, it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with the entry of the ball into the first entry opening 64b1 (starting winning) and the entry of the ball into the second entry opening 640 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 34 to 48.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through is accompanied by the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. The gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. After the through-gate passage process is executed, the launch control process is then executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). In the special symbol variation processing (FIGS. 34 and S104), the first special symbol and the second special symbol are subjected to various determinations (hit / fail determinations) and determinations based on the acquired counter values, and the determinations are made by predetermined control. In the variable display mode, various commands for controlling the variable display to be possible on the first symbol display device 37 and for executing the variable display effect of the third symbol and the fourth symbol on the third symbol display device 81 are executed. Control is executed to set or stop and display the determination result (hit / fail determination result) in the display mode. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 34, S104) will be described.

In the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 34, S104), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (during the jackpot) (S201). Here, based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203k, it is determined whether the current state of the game is a big hit game (during a big hit) or a small hit game (during a small hit). In the process of S201, if it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S201: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S202), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S201, when it is determined that the present is not a big hit (S201: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is larger than 0, that is, the first special symbol is variable display. It is determined whether it is inside (S203). If it is determined that the variation of the first special symbol is being displayed (the value of the variation time counter 203r of the special figure 1 is larger than 0) (S203: Yes), the process of executing the variation of the first special symbol is executed (. S204).

In this first special symbol change execution processing (S204), in order to change (update) the variation display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 during the period when the first special symbol is changing. Processing is executed. Then, when the processing of S204 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r updated in the first special symbol fluctuation executing processing (S204) is 0 (S205), and S205. If it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is 0 in the process of (S205: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process is executed (S206), and the process proceeds to the process of S208 described later.

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S206), when the fluctuation time specified for the first special symbol during the fluctuation display has elapsed, the fluctuation display is stopped with the symbol showing the lottery result of the first special symbol. Is executed. Further, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S206), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the second special symbol being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a deviation. Is executed. Further, when the second special symbol being executed has won the jackpot, a process for erasing the information regarding the jackpot is executed. The details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S206) will be described later with reference to FIG. 39. If it is determined in the process of S205 that the fluctuation time counter 203r in FIG. 1 is not 0 (S205: No), the process of S206 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S208.

On the other hand, in the process of S203, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is not larger than 0 (0) (S203: No), that is, when it is determined that the present is not in the special figure 1 fluctuation. Next, the first special symbol change start processing is executed (S207). In this first special symbol change start processing (S207), a process for executing a new lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is performed, and a new lottery (variation) can be executed. If it is in a state where a new lottery (variation) can be executed, a process of performing a new lottery (variation) is executed. The first special symbol change start processing (S207) will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37.

After executing the first special symbol change start process (S207), after determining that the special figure 1 is changing (S205: No) in the process of S205, or after performing the first special symbol change stop process (S206). After the execution, next, the variation processing (S208 to S212) relating to the second special symbol is executed.

First, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is larger than 0 (S208). That is, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol (special figure 2) is currently being displayed in a variable manner. If it is determined in the processing of S208 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is not larger than 0 (0) (S208: No), it means that the current is not during the special figure 2 fluctuation. In addition, a second special symbol change start process (S209) for executing a new lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed (S209), and this process is terminated.

In the second special symbol change start processing (S209), if the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol hold ball number storage area 203b, the jackpot determination and the change pattern selection based on the hold data are performed. The process is executed. Further, in the second special symbol change start processing (S209), when the lottery result is a big hit, the special figure 2 big hit flag 203j is set to ON.

On the other hand, in the processing of S208, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is larger than 0, that is, the present is currently changing in special figure 2 (S208: Yes), then the second The processing during execution of the special symbol change is executed (S210). The content of the second special symbol variation executing process (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG. 44, but the process having the same content as the above-mentioned first special symbol variation executing process (S204) is to be processed. Is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol and executed.

Then, when the second special symbol change execution processing (S210) is completed, it is determined whether the value of the current special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is 0 (S211), and if it is determined to be 0 (S211). : Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process is executed (S212), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S211 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is not 0 (S211: No), the process of S212 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S212) will be described later with reference to FIG. 45, but like the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S206), it is defined in the second special symbol during the variation display. When the fluctuation time has elapsed, the process of stopping the fluctuation display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed.

As described above with reference to FIG. 34, in the present embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel). In, the variation processing (S203 to S207) relating to the first special symbol and the variation processing (S208 to S212) relating to the second special symbol are executed in one special symbol variation processing. Therefore, when a new lottery (variation) can be executed for each special symbol, the variation processing can be executed without delay, and a smooth game can be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, in one special symbol variation process, the variation process related to the first special symbol is executed before (priority) the variation process related to the second special symbol. By clearly setting the processing order of each special symbol in this way, even if the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol and the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol are the same, priority is given to the first. 1 The fluctuation stop processing of the special symbol will be executed.

In the present embodiment, the variation processing related to the first special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the variation processing related to the second special symbol, but the variation is not limited to this, and the variation related to the second special symbol is not limited to this. The process may be configured to be executed in preference to the variable process relating to the first special symbol.

Further, it may be configured to preferentially execute the variation processing for the special symbol type in which the lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed in the set gaming state, and the player may execute according to the set gaming state. If the pachinko machine 10 switches the special symbol type in which the lottery is executed, it is preferable to provide a means for switching the order of the special symbol type in which the variation processing is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the lottery result of the lottery that is advantageous to the player from disappearing (destroying) due to the lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the first special symbol variation start processing (S207), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 34), will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing (S207).

In the first special symbol change start processing (S207 in FIG. 35), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the acquired first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired. It is determined whether the value (N1) is larger than 0 (S302). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S303). ).

Then, a hold ball number command indicating the number of hold balls after subtraction is set (S304), and the data stored in the hold area 1 to the hold area 4 of the first special symbol hold ball number storage area 203a is executed in the execution area. The process of shifting to the side in order is performed (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 35) will be described in detail later, but the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is used. Based on the set game state, the jackpot determination of whether or not it is a jackpot is executed.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S307). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) will be described in detail later, but is based on the result of the hit / fail determination based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol hold ball execution area (not shown). This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on each counter value. Then, the game number update process (S308) is executed, and this process is terminated. The game number update process (S308) will be described in detail later, but a process for updating the game state is executed by subtracting the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the time reduction counter 203h.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S207 in FIG. 35), will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 36), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S401). Then, in order to determine whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation state, latent probability state) of the special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203g is larger than 0 (the value of the probability variation counter 203g is larger than 0). S402). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is larger than 0 (that is, it is a high probability state of the special symbol) (S402: Yes), it is based on the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 15A). , It is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S401 matches the jackpot determination value in the high probability state, and the lottery result (determination result) is acquired (S403).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (that is, it is a low probability state of the special symbol) (S402: No), the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 15A) is displayed. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value in the low probability state, and the lottery result (determination result) is acquired (S404).

After finishing the processing of S403 or S404, next, it is determined whether the lottery result of this time is a big hit (S405), and if it is determined to be a big hit (S405: Yes), the big hit of the first special symbol is won. As shown, the jackpot flag 203n is set to ON (S406). In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203n is configured to be able to store (set) information indicating the type of the special symbol that has won the jackpot in addition to the information indicating whether or not the jackpot has been won. Information indicating the presence or absence of a big hit can be set for each symbol type. Therefore, in the process of S406, the information indicating the jackpot is set for the region corresponding to the first special symbol among the jackpot flags 203n.

Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a jackpot (S407), and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the acquired value of the hit type counter C2 (S407). S408), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S405 that the result of the lottery this time is not a big hit (S405: No), the out-of-order symbol of the first special symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S409), and this process is terminated. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S207 in FIG. 35), will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 37), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 36), whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, that is, It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501). Here, the determination as to whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203i is set to ON for the first special symbol. The first jackpot flag 203i is set to ON in the process of S406 in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 36).

When it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (S501: Yes), the big hit type is determined from the special figure 1 table 202d1 (S502), and the process proceeds to S503. On the other hand, in the process of S501, if it is determined that the result of the special drawing 1 lottery this time is not a big hit (S501: No), the process of S502 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S503.

After the processing of any of S501 and S502 is completed, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol execution area is acquired (S503) and stored in the game state storage area 203k. The variation pattern selection table 202e corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state) corresponding to the information is read out (S504).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S503 and the variation pattern selection table 202e read in the process of S504 (S505), and based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S505. Then, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is set (S506).

Next, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set (S507), the variation start of the first special symbol is set by the first symbol display device 37 (S508), and the selected variation pattern is set. The value indicating the fluctuation time of No. 1 is set to the value of the fluctuation time counter 203r in FIG. 1 (S509), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the first special symbol variation executing process (S204), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 34), will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation executing process (S204). In this first special symbol change execution processing (S207), the change time and display of the first special symbol being changed are updated.

In the first special symbol change execution processing (S204), first, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is subtracted and updated (S701), and the display of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated. (S702), this process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 34 S104) in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34) executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33) executed every 2 milliseconds. (See S204 of FIG. 38) is configured to be executed, and the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is updated (1 subtracted) in the first special symbol variation executing process (see S204 of FIG. 38). It is configured as follows. Therefore, for example, when a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, "15000" is set as the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r, and the value is 1 every 2 milliseconds. It is configured to be subtracted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S206), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 34), will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S206). In this first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S206), when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is "0" at present, that is, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is determined. This is the process that is executed when it has passed.

When the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S206 in FIG. 39) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S801). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON for the first special symbol (S801: Yes), is the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s larger than 0? Whether or not it is determined (S802). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is larger than 0 (S802: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S803), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag is set. A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that 203o is turned on is set (S804).

Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as an off symbol (S805), and the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is set to 0 (S806). As a result, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a big hit, the variable display of the second special symbol (special figure 2) being executed is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the deviation (off symbol). (Confirmed display) can be displayed.

After finishing the processing of S806, next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203j is set to on (S807), and if it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203j is set to on (S807). : Yes), in order to apply the lottery result of the 2nd special symbol to the 2nd special symbol that was forcibly stopped and displayed in the process of S805 described above, the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203j is set to off. (S808), the stored information for the special figure 2 jackpot is deleted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. On the other hand, in the processing of S807, if it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the lottery of the second special symbol (S807: No), the processing of S808 and S809 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S810.

In the processing of S810, first, the jackpot scenario won by this special symbol change is set (S810), then the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is set to off, and the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the time reduction counter 203h are set to 0. It is set (S811), and information indicating that the current gaming state is during a big hit (during a jackpot game) is stored in the gaming state storage area 203k (S812). The game state storage area 203k is configured so that the game state related to the lottery game (normal state, probability change state, time saving state) and the game state related to the winning game (during the big hit) can be stored separately. By executing the process of, the game state (normal state, probability change state, time saving state) related to the lottery game at the timing when the big hit is won and the game state indicating that the big hit is in progress are stored.

With this configuration, it is possible to determine the game state set at the timing when the jackpot is won at the end of the jackpot game.

When the processing of S812 is completed, next, a special figure 1 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the first special symbol is set (S813), and the first special symbol display device is set. The process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is variablely displayed in 37 is executed (S814), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S801, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is not set to ON for the first special symbol (S801: No), the processing of S802 to S812 is skipped and the above-mentioned S813 Move to processing.

As described above, in the first special symbol variation stop process (S206), the process (S810 to S814) of stopping the variation display with the symbol showing the result of the lottery (first lottery game) of the first special symbol is executed. If the lottery result this time is a big hit (S801: Yes), the second special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped and displayed so that the lottery result is out of order (S805). In this way, in the process of stopping display (confirmed display) of one special symbol with the symbol indicating the jackpot, by configuring to execute the process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol that is changing, at the same time. Appropriate processing can be executed for a plurality of special symbol fluctuations to be executed.

That is, in a configuration in which the variation processing related to the first special symbol and the variation processing related to the second special symbol are executed in order like the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the execution is performed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. By executing the variation processing (forced stop processing) of the second special symbol within the variation processing related to the first special symbol, the second special symbol is forcibly stopped at the timing when the variation processing related to the second special symbol is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the processing related to the second special symbol from being duplicated, and the processing can be smoothly executed.

In this embodiment, it is configured to execute a process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol at the timing indicating that one special symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol indicating a big hit. Not limited to, for example, when it is determined that one of the special symbols has won the jackpot, that is, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 36) ( In S405: Yes) of FIG. 36, the fluctuation of the other special symbol may be forcibly removed and stopped at the symbol. In this case, it is preferable to configure the other special symbol that has been forcibly disengaged and stopped to execute a special fluctuation that does not win the jackpot until the jackpot fluctuation of one special symbol ends. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the fluctuation of the special symbol of the other is forcibly stopped when the jackpot is won with the special symbol of one. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether or not the jackpot has been won by determining that the other special symbol change has been forcibly stopped and displayed.

In addition, when controlling the fluctuation of the other special symbol being executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol, the variation control content is configured to be different according to the lottery result of the other special symbol being executed. However, for example, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, and the lottery for the second special symbol is in a fluctuation (out-of-order fluctuation) to indicate that the lottery is out of order, the lottery may be performed. If the result is discarded and the forced stop process for forcibly stopping the deviation fluctuation is executed, and the lottery result of the second special symbol is in the fluctuation (hit fluctuation) to show that it is a big hit, the first After the jackpot game of one special symbol is completed, the interruption process may be executed so that the change of the second special symbol can be resumed.

In this case, while making the player interested in whether the new second special symbol change is executed or the suspended second special symbol change is restarted after the jackpot game of the first special symbol is completed. You can play games. Further, when such a configuration is used, it is configured to execute a suggestion effect for suggesting the situation (whether or not it is interrupted) of the second special symbol during the jackpot game of the first special symbol to the player. Then it is good.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a game that is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 35) and also one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S209 of FIG. 41) described later. The number-of-times update process (S308) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this game number update process (S308).

In the game number update process (S308), first, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0 or more, that is, whether the game state is the time reduction state (S851). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 or more (S851: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S852). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203h subtracted in the process of S852 is 0 (S853). When it is determined that the value of the subtracted time reduction counter 203h is 0 (S853: Yes), since it is the end timing of the time reduction state, the game state corresponding to the game state storage area 203k is set (S854). The process proceeds to S855. On the other hand, in the process of S851, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 or more (that is, it is 0) (S8511: No), it is not necessary to subtract the value of the time saving counter 203h, so that S852 -The process of S854 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S855.

After the processing of S851 or S854 is completed, it is next determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 or more, that is, whether the gaming state is the probability variation state (S855). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 or more (S855: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (S856). Then, next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203g subtracted in the process of S856 is 0 (S857). When it is determined that the value of the subtracted probability change counter 203g is 0, since it is the end timing of the probability change state, the game state corresponding to the game state storage area 203k is set (S858), and the process proceeds to S859. ..

On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation counter 203g is not 0 or more in the processing of S855 (S855: No), or when it is determined in the processing of S857 that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is not 0 (S857: No). , S859. In the process of S859, a state command indicating the value of the time reduction counter 203h, the value of the probability variation counter 203g, and the game state being set is set (S859), and this process is terminated.

Next, the second special symbol variation start processing (S209), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 34), will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change start processing (S209).

When the second special symbol change start process (S209) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 2 change stop flag 203o is set to ON (S901). That is, the lottery of the first special symbol (first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 36)) executed immediately before this process is executed (in the same special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34)). )) Determines whether or not the jackpot was won.

In the process of S901, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S9011: Yes), various processes for starting the fluctuation of the second special symbol are skipped, and the special figure 2 is skipped. The fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to off (S902), and this process is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 36), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, and the second It is prohibited to execute a new second special symbol change after the special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed by the off symbol. As a result, even if the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the variation processing related to the first special symbol, the control process can be executed without causing a problem.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to on in the process of S901 (S901: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to off. Therefore, by setting the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, the second special symbol change start process (S212 in FIG. 41) can be skipped only once.

This is a lottery of the first special symbol (first special symbol) executed immediately before the second special symbol variation start process (S209) is executed (in the same special symbol variation process (see S104 of FIG. 34)). Only when the jackpot is won in the jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 36), if the second special symbol change start process (S209 in FIG. 41) executed immediately after is skipped, the first special symbol jackpot is subsequently executed. The jackpot game is started based on the jackpot information (big hit scenario) set in the determination process (see S306 in FIG. 36), and the jackpot game is completed by the process of S201 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34). This is because the second special symbol change start process (S209 in FIG. 41) is not executed until this is done.

With this configuration, it is possible to simplify the process of skipping the variation process of the other special symbol based on the lottery result of one special symbol, so that the control process executed by the main control device 110 can be simplified. The processing load can be reduced.

In this embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (big hit winning), the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed (stopped and displayed by a missed symbol), and one special symbol is displayed. In order to prevent new fluctuations (lottery) of the other special symbol from being executed until the jackpot game based on the symbol lottery result is executed, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set and the fluctuation processing of the other special symbol is performed. Is used, but other configurations may be used.

In other words, if the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (big hit winning), do not win the big hit in the other special symbol lottery (variation) until the big hit game based on the big hit winning is completed. It may be configured, and for example, when the jackpot control process (see S2404 in FIG. 54) for executing the jackpot game is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53) of the main control device 110 described later, the special figure 2 The fluctuation stop flag 203o may be configured to be set to off.

With this configuration, even if the timing to turn on the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set before the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol, until the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to prohibit the execution of a new second special symbol change (lottery).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the second special symbol change start process (see S209 in FIG. 41) is executed with the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o set to ON, the change of the second special symbol is executed. It is configured to skip the process, that is, not to start a new fluctuation (keep the second special symbol stopped), but the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is turned on. If it is set, it may be configured to execute the variable display of the second special symbol dedicated to it.

In this case, the second special symbol is drawn using the special lottery that does not win the jackpot, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for the period corresponding to the variation pattern determined based on the result of the special lottery. It may be configured, or the period until the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning of the first special symbol is executed without executing the lottery of the second special symbol, and the period until the specific timing during the jackpot game is reached. Alternatively, the second special symbol may be varied and displayed during the period until the jackpot game ends. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol change has been forcibly stopped.

The content of the variation processing related to each of the above-mentioned special symbols is configured to be appropriately output to the voice lamp control device 113 side by setting a command indicating the content, and is configured to be output to the voice lamp control device 113 side as appropriate. The variable display of the third symbol and the fourth symbol displayed in the main display area Dm of 81 is configured to be synchronized with the display mode of each special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 described above. However, while the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is forcibly stopped, a command indicating that the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. In this case, the third symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol that is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used to execute the variable effect during forced stop. Is also good.

In this way, the actual second special is used on the third symbol display device 81, which is easy for the player to visually recognize, by using each symbol (third symbol, fourth symbol) that is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. Even when the symbol is configured to execute the variation effect during the forced stop, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol variation is forcibly stopped.

In the process of S901, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is not set to ON, that is, the first special symbol is not stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol (S901: No), S903 to S910. Is executed, and this process is terminated. In the processes of S903 to S910, the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d and the first special symbol hold are performed for each of the above-mentioned first special symbol change start processes (S210 in FIG. 35) from S301 to S308. The value of the ball counter (N1), the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), and the second special symbol holding ball number. For the counter 203e, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter (N2), the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908), and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S909). Since they are the same except for the changed points, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S209 in FIG. 41), will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908). In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908), the type of the target special symbol is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol for the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 36). And some other processing was added.

The second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908 in FIG. 42) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 36) in the following points. That is, in the process of S1001 corresponding to the process of S401, the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) was changed to the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and S406 to S409. The difference is that the target is changed from the special figure 1 (first special symbol) to the special figure 2 (second special symbol) in the processes of S1006 to S1009 corresponding to the process of. Since the other processes are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S209 in FIG. 41), will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906).

The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906 in FIG. 43) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 37) in the following points. In the process of S1201 corresponding to the process of S501, the special figure 1 lottery result (the lottery result of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (the lottery result of the second special symbol), and S506 to S507. In each process of S1206 to S1207 corresponding to each process up to, the special figure 1 variation pattern command (variation pattern command of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 variation pattern command. Since other points are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (S210), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 34), will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation executing process (S210). The second special symbol variation executing process (S210) is updated in each of the processes S1401 to S1402 corresponding to the processes of S701 to S702 with respect to the above-mentioned first special symbol variation executing process (S204 in FIG. 38). The difference is that the target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, and from the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r to the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S212), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 34), will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S212). In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S212), the processing target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol with respect to the above-mentioned first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S206 in FIG. 39). It's different. Since other points are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the control of the variation display between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be independently and in parallel to be executed. The special symbol and the second special symbol can be variablely displayed at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to execute a lottery game with more special symbols within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that the player will be given a big hit within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

Further, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variablely displayed at the same time and the lottery game is executed, if the jackpot game occurs on one of the first or second special symbols, the other Since the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105 in FIG. 45) determines which of the first entry port 64b1, the left second entry opening 64b2, and the second entry opening 640 the ball has entered (starting winning), and starts. If a prize is won, each counter value acquired up to the maximum number of holdings (maximum 4 at the first entry port 64b1, maximum 4 at the left second entry opening 64b2, and maximum 4 at the second entry opening 640) is used. This is a process of storing the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, respectively.

Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is stored. Alternatively, a process (so-called look-ahead process) for predicting a hit / fail determination result, a selected fluctuation pattern, or the like is executed in advance based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol reserved ball storage areas 203b. .. Hereinafter, the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 46) will be described.

In the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first entry opening 64b1 which is the first starting opening (starting winning) (S1701). Here, the ball enters the ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball entry port 64b1. It is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64b1 (there was a start prize) (S1701: Yes), and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S1702). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703).

That is, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for the first ball slot 64b1 is less than the upper limit of four at the present time (that is, whether or not the number of reserved balls is stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is added by 1 (1704), and the voice lamp control device 113 A hold ball number command for notifying the hold number of the first start port (the number of hold of the lottery right of the first special symbol) is set (S1705).

Then, each value of various counter values (first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, variation type counter CS1) is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball execution area of RAM 203 is used. Each is reserved (stored) in the storage area of the corresponding number of reserved balls of 203a (S1706).

Next, the first look-ahead process is executed (S1707). The first look-ahead process (S1707) will be described later with reference to FIG. 47, but the hit / fail determination result and the fluctuation pattern determined from each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. , The process of determining the stop type, etc. is executed. In this embodiment, it is configured to execute a process of discriminating a hit / fail judgment result, a determined fluctuation pattern, a stop type, etc. based on each newly stored counter value, but the present embodiment is limited to this. Without a hitch, for example, when there is a new start winning prize, the hit / fail determination result and the determined fluctuation pattern for all the reserved storages stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, It may be configured to execute a process for determining the stop type and the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, that is, when the lottery right of the first special symbol is newly acquired, the first special symbol is obtained. The content of the lottery right (winning information) is determined in advance, but the lottery right (winning information) of the second special symbol is not limited to this, and when the lottery right of the first special symbol is newly acquired. ) May be configured to be determined in advance.

Then, when the process of S1707 is executed, the process of S1708 is executed next. Further, when it is determined in the process of S1701 that the ball has not entered the first ball entry port 64b1 (S1701: No), or in the process of S1703, the number of reserved balls for the first ball entry port 64b1 is the upper limit at present. When it is determined that the value is (S1703: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S1708.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is added, the first look-ahead process (S1707) based on the added information regarding the winning prize (winning information) is performed. It is configured to be executed, but is not limited to this, for example, when it is determined in the process of S1703 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is the upper limit number (4) (S1703). : No), that is, the first look-ahead process (S1707) can be executed when a ball is inserted into the first entry port 64b1 while the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit. It may be configured so that it can be done. As a result, even when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the player can continuously play the game in order to execute the look-ahead process. In addition, since it is possible to add value when a ball is inserted into the first entry port 64b1 while the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the first special symbol is reserved. It is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play when a ball enters the first entry port 64b1 while the number of balls has reached the upper limit.

Next, each process from S1708 to S1714 is the same as the process performed for winning a ball to the first starting port (first ball entry port 64b1) executed in each process from S1701 to S1707. The only difference is that the process of is executed for the second ball entry port (left second ball entry port 64b2, second ball entry port 640), and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the first look-ahead process (S1707), which is one process of the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the first look-ahead process (S1707).

In the first look-ahead process (S1707 of FIG. 47), first, the random number counter C1 per first and the type counter C2 per first, which are various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area 203a, are used. , Each value of the variation type counter CS1 is read out (S1821). Then, the read data is stored in the vacant storage area of the look-ahead hold storage area in the area where the winning order is the smallest (S1822).

Then, when it is determined that the discrimination result in the processing of S1823 is a big hit (big hit only in the low probability state, big hit only in the high probability state, big hit in any of the low probability state and the high probability state) (S1823: Yes), the big hit type. The first winning command including the information indicating the fluctuation pattern and the information indicating the fluctuation pattern is set (S1824), and the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the discrimination result in the processing of S1823 is not a big hit (the special symbol is out of alignment in both the high probability state and the low probability state) (S1823: No), the information indicating the deviation and the fluctuation pattern are shown. The first winning command including the information is set (S1825), and this process is terminated.

Here, the first winning command set in the process of S1824 or S1825 is used as common information in addition to the above-mentioned information for indicating the winning / failing determination result (information having a different meaning based on the winning / failing determination result). Information for indicating the values of various counter values read out by the process of S1821 is also set. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S2401) executed in the main process (see FIG. 53) of the main control device 110.

On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when the winning command is received, the display mode of the holding ball is changed based on various information included in the winning command (for example, the color of the holding ball is changed to a different color from the usual one). It is possible to execute an effect (pre-reading effect) of displaying (variably) or displaying a notice symbol or the like before the start of the change to suggest the result of the hit / fail judgment to the player.

In the present embodiment, when the look-ahead process is executed, the hit / fail judgment result in the case of the high probability state of the special symbol and the hit / fail judgment result in the case of the low probability state of the special symbol are discriminated, and the result of each determination is determined. It is configured to set a winning command based on, but is not limited to this, for example, a judgment value that is determined to be a big hit regardless of whether the special symbol is in a high probability state or a low probability state ( The value of the random number counter C1 per first) may be specified, and a winning command indicating a big hit of a special symbol may be set only when the determination value is read out.

With this configuration, the winning command indicating the jackpot is output to the voice lamp control device 113 only when it is determined in advance that it is a specific jackpot, so that the look-ahead effect is not executed. It is possible to have a sense of expectation of winning a big hit against fluctuations.

Further, the game state when the special symbol lottery is performed based on the hold storage (winning information) stored (stored) in the first special symbol hold storage area 203a is accurately determined, and based on the game state. It may be configured to execute the pass / fail judgment. In this case, the selection of the fluctuation pattern is not variable depending on the number of reserved balls, but can be determined by selecting a constant fluctuation pattern regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the start of the fluctuation can be determined by determining the fluctuation order until the reserved ball starts to change based on the information stored in the hold.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a new reserved storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a, a look-ahead process based on the winning information is executed, and the look-ahead processing is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning information newly stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a in the look-ahead processing of the main control device 110 (is not limited to this). Even if the information indicating the content (each counter value) of the hold storage) is set as the winning command and the winning / failing judgment result is predicted based on the information included in the winning command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. good.

With such a configuration, the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced. Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 executes a process of determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and determines that the look-ahead effect is to be executed, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 is input. It is preferable to configure it for analysis (prediction of success / failure judgment result). As a result, when the look-ahead effect is not executed, the specific look-ahead process (prediction of the hit / miss determination result) is not executed, so that it is possible to suppress unnecessary control from being executed by the pachinko machine 10. In addition, it is possible to suppress a problem that the result of the pre-reading process executed untitled is illegally acquired by the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a new reserved storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a, a look-ahead process based on the winning information is executed, and the look-ahead processing is performed. However, the present embodiment is not limited to this, and a new hold storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol hold storage area 203a. Therefore, information indicating the look-ahead result based on all the winning information stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a may be set as the first winning command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, a second look-ahead process (S1714), which is one process of the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the second look-ahead process (S1714). The second look-ahead process (S1714 in FIG. 48) is based on the above-mentioned first look-ahead process (S1707 in FIG. 47) in which a ball enters the first start port (first entry port 64b1) (starting prize). While the process is to determine (look ahead) the pending data (winning information) in advance and make various judgments, the second start is based on the winning information based on the start winning of the target to be judged at the first starting port. It is only the point that the winning information is changed based on the start winning at the mouth (left second entrance 64b2, second entrance 640), and the other details are the same because the same processing is executed. The explanation is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, a normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol), the opening time of the electric accessory 64a, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation processing (S106 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S2001). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is performed after the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83 (after the hit symbol is stopped and displayed). Includes up to the middle (until the winning game is over). If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S2001: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S2001: No), it is determined whether the ordinary symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S2002). If it is determined that the normal symbol is not changing, that is, it is determined that a new normal symbol change (lottery) can be executed (S2002: No), then the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f. (M) is acquired (S2003), and it is determined whether the value is larger than 0 (S2004).

If it is determined in the process of S2004 that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S2004: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S2004: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S2005). That is, if it is determined in the processing of S2004 that the condition for executing a new normal symbol change (the winning information to be used for the normal symbol change is stored on hold) is satisfied, it is stored on hold. In order to execute the normal symbol variation using the winning information, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1.

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S2006). In the process of S2006, the data stored in the normal symbol hold 1 to the normal symbol hold 4 of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, normal symbol hold 1 → execution area, normal symbol hold 2 → normal symbol hold 1, normal symbol hold 3 → normal symbol hold 2, normal symbol hold 4 → normal symbol hold 4 and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S2007).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0, that is, whether or not the present is a high probability state of the normal symbol (S2008), and the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0. (S2008: Yes), the hit / fail judgment result (lottery result) is acquired based on the hit judgment value of the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 15B) for high probability (S2009). ), The process proceeds to S2011. On the other hand, when the value of the time saving counter 203h is not a value larger than 0 (that is, 0), that is, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the low probability state (S2008: No), the second for low probability time is used. Based on the hit determination value of the hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 15B), the hit / fail determination result is acquired (S2010), and the process proceeds to S2011.

In the processing of S2011, it is determined whether or not the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is a hit (S2011), and if it is determined to be a hit (S2011: Yes), the display mode of "○" is "○". The display mode is set (S2012), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined based on the normal map fluctuation pattern using the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter (S2014). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2011 that the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is not a hit (a miss) (S2011: No), the display mode of "x", which is the display mode at the time of the miss, is set. (S2013), the process proceeds to the above-mentioned process of S2014.

Here, the process for determining the variation time of the normal symbol (process of S2014) will be described using the contents specified in the normal symbol variation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 20). In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation is set to the set probability state of the normal symbol (high probability state, low probability state), the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f (normal symbol holding number), and the normal symbol holding number. It is configured to be variable based on. Then, the ease of entering the ball into the second entry port 640 (the length of the opening period of the electric accessory 640a per unit time) is configured to differ depending on the set fluctuation time of the normal symbol. ing.

As described above, the fluctuation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 20) defines a fluctuation time of 30 seconds when a low probability state of a normal symbol is set. Then, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the winning game (usually) based on the opening pattern in which the opening period of 0.7 seconds is set after the closing period (opening period) of 0.1 seconds. The game per figure) is executed. Therefore, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the game per normal figure is completed by the time the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640, so that the ball is It is configured so that the ball cannot enter the second ball entry port 640.

Then, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the winning game (usually) based on the opening pattern in which the opening period of 0.7 seconds is set after the closing period (opening period) of 0.1 seconds. The game per figure) is executed. Therefore, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second entry port 640 (1.6 seconds after passing through the through gate 67). Since the fluctuation of the normal symbol (variation for 30 seconds) is being executed, the ball is configured so that it cannot enter the second entry port 640, and a low probability state of the normal symbol is set. If this is the case, the game is being executed per game when the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640 (1.6 seconds after passing through the through gate 67). , The ball is configured to be able to enter the second entry port 640.

In this way, by configuring the ball to enter the second entry port 640 according to the length of the fluctuation time of the set normal symbol, the ball enters the second entry port 640. Since the ease of entering the ball can be easily changed according to the game state, various playability can be created.

Further, as described above, the ball is configured to be difficult to enter the second entry port 640 regardless of whether the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than the appropriate range or longer. Therefore, for example, even in a gaming state (for example, a probabilistic state) in which it is necessary to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the second entry port 640.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the normal symbol is set according to the game state of the normal symbol and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol, but the variation pattern of the normal symbol is not limited to this, for example, acquisition. It may be configured so that a different fluctuation time is set based on the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2.

On the other hand, in the process of S2002, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is changing (S2002: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. If it is determined (S2015) and it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S2015: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed in the processing of S2015 (S2015: Yes), then the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S2016). In the process of S2016, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol this time is a win, the second symbol display device 83 is set so that the “◯” symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up). On the other hand, when the lottery of ordinary symbols is out of order, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. That is, the setting for stopping and displaying the display mode set in the process of S2012 or S2013 described above is performed.

When the stop display is set by the processing of S2016, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 ends, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is the second in the display mode set in the processing of S2012 or the processing of S2013. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the symbol display device 83.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (S2017). When it is determined that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (S2017: Yes), a process for setting the opening / closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is not a hit (it is a mistake) (S2017: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the opening / closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a in the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing of determining the hit / fail of the normal symbol (timing of processing S2008 to S2011). Probability of the normal symbol set at the timing of executing the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol and setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a (the timing when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed in the processing of S2015). It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a based on the state (high probability state, low probability state).

That is, in the present embodiment, the variation processing (lottery process) relating to the normal symbol and the variation process (lottery process) relating to the special symbol are configured to be executed independently, and further, the variation process relating to the special symbol (lottery process). The probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol is configured to be variable based on the result of the lottery process). Therefore, depending on the result of the variation processing (lottery processing) related to the special symbol executed in parallel during the period in which the variation processing (lottery processing) relating to the ordinary symbol is being executed, the normal symbol may be determined at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not. At the timing when the high-probability state of the electric accessory 640a is set and the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is set, the low-probability state of the normal symbol may be set.

In such a situation, for example, the opening control mode (opening) of the electric accessory 640a is based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing of determining the hit / fail of the normal symbol. If the pattern) is set, the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long time (the opening pattern executed when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set) while the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. ) There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is determined, and the electric combination is based on the determination result. It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the object 640a. As a result, the electric accessory 640a can be opened in an opening pattern according to the set gaming state.

In the processing of S2017, if it is determined that the lottery result of the current ordinary symbol is a hit (S2017: Yes), then, in order to determine the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the current ordinary symbol. In addition, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0 (S2018), and the value of the time saving counter 203h is not a value larger than 0 (that is, it is 0), that is, the present is a low of the normal symbol. When it is determined to be in the stochastic state (S2018: No), as the open pattern for the low probabilistic state of the normal symbol, the open pattern "0.7 seconds x 1 time" that executes the open for 0.7 seconds once is used. Set (S2019).

On the other hand, in the process of S2018, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0 (S2018: Yes), the opening pattern for the high probability state of the normal symbol is set to open for 0.8 seconds. The opening pattern "0.8 seconds x 1 time" to be executed once is set (S2020). That is, in the present embodiment, the opening pattern for the high probability state of the normal symbol (0.8 seconds x 1 time) is larger than the opening pattern for the low probability state of the normal symbol (0.7 seconds x 1 time). , The electric accessory 640a is configured to be open for a long period of time. Therefore, as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a, the winning game in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is more advantageous to the player than the case where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set (No. 1). 2 The period in which the ball entry port 640 is open is extended). Next, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set based on the opening pattern set in the processing of S2019 or S2020 (S2021), and this processing is terminated.

In this embodiment, the opening control mode of the electric accessory 640a that executes the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol and moves it in the hit game of the normal symbol. The opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the (opening pattern), but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the pass / fail judgment of the normal symbol is performed. The high-probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing, and the high-probability state of the normal symbol is also set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a to be moved by the hit game of the normal symbol. The electric accessory 640a may be configured to be opened for a long time only when the electric accessory 640a is set, or the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set based on the gaming state set at the timing of determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct. It may be configured to be set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal map is determined from the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 20) based on the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2. As shown in FIG. 20, in the normal symbol variation pattern table 202f, the variation pattern of the normal symbol is set according to each game state and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. Except for the probabilistic state (probability change: with electric support), there is only one type of fluctuation pattern, and the same fluctuation time is always determined regardless of the value of the selected normal map fluctuation type counter.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the through gate passage processing execution (S107) executed in the first embodiment is performed. This process is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and if the ball has passed, the second hit. This is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area.

In the through gate passing process (S107 in FIG. 50), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S2101). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S2101: Yes), then it is determined whether the currently set gaming state is the normal state (S2102). If it is determined to be in the normal state (S2102: Yes), it means that the right-handed game is performed in the state in which the normal state is set, so a notification command for indicating a firing abnormality is set (S2103). , S2104.

When the notification command set by the processing of S2103 is output (notified) to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the abnormality notification process, and the third symbol display device 81 displays a firing abnormality. The first abnormality notification mode (not shown) is displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined by the processing of S2102 that the current gaming state is not the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) (S2102: No), then the current gaming state is latent. It is determined whether it is a probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) (S2104), and if it is determined to be a latent probabilistic state (S2104: Yes), a second notification indicating a firing abnormality is made. A command is set (S2105), and the process proceeds to S2106. If it is determined in the process of S2104 that the state is not in the probable change state (in the latent state) (S2104: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2106 as it is.

Here, when the second notification command set by the processing of S2105 is output (notified) to the voice lamp control device 113, the abnormality notification processing is executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and the third symbol display device 81 The second abnormality notification mode (not shown) indicating the firing abnormality is displayed at.

In this way, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is configured to determine that the right-handed game is being executed, in order to determine whether or not the right-handed game is being performed. Since it is not necessary to provide a dedicated detection means (for example, a sensor for detecting that the fired ball has reached the gaming area beyond the variable display device unit 80), the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to easily display different abnormality notification modes by setting different notification commands for indicating a firing abnormality according to the game state set at the time when the right-handed game is being performed. can.

In the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is configured to determine that the right-handed game is being executed, but the right-handed game is being executed. Any other configuration may be used as long as it has a configuration for detecting that, for example, a detection means for detecting that the operation handle 51 has been operated with a strength (operation amount) sufficient to launch a ball into a right-handed region. May be provided.

Returning to FIG. 50, the explanation will be continued. After finishing the processing of S2102 to S2103, the processing of S2104 is executed next. In S2104, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired, and then the value (M) of the acquired normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is not larger than 4 (the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol). Has not reached the upper limit value) (S2105).

If it is determined in the process of S2105 that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 4 (the upper limit value is 4) (S2107: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not larger than 4 (3 or less) (S2105: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set. 1 is added (S2106), a command for the number of reserved balls in the normal figure (a command for indicating the value (M) of the counter for the number of reserved balls in the normal symbol 203f) is set (S2107), and the value of the random number counter C4 per second is set normally. It is stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S2108), and this process is terminated.

Next, the NMI interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power disconnection occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S2201) as a setting of the power supply disconnection occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 52), first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S2301). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S2302). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S2303).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 4) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S2304), and if it is turned on (S2304: Yes), the process shifts to S2312. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S2304: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2305), and if it is not stored (S2305: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S2312 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2305: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S2306), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S2307: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data is destroyed, and the process is shifted to S2312 even in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S2312, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S2312). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S2313, S2314) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the initialization process (S2313, S2314) of the RAM 203 is executed.

In addition, the initialization process (S2313, S2314) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S2313, S2314), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S2313), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S2314). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S2310.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S2304: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (S2305: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S2307: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S2308). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S2309), and the process proceeds to S2310. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S2310). After that, interrupts are permitted (S2311). Then, it shifts to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the counter update process and the power cutoff process are roughly classified.

In the main process (see FIG. 53), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is controlled by each sub. The external output process to be transmitted to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S2401). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the prize corresponding to the number of acquired balls is given to the payout control device 111. Send a ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 34) and the start winning process (see FIG. 46) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output process (S2401 in FIG. 53), various commands set in various processes of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and various items are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Information for setting effects (variable effects, decorative effects, etc.). Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S2402). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2403), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the voice lamp control device 113 is used. A command for executing a jackpot effect is set, and a jackpot control process for opening or closing the variable winning device 65 is executed (S2404).

The detailed contents of the jackpot control process (S2404) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56, but in this jackpot control process (S2404), the variable winning device 65 (hereinafter, winning opening) is used for each round of the jackpot state. Etc.) is opened, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the winning opening or the like (variable winning device 65) has elapsed, or whether the specified number of balls have won in the winning opening or the like (variable winning device 65). Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the winning opening and the like (variable winning device 65) are closed. The opening and closing of the winning opening and the like (variable winning device 65) are repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S2404) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is executed (S2405). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S2021 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 49), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the period set by the processing of S2019 and the processing of S2020 in the normal symbol variation processing is completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S2406). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the first special symbol variation start process (S206 in FIG. 35) or the second special symbol variation start process (S209 in FIG. 41), the variation pattern is set according to the variation pattern. The variable display is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turns off and turns on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35) or the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 41) is completed. In addition, the variation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated, and the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 37) is performed by the first special symbol variation stop process (see S206 in FIG. 39). In the display mode set in S507 of (see), the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the second special symbol, the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by the same processing.

Further, in the present embodiment, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode (big hit symbol) indicating a jackpot, the other special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode (disengaged symbol) indicating a miss. It is configured, and the stop display for that is also executed.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S2407). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S2014 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 49), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process (S2407), when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S2016 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 49), it is executed in the second symbol display device. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the processing of S2012 or the processing of S2013 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 49). Lit display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2408), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2408: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S2409). If the predetermined time has already passed (S2409: Yes), the process is shifted to S2401 and each process after S2401 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S2409: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2410, S2411).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2410). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S2410 (S2411). In the process of S2411, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 is updated in the same manner as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Here, since the execution time of each process of S2401 to S2407 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated randomly, and similarly, the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the general figure variation type counter CS2 are also updated at random. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the processing content for updating the judgment value related to the lottery of the special symbol or the normal symbol, and it is possible to execute the illegal game aiming at the timing when the judgment value corresponding to the hit is acquired. It can be suppressed.

Further, in the process of S2408, if the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2408: Yes), the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 51 has been executed, the processing at the time of power cutoff after S2412 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S2412), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S2413). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S2414), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2415), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S2408 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S2401 to S2407, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S2410 and S2411 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S2401. That is, the process can be started from the process of S2401 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S2301). By setting a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S2401. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S2404) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S2404). This jackpot control process (S2404) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and information for executing various effects according to the jackpot when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol. It is a process for setting (command) and opening or closing a winning opening or the like (specific winning opening 650).

In the jackpot control process (S2404), first, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S2501). Specifically, the processing of S810 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S206 of FIG. 39) or S1509 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 45) is executed, and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol (big hit). If the scenario) is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S2501, when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is the start timing (S2501: Yes), the opening command is set (S2502), and the present process is terminated.

The opening command may be configured to be delayed (variable) according to the game state and the jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is updated regularly (every 4 ms) is provided. Then, when the big hit or the small hit of the special symbol is started, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and then the opening counter is set to a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for the big hit A and 5000 for the big hit B). If this happens, the opening command should be sent. By doing so, for example, in the case of a jackpot in a left-handed game, the time until the start of the jackpot is lengthened, and in the case of a jackpot in a right-handed game, the time until the start of the jackpot is increased. Can be shortened. In the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs during a left-handed game, it is necessary to switch to a right-handed game as a big hit game. According to the above configuration, when a big hit is made in a left-handed game, it is possible to secure a sufficient time to switch to a right-handed game (big hit game). As a result, the operational burden on the player can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the process of S2501, when it is determined that it is not the jackpot start timing of the special symbol (S2501: No), then it is determined whether the current is the jackpot of the special symbol (S2503). In the process of S2503, the game information about the winning game stored in the game state storage area 203k is read out and the determination is performed.

As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. It includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S2503, if it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit (S2503: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is in the jackpot (S2503: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S2504).

If it is determined in the process of S2504 that it is the start timing of a new round (S2504: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S2505). The details of this jackpot operation setting process (S2505) will be described with reference to FIG. 55, but the process corresponding to the open operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type (operation process of the variable winning device 65 and the switching member 650h) Will be executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 55, the jackpot operation setting process (S2505), which is one of the processes in the jackpot control process (S2404 in FIG. 54), will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S2505).

When the jackpot operation setting process (S2505) is executed, first, among the opening operation scenarios set corresponding to the current jackpot, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started this time is set. Read the operation scenario (S2641). The opening operation of the large opening is set based on the data read in S2641 (S2642), and then this process is terminated.

In this way, since each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Problems can be suppressed. Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S2504: Yes in FIG. 54), a round for showing that a new round game is executed. The command is configured to be set. The round command set here is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and is configured so that the progress status for the jackpot game being executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be determined. Therefore, based on the round command received from the main control device 110, it is possible to display in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 which round of the round game is currently in progress.

In the present embodiment, as the round command set by the main control device 110, a round command including information for indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be executed is set, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be configured to set a round command containing only information indicating that a new round game has been started. In this case, a means for measuring the number of round commands received during one big hit game is provided on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and what round is the round game executed this time on the voice lamp control device 113 side? Is calculated, and the display mode of the round number display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be set based on the calculation result. With such a configuration, the amount of information included in the round command set on the main control device 110 side can be reduced, so that the burden on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2504 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S2504: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2506). As for the start timing of the ending effect, the final round in the jackpot game (16th round in the case of jackpot A) is completed, the opening / closing door 65b is closed, and the waiting time (in the present embodiment) which is the ball ejection time. When 3 seconds) has elapsed, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2506: Yes), an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S2507), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2506, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2506: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2508). The end timing of the jackpot is specifically the end timing of the set ending effect. In the process of S2509, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (end timing of the ending effect) (S2509: Yes), the jackpot end process for setting the end of the jackpot is executed (S2509), and this process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the end of the big hit (S2508: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the details of the jackpot end processing (S2512) will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing (S2512). In this jackpot end process (S2512), a process of setting a high probability state of a special symbol or a high probability state of a normal symbol is executed according to the winning jackpot type.

When the jackpot end process (S2512) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type this time is jackpot A or jackpot B (S2701). If it is determined that the jackpot type this time is jackpot A or jackpot B (S2701: Yes), the probability variation counter 203g is the jackpot type in which the probability variation state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game ends. The value is set to 70 (S2702), and the process proceeds to S2703. On the other hand, in the process of S2701 when it is determined that the jackpot type this time is jackpot C (S2701: No), the process of S2702 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2703.

In the process of S2703, 70 is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203h (S2703). Then, a command indicating a change in the gaming state is set (S2704), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 57 to 76, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S4116 is performed by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") (see FIG. 58). ) Is started in the middle of execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 58, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S4113 in FIG. 58), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S4116. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S4116 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S4116 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S4116 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the data is transferred to S4008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the voice lamp control device 113 is being executed during the power-off processing of S4117. MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 58). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4116 is executed, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S4116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), after clearing the work area of the RAM in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4009) and setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), then , Interrupt permission is set (S4011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S4008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the processing of S4004 to S4006 is performed via the processing of S4008. This is the case when the process is reached or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S4010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010).

It should be noted that the reason for skipping the clearing process of S4009 is that when the processing of S4008 is reached via the processing of S4004 to S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S4004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S4101 was executed (S4101). If it has not elapsed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4111 without performing the process of S4102 to S4110. In the process of S4101, it is the process related to the display (effect) that S4102 to S4110 determine whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4111 and the variation display setting process of S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S4111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on this, the settings related to the variable display effect can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, a command for transmitting various commands to the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4113 to the display control device 114. The output process is executed (S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process shifts to the process of S4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is a display control device as a command. It is transmitted to 114.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S4107), details will be described later with reference to FIG. 72, but the first frame button 22a or the second frame button 22b operated by the player in order to enhance the effect of the effect. (Hereinafter, when both frame buttons are collectively referred to, they are referred to as frame button 22.) It is set to monitor the input of whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed, and to perform an effect corresponding to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to do. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of button effects are set at the same time, a process of differentiating the button effects to be executed according to the priority is executed based on the information of the button effect hierarchy storage area 223 m. Further, when a plurality of button effects are executed in duplicate, a process for effectively setting the operation of the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b is executed.

After the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S4109, the liquid crystal display execution management process is executed (S4110). After that, the process proceeds to S4111. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the processing of S4110, the command determination processing (S4111) that performs the processing according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to the processing of S4112. The details of this command determination process (S4111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 59.

In the process of S4112, in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed by the display control device 114. Executes the variable display setting process, which is the process set to send to. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 67.

When the processing of S4112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S4115), and the power-off process is executed (S4116). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S4117), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to the process of S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4111). This command determination process (S4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .. Hereinafter, the details of the command determination process (S4111) will be described.

In the command determination process (S4111), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and a special figure is drawn from the main control device 110. 1 It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S4201). Here, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time, hit / miss determination result) of the first special symbol. If it is determined in the process of S4201 that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received (S4201: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start process is executed (S4202), and this process ends. The details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG. 60.

On the other hand, in the process of S4201, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S4201: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110. (S4203). The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

If it is determined in the process of S4203 that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received (S4203: Yes), the special figure 2 variation start process provided in the RAM 223 is executed (S4204), and this process is terminated. The details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 61. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is stored in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 67) described later. , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol). If you do).

If it is determined in the processing of S4203 that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4203: No), then whether or not the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received. (S4205). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4205: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S4206), and this process is terminated. The details of this stop type command reception process (S4206) will be described later with reference to FIG. 62.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received in the processing of S4205 (S4205: No), has the reserved ball number command been received from the main controller 110? Determine (S4207). Here, if it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S4207: Yes), the hold ball number process (S4208) is executed, and this process ends. The details of the reserved ball number processing (S4208) will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

Further, in the process of S4207, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S4207: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4209). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received in the processing of S4209 (S4209: Yes), the information of the winning information command received this time is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S4210), and this processing is terminated. ..

In the process of S4209, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4209: No), then it is determined whether or not the status command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S4211). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S4211: Yes), the status command reception process is executed (S4212), and this process is terminated. The details of this state command reception process (S4212) will be described later with reference to FIG. 64, but the gaming state (normal state, probability change state, latent state) of the pachinko machine 10 based on the state command output from the main control device 110. The process of setting the probability state) and the winning game state (during the big hit) in the slave state setting area 223k is executed.

Next, in the process of S4211 when it is determined that the status command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop related command has been received (S4213). When it is determined that the fluctuation stop-related command has been received in the processing of S4213 (S4213), a display command indicating the corresponding symbol stop is set based on the fluctuation stop-related command received from the main controller 110 (S4214). This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4213, when it is determined that the fluctuation stop related command is not received (S4213: No), it is determined whether the hit related command is received (S4215), and it is determined that the hit related command is received. In the case (S4215: Yes), the hit-related process is executed (S4216), and this process is terminated. The details of the hit-related process (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG. The process for causing the 81 to execute is performed.

If it is determined in the process of S4215 that the hit-related command has not been received (S4215: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S4217), and this process is terminated. In the processing of S4217, if the other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is performed. Is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

The command determination process (S4111 in FIG. 59) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment has been described above. However, in the command determination process (S4111), the order of determining whether or not various commands are received is described. , An order other than the order shown in the present embodiment may be used. For example, the process of determining whether or not a state command has been received is performed by either the special figure 1 variation pattern command or the special figure 2 variation pattern command. The discriminant order may be specified so as to be executed before the process of discriminating whether or not the command has been received.

With this configuration, when the fluctuation pattern command and the status command are output from the main controller 110 at the same time, that is, in the first special symbol variation start processing of the main controller 110 (see S210 in FIG. 35). In this case, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 37) is executed, the special diagram 1 variation pattern command is set, and then the state command indicating that the game state is changed is set. Also, the game state currently set on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be determined before the special figure 1 variation pattern command.

Further, it is necessary to specify the output order of various commands on the main control device 110 side by configuring the voice lamp control device 113 side to specify the reception order of various commands output from the main control device 110. Can be reduced. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S4202). This special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S4202) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is set to the game state set. Accordingly, a process of setting a display mode (main variation variation pattern, slave variation variation pattern) corresponding to the first special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

Then, the display control device 114 has a third symbol based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 67) described later. The display mode to be displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. With this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 in which a plurality of special symbols are variablely displayed at the same time (in parallel), priority is given to the variable display of the third symbol for showing the lottery result of one of the special symbols. Since it can be displayed on, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is set as the gaming state, the ball is made to flow into the ball entry unit 64 (see FIG. 2), and the first ball entry port 64b1 and the left second ball entry port are used. A left-handed game in which a ball is inserted into 64b2 is performed, and the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery are configured to be executed evenly.

In this case, it is conceivable to divide the display area of the third symbol display device 81 evenly and display both the variable display of the lottery result of the special figure 1 and the variable display of the lottery result of the special figure 2. When such a configuration is used, a plurality of variable displays (special figure 1 variable display, special figure 2 variable display) are executed at the same time, and the variable display (off-range fluctuation) indicating that the special figure lottery result is out of order is displayed. There was a problem that the motivation to play was reduced because it was displayed frequently. Further, there is a problem that a plurality of fluctuation displays are executed at different fluctuation speeds, and the eyes of the player who is watching the fluctuation display are tired.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the variation display showing the lottery result of the special figure 1 is set as the main variation display and displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 to show the lottery result of the special figure 2. The variation display is a slave variation display, and is configured to be executed in the small display area Dm4 of the three symbol display devices 81. Then, the special figure 2 variable display in which the dependent variable display is executed is configured to be switched to the main variable display when the lottery result of the special figure 2 satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, a big hit winning).

With this configuration, when the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery are executed evenly, it is difficult for the player to grasp the deviation variation of the special symbol (special figure 2) on the dependent variation display side. Therefore, it is possible to make a big hit with respect to the variable display number (the total number of the variable display number of the special figure 1 and the big hit variable display number of the special figure 2) that is variablely displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Since the ratio of the number of fluctuations indicating winning (the number of times the number of jackpot fluctuations in Special Figure 1 and the number of jackpot fluctuations in Special Figure 2 are added) can be increased, it is apparently higher than the actual jackpot probability. You can make it think that you won the jackpot with a probability.

Further, by configuring the variable display corresponding to one special symbol to be emphasized and executed among the plurality of special symbols, the player can be made to pay attention only to the variable display corresponding to one special symbol. Therefore, the fatigue of the player can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is used as the main variation display during the normal state, and the variation display of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is performed during the probabilistic state and the time saving state. Is configured to be the main variable display. That is, the special symbol to be displayed as the main variation is variably set according to the game state. That is, when the probabilistic state and the time saving state are set as the game state, the game of entering the ball into the second entrance 640 is executed by executing the right-handed game. The special figure 2 lottery is easier to execute than the lottery, and the special figure 1 lottery is hardly executed.

Therefore, during the probable change state and the time saving state, the special figure lottery is actually executed by configuring the variable display corresponding to the special figure 2 lottery (special figure 2 variable display) to be the main variable display. Regardless of this, it is possible to make it difficult for a situation in which variable display is not executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to occur, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

In this embodiment, there is a variation for showing the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state where a plurality of types of special figure lottery (special figure 1 lottery, special figure 2 lottery) are evenly executed. The display is set to be the main variable display, but the display is not limited to this, and the variable display for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery may be the main variable display, and the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure may be used. The benefits that can be given when a big hit is won in 2 lottery (the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game and the game state that is set after the big hit game is over) are different, and it is easy to give advantageous benefits to the player. The variable display corresponding to the special symbol on the side may be configured to be set as the main variable display.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special figure type to be the main variation display is variably set according to the set game state, but the special figure type to be the main variation display is variably set under different conditions. For example, in a gaming state in which a plurality of types of special drawing lottery (special drawing 1 lottery, special drawing 2 lottery) are evenly executed, a waiting state in which the special drawing lottery is not executed is in progress. It is preferable to configure the variable display corresponding to the special drawing lottery executed earlier to be the main variable display. As a result, even though the lottery conditions for the special drawing lottery (starting prize at the entrance) are satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the special symbol for which the lottery was executed earlier is set to the secondary variable display. It is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted because the variable display is not executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the player may be configured to select which special symbol is to be the main variation display.

When the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see S4202 in FIG. 60) is set, first. The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to on (S4301), the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command (S4302), and the detailed display mode is selected using the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a. ).

Next, the information set (stored) in the slave state setting area 223k (information indicating the current gaming state) is read out, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal state (S4304). If it is determined in the processing of S4304 that the current state is the normal state (S4304: Yes), a display command indicating the special figure 1 main fluctuation pattern is issued in order to make the fluctuation display of the first special symbol the main fluctuation display. Set (S4305) and end this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4304 that the current game state is not the normal state (time saving state, probability change state) (S4304: No), the change display of the second special symbol becomes the main change display. Since it is in a state (because the variation display of the first special symbol is a gaming state in which the slave variation display is used), a display command indicating the special figure 1 slave variation pattern is set (S4306), and this process is terminated.

Here, when a display command indicating the main fluctuation pattern of Special Figure 1 is set, it is output to the display control device 114 by the command output process (see S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 58) of the voice lamp control device 113. And stored in the display control device 114 side. When the display control device 114 receives a display command related to the special figure 1 fluctuation while the command indicating the special figure 1 main fluctuation pattern is stored, the display content corresponding to the command is displayed as the third symbol. Image data is generated so as to be displayed in the main display area Dm of the device 81. On the other hand, when the display control device 114 receives the display command related to the special figure 1 variation while the command indicating the special figure 1 slave variation pattern is stored, the display content corresponding to the command is the third symbol. It is controlled so that it is not displayed in the main display area Dm of the display device 81.

In this way, regardless of the setting status of the main fluctuation display and the slave fluctuation display, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the display command indicating the fluctuation effect corresponding to each special figure fluctuation, and the display control device 114 side. , Voice lamp control by configuring to generate image data to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the setting status of the main variation display and the slave variation display and the received display command. It is possible to omit the process of discriminating the setting status of the main variation display and the subordinate variation display on the device 113 side and setting the display command indicating the variation effect corresponding to the discrimination result, and the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. It can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204). This special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4204) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is set to the game state set. Accordingly, a process of setting a display mode (main variation variation pattern, slave variation variation pattern) corresponding to the second special symbol (special diagram 2) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

Then, the display control device 114 has a third symbol based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 67) described later. The display mode to be displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. Hereinafter, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204) will be described.

When the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4204) is set, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to ON (S4351), and the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command (S4352). , A detailed display mode is selected using the variation pattern selection table 222a (S4353).

Next, the information set (stored) in the slave state setting area 223k (information indicating the current gaming state) is read out, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal state (S4354). When it is determined in the process of S4354 that the current state is not the normal state (normal state, probable change state), that is, (S4354: No), the variation display of the second special symbol is the subordinate gaming state. Special Figure 2 A display command indicating the main fluctuation pattern is set (S4355), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4354 that the gaming state is the normal state (S4354: Yes), the variation display of the second special symbol is the subordinate gaming state (the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed). (Because it is the main gaming state), a display command indicating the special figure 2 follow-up variation pattern is set (S4356), and this process is terminated.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol (lottery) and the variation of the second special symbol (lottery) are executed simultaneously (in parallel), both special symbols are executed. While simultaneously displaying the variation effect display (variation display of the third symbol and the fourth symbol) corresponding to the variation display of the third symbol display device 81, each special symbol (first symbol) is set according to the game state to be set. By configuring the display mode (the size of the display area and the presence / absence of display as the third symbol) of the special symbol and the second special symbol to be variably set, the fluctuation status (lottery result and the number of fluctuations) can be changed at present. The player can easily grasp the special symbol type to be watched.

Therefore, even if a game specification is used in which a plurality of special symbol types simultaneously (parallel) change (lottery), it is possible to suppress the provision of a game that is difficult for the player to understand.

Next, the stop type command reception process (S4206) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this stop type command reception process (S4206). This stop type command reception process (S4206) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Hereinafter, the details of the stop type command reception process (S4206) will be described.

In the stop type command reception process (S4206), first, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received in response to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223 g is set to ON, and the special figure 2 is set. When the stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON (S4401). Next, the stop type (big hit A to big hit C, miss, reach miss, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S4402), and this process is terminated.

The stop type extracted in the process of S4402 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the second special symbol. It is identifiable that it is a stop type. As a result, even if the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) start to change at the same time, it is possible to manage the stop types respectively, and to execute an appropriate change display. Can be done.

Next, the contents of the reserved ball number processing (S4208) executed in the command determination process (see S4111 in FIG. 59) will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 shows the reserved ball number processing (S4208). In this hold ball number processing (S4208), when the hold ball number is the upper limit value, the process for setting the hold effect is executed.

When the reserved ball number processing (S4208) is executed, first, the symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the received command (reserved ball number command) are extracted (S4501). The value of the reserved ball number counter (first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d) corresponding to the extracted symbol type is updated (S4502), and the process proceeds to S4503.

In the process of S4503, it is determined whether or not the current number of reserved balls is the upper limit value (S4503). When it is determined that the number of reserved balls is the upper limit value (S4503: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the timing to execute the reserved effect (S4504). Specifically, a lottery for whether or not to execute the hold effect when the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit is executed, and it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a lottery result for executing the hold effect. Then, when it is determined that the hold effect is to be executed (S4504: Yes), a display command indicating the hold effect is set (S4505), and the value of the hold effect counter 223j is set to 8 (S4506). .. Then, other processes related to the hold are executed (S4507), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not the upper limit value in the processing of S4503 (S4503: No), or when it is determined that the holding effect is not executed in the processing of S4504 (S4504: No), S4505 to The process of S4506 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4507.

Next, the state command reception process (S4212) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this state command reception process (S4212). This state command reception process (S4212) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is executed according to the set gaming state. The process for setting the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to be different is executed. Hereinafter, the details of the status command reception process (S4212) will be described.

When the state command reception process (S4212) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the currently set gaming state is changed (S4601). Here, it is determined whether or not the gaming state set in the slave state setting area 223k and the gaming state indicated by the state command received this time are different. If it is determined in the process of S4601 that there is a change in the gaming state (S4601: Yes), it is determined whether the changed gaming state is the normal state (S4602).

In the process of S4602, when it is determined that the changed gaming state is the normal state (when the state command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (S4602: Yes), the main display area corresponding to the normal state. Set the setting command (S4603), set the display command indicating the normal mode (S4604), store (set) the information indicated by the status command received this time in the subordinate status setting area 223k (S4610), and perform this process. finish.

Here, the command set in the process of S4603 and the process of S4604 is notified to the display control device 114, so that the variation effect display in the normal state is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, in the voice lamp control device 113, the types of various display modes displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 based on the state command output from the main control device 110 ( The mode (mode, background) is set, and a command indicating the type is output to the display control device 114.

With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable effect display for each game state set on the voice lamp control device 113 side. That is, a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set game state and a variation pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol are output to the display control device 114. Only, based on the type command received on the display control device 114 side and the common command, the display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display mode corresponding to the current game state and the received variation pattern is displayed. Can be set. Therefore, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

As described above, when the display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by combining a plurality of commands received from the voice lamp control device 113 on the display control device 114 side, the display data is set. It is configured to output information (confirmation information) indicating the contents of the displayed data after setting from the display control device 114 side to the voice lamp control device 113 side, and the confirmation information received by the voice lamp control device 113 side is appropriate. A discriminating means for discriminating the existence is provided, and when it is determined that the discriminant result is not appropriate, a simple display variation pattern command indicating appropriate information is set, and the content of the display data already set is set. It is good to configure it so that it can be rewritten to simple display data.

With this configuration, when the voice lamp control device 113 does not set appropriate display data for various commands received from the main control device 110, simple display data indicating appropriate information is set. It is possible to display a variable effect display based on the simple display data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from being reduced due to the execution of the variable effect display having a content different from the actual game result (lottery result of the special symbol). Further, as the simple display data described above, for example, display data for displaying a special mode (for example, a mode with a black background) that does not correspond to any gaming state, or display data for executing variable display of the fourth symbol. It is sufficient to use display data having a smaller amount of data than the display data used in the normal variable effect display.

In this embodiment, the above-described configuration is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a display variation pattern command based on the current gaming state and the received variation pattern is set on the voice lamp control device 113 side. It may be configured to do so.

Returning to FIG. 64, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4602, if it is determined that the changed gaming state is not the normal state (when the state command received this time is not a command indicating the normal state) (S4602: No), then the changed gaming state is When it is determined whether the state is the probabilistic state (S4605) and the gaming state is the probable change state (the state command received this time is a command indicating the probable change state) (S4605: Yes), the probable change state is supported. The main display area setting command, that is, the command for the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol is set (S4606), the display command indicating the probability change mode is set (S4607), and the above-mentioned processing of S4610 is performed. Move to.

On the other hand, in the process of S4605, when it is determined that the game state after the change is not the probable change state (the state command received this time is not the command indicating the probable change state), that is, when the state command indicating the time saving state is received. (S4605: No), the main display area setting command corresponding to the time saving state is set (S4608), the display command indicating the time saving mode is set (S4609), and the process proceeds to the above-mentioned S4610.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, a hit-related process (S4220), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related process (S4220). In this hit-related process (S4220), as a result of the lottery of the special symbol, the process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won is performed. , Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 when the jackpot is won is executed.

In addition, when a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during the winning game (big hit game) is received, the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated and based on the cumulative result. The process of setting the display prize ball count command is executed.

In the hit-related process (S4220), first, it is determined whether the command received by the command determination process (see FIG. 59) is a jackpot-related command (S5001). If it is determined that the received command is a jackpot-related command (S5001: Yes), the jackpot-related process is executed (S5002), and then this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 66, the jackpot-related process (S5002), which is one of the hit-related processes (S4220 in FIG. 65) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S5002). In the jackpot-related processing, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, and when the jackpot is won, the main control device is used. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related process (S5002), first, it is determined whether the hit-related command received by the hit-related process (S4220 in FIG. 65) is the jackpot start command (S5101). If it is determined that the received command is a jackpot start command (S5101: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S5102), and then this process is terminated. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S5101, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S5101: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S5103). When it is determined that the round number command has been received (S5103: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number (S5104), and then this process is terminated. In this embodiment, since the main control device 110 transmits information indicating the number of rounds as a round number command, the display round number command is set based on the received round number command. In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the control unit 110, the voice lamp control unit is configured to transmit information indicating that a new round has started from the main control unit 110 as a round update command. When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of 113, a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and the current round is performed on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the value of the round number accumulation counter. It may be configured to calculate the number and set the display round number command.

On the other hand, in the process of S5103, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S5103: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S5105). If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S5105: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5105, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S5105: Yes), the display ending command is set (S5106), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 65, the description will be continued. In the process of S5001, when it is determined that the received command is not a jackpot related command (S5001: No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a prize ball command (S5003). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S5003: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is a prize ball command (S5003: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of the prize ball count counter (not shown) (S5004). A display prize ball number command corresponding to the value of the prize ball number counter after addition is set (S5005), and then this process is terminated.

Although detailed description will be omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the state command reception process (see S4212 in FIG. 64), the command was received during the period until the normal state is set (advantageous continuation period). The number of prize balls corresponding to the prize ball number command is configured to be accumulated by the prize ball number counter. Then, the number of prize balls corresponding to the cumulative value of the prize ball counter is displayed during the jackpot game or the latent state.

With this configuration, in the state where the normal state is set, the ball acquired during the period (advantageous continuation period) from the setting of the time saving state or the probabilistic state to the setting of the normal state again. The cumulative number can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Furthermore, the number of prize balls acquired in one game period within the advantageous continuation period (the period obtained by combining the jackpot game period and the time-saving state period until the next jackpot game is executed, or the probable change state period) is accumulated. It may be configured to be displayed. In this case, it is preferable to provide a storage means for storing the cumulative number of prize balls acquired during one game period as history information, and to display the information stored in the storage means in the history.

Further, as described above, when the configuration of cumulatively displaying the number of prize balls acquired within the advantageous continuation period is used, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the lottery result (big hit) which is advantageous to the player is displayed. Alternatively, the lottery probability that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the lottery result (big hit) that is advantageous to the player may be displayed.

With this configuration, it becomes possible for the player to analyze the lottery result of the special symbol executed during the advantageous continuation period and the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period, and the game is enthusiastically played. Can be done.

Further, when the game content (lottery result of a special symbol) during the advantageous continuation period satisfies a predetermined condition, a notification means for executing the condition achievement notification to indicate that fact may be provided. For example, a big hit is won. The condition achievement notification for indicating that the number of special symbol lottery executed up to this point (so-called number of times of harmony) has exceeded a predetermined number of times (100 times) may be executed. Further, the condition achievement notification for indicating that the number of prize balls acquired within one advantageous continuation period exceeds a predetermined number (5000) may be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the variation display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S4112). This variation display setting process (S4112 in FIG. 67) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (S4112 in FIG. 67) is performed on the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a variable pattern command (effect pattern) for displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set, and a process of transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop types (big hit A to big hit C), a process of setting a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the variation display setting process (S4112), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5301). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S5301: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S5305 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S5301: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S5302). Then, the special figure 1 button effect setting process (S5303) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 68, the special figure 1 button effect setting process (S5303), which is one of the processes in the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 button effect setting process (S5303). In this special figure 1 button effect setting process (S5303), a process for determining whether or not to execute the button effect as the variation effect of the current special figure 1 variation, and a process for setting the effect mode of the button effect. And are executed.

In the special figure 1 button effect setting process (S5303), first, the information stored in the slave state setting area 223k is read, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal state (S5401). When it is determined that the current gaming state is not a normal state (probability change state or time saving state) (S5401: No), the entire surface of the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used. The variable display of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is set as the main variable display which is the variable display, and the button effect based on the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is set. Since there is no need, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5401 when it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state (S5401: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 button effect flag 223q is on (S5402). The special figure 2 button effect flag 223q will be described in detail later, but is set to ON when the button effect is set based on the special figure 2 variation in the button effect mode setting process (S5303 in FIG. 71). Is. In the process of S5402, it is determined that the special figure 2 button effect flag 223q is on (S5402: Yes), that is, the button effect is set by the change of the second special symbol (special figure 2 change). In this case, since the button effect of the special figure 1 is not newly set, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 button effect flag 223q is not on (S5402: No), the button effect corresponding to the current special figure change is selected with reference to the button effect selection table 222c (S5403). .. Then, it is determined whether the button effect is selected (button effect can be executed) by the process of S5403 (S5404), and if it is determined that the button effect can be executed (S5404: Yes), the execution timing is set. The process (S5405) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5403 that the button effect is not selected (S5404: No), the process of S5405 is skipped and the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the execution timing setting process (S5405), which is one of the processes in the special figure 1 button effect setting process (see S5303 in FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. explain. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the execution timing setting process (S5405). In this execution timing setting process, a process for correcting the execution timing of the button effect set in the special figure 1 button effect setting process (see S5303 in FIG. 68) is executed.

That is, when the special figure 1 lottery (variation) and the special figure 2 lottery (variation) are configured to be executed at the same time (in parallel) as in the present embodiment, for example, special figure 1 The execution timing of the button effect set based on the variation may be the timing at which the variation is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot, and the button effect that is meaningless to the player is executed. There was a problem. In addition, in order to solve this problem, during the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation, or when the information indicating the jackpot is included in the hold storage of the special figure 2, the button effect is performed by the special figure 1 fluctuation. If a restriction is provided so as not to execute the button effect, the frequency of executing the button effect is reduced, and there is a possibility that a new problem may occur in which the effect of the button effect is reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the button effect corresponding to one special figure change (special figure 1 change) is set, the change state (lottery situation) of the other special figure change (special figure 2 change). Is analyzed, and based on the analysis result, a process of changing the execution timing of the button effect corresponding to one of the special figure fluctuations is configured to be executable.

With this configuration, when a big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, the button effect of the special figure 1 lottery is executed while avoiding the timing of notifying the player of the lottery result (the stop timing of the big hit symbol). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the button effect from being executed less frequently. In addition, when the button effect of the same mode is executed at a timing different from the usual time, the player feels uncomfortable, and the uncomfortable feeling can remind the player of a big hit (the big hit of the special figure 2 lottery). You can improve your interest.

In the execution timing setting process (S5405), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 lottery this time is a big hit (S5501). When it is determined that the special figure 1 lottery this time is a big hit (S5501: No), the prize information of the special figure 2 stored in the prize information storage area 223b is read out (S5502). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b read in the process of S5502 includes the winning information indicating a big hit (S5503). If it is determined that there is a big hit in the special figure 2 winning information (S5503: Yes), the time until the fluctuation corresponding to the winning information including the information indicating the big hit (special figure 2 big hit fluctuation) is calculated is calculated. (S5504), and the process proceeds to S5505.

In the process of S5505, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation start timing is later than the start timing of the fluctuation (S5505). That is, in the processing of S5505, the timing at which the fluctuation time set for the special figure 1 fluctuation to be executed this time elapses and the timing at which the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation is started are determined, and the special figure 1 fluctuation to be executed this time is dealt with. It is determined whether or not it is necessary to correct the effect mode (execution timing) of the variable effect (button effect) to be performed. In the processing of S5505, the start timing of the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation is not later than the timing at which the fluctuation time set for the special figure 1 fluctuation to be executed this time elapses, that is, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation to be described this time. If it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation will start (S5505: No), the timing at which the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation starts is within 15 seconds after the special figure 1 fluctuation to be executed this time starts. (S5506).

In the process of S5506, when the button effect set by the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed at the normal timing (see FIG. 24), the normal button is used to determine whether the button effect overlaps with the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation. It is determined whether the effect period (10 to 15 seconds from the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation) overlaps with the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation.

If it is determined in the process of S5506 that it is not within 15 seconds, even if the normal button effect is executed, the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation is not executed during the button effect. A predetermined period in the selection table 222c is set as the button effect execution period. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5506 that the start timing of the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation is within 15 seconds (15 seconds or more) (S5506: Yes), the execution timing of the button effect is corrected (variable). (S5507) is executed.

In the process of S5507, the effect information included in the button effect is corrected so that the button effect is executed in the period before the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation start timing. Then, the corrected effect mode (information) is set in the button effect hierarchy storage area (S5507), the special figure 1 button effect flag 23 is set to ON, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation is not after the special figure 2 (S5505: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation start timing is within 15 seconds (S5506: No), and the fluctuation start timing is 15 seconds. If it is determined that it is not within (S5506: No), the button effect execution period is set in the period before the start timing of the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation (S5507), and the corresponding area of the button effect hierarchy storage area 223 m is set. The button effect information is set (S5508), then the special figure 1 button effect flag 223s is set to ON (S5509), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S5506, if it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation start timing is not within 15 seconds (S5506: Yes), it is impossible to set the button effect, so this processing is terminated as it is. do.

Further, in the processing of S5501, when it is determined that the special figure 1 lottery this time is a big hit (S5501: Yes), or in the processing of S5503, when it is determined that there is no big hit in the special figure 2 winning information ( S5503: No), the execution period of the button effect in the variation of the special figure 1 is set as it is (S5510), and the process proceeds to the above-mentioned process of S5508. Further, in the process of S5555, even when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation start timing is later than the change (S5505: Yes), the process of S5510 is executed and the process shifts to the process of S5508.

As described above, in the execution timing correction process (S5405) in the present embodiment, the special figure stored in the special figure 2 hold (the special figure stored in the prize information storage area 223b) at the execution timing of the special figure 1 variation. Determining whether there is winning information having information indicating a big hit in the winning information corresponding to 2), and determining the execution (start) timing of the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the winning information including the information indicating the big hit. By using, the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed during the current special figure 1 fluctuation, or the start timing of the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 2 is determined, and the special figure 1 fluctuation is determined based on the determination result. It is configured to set the effect mode corresponding to, but is not limited to this, for example, the number of special figure 2 fluctuations until the special figure 2 big hit change is executed (out of the special figure 2 hold, the big hit hold). The number of special figures 2 held before the special figure 2 change based on the above is determined), and the jackpot change of special figure 2 is executed during the current special figure 1 change based on the determination result. It may be configured to determine whether or not.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the variable time and the special figure of the special figure 1 set in the gaming machine capable of simultaneously (parallel) executing the special figure 1 lottery (variation) and the special figure 2 lottery (variation). Each special drawing lottery (variation) is configured to be executed evenly without providing a large difference from the fluctuation time of 2, but for example, the special drawing 1 lottery (variation) and the special drawing 1 lottery (variation) are similarly performed as in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 In a gaming machine capable of simultaneously (parallel) executing a lottery (variation), one special figure lottery is efficiently executed according to a set game state, and the other special figure. In order to provide a game state in which the lottery is efficiently executed, a long time (for example, a deviation variation of 10 minutes, a hit variation) is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation on the side that makes it difficult to execute the special figure lottery in each game state. If the variable time of (set to 4 minutes) can be set, the special figure 2 change during execution or the special figure 2 to be executed next time in the game state in which the special figure 1 lottery is easy to be executed. FIG. 2 Only by determining whether or not the lottery (variation) is a big hit, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the big hit change of the special figure 2 is executed during the current change of the special figure 1.

Further, in this case, the maximum time set as the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 lottery is set when the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery that is difficult to be executed is a big hit in the gaming state where the special figure 1 lottery is easily executed. It is advisable to set the fluctuation time of each special figure so that it is shorter than the shortest fluctuation time. With such a configuration, it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed during the current change of the special figure 1.

Returning to FIG. 67, the explanation will be continued. After executing the special figure 1 button effect setting process (S5303), next, based on the extracted variation pattern, the variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is set and the variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is set. (S5304), the first special symbol reserved ball number counter is decremented by 1 (S5305), and the process proceeds to S5306. On the other hand, in the process of S5301 when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S5301: No), the process of S5302 to S5305 described above is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S5306.

In the process of S5306, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is ON (S5306). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is on (S5306: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to off (S5307), and the second special is based on the extracted fluctuation pattern. A variation pattern command for displaying a symbol is set (S5308), and then a special figure 2 button effect setting process (S5309) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 70, the special figure 2 button effect setting process (S5309), which is one of the processes in the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 button effect setting process (S5309).

In the special figure 2 button effect setting process (S5309), first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the normal state (S5601). If it is determined that the current gaming state is not a normal state (that is, a probable change or a time saving state) (S5601: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state is the normal state (S5601: Yes), the button effect is executed depending on whether or not the special figure 1 button effect flag 223s is on, that is, the change of the first special symbol. It is determined whether or not it is present (S5602). When it is determined that the special figure 1 button effect flag 223s is on (S5602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol this time is a big hit (S5603). If it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big hit (S5603: No), it is not necessary to give priority to the button effect of the second special symbol, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5603, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit (S5603: Yes), or in the processing of S5602, it is determined that the special figure 1 button effect flag 223s is not on. If this is the case (S5602: No), since it is the timing at which the button effect can be set even when the second special symbol changes, the button effect corresponding to this change is selected from the button effect selection table 222c (S5604).

Then, it is determined whether or not the button effect is feasible (S5605). If it is determined that the button effect is not feasible (S5605: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the button effect can be executed (S5605: Yes), the button effect mode setting process (S5606) is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 71, a button effect mode setting process (S5606), which is one process in the special figure 2 button effect setting process (S5309) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this button effect mode setting process (S5606). In the button effect mode setting process (S5606), when the button effect is set for both the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the process of setting the button effect according to the priority of the button effect is performed. Execute it, and set the button effect if it can be set more than once.

In the button effect mode setting process (S5606), first, the button effect information set in the button effect layer storage area 223 m is read (S5701), and then the button effect layer storage area 223 m read in the process of S5701 has the highest priority. It is determined whether or not there is production information in the area (S5702). If it is determined that there is effect information in the highest priority area (S5702: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no effect information in the highest priority area (S5702: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation during execution is a big hit (S5703). If it is determined that the special figure 1 change during execution is a big hit (S5703: Yes), the current special figure 1 big hit change is prioritized over the button effect with the special figure 2 change, so this process is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation during execution is not a big hit (S5703: No), the process proceeds to S5704.

In the process of S5704, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the button effect of the second special symbol set this time is during the button effect period of the first special symbol (S5704). If it is determined that the button effect period of the first special symbol is in progress (S5704: Yes), the duplicate button effect is performed during the period when the set first special symbol and the button effect period of the second special symbol overlap. Set (S5705). As described above, the duplicate button effect set here is during the period when the button effect of the first special symbol and the button effect of the second special symbol overlap when the fluctuation result of the second special symbol is a hit. Set the button effect C. By configuring in this way, the staging effect can be enhanced.

On the other hand, in the process of S5704, when it is determined that the execution timing of the button effect is not during the button effect period of FIG. 1 (S5704: No), the button effect is set in the highest priority area (S5706), and S5707. Is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S4107) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S4107). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S4107) is executed in the main process executed by the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process for starting or operating an effect using the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b. To execute. In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S4107), the button effect start process (S5801) is first executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 73, a button effect start process (S5801), which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S4107) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this button effect start process (S5801). In this button effect start process (S5801), each button effect information stored in the button effect hierarchy storage area 223 m is read, and when it is the start timing of the button effect, a process for executing the button effect is executed. To. Further, when the button effect having the highest priority (priority 1) is executed, a process for discarding the button effect being executed is executed. By executing such a process, it is possible to appropriately execute a plurality of button effects set at different triggers according to the priority. In addition, only the button effect with the highest priority (button effect with a high effect effect) can be surely executed even while other button effects are being executed, which improves the interest of the game. be able to.

In the button effect start process (S5801), first, the information in the button effect hierarchy storage area 223 m is read out (S5901). Next, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the button effect based on the read information (S5902). In the process of S5902, a plurality of information stored in a plurality of storage areas (first layer area 223 m1 to fourth layer area 223 m4) are configured to be read out in descending order of priority. Therefore, when the execution timings of the button effects are the same, the button effects having a high priority are executed.

In this embodiment, when the button valid period start timing (see FIG. 24) specified in the button effect selection table 222b is reached, it is determined that the button effect start timing is reached. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a range of 2 seconds (4 seconds) before and after the button valid period start timing may be defined as the same timing for determination. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the button effect from being complicatedly executed when the start timings of the plurality of button effects are stored so as to be slightly different.

Further, in addition to the above-mentioned contents, a plurality of button effects stored at timings where the valid periods set for each button effect overlap may be determined as button effects executed at the same timing. good.

Returning to FIG. 73, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5902 that it is not the start timing of the button effect (S5902: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the button effect (S5902: Yes), the button effect to be started this time is set to priority 1 with the information of the button effect hierarchical storage area 223 m read in the process of S5901. (S5902), if it is determined that the priority is 1, (S5903: Yes), it is determined whether or not other button effects are being executed (S5905).

If it is determined in the process of S5905 that another button effect is being executed (S5905: Yes), the button effect of priority 1 is preferentially executed, so that the button operation for the other button effect is invalidated. Set (S5906), set the button effect flag corresponding to the disabled button effect to off (S5907), and then set the display command indicating the button effect corresponding to the information of priority 1 this time. (S5908), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5905, when it is determined that the other button effect is not being executed (S5905: No), it is not necessary to invalidate the other button effect, so the process of S5906 to S5907 is skipped. , S5908.

On the other hand, in the process of S5903, when it is determined that the button effect of this time is not priority 1 (S5903: No), a display command indicating the button effect corresponding to the priority of this time is set (S5904). This process ends.

Returning to FIG. 72, the explanation will be continued. After executing the button effect start process (S5801), the button effect update process (S5802) is then executed. Here, with reference to FIG. 74, a button effect update process (S5802), which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S4107) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the button effect update process (S5802). In this button effect update process (S5802), a process of updating the value of the button valid timer 223n and setting a display command corresponding to the operation to the frame button 22 executed during the button effect is executed.

In the button effect update process (S5802), first, the value of the button valid timer 223n is read out (S6001). Next, it is determined whether the value of the button valid timer 223n read in the process of S6001 is larger than 0 (S6002). When the value of the button valid timer 223n is not a value larger than 0 (S6002: No), the operation valid period is set because it is not the operation valid period for effectively determining the operation to the frame button 22. The processing of S6002 to S6009 to be executed when the processing is performed is skipped, and the main processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the button valid timer 223n is larger than 0 (S6002: Yes), the value of the corresponding button valid timer 223n is subtracted by 1 (S6003). Next, it is determined whether the value of the button valid timer 223n subtracted in the process of S6003 is 0, that is, whether it is the end timing of the button effect (S6004). When it is determined that the value of the button valid timer 223n is not 0 (that is, it is a value larger than 0) (S6004: No), since the button effect is being executed, the value of the current button valid timer 223n is set to the current value. Set the corresponding display command (S6005). The display mode (remaining period display mode) of the validity period gauge 812a (see FIG. 9A) is generated by the display command set here.

Then, when the processing of S6005 is completed, the process proceeds to the second frame button setting processing (S6011) described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S6004 that the value of the button valid timer 223n is 0 (S6004: Yes), since it is the end timing of the button effect, the button effect flag of the corresponding special symbol (first). The button effect flag 223p and the second button effect flag 223q) are set to off (S6006), and then it is determined whether the operated flag 223s is set to on (S6007). That is, it is determined whether or not the player operates (presses) the frame button 22 so that the operation condition is satisfied during the operation valid period (during the button valid period).

Specifically, when the operation condition of the button effect executed this time is "perform an operation (press) once for the frame button 22", the frame button 22 is pressed once during the operation valid period. When the operated flag 223s is set to ON when pressed, and the operation condition is "operate (press) the frame button 22 50 times", the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) 50 times during the operation valid period. ), The operated flag 223s is set to ON. The condition for turning on the operated flag 223s is, for example, a predetermined lottery every time the frame button 22 is operated, in addition to the condition that is satisfied when the number of operations for the frame button 22 reaches a predetermined number of times. It may be executed, and a condition that is satisfied when the lottery result is a specific result, a condition that is satisfied when the period in which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed satisfies a predetermined period, and the like may be set.

When it is determined that the operated flag 223s is on in the process of S6007 (S6007: Yes), the display command corresponding to the operated (display command indicating that the button operation during the button production was successful). (S6008), the operated flag 223s is set to off (S6009), the process of S6011 is executed, and this process is terminated. Based on the display command set in the process of S6008, the display control device 114 generates image data corresponding to the success screen of the button effect (see, for example, FIG. 9B), and the third symbol display device 81. Display on.

On the other hand, in the process of S6007, when it is determined that the operated flag 223s is not set to ON (S6007: No), it is not operated (a concept including an operation to the extent that the operation condition is not satisfied during the operation valid period). The corresponding display command is set (S6010), the process of S6011 is executed, and this process is terminated. Here, based on the display command set in the process of S6010, the display control device 114 generates image data corresponding to the button effect failure screen (see FIG. 10) and displays it on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75, a second frame button setting process (S6011), which is one process in the button effect update process (see S5802 in FIG. 74) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. do. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the second frame button setting process (S6011). The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a first frame button 22a and a second frame button 22b as operation means that can be operated by the player, and usually the first frame button 22a is the operation target. It is configured so that the button effect is executed. Then, when a plurality of button effects are set in duplicate, the duplicate button effects for the second frame button 22b are configured to be executed. In this second frame button setting process (S6011), various processes related to the duplicate button effect are executed for the second frame button 22b.

In the second frame button setting process (S6011), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the button effect. (S6101). Then, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the button effect (S6101: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the duplicate button effect (S6102). When it is determined that it is the start timing of the duplicate button effect (S6102: Yes), the second frame button valid flag 223r is set to ON (S6103), and the process proceeds to S6104. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S6101 that it is not the start timing of the button effect (S6101: No), or when it is determined in the process of S6102 that it is not the start timing of the duplicate button effect (S6102: No). Since it is not the timing to enable the second frame button, the process of S6103 is skipped and the process proceeds to S6104.

In the process of S6104, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the button effect (S6104). If it is determined that it is not the timing to end the button effect (S6104: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the button effect (S6104: Yes), it is determined whether the end timing is the end timing of the duplicate button effect (S6105). When it is determined that it is the end timing of the duplicate button effect (S6105: Yes), the second frame button enable flag 223r is set to off (S6106), and a display command indicating the end of the button effect is set (S6107). ), End this process. On the other hand, in the process of S6105, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the duplicate button effect (S6105: No), it is not necessary to invalidate the second frame button, so the process of S6106 is skipped and described above. The process of S6107 is executed, and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 72, the explanation will be continued. After executing the button effect update process (S5802), the button pressing process is then executed (S5803), then other processes related to the button are executed (S5804), and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 76, a button pressing process (S5803), which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S4107) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this button pressing process (S5803).

In the button pressing process (S5803), first, it is determined whether or not the second frame button valid flag 223r is on (S6201). When it is determined that the second frame button valid flag 223r is off (S6201: No), it is determined whether or not the first frame button 22a is on, that is, whether or not the first frame button 22a is pressed (. S6202). When it is determined that the first frame button 22a is not pressed (S6202: No), neither the first frame button 22a nor the second frame button 22b is operated, so that the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second frame button valid flag 223r is on (S6201), it is determined whether or not the second frame button is pressed (S6203). If it is determined that the second frame button 22b is not pressed (S6203: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first frame button 22a is pressed (S6202: Yes) or the second frame button 22b is pressed (S6203: Yes), the value of the corresponding pressing counter 223t is incremented by 1. (S6204). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the press counter 223t added in the process of S6205 is a predetermined value (S6205). When it is determined that the value of the button press counter 223t is a predetermined value (S6205: Yes), the operated flag 223s is set to ON (S6206), and a display command corresponding to the post-operation effect is set (S6207). ), The value of the press counter 223t is cleared to 0 (S6208), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the pressing counter 223t is not a predetermined value, a display command corresponding to the counter value is set (S6209), and this processing is terminated.

As described above, in this embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed at the same time (in parallel). Moreover, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be easier to win the lottery result (big hit with many rounds) which is advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, but this is limited to this. Without, for example, only in the lottery of Special Figure 2, in some cases where the lottery result is not a big hit, a privilege different from the big hit game can be given to the player. It may be configured, and as a game state set after the end of the big hit game, winning the big hit in the special figure 2 is more advantageous to the player than winning the big hit in the special figure 1 (for example, a probable change state). ) May be configured to be easy to set.

In this case, the type of the special symbol in which the lottery is easily executed is variably configured according to the set gaming state, and when a specific first gaming state (for example, probabilistic state) is set, the second special symbol is set. It is preferable to configure the lottery so that the lottery can be easily executed, and if a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol during the first gaming state, the first gaming state is set again.

In addition, the latent probability state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) can be set as the game state, and the lottery of the second special symbol can be easily performed during the latent probability state. Similarly, even when the normal state, which is a low probability state of the normal symbol, is set, the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed, and in the normal state, the lottery of the second special symbol is frequently executed. In order to suppress this, a long-time (10 minutes) fluctuation time may be set.

However, the gaming machine configured in this way can execute the lottery of the second special symbol, although it is inefficient, in the normal state, and if the big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, There is a problem that a lottery result that is advantageous to the player is given.

On the other hand, when the lottery of the first special symbol wins the predetermined lottery result (big hit or small hit) in the state where the normal state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped or forcibly stopped. It is good to configure it to temporarily stop. As a result, it is possible to set the second special symbol so that it is difficult to win the jackpot in the state where the normal state is set.

In the first embodiment described above, the game state set after the end of the big hit game is determined based on the big hit type set when the big hit is won, but the game state is not limited to this, and the big hit is won. During the jackpot game executed based on the above, the ball passes through a specific area provided in the variable winning device 65, so that a high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game is completed. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, three game states (normal state, time saving state, and probability change state) can be set as game states, but four game states (normal state, latent state, and probability change state) can be set. It may be in a probabilistic state, a time saving state, or two or less.

Further, in the first embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are simultaneously executed in the normal state, but other configurations may be used. For example, a first ball entry port 64b1 is provided in the left side region, a first ball entry port with an electric accessory 640a is provided in the right side area, and a second ball entry port 640 without an electric accessory 640a is provided, and a probable change state is provided. When is set, the right-handed game may be configured to be the most advantageous game for the player.

In the case of such a configuration, during the normal state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation is set to be shorter than that of the special figure 2 fluctuation as in the first embodiment described above, and the fluctuation time is set so as to be easy to set, and the latent state is in the latent state. Is set so that a shorter fluctuation time is more easily set in the special figure 2 fluctuation than in the special figure 1 fluctuation as in the first embodiment described above, and the electric accessory 640a is released in the probabilistic change state and the time saving state. It is good to set it so that it is easy.

As a result, during the normal state, a game aiming for a big hit by the lottery of the first special symbol is performed by the left-handed game, and during the time saving state, the lottery of the first special symbol is performed more efficiently than in the normal state by the right-handed game. In the probabilistic state, the right-handed game is used to draw the first special symbol more efficiently and with a higher probability than in the normal state, and the game is aimed at the big hit. During the state, a right-handed game can be used to play a game aiming for a big hit by a lottery of the second special symbol.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 77 to 91, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 77, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is set in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM has a high speed. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S8001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S8001) will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S8001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it can sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S8101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S8102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S8101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to the predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S8102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S8102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S8103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S8104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S8001 in FIG. 76) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S8002 in FIG. 77) (S8105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S8001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 114. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 78, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S8101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S8101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S8102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 231a. Then, the processes of S8103 to S8105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S8101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S8101. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S8102 and S8102, the processes of S8103 to S8105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S8103 to S8105 without performing the processes of S8101 and S8102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary staging unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 77. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S8002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S8003). This transfer instruction includes a start address and a final address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, transfer destination information (here, resident video RAM 235), and a transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S8003, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S8004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S8004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S8005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 89 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S9502 in FIG. 89 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 79 (b)), the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is simply drawn. The command determination process (see S8308 in FIG. 79 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S8309 in FIG. 79 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64b1, the left second entry opening 64b2, or the second entry opening 640. When the main control device 110 gives an instruction to start the variation effect via the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period. It can be displayed on the screen to create a simple fluctuation effect. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, and it takes time to transfer the flash memory. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S8005, the interrupt permission is set (S8006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S8006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 79 (a). FIG. 79 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S8201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 79 (b). FIG. 79B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S8301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S8301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. The command determination process (S8302) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S8303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S8302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 80 to 85.

In the display setting process (S8303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S8302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 86 to 88.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S8304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S8303) or the simple display setting process (S8309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S8305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S8306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S8305), which are determined in the task process (S8304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 32 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S8306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S8307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S8307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / rear out reach, complete out) is set. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S8301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S8308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S8309) is executed to shift to the process of S8304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 80 to 85, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S8302), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 80, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S8401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S8401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S8401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S8303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S8402), and then the command. The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S8403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S8404). Then, if there is a variation pattern command for display (S8404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S8405), and the process returns to the process of S8401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S8405) will be described with reference to FIG. 81 (a). FIG. 80A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S8405). This variation pattern command process (S8405) executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S8501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed in the main control device 110 at a distance of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S8501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S8501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counting counter 233h (S8503), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S8504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S8505), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S8505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8501. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S8502e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 as the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S8503, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It should be noted that, for example, the player operates the operating means, or while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the effect mode corresponding to the variable display being executed is changed (rewritten) based on the effect mode set by another opportunity. When the display rewriting command for The rewriting process for rewriting the data after the display data is executed. Further, after receiving the display rewriting command, the image data based on the rewritten production mode is generated from the time when an interval of a predetermined period is left. As a result, it is possible to reliably execute the effect after rewriting after securing the time required for the rewriting process. Further, the configuration is not limited to the above, and for example, all the effects (predetermined number) that can be executed during the fluctuation in the fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, that is, the game. When the effect mode for causing a person to operate the operation means is executed, the effect is executed when the player properly operates the operation means, and the effect is executed when the player does not properly operate the operation means. It is necessary in the variation display data table corresponding to each effect information by including information indicating the effect to be performed and the effect to be executed when the number of special figure reserved balls reaches the upper limit value during the change. The image data of the sprite is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and then, based on the instruction command output from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 is actually used. It may be configured to determine the image data to be displayed on. Further, the fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol is made to execute the display corresponding to the effect that can be executed during the fluctuation on different layers (layers), and each layer is executed. On the other hand, by setting and controlling a visible state that can be seen by the player and an invisible state that the player cannot see, it may be configured to make it appear that only a specific effect is being executed.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 80. In the processing of S8404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S8404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S8406). If there is a stop type command for display (S8406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S8407), and the process returns to S8401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S8407) will be described with reference to FIG. 81 (b). FIG. 81B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S8407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of big hit A to G, small hit A to C, reach off, and complete off) indicated by the display stop type command. (S8601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 79 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S8602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S8602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set it on (S8603) and return to the command judgment process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S8602 is described. In the above-mentioned task processing (S8304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S8602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S8603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S8601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete deviation is set by the processing of S8602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will have a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out of order". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description will be continued. In the processing of S8406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S8406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S8408), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for (S8408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S8409), and the process returns to the process of S8401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S8409) will be described with reference to FIG. 82 (a). FIG. 82A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8701). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8702), and the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S8703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S8704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S8705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description will be continued. In the processing of S8408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S8408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S8410), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S8410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S8411), and the process returns to the process of S8401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S8411) will be described with reference to FIG. 82 (b). FIG. 82B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. Set to the table buffer 233d (S8801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S8803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8804). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S8805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description will be continued. In the processing of S8410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S8410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S8412), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S8412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S8413), and the process returns to the process of S8401.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S8413) will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S8901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S8903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S8903). S8904). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S8905), the ending command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description will be continued. In the processing of S8412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S8412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display fluctuation stop command among the unprocessed commands (S8414), and the display is performed. If there is a variable stop command (S8414: Yes), the variable stop command process is executed (S8415), and the process returns to the process of S8401.

Here, the details of the variable stop command processing (S8415) will be described with reference to FIG. 84 (a). FIG. 84A is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing. This fluctuation stop command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The display variation stop command is the end timing of the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S4112 in FIG. 66), that is, the end timing of each special symbol in the main control device 110. The display stop command (display stop command) output from the voice lamp control device 113 at the end timing (timing when the main control unit 110 sets the stop command) of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set in the process of setting the fluctuation pattern. It shows various display commands set in the normal stop command) and the variable stop processing (see S4214 in FIG. 59) of the voice lamp control device 113.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol independently (parallel). , When one special symbol is stopped (confirmed) and displayed with a symbol indicating a specific lottery result (for example, big hit), the other special symbol that is changing is terminated in a predetermined fluctuation pattern (variation time). Regardless of the presence or absence of, it is configured to stop and display with a symbol indicating the forced disconnection.

Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command set when forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the fluctuation stop processing (see S4214 in FIG. 59). , A display command (forced) for variable display of the display mode of the third symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation (variable display so as to correspond to the display mode of the special symbol that is forcibly stopped and displayed). It is configured to set the stop command).

In the present embodiment, even when the above-mentioned normal stop command has already been received, if the third symbol or the fourth symbol is not stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It is configured to execute the stop display based on the forced stop command received later. That is, the forced stop command is configured to be processed with priority over the normal stop command. As a result, the third symbol and the fourth symbol can be reliably displayed in the display mode corresponding to the control content of the main control device 110.

In addition, the display variable stop command also includes a display command indicating a temporary stop set in the variable stop process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S4214 in FIG. 59), and the display command indicating this temporary stop is also included. When (temporary stop command for display) is received, the data table in which the display data in which the symbol to be stopped is slightly fluctuated is determined as the variable stop display data is determined.

In the variable stop command processing, first, the variable stop data table indicated by the variable stop command for display is determined, the determined variable stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the variable stop data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (. S831). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8932).

Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8931, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S833), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S833). S8934). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S8935), the fluctuation stop command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description will be continued. In the processing of S8412, if it is determined that there is no fluctuation stop command (S8414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S8416), and the display notification is notified. If there is a command (S8416: Yes), the display notification command process is executed (S8417), and the process returns to the process of S8401.

Here, the details of the notification command processing (S8415) will be described with reference to FIG. 84 (b). FIG. 84B is a flowchart showing the notification command processing. This notification command processing executes processing corresponding to the notification command (for display) received from the voice lamp control device 113.

This notification command was output to the display control device 114 among the various notification commands set when the voice lamp control device 113 received a command for indicating various abnormal states set by the main control device 110. This is a process executed when the display control device 114 receives the display notification command.

In the notification command processing, first, a display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table buffer is used. It is set to 233d (S8951). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8952).

Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8951, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S8953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8954). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S8955), the notification command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

In this embodiment, among the various notification commands set by the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 determines only the display command indicating that the notification target is the third symbol display device 81 (display device). However, it is not limited to this, and it also receives related commands such as light emission commands other than display commands, audio output commands, and accessory drive commands, and processes the display control device 114. It may be configured to output the related command to the corresponding control device with the information for indicating the data content (display mode) set in.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description will be continued. In the processing of S8416, if it is determined that there is no display notification command (S8416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S8418), and the rear image is determined. If there is a change command (S8418: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S8419), and the process returns to the process of S8401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command process (S8419) will be described with reference to FIG. 85 (a). FIG. 85A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S9503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S9001). ). Then, among the bits of the rear image discrimination flag 233x provided for each rear image type (rear surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to ON, and other bits are set. The bit corresponding to the rear image type of is set to off (S9002), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set by the process of S9001 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is changed from the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S9002. Identify.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display either the back surface A or B according to the back surface type of the rear image specified in the display data table, the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by S9002 is used. The type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored ( (Whether it is a resident video RAM 235 or a normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S9002, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 80. In the processing of S8418, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S8418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S8420), and there is an error command. If (S8420: Yes), error command processing is executed (S8421), and the process returns to S8401 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S8421) will be described with reference to FIG. 85 (b). FIG. 85B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S9101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S9102). Ends the process and returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S9101, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S9102 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error discrimination flag corresponding to all the error types indicated by each error command is set to ON in the process in S9102. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 80. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S8416 (S8420: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S8422), and the process returns to the process of S8401. In the processing of S8422, command processing for various display commands output from the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. For example, when a display command for changing the timing at which a specific effect is executed is received, a process for changing the execution timing of the specific effect already specified in the variable display data table based on the timekeeping data. Is executed. In addition, it is for display to indicate which of the third symbol variation display regarding the special figure 1 variation and the third symbol variation display regarding the special figure 2 variation is the main variation display and which is the subordinate variation display. When a command is received, the received command is determined, whether it is different from the currently executing setting status (correspondence), and if it is determined to be different, it is set based on the fluctuation pattern command of each special figure fluctuation. The process of switching the display data table to be displayed between the main variation display and the secondary variation display is executed.

In the processing of S8401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S8401: Yes). ), The processing of S8402 to S8422 is executed again. Then, the processes of S8401 to S8422 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S8401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S8308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 79B) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment processing, only the commands required to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are used from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 81 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 81 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 81 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S8501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S8502, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 86 to 88, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S8303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 86, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S9201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S9201: No). ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of S9202 to S9204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S9205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S9201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S9202), S9203 to S9204. Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S9203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S9203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S9203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S9204).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 87. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to and all the error discrimination set to ON is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S9301).

In the task processing (S8304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S9301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S9302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 86. After the warning image setting process (S9204) or in the process of S9203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is turned off (S9203: No), the process proceeds to the process of S9205.

In S9205, the pointer update process is executed (S9205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S9401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are sequentially started from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S9401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S9402). As a result, if it is End information (S9402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S9403), and if it is a demo display data table (S9403: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S9404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S9405), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demo effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S9403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S9403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S9403: No). S9406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawing contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S9402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S9402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 86. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S9206). In the task processing (S8304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S9206 together with the warning image developed earlier, and each sprite is specified. , Display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing are determined.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S9207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S9208). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S9208: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (S9208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S9209).

As a result, if the definite display flag is off (S9209: No), the definite display effect has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the definite display effect. Therefore, first, the definite display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S92110), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S9211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the definite display data table is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S9212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S9213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S9214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S9215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final symbol display effect of the stopped symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set as such. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. A wide variety of staging images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S9215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S8304), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S9215, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S9209, if the definite display flag is on (S9209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S9216). If the demo display flag is off (S9216: No), it means that the value of the timekeeping counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that a certain period of time has elapsed from the end of the final display effect. Later, a process for displaying the demo effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S9217), and the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S9218). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S9219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S9220), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S9221), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S9216, if the demo display flag is on (S9216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S8309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 79B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the image of the above is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S8305), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 89A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S9501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S9501: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S9502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 89 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S9501, that is, if it is off (S9501: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S9503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 90.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S9502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S8305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 89 (b). FIG. 89B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S9502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S9601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S9601: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S9602). In the process of S9602, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S9602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S9602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S9602: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S9603. Further, as a result of the processing of S9601, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S9601: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S9603.

In the process of S9603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S9603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S9603: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S9604), and this process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S9603 (S9603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S9605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 79 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S8308 in FIG. 79 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S8309 in FIG. 79 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 80 to 85) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 86 to 88) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 90) (see S9501: No in FIG. 89 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90, a normal image transfer setting process (S9503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S8305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S9503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S9205) of the display setting process (S8303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S9701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S9702), and if it is transfer data information (S9702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S9703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S9704), and the process proceeds to S9705.

Further, in the process of S9702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S9702: No), the processes of S9703 and S9704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S9705. In the process of S9705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S9705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S9705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S9706).

In the process of S9706, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S9706 that the transfer process has not been completed (S9706: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S9706: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S9707. Further, as a result of the processing of S9705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S9705: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S9707.

In the process of S9707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S9707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S9707: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S9708), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S9703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S9713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S9707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233w is on (S9709). If the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (S9709: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag 233w is on (S9709: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag 233w is set to off (S9710), it is provided for each rear image type. Among the rear image discrimination flags 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S9711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (transfer destination). The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S9712), and the process proceeds to S9713.

In the process of S9713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S9713). The discrimination in the process of S9713 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If, as a result of the processing of S9713, the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S9713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S9713 (S9713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S9714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 includes the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S9714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S9715), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S8306), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S8304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and a drawing list (FIG. 32) is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S8305) (S9801). That is, in the processing of S9801, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S8304). Then, the specified stored RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S8305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S9802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address is read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Then, in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the processing of S9802 (S9803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process (see FIG. 79 (b)) is performed every time the drawing process is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame. In the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the state where the variation display of 1 is executed, the other variation display may be configured to be infeasible. Then, if there is a reserved ball, the start winning prize may be changed in order from the oldest reserved ball. With this configuration, control can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 109. In the second embodiment, the configuration of the storage area for storing the priority of the effect to be executed is changed with respect to the first embodiment, and the effect other than the button effect (for example, the display effect) is also prioritized. A point that is configured to give In order to deal with the above-mentioned differences, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 and the processing contents are different.

In the first embodiment described above, the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variation of each special symbol. It was configured so that the button effect could be set as the effect. Then, in order to prevent the button effect set by another opportunity (the opportunity to set the variable effect of the special figure 1 and the opportunity to set the variable effect of the special figure 2) from being executed in duplicate, the button effect is executed. The button effect is given a priority for executing the effect, and the button effect is executed based on the assigned priority. As a result, even if the button effect is set at overlapping timings, the button effect having a high priority can be preferentially executed, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand effect.

In addition to this, in the second embodiment, the button effect can be set when the reserved ball is acquired. As a result, the chances of setting the button effect increase, so that more button effects can be provided to the player.

Further, in the first embodiment described above, a specific button effect (second button effect) is used as the variation effect of the special figure 2 during the execution of the button effect (first button effect) set as the variation effect of the special figure 1. Is executed, it is configured to execute a duplicate button effect (special button effect) in which the first button effect and the second button effect are fused.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the execution timing of the button effect set as the variable effect of the special figure and the execution timing of the button effect set based on the acquisition of the reserved ball overlap. Even in this case, the duplicate button effect (special button effect) is configured to be executed. As a result, even while the variable effect for showing the lottery result of the special figure is being executed, the player can be enthusiastically played to acquire a new reserved ball.

Further, in the second embodiment, the priority is given to the effect other than the button effect (for example, the advance notice effect executed during the variable effect of the special figure). As a result, it is possible to manage whether or not the button effect and the advance notice effect are executed at the same execution timing, so that it is possible to provide a player with a more understandable effect.

Further, in the second embodiment, the number of storage areas for storing information regarding each effect to which priority is given is increased, and the player can select the range of the storage area to be used for executing the effect. It is configured in. With such a configuration, it is possible to adjust the quality (priority) and quantity of the effect to be executed, so that it is possible to provide the effect in the mode desired by each player.

<About the flow of production in the second embodiment>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 92 to 95, the contents of the characteristic effect executed in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 92 is a timing chart showing a flow in which a button effect (8-piece hold effect) is executed when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol reaches the upper limit number (8 pieces), and FIG. 93 is a special figure 1. As a variable effect of, during the execution of the button effect (button effect A), the duplicate button effect (super 8 hold effect) is executed based on the number of reserved balls of the special symbol reaching a predetermined number. It is a timing chart. And FIG. 94 and FIG. 95 are schematic diagrams showing the effect contents of the button effect (hold effect) executed based on the acquisition of the hold ball of the special symbol.

In the present embodiment, a maximum of 4 prize information of the first special symbol (special figure 1) can be stored and stored, and a maximum of 4 prize information of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be stored and stored. It is composed. Then, as shown in FIG. 2, the ball entry unit 64 is arranged at a lower position of the game area, and the ball flowing into the ball entry unit 64 can acquire the winning information of the special figure 1 first ball entry port. It is configured to be alternately distributed to 64b1 and the left second entrance ball opening 64b2 where the winning information of the special figure 2 can be acquired.

Therefore, in the normal state in which the game aiming at the entry unit 64 (left-handed game) is performed, the maximum number of reserved balls with a special symbol (reserved ball obtained by adding the reserved ball of the special figure 1 and the reserved ball of the special figure 2) is the maximum. A game in which 8 pieces can be obtained is performed. Then, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol reaches eight, the reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the eight reserved balls (see FIG. 94 (a)). ) Is used to execute the button effect. As a result, the player can be enthusiastically played to acquire eight reserved memories of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 92, the special figure special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation are executed, and the special figure reserved ball number (the total value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number and the special figure 2 reserved ball number). ) Is "6" (special figure 1 reserved ball number is "3", special figure 2 reserved ball number is "3"), the ball flows into the ball entry unit 64 and enters the first ball entry port 64b1. When the ball enters, the number of reserved balls in the special figure becomes "7" (the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "4" and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "3"). After that, when the ball that has flowed into the ball entry unit 64 enters the left second entry port 64b2 by the time a new special figure change (lottery) is executed, the number of special figure reserved balls is "8" (special figure). 1 The number of reserved balls is "4", and the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is "4").

In the present embodiment, when the number of reserved balls for special figures reaches the upper limit value (8), the pre-reading result of each winning information stored on hold (for the acquired winning information, a special drawing lottery using the winning information is performed. It is configured to execute a hold effect (see FIG. 94) for suggesting to the player the result of the preliminary determination performed until the execution, and in the hold effect, the player is given the first frame button 22a. A button effect (usually 8 hold effects) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 94, the effect contents of the normally eight hold effects executed in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when the normally eight-piece hold effect is executed, and FIG. 94 (b) shows the player usually in the eight-piece hold effect. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display content displayed after operating the 1st frame button 22a.

As shown in FIG. 94 (a), when the normally eight hold effects are executed, the hold symbols h1 to h8 indicating the number of hold balls of the special symbol are displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the reserved symbols displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. Similar to the first embodiment described above, the number of reserved balls in the special figure (the total value of the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2) is a predetermined number (the upper limit number in the present embodiment, "8". Until it reaches "), it is displayed in the small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a of the main display area Dm. Then, when the number of reserved special figures reaches a predetermined number, it is displayed in the small display area Ds1b of the sub-display area Ds as shown in FIG. 94 (a). The reserved symbols h1 to h8 are displayed in chronological order of the reserved memory, and although not shown, the displayed reserved symbols are the reserved symbols corresponding to the special figure 1 hold or the hold corresponding to the special figure 2 hold. Whether it is a symbol or not is displayed in a display mode that allows the player to identify it.

In the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 2, the ball flowing into the ball entry unit 64 can acquire the first entry slot 64b1 in which the winning information in the special figure 1 can be acquired, and the winning information in the special figure 2. Since it is configured to be alternately distributed to the left second entry port 64b2, when the game state is the normal state, basically, the hold symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 1 hold. FIG. 2 Hold symbols corresponding to hold are displayed alternately. However, both the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 have an upper limit set to be reserved and stored, and the fluctuation time in which the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation are different is set. It is configured to be runnable.

Therefore, for example, when the special figure 1 hold is 3 and the special figure 2 hold is 3 and a long-time (for example, 90 seconds) fluctuation time is set as the special figure 1 fluctuation, the long-time fluctuation is set. There may be a case where the special figure 2 variation is executed a plurality of times (for example, three times) by the end of. In such a situation, the number of special figure reservations stored on hold differs greatly between special figure 1 and special figure 2, and according to the above-mentioned example, special figure 1 hold "2" pieces, special figure 1 hold. FIG. 2 Hold “0” situations occur. Then, in this situation, if the ball is continuously flowed into the ball entry unit 64 and the number of special figure reserved balls is increased, the value of special figure 2 hold becomes "when the special figure 1 hold reaches the upper limit number (4). 2 ”occurs. In this case, if the ball is continuously inserted into the ball entry unit 64, even if the ball enters the first entry port 64b1, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has reached the upper limit. The new special figure 1 reserved ball cannot be acquired, and the special figure 2 reserved ball will be acquired continuously. As a result, the reserved symbols indicating the special figure 2 reserved are continuously displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the pachinko machine has a configuration in which special figure 1 hold (winning information corresponding to special figure 1) and special figure 2 hold (winning information corresponding to special figure 2) can be alternately acquired (holding storage is possible). In 10, the reserved symbols displayed in the order in which they are held and stored alternately display the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold according to the number of reserved balls acquired and the fluctuation time of the special figure change to be executed. Even if the situation is not met, by looking at the display mode of the secured symbol, the player can easily grasp the type of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game. can.

In this embodiment, when the number of reserved balls for the special figure reaches a predetermined number, the effect using the reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls for the special figure (holding effect) is executed. Another condition may be set as the execution condition of, for example, it is configured to execute the hold effect when a predetermined number (for example, two) of hold symbols indicating the same type of special figure hold are displayed side by side. Alternatively, the holding effect may be executed based on the combination of the arrangement order of the special symbol types indicated by each reserved symbol and the display number of the reserved symbols (the number of reserved symbols reserved).

With this configuration, when either the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 or the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 reaches the upper limit, the firing of the balls is stopped and the operation of the game is reduced. It can be suppressed.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 94 (a). The reserved symbols h1 to h8 displayed in the small display area Ds1b of the sub-display area Ds move to the running display area Ds1a formed in the small display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds every time the special figure fluctuation is started. The special figure is shifted and the display mode of the reserved symbol corresponding to the currently executed special figure change (display mode changed by the hold effect until the special figure change is executed) is displayed so as to be understandable to the player. Fluctuations are carried out. With this configuration, the effect result of the hold effect and the effect result of the variation effect executed in response to the change of the special figure are analyzed in a complex manner, and the lottery result of the special figure lottery is predicted to the player. It can be made easier.

Normally, when eight hold effects are executed, the display mode of the hold symbols h1 to h8 displayed in the small display area Ds1b of the sub display area Ds prompts the player to operate the first frame button 22a. It is variably displayed in a mode (a display mode imitating the first frame button 22a). Then, in the main display area Dm, a comment urging the player to operate the first frame button 22a eight times is displayed, and the first frame button 22a, which is usually an operation target in the eight hold effect, is displayed. The imitated button 812 is displayed. By displaying in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the game content to be executed during the normally eight hold effects in an easy-to-understand manner.

Then, when the player presses the first frame button 22a during the normally eight holding effect, the display mode of the reserved symbol h1 is variably displayed from the preparation display mode to the suggestion display mode (see FIG. 94 (b)). Then, the display mode is variably displayed in the order of the reserved symbols h2 to h8. Next, with reference to FIG. 94 (b), the content of the effect result of the normally eight hold effects will be described.

Normally, in the eight-piece hold effect, when the player operates the first frame button 22a, a suggestion display mode capable of suggesting the pre-reading result of each winning information corresponding to each hold symbol h1 to h8 to the player is displayed. .. This suggestion display mode suggests that the target winning information includes information indicating a jackpot, and a plurality of displays having different ease of selection when the information indicating a jackpot is included. The mode (color) is configured to be displayable.

Specifically, the display mode of "white-> blue-> green-> red" is defined in the order of difficulty in selection (low jackpot expectation) when information indicating a jackpot is included. That is, the reserved symbols normally displayed in the "white" display mode as the effect result of the eight reserved effects are difficult to win in the special figure lottery corresponding to the reserved symbols, and are displayed in the "red" display mode. The reserved symbol is configured so that it is easy to win a big hit in the special symbol lottery corresponding to the reserved symbol.

As a result, by grasping the effect result of the normally eight reserved effects before the special figure fluctuation is actually executed, a specific reserved symbol (for example, "red" display mode) is displayed even before the special figure lottery is executed. It is possible to play a game with a feeling of expectation for a big hit for the reserved symbol displayed in. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation for a big hit for a longer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the normal eight-piece hold effect of the present embodiment, as described above, the effect of operating the operation means (first frame button 22a) is configured to be executed as many times as the number of times corresponding to the number of the reserved symbols h1 to h8. However, the number of times the first frame button 22a is operated is not limited to this, and a number of times smaller than the number of reserved symbols may be set, or a large number of times may be set. Here, when the number of operations is set to be smaller than the number of reserved symbols displayed, the suggestion display with a high expectation of big hit is as a suggestion display mode suggesting the pre-reading result of the winning information stored in the hold. The reserved symbols h1 to h8 may be variably displayed by the number corresponding to the number of operations in the order in which the modes are set, or the reserved symbols h1 to h8 are operated in the order in which the suggested display modes with low jackpot expectations are set. It may be variably displayed by the number corresponding to the number of times.

Further, when the number of operations is set to be larger than the number of displayed reserved symbols, the suggestion display mode of one reserved symbol may be variably displayed a plurality of times. Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 94 (a), all the reserved symbols h1 to h8 are normally displayed in the same display mode as the preparatory display mode of the eight hold staging, and the player Is configured so that it is difficult to predict the content of the suggestion display mode until the player presses the first frame button 22a, so that the player positively presses the first frame button 22a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be used in which the player can predict the display mode of the suggestion display mode depending on the display mode of the preparation display mode, and a plurality of display colors of the preparation display mode may be used. It may be configured to be configurable so that the display color of the displayed preparatory display mode suggests the display mode of the suggestion display mode. For example, when the display color of the preparation display mode is "green", it is preferable to configure so that the suggestion display mode of "green" or "red" is displayed when the first frame button 22a is pressed. With such a configuration, the player can press the first frame button 22a in a state where the player has a feeling of expectation for a big hit, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display modes of the reserved symbols h1 to h8 are variably displayed based on the pre-reading result of the corresponding winning information, but the display mode is not limited to this and is stored on hold. Based on the pre-reading result of all the winning information, the display mode of the entire reserved symbols h1 to h8 may be variably displayed. In this case, for example, among the reserved symbols h1 to h8, the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by using the display mode of the reserved symbols h1 to h4 (the game state set after the jackpot game ends and the number of rounds of the jackpot game). It is preferable to set the display mode of each of the reserved symbols h1 to h8 so as to suggest the degree of expectation of the jackpot winning by using the display mode of the remaining reserved symbols h5 to h8.

With this configuration, it is possible to display one suggestion target content by combining the display modes of the plurality of reserved symbols, so that more detailed suggestion information can be provided to the player. Further, since the effect result of the hold effect is notified to the player by variably displaying the display mode of all the hold symbols, the first frame button 22a can be enthusiastically operated until the end.

In addition, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which only one operation means (first frame button 22a) is used as the operation means for the player to normally operate in the eight-piece hold effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. As a preparatory display mode corresponding to the reserved symbol on which the suggestion display mode (red) having a high jackpot expectation is displayed, a preparatory display mode indicating that an unusual operation means (second frame button 22b) is operated is displayed. However, the second frame button 22b may be operated when the display mode of the reserved symbol is variably displayed. As a result, it is possible to operate a plurality of types of operation means in one effect (usually eight hold effects), so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, since the jackpot expectation can be made different depending on the type of the operating means, it is possible to make the player interested in which operation means is to be operated.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of types of operating means, the operating means capable of accepting the operation of variably displaying the display modes of the reserved symbols h1 to h8 is set so as to be difficult for the player to identify (cannot be identified). It may be configured to determine whether or not to variably display the display mode of the reserved symbols h1 to h8 according to the operating means operated by the player. This makes it possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting an operating means for performing the operation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the button effect executed based on the special figure fluctuation and the button effect executed based on the number of special figure reserved balls (8 hold effects) are executed in duplicate. The flow of the game content in the case will be explained. FIG. 93 shows the flow of the effect when the button effect executed based on the variation of the special figure and the button effect executed based on the number of reserved balls of the special figure (8 hold effects) are executed in duplicate. It is a timing chart shown. Since the content of the button effect executed based on the special figure variation is the same as that of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 92, when the number of special figure reserved balls reaches eight, a button effect (usually eight reserved effects) using the reserved symbols h1 to h8 is executed. It is configured in. In addition to this, while the button effect is being executed based on the special figure fluctuation, the reserved symbols h1 to h8 are used under looser conditions (the number of special figure reserved balls reaches 7) than the normal 8 reserved effect. It is configured so that the button effect that was used is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to have the player continuously play the game even while the button effect is being executed based on the fluctuation of the special figure.

As shown in FIG. 93, while the button effect (button effect A (operation target is the first frame button 22a)) is being executed based on the variation of the special figure 1, the number of balls on the special figure hold (special figure 1 hold). When the total number of reserved storages in Fig. 2 and the number of reserved storages in Special Figure 2 reaches 7 (see FIG. 93 (a)), the super hold effect is executed instead of the button effect A (FIG. FIG. 95 (a)). Here, with reference to FIG. 95, the effect content of the super hold effect will be described. FIG. 95 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed when the super hold effect is executed. FIG. 95 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect result of the super hold effect.

This super hold effect is a hold effect that is executed by taking over the effect mode of the button effect A (see FIG. 9 (a)) being executed, and as shown in FIG. 95 (a), the main display area dm. Similar to the button effect A, the sleeping character 811 is displayed, and an effect of repeatedly hitting the operating means (second frame button 22b) to wake up the character 811 is executed. Then, each time the second frame button 22b is pressed, the suggested modes 811a to 811d appear from the character 811. The suggestion modes 811a to 811d are set based on the pre-reading result of the winning information corresponding to the reserved symbols h1 to h7 displayed in the small display area Ds1b of the sub-display area Ds, as in the above-mentioned normal eight holding effect. It is a suggestion mode that suggests the suggestion display mode of each of the reserved symbols h1 to h7.

Then, when the second frame button 22b is repeatedly hit and the character 811 rises up, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), various modes shown in the suggested modes 811a to 811d shift to the reserved symbols h1 to h7, and each of them It is displayed as a suggestion display mode indicating the degree of expectation of a jackpot of the reserved symbols h1 to h7. As described above, in the super hold effect, since the suggestion modes 811a to 811d are displayed for the above-mentioned normal eight hold effects, it is not known which hold symbol corresponds to which suggestion mode. Therefore, the player can be notified in advance of the display mode (color) that can be displayed as the suggestion display mode of the reserved symbols h1 to h7.

Therefore, when information (for example, red) indicating that the jackpot expectation is high is displayed as the suggestion mode, the suggestion display mode of the reserved symbols h1 to h7 is enthusiastically displayed in red. The two-frame button 22b can be operated. In this embodiment, all the modes displayed as the suggested modes 811a to 811d are configured so as not to shift to the suggested display modes of the reserved symbols h1 to h7. As a result, for example, even when the display mode having a high expectation of big hit is not selected as the suggestion display mode of the reserved symbols set based on the pre-reading result of the winning information corresponding to the reserved symbols h1 to h7. Since the display mode (red) having a high expectation of a big hit can be displayed as the suggestion mode 811 in a pseudo manner, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to make the player know that the super hold effect has been executed by switching to the button effect A, the operation means (first frame button 22a) to be operated by the button effect A and the supermarket. The operation means (second frame button 22b) that is the operation target of the hold effect is configured to be different, but the operation target is not limited to this, and the same operation means is the operation target for any button effect. It may be configured as.

In this way, when one button effect is being executed and another button effect (a button effect that is executed with priority over the button effect being executed (higher priority)) is executed, the other button effect is executed. By configuring to execute the overlapping (fusion) effect (super hold effect) that inherits the effect content of the button effect being executed, the effect content of the button effect suddenly switches, making it difficult for the player to understand. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

Further, even if a button effect having a higher priority than the button effect being executed is established at a different trigger (a trigger that is not established at the start timing of the button effect being executed), the button with the higher priority is satisfied. Since the effect can be reliably executed, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 to 99. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. Other points are the same as those in the first embodiment, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 96A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 96 (a), in the second embodiment, when setting whether or not the hold effect is executed using the hold symbol and the effect mode of the hold effect for the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the reserved effect selection table 223aa that is referred to and the simultaneous effect enable / disable setting area 223ab that is referred to when determining whether or not to execute each effect with the same priority at the same time are added. ing. The other elements are the same, and detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the second embodiment, priority is given to various notice effect contents specified in the variation pattern selection table 223a. As a result, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, when a plurality of button effects are set in duplicate, the button effects to be executed are determined based on the priority given to each button effect. In the second embodiment, in addition to the button effect, various notice effects (for example, comment effect, mini character effect, etc.) set based on the special figure change are set to determine the jackpot expectation of the special figure change during the special figure change period. Priority is also given to an effect that is executed so as to be completed in a specific period (for example, 2 to 5 seconds).

With this configuration, the button effect and the advance notice effect are executed in duplicate, and the effect is difficult for the player to understand (for example, when the effect with low jackpot expectation is displayed as the effect of the button effect). At about the same timing, the effect with high expectation of big hits will be displayed as a result of the effect of the notice effect, or the same character as the character appearing in the button effect will appear in the advance notice effect, and which character appeared. It is possible to further suppress the execution of an effect (such as an effect that makes it difficult to understand whether it is for the effect).

The hold effect selection table 223aa is a data table that is referred to when the presence / absence of execution of the hold effect using the hold symbol and the effect mode of the hold effect are set, and is the number of hold balls output from the main control device 110. It is referred to in the special hold effect process (see S4523 in FIG. 104) of the hold ball number process (S4208 in FIG. 103) executed when a command is received (S6309 in FIG. 104). Here, the contents of the holding effect selection table 223aa will be described with reference to FIG. 97.

FIG. 97 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the holding effect selection table 223aa in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 97, the holding effect selection table 223aa is included in the current number of reserved balls (the sum of the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 and the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2) and the winning information to be directed. Based on the hit / fail determination information and the acquired value of the second effect counter 223v, the effect pattern to be executed (the effect mode of the hold effect) and the priority are defined.

Specifically, the case where the number of reserved balls (the total value of the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 and the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2) is "1 to 3" and the hit / fail judgment information indicates "hit". In the range where the value of the acquired second effect counter 223v is "0 to 39", "do not execute the hold effect (indicated by"-"in FIG. 97)" is defined, and in the range of "40 to 99". , The effect pattern "hold A" and the priority "2" are defined. On the other hand, in the case where the hit / fail determination information indicates "off" and the value of the acquired second effect counter 223v is in the range of "0 to 94", the "hold effect is not executed" (in FIG. 97, "-"). Display) ”is defined, and the effect pattern“ Hold A ”and the priority“ 3 ”are defined in the range of“ 94 to 99 ”.

Next, the number of reserved balls (the sum of the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 and the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2) is "4 to 5", and the winning / failing determination information indicates "hit". In the range where the value of the second effect counter 223v is "0 to 59", "do not execute the hold effect (indicated by"-"in FIG. 97)" is defined, and in the range of "60 to 84", the effect is produced. The pattern "hold B" and the priority "2" are defined, and the effect pattern "button hold A" and the priority "1" are defined in the range of "85 to 99". On the other hand, in the case where the hit / fail determination information indicates "off" and the value of the acquired second staging counter 223v is in the range of "0 to 89", "holding staging is not executed" (in FIG. 97, "-"). Display) ”is specified, the effect pattern“ Hold B ”and the priority“ 2 ”are specified in the range of“ 90 to 94 ”, and the effect pattern“ Button hold A ”is specified in the range of“ 95 to 99 ”. , Priority "3" is specified.

Finally, the number of reserved balls (the sum of the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 and the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2) is "6,7", and the winning / failing judgment information indicates "hit". In the range where the value of the second effect counter 223v is "0 to 29", "do not execute the hold effect (indicated by"-"in FIG. 97)" is defined, and in the range of "30 to 69", the effect is produced. The pattern "hold C" and the priority "1" are defined, and the effect pattern "button hold A" and the priority "3" are defined in the range of "70 to 99". On the other hand, in the case where the hit / fail determination information indicates "off" and the value of the acquired second staging counter 223v is in the range of "0 to 79", "holding staging is not executed" (in FIG. 97, "-"). Display) ”is specified, the effect pattern“ Hold C ”and the priority“ 2 ”are specified in the range of“ 80 to 97 ”, and the effect pattern“ Button hold A ”is specified in the range of“ 98 to 99 ”. , Priority "1" is specified.

The simultaneous effect enable / disable setting area 223ab is a storage area referred to when determining whether or not to execute each effect given the same priority at the same time, and is a special operation (when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on). When the effect switching operation) is performed, information indicating whether or not simultaneous effect execution is possible is stored. Here, when the information indicating that the simultaneous effect is not executed is stored, it is stored in the first effect layer storage area 223ab1 (see FIG. 99 (a)) in the effect layer storage area group 223aa described later. It is controlled so that the effect referring only to the existing effect information is executed.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 96 (b). FIG. 96B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 96B, in the second embodiment, the effect layer storage area group 223aa is used instead of the button effect layer storage area 223 m for the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the effect level storage area 223ae is provided, and the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223f is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The effect layer storage area group 223aa is a storage area for temporarily storing the effect information set in various processes of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the assigned priority. Here, the contents of the staging layer storage area group 223aa will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. FIG. 98 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the staging hierarchy storage area group 223aa, and FIG. 98 (b) is each storage defined in the staging hierarchy storage area group 223aa. It is a schematic diagram which shows the area schematically. Further, FIGS. 99 (a) to 99 (d) are schematic views for explaining a flow of storing the set effect information.

As shown in FIG. 98A, the staging hierarchy storage area group 223aa is composed of a first staging hierarchy storage area 223ab, a second staging hierarchy storage area 223ac, and a second staging hierarchy storage area 223ad. .. Each of the storage areas (223ab to 223ad) has a storage area (area) capable of storing the effect information of different priorities (priorities 1 to 4) (see FIG. 98 (b)). ..

That is, in the above-described first embodiment, the button effect hierarchical storage area 223 m is provided as a storage area for storing the effect information for indicating the effect set in each process of the voice lamp control device 113, and the priority is given. Was configured to memorize one production information of "1", two production information of priority "2", and one production information of priority "3", whereas this second The embodiment is different in that a maximum of three production information having a priority of "1" to "4" can be stored.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the flow of the storage process of the staging information in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 (a) shows the first effect layer storage area 223ab of the effect layer storage area group 223aa, and FIG. 99 (b) shows the second effect layer storage area 223ac of the effect layer storage area group 223aa. c) shows the first effect layer storage area 223ad of the effect layer storage area group 223aa, and FIG. 99 (d) shows the concept of each process for setting the effect executed by the voice lamp control device 113. ing.

As shown in FIG. 99, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment has a total of 12 areas for storing the set effect information (see FIGS. 99 (a) to 99 (c)). , At least four processes for setting the effect information with priorities are provided (FIG. 99 (d)). Then, the effect (effect with priority) set in each process shown in FIG. 99 (d) is stored (stored) in each storage area according to the set order and the assigned priority. To.

The set effect information is stored (stored) in the storage area indicating the corresponding priority in the order of the first effect layer storage area 223ab, the second effect layer storage area 223ac, and the third effect layer storage area 223ad. That is, for example, when the effect of priority "2" is set, it is first determined whether or not the effect information is stored in the priority 2 area 223ab2 of the first effect layer storage area 223ab, and the effect information is not stored. In this case, the effect information is stored in the priority 2 area 223ab2 of the first effect layer storage area 223ab. On the other hand, when the effect information is stored in the priority 2 area 223ab2 of the first effect layer storage area 223ab, then whether the effect information is stored in the priority 2 area 223ac2 of the second effect layer storage area 223ac. After that, the same process is executed for the third staging layer storage area 223ad.

Then, when the effect information is already stored in the storage area of the corresponding priority of the third effect layer storage area 223ad (when the effect information is set in excess of the storable number), the effect set this time is set. It is configured to discard information. Not limited to this, the oldest effect information may be discriminated and the effect information to be discarded may be determined based on the determination result, or the effect may be produced in a storage area having a priority lower than the set priority. It may be configured to store information. In this case, for example, the priority of the set effect information may be changed to the priority corresponding to the stored storage area, or the original priority of the effect information stored in the storage areas having different priorities. May be temporarily stored, and when a vacancy in the storage area corresponding to the original priority occurs, the effect information may be stored in a predetermined storage area.

As shown in FIG. 99 (d), in the second embodiment, as the effect to which the priority can be given, the button effect for changing the special figure 1 which can set the button effect based on the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery is used. , Special figure 2 change button effect, special figure change display effect, and hold change effect (various effects selected by the hold effect selection table 222aa), which are set in each process. The storage area where the staging information can be stored is different. Specifically, as for the effect information indicating the button effect set as the button effect for change in the special figure 1, the priority 1 area to the priority 3 area of the first effect layer storage area 223ab1 are memorable areas, and the special figure 2 The effect information indicating the button effect set as the variable button effect is an area in which the priority 1 area to the priority 4 area of the first effect layer storage area 223ab and the second effect layer storage area 223ac can be stored.

Further, as the effect information indicating various advance notice effects set as the display effect for changing the special figure, the priority 2 area to the priority 4 area of the first effect layer storage area 223ab to the third effect layer storage area 223ad can be stored. The effect information indicating the hold effect (display effect, button effect) that becomes an area and is set as the effect for hold change is the priority 2 area to the priority 4 of the first effect layer storage area 223ab to the third effect layer storage area 223ad. The area becomes a memorable area.

In this way, by making the range of the storage area (storage area) in which the effect information indicating the effect is stored different according to the setting opportunity of various effects to which the priority is given, a predetermined regularity is given. It is possible to carry out the production.

The simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is a flag for indicating that the effects to which the same priority is given are not executed in duplicate, and is a state in which the effects of the same priority are not executed in duplicate. It is set to on if. The simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae allows the player to arbitrarily change the setting status, and the effect level selection process (see S6221 in FIG. 109) executed in the button pressing process 2 (see S5853 in FIG. 108). ), It is variably set based on the operation content of the player's operating means (S6605, S6606 in FIG. 109).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the player can arbitrarily select whether or not the effects of the same priority are executed in duplicate. Therefore, a player who wants to experience various effects is set to turn off the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae, and a player who wants to experience a simple effect is set to turn on the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae. Since the desired effect is executed only by doing so, it is possible to easily provide a game suitable for the player.

In the present embodiment, the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is used so that the execution mode of the effect can be selected from two types. However, any configuration may be used as long as the player can select an arbitrary execution mode, for example. Of the staging hierarchy storage area group 223aa, the staging level (staging level 1) in which the staging using only the staging information stored in the first staging hierarchy storage area 223ab is executed, and the first staging hierarchy storage area 223ab. , The effect level (effect level 2) in which the effect using only the effect information stored in the second effect layer storage area 223ac is executed, and stored in the second effect layer storage area 223ac and the third effect layer storage area 223ad. Of the staging level (staging level 4) in which the staging using the staging information is performed and the first staging hierarchy storage area 223ab to the third staging hierarchy storage area 223ad, the priority 1 area and the priority 2 area Of the staging level (staging level 5) in which the staging using the stored staging information is executed and the first staging hierarchy storage area 223ab to the third staging hierarchy storage area 223ad, the priority 3 area and the priority 4 area It may be configured so that the player can select an arbitrary production level from a plurality of production levels, such as the production level (production level 6) in which the production using the production information stored in is executed. ..

In this configuration, for example, when the effect level 6 is selected, it is possible to easily execute an effect that is normally difficult to be executed by a high-priority effect, so that an effect different from the usual one can be played. It can be easily provided to a person and the effect of production can be enhanced. In the present embodiment, the storage area of the effect layer storage area group 223aa is divided into a plurality of storage areas (first effect layer storage area 223ab to third effect layer storage area 223ad) and priorities 1 to 4. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute the effect based on the above-mentioned effect level only by limiting the range of the storage area to be read when the effect is executed.

In this embodiment, the same process (process for setting the effect mode) is configured to be executed when the effect is set, regardless of the restriction content for the effect to be executed, and after the effect mode is set. , Even if the range (effect level) of the effect to be executed by the player is variably set, the effect corresponding to the effect range (effect level) after the variable setting can be executed, but this is limited to this. Instead, when setting the effect mode of various effects, the range of the effect to be executed (effect level) may be determined, and whether or not the effect mode is set may be determined based on the determination result. This makes it possible to reduce the processing for setting the effect mode.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, when a special effect mode is set as a high priority effect (for example, an effect of priority 1), the priority related to the special effect mode is low. When an effect (for example, a special-related effect of priority 4) is set in the storage area, the special-related effect is executed with priority over the effects stored in the other priority areas 1 to 3. It is configured so that it can be done.

In this way, by linking an effect with a low execution frequency (effect with a low priority) to an effect with a high priority so that it can be executed, it is possible to provide the player with an effect that is difficult to be executed by itself. , The effect of production can be enhanced. Further, by correcting the execution timing of the special-related effect having a low priority before the execution timing of the special effect having a high priority, the special effect is executed after the special-related effect is executed. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. In this case, as the setting (execution) condition of the special effect, the player is executed with a low priority effect by prescribing the condition that is satisfied when the jackpot is won (or is) in the special symbol lottery. It is possible to enhance the staging effect at the time.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 to 109, the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment is controlled by the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. The explanation will focus on the differences from the processing. In the second embodiment, in the RAM initial value setting process (see S4010 in FIG. 57) executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 57) of the voice lamp control device 113 with respect to the first embodiment described above. The point of adding and executing the button effect initial setting process (see S4012 in FIG. 100) and the special figure 1 variation start process 2 (see S4252 in FIG. 101) instead of the special figure 1 variation start process (see S4202 in FIG. 60). (See) is replaced with the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (see S4204 of FIG. 61), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 2 (see S4254 of FIG. 102) is replaced with the reserved ball number processing (see S4208 of FIG. 63). Then, the reserved ball number processing 2 (see S4258 in FIG. 63) is replaced with the variable display setting process (see S4112 in FIG. 67), and the variable display setting process 2 (see S4112 in FIG. 105) is replaced with the button pressing process (see FIG. It differs in that the button pressing process 2 (see S5853 in FIG. 108) is executed instead of the button pressing process 2 (see S5803 in FIG. 108). The other elements are the same, and detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

First, the contents of the button effect initial setting process (S4012) will be described with reference to FIG. 100. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of the button effect initial setting process (S4012). In the second embodiment, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with an operating means (effect setting switch) at a position where the hall clerk can operate and the player cannot operate (for example, the back surface of the pachinko machine 10). When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the effect setting switch turned on, the setting information indicating the prohibition of simultaneous effect is stored in the simultaneous effect enable / disable setting area 222aa. Then, in this button effect initial setting process (S4012), when the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the simultaneous effect is executed based on the setting information stored in the simultaneous effect enable / disable setting area 222aa. The process of setting the presence or absence of is executed.

Specifically, when the button effect initial setting process (S4012) is executed, the setting information of the simultaneous effect enable / disable setting area 222aa is read (S4031), and when the read setting information is the setting information indicating the prohibition of simultaneous effect. The simultaneous production prohibition flag is set to on, and the simultaneous production prohibition flag is set to off when the setting information does not prohibit simultaneous production (S4032). With this configuration, it is possible to arbitrarily set the initial setting status regarding the simultaneous production in the pachinko machine 10.

In the present embodiment, the hall staff is configured to be able to operate the staging setting switch provided in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not limited to this, and after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped, it is not limited to this. The effect setting switch is placed at a position where the hall staff cannot operate (for example, inside the sealed base case), and it is set so that the presence or absence of simultaneous effect execution is not changed for each type of pachinko machine 10. It may be configured. In this case, for example, in a pachinko machine 10 in which the same effect mode can be executed, a pachinko machine 10 having a different jackpot probability of a special symbol and a different jackpot type (so-called pachinko machine 10 having different specifications) can produce a large number of effects. In the pachinko machine 10 that you want to execute (for example, the pachinko machine 10 that is set to have a low jackpot probability), the simultaneous effects are set to be executable, and the pachinko machine 10 that you do not want to execute a large number of effects (for example, the jackpot probability is high). In the pachinko machine 10) that has been set, it is advisable to set the simultaneous effect to be non-executable.

With this configuration, it is easy to increase the amount of effect to be executed according to the length of the jackpot interval of the special symbol on the design value without changing the content of the process for setting various effects of the voice lamp control device 113. Can be adjusted to. Further, by operating the effect setting switch, not only the presence / absence of simultaneous effect execution but also the range to be read when executing various effects in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa can be set. good. Even with this configuration, the amount of effect to be executed can be easily adjusted according to the length of the jackpot interval of the special symbol on the design value.

As described above, when the effect setting switch is provided at a position where the player cannot operate and the amount of effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 is limited, the operation of selecting the effect amount by the player, which will be described later. (See FIG. 109) may be configured to be executed within a limited amount of effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the contents of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing 2 (FIG. 4252) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 2 (FIG. 4252). The special figure 1 variation start process 2 (FIG. 4252) has various effect modes (notice) selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table 222a with respect to the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process (see S4202 in FIG. 60). Of the effects, etc.), the effect mode to which the priority is given is different in that the process for storing the effect layer storage area group 223aa is executed, and the other aspects are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing 2 (FIG. 4252) is executed, first, the same processing of S4301 to S4302 as the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (see S4202 of FIG. 60) is executed, and then the fluctuation is executed. With reference to the pattern selection table 223a, a detailed effect mode (notice effect, etc.) is selected (S4321). Here, in the processing of S4321, the information indicating the pass / fail determination result included in the received variation pattern command, the information indicating the variation time, the information indicating the stop type, and the acquired effect counter (values are periodically updated). Based on the value of the random number value), various effect modes (effect content of the advance notice effect and presence / absence of button effect), execution timing, and priority are set.

When the processing of S4321 is completed, from the effect modes selected this time, the effect mode with priority (preliminary effect, etc.) is extracted (S4322), and the information indicating the extracted effect mode (effect information) is dealt with. The effect layer storage area (first effect layer storage area 223ab to third effect layer storage area 223ad) is set (stored) in the priority 2 area to the priority 4 area (S4323). Here, since the staging information indicating the staging mode extracted by the process of S4322 is the special figure variation display staging (see FIG. 99 (d)), the staging information is stored in the storage range as shown in FIG. Is the priority 2 area to the priority 4 area of the first effect layer storage area 223ab to the third effect layer storage area 223ad. When the processing of S4323 is completed, the same processing of S4304 to S4306 as the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (see S4202 of FIG. 60) is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the contents of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 2 (S4254) will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 2 (S4254). The special figure 2 variation start process 2 (S4254) has various effect modes (preliminary effect) selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table 222a with respect to the above-mentioned special figure 2 variation start process (see S4204 of FIG. 61). Etc.), the effect mode to which the priority is given is different in that the process for storing the effect layer storage area group 223aa is executed, and the other aspects are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 2 (S4254) is executed, first, the same processing of S4351 to S4352 as the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (see S4204 of FIG. 61) is executed, and then the fluctuation pattern is executed. With reference to the selection table 223a, a detailed effect mode (notice effect, etc.) is selected (S4371). Here, in the process of S4371, the information indicating the pass / fail determination result included in the received variation pattern command, the information indicating the variation time, the information indicating the stop type, and the acquired effect counter (values are periodically updated). Based on the value of the random number value), various effect modes (effect content of the advance notice effect and presence / absence of button effect), execution timing, and priority are set.

When the processing of S4371 is completed, from the effect modes selected this time, the effect mode with priority (preliminary effect, etc.) is extracted (S4372), and the information indicating the extracted effect mode (effect information) is dealt with. The effect layer storage area (first effect layer storage area 223ab to third effect layer storage area 223ad) is set (stored) in the priority 2 area to the priority 4 area (S4373). Here, since the staging information indicating the staging mode extracted by the process of S4372 is the special figure variation display staging (see FIG. 99 (d)), the staging information is stored in the storage range as shown in FIG. Is the priority 2 area to the priority 4 area of the first effect layer storage area 223ab to the third effect layer storage area 223ad. When the processing of S4373 is completed, the same processing of S4354 to S4356 as the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (see S4204 of FIG. 61) is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Next, the contents of the reserved ball number processing 2 (S4258) will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the contents of the reserved ball number processing 2 (S4258). In the reserved ball number processing 2 (S4258), with respect to the above-mentioned reserved ball number processing (see S4208 in FIG. 63), the reserved ball number processing 2 (S4258) is a process of storing the selected holding effect in the effect hierarchical storage area group 223aa and the reserved ball number processing. The difference is that the process of selecting the hold effect is executed when the upper limit value has not been reached. The other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the reserved ball number processing 2 (S4258) is executed, first, the same processing of S4501 to S4504 as the above-mentioned reserved ball number processing (see S4208 in FIG. 63) is executed. Here, in the processing of S4503, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls in the special figure) is not the upper limit value (8) (S4503: No), the special holding effect processing is executed (S4523), and S4507 It shifts to the process and ends this process. The details of the special hold effect process executed in S4523 will be described later with reference to FIG. 104, but the determination of whether to execute the super hold effect (see FIG. 95) and the number of reserved balls have not reached the upper limit. The selection process of the hold effect in the case is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold effect is to be executed in the process of S4504 (S4504: Yes), next, the hold effect selection pattern (effect mode) is set using the hold effect selection table 223aa (S4521) and set. Information (effect information) indicating the effect mode of the hold effect is set (stored) in the corresponding storage area in the effect layer storage area group 222aa (S4522), the process proceeds to S4507, and this process ends.

Here, since the information (effect information) indicating the effect mode set in the process of S4521 is the effect for pending change (see FIG. 99 (d)), the effect information is as shown in FIG. 99 (d). The storage range is from the priority 2 area to the priority 4 area of the first effect layer storage area 223ab to the third effect layer storage area 223ad.

Next, the contents of the special hold effect processing (S4523) will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special hold effect processing (S4523). This special hold effect process (S4523) is a process executed when it is determined in the hold ball number process 2 (S4258 in FIG. 103) that the hold ball number is not the upper limit value (8 pieces), and is various types. This is a process in which the hold effect is set. That is, it is a process for setting a hold effect when the number of special figure hold balls is not the upper limit value.

When the special hold effect process (FIG. 4523) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 button effect is being executed (S6301), if it is determined that it is being executed (S6301: Yes), and then. , It is determined whether the special figure 1 button effect being executed is a button effect stored in the priority 1 area (S6302). Here, if it is determined that the special figure 1 button effect being executed has priority 1 (S6302: Yes), a new hold effect cannot be executed during that period, so this process ends as it is. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S6302, if it is determined that the special figure 1 button effect being executed is not priority 1 (S6302: No), then the current number of reserved balls (holding updated in S4502 of FIG. 103). It is determined whether the value of the ball count counter) is "7" (S6303), and if it is determined to be "7" (S6303: Yes), the priority 1 area 223ab1 of the first staging layer storage area 223ab is set. When it is determined whether the effect information is already stored (S6304) and when it is determined that the effect information is not stored (S6304: No), the information (effect information) indicating the special hold effect (super hold effect) is displayed. The priority 1 area 223ab1 of the first staging layer storage area 223ab is set (stored), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S6304 that the effect information is already stored in the priority 1 area 223ab1 of the first effect layer storage area 223ab (S6304: Yes), the effect information to be executed with priority is set. This process ends without executing the current hold effect (super hold effect). Further, when it is determined in the process of S6301 that the special figure 1 button effect is not being executed (S6301: Yes), or when it is determined in the process of S6303 that the number of reserved balls is not 7, (S6303: No). , S6306, and the presence / absence of execution of the hold effect and the effect mode (effect pattern) of the hold effect are selected (determined) based on the hold effect selection table 223aa.

Then, when the hold effect is selected as a result of the processing of S6306 (S6307), the information indicating the determined hold effect (effect information) is set in the corresponding storage rear in the effect layer storage area group 223aa (S6308). ), End this process. Here, since the information (effect information) indicating the hold effect set (determined) in the process of S6306 is the hold change effect (see FIG. 99 (d)), as shown in FIG. 99 (d). The storage range of the effect information is the priority 2 area to the priority 4 area of the first effect layer storage area 223ab to the third effect layer storage area 223ad.

As described above, in the second embodiment, regardless of the presence / absence and contents of various effects set by other triggers, various effects are set at each trigger and selected in each process ( The various effects that have been set) are configured to be set in the effect layer storage area group 223aa, and among the plurality of effect information stored in the effect layer storage area group 223aa, only the effects that satisfy the execution conditions are selected. It is configured to run. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to execute the discrimination process (process for discriminating the effect setting status at another opportunity) when setting various effects, so that the processing load can be reduced.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S4162) will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S4162). The variation display setting process 2 (S4162) is an effect for setting the variation display setting process (see S4112 in FIG. 67) with respect to the variation of the special figure 1 variation or the variation effect corresponding to the variation of the special figure 2. The difference is that the mode setting process (S5321 (S5322)) is executed, and the other aspects are the same. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the staging mode setting process (S5321) will be described with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the contents of the staging mode setting process (S5321). This effect mode setting process (S5321) is special when it is determined in the variation display setting process 2 (see S4162 of FIG. 105) that the variation start flag of the special figure 1 is set to ON (S5301: Yes). FIG. 1 Corresponds to the special figure 2 variation when it is executed to set the effect mode of the variation effect corresponding to the variation and it is determined that the special figure 2 variation start flag is set to ON (S5306: Yes). This is a process executed to set the effect mode of the variation effect to be performed, and is an effect that satisfies the execution condition among various effect information stored in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa at the change start timing of each special figure. This is a process for setting an effect mode based on information (high-priority effect information).

When the effect mode setting process (S5321) is executed, first, the effect information stored in the effect layer storage area group 223aa is read out (S6401), and the related effect setting process is executed (S6402). Here, the related effect setting process (S6402) will be described with reference to FIG. 107. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the contents of the related effect setting process (S6402). In this related effect setting process (S6402), the effect information of low priority (priorities 1 to 4) to be executed in association with (attached to) the effect information set to high priority (priority 1) is determined. A process for determining the non-priority effect information to be discarded in association with the effect information set to the high priority (priority 1) is executed.

When the related effect setting process (S6402) is executed, first, whether or not there is effect information indicating a specific effect having a related effect in the priority 1 area 223ab1 of the first effect layer storage area 223ab of the effect layer storage area group 223aa. Determine (S6501). That is, it is determined whether the effect to be executed with the highest priority is a specific effect that defines a related effect (another effect to be associated and executed, or another effect to be associated and discarded). If it is determined in the process of S6501 that the effect information indicating the specific effect is not stored (S6501: No), it is not necessary to perform the process related to the related effect, so this process is terminated as it is and the effect mode setting process (S6501: No). Return to S5321) in FIG. 106.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6501 that the effect information indicating the specific effect is stored (S6501: Yes), then the effect information related to the specific effect is any of the effect layer storage area group 223aa. It is determined whether or not it is stored in the storage area (S6502), and if it is determined that it is not stored (S6503: No), it is not necessary to perform the processing related to the related effect. The process returns to the mode setting process (S5321 in FIG. 106).

If it is determined in the process of S6502 that the effect information related to the specific effect is stored in any storage area of the effect hierarchical storage area group 223aa (S6502: Yes), then the related effect is associated. (S6503), and if it is determined that the stringing effect is executed (S6503: Yes), the execution timing of the stringing effect and the execution timing of the specific effect overlap. It is determined whether or not it is done (S6504).

Here, when it is determined that the execution timing of the stringing effect and the execution timing of the specific effect overlap (S6504: Yes), the execution timing of the stringing effect is the already stored execution timing. As a process for correcting to a different execution timing, the execution timing of the stringing effect is rewritten to before the execution timing of the specific effect (5 seconds before) (S6505), and the priority of the stringing effect is set to 1.5. (S6506), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S6504, when it is determined that the execution timing of the stringing effect and the execution timing of the specific effect do not overlap (S6504), it is not necessary to correct the execution timing of each effect. This process is skipped and this process is terminated.

That is, when the effect information corresponding to the stringing effect is stored among the related effects specified in the specific effect, the execution timing of the stringing effect included in the effect information is set to the execution of the specific effect. The process of rewriting before the timing (the timing at which the specific effect is executed after the stringing effect is completed) is executed, and the priority included in the effect information corresponding to the stringing effect is set to the specific effect. The process of rewriting and setting to the special priority (1.5 in this embodiment), which is the next highest priority, is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a low-priority effect (stringing effect) by linking it to a specific high-priority effect, so that only the high-priority effect is executed. It is possible to solve the problem of getting bored of the game early. Further, by correcting the execution timing so that the low-priority stringing effect is executed before the specific effect, when the stringing effect is executed, the specific effect is executed after that. It can make the player think that it is a game, and it is possible to have fun playing the game while predicting the content of the production to be executed in the future.

In addition, for a player who has the experience of executing a low-priority stringing effect independently, the execution timing of the stringing effect is corrected by understanding that the execution timing of the stringing effect is different from before. Since it is possible to determine in advance that the player is present, it is possible to give a sense of superiority to the player who has been playing the game for a long time. In order to exert this effect strongly, it is preferable to execute the correction process so that the execution timing after being corrected by the process of S6505 becomes an execution timing that cannot be set when the execution is performed independently. Further, it may be configured to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that the execution timing has been corrected.

In the present embodiment, in order to execute the specific effect after the end of the stringing effect, a process of correcting the execution timing of the stringing effect is executed, but the process is not limited to this, and for example, the execution of the specific effect is executed. The timing may be corrected (delayed), or the specific effect may be executed after the stringing effect is completed by making a correction that shortens the effect period of the stringing effect. Further, it is sufficient that the stringing effect is executed before the specific effect is executed, and the execution timing and the effect period may be corrected so that the specific effect is executed during the execution of the stringing effect.

Returning to FIG. 107, the description will be continued. In the process of S6503, when it is determined that the effect is not the stringing effect (S6503: No), that is, it is determined that the related effect stored in any storage area of the effect layer storage area group 223aa is not the stringing effect. In that case, next, it is determined whether the related effect is the exclusion effect (S6507), and if it is determined to be the exclusion effect (S6507: Yes), the effect information corresponding to the exclusion effect is stored in the effect hierarchy storage area group. Clear (discard) from the storage area of 223aa, and end this process. If it is determined in the process of S6507 that it is not an exclusion effect (S6507: No), the process of S6508 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, different triggers (triggers for setting the variable effect of the special figure 1, opportunity for setting the variable effect of the special figure 2, opportunity for setting the reserved effect when the number of reserved balls is variable), that is, Since various effects (button effect, display effect) are set at different timings, the execution timings of the various effects set in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa are set variously depending on the establishment timing of each opportunity. By determining the effect mode, priority, and execution timing of various effects that are irregularly set in this way and determining the effect to be actually executed, it is possible to simplify the effect setting process at each opportunity.

In addition, since it is possible to set the effect mode (execution timing of each effect) that is executed only when the timings when specific effects are executed accidentally overlap, a separate and independent setting opportunity is used in combination. It is possible to carry out the production that was done. Therefore, it is possible to perform various patterns of production that cannot be easily predicted by the player, and it is possible to enhance the production effect.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, a combination of effects that are not desired to be executed during one variable effect is defined in advance, and when one effect is executed, the other effect is excluded. Since it is configured to execute the process, it is possible to suppress the execution of a combination of effects that gives the player a sense of discomfort or distrust.

Returning to FIG. 106, the description will be continued. After finishing the processing of S6402, next, it is determined whether the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is set to ON (S6403), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S6403: No), the effect hierarchy storage area. When the processes of S6404 to S6406 for setting the effect mode for the effect information stored in all the storage areas of the group 223aa are executed and it is determined that the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is set to ON. (S6403: Yes), among the effect layer storage area group 223a, the processes of S6407 and S6408 for setting the effect mode for only the effect information stored in the first effect layer storage area 223ab are executed, and S6409 is executed. Move to the processing of.

Here, in the process of S6404, the effect execution period of each effect is determined from each effect information set (stored) in the first effect layer storage area 223ab, the second effect layer storage area 223ac, and the first effect layer storage area 223ad. Extracted (S6404), the storage area in which the effect information is set in the priority 1 area in the order of the first effect layer storage area 223ab, the second effect layer storage area 223ac, and the first effect layer storage area 223ad is specified, and the effect is produced. An effect mode corresponding to the effect information of each priority 1 area is set so that the execution periods do not overlap (S6405).

That is, in the present embodiment, the priority order is also defined for the plurality of storage areas, and the priority order is in the order of the first effect layer storage area 223ab, the second effect layer storage area 223ac, and the third effect layer storage area 223ad. Is stipulated. Therefore, when the effect information whose execution period overlaps is set (stored) in the priority 1 area 223ab1 of the first effect layer storage area 223ab and the priority 1 area 233ac1 of the second effect layer storage area 223ac. Is set to the effect mode corresponding to the effect information set (stored) in the priority 1 area 223ab1 of the first effect layer storage area 223ab.

On the other hand, when different execution periods are specified in the effect information set (stored) in the priority 1 area of each storage area, the effect mode corresponding to all the effect information is set. As a result, in the variation effect corresponding to one special figure variation, first, only the effect mode having the highest priority is set. As a result, it is possible to appropriately provide the player with an effect that should be preferentially executed. In the present embodiment, the priority order is defined in the order of the first effect layer storage area 223ab, the second effect layer storage area 223ac, and the third effect layer storage area 223ad. When setting, the priority may be set randomly. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the production mode to be executed preferentially, and it is possible to provide a game machine rich in interest.

When the processing of S6405 is completed, next, the effect information to be executed is selected from the stored effect information in the order of priority 2 area to priority 4 area so that the effect execution periods do not overlap, and the selected effect information is selected. (S6406). At this point, the stringing effect set in the process of S6402 is set prior to other effect information. Further, the effect information excluded (cleared) by the process of S6402 is excluded from the selection target. Then, a display command indicating a variable effect corresponding to each effect mode set in the processes of S6405 and S6406 is set (S6409), and this process is terminated.

Next, in the process of S6407, the effect execution period included in the information set in the first effect layer storage area 223ab is extracted (S6407), and the effect information whose effect execution periods do not overlap is selected in descending order of priority. , The effect mode corresponding to the selected effect information is set (S6408), the process proceeds to the process of S6409 described above, and this process ends.

Next, the contents of the button pressing process 2 (S5853) will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the contents of the button pressing process 2 (S5853). The button pressing process 2 (S5853) is configured to be executed by adding the effect level selection process (S6221) to the button pressing process (see S5803 in FIG. 76) of the first embodiment described above. Different, otherwise identical. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the button pressing process 2 (S5853) is executed, first, the effect level selection process (S6221) is executed, and then the same processing of S6201 to S6209 as the above-mentioned button pressing process (see S5803 in FIG. 76) is executed. Then, this process is terminated. Here, the content of the effect level selection process executed in the process of S6221 will be described with reference to FIG. 109.

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect level selection process (S6221). In this effect level selection process (S6221), a process for selecting the amount (level) of the effect to be executed by the player is executed. In the present embodiment, the effect information indicating various effects can be set (stored) in the effect layer storage area group 223aa, and the effect information set (stored) in which range of the set (stored) effect information is set. It is configured so that the player can select whether to use it to determine the actual effect to be performed.

With this configuration, for example, a player who prefers to execute a lively effect by executing a plurality of effects at various timings (including duplication) can set (memory) more storage areas. ) The effect information that has been set as the target when deciding the effect to be executed, and the player who prefers to execute a simple effect executes the effect information set (stored) in a small storage area. It can be a target when determining the effect, and each player can execute the desired amount of effect.

When the effect level selection process (S6221) is executed, first, the standby condition (for example, the state in which the special figure change is not executed continues for 3 seconds or more while the demo screen is currently in the demo screen (for example, the state in which the special figure change is not executed) continues. If it is determined that (S6601), and if it is determined that the demo screen is in progress (S6601: Yes), then whether the first frame button 22a is turned on. (Whether it is pressed) is determined (S6602).

In the process of S6602, if it is determined that the first frame button 22a is on (S6602: Yes), then it is determined whether the second frame button 22b is on (pressed) (S6603) and turned on. (S6603: Yes), it is determined whether the current setting status of the simultaneous production prohibition flag 223ae is ON (S6604). If it is determined in the process of S6604 that the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is set to on (S6604: Yes), the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is set to off (S6605), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is not set to on (set to off) (S6604: No), the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is set to on (S6606), and this process is performed. finish.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is a predetermined state (during the demo screen), a special operation (an operation of pressing the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b at the same time) is executed for the operating means. By doing so, the setting of the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae can be switched. This makes it possible for the player to easily set a desired production level (amount).

Although detailed description is omitted, the current setting status of the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae, that is, the amount of effect to be executed, is in an area that can be easily seen by the player, such as the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to display the effect level information for indicating (effect level). As a result, the player can variably set the effect level based on the amount and content of the effect actually executed and the displayed effect level information. Further, as a display mode displayed in the demo screen, a method of variably setting the effect level is displayed. This makes it possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the information of various effects to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set by various setting triggers, and the voice lamp is used. It is stored in the storage means (effect layer storage area group 223aa) possessed by the control device 113, and a display command corresponding to the effect to be actually executed is displayed based on the information stored in the storage means at the execution timing of each effect. Although the configuration for outputting to the control device 114 is used, the configuration is not limited to this, and commands indicating information of various effects set by various setting triggers are output to the display control device 114 and output to the display control device 114. The storage means (the storage means corresponding to the effect hierarchical storage area group 223aa) possessed by the side is stored, and the effect to be executed according to the execution timing of the effect is determined based on the information stored in the storage means. Is also good.

Further, in this case, the information indicating the content of the execution effect set on the display control device 114 side is output to the voice lamp control device 113 side, and is based on the information received from the display control device 114 on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Therefore, it is advisable to configure it so as to set a new effect. This makes it possible to determine whether or not to set a new effect according to the situation of the effect actually being executed.

Further, in the second embodiment, the configuration in which the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b are provided as the operation means that can be operated by the player is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the third symbol is shown. A touch sensor whose detection range is set at a position facing the display screen of the display device 81 (a position in front of the display screen) may be used. This touch sensor is a non-contact type detection means, and is an operation means for determining that the operation has been performed by detecting that the player has entered a hand within the detection range.

When such a touch sensor is used, since the detection range of the touch sensor is provided at a position facing the display screen, for example, "touch the character" on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. By displaying the comment and the character and setting the display position of the character to a position overlapping the detection range of the touch sensor, the player can positively operate the operation means (touch sensor). ..

Further, when the gaming machine provided with the touch sensor described above is provided with a variable decorative member that can be changed up to a position that covers the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, that is, at least a predetermined first position (initial position). ) And a variable member that can move (variable) between the second position (operation position), and the variable member is variably operated when the player operates the operating means (first frame button 22a). When configured as such, the decorative variable member moved to the second position invades the detection range of the touch sensor, and the button effect using the first frame button 22a (variable operation of the decorative variable member). There arises a problem that the button effect using the touch sensor cannot be executed during the execution of the effect).

In such a case, it is preferable to rewrite a part of the information of the effect contents of each button effect set in duplicate to execute the duplicate button effect. Specifically, at the timing of executing each button effect, the position of the decorative variable member and the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are determined, and based on the determination result, in advance. It is preferable to rewrite the operation means to be operated and the information indicating the operation content for the operation means among the defined effect modes of the button effect. As a result, the button effects can be duplicated and executed without changing the display mode of the button effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

In this embodiment, the effect mode (effect content, execution timing, execution period, priority, etc.) of each effect is independently set at each setting opportunity, and the effect is based on the information indicating the set effect mode. However, it is preferable to configure the execution timing to be executed after the execution timing correction process for correcting the execution timing of the effect mode independently set at each setting trigger is performed. With this configuration, for example, when button effects are set at a plurality of setting triggers and the plurality of button effects are executed in duplicate, the operation validity period set corresponding to each button effect is 0. . If there is a deviation of 1 second, the deviation of 0.1 seconds can be corrected, and at the same time, an effect can be executed in which the operation valid period is set. Therefore, the staging effect can be enhanced. Further, instead of correcting the effect mode of each effect actually set, only the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is corrected, and for example, the operation valid period is notified to the player. It may be configured to synchronize the timing at which the display mode (gauge 817a) is displayed.

Further, when the effect mode of the button effect is to variably operate the above-mentioned decorative variable member, the decorative variable member is to be positioned at the initial position in advance before the button effect is executed. It is necessary to execute a process (preparation process) and a process (origin confirmation process) for determining whether the decorative variable member is located at the initial position. Further, when the decorative variable member is variable (positioned at the operating position) and the button effect is switched to another button effect (high priority button effect), the player If the decorative variable member is located at a position that covers the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, it will interfere with other effects and the entire pachinko machine 10 will be disturbed. There was a risk that the effect of the production would be significantly reduced.

Therefore, a high priority (priority 1) is set for the button effect in which the effect mode for varying the decorative variable member is set. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the effect of the pachinko machine 10 as a whole is significantly reduced due to the execution of other button effects. Not limited to the above-described configuration, only various effects for moving the decorative variable member are stored in different storage areas (variable effect storage areas) having a plurality of different priorities, and are stored in the variable effect storage area. The staging information may be preferentially discriminated, and based on the discriminant result, it may be configured to determine whether or not to execute various staging stored in the staging hierarchy storage area group 223aa. As a result, the variable effect for varying the decorative variable member can be executed with priority over other effects, and the priority of execution can be given in the variable effect.

Further, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, as described with reference to FIG. 8, the player is notified of the operation valid period of the operating means, and the operating means is operated within the operation valid period. Although a button effect is provided to make the player operate, a special button effect that is executed based on the player operating the operating means may be provided. Specifically, when the operation means is operated during a part of the period during which the button effect is not executed without notifying the player of the operation validity period, the display screen of the three symbol display devices 81 is displayed. A special button effect may be provided in which an effect (lively effect) that changes various modes of effect being executed is executed.

In this case, a special timer different from the button enable timer set based on the execution of the button effect described above is provided, and it is determined that the predetermined button operation is executed while the predetermined period is set by the special timer. In this case, it may be configured to execute the special button effect, or it may be configured to execute the special button effect in duplicate for each button effect. As described above, since the special button effect does not notify the player of the operation validity period, even if the special button effect is executed in duplicate with other button effects, the duplicate effect is not given to the player. Can be executed.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 124. In the third embodiment, with respect to the first embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13, the types of gaming states set according to the lottery result of the special symbol, the configuration of the main control device 110, and the voice lamp control. Is different from the configuration of the device 113.

In the first embodiment described above, the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) (special figure 1 lottery) and the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) (special figure 2 lottery) are performed at the same time (parallel). It was configured to be executed. On the other hand, the third embodiment is different in that the special figure 2 lottery is preferentially executed with respect to the special figure 1 lottery.

Then, in the third embodiment, when a jackpot of a special symbol is won, a probabilistic state (until the next jackpot is won) is set as a game state set after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning. And, one of the time saving states (until the special figure fluctuation is executed 100 times without winning the jackpot, or until the jackpot is won) is set.

In other words, if the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol are continuously set until the next jackpot is won, so that the probability variation state is set. The probability of winning many prize balls was much higher. Here, the pachinko machine 10 in recent years is configured to continue the probabilistic state with a high probability, and by providing the player with the possibility of winning a large number of prize balls, the gambling of the game is enhanced. As a measure to prevent this, a measure for reducing the probability that the probabilistic state continues (for example, reducing the rate at which the probabilistic state continues to 65% or less) is being studied.

By taking such measures, it is possible to provide a sound pachinko machine 10 that does not give the player excessive expectations for the prize ball, but the probability change state is high as in the past. Among the effects used in the pachinko machine 10 that continues with a probability (for example, 80%) (effects for showing the lottery result of a special symbol), the effect when used in the pachinko machine 10 with countermeasures. However, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play is reduced.

Specifically, in the battle production that notifies that the probability change state will be set after the end of this jackpot game when the own character battles with the enemy character during the jackpot game and wins the battle. If the rate at which the probability change state continues decreases, the winning percentage of the battle effect executed during the jackpot game decreases, and the player's expectation (the probability change state is set) when the battle effect is executed. There was a problem that the expectation for doing things) diminished and the motivation to play was reduced.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, a continuous battle effect is provided in which the battle effect is continued from the end of the jackpot game until the predetermined end condition (for example, the special figure change is executed 30 times) is satisfied. It is configured to execute and execute the effect of winning the battle when the jackpot is won during the period from the end of the jackpot game to the establishment of the predetermined end condition. As a result, the probability of winning in the battle production can be increased, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play.

Further, in the third embodiment, when a probabilistic jackpot (a jackpot in which a probabilistic state is set after the jackpot game ends) is won, a battle effect is executed to win the battle during the jackpot game, and a time-saving jackpot (big hit) is executed. It is configured to execute the continuous battle effect only when the big hit) in which the time saving state is set after the end of the game is won. This makes it possible to increase the probability of winning in the battle production.

In addition, during the continuous battle production, the production result of the continuous battle is configured to be different depending on the type of the winning jackpot. For example, if the probability change jackpot is won during the continuous battle production, the battle victory production is performed. It is configured to execute the battle rematch production if the time saving jackpot is won during the continuous battle production. As a result, if a short-time jackpot is won during the continuous battle production, the defeat production that loses the battle is suppressed. Therefore, since the frequency of the defeat effect being executed after the battle effect is executed can be reduced, the rate of battle victory can be relatively increased.

Here, with reference to FIG. 110, the structure of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 110 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 110, the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is located below the gaming area with respect to the gaming board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the first ball entry port 164 is arranged instead of the ball entry unit 64. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, while the normal state is set as the game state, a game in which the ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 164 by a left-handed game is performed, and the special figure 1 lottery is performed. A game aiming for a big hit is executed. Then, when the jackpot is won and the probability change state or the time saving state is set as the game state, a game in which the ball is inserted into the second entrance 640 by the right-handed game is performed.

<Regarding the content of the production in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 111 to 114, the characteristic effect contents executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 111 is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect executed during the special figure change from the jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 111, in the present embodiment, a battle effect (probability change suggestion effect) for suggesting the game state after the end of the jackpot game to the player is executed during the jackpot game, and the battle effect (probability change suggestion effect) is executed according to the type of the winning jackpot. , The execution period of the battle production is different, and the production success rate (battle win rate) in the battle production is increased, and the expectation of the player for the battle production can be increased.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111 (a), when the probabilistic jackpot is won, the battle effect (see FIG. 111 (A)) executed during the jackpot game is used to win the battle. (See FIG. 111 (B)) is executed. Here, the production content of the battle effect executed during the jackpot game will be described with reference to FIG. 112.

FIG. 112 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when the battle effect is executed, and FIG. 112 (b) is a display displayed when the battle is won in the battle effect. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the contents. Since FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b) are schematic views showing a display example executed during the time saving state, the display modes of the small area Dm1 and the small area Dm2 show the time saving state. Since the mode of the battle effect executed in the main display area Dm is the same as the battle effect executed during the jackpot game, FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b) will be described. Further, among the elements of the display screen shown in FIG. 112 (a), the same elements as those in the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, when the battle effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 112 (a), the effect that the ally character 817 imitating a hero and the enemy character 818 imitating a monster perform a battle is executed. Then, the physical strength gauge 817a of the character 817 and the physical strength gauge 818a of the character 818 are displayed, and the effect that the character whose physical strength gauge becomes 0 first loses is executed.

On the upper side of the main display area Dm, a victory notification mode Dm7, a rematch notification mode Dm8, and a defeat notification mode Dm9 are displayed as result notification modes for notifying the result of the battle effect. All of the notification modes Dm7 to Dm9 are displayed as shown in FIG. 112 (a) immediately after the battle effect is started, and when a completely denied effect result occurs as the battle effect progresses. Is configured to hide the corresponding notification mode. As a result, the player can predict the effect result of the battle effect before the effect result of the battle effect (win or lose of the battle) is notified.

In addition, on the lower left side of the main display area Dm, a prize ball display area Dm5 for displaying prize ball number information for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game is formed, and a value of "1000" is displayed. ing. Further, a round number display area Dm6 for indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot game is formed on the right side thereof, and the value of "8" is displayed. As described above, since FIG. 112A shows the display content of the battle effect (continuous battle effect) in the time saving state, it is actually a game state in which the jackpot game is completed.

In such a gaming state, by displaying the prize ball display area Dm5 and the round number display area Dm6, the player is currently in a big hit game (for example, during the interval period or ending period between round games). It can be made to think that the battle effect being executed is the effect being executed during the jackpot game. In FIG. 112A, the small area Dm1 and the small area Dm2 are displayed in large size in order to explain the current gaming state in an easy-to-understand manner, but in reality, the player is changing the special figure. It is displayed in a size that makes it difficult to identify.

Then, at the time of FIG. 111 (B), the effect of winning the battle shown in FIG. 112 (b) is executed. In FIG. 112 (b), the physical strength gauge 818a of the character 818 becomes 0, the effect that the character 818 is defeated is displayed, and only the victory notification mode Dm7 is displayed. By executing this battle victory effect, the player is notified that the probability change state is set as the game state.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 111. After winning the battle, the production during the probable change state is executed, and if the jackpot is won again during the probable change state (time saving jackpot), the battle production (continuous battle production) is executed until the time saving 30 times elapses even after the jackpot game ends. (See FIG. 112 (a)). Then, when the special figure fluctuation is executed 30 times after the time saving state is set, the effect of losing the battle (defeat effect) is executed (see FIG. 111 (C)). Here, with reference to FIG. 113 (a), the contents of the production when the battle production is defeated will be described. FIG. 113A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents at the time of defeat of the battle.

As shown in FIG. 113A, the physical strength gauge 817a of the character 817 becomes 0, the effect that the character 817 is defeated is displayed, and only the defeat notification mode Dm9 is displayed. By executing this battle defeat effect, it is notified that the time saving state is set as the game state. In this embodiment, 30 times out of 100 time reductions set as the time reduction state at the time when the battle defeat effect is executed are elapsed, so that after FIG. 113 (a) is displayed. As a display during the time saving state (see FIG. 111 (D)), as shown in FIG. 114 (b), in the remaining time saving number display area Dm11 indicating the remaining period of the time saving state, "69" is displayed as the remaining time saving number. The value is displayed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the battle effect is executed during the period from the time reduction state is set until the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the probability that the victory effect will be executed in the battle effect. (Increase the probability of winning a probable change jackpot within 30 times of the time reduction state), and reduce the number of time reductions executed after the defeat production is executed in the battle production, so the special symbol is low. It is possible to shorten the period of the time-saving game performed in the state where the probability state is confirmed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's motivation to play.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 111. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), if a probabilistic jackpot is won during the continuous battle production (in the special drawing lottery at the 25th rotation after the time saving state is set), the battle wins during the probabilistic jackpot game. Is executed (see FIG. 112 (b)). As a result, internally, after shifting to the time-saving state once (conventionally, after the defeat production was executed in the battle production), the battle was won even though the probability change jackpot was won. Only the victory effect can be executed without executing the defeat effect of the effect. Therefore, the probability of victory in the battle production can be relatively increased.

In addition, according to the example shown in FIG. 111 (b), since the example in which the number of rounds is small as the probability variation jackpot (probability variation jackpot (2R)) is shown, the production result of the continuous battle effect is displayed during the jackpot game. However, it is not limited to this, for example, in the case of winning a (16R) probability variation jackpot with a large number of rounds, if it is determined by the look-ahead result that the 16 round probability variation jackpot is won, The winning effect of the continuous battle effect and the jackpot effect may be executed, and then the victory effect may be executed again in the battle effect executed during the jackpot game.

In addition, the interval period set after the end of the 8th round of the 16-round jackpot game is set longer than the other interval periods (for example, 1 minute), and the production result of the continuous battle production is set by the 8th round of the first half. After notifying, the effect result indicating that the jackpot was won in the simulated effect of executing the special figure fluctuation in a pseudo manner during the interval period of the 8th round is displayed, and the latter 8 rounds are used during the jackpot game. It may be configured to execute the battle effect of. With this configuration, more winning effects can be performed.

In this case, the interval period after the end of the 8th round of the 16-round jackpot game may be configured to be different depending on the game state. For example, a state in which a probability change state is set (a continuous battle effect is executed). In the non-existing state), an interval period having the same length as other interval periods may be set, and a long-term interval period may be set only in a state in which a time saving state is set. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which an unnecessarily long interval period is set and the game efficiency is lowered in the 16-round probability variation jackpot that was won during the probability variation state.

In addition, when the time reduction state is set, it is even better to configure the long interval period to be set only for the 16 round probability variation jackpot that was won within 30 times of the special figure fluctuation after the time reduction state was set. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), if the time saving jackpot (2R) is won during the continuous battle production (the 20th special figure change after the time saving state is set), the rematch effect is produced as the production result of the continuous battle production. Is executed. Here, with reference to FIG. 113 (b), the production content of the rematch effect will be described. FIG. 113B is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when the effect result of the battle effect is a rematch. As shown in FIG. 113 (b), the character 817 is displayed in a posture of fighting again, and the command 816 of "another match" indicating that the battle effect is executed again with the physical strength gauge 817a remaining is displayed. And the rematch notification mode Dm8 is displayed. In this case, the small display area Dm2 displays the display mode of "222" indicating the big hit winning.

In this embodiment, as the above-mentioned continuous battle effect, the defeat effect is executed when the special figure change is executed 30 times after the time saving state is set, so that the continuous battle effect is being performed. Is an effect in which the physical strength gauge 817a of the character 817 is reduced according to the number of times the special figure change is executed. Then, when the number of time reductions of 30 times, which is the end condition of the continuous battle effect, approaches, the display content shown in FIG. 114 (a) is displayed. FIG. 114 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents when the number of time reductions reaches the 30th time during the continuous battle production.

As shown in FIG. 114 (a), the physical strength gauge 817a decreases according to the number of times the special figure changes executed during the continuous battle production, and the suggestion mode suggesting the defeat of the battle (shaking in FIG. 114 (a)). Defeat notification mode Dm9 is displayed in (displayed in mode). With this configuration, it is possible to execute the 30th variation in the time reduction with the physical strength gauge 817a being small, so that the player can execute the defeat effect of the battle without discomfort.

In this embodiment, the number of time reductions is 30 times (the number of special figure fluctuations after the time reduction state is set is 30 times) as the end condition of the continuous battle effect (battle effect executed during the time reduction state). The case is set as the end condition, but the end condition is not limited to this, and the number of special figure fluctuations in which the end condition is satisfied may be variably set by the staging lottery means. In this case, it is preferable to provide a jackpot type that sets a value other than 100 times (for example, 20 times, 50 times, 80 times, etc.) as the number of continuations of the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the continuous battle production is executed, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of remaining time reductions after the end of the continuous battle production.

In addition, as a guarantee period notification effect for notifying the player of the period during which the continuous battle effect does not end (battle effect guarantee period), for example, the physical strength gauge 817a of the character 817 does not decrease, that is, there is no defeat. The effect indicating the invincible mode may be configured to be executable, and the invincible mode may be configured to notify the duration of the invincible mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the end condition of the continuous battle effect is set based on the number of times the special figure changes in the time saving state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the lottery result of the special symbol is other than a big hit. In a part of the game machine, which is configured to be able to win a small hit that can give a player less privilege (a privilege different from the big hit game) than the big hit game, based on the small hit winning (execution of the small hit game). (Inside) It is good to configure so that the end condition of the continuous battle production is satisfied.

In this case, as the small hit game executed at the time of winning the small hit, it is preferable to execute the small hit game in which the same variable winning device 65 as the big hit game is opened. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the defeat effect of losing the battle while the variable winning device 65 is open, so that the defeat effect is executed for the player as if during the jackpot game. It can make you think.

Further, it is preferable to configure the continuous battle effect to be terminated based on the condition that the special figure change number reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) in the time saving state, or if the small hit is won, the condition established earlier is used. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the continuous battle production from becoming excessively long and to make the duration of the continuous battle production indefinite.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 119. The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed.

First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPI 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 117. FIG. 115 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the third embodiment in a schematic diagram. As shown in FIG. 115, the ROM 202 of the third embodiment selects the first random number 3 table 202ba instead of the first random number table 202a for the ROM 202 of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb is provided instead of the table 202d, and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 116 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the random number 3 table 203ba per first. As shown in FIG. 116, the first random number 3 table 203ba is the same except that the values specified for the first random number table 203a described above are different. Specifically, when the gaming state is low probability (low probability state of the special symbol), the jackpot is defined in the range where the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0,1", and the gaming state is changed. In the case of high probability (high probability state of special symbol), a big hit is defined in the range where the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "2 to 11".

Next, the contents of the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb will be described with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb, and FIG. 117 (b) is a special figure 1 jackpot type included in the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the selection table 202bb1, and FIG. 117 (c) shows the contents specified in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202bb2 possessed by the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb. It is a schematic diagram shown schematically.

As shown in FIG. 117 (a), the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb is a special figure 1 jackpot type for selecting the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). It has a selection table 202bb1 and a special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202bb2 for selecting the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is configured so that different jackpot types are selected according to the type of the winning special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 117 (b), the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202bb1 is a data table in which three types of jackpot types (big hits A to C) are defined, and the acquired first hit type counter C2. Each jackpot type is specified according to the value of. Specifically, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", "big hit A", in the range of "50 to 64", in the range of "big hit B", and in the range of "65 to 99". "Big hit C" is stipulated.

Here, the jackpot type "big hit A" is a jackpot type in which the jackpot game of 8 rounds is executed and the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game ends, the probability variation flag 203ba is set to ON, and the value of the time reduction counter 203h. This is a jackpot type in which "10000" is set. The jackpot type "big hit B" is a jackpot type in which a jackpot game of 16 rounds is executed and a probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends. The probability change flag 203ba is set to ON, and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is "10000". Is a jackpot type for which "" is set. The jackpot type "big hit C" is a jackpot type in which the jackpot game of 8 rounds is executed and the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed. The probability variation flag 203ba is set to off, and the value of the time saving counter 203h is "100". Is a jackpot type for which "" is set.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1, the probability change state is set after the jackpot game is completed with a probability of 65%, and the time saving state is set with a probability of 35%. Therefore, the probability of winning the battle in the battle effect executed during the jackpot game (notifying that the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends during the jackpot game) is 65% at the maximum.

As shown in FIG. 117 (c), the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202bb2 is a data table in which five types of jackpot types (big hits D to H) are defined, and the acquired first hit type counter C2. Each jackpot type is specified according to the value of. Specifically, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 24", "big hit D", in the range of "25 to 34", in the range of "big hit E", and in the range of "35 to 64". "Big hit F" is specified, "Big hit G" is specified in the range of "65 to 89", and "Big hit H" is specified in the range of "90 to 99".

Here, the jackpot type "big hit D" is a jackpot type in which a jackpot game of two rounds is executed and a probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, the probability change flag 203ba is set to ON, and the value of the time reduction counter 203h. This is a jackpot type in which "10000" is set. The jackpot type "big hit E" is a jackpot type having the same content as the above-mentioned "big hit A", and "big hit F" is a jackpot type having the same content as the above-mentioned "big hit B".

"Big hit G" is a big hit type in which a big hit game of two rounds is executed and a time saving state is set after the big hit game is completed. The probability change flag 203ba is set to off, and "100" is set as the value of the time saving counter 203h. It is a jackpot type to be set, and "big hit H" is the same jackpot type as the above-mentioned "big hit C".

That is, in the present embodiment, even if the jackpot is won in the special figure 2, the probability of the probability change state is set after the jackpot game is completed with a probability of 65%, which is the same as the case of winning the jackpot in the special figure 1, and the probability is 35%. The time saving state is set with. Therefore, the probability of winning the battle in the battle effect executed during the jackpot game (notifying that the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends during the jackpot game) is 65% at the maximum.

In addition, the percentage (30%) in which "big hit F", which is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player, is selected is selected by "big hit B" (big hit type having the same content as "big hit F") in Special Figure 1. It is set higher than the ratio (15%). Therefore, the special figure 2 lottery is more advantageous to the player than the special figure 1 lottery.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 118. FIG. 118 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration defined in the RAM 203 of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118, the RAM 203 in the third embodiment is different from the RAM 203 in the first embodiment in that the probability variation flag 203ba is provided instead of the probability variation counter 203g. Other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The probability variation flag 203ba is a flag for indicating that the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and is set to ON when the high probability state of the special symbol is set. In the jackpot end process 3 (S2551 in FIG. 124), which is executed at the end of the jackpot game, the probability variation flag 203ba sets the probability variation state after the jackpot type ends the jackpot ("Big hits A, B, D, E,". It is set to on when it is "F"), and is set to off when the jackpot is won and the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot (when the jackpot game is started).

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration defined in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 119, the present embodiment differs from the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment described above in that the in-battle flag 223ca is added, and is otherwise the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The in-battle flag 223ca is a flag for indicating that the battle effect (continuous battle effect) is being executed, and is set to be turned on when the battle effect (continuous battle effect) is being executed. .. This in-battle flag 223ca is set to on when the jackpot game executed based on the winning jackpot is started in the state where the battle effect is not executed (see S6704 in FIG. 128), and the voice lamp control device 113 is set. When setting various effects in, it is referred to to determine whether the battle effect is currently in progress. Then, in the battle effect update process (see S4651 in FIG. 126) of the state command reception process 3 (see S4252 in FIG. 125), the end condition of the battle effect is satisfied (the number of remaining time reductions reaches 70 times (special feature in the time reduction state). When the number of fluctuations in the figure reaches 30)), it is set to off (see S6657 in FIG. 126).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the third embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 124. In the third embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are not executed at the same time (in parallel). It is significantly different from the control process of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above in that the lottery (variation) of FIG. 2 is preferentially executed. The other contents are the same. Therefore, in the third embodiment, only the content of the control process relating to the above-mentioned difference will be described, and the description thereof will be omitted for the other contents.

First, the contents of the special symbol variation processing 3 (S131) will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing 3 (S131). The special symbol variation process 3 (S131) determines that neither the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 is being changed with respect to the above-mentioned special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34). The point configured to execute the process for starting the variation of the special figure 2 in preference to 1 and the process of updating the game state (update of the value of the time reduction counter 223h) are started to change the special symbol. The difference is that it is configured to be executed at the stop timing of the special symbol instead of the timing.

First, the special symbol variation processing 3 (S131) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 3 (S131). This special symbol variation process 3 (S131) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display are performed. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in the device 81.

In this special symbol variation processing 3, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being hit (S251). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. It includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S251: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S251: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S252), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S252: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d (the number of holdings N1 of the variation display of the first special symbol (special figure 1)) and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e. (Holding number N2 of variable display in the second special symbol) is acquired (S253). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S254), and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e must be 0. (S254: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S255), and the number of reserved balls indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e changed by the calculation. Set the command (S256). The hold ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S2401) of the main process (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the second special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223d.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of S256, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S257). In the process of S257, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After the process of S257 is executed, the second special symbol change start process 3 is executed (S258), and this process is terminated. The second special symbol change start process 3 (S258) will be described later with reference to FIG. 121.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S254 that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S254: No), then the acquired first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is used. It is determined whether the value (N1) is 0 (S259). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S259: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S259, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S259: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d. Is subtracted by 1 (S260), and a hold ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S261). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S2401) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223c.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of S261, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S262). In the process of S262, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first special symbol change start process 3 is executed (S263). The first special symbol change start processing 3 (S263) will be described later with reference to FIG. 122.

On the other hand, in the process of S252, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S252: Yes), whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. Is determined (S264). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If has not elapsed (S264: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S265), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S264, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S264: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S266). The stop symbol is set in advance by the second special symbol variation start process 3 (S258) and the first special symbol variation start process 3 (S263), which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. When the second special symbol change start process 3 (S258) or the first special symbol change start process 3 (S263) is executed, the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol hold ball storage area are executed. A special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common with 203b. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the special hit random number counter C1, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it is a big hit according to the value of the special hit type counter C2. The type is determined.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S266 is completed, the stop display of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S266). Then, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, it is performed by the second special symbol variation start process 3 (S258) or the first special symbol variation start process 3 (S263). It is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol (the result of this lottery) is a big hit of the special symbol (S267). If the result of this lottery is a big hit with a special symbol (S267: Yes), set a big hit scenario, set the probability variation flag 203ba to off, set the value of the time reduction counter 203h to 0 (S268), and set the big hit medium flag. Set 203m on (S269). Then, a stop command is set (S270), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S267, if it is determined that the lottery result this time is not a big hit (S267: No), the game state update process 3 (S271) is executed. The game state update process 3 (S271) will be described later with reference to FIG. 123. Then, a stop command is set (S270), and this process is terminated.

Next, the second special symbol change start processing 3 (S258) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change start processing 3 (S258). The second special symbol variation start process 3 (S258) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 120) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and is a second special symbol hold ball. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the storage area 203b, a lottery (win / fail determination) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol omission" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 37 and the third. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the symbol display device 81.

In the second special symbol fluctuation start processing 3 (S258), first, various data (special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2, variation type counter) stored in the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Each value of CS1) is acquired (S1601). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is currently in the probability change period (high probability gaming state) (S1602). It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not it is the probability variation period is executed by determining whether or not the probability variation flag 203ba is on. This probability variation counter flag 203aa is set to on based on the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpots A, B, D, E, and F. On the other hand, it is set to off based on the start of the jackpot game.

If it is determined that the probability change is in progress (S1602: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of the special symbol, so the process proceeds to S1603. In the processing of S1603, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S1601 and the special symbol jackpot random number table (first hit random number table) 202a. (S1603). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 500 random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table (first random number table) 202a. As described above, 10 random numbers "0 to 9" are set as the big hits of the special symbol in the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol) (see FIG. 15A). When the value of the random number counter C1 per unit and the random number value corresponding to these match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After acquiring the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S1605.

On the other hand, in the process of S1602, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability state) of the special symbol (S1602: No), the process of S1604 is executed. In the processing of S1604, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S1601 and the special symbol jackpot random number table (first hit random number table) 202a. Acquire (S1604). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 500 random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table (first random number table) 202a. Two random numbers "0, 1" are set as the big hits of the special symbol in the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol), and the value of the random number counter C1 per first and these hits If it matches the random number value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After acquiring the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S1605.

In the processing of S1605, is the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S1603 or S1604 a jackpot of the special symbol (that is, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot random number table (that is,). (1st random number table) Whether it matches the judgment value set in 202a) is determined (S1605), and if it is determined to be a big hit of a special symbol (S1605: Yes), it is acquired by the processing of S1601. Based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the display mode at the time of jackpot is set (S1606). More specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 acquired in the process of S1601 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202bb2, and what is the jackpot type (D to H). To determine.

In this process of S1606, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type. Further, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S1607). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1607, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1.

In the fluctuation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the fluctuation time of the third symbol for notifying the hit / fail determination result, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the fluctuation time and the hit / fail determination result. The main control device 110 is configured so that even if the display mode of the out-of-reach is used, the voice lamp control device 113 can switch between the reach display mode and the non-reach display mode as long as the fluctuation time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and the effects can be diversified.

For example, as the variation pattern for disengagement, various types of "short disengagement", "long disengagement", "disengagement normal reach", and "disengagement super reach" are specified. As the fluctuation patterns shared by jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot D, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

On the other hand, in the process of S1605, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S1605: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (S1608). In the process of S1608, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-order symbol, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b is set. Based on the value, the fluctuation time (variation pattern) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S1609). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S1608, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is confirmed, and the normal reach is performed based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as super reach.

When the processing of S1607 or the processing of S1609 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the process of S1607 or the process of S1609 is set (S1610). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S1607 or the process of S1609 is set (S1611). When the processing of S1611 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing 3 (S131).

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the first special symbol change start processing 3 (S263) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing (S263). In the first special symbol change start process (S263), the type of the special symbol to be processed is changed from the special figure 1 to the special figure 2 with respect to the above-mentioned second special symbol change start process 3 (S258). The difference is that the various counters and tables for the special figure 2 are changed to the various counters and tables for the special figure 1 according to the difference. Since the other contents are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

Next, the game state update process 3 (S271) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the game state update process 3 (S271). The game state update process 3 (S271) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 120) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and is a process of subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203h. Is executed, the game state is updated based on the subtracted value, and a state command indicating the updated game state is set.

When the game state update process 3 (S271) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0, that is, whether the present is a high probability state (time saving state, probability change state) of a normal symbol. (S851). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0 (S851: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S852), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h after the subtraction is 0. (S853).

Then, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 in the processing of S853 (S853: Yes), the gaming state corresponding to the gaming state storage area is set (S854), and the current gaming state (time saving counter 203h) is set. A status command indicating (the value of, the setting status of the probability change flag 203ba) is set (S871), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S851, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not larger than 0 (0) (S8511: No), or in the processing of S853, the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 (). If it is determined (S853: No) that it is larger than 0), the process proceeds to S871 as it is.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot with the probability variation flag 203ba set to ON after the jackpot game ends, "10000" is set as the value of the time reduction counter 203h after the jackpot game ends, and the probability variation flag 203ba is set. When a jackpot that is not set to ON is won, "100" is set as the value of the time reduction counter 203h after the jackpot game is completed. Therefore, if the jackpot with the probability variation flag 203ba set to on after the jackpot game ends, the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability of normal symbol) is substantially from the end of the jackpot game until the next jackpot is won. State) is set and the probability change flag 203ba is not set to on after the big hit game. If you win the big hit, the time is shortened from the end of the big hit game until the special symbol change is executed 100 times (low probability state of the special symbol). , High probability state of normal symbol) will be set.

Next, the contents of the jackpot end processing 3 (S2551) will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process 3 (S2551). In the jackpot end processing 3 (S2551), the probability change flag 203ba and the value of the time saving counter 203h are set at the end of the jackpot game according to the jackpot type of the winning jackpot.

When the jackpot end process 3 (S2551) is executed, first, it is determined whether the jackpot type this time is "big hit A, B, D, E, F" (S2751), and "big hit A, B, D," If it is determined to be "E, F" (S2751: Yes), the probability variation flag 203ba is set to on (S2752), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to "10000" (S2753), and the jackpot medium flag is turned off. (S2754), a command indicating a change in the gaming state (a command indicating the current gaming state) is set (S2704), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2751 when it is determined that the current jackpot type is not "big hit A, B, D, E, F" (S2751: No), "100" is set in the value of the time reduction counter 203h (S2751: No). S2755), the process proceeds to S2754.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 125 to 128, the contents of the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, for the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment, the state command reception process 3 (see S4252 in FIG. 125) is replaced with the state command reception process (see S4212 in FIG. 64). 1 is replaced with the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see S4202 in FIG. 60) and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see S4204 in FIG. 61), and the special figure change start process (see S4921 in FIG. 127) is executed. The difference is that the jackpot start processing (see S4212 in FIG. 128) is executed as a subroutine of the jackpot-related processing (see S5002 in FIG. 66). Since the other processing contents are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the state command reception process 3 (S4252) will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the contents of the state command reception process 3 (S4252). The state command receiving process 3 (S4252) is different in that the battle effect update process (S4651) is additionally executed with respect to the state command receiving process (see S4212 in FIG. 64) of the first embodiment described above. do. Since the other processing contents are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the state command reception process 3 (S4252) is executed, first, the battle effect update process is executed (S4651), and then the same processes of S4601 to S4604 as the above-mentioned state command reception process (see S4212 in FIG. 64) are executed. To execute. Here, in the process of S4602, if it is determined that the gaming state has been changed to a state other than the normal state (S4602: No), then it is determined whether the battle flag 223ca is set to ON (S4652) and turned ON. If it is determined that the setting is set to (S4652: Yes), the battle effect (continuous battle effect) is displayed, so that the display content is not changed due to the transition to the game state, and S4610 is displayed. Moves to the process of and ends this process. On the other hand, in the process of S4652, if it is determined that the battle flag 223ca is not set to ON (S4652: No), the process of S4605 to S4610 is the same as the above-mentioned state command reception process (see S4212 in FIG. 64). Is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the battle effect update process (S4651) will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the contents of the battle effect update process (S4651). In this battle effect update process (S4651), in the battle effect (continuous battle effect) during the time reduction state, a process for setting an effect mode corresponding to the update of the time reduction number of times is executed.

When the battle effect update process (S4651) is executed, it is first determined whether the battle flag 223ca is set to on (S6651), and it is determined that it is not set to on (set to off). In that case, since the battle effect is not updated, this process ends as it is. On the other hand, the flag 223ca during battle is set to on. That is, when it is determined that the current battle is being produced (S6651: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current time is being shortened (S6652).

This process of S6652 is executed by reading out the information indicating the gaming state set in the subordinate state setting area 223k. In the process of S6652, if it is determined that the current time is not shortened (S6652: No), since the current jackpot game is in progress, it is not necessary to execute the process of updating the battle effect, so this process is terminated as it is. do. If it is determined that the current state is in the time saving state (S6652: Yes), then, based on the information indicating the remaining period of the time saving state (information indicating the number of remaining time saving) included in the state command received this time. The value of the number of remaining time reductions is updated and set in the slave state setting area 223k.

When the processing of S6653 was completed, as a result of updating the value of the remaining time reduction number, it was determined whether the remaining time reduction number reached 70 times (S6654), and it was determined that it was not 70 times, that is, 71 to 99 times. In the case (S6654: No), a display command indicating the physical strength gauge value according to the number of remaining time reductions set this time is set (S6655), and this process is terminated. Here, when the display control device 114 receives the display command set by the process of S6655, as shown in FIG. 114 (a), the display mode of the physical strength gauge 817a during the continuous battle effect corresponds to the number of remaining time reductions. The image data of the display mode is generated and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S6654, when it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions has reached 70 (S6654: Yes), it is based on the fact that the end condition of the battle effect (continuous battle effect) executed during the time reduction state is satisfied. Then, a display command indicating battle defeat is set (S6656), the battle flag 223ca is set to off (S6657), and this process is terminated. When the display control device 114 receives the display command set in the process of S6656, the defeat effect in which the character 817 is defeated in the battle effect is executed as shown in FIG. 113 (a).

Next, the contents of the special figure fluctuation start processing (S4921) will be described with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure fluctuation start processing (S4921). This special figure change start process (S4921) is executed in place of the special figure 1 change start process (see S4202 in FIG. 60) and the special figure 2 change start process (see S4204 in FIG. 61) of the first embodiment described above. Is to be done. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, the special figure 1 lottery (variation) and the special figure 2 lottery (variation) are executed at the same time (in parallel), and therefore, for each special figure. In contrast to the configuration in which the fluctuation start processing is executed for each, in the third embodiment, since each special figure lottery (variation) is configured not to be executed at the same time (in parallel), the special figure variation is started. The processing to be executed at the timing is common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

When the special figure change start process (S4921) is executed, first, the special figure change start flag is set to ON (S4371), and then the same as the above-mentioned special figure 2 change start process (see S4204 in FIG. 61). The processes of S4352 and S4353 are executed, and then it is determined whether or not the special figure change (lottery) this time is a big hit (S4381). In this process, whether or not the jackpot is won is determined based on the information included in the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

If it is determined in the process of S4381 that the special figure change (lottery) this time is not a big hit (S4381: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure change (lottery) this time has won the jackpot (S4381: Yes), then it is determined whether the flag 223ca during the battle is set to ON (S4382). That is, it is determined whether or not the special figure change executed while the battle effect is being executed is the one that won the jackpot.

In the process of S4382, if it is determined that the battle flag 223ca is not set to ON (S4382: No), this process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that the battle flag 223ca is set to ON. (S4382: Yes) Next, it is determined whether the jackpot won this time is a time-saving jackpot (S4383), and if it is determined to be a time-saving jackpot (S4383: Yes), a display command indicating a battle rematch is set. (S4384), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4383, if it is determined that the time saving jackpot is not (probability variation jackpot) (S4383: No), the process of S4384 is skipped and the present process is terminated. When the display control device 114 receives the display command set in the process of S4384, the image data corresponding to the rematch effect shown in FIG. 113 (b) is generated and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. To.

Next, the contents of the jackpot start processing (S4212) will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot start process (S4212). In this jackpot start process (S4212), a process of performing various settings based on the effect status (whether or not a battle effect is being produced) at the timing when the jackpot game is started and the jackpot type of the jackpot won this time is executed.

When the jackpot start process (S4212) is executed, first, it is determined whether the battle flag 223ca is set to ON (S6701), and when it is determined that it is not set to ON, that is, outside the battle production period. When it is determined that the jackpot game has been executed (S6701: No), it is determined whether the jackpot this time is a probabilistic jackpot (S6702). In the process of S6702, the determination is performed based on the jackpot type stored in the subordinate state setting area 223k.

If it is determined in the process of S6702 that it is a probable change jackpot (S6703: Yes), a display command indicating a battle victory is set as a display mode of the battle effect executed during the jackpot game (S6703), and the battle flag is set. 223ca is set to on (S6704), and the process proceeds to S6709. On the other hand, in the process of S6702, if it is determined that the jackpot is not a probability variation jackpot (time saving jackpot) (S6702: No), a display command indicating the continuation of the battle is set as the display mode of the battle effect executed during the jackpot game. (S6705), the above-mentioned processes of S6704 and S6709 are executed, and this process is terminated.

Further, in the process of S6701 when it is determined that the battle flag 223ca is set to ON (S6701: Yes), it is determined whether the current jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot (S6706), and it is determined that the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot. If it is determined (S6706; Yes), a display command indicating a battle victory is set (S6707), the process proceeds to S6709, and if it is determined that the process of S6706 is not a probable change jackpot (S6706: No), A display command indicating the continuation of the battle is set, and in the process of S6709, a display jackpot start command is set, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when a jackpot of a special symbol is won, a probabilistic state (next jackpot) is set as a game state set after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning. It is configured to be set to either a time saving state (until the special figure fluctuation is executed 100 times without winning the jackpot, or until the jackpot is won).

In other words, if the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol are continuously set until the next jackpot is won, so that the probability variation state is set. The probability of winning many prize balls was much higher. Here, the pachinko machine 10 in recent years is configured to continue the probabilistic state with a high probability, and by providing the player with the possibility of winning a large number of prize balls, the gambling of the game is enhanced. As a measure to prevent this, a measure for reducing the probability that the probabilistic state continues (for example, reducing the rate at which the probabilistic state continues to 65% or less) is being studied.

By taking such measures, it is possible to provide a sound pachinko machine 10 that does not give the player excessive expectations for the prize ball, but the probability change state is high as in the past. Among the effects used in the pachinko machine 10 that continues with a probability (for example, 80%) (effects for showing the lottery result of a special symbol), the effect when used in the pachinko machine 10 with countermeasures. However, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play is reduced.

Specifically, in the battle production that notifies that the probability change state will be set after the end of this jackpot game when the own character battles with the enemy character during the jackpot game and wins the battle. If the rate at which the probability change state continues decreases, the winning percentage of the battle effect executed during the jackpot game decreases, and the player's expectation (the probability change state is set) when the battle effect is executed. There was a problem that the expectation for doing things) diminished and the motivation to play was reduced.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, a continuous battle effect is provided in which the battle effect is continued from the end of the jackpot game until the predetermined end condition (for example, the special figure change is executed 30 times) is satisfied. It is configured to execute and execute the effect of winning the battle when the jackpot is won during the period from the end of the jackpot game to the establishment of the predetermined end condition. As a result, the probability of winning in the battle production can be increased, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play.

Further, in the third embodiment, when a probabilistic jackpot (a jackpot in which a probabilistic state is set after the jackpot game ends) is won, a battle effect is executed to win the battle during the jackpot game, and a time-saving jackpot (big hit) is executed. It is configured to execute the continuous battle effect only when the big hit) in which the time saving state is set after the end of the game is won. This makes it possible to increase the probability of winning in the battle production.

In addition, during the continuous battle production, the production result of the continuous battle is configured to be different depending on the type of the winning jackpot. For example, if the probability change jackpot is won during the continuous battle production, the battle victory production is performed. It is configured to execute the battle rematch production if the time saving jackpot is won during the continuous battle production. As a result, if a short-time jackpot is won during the continuous battle production, the defeat production that loses the battle is suppressed. Therefore, since the frequency of the defeat effect being executed after the battle effect is executed can be reduced, the rate of battle victory can be relatively increased.

In this embodiment, the number of time reductions is 30 times (the number of special figure fluctuations after the time reduction state is set is 30 times) as the end condition of the continuous battle effect (battle effect executed during the time reduction state). The case is set as the end condition, but the end condition is not limited to this, and the number of special figure fluctuations in which the end condition is satisfied may be variably set by the staging lottery means. In this case, it is preferable to provide a jackpot type that sets a value other than 100 times (for example, 20 times, 50 times, 80 times, etc.) as the number of continuations of the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the continuous battle effect is executed, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of remaining time reductions after the end of the continuous battle effect.

In addition, as a guarantee period notification effect for notifying the player of the period during which the continuous battle effect does not end (battle effect guarantee period), for example, the physical strength gauge 817a of the character 817 does not decrease, that is, there is no defeat. The effect indicating the invincible mode may be configured to be executable, and the invincible mode may be configured to notify the duration of the invincible mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the end condition of the continuous battle effect is set based on the number of times the special figure changes in the time saving state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the lottery result of the special symbol is other than a big hit. In a part of the game machine, which is configured to be able to win a small hit that can give a player less privilege (a privilege different from the big hit game) than the big hit game, based on the small hit winning (execution of the small hit game). (Inside) It is good to configure so that the end condition of the continuous battle production is satisfied.

In this case, as the small hit game executed at the time of winning the small hit, it is preferable to execute the small hit game in which the same variable winning device 65 as the big hit game is opened. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the defeat effect of losing the battle while the variable winning device 65 is open, so that the defeat effect is executed for the player as if during the jackpot game. It can make you think.

Further, it is preferable to configure the continuous battle effect to be terminated based on the condition that the special figure change number reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) in the time saving state, or if the small hit is won, the condition established earlier is used. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the continuous battle production from becoming excessively long and to make the duration of the continuous battle production indefinite.

<First modification>
Next, a first modification in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 133. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, the special figure 1 lottery (variation) and the special figure 2 lottery (variation) are executed at the same time (in parallel), so that the special figure changes with respect to each special figure. The third symbol display device is configured to execute the start process, and as shown in FIG. 9A, only the variation effect corresponding to any special figure variation (special figure 1 variation in FIG. 9A) is displayed. It was configured to display in the main display area Dm of 81.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the variation effect corresponding to a plurality of special symbol variations is not simultaneously executed by the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can use the third symbol display device 81. It was possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the fluctuation effect to be executed was confused, but it was difficult to understand that multiple special symbol fluctuations were being executed at the same time (in parallel), and multiple special symbol fluctuations were executed at the same time. There is a problem that the game is performed without the player understanding the characteristic game property that the special symbol change is executed at the same time (in parallel).

On the other hand, in this first modification, one special figure variation is set as the main variation display, the other special figure variation is set as the sub-variation display, and the variation effect corresponding to the main variation display (main variation effect) is also the sub-variation display. The variation effect (subordinate variation effect) corresponding to the display is also configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The variable staging corresponding to the main variable display is configured to stand out more than the variable staging corresponding to the subordinate variable display.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the first modification will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 130 (a). FIG. 130A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the first modification. As shown in FIG. 130 (a), in the first modification, the main display area Dm of the display screen is the main variable area Dma and the dependent variable area Dmb with respect to the display screen of the first embodiment described above. It is different in that it is formed so as to execute the main variation effect in the main variation region Dma and the follow variation effect in the slave variation region Dmb, and the other elements are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 130A, the first modification is configured such that the main fluctuation region Dma is formed larger than the slave fluctuation region Dmb, and the main fluctuation effect is subordinated to the player. It is configured so that it can be executed more prominently than the variable effect. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to one of the plurality of variable effects being executed.

In this first modification, when a specific fluctuation effect (variation effect with high jackpot expectation (for example, super reach effect)) is executed as the variation effect executed on the slave variation region Dmb side, the main fluctuation region Dma It is configured to be able to execute the display switching process for switching between the variation effect executed in and the variation effect executed in the slave variation area Dmb. As a result, when the variation effect that the player should pay attention to is executed, the variation effect can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

However, when a specific variation effect (variation effect that wins the jackpot (for example, super reach)) is set as the variation effect executed on the dependent variation region Dmb side, the expectation that the main variation region Dma also wins (the jackpot is won). When a high degree of fluctuation effect (for example, super reach) is executed, the variation effect executed in the main fluctuation area Dma suddenly switches, and the effect is difficult to understand for the player. There was a problem that it would end up.

Further, for a player who wants to see the specific variation effect being executed in the main variation area Dma to the end regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, which is a variation effect that is difficult to be executed. There was a risk that the variable production would suddenly switch, giving a feeling of dissatisfaction.

On the other hand, in the first modification, when the variation effect (special figure 1 variation effect) executed in the main variation area Dma is executed (set), the slave variation area Dmb stored on hold is used. It is configured to determine the pre-reading result of the winning information corresponding to the variable effect to be executed (special figure 2 variable effect), and to determine whether or not the winning information for winning the jackpot is possessed. Then, when it is determined that the winning information for winning the jackpot is possessed, the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 can set a specific variation effect (for example, an out-of-order super reach effect). (For example, when the variation pattern is 90 seconds, it is not a specific variation effect but a normal variation effect (for example, a short-time deviation variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds (see FIG. 18)). It is configured to execute a special variation effect that executes the variation effect (variation effect set corresponding to) multiple times.

With this configuration, even if the variation effect executed in the main variation area Dma is switched from the special figure 1 variation effect to the special figure 2 variation effect, the main variation area Dma before the switching will have a normal deviation effect. Since the corresponding variable effect is only executed, the variable effect can be smoothly switched without giving the player a sense of discomfort or dissatisfaction.

Here, with reference to FIG. 129, the flow of the effect in the first modification will be described. FIG. 129 is a timing chart showing the flow of each effect when the variation display is switched between the main variation region Dma and the sub-variation region Dmb. As shown in FIG. 129, the timing for setting the variation effect (special figure 1 variation effect) of the special figure 1 variation (variation in which the lottery result is out of order and the variation time is 60 seconds) executed in the main variation area Dma (special figure 1 variation effect). At the timing of FIG. 129 (a)), the winning information of the special figure 2 is read from the winning information storage area 223ab, and the variation of the special figure 2 being executed is a jackpot variation, or the variation display is executed next. It is determined whether the winning information corresponding to the special figure 2 has the information indicating the jackpot winning.

As a result of the above-mentioned determination, if it is determined that the special figure 2 hold corresponding to the next execution of the special figure 2 variation (the second variation of the special figure 2) has the information indicating the jackpot winning, the special figure 2 is determined. As a variation effect of one variation, a special variation effect that pseudo-continuously executes a variation effect (short-time deviation variation effect) selected when the variation time is a deviation variation of 10 seconds is set and executed. As a result, the second variation of the special figure 2 is executed, and the variation of the special figure 1 variation is performed at the effect switching timing (timing of FIG. 129 (b)) for executing the special figure 2 variation effect in the main fluctuation region Dma. Since the variable effect is executed for a short time as the effect, the variable effect can be switched without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In addition, at the timing of setting the fluctuation effect of the special figure 1 fluctuation, it is not necessary to accurately grasp the residual fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation to be executed in the future, and the like. Since it is possible to execute a normal deviation variation at the effect switching timing (timing of FIG. 129 (b)) for executing the special figure 2 variation effect in the variation area Dma, the process for setting the variation effect is performed. Can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 130 (b) and 131, the effect content displayed when the variable effect displayed in a variable manner is switched between the main variable area Dma and the subordinate variable area Dmb will be described. FIG. 130 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents at the time when the fluctuation effect of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is executed in the main fluctuation region Dma, and FIG. 131 is a variation display of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. Is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents at the time when is executed in the main fluctuation region Dma.

As shown in FIG. 130 (b), at a time point before the switching timing of the variation display, the variation effect of the special figure 1 variation (short-time deviation variation effect) is executed in the main variation region Dma, and the slave variation region Dmb is used. In the special figure 2, the fluctuation effect (reach generation) of the fluctuation is executed. After that, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 fluctuation develops into super reach, as shown in FIG. 131, the fluctuation effect of the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed in the main fluctuation region Dma so as to make the player stand out. A super reach effect (an effect in which a fish swims in the display area) is executed.

On the other hand, the variation effect of the variation in Special Figure 1 is displayed by switching to the slave variation region Dmb. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 131, the time point at which one of the short-time deviation fluctuation effects executed a plurality of pseudo times is completed is shown, and the third symbol displayed in the slave fluctuation region Dmb is a temporary stop mode (a temporary stop mode (). In FIG. 131, it is displayed as a swing stop). In this way, when the short-time deviation variation effect is configured to be executed a plurality of times in a pseudo manner, the third symbol is displayed in the temporary stop mode at the end of each short-time deviation variation effect to the player. Therefore, it can be made to think that the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed a plurality of times.

Further, in the first modification, the display position where the special figure 1 variation effect is executed (left side of the main display area Dm) and the display position where the special figure 2 variation effect is executed (right side of the main display area Dm). , Is configured to be variable in the main fluctuation region Dma and the slave fluctuation region Dmb without changing. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner which special symbol corresponds to the variable effect being executed. Not limited to this, the display position of the special figure 1 variation effect and the display position of the special figure 2 variation effect can be changed without changing the position of the main fluctuation region Dma and the position of the slave fluctuation region Dmb. It may be configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to fix the position where the variation effect to be watched is executed for the player, so that it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, in the first modification, the main fluctuation region Dma and the slave fluctuation region Dmb are formed before and after the switching timing of the fluctuation display without changing the same size, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after switching the fluctuation display, the main fluctuation region Dma may be formed larger than before the switching, and the slave fluctuation region Dmb may be formed smaller than before the switching. As a result, it is possible to further emphasize the fluctuation effect executed in the main fluctuation region Dma after switching, and it is possible to make the player interested. In addition to the configuration in which the size of each variable region is variable, for example, the frame mode for partitioning each variable region may be variable. For example, only the main variable region Dma after switching is the color of the frame mode. May be configured to have a red color different from the others, or the shape of the frame mode may be configured to have a circular shape different from the others.

Further, in this first modification, when setting the fluctuation effect of the special figure fluctuation executed on the main fluctuation region Dma side, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won based on the winning information of other special figure fluctuations (in advance). (Discrimination) is performed, and the effect mode of the variation effect is set based on the discrimination result. , And, the timing at which the special figure is stopped and displayed or the timing at which the variation effect is switched may be determined by the combination indicating the jackpot, and the variation effect may be set based on the determination result.

<Second modification>
Next, a second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. In the first modification described above, the main fluctuation region Dma and the slave fluctuation region Dmb are formed, and the fluctuation effect corresponding to the special figure fluctuation is executed in each fluctuation region, and the slave fluctuation region Dmb side. When a specific variation effect is executed by the special figure variation of, a special symbol corresponding to the variation effect executed in the main variation area Dma and a special symbol corresponding to the variation effect executed in the subordinate variation area Dmb. The variable effect switching process for switching is executed.

On the other hand, in the second modification, when a specific fluctuation effect is executed by the special figure fluctuation on the slave fluctuation region Dmb side, the main fluctuation region Dma and the slave fluctuation region Dmb are fused. The difference is that a fluctuation region is formed and a fluctuation effect corresponding to a plurality of special map fluctuations is executed within the special fluctuation region. Since the other elements are the same as those of the first modification described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the second modification, the variation display shown in FIG. 130 (a) of the first modification described above is executed in the normal variation state. Then, as in the first modification described above, the variation effect of the special figure 1 variation (the variation result is out of the lottery result and the variation time is 60 seconds) executed in the main variation region Dma (special figure 1 variation effect). At the timing of setting (timing of FIG. 129 (a)), the winning information of the special figure 2 is read from the winning information storage area 223ab, and the variation of the special figure 2 during execution is a jackpot variation or the next variation. It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the special figure 2 on which the display is executed has the information indicating the jackpot winning.

As a result of the above-mentioned determination, if it is determined that the special figure 2 hold corresponding to the next execution of the special figure 2 variation (the second variation of the special figure 2) has the information indicating the jackpot winning, FIG. 132 The special fluctuation regions Dma to Dmd shown in (a) are formed. Here, with reference to FIGS. 132 (a) to 133 (b), the contents of the effect in the second modification will be described.

FIG. 132 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the special fluctuation regions Dma to Dmd, and FIG. 132 (b) is a special fluctuation region Dma at the time when the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 2 is started. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content of Dmd, FIG. 133 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content during the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 2, and FIG. 133 (b) is a special diagram. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents when the stop display is performed in a combination indicating a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 132 (a), the special fluctuation regions Dma to Dmd are formed from four fluctuation display regions, and the special fluctuation region Dma has a fluctuation effect corresponding to the special FIG. 1 fluctuation in the special fluctuation region Dmb. The variation effect corresponding to the special figure 2 variation is configured so that the decoration variation effect of the pseudo pattern is executed in the special variation area Dmc and the special variation area Dmd. Then, a "multi-reach" comment indicating that the special fluctuation regions Dma to Dmd have been formed is displayed in the sub-display region Ds.

After that, when the special variation 1 variation is stopped and displayed while the special variation areas Dma to Dmd are displayed, the state shown in FIG. 132 (b) is obtained. In FIG. 132 (b), the display mode “351” indicating that the lottery result of the special figure 1 variation is out of order is displayed in the special variation region Dma, and the reach display indicating that the special figure 2 variation is in the reach state is displayed. It is displayed in the special fluctuation area Dmb. Further, in the special fluctuation region Dmc and the special fluctuation region Dmd, the decorative variation display for suggesting the jackpot expectation of the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed is executed, and the reach display is also displayed in the special fluctuation region Dmc. There is.

In addition, the display area of the special fluctuation area Dma becomes smaller based on the fact that the out-of-order symbol is stopped and displayed in the special fluctuation area Dma showing the lottery result of the special figure 1 fluctuation, and the special fluctuation area Dmb in the reach state and the special fluctuation area Dmb in the reach state, and The display area of the special fluctuation area Dmc is formed large. In this way, by varying the size of each fluctuation region in the special fluctuation regions Dma to Dmd according to the fluctuation status in each fluctuation region and the fluctuation result, the player is informed of the region to be watched in an easy-to-understand manner. be able to.

After that, when the special fluctuation 2 variation display progresses, as shown in FIG. 133 (a), only the special fluctuation region Dmb is in the reach state, and the display mode indicating the deviation is displayed in the other fluctuation regions, and the sub-display region Ds is displayed. The comment of "Last chance" is displayed. In this state, the next variation display is executed for the special figure 1 variation, but on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the result of the previous special map variation is temporarily stopped and displayed in the special variation area Dma. The state is maintained.

With this configuration, even if the special variation 1 variation is newly executed, the multi-reach effect using the special variation areas Dma to Dmd does not give a sense of discomfort. If the newly executed special figure 1 fluctuation is a big hit, for example, the effect of starting the fluctuation of the third symbol again in the special fluctuation region Dma from the state shown in FIG. 133 (a) is executed. It may be configured to do so. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what kind of effect mode and how long the multi-reach using the special fluctuation areas Dma to Dmd will continue, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

Then, when the special figure 2 fluctuation is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 133 (b), the display area of the special fluctuation region Dmb becomes the largest, and the special fluctuation region Dmb is "big hit". Along with the comment, the third symbol "555" indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed. In this state, since the movement of the special figure 1 being executed is forcibly disengaged and stopped, "351" indicating that the special figure 1 is disengaged and stopped is displayed in the special fluctuation area Dma.

In addition, the decorative variation display executed in the special variation areas Dmc and Dmd is variablely displayed in an effect mode for suggesting the jackpot winning expectation of the special figure 2 variation, and the stop timing of the special figure 1 variation and the stop timing of the variation. Special Figure 2 The fluctuation period of each fluctuation display is set based on the interval between the fluctuation stop timing and.

Specifically, when the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed and the multi-reach is displayed, that is, when the special figure 2 fluctuation which is a jackpot fluctuation is not started, the decoration executed in the special fluctuation regions Dmc and Dmd. The variable display is variablely displayed in a state where the effect mode is not set. Then, at the timing when the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed, the difference between the residual fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation during execution and the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation is calculated, and the special fluctuation region is calculated based on the calculation result. Set the variation time of the decoration variation display executed by Dmc and Dmd.

With this configuration, the period from the stop of the special figure 1 fluctuation displayed in the special fluctuation region Dma to the stop of the special figure 2 fluctuation displayed in the special fluctuation region Dmb may be short. Even if it is long, the multi-reach effect can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort. The configuration of the multi-reach effect is not limited to this. For example, when the difference between the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation during execution and the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation is within a predetermined time, the special fluctuation is performed. The regions Dmc and Dmd may be fused to execute one decorative variation display, or the decoration variation display may be executed only in the special variation region Dmc, and a mini character may appear in the special variation region Dmd and executed. It may be configured to perform a suggestion effect that suggests the jackpot expectation of the multi-reach inside.

In each of the above modifications, while the special variation effect (variation effect in which a plurality of pseudo-short-time deviation variation patterns are continuously executed during one variation period) is being executed. However, the fourth symbol displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 was configured to be displayed in the usual manner. That is, in the special variation effect, the fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol on which the special variation effect is executed is configured to continue the variation display even while the third symbol is temporarily stopped, but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the corresponding fourth symbol may be controlled to be temporarily stopped in synchronization with the temporary stop period during the execution of the special variation effect. With such a configuration, even if the player visually recognizes the fourth symbol during the execution of the special variation effect, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish whether or not the special variation effect is being executed. Therefore, before and after the switching timing of the variable display, it is possible to suppress the unnatural display content that the fourth symbol continues to be variablely displayed even though the third symbol is temporarily stopped. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. Further, for example, the fourth symbol may be configured to be difficult to see at least during the temporary stop period during the execution of the special variation effect. More specifically, for example, the fourth symbol is hidden, the fourth symbol display area is reduced and displayed, or a predetermined accessory is placed at a position where the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) is hidden. It may be configured to operate. With such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the display control of the fourth symbol as compared with the case where the display mode of the fourth symbol is synchronized during the temporary stop period of the special variation effect.

Further, as a method for making it difficult to recognize whether or not the special variation effect is executed, for example, by making the back image around the fourth symbol display area the same color as the fourth symbol at least during the temporary stop period. , It may be configured to make it difficult to visually recognize whether the fourth symbol is displayed in a variable manner or stopped. With such a configuration, the fourth symbol can be made difficult to see by an extremely simple control of changing the rear image, so that the display control can be further simplified. In addition, by changing the rear image, the player can feel as if an unusual effect is being executed, so that the expectation for a big hit can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Further, for example, while the main fluctuation area Dma and the subordinate fluctuation area Dmb are switched and the special figure 2 variation display is executed in the main fluctuation area Dma, the display area is enlarged to display the special figure 2 variation display. Depending on the content, the fourth symbol display area may be configured to be shielded. That is, in the example of FIG. 131, the image of the fish that is displayed as it develops into super reach is also displayed in the fourth symbol display area (the image of the fish is displayed on the layer in front of the display layer of the fourth symbol). It may be configured to be displayed), or the character "reach has occurred !!" may be displayed in the fourth symbol display area to make the fourth symbol difficult to see. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the special fluctuation effect is executed at least after switching the fluctuation region. Further, for example, during the execution period of the special variation effect, the meaning of the fourth symbol can be understood by changing the display position of the fourth symbol display area or reversing the arrangement of the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2. By making it difficult, it may be difficult to indirectly recognize whether or not it is the execution period of the special variation effect. Further, by changing the display mode of the fourth symbol (the display mode indicating that the variable display is in progress and the display mode indicating that the stop display is in progress) periodically or irregularly, the fourth symbol can be displayed. From the display mode, it may be difficult to understand whether or not the variation display is being performed, and it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the special variation effect is indirectly executed. Specifically, for example, the first display method and the fourth display method, which indicate that the symbol is in the variable display by performing the variable display, while the symbol is in the stop display by being stopped, and the fourth. The second display method and the fourth symbol display area, which indicate that the entire symbol display area is white to indicate that variable display is being performed, while the entire symbol display area is black to indicate that stop display is in progress, and the fourth symbol display area. It may be configured to switch between a third display method in which the left half blinks to indicate that the variable display is in progress, and the right half blinks to indicate that the variable display is in progress. This makes it more difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the special variation display is being executed.

In each of the above modifications, the fourth symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 are displayed separately in the fourth symbol display area, but the special figure 1 does not necessarily have to be used. It is not necessary to display both the corresponding fourth symbol and the fourth symbol corresponding to the special figure 2. For example, only the fourth symbol corresponding to the variation effect of the third symbol executed in the main fluctuation area Dma may be displayed in the fourth symbol display area. With such a configuration, not only the third symbol but also the fourth symbol, the symbol that the player should pay attention to is clarified, so that the convenience of the player can be improved. Further, after the display switching process is executed, only the fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol different from the special symbol on the side on which the special variation effect is executed is displayed in the fourth symbol display area. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the third symbol is temporarily stopped from the aspect of the fourth symbol.

In each of the above modification examples, each reserved ball (winning) of the special symbol (special figure 2) in which the variation display is executed in the slave variation region Dmb when the variation effect corresponding to the specific variation type is executed in the main variation region Dma. Information) pre-reads the lottery result, and when it is determined that there is a reserved ball (winning information) corresponding to the jackpot, the variation effect executed in the main variation area Dma is set as the special variation effect. It is not limited to this. For example, even when it is determined that the reserved ball (winning information) contains a variation type deviation (for example, a deviation super reach) with a relatively high expectation of a big hit, a predetermined ratio (for example, 1) is also determined. The special variation effect may be executed at a ratio of / 5). With this configuration, even if the player notices that the player is temporarily stopped (the third symbol is swinging) during the temporary stop period in the special fluctuation effect, the jackpot is confirmed. Therefore, even after the variation effect (special variation effect) executed in the main variation area Dma and the variation effect executed in the slave variation area Dmb are switched by the display switching process, the main variation area Dma is displayed. You can pay attention to the fluctuation effect after switching. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the second modification, when the multi-reach effect is executed, the decorative variation display is executed in the special variation areas Dmc and Dmd. That is, the configuration is such that the fluctuation period is set according to the interval between the fluctuation stop timing of the fluctuation effect executed in the special fluctuation region Dma and the stop timing of the fluctuation effect executed in the special fluctuation region Dmb. It is not something that can be done. For example, it may be synchronized with the fluctuation display period of the special figure fluctuation based on each reserved ball held at the start of the multi-reach effect. With this configuration, the fluctuation stop period of the fluctuation effect executed in each special fluctuation region Dma to Dmd can be combined with the fluctuation stop period of the fourth symbol, so that a more natural appearance of the effect mode can be obtained. Can be provided.

<About the ball entry unit 64 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 134, FIGS. 134 (a) and 134 (b) illustrating the ball entry unit 64 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above schematically show the internal structure of the ball entry unit 64. It is a figure shown as a target. In reality, a cover body is arranged on the front side thereof, and the cover body is composed of a member whose inside can be seen through, and a spiral handle is colored on the surface so that the inside cannot be seen through or is difficult to see through. It is configured so that the inside is difficult to see.

A passage port through which the game ball can enter is provided in the upper part of the ball entry unit 64, and a transmissive ball entry sensor 64c that can detect that the game ball has passed through the passage port is arranged. There is. The game ball that has passed through the passage port is alternately distributed by the distribution member 900 to the first ball entry port 64b1 and the left second ball entry port 64b2 arranged below the game ball.

The distribution member 900 receives the entered game ball at the accommodating portion 900a or 900c of the distribution member 900. When the game ball is received by the accommodating portion 900a, the distribution member 900 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 134 (a)) due to the weight of the game ball, and the game ball is first inserted into the ball. Guide to mouth 64b1. Here, the distribution member 900 is configured to be rotatable about 30 degrees around each of the left and right sides, and a magnet 900b is provided on the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 900a and the accommodating portion 900c.

A magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 is arranged on the base body provided on the back surface side of the ball entry unit 64, and a base side magnet 901 is arranged at a position on the center line of the passage port. The magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 and the base side magnet 901 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip portion. The base side magnet 901 is arranged and fixed so that the tip portion thereof faces the distribution member 900 side.

Similar to the base side magnet 901, the magnet 900b is also composed of a rod-shaped magnet, and is fixed to the distribution member 900 so that the tip portion faces the base side magnet 901 side. The base side magnet at the position where the distribution member 900 rotates and the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 900a and the accommodating portion 900c comes directly above (on the center line of the interval at which the game ball at the passing port can enter about one ball). The position where the 901 and the magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 are closest to each other (the tips thereof face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged so as to have the same polarity (for example, N pole and N pole), the magnets may stop at a position where the boundary wall of the distribution member 900 faces directly upward due to repulsion. It will be maintained at the position where it is rotated to the left or right.

As a result, when the magnet 900b is located on the center line (upper position) of the passage port, the distribution member 900 repels the magnet 900b and the base side magnet 901, so that the distribution member 900 is left or right. The magnet rotates so that either the accommodating portion 900a or the accommodating portion 900c faces the side (upper side of the gaming machine) that receives the gaming ball entering the first ball entry device 64. Therefore, by accepting the entered game ball in either the accommodating portion 900a or the accommodating portion 900c, the game ball can be appropriately inserted into either the first entry port 64b1 or the left second entry port 64b2. Can be sorted.

Further, when the magnet 900b and the base side magnet 901 repel each other, for example, the accommodating portion 900a receives the game ball and rotates about 15 degrees to the left to guide the game ball to the first entry port 64b1. It is possible to prevent the distribution member 900 from rotating clockwise (the accommodating portion 900a faces upward). As a result, after guiding the game ball to the first entry port 64b1, the accommodating portion 900b is in a state of facing upward, and then the gaming ball that has entered the entry unit 64 is received by the accommodating portion 900b. The distribution member 900 rotates about 30 degrees to the right due to the weight of the game ball, and guides the game ball to the left second entry port 64b2. In this way, the distribution member 900 can alternately guide the game ball entering the ball entry unit 64 to the first entry port 64b1 and the left second entry port 64b2. Therefore, the game balls can be evenly distributed to the first entry slot 64b1 and the left second entry opening 64b2 to win a prize, and the lottery game (special) resulting from the winning of the first entry opening 64b1 described later. It is possible to efficiently execute the lottery game (FIG. 1 lottery game) and the lottery game (special figure 2 lottery game) resulting from winning a prize in the left second entrance 64b2.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are performed simultaneously (in parallel). It is configured to be executable. Therefore, the ball that has passed through the passing port of the ball entry unit 64 alternates between the first ball entry port 64b1 that triggers the execution of the special figure 1 lottery and the left second ball entry port 64b2 that triggers the execution of the special figure 2 lottery. By providing the distribution member 900 so that it can be distributed to the above, the lottery (variation) of each special symbol can be efficiently performed.

In the first embodiment, the ball that has flowed into the ball entry unit 64 (the ball that has flowed into the specific area formed on the game area) is referred to the first ball entry port 64b1 (starting as a lottery trigger in FIG. 1). A distribution member 900 (distribution means) for alternately distributing the winning opening) and the left second entry opening 64b2 (starting winning opening that triggers the lottery in FIG. 2) is provided, but the limitation is limited to this. Instead, a distribution means for regularly distributing the first ball entry port 64b1 and the left second ball entry port 64b2 at different ratios (for example, 2: 1) may be provided. It is preferable to configure so that the distribution ratio is high with respect to the entry port corresponding to the special figure type on the side where a short fluctuation time is easily selected as the fluctuation time. With this configuration, each special map fluctuation can be efficiently executed.

Further, the balls flowing into the ball entry unit 64 can be distributed to the first entry port 64b1, the second entry port 64b2, and other entry openings (for example, the general entry port 63). A member 900 (sorting means) may be provided. Further, in the first embodiment, a configuration is used in which the balls sorted by the distribution member 900 surely enter each entry port, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the distribution member 900 is used for each entry port. The ball may be distributed to the flow path where the ball can enter the ball.

Further, the ball distributed to a specific flow path by the distribution member 900 may be configured to be able to enter a plurality of entry ports. For example, the distribution member 900 may be configured to have a first flow path and a second flow path. The ball can be distributed to the flow path, and the ball distributed to the first flow path goes to the first ball entry port 64b1 at a rate of 80%, and to the left second ball entry unit 64b2 at a rate of 10%. It may be configured to enter the general entrance 63 at a rate of 10%. In this case, the ratio of the balls distributed to the first flow path and the balls distributed to the second flow path may be different from each other, and in the case of using such a configuration. Even if there is, distribution that can distribute the ball into a flow path that can (easily) enter the first ball entry port 64b1 and a flow path that can (easily) enter the left second entry port 64b2. Included in the concept of means.

In addition, a rolling region is provided in which the ball flowing into the ball entry unit 64 can go around, a plurality of passage ports are formed in the rolling region, and the balls passing through each passage opening have different entry openings (Special Figure 1). It may be configured so that the ball can be entered into the first ball entry port 64b1 that triggers the lottery, the left second ball entry port 64b2 that triggers the special figure 2 lottery, and the general ball entry port 63). When such a configuration is used, the passage port through which the ball that has rolled in the rolling region passes can be changed by the momentum of the ball that rolls in the rolling region, so that the ball that has flowed into the ball entry unit 64 can be changed. Can be passed through each passage irregularly, and the number of balls entering the entry opening, which is advantageous for the player, is larger than the number of balls entering the other entrances. You can have the potential. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while entertaining which passage port the ball flowing into the ball entry unit 64 passes through, and by extension, which entry port the ball enters. It should be noted that such a configuration, that is, a configuration in which the balls flowing into the ball entry unit 64 are irregularly distributed toward the plurality of ball entry ports is also included in the concept of the distribution means.

Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration of a distribution means provided with one distribution member 900 whose distribution destination is variable based on the passage of a sphere is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is periodically supplied by an electric drive source. The distribution destination may be varied, or a plurality of distribution means may be used to change the distribution destination of the sphere. Further, in the present embodiment, the ball entering means is provided so that only the balls distributed by the distribution member 900 can enter the ball, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the balls distributed by the distribution member 900 can enter the ball. The ball entry port may be arranged at a position where a ball that has not been distributed to the distribution member 900, that is, a ball that has not flowed into the ball entry unit 64 can also enter. In this case, the ball that has flowed into the ball entry unit 64 (the ball that has been distributed to the distribution member 900) is configured to be easier to enter the ball entry port than the ball that has not flowed into the ball entry unit 64. good.

With this configuration, it is possible to gaze at the ball flowing down the game area while expecting the ball to flow into the ball entry unit 64, and it is possible to provide a game that does not get tired. Further, since a ball that has not flowed into the ball entry unit 64 may also enter the ball entry port, it is possible to have expectations for the ball that has not flowed into the ball entry unit 64 until the end. ..

Further, when the number of balls flowing into the ball entry unit 64 exceeds a predetermined number within a predetermined period, the ball is distributed to a specific entry slot which is more advantageous to the player than other entry openings by the distribution means. It may be configured to be easy. With this configuration, the player can enthusiastically play a game (launching a ball) in order to allow a large number of balls to flow into the ball entry unit 64 in a short period of time.

Although the sorting means (sorting member 900) having various technical ideas has been described above, a sorting means that appropriately combines each of the above-mentioned technical ideas may be provided.

<Third modification example>
Next, a third modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 141. In the third embodiment described above, when the time reduction state is set after the end of the jackpot game for the battle effect executed during the jackpot game, until the number of special figure fluctuations in the time reduction state reaches a predetermined number (30 times). It was configured to run continuously. Then, when the number of special map fluctuations in the time-reduced state reaches a predetermined number of times (30 times), the battle effect is terminated and the effect of entering the time-reduced state (see FIG. 114 (b)) is executed. Was there.

On the other hand, in the third modification, in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), a privilege different from the jackpot game executed at the time of winning the jackpot is given in a part of the lottery results other than the jackpot. It is configured so that a small hit can be won in which a small hit game is executed. Further, when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the effect executed during the jackpot game (for example, the effect of displaying the ending screen of the jackpot game) is a predetermined end condition (special figure variation) during the time saving state. It is configured to be continuously executed until the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times (30 times) or a predetermined lottery result (for example, a small hit) is established as a lottery result of a special symbol, and the end condition is satisfied. After that, the time saving rush effect (see FIG. 135 (b)) indicating that the time saving state is set is executed. With such a configuration, it can be made to think that the time saving state is set at the timing when the end condition is satisfied. Regarding the control of winning a small hit in the special drawing lottery, the target of the control related to the big hit winning in each of the above-described embodiments is changed to a small hit, and the winning determination value (value of the first random number counter C1) is set. When the small hit game is executed by setting the range different from the range corresponding to the big hit winning, the small hit operation scenario different from the big hit operation scenario (for example, the round game is one round and the variable winning device 65 is used. A variable winning device 65 is operated based on a round game to be opened, and as a condition for ending the round of the round game, either five balls are won or the opening period is 0.5 seconds. Since the points are different and the others are the same, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the third modification, the predetermined end condition is configured to have an end condition (small hit winning) in which the timing of establishment is irregular. With this configuration, even if a certain number of time saving states (for example, 100 times of time saving) are internally set, various time saving states are set depending on the timing at which the time saving rushing effect is executed. Can be made to think that is set, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Here, with reference to FIG. 135, the production contents of the third modification will be described. FIG. 135 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen having a display mode that can be executed during the jackpot game displayed after the end of the jackpot game (during the reduced working hours), and FIG. 135 (b) is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the time saving rush screen. In each element displayed in each figure, the same elements as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 135 (a), when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the ending screen displayed on the ending screen of the jackpot game is continuously displayed. On this ending screen, a display mode Dm5 indicating the number of prize balls acquired by the player during a period (continuous chan period) in which a game state (probability change state, time saving state, jackpot game state) advantageous to the player is continuously set. And, the display mode Dm10 indicating the number of big hit games executed during the continuous Chan period is displayed. Since the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) is internally a time-saving state, a variation display mode (arrow) indicating that the special FIG. 2 variation is executed is displayed in the small display area Dm2. .. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that the jackpot game is continuing even though the time saving state is set. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, since the game board 13 is configured so that the game executed during the time saving state and the game executed during the jackpot game are the same game (right-handed game). , The current gaming state is not determined by the player depending on the gaming method.

Next, when the end condition is satisfied during the time saving state, the time saving rushing effect is executed as shown in FIG. 135 (b). Here, in the third modification, when the end condition is satisfied by the small hit winning, the number of remaining time reductions at that time is determined, and the determined remaining time reduction number is a good value (for example, the last digit is When it is not "0"), the correction number obtained by correcting the actual remaining time reduction number is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the number of time reductions (remaining time reductions) displayed when the time reduction rush effect is executed can be set to a good value, so the time reduction state is set when the time reduction rush effect is executed. It can remind you of the timing.

In the figure shown in FIG. 135 (b), 80, which is the number of corrections, is displayed in the remaining time reduction number display area Dm11. Then, in the small display area Dm2, the display mode of "341" indicating that the special figure 2 has won the small hit is displayed. In the third modification, the winning game in which the same variable winning device 65 is changed is executed depending on whether the small hit is won or the big hit is won. Therefore, when the time saving rushing effect is executed based on the small hit winning, the time saving rushing effect is executed based on the execution of the winning game in which the variable winning device 65 is variable. On the other hand, the time when the time saving rush effect is executed can be reminded of the timing when the time saving state is set.

In this modified example, the time-saving rushing effect shown in FIG. 135 (b) is executed when the small hit game is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit winning fluctuation and the small hit game start. Occasionally, it may be configured to perform a time-saving rush effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the electrical configuration in the third modification will be described. The electrical configuration of the third modification is different in that the battle end flag 223ca, the corrected flag 223acb, and the correction number storage area 223cc are added to the above-mentioned third embodiment, and the other points are the same. Is. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In this third modification, among the display modes displayed during the jackpot game, the "big hit ending screen (see FIG. 135 (a))" is used as the display mode displayed even after the jackpot game is completed. In that respect, it differs from the above-mentioned third embodiment (among the display modes displayed during the jackpot game, the "battle effect screen" is displayed as the display mode displayed even after the jackpot game ends), but for convenience of explanation, for convenience of explanation. An explanation will be given using the flag names (battle in-battle flag 223ba, battle end flag 223ca) used in the third embodiment. That is, in this third modification, it is shown that the jackpot ending screen (see FIG. 135 (a)) is displayed when the battle flag 223ba is set to ON, and the battle end flag 223ca described later is set. When it is set to ON, it indicates that the condition for ending the display of the jackpot ending screen (see FIG. 135 (a)) is satisfied.

The battle end flag 223ca is a flag for indicating that the end condition is satisfied based on the small hit winning, and is set to ON when the ending condition is satisfied by the small hit winning.

The corrected flag 223acb is a flag for indicating that the displayed number of remaining time reductions has been corrected, and is set to ON when the number of remaining time reductions is corrected. By setting this corrected flag 223acb to ON, an effect mode (correction effect mode) for adjusting the difference between the corrected time reduction number and the actual time reduction number is executed as the variation effect of the special figure fluctuation. ..

The correction number storage area 223cc is a storage area in which a value indicating the number of correction remaining time reductions after correcting the number of remaining time reductions and a value indicating the difference between the number of correction remaining time reductions and the actual number of remaining time reductions are stored. Based on the value stored in the correction number storage area 223cc, the correction effect mode set as the variation effect of the special figure variation is set.

Next, the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 to 141. In the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third modification, the small hit end process during the small hit game is changed from the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment described above. The difference is that the battle effect update process is changed to the battle effect update process 4 and the special figure change start process is changed to the special figure change start process 4. Other than that, they are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in the third modification, among the display modes displayed during the jackpot game, the display mode displayed even after the jackpot game is completed is "battle effect display" with respect to the third embodiment described above. The difference is that "big hit ending screen display" is used instead of "", but for convenience of explanation, the process related to the battle effect in the above-mentioned third embodiment is used as it is. In this third modification, when the process related to the battle effect is executed, the process related to the jackpot ending screen is executed.

First, the contents of the small hit end processing 4 (S2571) will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit end process 4 (S2571). When the small hit end process 4 (S2571) is executed, first, in order to determine whether the battle is being produced at the present time, it is determined whether the battle flag 223ba is set to on (S2791), and then turned on. If it is determined that there is (S2791: Yes), the battle flag 223ba is set to off (S2792), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is off (S2791: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the battle effect update process 4 (S4651) will be described with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the contents of the battle effect update process 4 (S4651). In this battle effect update process 4 (S4651), it is determined that the first end condition (the number of remaining times reaches 70) has not been completed while the battle effect is being executed for the battle effect update process described above. If this is the case (S6654: No), it is determined whether the battle end flag 223ca is set to ON (S6671), and if it is determined to be ON (S6671: Yes), the number of times correction process (S6672) is executed. It differs in that it is the same otherwise. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the number correction process (S6672) will be described with reference to FIG. 139. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the contents of the number of times correction process (S6672). In this number of times correction process (S6672), a process for correcting the number of remaining time reductions at the time when the battle effect is completed to a good number of times is executed.

When the number correction process (S6672) is executed, first, the number of remaining times is extracted (S6691), and it is determined whether the last digit of the extracted number of remaining time reductions is "0" (S6692), "0". If it is determined to be (S6692: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the last digit is not "0" ("1 to 9") (S6692: No), the number of corrections (correction remaining) in which the last digit of the number of remaining time reductions is corrected to "0". The time reduction number) is set (S6693), the set correction number is stored in the correction number storage area 223cc (S6694), the corrected flag 223acb is set to ON (S6695), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the special figure fluctuation start processing 4 (S4921) will be described with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure fluctuation start processing 4 (S4921). The special figure variation start process 4 (S4921) is different in that the correction number of times corresponding process (S4391) is executed for the above-mentioned special figure variation start process, and is the same except for the above-mentioned special figure variation start process 4. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

Here, the content of the correction count correspondence process (S4391) will be described with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the contents of the correction count correspondence process (S4391). In this correction count correspondence process (S4391), when the remaining time reduction number displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is the correction remaining time reduction number, the difference between the correction remaining time reduction number and the actual remaining time reduction number. The process for setting the variation effect for setting to 0 is executed.

When the correction count correspondence process (S4391) is executed, it is first determined whether the corrected flag 223acb is set to ON (S6801), and if it is set to ON (S6801: yes), the current fluctuation time. Is 30 seconds or more (S6802). When it is determined in the process of S6802 that the time is 30 seconds or more (S6802), the value stored in the correction number storage area 223cc and the actual remaining time reduction number are read out (S6803), and the difference is calculated (S6804).

Then, the display mode corresponding to the difference value referred to in the process of S6804 is set (S6805), and the value (difference value) stored in the correction number storage area 223cc is updated according to the selected display mode (S6805). S6806), it is determined whether the difference value after the update is 0 (S6807). If it is determined that the difference value is 0 (S6807: Yes), it is not necessary to set the correction effect any more, so the corrected flag 223acb is set to off (S6808), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that S6801: No, S6802: No, and S6807: No, the present process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S6802, as the variation effect of this time, it is a process of determining whether or not the remaining time reduction number correction effect (the effect of bringing the number of remaining time reductions on the display closer to the actual remaining time reduction number) can be executed. In this modification, it is a condition for executing the remaining time reduction number correction effect that the fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more is set, but the execution condition is not limited to this, and the remaining time reduction number correction effect is performed according to the length of the fluctuation time. It may be configured to change the effect mode (the range of the value of the number of remaining time reductions to be updated).

As described above, in the third modification, the effect executed during the jackpot game (for example, the effect of displaying the ending screen of the jackpot game) is set when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. Continues until a predetermined end condition (the number of times the special figure changes reaches a predetermined number of times (30 times), or a predetermined lottery result (for example, a small hit) is won as a lottery result of a special symbol) is satisfied during the time saving state. After the end condition is satisfied, the time saving rush effect (see FIG. 135 (b)) indicating that the time saving state is set is executed. With this configuration, it can be made to think that the time saving state is set at the timing when the end condition is satisfied.

Further, in the third modification, the predetermined end condition is configured to have an end condition (small hit winning) in which the timing of establishment is irregular. With this configuration, even if a certain number of time saving states (for example, 100 times of time saving) are internally set, various time saving states are set depending on the timing at which the time saving rushing effect is executed. Can be made to think that is set, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the third modification, when the number of remaining time reductions is corrected, the correction processing is executed to correct the number of remaining time reductions to a value smaller than the actual number of remaining time reductions. Of the reference values (for example, the last digit is "0" or "5"), the correction process for correcting to the value with the smallest difference may be executed. In this case, the number of time reductions after correction (correction remaining time reduction number) may be larger than the actual number of remaining time reductions. It may be configured to execute a variation effect in which a plurality of values of the number of remaining time reductions (corrected value of the number of remaining time reductions) are subtracted. Specifically, a variation effect is performed in which the third symbol is temporarily stopped and restarted after 30 seconds have elapsed, as if the special figure variation was executed twice for one variation effect (for example, 60 seconds). It may be configured to execute and subtract 1 from the value of the number of remaining time reductions displayed according to the temporary stop timing. As a result, the number of remaining time reductions on the display can be brought closer to the actual number of time reductions without giving a sense of discomfort.

Further, in the third modification, a configuration is used in which the remaining period (the number of remaining time reductions) in which the time reduction state is set is notified to the player by the time reduction rush effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the effect mode. In a gaming machine in which the probability change state is set for a predetermined period (for example, 100 times) by changing the game state to be from the time saving state to the probability change state, the remaining period (remaining probability change number) in which the probability change state is set is changed. A configuration that notifies by a rush effect may be used.

Further, when the special figure lottery is executed in the state where the probability change state is set, a fall lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to end the probability change state is provided separately from the jackpot lottery means for performing the jackpot lottery. In the period in which the probability change state is set (for example, 100 times), in addition to the first end condition (special figure fluctuation 30 times) and the second end condition (small hit winning), each condition of the third condition (falling winning) It may be configured to change the effect mode to be executed according to the establishment of.

In this case, for example, when the second end condition is satisfied, if the third condition is not satisfied, the probability variation notification effect is executed, and if the third condition is satisfied, the probability variation notification effect is changed. It is preferable to configure it to execute the above-mentioned time saving notification effect. Further, when the second end condition is satisfied, if the third condition is not satisfied, the definite notification effect is not executed, and the time saving notification effect is executed only when the third condition is satisfied. You may.

In this third modification, among the display modes displayed during the jackpot game, the "big hit ending screen (FIG. 135 (a))" is used as the display mode displayed even after the jackpot game is completed. Any display mode may be used to make the player think that the current jackpot game is in progress. For example, the interval screen displayed during the interval period may be displayed, or the display displayed during the jackpot game. A dedicated display mode having at least a part of the mode (for example, a display mode displayed in the small area Dm5 or the small area Dm6) may be used.

<Fourth modification>
Next, a further modification to the battle effect in the above-mentioned third modification will be described. In the third modification described above, when a time-saving jackpot is won, a predetermined end condition (after the time-saving state is set) after the end of the jackpot game is completed (the number of special figure fluctuations is a predetermined number of times (30 times)). Is configured to continue to execute the battle effect until a predetermined lottery result (for example, a small hit) is established as a lottery result of a special symbol. It was configured to execute the production that won the battle (battle victory production) when the jackpot was won. By configuring in this way, the execution frequency of the production that lost the battle at the end of the time-saving jackpot game (battle defeat production) is suppressed, the winning percentage of the battle production (execution ratio of the battle victory production) is increased, and the player is given. It was intended to make it possible to get interested in the production result.

However, in the above-mentioned third modification, if the time-saving jackpot is won during the battle production in the time-saving state, the rematch production is executed, so that the period of one battle production is extended and the player can perform the production. There was a problem of getting bored. In addition, even though the jackpot was won a plurality of times, the victory or defeat was not displayed as the production result of the battle production, and there was a possibility that the production would be difficult for the player to understand.

On the other hand, in the fourth modification, the variation pattern selection table referred to when the time reduction state is set is changed 30 times after the time reduction state is set (as a condition for ending the battle effect). It is configured so that different fluctuation times are selected for the first time reduction period until the elapse of the set special figure fluctuation number) and the second time reduction period after that, and the jackpot was won during the first time reduction period. In this case, a variable time (30 seconds) that can be set between the victory effect period in the battle effect and the pseudo-probability effect period in which the probability change effect executed during the probability change state is simulated is selected. ing.

With this configuration, if a jackpot is won during the first time-saving period (during battle production), the production result of the battle effect being executed is performed regardless of the type of jackpot won (probability variation jackpot, time-saving jackpot). It is possible to surely execute the production to win the battle (battle victory production). Therefore, it is possible to further increase the winning percentage of the battle effect (execution rate of the battle victory effect) so that the player can be interested in the effect result.

Further, it is configured to execute different effects according to the jackpot type of the jackpot won during the first short period. Specifically, when the probability change jackpot (8 rounds, 16 rounds) is won during the first short time period, the effect of winning the jackpot is executed during the above-mentioned pseudo probability variation effect period, and the game shifts to the jackpot game. Then, in the jackpot game that is executed after that, a new battle effect (battle victory effect) is executed. On the other hand, if the probability change jackpot (2 rounds) is won during the first short time period, the pseudo battle effect period is set after the pseudo probability change effect period during the jackpot fluctuation, and the jackpot is won during the pseudo probability change effect period. After executing the production, the pseudo battle production is executed, the jackpot game is started during the battle production, and the production result (battle victory production) of the pseudo battle production is displayed during the short jackpot game period of 2 rounds. It is configured in. As a result, if the probabilistic jackpot is won during the first short period of time, it is possible to execute two battle victory effects by the end of the probabilistic jackpot game, so that it was used in the above-mentioned third modification. It is possible to increase the winning percentage of the battle effect (execution rate of the battle victory effect) rather than the configuration so that the player can be interested in the effect result.

In this fourth modification, when a big hit is won during the first short period, a certain fluctuation time (30 seconds) is selected regardless of the big hit type, but this is limited to this. If you win the jackpot type in which the pseudo battle effect is executed, the fluctuation time is longer than when you win the other jackpot types, that is, the fluctuation time is longer by the effect period of the pseudo battle effect (for example, 50 seconds). It may be configured so that can be selected. As a result, the period until the pseudo battle effect is executed can be set to a certain period, so that it is possible to prevent the jackpot type of the jackpot won this time from being determined by the time the pseudo battle effect is executed. Can be done.

On the other hand, if the time-saving jackpot is won during the first time-saving period (during the battle production), the first battle victory effect is executed during the jackpot fluctuation and the pseudo-probability change effect is executed, as in the case of the above-mentioned probability-changing jackpot. do. Then, in the second battle production (battle production during the jackpot game or pseudo battle production), a battle production that continues from the end of the jackpot game until the end condition is satisfied is executed.

With this configuration, even if the time-saving jackpot is won during the first time-saving period, one battle victory effect can be executed, so the winning percentage of the battle effect (execution rate of the battle victory effect). ) Can be further enhanced so that the player can be interested in the production result. Further, since the battle victory effect can be executed the number of times according to the number of big hit wins during the battle effect, it is possible to provide the effect that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

Here, although detailed description will be omitted, the content of the pseudo-probability variation effect will be described. In the fourth modification, when the probability variation state is set as in the third embodiment and the third modification described above, the probability variation effect in which the character 811 runs on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. .. During the pseudo probabilistic effect, an effect (concept including the same effect) including at least a part of the effect modes executed when the probabilistic state is set is executed, and during the effect period. It is configured to execute a pseudo-variation effect that makes it seem that the special figure variation is executed multiple times.

As a result, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the pseudo-probability effect that is executed during a part of the special figure variation (big hit variation) and the probability variation effect that is executed over a plurality of special figure fluctuations. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the contents of the probability variation / time saving table 202de2 will be described as the variation pattern table used in the fourth modification. FIG. 142 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the probability change / time saving table 202de2. The probability variation / time reduction table 202de2 is different from the above-mentioned probability variation / time reduction table 202e2 (see FIG. 19) in that the table to be referred to is different based on the value of the time reduction counter 203h, and each of the variation type counter CS1. They differ in that the types of fluctuation patterns specified according to the values are different, and are otherwise the same. The detailed description of the same content will be omitted.

Specifically, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is "100 to 71", that is, the period from when the time reduction state is set until the number of special map fluctuations reaches 30 times (first time reduction period). If the judgment result is a hit (big hit, small hit), the time-saving A big hit fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Regardless of the value of CS1, it is stipulated that the time saving A deviation fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is selected.

On the other hand, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is "70 to 1", that is, the period after the number of special map fluctuations has elapsed 30 times after the time reduction state is set (second time reduction period), and the hit / fail determination result is correct (the second time reduction period). In the case of (big hit, small hit), the time-saving B big hit fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is selected regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In the range of "0 to 179", the time-saving B out-of-time fluctuation pattern 1 with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is selected, and in the case of the range of "180 to 198", the time-saving B out-of-time fluctuation pattern 2 with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is selected. Is stipulated to be.

In this fourth modification, by using the above-mentioned probability change / time saving table 202de2, the time saving period (first time saving period) in which the battle effect is executed and the time saving period (second time saving period) in which the battle effect is not executed are performed. And, it is configured so that different fluctuation times can be selected. Then, during the first time saving period, if the special drawing lottery is missed, a shorter fluctuation time than the second time saving period is selected, while if the special drawing lottery is successful, the fluctuation is longer than the second time saving period. Since the time is configured to be selected, the degree of advantage in the time saving state does not differ greatly between the first time saving period and the second time saving period.

Further, in the fourth modification, if a small hit is won during the first short period and the end condition of the battle effect is satisfied, the battle victory effect is once performed in the same manner as the effect executed at the time of the big hit winning described above. It is configured to execute, then execute the pseudo-probability change effect, and then execute the pseudo-battle effect to be executed during the small hit fluctuation until the effect of losing the battle. As a result, the battle production can be completed without giving the player a sense of discomfort. In this case, the fluctuation time of the small hit fluctuation is longer than that when the other big hit types are won, that is, the fluctuation time longer by the period until the effect result of the pseudo battle effect is displayed (for example, 60 seconds). It is good to configure it so that you can select.

Further, although detailed explanation is omitted, if a small hit is won during the first time reduction period and the end condition of the battle production is satisfied, the period from the end of the small hit game to the end of the first time reduction period. It is configured so that the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation executed in is selected based on the data table to be referred to during the second short period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the variable time corresponding to the various effects during the battle effect from being selected even though the battle effect is completed.

As described above, in the third modification and the fourth modification, when the jackpot is won, it is possible to set a time saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state and a probability variation state that is more advantageous than the time saving state after the jackpot game is completed. The effect of notifying that the time saving state, which is disadvantageous to the player, is set among the probable change state and the time saving state is executed after the time saving state is set and the predetermined end condition is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving state and the probable change state may be set based on the small hit winning.

Further, in the time saving state set when the time saving jackpot is won in the big hit lottery, the fluctuation time (for example, 5 to 60 seconds) of the special figure fluctuation is slightly shorter than the normal state (concept including the same). It is configured to be easy to select, and if a small hit is won during the time saving state, the data table to be referred to when selecting the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation is switched, and the short fluctuation time (for example, 0.5 to 0.5 to 5 seconds) may be configured to be easily selected. In addition, as for the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, as with the fluctuation time of the special figure described above, it is easier to select a shorter fluctuation time after winning a small hit during the time reduction state than when the time reduction state is set. It is good to configure it so that it becomes.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that the time saving state is set based on the winning of the small hit, and the number of remaining time saving at the time of winning the small hit is apparent. Since the number of time reductions is set, it is possible to have the player play a game in which various time reductions are set. In such a case, by using the technique of the third modification described above, it is possible to provide the player with a more comfortable game.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the big hit until multiple (for example, two or three times) big hits occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a combination of probabilities (commonly known as a setting) related to a big hit lottery is provided in a plurality of stages and the setting can be changed on the game store side. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In addition, as a pachinko machine provided with a setting of a plurality of stages, a combination of jackpot probabilities (combination of a jackpot probability in a low probability state and a jackpot probability in a probabilistic state) may be one of a plurality of stages (for example, 6 stages). A typical example is one that can be set to, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, the ratio of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined when a jackpot is hit is implemented as a pachinko machine that can be changed according to the setting. You may. That is, the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player may be changed according to the setting, or the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player may be changed. More specifically, for example, the ratio at which the jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) is determined. The ratio may be changed according to the setting to change the degree of advantage for each setting. Further, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot to which a large number of time reductions (for example, 100 times) is given after the end of the jackpot can be changed according to the setting, or the jackpot to which a small number of time reductions (for example, 0 times) is given can be changed. The ratio at which is determined may be changed according to the setting. Further, the rate at which the jackpot that shifts to (or is easy to shift to) an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probable change state) after the end of the jackpot is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the disadvantageous gaming state (for example, a normal state) can be changed. ) May be changed according to the setting. In addition, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type is provided, in which the ratio determined only in a specific setting is significantly high (almost never determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, the setting is configured to be configurable in 6 steps from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set 6. And, in setting 6, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2% when it becomes a jackpot, while in other settings, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. It may be configured. With this configuration, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to pay attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot to play the game. be able to. Further, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 time reductions are given after the jackpot is completed may be configured to be higher than other settings. With this configuration, it is possible to focus on the number of times the time saving state ends and play the game. In addition to or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or an accessory inside the jackpot) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured to be provided so that the jackpot type can be easily determined by a specific setting (the ratio of determination is high). In addition, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is changed according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability is increased as the setting is advantageous to the player, while in the probabilistic state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It may be configured to increase the jackpot probability as much as possible. This configuration is a type in which it is easy to increase the number of balls held as the number of lottery of special symbols increases (the number of prize balls to be paid out tends to be larger than the number of game balls fired), especially in the probabilistic state. It is effective in gaming machines. More specifically, for example, by applying it to a gaming machine of a type in which the probability change state continues until the next big hit is won, and the probability change state is a small hit with a high probability, the advantage of the high setting is achieved. You can improve your sex. That is, if the probability of becoming a big hit in the probable change state is low, the number of lottery until the next big hit tends to increase, so that there are many chances to win a prize ball as a small hit. Therefore, in the probable change state, it becomes easier to win more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

Further, in the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Each of the above-described embodiments and each control example may be configured by combining all or a part thereof. For example, the configuration of the pass detection sensor 228 of the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment may be applied to other embodiments. For example, by applying to the first embodiment, the gauge number of the chance meter CM during the execution of the standby state effect can be accurately linked by the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. More specifically, the passing number counter 223k in the sixth embodiment is also provided in the RAM 223 in the first embodiment, and the value of the passing number counter 223k is updated by the same method as in the fourth embodiment (FIG. 87). See S4211, S4212, S4219, S4220). Then, during the execution of the standby state effect, every time the value of the passing number counter 223k is updated, the mode of the chance meter CM is updated so that the gauge number corresponds to the updated counter value. As a result, the mode of the chance meter CM can be set to match the situation of the upper surface of the actual opening / closing door 65f1. For other embodiments, the configuration of the sixth embodiment can be diverted by the same method.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Characteristic group A> (Set whether or not to execute the button effects in duplicate)
An effect executing means for executing an effect based on a predetermined priority, an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means, and the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. The mode information storage means for storing the mode information for storing the mode information in a plurality of storage areas having different priorities, and the plurality of storage areas are configured to be capable of storing a plurality of the same priority. It has an execution effect setting means for setting whether or not to execute the effect corresponding to the plurality of the mode information stored in the plurality of the same priority order in the effect execution means. A game machine A1 characterized by.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, the suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result can be executed, and the player can enjoy the period until the lottery result is notified. Further, as a suggestion effect, a gaming machine has been proposed in which the effect of the suggestion effect is further enhanced by executing various effects at various timings (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). Further, in a gaming machine having the above-described configuration, as a suggestion effect, a player-participation-type suggestion effect is executed by executing an operation effect that causes the player to operate a predetermined operation means, thereby performing the game. There are gaming machines that have improved the taste. However, since there are some players whose motivation to play is reduced due to the execution of many suggestion effects, it is possible to execute an effect that satisfies a plurality of players simply by executing the suggestion effects according to a predetermined rule. There was a problem that it could not be done and the interest of the game was reduced. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game having an improved interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine A1, the mode information for indicating the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means is stored in a plurality of storage areas having different priorities. The plurality of storage areas are configured to be able to store a plurality of mode information of the same priority, and the execution effect setting means executes the effect on the plurality of mode information stored in the same priority. It is decided whether to do it.

With this configuration, it is possible to variably set the presence or absence of duplicate execution of the effect corresponding to each mode information stored in a plurality of storage areas in which the same priority is defined. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, each mode information is set so that duplicate execution is possible, and when the staging is actually executed, the mode of the staging to be executed is changed according to the setting contents of the execution staging setting means. Therefore, even if the interval between the effect setting timing in which the effect mode is set and the effect execution timing in which the effect based on the effect set effect mode is executed is significantly different, the execution effect setting means at the effect execution timing There is an effect that the effect according to the setting contents of is easily executed.

In the gaming machine A1, when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the aspect information storage means transfers the aspect information stored in the specific storage area to a predetermined storage area other than the specific storage area. A gaming machine A2 characterized by being memorized.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, when the transition condition is satisfied, the mode information already stored in the specific storage area is transferred and stored in a storage area different from the specific storage area. As a result, it is possible to change the effect mode to be executed depending on whether or not the transition condition is satisfied, so that it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player and to enhance the effect. ..

In the game machine A1 or A2, when the effect mode having the same priority is set by the effect mode setting means, the order determination means capable of discriminating the order in which the effect mode is set and the plurality of order determination means. The erasing means has an erasing means for erasing the aspect information stored in the storage area of the above, and the erasing means has the same number of the effect modes in which the same priority is set by the effect setting means. When the number of storage areas is set to be larger than the number corresponding to the priority order of the above, the order stored in the aspect information storage means is deleted in order from the oldest aspect information based on the determination result of the order determination means. A game machine A3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the setting mode in which the same priority is set is set when the number of storage areas corresponding to the priority is set to be larger than the number of storage areas. The order is erased in order from the oldest effect mode. Therefore, since it is possible to facilitate the execution of the effect corresponding to the most recently set effect mode, it is possible to provide the player with an effect that does not give a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

If the configuration of the gaming machine A1 is used and it is set to execute only the effect corresponding to the mode information stored in one storage area for the same priority, it is the latest. It is preferable to configure the mode information corresponding to the set effect mode to be stored in one storage area, and to erase the other mode information by the erasing means.

In the game machine A1 or A3, the effect executing means stores the first aspect information in a predetermined first storage area among the plurality of storage areas of the aspect information storage means, and the specific first storage area is stored. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that when a specific second aspect information different from the first aspect information is stored in a second storage area different from the above, the effect of the special effect mode is executed.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are played. That is, when the mode information stored in the plurality of storage areas is stored in a predetermined combination, the effect of the special effect mode is executed. As a result, for the process of storing the aspect information in the storage area by the aspect information storage means, the process for storing the already set effect mode and the process for establishing the execution condition of the effect of the special effect mode. , Can have a dual role. Further, since it is possible to give a role for executing the effect of the special effect mode even for the mode information having a low priority in which the corresponding effect is difficult to be executed, it is possible to effectively utilize the stored mode information. can. Therefore, there is an effect that various effects can be efficiently executed.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the effect executing means includes an operation means that can be operated by the player and an operation determination means that determines that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. A5 is characterized in that, at least, it is possible to execute an operation effect in which the effect mode is changed based on the determination result of the operation determination means.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines A1 to A4, it is possible to execute an operation effect using an operation means that can be operated by the player, so that the player is interested in the effect to be executed. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine A5, the staging mode setting means can set, as the staging mode, an operation staging mode in which an operation valid period for effectively discriminating the discrimination result of the operation discriminating means is set, and the staging execution In the means, as the first aspect information, the first aspect information corresponding to the operation effect mode is stored in the first storage area, and as the second aspect information, the second aspect information corresponding to the operation effect mode is stored. The gaming machine 6 is characterized in that when it is stored in the second storage area, the special effect mode is executed.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A5, it is possible to execute a special effect in a situation where a plurality of operation effect modes are executed, so that the player is interested in the effect to be executed. It has the effect of improving the fun of the game.

In the game machine A6, the effect executing means is set to the operation valid period set in the operation effect mode corresponding to the first aspect information and the operation effect mode set in the operation effect mode corresponding to the second aspect information. When the operation valid period overlaps, the effect of the special effect mode is executed, and the effect of the special effect mode is characterized in that the effect of setting the operation effect mode is executed. Game machine A7.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the operation effects are set in duplicate, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the special effects. Further, when the operation valid period is set to overlap, the effect of the special effect mode can be executed as the operation effect. Therefore, the effect of the special effect mode is executed while the effect of operating the operation means is continued. be able to. Therefore, since the effect of the special effect mode can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort, there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic group B> (The area for storing the button effect is changed according to the setting opportunity)
An effect executing means for executing an effect based on a predetermined priority, an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means, and the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. The mode information storage means for storing the mode information for indicating the above in a plurality of storage areas having different priorities, and the effect mode setting means is at least as a setting condition for setting the effect mode. It has a predetermined first setting condition and a second setting condition different from the first setting condition, and the mode information storage means is established when the staging mode is set by the staging mode setting means. The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the range of the plurality of storage areas for storing the mode information is different according to the setting conditions.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, the suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result can be executed, and the player can enjoy the period until the lottery result is notified. Further, as a suggestion effect, a gaming machine has been proposed in which the effect of the suggestion effect is further enhanced by executing various effects at various timings (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). In addition, there are also gaming machines that are configured to execute more suggestive effects so that the suggestive effects can be set at various occasions. However, there is a problem that a lot of suggestive effects set by various triggers are executed, so that complicated effects are executed as a whole and the motivation for playing is reduced. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming that can suppress a decrease in motivation for playing due to an effect to be executed and improve the interest of the gaming.

According to the game machine B1, when the first setting condition or the second setting condition is satisfied, the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means is set by the effect mode setting means, and the set effect mode is set. The aspect information for showing is stored in a plurality of storage areas having different priorities by the aspect information storage means. Then, the range in which the mode information is stored can be changed from the plurality of storage areas according to the setting conditions that are established when the effect mode is set. As a result, the priority can be limited according to the setting condition of the effect mode, so that the effect executed based on each effect mode set under a plurality of conditions can be given regularity. .. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the execution of complicated effects, it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation for the game due to the effects to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine B1, the plurality of storage areas are configured to be capable of storing a plurality of the same priorities, and the plurality of embodiments stored in the staging execution means in the same priority order. The gaming machine B2 is characterized by having an execution effect setting means for setting whether or not to execute the effect corresponding to information.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, the mode information for showing the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect executing means is stored in a plurality of storage areas having different priorities. The plurality of storage areas are configured to be able to store a plurality of mode information of the same priority, and the execution effect setting means executes the effect on the plurality of mode information stored in the same priority. It is decided whether to do it. With this configuration, it is possible to variably set the presence or absence of duplicate execution of the effect corresponding to each mode information stored in a plurality of storage areas in which the same priority is defined. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, each mode information is set so that duplicate execution is possible, and when the staging is actually executed, the mode of the staging to be executed is changed according to the setting contents of the execution staging setting means. Therefore, even if the interval between the effect setting timing in which the effect mode is set and the effect execution timing in which the effect based on the effect set effect mode is executed is significantly different, the execution effect setting means at the effect execution timing There is an effect that the effect according to the setting contents of is easily executed.

In the gaming machine B2, when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the aspect information storage means transfers the aspect information stored in the specific storage area to a predetermined storage area other than the specific storage area. A gaming machine B3 characterized by being memorized.

According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2. That is, when the transition condition is satisfied, the mode information already stored in the specific storage area is transferred and stored in a storage area different from the specific storage area. As a result, it is possible to change the effect mode to be executed depending on whether or not the transition condition is satisfied, so that it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player and to enhance the effect. ..

<Characteristic group C> (Premier production for low priority production)
An effect execution means for executing an effect for a predetermined period based on a predetermined priority, an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means, and an effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode. The effect information storage means for storing the mode information for indicating the effect mode set by the above in a plurality of storage areas having different priorities, and the effect mode setting means has an execution period of the effect. The effect mode can be set so as to overlap, and has an effect end means for ending the running effect before the predetermined period elapses when a predetermined end condition is satisfied. The gaming machine C1 characterized by being.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, the suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result can be executed, and the player can enjoy the period until the lottery result is notified. Further, as a suggestion effect, there is a gaming machine in which various effects are executed at various timings to further enhance the effect of the suggestion effect. In such a game machine, priorities are set in advance for a plurality of suggestion effects. It has been proposed to execute a suggestion effect having a high priority when the execution timings of the suggestion effect overlap (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200589). In such a game machine, the suggestion effect is executed according to a predetermined priority. Therefore, for example, by setting a high priority for the suggestion effect having a high effect effect, the suggestion effect having a low effect effect is executed. By doing so, it was possible to solve the problem that the suggestive effect with a high effect of the effect is not executed and the interest of the game is lowered. However, when it is configured to execute the suggestion effect to be executed based on the predetermined priority, it becomes difficult to execute the suggestion effect having a low priority, and the suggested effect to be executed becomes monotonous. There was a problem that the player got tired of the game early. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by executing various suggestion effects.

According to the game machine C1, the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means is set by the effect mode setting means, and the mode information for showing the set effect mode has different priority depending on the mode information storage means. Stored in multiple storage areas. Then, if the end condition is satisfied during the execution of the effect, the effect is ended before the predetermined period predetermined by the effect end means elapses. As a result, the execution period of the effect can be different depending on whether or not the end condition is satisfied, and it is possible to easily execute the effect based on the mode information having a lower priority among the mode information set in the overlapping period. .. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine C1 has an operation means that can be operated by the player and an operation determination means that determines that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the determination result of the operation determination means is predetermined. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the end condition is satisfied when it is the determination result of.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, the end condition is satisfied based on the player operating the operating means, so that the player can select the period during which the effect is executed. Can be done. Therefore, since the amount of the effect to be executed can be changed according to the player's willingness to participate in the effect, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine C1 or C2, a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination, and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game capable of giving a privilege to a player when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result. The first effect mode is easy to set when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result, and the second effect is more difficult to set than the first effect mode. Aspects can be set, and the mode information storage means stores the first mode information for showing the first effect mode and the second mode information for showing the second effect mode. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that it is stored in a storage area having a lower priority than the storage area.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C1 or C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first effect mode, which is easy to set when the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined determination result on which the privilege game is executed, is set to have a lower priority than the second effect mode, which is difficult to set. Will be done. As a result, it is easier to execute the effect corresponding to the second effect mode by satisfying the end condition and shortening the effect period of the effect being executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a new playability that the effect being executed is expected to end at an early stage, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic D group> (linking different priority effects)
An effect executing means for executing an effect based on a predetermined priority, an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means, and the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. The effect information storage means for storing the mode information for storing the mode information in a plurality of storage areas having different priorities, and the effect executing means corresponds to one priority among the plurality of storage areas. When the first aspect information stored in the first storage area satisfies a predetermined effect condition, the second aspect stored in the second storage area corresponding to another priority lower than the one priority. The gaming machine D1 characterized in that the effect according to the information is also associated and executed.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, the suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result can be executed, and the player can enjoy the period until the lottery result is notified. Further, as a suggestion effect, there is a gaming machine in which various effects are executed at various timings to further enhance the effect of the suggestion effect. In such a game machine, priorities are set in advance for a plurality of suggestion effects. It has been proposed to execute a suggestion effect having a high priority when the execution timings of the suggestion effect overlap (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200589). In such a game machine, the suggestion effect is executed according to a predetermined priority. Therefore, for example, by setting a high priority for the suggestion effect having a high effect effect, the suggestion effect having a low effect effect is executed. By doing so, it was possible to solve the problem that the suggestive effect with a high effect of the effect is not executed and the interest of the game is lowered. However, when it is configured to execute the suggestion effect to be executed based on the predetermined priority, it becomes difficult to execute the suggestion effect having a low priority, and the suggested effect to be executed becomes monotonous. There was a problem that the player got tired of the game early. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by executing various suggestion effects.

According to the gaming machine D1, the effect corresponding to the aspect information stored in the plurality of storage areas having different priorities depending on the aspect information storage means is executed by the effect executing means based on the priority. Further, when the first aspect information stored in the first storage area corresponding to one priority satisfies a predetermined effect condition, the second storage area corresponding to another priority lower than one priority is stored. The effect corresponding to the stored second aspect information is performed in association with each other. As a result, the effect having a low priority can be linked to the effect having a high priority and executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide various effects to the player, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine D1 has an effect period setting means capable of setting a period during which the effect is executed by the effect execution means, and the effect period setting means executes a first effect corresponding to the first aspect information. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the first effect period and the second effect period in which the second effect corresponding to the second aspect information is executed are set differently.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B1, each effect period is such that the first effect period in which the first effect is executed and the second effect period in which the second effect is executed do not overlap. Is set by the effect period setting means, so that it is possible to reliably notify the player of a plurality of effects to be executed, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine D2, a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game capable of giving a privilege to a player when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result. The effect mode setting means has at least the first effect, which is easy to set when the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined determination result, and the second effect, which is more difficult to set than the first effect. A gaming machine D3 characterized by being configurable.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D2, the following effects are played. That is, when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result in which the privilege game is executed, the first effect that is easy to set and the second effect that is difficult to set can be executed in association with each other. Further, the second effect is an effect having a low priority to be executed independently. As a result, when the second effect is executed, it is possible to make the execution of the second effect this time seem to be related to the first effect, and there is a sense of expectation that the privilege game will be executed. Can be enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine D2 or D3, the staging period setting means sets the second staging period before the first staging period.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D2 or D3, the second effect period is set before the first effect period, so that the second effect is executed before the first effect. It will be. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed before the second effect, and the expectation of the player at the time when the second effect is executed is impaired. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay attention to the continuously executed effect and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines D2 to D4, the effect period setting means executes the second effect in association with the first effect and the second effect without relating to the first effect. The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the period in which the second effect period is set differs depending on the case.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D2 to D4, the second effect of this time is executed in connection with the first effect based on the period during which the second effect is executed. Since it is possible to predict whether or not the game is played, it is possible to make the player interested in the performance to be performed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

<Characteristic E group> (Special effect when switching the target of the main variation effect)
The first discrimination means that executes the first discrimination when the first discrimination condition is satisfied, and the second discrimination means different from the first discrimination condition when the second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition is satisfied. The discrimination results of the second discrimination means, the first effect execution means for causing the display means to execute the first effect for showing the discrimination result of the first discrimination means for a predetermined period, and the discrimination result of the second discrimination means are shown. The second effect execution means for causing the display means to execute the second effect for a predetermined period, the effect mode of the first effect executed by the first effect execution means, and the second effect execution means. An effect mode setting means capable of setting the effect mode of the second effect, and an effect switching means for switching the first effect being executed to the second effect when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the effect mode setting means sets a special effect mode as an effect mode of the first effect executed in a state where the switching condition can be satisfied.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, the suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result can be executed, and the player can enjoy the period until the lottery result is notified. Furthermore, as a suggestion effect, there is a game machine in which various effects are executed at various timings to further enhance the effect of the suggestion effect, and in such a game machine, the suggestion effect is set at different timings based on different moments. However, if another suggestion effect is executed while one suggestion effect is being executed, the running one suggestion effect is forcibly terminated and the other suggestion effect is executed. There is a game machine (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-209952). In such a gaming machine, even while one suggestion effect is being executed, another suggestion effect can be executed, so that the types of effects to be executed can be increased and the effect can be enhanced. be. However, since the above-mentioned gaming machine is configured to execute another suggestion effect regardless of the effect status of one suggestion effect being executed, the player suddenly switches the suggestion effect to be executed. There was a problem that the player's motivation to play was reduced. Further, when the suggestion effect being executed indicates a predetermined process change (for example, story development), the predetermined process change mode ends in the middle by switching the suggestion effect. Therefore, there was a problem that the player was more confused. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by executing various suggestion effects without confusing the player.

According to the gaming machine E1, when the switching condition is satisfied, the first effect being executed is switched to the second effect by the effect switching means. Then, a special effect mode is set as the effect mode of the first effect executed in a state where the switching condition can be satisfied. As a result, the effect mode of the first effect is set to the special effect mode, and the effect of the special effect mode is executed when switching to the second effect, so that various suggestion effects can be executed without confusing the player. , It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the effect mode setting means sets, as the special effect mode, a related effect mode related to the effect mode of the second effect.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1, an effect mode related to the effect mode of the second effect is set as a special effect mode, so that the game is played when switching from the first effect to the second effect. It has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game without confusing the person.

The game machine E2 has an operation means that can be operated by the player and an operation determination means that determines that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and has the first effect executing means and the first effect execution means. The 2 staging execution means can at least execute an operation staging in which the staging mode is changed based on the discrimination result of the operation discriminating means, and the staging mode setting means is the staging operation staging as the second staging. When is set, the gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the effect mode corresponding to the operation effect is set as the special effect mode of the first effect.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the staging mode setting means is a first staging mode that is easily set as the staging mode of the first staging when the discriminating result of the first discriminating means is a specific discriminating result. And the second effect mode, which is more difficult to set than the first effect mode, can be set, and the second effect mode is set as the special effect mode of the first effect. Game machine E4 to play.

According to the gaming machine E4, when switching from the first effect to the second effect, the effect mode of the first effect being executed can be set to an effect mode in which the player is less interested. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play by switching from one effect to the second effect.

<Characteristic F group> (Continued execution of probabilistic promotion after the big hit)
The discrimination means capable of executing a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means for a predetermined period, and the dynamic display execution means dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. A privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and a setting after the end of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. A game having a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state that is advantageous to the player and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state as the game state to be played. The machine has at least a notification effect executing means capable of executing a notification effect capable of notifying that the second game state is set as an effect result during the execution of the privilege game, and the notification effect executing means The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that, when the privilege game in which the first game state is set ends after the end of the privilege game, the notification effect is executed until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. ..

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, after the end of the privilege game, it is possible to set either an advantageous game state in which it is easy to win or a disadvantageous game state in which it is difficult to win, and during the privilege game, after the end of the privilege game. It has been proposed to make a suggestion effect for suggesting a set gaming state feasible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200589). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to experience the enjoyment of acquiring benefits during the privilege game and the enjoyment of predicting the set game state at the same time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. rice field. However, if it can be determined that the game state set after the end of the privilege game is a disadvantageous game state by the suggestion effect executed during the privilege game, the motivation for the game after the end of the privilege game is reduced. There was a problem. Further, the rate at which the advantageous gaming state is set is predetermined depending on the type of the gaming machine. For example, in a gaming machine in which the rate at which the advantageous gaming state is set is set low, it is suggested that the game is executed during the privilege game. There is a problem that it becomes difficult to execute an effect suggesting that an advantageous gaming state is set in the effect, and the suggestion effect itself causes a decrease in the player's motivation to play. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by providing an effect capable of suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation to play the game.

According to the game machine F1, when the first game state is set for the notification effect executed during the execution of the privilege game by the notification effect execution means, a predetermined end condition is satisfied after the privilege game is completed. It will be executed until you do. As a result, the first game state is set after the end of the privilege game, and the second game state is set after the end of the privilege game during the first game state until the end condition is satisfied. Is executed, it is possible to set a notification mode for notifying that the second gaming state is set as the effect result of the notification effect. As a result, it is possible to increase the ratio of setting the notification mode for notifying that the second game state is set as the effect result of the notification effect, as compared with the case where the notification effect is executed only during the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can execute the notification effect with a sense of expectation and can improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine F1 has a measuring means capable of measuring the number of discriminating times of the discriminating means, and a measuring discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the discriminant number measured by the measuring means has reached a predetermined number of times. Is a gaming machine F2, which is established when it is determined by the measurement determining means that the number of times the first gaming state has been set has reached the predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, the ending condition is satisfied based on the number of times the discrimination means are discriminated. It is possible to execute the discrimination by. Therefore, as a result of the effect of the notification effect, there is an effect that the ratio of setting the notification mode for notifying that the second game state is set can be increased.

Based on the fact that the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode different from the specific display mode in the game machine F1 or F2, the game is played by the privilege game. From the first state when the special privilege game execution means that can execute the special privilege game that can grant the special privilege different from the privilege that can be given to the person and the privilege game or the special privilege game is executed. It has a variable means that can be changed to a second state, and the end condition is satisfied when the special privilege game is executed while the first game state is set. The gaming machine F3 featuring.

According to the gaming machine F3, since the end condition is satisfied when the special privilege game in which the variable means is variable is executed, the end condition is set for the player as if the privilege game was executed. It can be made to think that it was established. Therefore, it is possible to make the period until the end condition is satisfied to be considered as a privileged game, and there is an effect that the notification effect can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the notification effect executing means is a case where the privileged game in which the first game state is set is executed by the privileged game executing means by the time the end condition is satisfied. Is a gaming machine F4, characterized in that the notification effect is executed until the end condition is satisfied after the end of the privileged game.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F3, it is not possible to notify that the second game state is set while the notification effect is being executed. As long as the player wins, the notification effect can be continuously executed, so that it is difficult to execute the notification effect indicating that the second game state is not set as the effect result of the notification effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the ratio of the effect result of the notification effect to the notification result indicating that the second gaming state is set can be relatively increased.

In the game machines F1 to F4, when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the special game execution means capable of executing the special game for a predetermined period and the special game execution means are used to perform the special game. The special period setting means that can set the special period to be executed, the remaining period determining means that can determine the remaining period of the special period set by the special period setting means, and the special period determining means that can determine the remaining period. It has a special period notification means capable of notifying the remaining special period information for indicating the remaining period of the period, and the special period notification means notifies the remaining special period information when the end condition is satisfied. The gaming machine F5 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the following effects are played. That is, since the remaining period of the special period is notified after the end condition is satisfied and the notification effect is completed, the remaining period indicated by the remaining special period information can be changed according to the timing at which the end condition is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the length of the special period set when the first gaming state is set. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is difficult for the player to predict, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic G group> (Short-time rushing effect by winning a small hit during the time-saving state)
The discrimination means capable of executing a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means for a predetermined period, and the dynamic display execution means dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. A privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and a setting after the end of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. A game state setting means capable of setting at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state as the game state to be performed, and an effect capable of executing a predetermined effect. The effect executing means has an execution means, and when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the first notification condition is satisfied from the end of the privilege game until the first notification condition is satisfied. It is more difficult to execute the first effect when the second gaming state is set based on the fact that the first notification condition is satisfied than when the first gaming state is set. 2 A game machine G1 characterized in that it executes a production.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, after the end of the privilege game, one of the first game state, which is more advantageous than the normal state, and the second game state, which is more advantageous than the first game state, can be set for a predetermined period, and the privilege is set. It has been proposed to enable a suggestion effect for suggesting a gaming state set after the end of the privileged game during the game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-2000489). In such a gaming machine, when the first gaming state is set after the end of the privilege game, the gaming is performed for a predetermined period with the regret that the second gaming state is not set, and the privilege game is performed. There was a problem that the motivation to play after the game was reduced. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation to play the game.

According to the gaming machine G1, even if the first gaming state is set, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the first gaming state has been set until the first notification condition is satisfied, so that the privilege game ends. It is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being reduced later. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G1, a period setting means for setting a period in which the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, a remaining period determining means for determining the remaining period of the period set by the period setting means, and a remaining period determining means. The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that the second effect includes a notification mode for notifying the remaining period of the first gaming state at least when the first notification condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine G2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1. That is, since the remaining period of the first gaming state at the time when the first notification condition is satisfied is notified, the remaining period of the first gaming state at the time when the first gaming state is set, that is, it is set by the period setting means. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that the period of a larger number of types is set by the period setting means than the number of types actually set as the period of the first gaming state, so that it is various. It has the effect of being able to provide games.

In the gaming machines G1 or G2, it is possible to execute a special game in which a privilege different from the privilege game can be given to the player based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special display mode different from the specific display mode. When the special game is executed while the first effect is being executed by the suggestion effect execution means, the first notification condition is satisfied. The featured gaming machine G3.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1 or G2, the first notification condition is satisfied when the special game is executed. Therefore, the timing at which the first notification condition is satisfied depending on the determination result of the determination means. Can be different. Therefore, since the timing at which the second effect is executed can be set irregularly, it is possible to execute an effect that is difficult for the player to predict, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G3, when a predetermined opening condition is satisfied, the variable is changed from the first state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the gaming ball is easier to enter than the first state. Those having a ball-entry means, and when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, or when the special game is executed by the special game execution means, the predetermined opening condition can be satisfied. The gaming machine G4 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G3, when the privilege game or the special game is executed, the variable ball-entry means is changed to the second state, so that the special game is executed. When 1 notification condition is satisfied, it can be made to think that the second effect is executed based on the execution of the privilege game. Therefore, since the remaining period notified by the second effect can be regarded as the period (initial value) set by the period setting means, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the effect executing means executes an effect using at least a part of the effect modes of the privilege game effect executed during the privilege game as the first effect. A gaming machine G5 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the following effects are played. That is, since it is possible to make the player think that the period until the first notification condition is satisfied is during the privileged game, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing when the first game state is set, and the interest of the game. Has the effect of being able to improve. When using the configuration of the gaming machine G2, by making it difficult to understand the timing at which the first gaming state is set, it is easy for the player to know how long the first gaming state has been set this time. It has the effect of making it difficult to distinguish.

In any of the gaming machines G2 to G5, a remaining period condition determining means for determining whether the remaining period of the first gaming state at the time when the first notification condition is satisfied satisfies a predetermined remaining period condition, and the remaining period thereof. The period condition determining means includes a remaining period correction means for executing a predetermined correction process for the remaining period when it is determined that the remaining period condition is not satisfied, and the effect executing means is described as described above. The gaming machine G6 is characterized in that the notification mode included in the second effect is executed in place of the correction remaining period notification mode indicating the corrected remaining period corrected by the remaining period correction means.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G2 to G5, if the remaining period of the first gaming state at the time when the first notification condition is satisfied does not satisfy the remaining period condition, the remaining period remains. The remaining period is corrected by the period correction means, and the corrected remaining period notification mode indicating the corrected remaining period is executed as the second effect. As a result, when the value indicating the remaining period of the first gaming state is a halfway value, the corrected value after being corrected to an appropriate value can be notified to the player. Specifically, for example, when the period of the first gaming state is set based on the number of changes in the special figure, the value of the remaining period (number of changes in the special figure) at the time when the first notification condition is satisfied is If the last digit is not "0" or "5" (for example, "81"), the correction process is executed and the value of the remaining period is corrected to be "0" or "5" (for example). , "80"), the corrected value is notified to the player. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of a good value of sharpness, so that it is easy for the player to think that the timing at which the second effect is executed is the timing at which the first game state is set. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. The identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time, provided that the prize is won (or passed through the operating port). Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
S306 Discrimination means S2404 Bonus game execution means S2512 Game state setting means S4212 Suggestion effect execution means S5304 Dynamic display execution means

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, winning or failing of a game is drawn, and if the lottery result is a win, a privileged game that is advantageous to the player is executed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-217766

However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 tells the player based on the discrimination means capable of executing a predetermined discrimination and the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means becomes a specific discrimination result. A privileged game execution means capable of executing an advantageous privileged game, a first game state in which a predetermined benefit related to the game can be received by executing the first game, and the predetermined benefit rather than the first game. It has a second game state capable of executing a second game that is easily received, and a game state setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of game states including at least one, and the privilege game ends. By the end of the year, there is a specific effect starting means for starting a specific effect in which a specific mode capable of causing the player to understand that the second game state is set as an effect result can be displayed on the display means. At least a part of the modes displayed on the display means during the production are displayed on the display means at least during the period from the end of the privilege game in which the first game state is set until the predetermined end condition is satisfied. The gaming machine is configured to be displayed, and the gaming machine is a gaming period setting means capable of setting a gaming period of a predetermined game to be executed when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, and a game thereof. The remaining period notifying means has a remaining period notifying means capable of notifying a player of the remaining period information set by the period setting means so that the player can grasp the remaining period of the gaming period, and the remaining period notifying means has the predetermined remaining period. When the end condition is satisfied, the remaining period information can be notified.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a discriminating means capable of executing a predetermined discriminant and a privileged game advantageous to the player based on the result of the discriminating by the discriminating means becoming a specific discriminant result. A privileged game execution means capable of executing the above, a first game state in which a predetermined benefit can be received by executing the first game, and a first game in which the predetermined benefit is more likely to be received than the first game. It has a second game state in which two games can be executed, and a game state setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of game states including at least one, and the effect result is obtained by the end of the privilege game. It has a specific effect starting means for starting a specific effect in which a specific mode capable of causing the player to understand that the second game state is set can be displayed on the display means, and the display is performed during the specific effect. At least a part of the modes displayed on the means are displayed on the display means even during the period from the end of the privilege game in which the first game state is set until the predetermined end condition is satisfied. The gaming machine is configured by a gaming period setting means capable of setting a gaming period of a predetermined game to be executed when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, and a gaming period setting means thereof. The remaining period notifying means has a remaining period notifying means capable of notifying the player of the remaining period information capable of causing the player to grasp the remaining period of the gaming period, and the remaining period notifying means satisfies the predetermined end condition. In some cases, the remaining period information can be notified.

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the third symbol in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode displayed by a display device. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the button effect executed corresponding to each special symbol variation in 1st Embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow which the overlap button effect is executed as the button effect which is executed corresponding to each special symbol variation in 1st Embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the button effect period in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the button effect A is started on the display screen of the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents in the first embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content which is displayed when the button effect A is successful on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content which is displayed when the button effect A fails on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the button effect B is started on the display screen of the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents in the first embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content when the button effect B is finished on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when button effect C, which is a duplicate button effect, is started on the display screen of the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content when the button effect C which is a duplicate button effect ends on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which showed schematically the structure of various counters in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the ROM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table set in the ROM of. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 table set in the ROM, and (c) shows the contents of the special figure 2 table set in the ROM of the main control unit in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown schematically. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table set in the ROM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability change / time saving table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latent probability table set in the ROM of. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the general figure variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment. be. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the button effect selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the button effect hierarchy storage area set in the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surfaces B to D. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the back surface E. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation execution process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game number update process executed by the MPU in the control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation execution process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through-gate passage processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a variation start process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a variation start process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the holding ball number processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the state command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the hit-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot related processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 button effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the execution timing setting process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 button effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the button effect mode setting process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the button effect start processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the button effect update process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd frame button setting process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the button pressing process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the notification command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the hold effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the hold effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the normal 8 hold effect start screens displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 2nd Embodiment, and (b) is displayed by 3rd symbol display device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect result of the normal 8 hold effect. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a case where the super hold effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment is started, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the case where the third symbol display in the second embodiment is started. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content displayed at the end of the super hold effect displayed by the apparatus. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. It is a schematic diagram which showed the contents of the hold effect selection table which is configured in the ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the configuration of the staging layer storage area configured in the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the effect layer storage area configured in the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the contents of the set 1st staging hierarchy storage area 223 in a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the relationship between each hierarchical storage area and the set effect information. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a variation start process of FIG. 1 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure 1 variation start process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure 2 variation start process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the reserved ball number processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special hold effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the effect mode setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the related effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the button pressing process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the effect level selection process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a battle effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the third embodiment, and (b) is displayed by the third symbol display device in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the case of winning in a battle production. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a case where the battle effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the third embodiment is defeated, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the case where the third symbol display device in the third embodiment is defeated. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the case where the rematch is caused by the battle production displayed by. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a case where the battle effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the third embodiment is on the verge of defeat, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the case where the third symbol in the third embodiment is on the verge of defeat. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the case where the battle effect displayed on the display device is completed and the time saving state is notified. It is a schematic diagram which showed the structure of the ROM of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the 1st big hit random number 2 table set in the ROM of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of FIG. 2, and (c) is the special figure 2 jackpot type set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of a selection table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change start process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows 1st special symbol change start processing 3 executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the state command reception process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the battle effect update process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure variation start processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot start processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st modification. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device in the first modification, and (b) is an example of the variation effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the first modification. It is a schematic diagram shown. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the variation effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st modification. (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of a multi-reach effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the second modification. (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of a multi-reach effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the second modification. (A) and (b) are schematic views schematically showing the configuration of the ball entry unit. (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of a multi-reach effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the third modification. (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the third modification. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit end process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd modification. It is a flowchart which showed the battle effect update process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd modification. It is a flowchart which showed the number of times correction effect executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd modification. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure variation start process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd modification. It is a flowchart which showed the correction number correspondence processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd modification. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability change / time saving table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 4th modification.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 91, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having entry ports 63, 64b1, 64b 2, 640 and the like into which a large number of nails and balls can enter is detachably attached to the inner frame 12. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front area (game area) of the game board 13, and a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a in the front area of the game board 13. A launch rail (not shown) that guides the aircraft to is installed. The contents of a large number of entrances provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 9) by the inclination.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

Further, the lower plate unit 50 is provided with a first frame button 22a and a second frame button 22b as operating means that can be operated by the player. The first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b (hereinafter, referred to as a frame button 22 when both frame buttons are shown) are displayed by, for example, the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). It is operated by the player when changing the stage of the production to be performed or changing the production content of the super reach. In the present embodiment, the effect (button effect) is set so that the operation frequency of the first frame button 22a is higher than that of the second frame button 22b. The first frame button 22a, which is frequently operated, is arranged on the left side of the second frame button 22b in the front view of FIG. As a result, in the button effect executed while the player is operating the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the first frame button 22a, which is easy to be operated, can be easily operated with the left hand, so that the button effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the player from stopping the operation (launching game) on the operation handle 51 and reducing the operation of the game each time.

Although a detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, the second frame button 22b is likely to be an operation target in the button effect executed when a result (for example, a big hit) advantageous to the player is notified. It is configured to be. As a result, only the button effect targeting the second frame button 22b is executed, that is, the player is expected to win the jackpot even before the operation is performed on the second frame button 22b. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second frame button 22b is arranged at a substantially central position of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the button effect for the second frame button 22b is executed, the player can be enthusiastic to operate the second frame button 22b (for example, a pressing operation using both hands). can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the first frame button 22a, which is frequently operated, is configured to be smaller than the second frame button 22b. Specifically, the first frame button 22a has a radius of 3 cm and is the first. The two-frame button 22b is formed in a cylindrical shape with a radius of 6 cm. As a result, it is possible to make the second frame button 22b, which has a low operation frequency (a privilege is easily given to the player when operated), stand out.

In the present embodiment, the size of the frame button 22 is made different so that the second frame button 22b is more conspicuous than the first frame button 22a, but the player is second in the button production. The second frame button 22b may be configured to stand out more than the first frame button 22a at the timing of operating the frame button 22b. For example, the second frame button 22b may be configured to operate variably. When the button effect is executed, the variable operation of projecting the second frame button 22b upward (upward from the viewpoint of FIG. 1) may be executed. In this case, when the button effect is not executed, the first frame button 22a may be configured to stand out more than the second frame button 22b. As a result, when the button effect is executed, the effect that the second frame button 22b suddenly appears can be executed, so that the player can be provided with an unexpected game.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and general inserts. Ball opening 63, ball entry unit 64 (first entry port 64b1, left second entry opening 64b2), second entry opening 640, variable winning device 65, normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, variable display device The unit 80 and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general ball entry port 63, the ball entry unit 64 (first ball entry port 64b1, left second ball entry port 64b2), second ball entry port 640, variable winning device 65, and variable display device unit 80 are based on router processing. It is arranged in a through hole formed in the plate 60, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

A first symbol display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the return rubber 69. The first symbol display device 37 is arranged so as to be covered with the back surface (the surface opposite to the surface forming the game region) of the game board 13 made of transparent resin (for example, ABS). It is configured so that the fired ball does not collide with the first symbol display device 37.

The first symbol display device 37 is provided with first symbol display devices 37a and 37b including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b enter the ball into the first ball entry port 64b1 (winning), the left second ball entry port 64b2, or the second ball entry port 640. It is configured so that it can be used properly according to whether it is a ball (winning). Specifically, when the ball enters (wins) the first entry slot 64b1, the first symbol display device 37a operates, while the ball enters the left second entry opening 64b2 or When a ball is entered (winning) in the second entrance 640, the first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate. That is, the first symbol display device 37a is a display means for showing the lottery result of the lottery (special figure 1 lottery) executed when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64b1 and displays the first symbol. The device 37b is a display means for showing the lottery result of the lottery (special figure 2 lottery) executed when the ball enters the left second entry port 64b2 or the second entry opening 640.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate which of the gaming states (probability change state, latent probability state, normal state, etc.) of the pachinko machine 10 is, depending on the lighting state, or the first symbol fluctuates. Whether or not it is medium (during dynamic display to stop and display the combination of symbols to show the lottery result) is indicated by the lighting state, and the stopped symbol corresponds to the jackpot that is advantageous to the player or is disadvantageous. Whether the symbol corresponds to the jackpot or the symbol is off is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds during the jackpot and the error are displayed by the 7-segment display device. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. In the present embodiment, various gaming states are notified by a combination of emission colors of the light emitting means (7-segment display device), but any configuration is sufficient as long as the player can identify various gaming states. For example, various gaming states may be notified by varying the length (blinking mode) of the period in which the light emitting means is lit and the period in which the light emitting means is turned off.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery (special symbol lottery) is triggered by the fact that there is a ball entry (winning) in the first entry slot 64b1, the left second entry opening 64b2, and the second entry opening 640. Is done. Then, in the lottery of the special symbol, the winning / failing determination (big hit lottery) of whether or not it is a big hit is performed. Here, based on the determination that the jackpot has been won, the jackpot game that is in a privileged gaming state advantageous to the player is executed.

When the jackpot game is executed, the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is in an open state where the ball can be easily won, and by making the specific winning opening 65a win the ball, many prize balls are awarded for a short period of time. The jackpot game that can be obtained at is executed. During this jackpot game, the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and is executed. The ball is inserted into the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 for the opening period (for example, 1 second). A predetermined period (for example, a period in which a closed state is set in which it is difficult to enter a ball), a round game period in which an open state is set, and a predetermined period until the next round game is started after the end of one round game period (for example). , 0.5 seconds), an interval period in which the closed state is set, and an ending period in which the closed state is set for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the end of the last round game period. The period is set.

In this way, after the lottery result of the special symbol indicating the jackpot winning is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the opening period is set, so that the ball is set at the timing when each winning opening is opened during the jackpot game. Since it is possible to prepare for firing in any direction, the jackpot game can be smoothly performed. Further, since this opening period can be used as a period for notifying the player of the game content of the jackpot game this time, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, by setting the ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent the lottery of a new special symbol from being executed immediately after the end of the last round game, so that after the end of the jackpot game. Since it is possible to prepare for launching the ball in any direction toward the game to be executed, it is possible to smoothly switch the game.

Furthermore, if it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot lottery, the type of jackpot is also determined. A detailed explanation will be given later, but as the type of jackpot to be determined, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 16 rounds, and a probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is given after the jackpot game is completed. 16R probability variation jackpot, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 4 rounds, and the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is given after the jackpot game ends. 4R probability variation jackpot, jackpot game round. There are 4 rounds of 4 rounds, and a 4R time-saving jackpot is prepared in which a time-saving state (low-probability state of a special symbol, high-probability state of a normal symbol) is given after the jackpot game is completed.

That is, in the present embodiment, the 16R probability variable jackpot is the most advantageous privilege for the player (the number of prize balls that can be given during the jackpot game is the largest, and the gaming state set after the jackpot game is completed is the most advantageous for the player. ) Is given, and then the degree of advantage decreases in the order of 4R probability variation jackpot and 4R time saving jackpot. In this way, even when a big hit is won in the special drawing lottery, the degree of advantage of the privilege given to the player can be changed according to the type of the big hit to be set. You can be interested not only in whether or not you have won a big hit, but also in the type of big hit that is set when you win a big hit.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery is configured to determine two types of lottery results, that is, a jackpot and a missed lottery, but the lottery result is not limited to the above-mentioned jackpot. In some cases where it is determined to be out of order, there are fewer benefits given to the player than the above-mentioned jackpot (for example, a benefit of opening the variable winning device 65 for only one round), even if a small hit can be determined. good. As a result, the amount of benefits given to the player can be diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation (whether or not it is a small hit in a pachinko machine capable of determining a small hit). If it is a big hit, the design according to the big hit type is shown.

In the present embodiment, any of a "normal state", a "time saving state", and a "probability changing state" is set as the gaming state (see FIG. 16). In the normal state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to a low probability (1/250), and the hit probability of the normal symbol is set to a low probability (11/233) (hereinafter, special symbol: low probability state, Normal symbol: called low probability state), and in the time saving state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to low probability (1/250), and the hit probability of the normal symbol is set to high probability (232/233). In the gaming state (hereinafter referred to as special symbol: low probability state, normal symbol: high probability state), in the probability variation state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to high probability (1/50), and the hit probability of the normal symbol is set. Is a gaming state set to a high probability (232/233) (hereinafter, referred to as a special symbol: a high probability state and a normal symbol: a high probability state).

Here, the high probability state of the special symbol is a state in which the probability of becoming a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol is higher than the low probability state as described above, and in the present embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is set. Then, it is stipulated that the jackpot probability of the special figure 1 lottery and the jackpot probability of the special figure 2 lottery have the same high probability value (1/50). Not limited to this, for example, it may be specified that a high probability value is set only for the jackpot probability of the special figure 1 lottery, or a high probability value is set only for the jackpot probability of the special figure 2 lottery. , The high probability value when the high probability state of the special symbol is set may be specified differently between the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery.

Next, the high-probability state of the normal symbol is a state in which the hit probability of the normal symbol is higher than that of the low-probability state. When a winning game is won in a normal symbol lottery (normal pattern lottery), the electric accessory 640a is opened as a winning game, and the ball is easily entered into the second entrance 640.

Further, although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the present embodiment, a big hit is won in the lottery of special figure 1 (first special symbol) and a big hit is won in the lottery of special figure 2 (second special symbol). The setting ratio of the jackpot type is set differently depending on the case and the jackpot, and if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special figure 2 rather than the lottery of the special figure 1, the player is given a privilege that is advantageous to the jackpot. It is configured so that the type (for example, 16R probability variation jackpot) can be easily set. With this configuration, the special figure 2 lottery is more advantageous to the player than the special figure 1 lottery, and the special figure 2 lottery is more likely to be executed for the player. It is possible to have the player play the game while expecting that the time saving state (probability change state) is set.

In this embodiment, in order to make it easier for the ball to enter the second entry port 640 during the high-probability state of the normal symbol (high-probability state of the normal symbol), the low-probability medium state of the normal symbol is in progress. On the other hand, the first mode in which the hit probability of the normal symbol is high, the second mode in which the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for one hit game are increased, and the fluctuation time of the second symbol are short. Although it is configured to execute the third aspect that makes it easy to set the fluctuation time, the ball enters the second entrance 640 in the high probability state of the normal symbol than in the low probability state of the normal symbol. It suffices if it is configured so as to be in an easy-to-use state, and it may be configured to set at least one aspect out of the above-mentioned three aspects. Further, if the high-probability state of the normal symbol is configured so that the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640 than the low-probability state of the normal symbol, among the above-mentioned three modes. In any mode, the high probability state of the normal symbol may be configured so that the ball is less likely to enter the second entry port 640 than the low probability state of the normal symbol.

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. A game area on which the fired ball can flow down is formed on the surface of the game board 13, and the game area is partitioned by the variable display unit 80. Specifically, it was divided into a left gaming area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80 and a right gaming area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80, and fired at a predetermined first firing intensity. The ball flows down the left game area, and the ball fired at the second firing intensity, which is stronger than the first firing intensity, flows down the right game area. Hereinafter, the game in which the operation handle 51 is operated so that the fired ball flows down the left game area is referred to as a left-handed game (normal game), and the operation handle is used so that the fired ball flows down the right game area. The game of operating 51 is referred to as a right-handed game and will be described.

In the left game area, a general entry port 63 is provided in which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b triggered by the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64b1, the left second entry opening 64b2, and the second entry opening 640. To the third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays the fluctuation of the third symbol while synchronizing with the fluctuation display in the above, and to the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. There is provided with a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variablely display the second symbol triggered by the passage of the sphere. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 15 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment displays the gaming state according to the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37a and 37b. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device displays a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. It is a variable display that lights up alternately for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is predetermined. It is configured to be in the operating state (open state) for a period of time.

The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is attached to the game board 13 in the right game area, and among the balls launched on the game board, a part (about 50%) of the balls flowing down the right area can pass through. It is configured in. When the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is reserved up to a total of 4 times, and the number of reserved balls (normal symbol reserved number) is displayed on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). To. There are four second symbol hold lamps for the maximum number of hold lamps.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You may. Further, the number of assembly of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side (right game area) of the variable display device unit 80, and is also, for example, the left side (left game area) of the variable display device unit 80. good. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

As shown in FIG. 2, a lower game area in which the left game area and the right game area communicate with each other is formed below the variable display device unit 80, and a ball enters the substantially central portion of the lower game area. A possible ball entry unit 64 is arranged. The detailed configuration of the ball entry unit 64 will be described later, but the inside of the ball entry unit 64 can be entered through a first entry port 64b1, a left second entry port 64b2, and an opening through which a ball can enter. A distribution means for alternately distributing the ball to the first ball entry port 64b1 and the left second ball entry port 64b2 is provided internally.

When a ball enters the first entry port 64b1, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main cause is that the first entry opening switch is turned on. A big hit lottery (special drawing 1 lottery) is performed by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37a. Further, when the ball enters the left second entry port 64b2, the second entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by the on of the second entry opening switch. Then, a big hit lottery (special drawing 2 lottery) is performed by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37b.

In the present embodiment, the ball entry unit 64 is arranged in the substantially central portion of the lower game area, but the ball that plays the left-handed game and flows down the left game area plays the right-handed game and is on the right. It is configured so that it is easier to enter the opening of the entry unit 64 than the ball flowing down the game area. Specifically, the route from the left game area to the entry unit 64 via the lower game area by the game nail (ball guiding member) planted in the game board 13 is from the right game area to the lower game area. It is configured so that the ball can flow down more easily than the path facing the ball entry unit 64.

Therefore, in the normal state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set and the electric accessory 640a is difficult to open, the left-handed game is an appropriate game method. By defining an appropriate game method in this way, when it is determined that a right-handed game has been performed during a normal state (a region where only a ball flowing down the right region can pass (for example, a through gate 67)). When it is determined that the ball has passed), it is possible to notify the player that a game different from the proper game method is being performed.

Next, the configuration of the right game area will be described with reference to FIG. The above-mentioned through gate 67 is arranged in the right game area, and a second ball entry port 640 and an electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 are arranged on the downstream side thereof. .. Since the right game area is an area where the ball launched by the left-handed game and flowing down the left game area cannot flow down, the ball does not reach the through gate 67 or the second entrance 640 by the left-handed game. .. As a result, the ball passes through the through gate 67 in the right game area or the ball enters the second entrance 640 even though the left-handed game, which is an appropriate game method, is performed during the normal state. It is possible to suppress the situation of entering the ball. Therefore, it is erroneously determined that an inappropriate game method (a game method in which a right-handed game is performed in a normal state) is performed for a player who is playing a game with an appropriate game method, and the game method is changed. It is possible to solve the problem that the notification for making the player is executed and the motivation for playing is reduced.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the second entrance 640 (a part of the lower gaming area). This variable winning device 65 is opened during the jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in the special drawing lottery, and the number of balls paid out when one ball wins (the number of prize balls). Is configured to be 15.

Here, in the present embodiment, the right-handed game is configured to make it easier for the ball to reach the variable winning device 65 than the left-handed game, and the game state is advantageous to the player (time saving state, probability change). In addition to the state), it is configured to execute the right-handed game even during the jackpot game. As a result, when the game in the game state advantageous to the player and the jackpot game are alternately executed, it is only necessary to continue the same game method (right-handed game), and the game method is provided to the player. It is possible to eliminate the need for complicated changes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device by the MPU 201. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the first frame button 22a, the second frame button 22b, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes various drive motors for operating the driving accessory for the effect provided in the pachinko machine 10.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b, and when the player operates the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b, the third frame button 22b is operated. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed by the symbol display device 81 or change the effect content at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

When the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b are operated by the player, a character driving command may be transmitted to another device 228 in order to drive a character for effect (not shown), or a first. Set a voice output command to output the voice corresponding to the operation contents to the frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b to the voice output device 226, and display the lamp in a light emitting mode corresponding to the operation contents to the frame button 22. It may be configured to set a lamp output command for causing the device 227 to emit light.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 such as the variation effect of the third symbol is produced. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 4). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7 (a). 5 (a) and 5 (b) are schematic views schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol rows (upper, middle, and lower) ( L1 to L3) are displayed (see FIG. 5A). The third symbol (decorative symbol that fluctuates according to the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2)) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is Each is composed of 10 types of main symbols with identification information imitating the numbers "0" to "9".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the main symbol is formed by using different types of characters (animals and the like) for each identification information imitating numbers. In this way, by using the character corresponding to each identification information, it is possible to visually notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol, so that the player can play an easy-to-understand game. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777"), and the variable display is performed, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after the game is over. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3 are displayed, which are upper, middle, and lower, respectively. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and the symbol rows L1 to L3 are periodically scrolled in the left-right direction to perform variable display.

Specifically, the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 are configured so that the symbol rows are formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from right to left, and are scrolled from right to left and displayed in a variable manner. The lower symbol sequence L3 is configured such that the symbol sequence is formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from left to right, and the numbers are scrolled from right to left and displayed in a variable manner. Further, in each symbol row, a sub symbol (blank symbol) that does not show the lottery result of the special symbol is formed between the main symbols.

Then, as shown in FIG. 5A, the main display area Dm has three effective lines V1 to V3 formed in the vertical direction and two effective lines V4 and V5 formed in the diagonal direction. With each symbol row L1 to L3 stopped and displayed, the third symbol is stopped together on the effective line with a combination of jackpot symbols (in the first embodiment, the same combination of main symbols). For example, a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 5A, in the first embodiment, since each effective line (V1 to V5) is formed so as to include the symbol display position of each symbol row L1 to L3, the third symbol Until all of the symbol rows L1 to L3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the display device 81 are stopped and displayed, the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol can be obscured. Therefore, it is possible to be interested in the variable display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm until the last symbol row (in the present embodiment, the middle symbol row L2) is stopped and displayed.

The mode of variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol. The number of symbols in the column can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbol that is variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and a symbol that combines an image such as a figure or a character and a number may be configured as the third symbol. Further, the area in which the third symbol is variablely displayed may be varied. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol may be changed. By making the size smaller or moving the variable display area to a position that is difficult for the player to see (for example, the corner of the display screen), it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the third symbol is changed. You may try to do it. Further, during the period in which the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol are the same (to the extent that it is difficult for the player to identify). However, the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be different so as to correspond to the type of special symbol that is changing.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 5 (b). As shown in FIG. 5B, small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are formed in the upper right of the front view in the main display area Dm. The small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are areas in which identification information (fourth symbol) for showing the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result) is displayed. The fourth symbol (special figure 1 fourth symbol) for showing the lottery status of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and the lottery status of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is displayed. The fourth symbol (special figure 2 fourth symbol) for indicating the above is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm2.

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the lottery status of the special symbol in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed at the same time. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is shown in a display mode using numbers, and the fourth symbol is variablely displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2. (See FIG. 9A), the situation where the special symbol is fluctuating is shown, and the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by stopping and displaying the fourth symbol in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see FIG. 10). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a display mode that imitates a figure as a fourth symbol, a display mode that shows a plurality of colors, a display mode that deforms the figure, and a variable color are used. It may be configured to show the lottery result of the special symbol by showing that the special symbol is changed depending on the display mode to be made, and by stopping and displaying the display mode showing a specific symbol or color.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is in the lottery (changing). Further, as shown in FIG. 5B, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) in which the fourth symbol for showing the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is mainly displayed. An example of forming the fourth symbol display area on the upper right side of the area Dm is shown, but the position and size of the fourth symbol display area are determined according to the effect mode of the variable effect executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. You may make it different.

With such a configuration, the area in which the variation effect is executed is limited by the fourth symbol display area, and it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered. In this case, the fourth symbol display area is deleted from the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the variable display of the fourth symbol is displayed by using the light emitting means (LED or the like) provided in the variable display device unit 80. It is good to configure it to execute.

Further, a small display area Dm1a is formed in the vicinity (left side) of the small display area Dm1, and a display mode showing the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is displayed. Further, a small display area Dm2a is formed in the vicinity (left side) of the small display area Dm2, and a display mode showing the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is displayed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9 (a) described later, in the reserved number display area (small display area Dm1a, Dm1b), the number of reserved balls of each special figure is displayed in a numerical display mode. Although it is configured to be displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to display a display mode using a color or a symbol so that the number of reserved balls in the acquired figure can be identified.

A small display area Dm3 is formed in the upper left of the front view in the main display area Dm. In this small display area Dm3, a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is launched (game direction) is displayed (see FIG. 5B).

In this embodiment, the small display area Dm3 is used as the guide display area. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp to which area of the gaming board the ball should be fired by simply visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In this guidance display area (small display area Dm3), a "right-handed" display mode for guiding the player to perform a right-handed game and a left-handed game to be performed by the player are performed. The display mode of "left-handed" for guiding that is displayed, and the display mode of "right-handed" is a gaming state in which the right-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, It is displayed during the time saving state, the probability change state, and the jackpot game, and the display mode of "left-handed" is configured to be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the right-handed game is completed. There is. Further, even when it is detected that the left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, the right-handed game is being executed during the normal state, the "left-handed" is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). It is configured so that the display mode is displayed.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 5 (b). Small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a are formed on the left side of the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1 and Dm2). The small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a are areas in which the reserved number display mode for indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol is displayed, and the small display area Dm1a is the area where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (reserved) is displayed. The special figure 1 hold information for showing the number of stored balls) is displayed, and the special figure 2 hold information for showing the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm2a.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a, in addition to the value for indicating the number of reserved balls of the corresponding special symbol, the result of preliminarily determining the winning information stored in the holding (pre-reading result) is obtained. It is configured to display a display mode capable of suggesting and notifying the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player play the game while having expectations for the game to be executed in the future (the lottery result of the special symbol stored on hold).

Further, a sub-display region Ds is formed below the main display region Dm. As shown in FIG. 9A, the sub-display area Ds is configured to display a comment for the content of the game being executed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game. The sub-display area Ds may be used for another purpose. For example, information for indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol shown in the small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a may be displayed in the sub-display area Ds. It may be configured.

In this case, for example, the sub-display area Ds may be configured to display a hold display mode (for example, a hold symbol display mode consisting of a circle) for individually indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol. Then, it is preferable to configure the player so that the number of reserved balls of the current special symbol can be grasped by the number of displayed holding display modes. Further, it is preferable to determine in advance the winning information corresponding to each special symbol stored on hold, and to change the corresponding hold display mode based on the determination result.

With this configuration, the game is played with the expectation that a big hit will be won in the lottery of the special symbols corresponding to the reserved symbols whose display mode is changed among the reserved symbols that may exist in a plurality. Can be made. Further, unlike the present embodiment, since it is configured to display the reserved symbols corresponding to the individual reserved storage numbers, the display mode for showing the game result that may be advantageous to the player among the plurality of reserved symbols. It is possible to set the result display to easily display the variable reserved symbol display.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition, the game result suggestion mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player and the content of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm are shown. An effect explanation mode for explaining, a frame button-related display mode for showing the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the operation result, and a hit-related information display mode for displaying information about the jackpot game are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. It is configured to be displayed, and the ratio of the display area between the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds is set to be different depending on the content to be displayed in the sub display area Ds.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbol displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the deviation and the holding ball exists, the third symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the display mode indicating that the lottery result is out. After that, the confirmation is displayed, and then the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the state where the reserved ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. In this state, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, or a new ball enters the first ball entry port 64b1, the left second ball entry port 64b2, or the second ball entry port 640. Continue until you do. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demo effect indicating that the game has not been executed is displayed. Despite the fact that the player continuously shoots the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the first ball entry port 64b1, the left second entry port 64b2, and the second entry port 640 The situation where there is no entry is rare, and in many cases where the third symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the player quits the game and the pachinko machine 10 is used. This is due to the fact that no game is being played.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. As a result, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demo effect. On the other hand, when a new ball enters any of the first ball entry port 64b1, the left second ball entry port 64b2, and the second ball entry port 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. Is executed to display the variation of the third symbol corresponding to the new ball entry.

<Regarding the content of the production in the first embodiment>
Next, the contents of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 12. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured with a game specification (so-called simultaneous fluctuation machine) in which special figure 1 and special figure 2 execute a special figure lottery in parallel, and further, a ball is played during a normal state. The incoming ball unit 64 to be made to flow in is arranged so that the ball enters the first ball entry port 64b1 which is the lottery trigger of the special figure 1 and the left second ball entry port 640 which is the lottery trigger of the special figure 2 alternately. It is configured in. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the third symbol display device 81 has a variable display effect of the third symbol for showing the result of the special figure 1 lottery and a third symbol display effect for showing the result of the special figure 2 lottery. If the variable display effect of the symbols is executed at the same time, there is a problem that the variable display of a plurality of third symbols is mixed and the lottery result of each special symbol becomes difficult to understand. Further, since it is necessary to divide the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, which is a limited area, to execute variable display of the third symbol corresponding to each special symbol, the third symbol corresponding to each special symbol needs to be executed. There is a problem that the display area of the player becomes small and a variable display that is difficult for the player to understand is executed.

In addition, if the variable display effect of the third symbol showing the result of the special figure 1 lottery and the variable display effect of the third symbol showing the result of the special figure 2 lottery are executed at the same time, for example, each variable display is executed. It is possible to execute an effect (button effect) that causes the player to operate the frame button 22 (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) in the effect, and the variation of the third symbol showing the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Execution timing of the button effect (special figure 1 button effect) executed as the display effect and execution of the button effect (special figure 2 button effect) executed as the variable display effect of the third symbol showing the result of the special figure 2 lottery. When the timing and the timing overlap, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp which button effect the frame button 22 is operated on, and there is a problem that the effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed.

Further, in the simultaneous variable machine in which the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery are executed independently (in parallel) as in the present embodiment, the special figure 1 button effect and the special figure 2 button effect are executed in duplicate. If you try to limit it so that it is not done, since the fluctuation start timing of each special figure is indefinite, a period (prohibited period) in which the button effect cannot be set (executed) more than necessary is set, and the button effect is set. There was a problem that it became difficult to execute.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, among the plurality of special symbols on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, only the third symbol showing the lottery result of one of the special symbols ((special diagram 1) main variable symbol) is shown. It is configured to display fluctuations (main fluctuation display). As a result, the third symbol showing the lottery result of the main variable symbol can be variablely displayed using the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can easily understand the variable display effect. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the other special symbol ((special diagram 2) sub-variable symbol) that is not variablely displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit, the third symbol is displayed. It is configured to switch the target of the third symbol that is variablely displayed on the display screen of the device 81. As a result, even though the third symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 is being displayed in a variable manner), the game is suddenly executed based on the jackpot game (the jackpot was won in the special figure 2 lottery). It is possible to prevent the big hit game) from being executed.

In addition, if the button effect is executed as the variable display effect corresponding to the jackpot winning of the special figure 2 while the button effect is being executed by the variable display effect corresponding to the special figure 1, each special feature is executed. It is configured to execute a special button effect that fuses the button effect executed for the figure. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an effect that is difficult to understand because the plurality of button effects are duplicated and executed individually. Further, by executing the special button effect, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 can be switched to the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. can.

In the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the sub-variable symbol that is not variable-displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit, the target of the third symbol is switched from the main variable symbol to the sub-variable symbol. However, the fluctuation time is not limited to this, and is a part of the deviation fluctuation set when the lottery result of the sub-variation symbol is deviation (for example, the same fluctuation time as the fluctuation time selected at the time of winning the jackpot). It is preferable to configure the process to switch the target of the third symbol from the main fluctuation symbol to the sub fluctuation symbol even in the case of the deviation variation in which is set. As a result, when the effect of switching the target of the third symbol from the main variable symbol to the sub variable symbol (for example, a special button effect) is executed, the third symbol display device 81 is expected to win the jackpot. You can be interested in the variable display effect performed on the display screen of.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7, each special figure variation in the present embodiment and the content of the effect to be executed will be described. In FIG. 6, the button effect (button effect A) is different from the variable display effect of the special figure 1 (main variable symbol) and the button effect (button effect B) is used as the variable display effect of the special figure 2 (sub-variable symbol). It is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect when it is executed at the timing, and FIG. 7 shows a button effect (button effect A) and a special figure 2 (sub-variation) as the variation display effect of the special figure 1 (main variation symbol). It is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect when the button effect (button effect B) and the button effect (button effect B) are executed at overlapping timings as the variable display effect of the symbol).

Here, first, the specific flow of the button effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a timing chart showing the flow of the button effect. As shown in FIG. 8, during the effect period (button effect period) in which the button effect for causing the player to operate the operation means is executed, the player is enabled to operate the frame button 22 (operation means). The preparation period t1 for notifying that, the execution period t2 in which the operation for the frame button 22 (operating means) is effectively determined (the player can operate the frame button 22), and the frame button 22 during the execution period. It is formed from the result notification period t3, in which the effect based on the operation result is executed. Further, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the execution period, the operation period t4 for notifying that the frame button 22 is operated is set.

During the preparation period t1, a display mode for explaining the effect content displayed during the execution period is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, for example, when the effect shown in FIG. 9A is executed during the execution period, the comment "The effect of waking up the sleeping rabbit will start" is displayed and the operation is performed. The button 812 imitating the first frame button 22a is displayed without displaying the validity period gauge 812a indicating the validity period. As a result, the content of the effect to be executed later is notified to the player, and the player is notified in advance that the effect to be executed later is the button effect for operating the first frame button 22a.

By providing this preparation period t1, the player can be prepared to operate the frame button 22 (operating means), and the frame button 22 (operating means) can be smoothly operated during the execution period t2. be able to.

During the execution period t2, an effect for encouraging the player to operate the frame button 22 (operation means) is executed (see FIG. 9A). Here, with reference to FIG. 9A, the contents of the effect executed during the execution period t2 of the button effect will be described. FIG. 9A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect content executed during the execution period t2 of the button effect.

As shown in FIG. 9A, when the execution period t2 of the button effect (button effect A) is set, the character 811 imitating a rabbit is displayed in the main display area Dm in a display mode in which it is sleeping, and is displayed as a sub-display. In the area Ds, a comment of "wake up" for explaining the effect content (game content) of the button effect this time is displayed. Then, a button 812 imitating the first frame button 22a, which is the operation target of the button effect this time, and an validity period gauge 812a indicating the operation validity period t5 of the first frame button 22a are displayed.

The validity period gauge 812a indicates the entire length of the set operation validity period t5 by the length of the outer frame (rectangle), and the remaining period mode (FIG.) for indicating the remaining period of the operation validity period t5. The aspect shown by the diagonal line in 9 (a)) is variably displayed so that the display area of the remaining period aspect decreases from right to left. As a result, in the valid period gauge 812a, the display area in which the remaining period mode is not displayed (the mode shown by a blank in FIG. 9A) indicates the elapsed period of the operation valid period t5. Can be.

In this way, by displaying the length of the remaining period of the operation valid period t5 relative to the total length of the operation valid period t5, the remaining period of the operation valid period t5 is specifically shown in time. Even if it is not, it can be grasped by the player. Further, even when a different operation valid period t5 is set, it is set only by keeping the length of the outer frame (rectangle) of the valid period gauge 812a constant and changing the speed at which the remaining period mode is variably displayed. The operation valid period t5 can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the present embodiment, the validity period gauge 812a described above is used to notify the player of the operation validity period t5 in the button effect, but the operation is not limited to this, and is, for example, an operation to be set. The length of the valid period t5 and the remaining period of the operation valid period t5 may be notified by a specific numerical value (for example, the number of seconds). Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the display mode of the validity period gauge 812a is linearly formed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the validity period gauge 812a is formed in a circular shape, and the remaining period gauge 812a is the remaining period gauge 812a. May be configured to be variably displayed clockwise, and may be configured to indicate that the operation valid period t5 ends when the remaining period mode goes around the valid period gauge 812a. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it relatively easy to grasp the remaining period with respect to the set operation valid period t5, and it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, the start position where the remaining period mode is variably displayed (for example, the position indicating 12 o'clock of the valid period gauge 812a formed in a circle) and the end position where the remaining period mode is variably displayed (for example, formed in a circle). Since the position (position indicating 12 o'clock) of the valid period gauge 812a can be made the same, the effect pattern for one round of variable display in which the operation valid period t5 is the remaining period mode and the effect pattern for two rounds of variable display By providing the above, it is possible to set an unexpected effect for the player.

Returning to FIG. 8, the explanation will be continued. It is shown that when the player operates the first frame button 22a to be operated this time during the execution period t2 in which the effect illustrated in FIG. 9A is executed, the first frame button 22a is pressed. The operation period t4 at which the effect for the purpose is executed is set. During this operation period t4, the display mode of the button 812 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device is thinner than the display mode after pressing (the display mode shown in FIG. 9A). Display mode).

In this way, by setting the operation period t4 and configuring the display mode to be displayed after pressing, the operating means (first frame button 22a) that is the operation target of the button effect this time is operated by the player. It is possible to reliably notify that (pressed) has been performed. As a notification mode for notifying the player that the operation target to be operated has been operated, a configuration other than the above-mentioned configuration for displaying the display mode after pressing may be used, for example, a voice output device. The operation means (frame button 22) may be configured to output a pressing sound for indicating that the operation means (frame button 22) has been operated (pressed) from 226, or the operation means (frame button 22) may be provided with a light emitting means to emit light. It may be configured so that it can be determined whether or not the operation has been completed depending on the light emitting mode (light emitting color) of the means.

Further, in addition to the above-described configuration, when an operation means (second frame button 22b) different from the operation means (first frame button 22a) that is the operation target of the button effect this time is operated during the execution period, It may be configured to execute an alert notification to indicate that the operated operating means is not an operation target. As a result, in a gaming machine having a plurality of operating means, when a player operates an erroneous operating means, proper operation can be guided in an easy-to-understand manner.

When the execution period t2 of the button effect period ends, the result notification period t3 at which the effect based on the operation result during the execution period is executed is set. Here, with reference to FIGS. 9 (b) and 10, the contents of the effect executed during the result notification period t3 will be described. FIG. 9B shows an operation condition (for example, pressing the first frame button 22a twice during the execution period t2) as an example of the effect content displayed during the button effect result notification period t3. ) Is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode when the above is satisfied, and FIG. 10 shows an operation condition (for example, execution) during the execution period t2 as an example of the effect content displayed during the button effect result notification period t3. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode in the case where the first frame button 22a is pressed twice during the period t2).

As shown in FIG. 9B, when the operation condition is satisfied during the execution period t2, the character 811 sleeping during the execution period t2 gets up, and a comment of "SP reach" suggesting an effect mode to be executed later is made. Is displayed. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "success" indicating that the operation for the first frame button 22a during the execution period t2 was appropriate is displayed.

On the other hand, if the operation condition is not satisfied during the execution period t2, for example, if the player does not operate the first frame button 22a during the execution period t2, the player remains asleep as shown in FIG. The character 811 is displayed, and the comment suggesting the effect mode to be executed later is not displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a "sorry" comment indicating that the operation for the first frame button 22a during the execution period t2 was not appropriate is displayed.

In this way, by changing the display mode during the result notification period t3 based on the operation to the operating means during the button effect execution period t2, whether or not the operation during the button effect this time was appropriate (success). Whether or not it was done) can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the effect mode executed after the button effect period has elapsed (for example, the effect mode displayed during the reach period) can be changed according to the effect result of the button effect. It is configured to let you. Specifically, when the effect result of the button effect is "success", it is easier to set the effect mode with a lower execution frequency than when it is "sorry". As a result, the player can actively participate in the button effect while expecting that the effect of the effect mode having a low execution frequency is executed.

Returning to FIG. 8, the explanation will be continued. When the execution period t2 in which the operation for the frame button 22 (operation means) is effectively determined (the player can operate the frame button 22) is set in the button effect period, it corresponds to the execution period t2. Although the operation valid period t5 is set (displayed by a dotted line in FIG. 8), when the player operates the frame button 22 (operation means) during the execution period t2 and the operation condition is satisfied, the operation valid period is at that point. t5 ends (indicated by a solid line in FIG. 8). Then, in the difference period between the execution period t2 and the operation valid period t5, the operation condition establishment mode (for example, a comment of "operation completion") is displayed as a display mode indicating that the operation condition is satisfied.

Since the period during which the operation condition establishment mode is displayed is variable depending on the timing at which the operation condition is satisfied, for example, the operation condition establishment mode is configured to be variably set according to the length of the display period. Also, if the display period of the operation condition establishment mode is longer than the first period (for example, 3 seconds), a display congratulating the player for the quick operation, such as "operation completed, splendid". Set the mode, and if it is shorter than the first period (for example, 3 seconds), set a display mode indicating that the player did not perform the operation quickly, such as "operation completed, it's barely possible". In addition, information that is advantageous to the player (for example, the result of the special drawing lottery being executed) only when the display period of the operation condition satisfying mode is longer than the first period (for example, 3 seconds). Information suggesting, information suggesting the currently set gaming state, special video that is difficult for the player to experience) may be notified. As a result, the player can enthusiastically operate the operating means so that the operating conditions are satisfied as soon as possible.

Further, according to the timing at which the operation condition is satisfied in the execution period t2 (the timing at which the operation valid period t5 ends), the effect mode to be executed later (for example, the effect of the result notification effect executed during the result notification period t3). It may be configured to change the mode and the effect mode of the reach effect executed during the subsequent reach period).

In the present embodiment, even when the operation condition is satisfied, the result notification period t3 is not set until the predetermined execution period t2 ends (elapses). The operation valid period t5 and the execution period t2 may be terminated at the timing when the operation condition is satisfied, and the result notification period t3 may be set immediately. As a result, the button effect can be executed quickly, and the effect can be enhanced.

As described above, according to the example shown in FIG. 8, when the transition condition is satisfied based on the passage of time, each period (preparation period t1, execution period t2, result notification period) preset as the button effect period is established. Although it is configured to migrate t3), a migration condition other than the passage of time may be set. For example, it is set in advance that the operation condition is satisfied during the execution period as the migration condition. It may be configured to shift to the result notification period t3 before the execution period t2 of the length elapses. As a result, the result notification period t3 can be set in correspondence with the operation of the operation means (frame button 22) performed by the player, so that it is possible to provide the player with a natural effect.

Further, in this case, it is preferable to advance only the start timing of the result notification period t3 and set the end timing to remain at the predetermined timing. As a result, if the operation condition is satisfied early during the execution period t2, the period during which the display mode of t3 is displayed during the result notification period (the period during which the result notification effect is executed) can be lengthened. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of the effect result of the button effect this time in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, since the end timing of the button effect period is not variable, it is not necessary to change the effect mode (effect period) of the effect (reach effect) executed after the button effect period ends, and the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 is increased. It can be reduced.

Not limited to this, when the length of the execution period t2 in the button effect period is variably configured according to the operation content for the operating means, the end timing of the result notification period t3 (end timing of the button effect period). May be configured to be different from the predetermined end timing. In this case, for example, when the length of the execution period t2 is changed to be shorter, the end timing of the result notification period t3 (the end timing of the button effect period) arrives earlier than the predetermined end timing. It is good to configure it to do. With this configuration, the effect period after the end of the button effect period can be set longer, so that it is possible to execute an effect different from the usual one, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7, a flow in which the button effect described with reference to FIG. 8 is executed will be described. In FIG. 6, the button effect (button effect A) set as the variation effect of the special figure 1 variation and the button effect (button effect B) set as the variation effect of the special figure 2 variation are executed at different timings. The flow is shown. In the present embodiment, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the variation effect (special figure 1 variation effect) for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is mainly the third symbol display device. It is configured to be displayed on the display screen of 81, and when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit, or a fluctuation pattern with a high expectation of a big hit (for example, a fluctuation of 60 seconds). (Variation pattern in which the time is set) In a part of the selected case, the variation effect for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 is configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 6, when the special figure 2 variation in which the lottery result is out of order is executed with the button effect A set as the variation effect of the special figure 1, the button effect A (the operation target) is executed. The first frame button 22a) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the button effect B (the operation button to be operated) is displayed as the variation effect of the second variation (hit) of the special figure 2 variation. When the first frame button 22a) is set, the button effect B is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Here, with reference to FIG. 11, the effect content of the button effect B set as the variation effect of the second variation of the special figure 2 variation shown in FIG. 6 will be described. FIG. 11 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed when the button effect B is executed, and FIG. 11 (b) shows the display content displayed at the end of the button effect B. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example. As described above with reference to FIG. 6, the button effect B is a button effect that can be set in response to the variation in the special figure 2.

As shown in FIG. 11A, when the button effect B is executed, the character 811 imitating a rabbit and the character 813 imitating a turtle are displayed in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. A competition effect is displayed, and a button 812 imitating the operation means (first frame button 22a) to be operated by the button effect (button effect B) this time and a valid period gauge 812a are displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Aim for GOAL by repeatedly hitting the button" is displayed to indicate the effect content of the button effect B. In the example shown in FIG. 11A, as the display mode of the button 812, the button effect (button effect B) this time is a continuous striking effect in which the first frame button 22a needs to be operated (pressed) many times. This is displayed in a continuous striking effect mode (indicated by three arrows in FIG. 11A).

In this way, by displaying the display mode (button 812) indicating the operation means to be operated and the operation content during the button effect, the player is visually informed of the playability of the button effect in an easy-to-understand manner. Can be done. Further, although not shown, the character 811 is operated according to the operation mode of the first frame button 22a during the operation valid period of the button effect B (while the remaining period display mode of the valid period gauge 812a is displayed). It is configured to change the display mode and the display mode of the button 812. With this configuration, it is possible to change the effect mode (display mode) of the button effect being executed for each operation executed during the operation valid period, and to provide the player with an operation feeling. Can be done.

Then, when the operation valid period of the button effect B elapses, as shown in FIG. 11B, the result of the competition effect between the character 811 and the character 813 is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 11B, the effect result that the character 811 has passed the goal 814 first is displayed. Then, in the goal 814, a comment of "Gekiatsu" is displayed as a display mode indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the special figure lottery (special figure 2 lottery) that is the target of the button effect B is a big hit, and is executed in the future. An effect in which the character 811 has won a prize with a comment of "SP reach" for suggesting the content of the effect to be performed is displayed. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the character "GOAL" for indicating that the button effect B has ended is displayed.

Here, the relationship between each period set in the button effect period described with reference to FIG. 8 and the effect mode of the button effect B will be described. Of the button effect period, during the preparation period t1, the character The effect that the 811 and the character 813 are on standby at the start position is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the comment "Aim for GOAL" indicating the effect content of the button effect B is displayed in the sub display area Ds (Fig.). Not shown). During this preparation period t1, since the operation valid period t5 is not set, the valid period gauge 812a is not displayed, but the operation target (first button 22a) of the button effect B and the operation content (continuous hitting) are displayed. The button 812 is displayed in the display mode shown.

Then, during the execution period t2, the effect shown in FIG. 11A is displayed, and during the operation period t4 set when the operating means (first frame button 22a) is operated, the first frame button 22a is displayed. An effect of changing the display mode of the character 811 and the display mode of the button 812 is displayed according to the operation mode. Finally, during the result notification period t3, the effect shown in FIG. 11B is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 7, the explanation will be continued. In FIG. 6 described above, the button effect A, which is a variable effect for showing the lottery result of the special figure 1, and the button effect B, which is a variable effect for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2, are executed at different timings. In contrast to the above case, FIG. 7 shows a button effect A, which is a variable effect for showing the lottery result of the special figure 1, and a button effect, which is a variable effect for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2. It shows the flow when B and are executed at the overlapping timing.

As shown in FIG. 7, while the button effect A is being executed as the variation effect of the first variation (off) of the special figure 1 variation, the second variation (off) of the special figure 2 variation is executed. When the button effect B is set as the variation effect of the second variation (off) of the special figure 2 variation, the effect mode of the button effect A being executed is the duplicate effect according to the start timing of the button effect B. It is executed by switching to the effect mode of the button effect C. Then, when the overlapping period of the button effect A and the button effect B elapses, the button effect B is executed.

In the present embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed at the same time (in parallel). Therefore, the variable display of the special figure 1 and the variable display of the special figure 2 are executed at the same time (in parallel). Since the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation are set independently, the start timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation and the start timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation are related. Never have. Therefore, the effect period of the variation effect (button effect) of the special figure 1 variation displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the variation of the special figure 2 variation displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The display (button effect) may overlap with the effect period.

In this way, if a plurality of button effects are set so that the execution periods overlap, the player can determine which button effect the operation on the operation means (frame button 22a) executed by the player corresponds to. It becomes difficult to distinguish, and the effect that is difficult for the player to understand will be executed. Further, in order to solve such a problem, if the button effect being executed is forcibly terminated and a new button effect is executed, the operation means is positively used for the button effect being executed. There was a problem that the player who was operating the game was dissatisfied and the motivation to play was reduced.

Further, if it is configured so that another button effect is not executed during the execution of the button effect, for example, the button effect being executed is a button effect with a low jackpot expectation (low effect effect), and the button effect is Even if a button effect with a high jackpot expectation (high effect effect) is set during execution, the button effect with a high jackpot expectation (high effect effect) is not executed, and the effect is reduced. was there.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, when the button effect B is set so as to overlap with the button effect A during the execution of the button effect A, the button that is the duplicate button effect is used. The effect C is configured to be executed, and even if a plurality of button effects are set in duplicate, the button effect is configured to be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Here, with reference to FIG. 12, the effect content of the button effect C, which is a duplicate button effect, will be described. FIG. 12 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed when the button effect C is executed, and FIG. 12 (b) shows the display content displayed at the end of the button effect C. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example. As described above with reference to FIG. 7, the button effect C is a duplicate (fusion) effect executed when the execution condition of the button effect B is satisfied during the execution of the button effect A.

As shown in FIG. 12A, when the button effect C is set, the effect that the character 811 imitating a rabbit executes training is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the character 811 is an obstacle imitating a rock. A production that jumps over the correspondence is executed. In the sub-display area Ds, a comment is also displayed, "Push the button to cross the rock during training" indicating the effect content of this button effect (button effect C). Further, in the main display area Dm, in order to show that the operation target of this time is the second frame button 22b, the button 818 imitating the second frame button 22b and the operation of the button effect (button effect C) of this time are performed. The validity period t5 and the validity period gauge 818a indicating the remaining period of the operation validity period are displayed.

Here, the button 818 imitating the second frame button 22b displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81b is larger than the button 812 imitating the first frame button 22a (see FIG. 11A). It is displayed in a large display mode. In this way, by varying the display mode displayed on the display screen for each operation means to be operated, it is possible to inform the player of what the operation target is this time in an easy-to-understand manner.

Then, when the button effect C is completed, as shown in FIG. 12B, the character 811 is displayed in a display mode indicating that the training is successful, and the button effect B is set after the button effect C. The comment "Training success, race participation decision" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Although not shown, it is configured to change the display mode on the end screen of the button effect C according to the operation content for the second frame button 22b during the operation valid period of the button effect C, for example. Whether or not to display a suggestion mode that suggests the lottery result of the special figure lottery (special figure 2) that is the target of the button effect C is determined according to the operation content in the button effect C. As a result, the player who wants to grasp the result of the special drawing lottery as soon as possible can be enthusiastically participated in the button staging.

As described above, the effect mode of the button effect (button effect A to button effect C) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has been described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 12, but in the present embodiment, the duplicate effect is described. As the effect mode of (button effect C), an intermediate mode between the effect mode of the button effect (button effect A) executed first and the effect mode of the button effect (button effect B) executed later is set. It is configured as follows. Specifically, in the button effect A, an effect mode for raising the character 811 is set (see FIG. 9A), and in the button effect B, an effect mode in which the character 811 performs a rail is set (FIG. 11 (a). )reference). Then, in the button effect C, as an intermediate aspect thereof, an effect mode in which the awakened character 811 trains for the race is set (see FIG. 12A).

In this way, by setting the intermediate mode as the effect mode of the duplicate button effect set when the plurality of button effects overlap, the effect mode of the button effect A does not give a sense of discomfort to the player, and the button effect B It is possible to shift to, and the staging effect can be enhanced. In the flow of the effect shown in FIG. 7, the remaining period of the button effect B after the overlap period of the button effect A and the button effect B is the first period (for example, the effect mode of the button effect B can be executed). Since it shows the case of 5 seconds) or more, the button effect B is configured to be executed again after the button effect C is executed. For example, the overlapping period between the button effect A and the button effect B is shown. When the remaining period of the button effect B after the lapse is less than the first period (for example, 5 seconds) in which the effect mode of the button effect B can be executed, the button effect B is used without executing the button effect B. It is preferable to execute the button effect C during the set button effect period, and to display the mode suggesting the effect to be executed later as the effect result of the button effect C.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the button effect B from being executed only for the remaining period to the extent that it is difficult for the player to identify, and the effect that is difficult for the player to understand is provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation target (second frame button 22b) of the button effect C, which is a duplicate button effect, is the operation target (first frame button) of the button effect A and the button effect B executed as a single button effect. It is configured to be different from 22a). As a result, the special feeling of the button effect C can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the present embodiment, the button effect A is set as the variable effect of the special figure 1, and the button effect B is set as the variable effect of the special figure 2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special figure 1 is not limited to this. The first button effect is set as the variable effect of, the second button effect is set as the variable effect of the special figure 2, and the button effect that is executed first is the effect mode of the first button effect and the second button effect. The button effect A may be set, and the button effect B may be set as the effect mode of the button effect to be executed later. With this configuration, even if the button effect set as the variable effect of the special figure 2 is executed before the button effect set as the variable effect of the special figure 1, a plurality of button effects are executed. Since the effect mode of the button effect can be set in chronological order, it is possible to perform an effect that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player.

In the present embodiment, when the button effect A and the button effect B are set to overlap, the button effect C is set as the duplicate button effect, but in addition to this, the button effect C is set independently. As the effect mode of the button effect, it is preferable to configure the effect mode in which the transition from the button effect A to the button effect C can be set. As a result, when the effect corresponding to the button effect C is executed, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not the current effect is a duplicate button effect. Therefore, the button effect B is executed after the button effect C. It is possible to have the player play the game while expecting that.

Further, a pachinko that sets the button effect A as the variation effect of the special figure 1 fluctuation, sets the button effect B as the variation effect of the special figure 2 variation, and sets the button effect C in the overlapping period of the button effect A and the button effect B. In the machine 10, if the timing of switching the effect mode of the button effect (timing of transition from button effect A to button effect C, timing of transition from button effect C to button effect B) is different from the timing at which the special figure change stops. It is good to set it so that it can be set.

Specifically, the operation valid period of the button effect C and the operation valid period of the button effect B (see FIG. 7) are set so as to straddle the stop timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation that is the target of the button effect A. Good to configure. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to understand that the special figure change that is the target of the button effect is switched during the series of button effects executed in the order of the button effects A, C, and B. It is possible to perform a button effect that does not give a sense of discomfort as if a predetermined predetermined button effect is being executed for one special figure variation.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 13, a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters and the like include a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device (not shown), and a third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to set the display in the above.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter (not shown) used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first random number counter C1 used for setting the initial value. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used.

Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4, and the variation used for selecting the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol. The type counter CS1 and is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 53). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a corresponding to entry into the first ball entry port 64b1 consisting of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and four holding areas (holding). The left second ball entry port 64b2 consisting of the first to fourth areas) and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the ball entry into the second ball entry port 640 are provided. 1 In the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a random number counter C1 per first, a type counter C2 per first, a stop type selection counter C3, and a variable type counter are set in accordance with the timing of entering the first ball opening 64b1. Each value of CS1 is stored.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is satisfied, various values stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are set to the first special symbol. It shifts to the execution area and starts special symbol fluctuation based on various stored values.

Similarly, in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the first random number counter C1 and the first hit type are set in accordance with the timing of entering the left second entry port 64b2 and the second entry opening 640. Each value of the counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the hold first area of the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b are shifted to the second special symbol execution area. , Special symbol variation based on various stored values is started.

As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol at the same time (in parallel), each special symbol is available. The holding ball storage area (first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b) is configured to have an execution area, respectively. As a result, when the start condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol change can be promptly executed.

Further, in the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, as in the case of the special symbol described above, the normal symbol hold corresponding to the entry (passing of the ball) into the through gate 67 composed of the four hold areas (hold 1st to 4th areas). A ball storage area 203c is provided, and in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, each value of the second random number counter C4 and the normal figure variation type counter CS2 is set according to the timing of entering the through gate 67. Each is stored.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the normal symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and various stored values are stored. Normal symbol fluctuation based on the value is started.

In this embodiment, each counter value (counter value related to the special figure 2 lottery) acquired based on the entry into the left second entry port 64b2 and the second entry opening 640 is reserved and stored. , And each counter value acquired based on the passage of the sphere through the through gate 67 is reserved and stored, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol) has a configuration. On the other hand, it may be configured not to provide a function (holding storage function) for storing each acquired counter value.

With this configuration, in order to execute an advantageous lottery in a gaming machine in which a lottery that is advantageous to the player and a lottery that is disadvantageous to the player are switched as a lottery of one special symbol type according to the set game state. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a different gaming state is set and a disadvantageous lottery is executed with one special symbol while a large number of reserved memories of one special symbol are acquired.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 499) and reaches the maximum value (for example, 499 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 499) and then 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 499, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 499. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 53).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball is the first ball entry port 64b1 or the left second ball entry port 64b2, and the first ball entry port 64b2. 2 The ball is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing of entering the ball entry port 640. The value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 15A. FIG. 15A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first random number table 202a. The first random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a big hit is defined in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2). ..

Specifically, in the first random number table 202a, the determination value determined to be a big hit is commonly defined for the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the special symbol Judgment values in a predetermined range are defined corresponding to the states (low probability state, high probability state). As shown in FIG. 15A, when the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol is set, "0,1" among the values of the first random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value. Other values are specified as judgment values other than big hits (that is, out of order).

Further, when the high probability state (probability change state, latent probability state) of the special symbol is set, "0 to 9" among the values of the first random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value. A value other than is specified as a judgment value other than a jackpot (that is, a miss). That is, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of the special symbol is set, it is stipulated that the jackpot is won with a probability of 2/500 (1/250), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set. If it is set, it is stipulated that the jackpot will be won with a probability of 10/500 (1/50). Therefore, the high-probability state is easier to win the jackpot than the low-probability state of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot is configured to be the same in the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol, but the probability is not limited to this. The jackpot probability may be different depending on the type of symbol. For example, the second special symbol may be configured to have a lower jackpot probability than the first special symbol. Further, in the present embodiment, two types of jackpot probabilities of the special symbol are prepared, that is, a high probability state and a low probability state, but one type may be used, or three or more types may be used. In this case, for example, the jackpot probability of the special symbol may be different for each of a maximum of four types of gaming states set by combining the state of the special symbol and the state of the normal symbol. You may simply make it possible to set three or more types of special symbol states such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, and set different jackpot probabilities for each state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery result of the special symbol is configured to be determined as either a big hit or a miss, but the lottery result is not a big hit (it is a miss). In some cases, a small hit may be won in which the privilege (for example, the number of prize balls that can be given during the winning game) that can be given to the player is smaller than that of the big hit. In this case, for example, the value of the first random number counter C1 may be referred to when determining whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit. The value of the random number that becomes the small hit of the special symbol is set by the small hit random number table stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the acquired first hit random number counter C1 is specified in the small hit random number table. If it matches the value of a random number that is a small hit, it is determined to be a small hit with a special symbol.

Further, the first random number counter C1 value that wins the big hit and the first random number counter C1 value that wins the small hit are configured to be different from each other, and one process (presence or absence of hit) for executing a special symbol lottery is performed. In the process of determining whether or not a big hit is determined, the determination of whether or not the big hit is successful and the determination of whether or not the small hit is successful are continuously (simultaneously) executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute a lottery for a big hit or a small hit with a predetermined probability for one acquired counter value (first random number counter C1 value).

In addition, in a gaming machine in which a small hit is provided as a result of a lottery of special symbols, the probability of winning a small hit is specified differently between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. May be. As a result, the privilege given to the player can be different between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. In addition, the player can be enthusiastically played in order to execute more lottery of special symbols that are more advantageous.

Further, as described above, the table referred to when executing the big hit lottery (first random number table 202a) and the table referred to when executing the small hit lottery (small hit random number table) are separately separated. It may be configured to execute a big hit lottery and a small hit lottery using one table (for example, the first random number table 202a). In this case, for example, the random number table 202a per first may be configured to specify the range of counter values for winning small hits for each type of special symbol. With such a configuration, the number of data tables included in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning determination is executed according to the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 and the type of the special symbol, and the determination value predetermined in advance according to the value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a jackpot winning determination may be executed using different determination values according to the set gaming state, until a predetermined condition is satisfied. Depending on the number of jackpot wins within a specific period, the first random number counter C1 value defined as jackpot wins may be configured to be variable, or executed in a state where a predetermined abnormal condition is satisfied. As a data table for abnormal times referred to in the big hit lottery, a data table in which the determination value corresponding to the big hit is not specified may be provided.

Further, although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol at the same time (in parallel). Moreover, it is controlled so that the jackpot game is not executed at the same time (in parallel) based on both special symbol lottery. Specifically, when each special symbol duplicates and executes the jackpot fluctuation, one jackpot winning in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot first is enabled, and the other jackpot winning is performed. Is configured to be discarded (erased).

The configuration for preventing duplicate jackpot games from being executed based on the lottery result of each special symbol is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. During the period until the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot winning is executed, the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot is not specified so that the jackpot is not won in the lottery of the other special symbol, and the jackpot is dealt with. A special symbol lottery may be executed with reference to a dedicated data table in which only the determination value is specified.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball is the first ball entry port 64b1 or the left second ball entry port 64b2. And, at the timing of entering the second ball entry port 640, the ball is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

The value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In the present embodiment, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is used to refer to the jackpot type selection table 202d to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is won.

Here, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the jackpot type selection table 202d defines a random number value for determining the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by using the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2.

As shown in FIG. 16A, the jackpot type selection table 202d includes the special figure 1 table 202d1 for determining the jackpot type in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2). ) At least includes the special figure 2 table 202d2 that determines the jackpot type in the lottery.

First, with reference to FIG. 16B, it is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 1 table 202d1. The special figure 1 table 202d1 is a table referred to in the lottery of the first special symbol. As shown in FIG. 16B, in the special figure 1 table 202d1, a plurality of jackpot types are defined in association with the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2.

Specifically, "big hit A" is defined in the range where the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 19". In the range of "20 to 79", "big hit B" is defined, and in the range of "80 to 99", "big hit C" is defined.

Here, the opening operation during the jackpot game corresponding to each jackpot type will be described. In the present embodiment, the opening operation content (round game content) executed according to the jackpot type, that is, the operation content for a plurality of movable members (such as the opening / closing door 65b of the variable winning device 65) executed during the jackpot game (the opening / closing door 65b of the variable winning device 65). The timing and the number of times) are stored in advance in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 as an open operation scenario in which the time series is specified.

Then, the open operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won is read out and stored in the running scenario storage area (not shown) in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. When the open operation scenario is stored in the executing scenario storage area (not shown), the scenario content is updated every time the main process (see FIG. 53) of the main controller 110 is executed (every 4 milliseconds). In the jackpot control process (see S2404 in FIG. 54) for executing the control during the jackpot game, the current scenario content is discriminated and the process based on the discriminant result is executed.

In this way, by using the open operation scenario in which the operation contents of the movable member during the jackpot game in which the movable member is moved are defined in chronological order, the operation control for the movable member can be centrally managed. In this embodiment, a configuration is used in which one movable member (variable winning device 65) is opened as a jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of movable members are used during one jackpot game. (Variable winning device 65, second variable winning device) may be configured to execute an opening operation. In this case, as described above, by setting the open operation scenario and centrally managing the operation control for each movable member, for example, as compared with the case where the operation control is executed separately for each movable member, each movable member. It is possible to appropriately set the operation timing of the above, and it is possible to smoothly execute the operation process for the other movable member when a defect occurs in one movable member.

"Big hit A" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is 16 rounds and the variable winning device (first attacker) 65 is opened to execute the big hit game. This round game is a game in which the variable winning device (first attacker) 65 is continuously opened until the ball wins 10 balls or the opening period elapses for 30 seconds.

When "big hit A" is set as the big hit type, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (the time reduction counter 203h is set to 70) and the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the big hit game ends (the high probability state of the special symbol is set). Probability variation counter 203g is set to 70). That is, after the jackpot game based on "big hit A" is executed, the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is executed 70 times, or the special symbol is changed 70 times, or the special symbol is executed. It is set until the jackpot is won by the time the fluctuation is executed 70 times.

In the "big hit B", the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is 4 rounds as the big hit game, and the big hit game in which the variable winning device (first attacker) 65 is opened is executed. When the jackpot game based on "big hit B" is executed, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (the time reduction counter 203h is set to 70) and the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends (probability change). Counter 203g is set to 70). That is, after the jackpot game based on "big hit B" is executed, the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is executed 70 times, or the special symbol is changed 70 times, or the special symbol is executed. It is set until the jackpot is won by the time the fluctuation is executed 70 times. The game state of "Big hit B" is the same as that of "Big hit A" after the big hit game is completed, but since the number of rounds (the number of round games) is small, the player is better than "Big hit A". It will be a disadvantageous jackpot game.

In "Big hit C", the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is 4 rounds as the big hit game, and the big hit game of the round game 1 in which the first attacker (left variable winning device) 65 is opened is executed. It is a jackpot type. When the jackpot game based on "big hit C" is executed, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (the time reduction counter 203h is set to 70) and the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends (probability change). Counter 203g is set to 0). That is, after the jackpot game based on "big hit C" is executed, the time saving state (low high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is executed 70 times, or the special symbol change is executed 70 times, or special. It is set until the jackpot is won by the time the symbol variation is executed 70 times. Therefore, when compared with "Big hit A" or "Big hit B", it is a big hit game that is disadvantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot is won, a jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning device (first attacker) 65 is opened for the number of rounds according to the jackpot type regardless of which jackpot type is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of variable winning devices may be provided, and the variable winning devices determined for each winning jackpot type may be configured to open for the number of rounds. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with various playability.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game state set after the end of the big hit game is set according to the type of the special symbol won by the big hit. Therefore, the big hit is given to the player. Not only can you expect to win the game, but you can also be interested in the jackpot type that is set when you win the jackpot.

In the present embodiment, the number of types of jackpots is three, but the number of jackpots is not limited to two, and two or less may be used, or four or more types may be provided. Further, even if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is the same according to the gaming state at the time of winning, a different jackpot type may be selected. By configuring in this way, for example, when the game state at the time of winning is a big hit in the probable change state, by setting a big hit type in which a larger number of rounds is executed, the hit in the probable change state can be played more. You can make people expect. Therefore, it is possible to make the hit in the high-probability game state more advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the taste of the game in the high-probability state. Therefore, the player can be strongly reminded that he / she wants to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be played for a longer time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the type of the jackpot type selected in the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type are made the same, and the first is to correspond to each jackpot type. Although it is configured so that only the range of the hit type counter C2 is different, the jackpot type selected between the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be different without limitation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first type counter C2 by aiming at a specific counter value from being executed in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Next, the contents specified in the special figure 2 table 202d2 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (c). FIG. 16 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special drawing 2 table 202d2. The special figure 2 table 202d2 is a table referred to in the lottery of the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 16 (c), in the special figure 2 table 202d2, a plurality of jackpot types are defined in association with the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2.

The special figure 2 table 202d2 differs from the special figure 1 table 202d1 in that it is referred to in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special figure 2). Therefore, "big hit A" is defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49", and "big hit B" is defined in the range of "50 to 79". The difference is that the range of "80 to 99" is defined as "big hit C".

That is, in the present embodiment, it is easier to select the "big hit A" that is most advantageous to the player when the big hit is won in the special figure 2 than when the big hit is won in the special figure 1. ing. Thereby, in the pachinko machine 10 which can execute the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery in parallel and can execute both special figure lottery evenly under the normal state, the advantage of each special figure lottery. The degree can be different. Therefore, when the display mode indicating that the jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed, it is possible to make an interest in whether the special figure type for which the jackpot is won is special figure 1 or special figure 2.

Returning to FIG. 13, the explanation will be continued. The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 53) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 17) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. Has been done.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 17, the variation pattern selection table 202e is used in the normal table 202e1 used in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, and in the state where the probabilistic change state or the time saving state is set. A probabilistic / latent probabilistic table 202e2 is specified. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, since the data table used for selecting the fluctuation pattern according to the gaming state is different, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected according to the gaming state is different. be able to.

Next, the detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the normal table 202e1 in a schematic diagram. The normal table 202e1 is a data table that is referred to when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and is a second special symbol with respect to the variable time set for the lottery of the first special symbol. It is stipulated that the fluctuation time set for the lottery will be longer.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "big hit (hit)", and the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 50". The normal jackpot fluctuation pattern A with a variation time of 30 seconds is associated with the range of "51 to 100", and the super reach jackpot variation pattern A with a variation time of 60 seconds is associated with the range of "51 to 100". A super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern B with a variation time of 60 seconds is associated with a range of "~ 150", and a super reach jackpot variation pattern C with a variation time of 60 seconds is associated with a range of "151 to 198". Has been done.

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the present embodiment, the lottery result is "big hit (hit)", and there are three types of fluctuation patterns with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds (super reach jackpot fluctuation patterns A, B, C). ) It is provided. This is because when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command indicating each type, the effect mode of the variation effect is set differently according to the variation pattern type indicated by the received command. As described above, in the present embodiment, in the special drawing lottery having the same lottery result and the same fluctuation time, a plurality of types of fluctuation pattern types can be set on the main control device 110 side, and are based on the set fluctuation pattern types. The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to set the effect mode of the variation effect. As a result, since it is possible to set the effect mode of the variable effect by combining a plurality of parameters, it is possible to set a wider variety of effect modes, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

If the lottery result is "out of order" and the number of holdings is in the range of 0 to 2, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 70" and the variation time is out of range for a long time of 20 seconds. The pattern is defined in association with the normal reach deviation pattern of 30 seconds in the range of "71 to 150", and the super reach deviation of 60 seconds in the range of "151 to 198". Fluctuation patterns are specified in association with each other.

On the other hand, when the lottery result is "off" and the number of holdings is 3, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the short-time deviation variation pattern of 10 seconds in the range of "0 to 70". It is defined, and the range of "71 to 130" is associated with a long-time deviation variation pattern with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds, and the range of "131 to 170" is associated with a normal reach deviation variation pattern of 30 seconds. In the range of "171 to 198", a super reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with the above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the same fluctuation type counter CS1 value is acquired when the lottery result is “out of”, a different fluctuation pattern is selected. Specifically, it is stipulated that when the number of holdings is small, it is easier to select a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time than when the number of holdings is large, and when the number of holdings is large, compared to the case where the number of holdings is short. It is stipulated that the one with a short fluctuation time is easy to select. By configuring in this way, when the number of reserved balls is small, the number of reserved balls is quickly consumed, the period during which the lottery is not executed increases, and the player is prevented from getting tired of the game at an early stage. Can be done. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is large, it becomes difficult for the number of reserved balls to reach the upper limit, and the player has more chances to shoot balls continuously to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. Can be done.

In this embodiment, the same fluctuation pattern table is used regardless of the winning jackpot type, but the jackpot type is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is advantageous to the player (for example, jackpot A). A different variation pattern table may be used depending on whether the jackpot type is a jackpot type or the jackpot type indicates a jackpot (big hit B) other than that. In this case, for example, the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type showing other jackpots is won is shorter than the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type showing the advantageous jackpot (big hit A) is won. It is preferable to configure it so that the time fluctuation pattern can be easily selected. As a result, the longer the fluctuation time set in the execution fluctuation pattern, the more advantageous the game result can be expected to the player, so that the player is interested in the fluctuation time of the special symbol. be able to.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the normal jackpot is won is easier to select the fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the probability variation jackpot is won. This can be configured to provide the player with surprising gaming results when the jackpot is won with a short variation time, even if a short variation time is selected. , You can have expectations until the end.

Next, the contents of the probability variation / time saving table 202e2 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the probability variation table 202e2. As shown in FIG. 19, in the probability variation / time saving table 202e2, the symbol type, the lottery result, the range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "hit (big hit)", the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". In other words, the normal jackpot fluctuation pattern A with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in the entire range. In the case of "off", a short deviation fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in the range where the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 79", and the fluctuation time is specified in the range of "80 to 198". A 180-second long deviation variation pattern is defined in association with each other.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "hit (big hit)", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149" and the variation time is 5 seconds. A short jackpot fluctuation pattern is defined, and a super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern B having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in association with the range of "150 to 198". In the case of "off", a short deviation fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is defined in the range where the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 179", and the fluctuation time is specified in the range of "180 to 198". A 30-second super-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern is defined in association with each other.

As described above, during the probabilistic change state or the time saving state (during the right-handed game), it is easier to set a shorter fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol than during the normal state (during the left-handed game). It is configured. Further, during the probabilistic change state or the time saving state, since the normal symbol is in the high probability state, the electric accessory 640a is likely to be opened, and the gaming state is such that it is easy to obtain a new special figure 2 hold. Therefore, during the time saving state, it is easy to store the special figure 2 hold, and it is easy to set a short fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation, and the special figure 2 fluctuation can be efficiently executed.

Further, the fluctuation time that can be set as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is configured to overlap with the fluctuation time that can be set as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol in the normal state, and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set. By grasping the above, it may not be possible to easily determine whether the current gaming state is a normal state or a probable change state. Not limited to this, a variable time may be set so that the player can determine which gaming state is set.

Returning to FIG. 13, the explanation will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 232, the maximum value (that is, 232) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67. At that time, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is a hit of the normal symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is the second hit random number table 202c. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by, it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol (second symbol). Further, the second random number table 202c is divided into two types, one for the low probability time of the normal symbol and the other for the high probability time where the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than that of the low probability time, and they are included in each. The number of random numbers that are big hits is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be hit different, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability time of the normal symbol and the high probability time of the normal symbol.

The contents specified in the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (b). FIG. 15B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the second random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 15B, when the normal symbol is in a low probability state, the acquired second random number counter C4 is defined as a normal symbol in the range of "0 to 10", and the normal symbol has a high probability. In the case of the state, the acquired second random number counter C4 is defined in the range of "0 to 231".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 232), and is updated once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 32). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

The normal figure variation type counter CS2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order in the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the normal map variation type counter CS2 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Then, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined by the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2. Specifically, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined by referring to the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202f provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 by using the acquired value of the normal map variation type counter CS2. It is configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the contents specified in the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202f will be described. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202f. As shown in FIG. 20, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set when the value of the acquired normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 198". Will be done. Then, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set and the value of the acquired normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 198", it is specified that the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is set. is doing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is configured and set to be variable based on the game state of the normal symbol and the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2. It is configured so that the ease of entering the ball into the second entry port 640 differs depending on the fluctuation time. As a result, in each game state, it is possible to limit the lottery action of the second special symbol that makes it easy to obtain a lottery result that is advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege. Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 4, the explanation will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 4, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 53) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 52) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 51) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, and a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d. 2nd special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, time saving counter 203h, special figure 1 big hit flag 203i, special figure 2 big hit flag 203j, game state storage area 203k, special figure 2 variation It has a stop flag 203o, a special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r, a special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s, and other memory areas 203z.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has various counter values acquired based on the fact that a ball has entered the first entry port 64b1 (starting prize) up to the upper limit number (4 in the present embodiment). It is a storage area for storing. Further, in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, up to the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment), the game ball enters the left second entry slot 64b2 or the second entry opening 640 (the ball enters the second entry opening 640). It is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired based on the starting prize).

The first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and when the first special symbol stops the variable display, the first special symbol is stopped. When various counter values are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted and stored in the storage area. The second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are stored. For details, refer to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). (Not shown).

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) are started. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) with the detection of winning is stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the first entry port 64b1 (starting prize) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), the counter buffers C1 to C2 and CS1 each. Is acquired and stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has entered the left second entry port 64b2 or the second entry opening 640 (starting prize), each of them is detected from the counter buffer as in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. The values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 are acquired and stored in the corresponding areas (not shown) in the same manner.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the special symbol change (lottery), the MPU 201 executes a process such as a big hit lottery and a display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. One of the data (counters C1 to C2, CS1 values) stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b described above and corresponding to each start winning prize is started. The data corresponding to the winning is shifted to this special symbol reserved ball execution area. The shift in the present embodiment means that the data stored in one area is moved to another area.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is each of the second random number counter C4 and the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) when the ball passes through the through gate 67 (starting prize) is detected. A storage area where values are stored. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (starting prize) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained from the counter buffer. , The value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has four holding areas so that the data (values of the counters C4 and CS2) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (held) up to four times. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the data of the holding balls in the order of passing through the through gate 67 (starting prize) are stored in order from the holding area in which the data is vacant, in the order of the earliest digestion. ..

In addition, when it is detected that the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is the execution start timing of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol based on the start prize, each counter value is stored and the normal symbol winning lottery is performed. It is a memory for storing data (values of counters C4 and CS2) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation display effect of the normal symbol, the above-mentioned normal symbol holding ball is executed in order to execute processing such as a winning lottery and a display setting of the second symbol display device. Of the data corresponding to each start winning prize stored in the storage area 203c (value of the random number counter C4 per second, value of the normal figure variation type counter CS2), the data corresponding to one start winning prize is the normal symbol. Shift to the reserved ball execution area (not shown). The shift in the present embodiment means that the data stored in one area is moved to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are the first input detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (performed by the third symbol display device 81) based on the ball entering the ball opening 64b1, the left second entry port 64b2, or the second entry port 640. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display effect) up to 4 times each. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S2301 in FIG. 52). Then, each time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by 1 each time the variation display effect is executed.

Further, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d (that is, the number of reserved balls) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball based on the ball entering the first entry port 64b1 (starting prize). When the counter value is stored in the area 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1. Is.

Further, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the fact that a ball has entered the left second entry port 64b2 and the second entry opening 640 (starting prize). When the counter value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1. Is.

In the MPU 201, each value of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer is set in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), respectively. When stored, the data stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is stored in the first special symbol change start processing (figure). Refer to (see S207 of 35) or the second special symbol change start process (S209 of FIG. 41), perform a jackpot lottery based on the reference data, and determine the change pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result. In the first symbol display device 37, the fluctuation display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f allows the ball to pass through the through gate 67 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "starting prize"). ), This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the fact that the ball has passed through the through gate 67. Zero is set as the initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S2301 in FIG. 52). Then, each time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S1704 in FIG. 46). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed (see S2005 in FIG. 49).

The probability variation counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the probability variation state. A value corresponding to the type of jackpot won after the jackpot ends is set in the probability variation counter 203g. The value of the probability variation counter 203g is the game state update process (S308 (S910) of FIG. 40) of the first special symbol variation start process (S207 of FIG. 35) or the second special symbol variation start process (S209 of FIG. 41). )) Is subtracted. If the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, it is determined that the special symbol is in a high probability state (probability variation state), and the hit / fail determination of the special symbol is executed with reference to the table for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, it is determined that the special symbol is in the normal state (low probability state), and the hit / fail determination of the special symbol is executed with reference to the table for low probability.

The time saving counter 203f is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the high probability state (time saving state, probability variation state) of the normal symbol. At this time reduction counter 203f, a value corresponding to the winning jackpot type is set after the jackpot ends. Then, the time reduction counter 203f is subtracted by 1 in the game state update process executed immediately after setting the start of the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (see S308 in FIG. 40). When the lottery of the normal symbol is performed, if the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the high probability state, and the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is executed by referring to the table for the high probability time. To. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0, it is determined that the normal symbol is in a low probability state, and the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol is executed with reference to the table for the low probability time.

The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the entry into the first entry port 64b1 matches the jackpot determination value at the start of fluctuation. This is a flag to be set (see S406 in FIG. 36). The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is set to off when the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is set (S811 in FIG. 39).

When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol ends while the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is on, the process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol with the off symbol is executed (see S805 of FIG. 39). .. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that the first special symbol and the second special symbol execute the other jackpot game during one jackpot game.

The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203j is determined to match the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on entering the left second entry slot 64b2 or the second entry slot 640 to the jackpot determination value. If this is the case, the flag is set to ON (see S1006 in FIG. 42). The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203j is set to off when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S1510 in FIG. 45).

When the fluctuation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends while the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203j is on, the process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol with the symbol is executed (see S1504 in FIG. 45). .. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that the first special symbol and the second special symbol execute the other jackpot game during one jackpot game.

The game state storage area 203k is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set game state, and is a game state set after the jackpot game ends (setting status of the probability variation counter 203g and the time reduction counter 203h). The game state corresponding to is stored. Specifically, when the value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 0 and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0, the normal state is stored, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 or more. When the value is set to 0, the value of the probability change counter 203g is set to 0, and when the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 1 or more, the time reduction state is stored.

Further, in the state where the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot game state indicating that the jackpot game is being executed and the type information indicating the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game are also stored. It is configured in.

Then, a state command is set based on the information stored (stored) in the game state storage area 203k, and the state command is output to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 receives the output state command and temporarily stores it in the slave state setting area 223k.

The information stored in the game state storage area 203k is configured to be able to retain the information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In the start-up process (see FIG. 52), a state command corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203k is set. As a result, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to a power failure or the like, the current gaming state can be discriminated by the voice lamp control device 113 side.

In this embodiment, a flag for indicating that the special figure 1 is undergoing a jackpot fluctuation (special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i) and a flag for indicating that the special figure 2 is undergoing a jackpot fluctuation (special figure). 2 jackpot flag 203j) is configured separately, but it is not limited to this, and it is possible to identify which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol the jackpot fluctuation corresponding to is executed. It may be composed of one flag (for example, a jackpot flag). Specifically, the flag is composed of 2 bits, and "10" indicates that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is undergoing jackpot fluctuation, and "01" indicates that the second special symbol (special figure 2). Indicates that the jackpot is changing, and "00" indicates that none of the special symbols are undergoing the jackpot fluctuation. It may be configured to set a 2-bit value.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel), and both special symbols are big hits. If you win, the jackpot game based on the lottery result of the special symbol on the side where the special symbol change is stopped first (special symbol confirmation display) is executed, and the special symbol change is stopped first (special symbol confirmation display). ), Depending on the jackpot type, the other special symbol change is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is out of order.

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 that can execute lottery of a plurality of special symbol types at the same time (in parallel) wins a big hit in the lottery of each special symbol, which is excessive for the player at the same time. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a privilege (big hit game) is granted.

Furthermore, even if one of the special symbol lottery wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, by the time the winning result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the other special symbol lottery will be a jackpot that is advantageous to the player. It will be possible to win. In this case, it is advisable to use the variable time until the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed to execute a variable effect suggesting that the player has won a disadvantage. As a result, the player can be made to think that he / she has won the prize at a disadvantage, so that the other special symbol lottery can be enthusiastically executed during the fluctuation time.

In addition, it may be configured so that a short fluctuation time is more likely to be set when the jackpot which is advantageous to the player is won than when the jackpot which is disadvantageous to the player is won. As a result, while the one special symbol that has been won at the disadvantage is changed, the other special symbol lottery can be won at the advantage, and the winning result can be stopped and displayed (confirmed display) before the winning result at the disadvantage. can.

In this embodiment, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i and the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i are used as jackpot flags that can separately store the lottery result (winning) of the first special symbol and the lottery result (winning) of the second special symbol. The 2 jackpot flag 203j is used, but the jackpot flag is not limited to this, and a common jackpot flag is set for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol, and the lottery of the 1st special symbol and the lottery of the 2nd special symbol are used. On the other hand, if the jackpot is won, the jackpot flag may be set to on, and in the other special symbol lottery executed with the jackpot flag set to on, the jackpot may not be won.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is a flag for indicating that the jackpot game of the first special symbol is executed during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, and is a flag during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. It is set to be turned on when the jackpot game of the first special symbol is executed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S206 in FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 (FIG. 39 (S801: Yes), when it is determined that the special figure 2 is changing (S802: Yes in FIG. 39), it is set to on (see S803). Further, it is set to off in the process of S902 of the second special symbol change start process (see S209 of FIG. 41).

By using this special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol. It is possible to prevent the lottery from being executed again.

In the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the process related to the first special symbol is executed in one special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34), and then the process related to the second special symbol is executed. By configuring to execute, the variation processing for each special symbol is configured to be executed without delay.

Then, in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34), when any of the special symbols is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot, the jackpot control process is performed in the main process (see FIG. 53) of the main control device 110. (S2404 in FIG. 54) is configured to be executed. In addition, the special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 34) skips the special symbol variation processing (S203 to S212 in FIG. 34) when the current jackpot state (S201: Yes in FIG. 34). It is configured in.

That is, in the present embodiment, while the jackpot game is being executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, the new special symbol change (lottery) is not executed, but the special symbol change process (figure). When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode for indicating that the lottery result is a big hit by the variation processing for the first special symbol executed earlier in (see S104 of 34), the special symbol variation is performed. It is configured so that a new variation process for the second special symbol is performed in the process (see S104 in FIG. 34).

In the present embodiment configured as described above, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode for indicating that the lottery result is a big hit by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. It is possible to prevent a new variation process for the second special symbol from being executed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34).

The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern selected in the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 37). A value indicating the fluctuation time is set (see S509 in FIG. 37). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the first special symbol variation executing process (see S204 in FIG. 38) is executed, and whether the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34). Is determined (see S205 in FIG. 34). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is 0 (S205: Yes in FIG. 34), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process for stopping the first special symbol being changed (S205: Yes in FIG. 34). (See S206 in FIG. 39) is executed.

Further, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is cleared to 0 when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a big hit (see S1505 in FIG. 45). As a result, when the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the deviation when the jackpot stop display of the second special symbol is displayed, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r remains and is forcibly displayed. It is possible to suppress that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is restarted again based on the value left in the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s after the stop display is displayed.

The special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern selected in the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (see S906 in FIG. 43). A value indicating the fluctuation time is set (see S1209 in FIG. 43). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the second special symbol variation executing process (see S210 in FIG. 44) is executed, and whether the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34). Is determined (see S211 in FIG. 34). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is 0 (S211: Yes in FIG. 34), the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing for stopping the second special symbol being changed (S211: Yes in FIG. 34). (See S212 in FIG. 45) is executed.

Further, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is cleared to 0 when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a big hit (see S806 in FIG. 39). As a result, when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the deviation when the jackpot stop display of the first special symbol is displayed, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s remains and is forcibly displayed. It is possible to prevent the second special symbol from being restarted again based on the value left in the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s after the stop display is displayed.

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like are set (stored).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate 65b of a specific winning opening 65a as an axis. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening / closing drive is connected to the front side, and a solenoid 209 composed of other solenoids 209z or the like is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 51) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b), and the frame button 22 (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) is set by the player. When operated, the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect content at the time of super reach. , Instruct the display control device 114. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls to display the error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

As shown in FIG. 22A, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores at least the variation pattern selection table 222a and the button effect selection table 222b.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (out of alignment, out of reach, various reach, etc.) are set in counter values for selection of variation patterns (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of fluctuation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the fluctuation time and the type of fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

Here, a part of the contents specified in the variation pattern selection table 222a will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a. As shown in FIG. 23, in the variation pattern selection table 222a, the information (variation time, pass / fail determination result) included in the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is associated with the acquired value of the staging counter 223u. Therefore, the effect content (effect pattern) of the variation effect of the third symbol executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

Specifically, when the information included in the fluctuation pattern command received by the voice lamp control device 113 is normal reach (30 seconds) and the hit / fail determination result is correct, the value of the first effect counter 223u is set. "Staging A" is defined in the range of "0 to 49", "Staging B" is defined in the range of "50 to 89", and "Staging C" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". If it is out of the range, the value of the first staging counter 223u is in the range of "0 to 79" for "staging A", in the range of "80 to 94" for "staging B", and in the range of "95 to 99". "Direction C" is specified in.

Further, when the information included in the fluctuation pattern command received by the voice lamp control device 113 is super reach (60 seconds) and the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the value of the first effect counter 223u is "0". "Super staging A" is defined in the range of "29", "super staging B" is defined in the range of "30 to 79", and "super staging C" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". If is out of the range, the value of the first staging counter 223u is "super staging A" in the range of "0 to 49", "super staging B" in the range of "50 to 89", and "90 to 99". "Super production C" is defined in the range of ".

Finally, when the information included in the fluctuation pattern command received by the voice lamp control device 113 is out of alignment for a long time, the value of the first effect counter 223u is in the range of "0 to 89" and "out of effect A". However, "off-the-shelf effect B" is defined in the range of "90 to 99".

As described above, when the information indicating the fluctuation time included in the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is the same, the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a has the same type regardless of the result of the hit / fail determination. It is stipulated that the effect pattern of is selected, and the selection ratio of each effect pattern is configured to be different based on the result of the hit / fail determination. As a result, the degree of expectation of winning a big hit can be different depending on the type of effect pattern selected. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to which effect pattern the effect content of the variable effect of the third symbol to be executed is based on, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

Here, for each effect pattern (“effect A”, “effect B”, “effect C” ...) defined in the variable pattern selection table 222a, the type of the advance notice effect to be executed and the frame button 22 The presence or absence of an operation effect (button effect) for operating the player and the effect mode of the reach effect are set in association with each other. In the present embodiment, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a are described with reference to FIG. 23, but only a part necessary for explaining the contents of the button effect selection table 222b described later is described. The variation pattern selection table 222a is defined so that a more subdivided effect pattern can be selected corresponding to the received variation pattern command, and the description thereof is omitted.

The button effect selection table 222b is a table that defines the content of the button effect according to the winning / failing determination result of this lottery and the variation pattern type. Here, with reference to FIG. 24, the defined contents of the button effect selection table 222b will be described. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the button effect selection table 222b.

As shown in FIG. 24, the button effect selection table 222b stores button effect information indicating various button effects corresponding to the effect pattern (effect type) selected with reference to the variable pattern selection table 222a. .. The button effect information includes button validity period start timing information indicating the period from the start of the special figure fluctuation to the setting of the operation valid period (button valid period) corresponding to the button effect, and the button effect information is set during the button effect. The valid period information indicating the length of the operation valid period (button valid period), the priority information for indicating the execution priority of the button effect, and the button effect information indicating the effect content (mode) of the button effect are It is stipulated for each production type.

Specifically, when the effect type (effect pattern) selected with reference to the variable pattern selection table 222a is "effect A", "super effect A", or "off effect A", the button effect information is displayed. It is stipulated that the button effect is not executed. When the effect type is "effect B", "10 seconds" is specified as the button effect period start timing, "5 seconds" is specified as the effect period, "2" is specified as the priority, and "A" is specified as the effect mode of the button effect. Has been done.

Here, the priority of the button effect will be briefly described. As described above, the present embodiment is configured so that the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed at the same time (in parallel). It is configured so that the fluctuation effect can be set according to each special figure fluctuation. In the gaming machine configured in this way, a plurality of button effects are set by a plurality of different triggers (a trigger for setting the fluctuation effect of the variation in Special Figure 1 and a trigger for setting the variation effect of the variation in the special figure 2). In some cases, a plurality of button effects are executed in duplicate, and when the operation means (frame button 22) is operated, it becomes difficult to understand which button effect is supported, and the motivation for playing is reduced. There was a problem.

Further, in order to set a plurality of button effects without duplicating the execution timing in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, it is necessary to centrally manage a plurality of button effects set at different triggers, and the voice lamp control device. There is a problem that the processing load of 113 increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, priority is given to the button effect to be executed, and when a plurality of button effects are set in duplicate, the button effect having a high priority is executed. is doing. As a result, even if the button effects are set so that the execution timings overlap, only the button effects having a high priority are actually executed, so that it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand effect to the player. Further, since it is not necessary to centrally manage the settings of the plurality of button effects set at different triggers, it is possible to solve the problem that the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 increases.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same priority is given in advance to the button effects that can be executed at the same time without any problem, and a plurality of button effects having the same priority can be stored. It is composed. As a result, since the execution timing can be duplicated for the button effects that can be duplicated, it is possible to provide the player with a novel effect that is unexpected, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Here, the contents of the button effect to which the same priority is given will be described. In the present embodiment, as the effect mode of the button effect, the display range of the button effect on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the operation target (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b), and the operation content (1). Specify button effects that can be executed at the same time (duplicate) according to (double press, repeated hits, long press), and set the same priority for button effects that can be executed at the same time (duplicate). It is configured as follows.

Specifically, among the display areas of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the main display area Dm (see FIG. 5) is set as the display area, and the button effect in which the first frame button 22a is the operation target and the sub display. The button effect that uses the area Ds (see FIG. 5) as the display area is an operation means that is the operation target of each button effect while the player grasps the content of each button effect even if the button effect is executed in duplicate. Since the frame button 22) can be operated, the button effect can be duplicated.

Further, for each button effect having different display areas and the same operation target, if the operation contents are the same, the same operation (for example, repeated hitting operation) is performed on the operation target to display them in different display areas. Since it is possible to advance each button effect that has been performed, the button effect can be duplicated. On the other hand, each button effect having a different display area, the same operation target, and different operation contents cannot be duplicated (difficult) because the player cannot operate the operation means for each button effect. It will be a button production. Further, even when the display areas overlap, it is difficult for the player to grasp the effect mode (display content) of each button effect, so that the button effect cannot be duplicated (difficult).

It is not necessary to set the same priority for all the combinations of the above-mentioned overlapping button effects, and for example, the additional privilege provided by executing the button effects (for example, the pachinko machine 10). The privilege of variably operating the decorative variable member provided and variable (movable) from the predetermined first position to the second position, and the privilege indicated by the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81). Depending on the situation, even if the button effects can be duplicated, the priority may be given.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of button effects set based on one trigger (for example, an opportunity to set the variable effect of the special figure 1) are configured so as to be duplicated, and the plurality of button effects can be duplicated. Of these, the first button effect executed first is configured to have a higher priority than the second button effect executed later. Then, the above-mentioned first button effect is configured so that the player can positively (early) operate the operation means to end the operation before the start timing of the above-mentioned second button effect. ing.

With this configuration, if the first button effect with high priority is being executed at the start timing of the second button effect, the second button effect is not executed and the first button effect with high priority is executed. If it is not inside, the second button effect can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage because the presence or absence of execution of the other button effects can be changed depending on the operation content of one button effect.

In addition, when such a configuration is used, the second button effect having a lower priority is more valuable to the player than the first button effect having a higher priority (for example, it is usually seen). It is preferable to configure it so that a privilege video that cannot be played can be played, a privilege of notifying the current game state, and a privilege of notifying the result of a special figure change during execution) can be given. In this way, by setting a privilege button effect that can give a valuable privilege to the player as a button effect having a low priority to be executed, the execution period overlaps with other button effects. The frame button 22 can be enthusiastically operated while another button effect is being executed, with the aim of suppressing the privilege button effect from being executed.

In addition, it is preferable to provide a suggestion (notification) means capable of suggesting (notifying) the player that the privilege button effect has been set internally by the time the execution timing of the privilege button effect arrives. With this configuration, the suggestion (notification) means suggests (notifies) that the privilege button effect has been set, and as long as the execution timing does not overlap with other button effects, the privilege is given at a predetermined timing. It is possible to easily grasp that the button effect is executed. In addition, the frame button 22 can be positively operated so that the execution period of other button effects executed after being notified is as short as possible.

Returning to FIG. 24, the specific contents specified in the button effect selection table 222b will be described continuously. When the effect type (effect pattern) is "effect C", a plurality of button effects are defined, and the first button effect to be executed first has "10 seconds" as the button validity period start timing. The validity period is "5 seconds", the priority is "1", the effect mode of the button effect is "A", and the second button effect to be executed later is "14 seconds" as the button validity period start timing. The validity period is defined as "3 seconds", the priority is defined as "2", and the button effect is defined as "C".

Here, the button effect specified corresponding to the effect type "effect C" will be described. As described above, a plurality of button effects are defined in this "effect C", and the difference between the start timing of the first button effect executed first and the start timing of the second button effect executed later. Is specified to be 4 seconds. Since the valid period of the first button effect is defined as "5 seconds", the frame button 22 is not operated while the first button effect is executed, and the first button waits for the expiration of the valid period. When ending the effect, the first button effect is being executed at the start timing of the second button effect. That is, since the first button effect having a high priority is executed at the start timing of the second button effect, the second button effect is not executed.

On the other hand, by operating the frame button 22 during the execution of the first button effect, the first button effect is set early (for example, when 2 seconds have passed from the button validity period start timing, that is, 12 seconds after the start of fluctuation). When it is terminated, the second button effect is executed because the first button effect having a high priority has ended at the start timing of the second button effect (14 seconds after the start of fluctuation). Become. With this configuration, the frame button 22 can be positively operated for the first button effect while expecting that the second button effect is executed.

Next, when the effect type (effect pattern) selected with reference to the variable pattern selection table 222a is "super effect B", a plurality of button effects are defined as in the above-mentioned "effect B". For the first button effect to be executed first, the button valid period start timing is "10 seconds", the valid period is "5 seconds", the priority is "2", and the button effect is "A". Is specified, and in the second button effect to be executed later, the button effect period start timing is "14 seconds", the effect period is "3 seconds", the priority is "1", and the button effect effect mode is "C". Is stipulated.

Here, the difference between the content specified in the above-mentioned “Production B” and the content specified in “Super Production B” will be described. In the above-mentioned "effect B", it is stipulated that the second button effect executed later has a lower priority than the first button effect executed earlier, and at the start timing of the second button effect. When the first button effect is being executed, the second button effect is not executed.

On the other hand, the "super effect B" stipulates that the second button effect executed later has a higher priority than the first button effect executed earlier. Therefore, in the "super effect B", the first button effect is terminated and the second button effect is executed even while the first button effect is being executed. The effect mode of the first button effect to be executed first is defined so that the "effect B" and the "super effect B" have the same effect mode.

That is, when the first button effect is executed, the player corresponds to "super effect B" whether the first button effect this time is the first button effect set corresponding to "effect B". The first button effect proceeds without being able to determine whether it is the first button effect set in the above. Then, when the frame button 22 is operated so as to end the first button effect before the start timing of the second button effect, the second button effect is executed in both "effect B" and "super effect B". , You can experience multiple button productions, but whether the button production being executed this time corresponds to "Production B", "Super Production B" has a higher expectation of winning a big hit than "Production B". It will not be possible to determine whether or not it corresponds to the above, depending on whether or not the second button effect is executed.

On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first button effect so that the first button effect is being executed at the start timing of the second button effect, in the case of "effect B", the second button is displayed. In the case of "super effect B", the effect is not executed, and the second button effect is executed. That is, in this case, depending on whether or not the second button effect is executed, whether the button effect being executed this time corresponds to "effect B", the expectation of winning a big hit is higher than that of "effect B". It is possible to determine whether or not it corresponds to "super effect B", but in the case of "effect B", the second button effect is not executed and it is not possible to experience multiple button effects. ..

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is predicted which effect type (effect pattern) the button effect to be executed this time corresponds to, and the frame during each button effect is predicted based on the prediction result. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of selecting the button operation content by the player himself / herself.

Next, when the effect type (effect pattern) selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table 222a is "super effect C", the button valid period start timing is "10 seconds" and the valid period is "10 seconds". , "2" as the priority, "B" as the effect mode of the button effect, and "10 seconds" as the button valid period start timing and "5 seconds" as the valid period in the case of "off effect B". , "3" is specified as the priority, and "A" is specified as the effect mode of the button effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, various button effects can be set according to the effect type (effect pattern) selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table 222a, so that the effect can be enhanced. can. In addition, even for each effect type (effect pattern) selected based on fluctuation patterns with different jackpot expectations, the button effect period start timing of the button effect is unified, so this effect type depends on the button effect period start timing. It is possible to prevent the effect of the button effect to be executed later from being lowered because it is determined in advance what the item is.

Further, a plurality of button effects such as "effect B" can be set at a timing when the execution periods can overlap, and can be executed later according to the operation content in the button effect (first button effect) to be executed first. Since it is configured to change whether or not the button effect (second button effect) is executed, the player can actively participate in the button effect.

In addition, like "Direction B" and "Super Direction B", while unifying the contents of the button effects to be executed, the button effects that can be executed later by simply changing the priority of each button effect (No. 1). It is possible to make the presence or absence of execution of the two-button effect) different, and it is possible to provide the enjoyment of letting the player predict the type of effect this time.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 22 (b). As shown in FIG. 22B, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d. , Special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e, special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f, special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i, hold effect counter 223j, slave state setting area 223k, button effect hierarchy storage Area 223m, button valid timer 223n, special figure 1 button effect flag 223p, special figure 2 button effect flag 223q, second frame button effective flag 223r, operated flag 223s, press counter 223t, first effect counter 223u, second effect A counter 223v and other memory areas 223z are provided at least.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the processing for the command is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 59) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. , The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and each of these areas has. Stores the winning information respectively. From the information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the start of fluctuation.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a variation effect (and a third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. (Variation display), which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c manages the reserved ball number. It has become like.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the first ball entry port 64b1, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. , Stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the reserved ball number counter 203d.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c, and holds the first special symbol after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the ball number counter 223c, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, it holds the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of balls is displayed in the small area Dm1a (see FIG. 5B) of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed while synchronizing with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is based on the reserved ball number command in which the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is output from the main control device 110 to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Since it is different only in that it is memorized, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is set to. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is set to. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to on when the first stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to on when the second stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The hold effect counter 223j is a counter for counting the number of remaining hold balls used in the hold effect. The hold effect counter 223j determines in the hold ball number processing (S4208 in FIG. 63) that the number of hold balls is the upper limit value (S4503: Yes in FIG. 63), and determines that the hold effect is to be executed (S4504 :. Yes), the value is set to 8 (S4506), and the value is decremented by 1 each time the special figure fluctuation is started (the hold memory decreases) with the value of the hold effect counter 223j larger than 0. .. The hold effect is executed until the value of the hold effect counter 223j becomes 0.

In the slave state setting area 223k, data corresponding to the state command output from the main control device 110 is set. The current gaming state can also be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the data set in the slave state setting area 223k. The state setting command is output from the main control device 110 even when the power is turned on, and the backed up game state can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113.

The button effect hierarchical storage area 223m is a storage area for simultaneously storing a plurality of set button effects, and has a plurality of storage areas. In this button effect hierarchy storage area 223 m, information on the button effect such as the set start time of the button effect and the set value of the button enable timer 223n described later is stored in the storage area corresponding to the priority of the set button effect. Will be done. The details of the button effect hierarchical storage area 223m will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

Here, the contents of the button effect hierarchical storage area 223m will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the button effect hierarchical storage area 223m. As shown in FIG. 25, the button effect hierarchical storage area 223m is formed of four storage areas (hierarchical areas), and "priority 1" to "priority 3" are set as the priority for executing the effect. Has been done.

Specifically, the first layer area 223m1 in which the priority 1 in which the effect is executed with the highest priority is set, and the priority 2 in which the effect is executed with priority next to the priority 1 are set. It is composed of a second layer area 223m2, a third layer area 223m3, and a fourth layer area 223m4 in which the lowest priority 3 is set.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the button effect is executed, the stored information is read out in order from the hierarchical area having the highest priority, and the button effect is executed. Then, when the execution timing of the button effect is reached, it is determined whether the button effect having a higher priority than the priority corresponding to the button effect whose execution timing has arrived this time is executed, and the button effect with a higher priority is executed. It is configured to execute a new button effect when it is not executed. In addition, if a button effect with a lower priority than the button effect whose execution timing has arrived this time is being executed, the button effect with the lower priority is forcibly terminated and a new button effect is executed. is doing.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the storage area in which the same priority (priority 2) is set, the second layer area 223 m2 and the third layer area 223 m3 are provided, and the second layer area 223 m2 and the second layer area 223 m2. The button effects stored in the three-layer area 223m3 are executed at the same time even if the execution timings overlap. This embodiment is configured so that the button effect is set at different triggers, and when the button effect with priority 2 is set first, the information indicating the button effect is displayed in the second layer area 223 m2. When the button effect that is stored and then the priority 2 is set is set, the information indicating the button effect that is already stored in the second layer area 223m2 shifts to the third layer area 223m3, and then. Information indicating the button effect with the set priority 2 is stored in the second layer area 223m2.

Then, when the button effect with the priority 2 is newly set, the storage area is similarly shifted, and the information stored in the third layer area 223m3 is erased. In this way, when a predetermined number of button effects having the same priority (priority 2) can be stored, if the number of button effects having the same priority is set to the predetermined number or more, the oldest button effect is discarded. By configuring the above, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the most recently set button effect.

In this embodiment, a predetermined number of button effects having the same priority (priority 2) can be stored, and the oldest button effect is set when the number of button effects having the same priority is set to the predetermined number or more. Is configured to be discarded, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the latest button effect may be configured not to be newly stored. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to manage the execution timing and the erasure timing of the button effect stored in the storage area, so that the control process can be simplified.

The button valid timer 223n is a timer for measuring the operation valid period of the frame button 22 (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b), and a value corresponding to the length of the set operation valid period is set. Set. Then, the button effect update process (see S5802 in FIG. 74) in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (see S4107 in FIG. 72) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 58). The value of the button valid timer 223n is decremented by 1 (S6003). The button activation timer 223 is configured to be capable of simultaneously measuring a plurality of operation validity periods. As a result, even when the button effects are executed in duplicate, the operation valid period corresponding to each button effect can be appropriately measured.

The special figure 1 button effect flag 223p is a flag for indicating whether or not the button effect is set as the variable effect of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and the button effect of the special figure 1 is set. It is set to on if. For the special figure 1 button effect flag 223p, the button effect is set in the special figure 1 button effect setting process (S5303 in FIG. 68), and the set button effect is executed in the execution timing setting process (S5405 in FIG. 69). It is set to on when the timing is set (see S5509 in FIG. 69), and the button in special figure 1 is set in the special figure 2 button effect setting process (see S5309 in FIG. 70) for setting the button effect in special figure 2. It is referred to when determining the effect setting status (S5602 in FIG. 70). Then, when the information indicating the corresponding button effect is deleted from the button effect hierarchical storage area, that is, when the corresponding button effect is executed, or when the corresponding button effect is executed, the corresponding button effect is executed. Is set to off when discarded (S5907 in FIG. 73).

In the present embodiment, the variation display based on the special figure 1 lottery is configured to be displayed (main variation display) using the entire surface of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the third symbol display device 81 is based on the special figure 2 lottery. 3 The fluctuation display of the symbol is not executed, or the fluctuation display (sub-variation display) is configured so as to be less noticeable than the main fluctuation display. Then, when the result of the special figure 2 lottery is a predetermined result (for example, when a big hit is won or a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is selected among the misses), the variation display based on the special figure 2 lottery is displayed. It is configured to switch from the sub-variation display to the main variation display.

The special figure 2 button effect flag 223q is a flag for indicating whether or not the button effect is set in the variable effect of the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the button effect of the special figure 2 is set. It is set to on if.

The second frame button valid flag 223r is a flag for indicating that the operation valid period (second operation valid period) for effectively determining the operation for the second frame button 22b is set, and the second operation is valid. It is set to on when the period is set.

The operated flag 223s is a flag for indicating that the operation content for the operation means satisfies a predetermined operation condition, and is set to be turned on when the operation content satisfies the predetermined operation condition. be. The operated flag 223s is determined at the timing when the button effect execution period t2 (see FIG. 8) has elapsed, and the result notification period t3 (see FIG. 8) is determined according to the determination result (setting status of the operated flag 223s). The production mode (success production, failure production) is set.

The pressing counter 223t is a counter for measuring the number of times the operation means (frame button 22) is operated during one operation valid period, and is an operation means (first frame) to be operated during the operation valid period. Each time the button 22a or the second frame button 22b) is operated, the value is incremented by 1, and when the operation valid period ends, the value is reset to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the press counter 223t during the operation valid period or at the end of the operation valid period satisfies the predetermined condition, and when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operated flag 223s is set to ON. Will be done.

In this embodiment, the number of operations (number of presses) is measured by using the press counter 223t as the operation content during the operation valid period, but the number of operations (press) is measured as the operation content during the operation valid period. It is configured so that the operation contents other than the number of times) can be discriminated, and whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied is determined based on the determination result, and when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operated flag 223s is set to ON. For example, when the means for measuring the length of the period (long press period) in which the operation means (frame button 22) is continuously pressed, or when a plurality of operation means are provided. , A means for measuring the order and number of times each operating means is pressed, a means for measuring a pressing force when pressing the operating means, or the like may be used.

The first effect counter 223u and the second effect counter 223v are counters used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223h is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, each time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed, the value is incremented by 1 and updated. Will be done.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It controls the production) and the advance notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 4). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 51).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 4) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

<About the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 26 to 32, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described. FIG. 26 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset is applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by 1. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory generally has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and is, for example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to read and write data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a in the NOR type ROM 234d, specifically, the first program stored in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (command code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initial setting process (see S8002 in FIG. 773) executed after the boot process (see S8001 in FIG. 78) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a is stored, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 32) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 79 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a variable image at power-on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a variable effect when a ball entering the ball entry port 64b1b2 is detected.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S8003 and S8004 in FIG. 77).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 27. In FIG. 27, immediately after the power is turned on by the display control device 114, the power is turned on by the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 27 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is the instruction command for starting the variation, is received, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 27 (b). As shown in FIG. 27, on the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, a “○” symbol at the lower right position facing the screen and a variable image when the power is turned on, and “○” as shown in FIG. 27 (c). At the same position as the symbol, the image of the "x" symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 27 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 27 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, the player starts the game while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entry port 64b1, the left second ball entry port 64b2, or the second ball entry port. When the ball entering the 640 is detected, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and FIG. 27 (b). The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 so that the images shown in (c) and (c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball entering the first ball entry port 64b1, the left second ball entry port 64b2, or the second ball entry port 640 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 26, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 28, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a range of four types of rear images and a rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 28 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing " FIG. 28B shows the back side A corresponding to the "city stage", and the back sides B to D corresponding to the "forest stage", the "river stage", and the "sky stage", respectively. .. Further, FIG. 29 is shown with respect to the back surface E corresponding to the “island stage”.

As shown in FIG. 28, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A to D, an image that is horizontally longer than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A to D (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The rear image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the change of the back type is decided based on the back type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "empty stage", MPU231 will be First, the area between the position a and the position a'of the corresponding rear image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c so as to flow toward the left with a smooth connection.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 29, the rear image on the back surface E has a third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... In FIG. 29 with the passage of time. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, on the back surface E, the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in a fixed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the sky image spreading on the mountain changes with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", the rear image shown in FIG. 29 (a) is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 29 (a), an orange sky indicating a morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the back image shown in FIG. 29 (b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 29 (b), a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black with the lapse of time, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 29 (c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 29 (c), a black sky indicating the night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually begins to turn white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 29 (a) is returned, and the back images of FIGS. 29 (a) to 29 (c) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 28A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 in which all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d are stored. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage "city stage" is displayed, so the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed "city stage" is displayed. By making all of them resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "empty stage" are a part of the back surface as shown in FIG. 28 (b). That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Further, the rear surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 29 (a), and the image data corresponding to the rear image between FIGS. 29 (a) to 29 (c) excluding FIG. 29 (b) is obtained after the power is turned on. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and is resident in the start-up process.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but if this is done, the resident video RAM 235 will be resident. As a result, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image first displayed when the stage is changed is the range from the position a to the position a'(or the range of FIGS. 29 (a) to 29 (b)). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 29 (a) and 29 (b)) is transferred to the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, when the stage change is decided by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back surfaces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone changes with the passage of time. It can be displayed while making it. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored in the back surfaces B to D, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surfaces B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is directed from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. While scrolling, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the image at the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, on the back surface E, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the images of FIGS. 29 (a) to 29 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 29 (a), so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 29 (b) to (c) and 29 (c) to (a) can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of (b) is set. As a result, while displaying the images of FIGS. 29 (a) to 29 (b), the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 29 (b) to (c) and 29 (c) to (a) are normally used. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images of FIGS. 29 (a) to 29 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the rear image, the images of FIGS. 29 (b) to (c) and FIGS. 29 (c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time. be able to.

In the backs B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 26) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the images between the positions b'and b. Image data to be stored is duplicated. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image controller 237 is controlled. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 26, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable effect after the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64b1, the left second ball entry port 64b2, or the second ball entry port 640. Nevertheless, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbol without the numbers "0" to "9", a main symbol imitating an animal character or a predetermined mark (for example, a triangular mark) is imitated. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol (blank symbol) is also resident. These image data are used for the demo effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", "girl", "monster", "rabbit", and "turtle" are displayed according to various productions. When the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e and the display control device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 corresponds to the character ROM 234. Instead of reading out new image data, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image by reading out the image data resident in advance in the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the error occurs from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a definite display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , A display data table corresponding to the round effect, ending effect, and demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A or jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will start from now on. This is a production for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special gaming state.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α-blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as effects that express the insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is specified for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type is the back A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information is described that specifies whether to display one of them or to display a rear image different from the rear images A to E. Further, as the back surface type, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to E, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to E, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be specified as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing by the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 30). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 32) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable staging images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of staging images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, is resident among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 31). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data for which the transfer should be started does not exist corresponding to the address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 31).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 31, in the example of FIG. 31). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is the display data table. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 32) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 31, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified in the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 77) (see S8005 in FIG. 77). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S9605 in FIG. 89 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S8301 in FIG. 79 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S8308 in FIG. 79 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 79B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 79 (b) S8309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 80 to 85) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 86 to 88) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S9501 in FIG. 89 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 89 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 90) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 32) described later, which describes drawing instructions, is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Null data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (see FIG. 32) that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 79 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S9205 in FIG. 88) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list to be described later. (See FIG. 32) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 32, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as (design). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, composition processing with other sprites is performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information to create an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 79 (b). ) Is executed, the time counting counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S9207 in FIG. 86). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S8002 in FIG. 77) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S9713 in FIG. 90). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S9714 in FIG. 90). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S9802 in FIG. 92).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when the value is "1", it is set to "0". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see S8306 in FIG. 79 (b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The rear image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the rear image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the rear image is changed, and if it is off, it means that the change is not performed. The rear image change flag 233w is set to on when the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S9001 in FIG. 85 (a)). Further, the rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S9709 in FIG. 90), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S9710 in FIG. 90). As a result, it is possible to display the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the effect mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The rear image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set rear image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to on for the rear image discrimination flag 233x (FIG. 85 (a). ) S9002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back type can be easily specified.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demo is being produced. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demo is being produced, and if it is off, it means that the demo is not being produced. This demo display flag 233y is set to on when the demo display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S9221 in FIG. 86), and the demo display data table is set. It is set to off when other display data tables other than are set for the display data table buffer 233d (S8505 in FIG. 81 (a), S8705 in FIG. 82 (a), S8805 in FIG. 82 (b). , See S8905 in FIG. 83). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demo is currently being produced.

The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmation display effect is being executed. Here, the definite display effect indicates an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the definite display flag 233z is on, it means that the definite display effect is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the definite display effect is not in progress. The confirmation display flag 233z is set to on when the confirmation display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 86) (S9214 in FIG. 86), and is other than the confirmation display data table. It is set to off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S8505 in FIG. 81 (a), S8705 in FIG. 82 (a), S8805 in FIG. 82 (b), FIG. See S8905 in 83). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the current confirmation display effect is in progress.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 33 to 57. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 479, 99, 239, 232), respectively, it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with the entry of the ball into the first entry opening 64b1 (starting winning) and the entry of the ball into the second entry opening 640 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 34 to 48.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through is accompanied by the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. The gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. After the through-gate passage process is executed, the launch control process is then executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). In the special symbol variation processing (FIGS. 34 and S104), the first special symbol and the second special symbol are subjected to various determinations (hit / fail determinations) and determinations based on the acquired counter values, and the determinations are made by predetermined control. In the variable display mode, various commands for controlling the variable display to be possible on the first symbol display device 37 and for executing the variable display effect of the third symbol and the fourth symbol on the third symbol display device 81 are executed. Control is executed to set or stop and display the determination result (hit / fail determination result) in the display mode. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 34, S104) will be described.

In the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 34, S104), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (during the jackpot) (S201). Here, based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203k, it is determined whether the current state of the game is a big hit game (during a big hit) or a small hit game (during a small hit). In the process of S201, if it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S201: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S202), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S201, when it is determined that the present is not a big hit (S201: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is larger than 0, that is, the first special symbol is variable display. It is determined whether it is inside (S203). If it is determined that the variation of the first special symbol is being displayed (the value of the variation time counter 203r of the special figure 1 is larger than 0) (S203: Yes), the process of executing the variation of the first special symbol is executed (. S204).

In this first special symbol change execution processing (S204), in order to change (update) the variation display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 during the period when the first special symbol is changing. Processing is executed. Then, when the processing of S204 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r updated in the first special symbol fluctuation executing processing (S204) is 0 (S205), and S205. If it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is 0 in the process of (S205: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process is executed (S206), and the process proceeds to the process of S208 described later.

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S206), when the fluctuation time specified for the first special symbol during the fluctuation display has elapsed, the fluctuation display is stopped with the symbol showing the lottery result of the first special symbol. Is executed. Further, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S206), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the second special symbol being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a deviation. Is executed. Further, when the second special symbol being executed has won the jackpot, a process for erasing the information regarding the jackpot is executed. The details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S206) will be described later with reference to FIG. 39. If it is determined in the process of S205 that the fluctuation time counter 203r in FIG. 1 is not 0 (S205: No), the process of S206 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S208.

On the other hand, in the process of S203, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is not larger than 0 (0) (S203: No), that is, when it is determined that the present is not in the special figure 1 fluctuation. Next, the first special symbol change start processing is executed (S207). In this first special symbol change start processing (S207), a process for executing a new lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is performed, and a new lottery (variation) can be executed. If it is in a state where a new lottery (variation) can be executed, a process of performing a new lottery (variation) is executed. The first special symbol change start processing (S207) will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37.

After executing the first special symbol change start process (S207), after determining that the special figure 1 is changing (S205: No) in the process of S205, or after performing the first special symbol change stop process (S206). After the execution, next, the variation processing (S208 to S212) relating to the second special symbol is executed.

First, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is larger than 0 (S208). That is, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol (special figure 2) is currently being displayed in a variable manner. If it is determined in the processing of S208 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is not larger than 0 (0) (S208: No), it means that the current is not during the special figure 2 fluctuation. In addition, a second special symbol change start process (S209) for executing a new lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed (S209), and this process is terminated.

In the second special symbol change start processing (S209), if the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol hold ball number storage area 203b, the jackpot determination and the change pattern selection based on the hold data are performed. The process is executed. Further, in the second special symbol change start processing (S209), when the lottery result is a big hit, the special figure 2 big hit flag 203j is set to ON.

On the other hand, in the processing of S208, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is larger than 0, that is, the present is currently changing in special figure 2 (S208: Yes), then the second The processing during execution of the special symbol change is executed (S210). The content of the second special symbol variation executing process (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG. 44, but the process having the same content as the above-mentioned first special symbol variation executing process (S204) is to be processed. Is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol and executed.

Then, when the second special symbol change execution processing (S210) is completed, it is determined whether the value of the current special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is 0 (S211), and if it is determined to be 0 (S211). : Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process is executed (S212), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S211 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is not 0 (S211: No), the process of S212 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S212) will be described later with reference to FIG. 45, but like the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S206), it is defined in the second special symbol during the variation display. When the fluctuation time has elapsed, the process of stopping the fluctuation display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed.

As described above with reference to FIG. 34, in the present embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel). In, the variation processing (S203 to S207) relating to the first special symbol and the variation processing (S208 to S212) relating to the second special symbol are executed in one special symbol variation processing. Therefore, when a new lottery (variation) can be executed for each special symbol, the variation processing can be executed without delay, and a smooth game can be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, in one special symbol variation process, the variation process related to the first special symbol is executed before (priority) the variation process related to the second special symbol. By clearly setting the processing order of each special symbol in this way, even if the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol and the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol are the same, priority is given to the first. 1 The fluctuation stop processing of the special symbol will be executed.

In the present embodiment, the variation processing related to the first special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the variation processing related to the second special symbol, but the variation is not limited to this, and the variation related to the second special symbol is not limited to this. The process may be configured to be executed in preference to the variable process relating to the first special symbol.

Further, it may be configured to preferentially execute the variation processing for the special symbol type in which the lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed in the set gaming state, and the player may execute according to the set gaming state. If the pachinko machine 10 switches the special symbol type in which the lottery is executed, it is preferable to provide a means for switching the order of the special symbol type in which the variation processing is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the lottery result of the lottery that is advantageous to the player from disappearing (destroying) due to the lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the first special symbol variation start processing (S207), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 34), will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing (S207).

In the first special symbol change start processing (S207 in FIG. 35), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the acquired first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired. It is determined whether the value (N1) is larger than 0 (S302). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S303). ).

Then, a hold ball number command indicating the number of hold balls after subtraction is set (S304), and the data stored in the hold area 1 to the hold area 4 of the first special symbol hold ball number storage area 203a is executed in the execution area. The process of shifting to the side in order is performed (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 35) will be described in detail later, but the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is used. Based on the set game state, the jackpot determination of whether or not it is a jackpot is executed.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S307). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) will be described in detail later, but is based on the result of the hit / fail determination based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol hold ball execution area (not shown). This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on each counter value. Then, the game number update process (S308) is executed, and this process is terminated. The game number update process (S308) will be described in detail later, but a process for updating the game state is executed by subtracting the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the time reduction counter 203h.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S207 in FIG. 35), will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 36), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S401). Then, in order to determine whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation state, latent probability state) of the special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203g is larger than 0 (the value of the probability variation counter 203g is larger than 0). S402). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is larger than 0 (that is, it is a high probability state of the special symbol) (S402: Yes), it is based on the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 15A). , It is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S401 matches the jackpot determination value in the high probability state, and the lottery result (determination result) is acquired (S403).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (that is, it is a low probability state of the special symbol) (S402: No), the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 15A) is displayed. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value in the low probability state, and the lottery result (determination result) is acquired (S404).

After finishing the processing of S403 or S404, next, it is determined whether the lottery result of this time is a big hit (S405), and if it is determined to be a big hit (S405: Yes), the big hit of the first special symbol is won. As shown, the jackpot flag 203n is set to ON (S406). In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203n is configured to be able to store (set) information indicating the type of the special symbol for which the jackpot has been won, in addition to the information indicating whether or not the jackpot has been won. Information indicating the presence or absence of a big hit can be set for each symbol type. Therefore, in the process of S406, the information indicating the jackpot is set for the region corresponding to the first special symbol among the jackpot flags 203n.

Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a jackpot (S407), and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the acquired value of the hit type counter C2 (S407). S408), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S405 that the result of the lottery this time is not a big hit (S405: No), the out-of-order symbol of the first special symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S409), and this process is terminated. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S207 in FIG. 35), will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 37), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 36), whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, that is, It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501). Here, the determination as to whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203i is set to ON for the first special symbol. The first jackpot flag 203i is set to ON in the process of S406 in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 36).

When it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (S501: Yes), the big hit type is determined from the special figure 1 table 202d1 (S502), and the process proceeds to S503. On the other hand, in the process of S501, if it is determined that the result of the special drawing 1 lottery this time is not a big hit (S501: No), the process of S502 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S503.

After the processing of any of S501 and S502 is completed, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol execution area is acquired (S503) and stored in the game state storage area 203k. The variation pattern selection table 202e corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state) corresponding to the information is read out (S504).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S503 and the variation pattern selection table 202e read in the process of S504 (S505), and based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S505. Then, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is set (S506).

Next, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set (S507), the variation start of the first special symbol is set by the first symbol display device 37 (S508), and the selected variation pattern is set. The value indicating the fluctuation time of No. 1 is set to the value of the fluctuation time counter 203r in FIG. 1 (S509), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the first special symbol variation executing process (S204), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 34), will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation executing process (S204). In this first special symbol change execution processing (S207), the change time and display of the first special symbol being changed are updated.

In the first special symbol change execution processing (S204), first, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is subtracted and updated (S701), and the display of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated. (S702), this process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 34 S104) in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34) executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33) executed every 2 milliseconds. (See S204 of FIG. 38) is configured to be executed, and the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is updated (1 subtracted) in the first special symbol variation executing process (see S204 of FIG. 38). It is configured as follows. Therefore, for example, when a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, "15000" is set as the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r, and the value is 1 every 2 milliseconds. It is configured to be subtracted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S206), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 34), will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S206). In this first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S206), when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is "0" at present, that is, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is determined. This is the process that is executed when it has passed.

When the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S206 in FIG. 39) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S801). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON for the first special symbol (S801: Yes), is the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s larger than 0? Whether or not it is determined (S802). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is larger than 0 (S802: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S803), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag is set. A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that 203o is turned on is set (S804).

Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as an off symbol (S805), and the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s is set to 0 (S806). As a result, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a big hit, the variable display of the second special symbol (special figure 2) being executed is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the deviation (off symbol). (Confirmed display) can be displayed.

After finishing the processing of S806, next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203j is set to on (S807), and if it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203j is set to on (S807). : Yes), in order to apply the lottery result of the 2nd special symbol to the 2nd special symbol that was forcibly stopped and displayed in the process of S805 described above, the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203j is set to off. (S808), the stored information for the special figure 2 jackpot is deleted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. On the other hand, in the processing of S807, if it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the lottery of the second special symbol (S807: No), the processing of S808 and S809 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S810.

In the processing of S810, first, the jackpot scenario won by this special symbol change is set (S810), then the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203i is set to off, and the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the time reduction counter 203h are set to 0. It is set (S811), and information indicating that the current gaming state is during a big hit (during a jackpot game) is stored in the gaming state storage area 203k (S812). The game state storage area 203k is configured so that the game state related to the lottery game (normal state, probability change state, time saving state) and the game state related to the winning game (during the big hit) can be stored separately. By executing the process of, the game state (normal state, probability change state, time saving state) related to the lottery game at the timing when the big hit is won and the game state indicating that the big hit is in progress are stored.

With this configuration, it is possible to determine the game state set at the timing when the jackpot is won at the end of the jackpot game.

When the processing of S812 is completed, next, a special figure 1 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the first special symbol is set (S813), and the first special symbol display device is set. The process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is variablely displayed in 37 is executed (S814), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S801, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203n is not set to ON for the first special symbol (S801: No), the processing of S802 to S812 is skipped and the above-mentioned S813 Move to processing.

As described above, in the first special symbol variation stop process (S206), the process (S810 to S814) of stopping the variation display with the symbol showing the result of the lottery (first lottery game) of the first special symbol is executed. If the lottery result this time is a big hit (S801: Yes), the second special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped and displayed so that the lottery result is out of order (S805). In this way, in the process of stopping display (confirmed display) of one special symbol with the symbol indicating the jackpot, by configuring to execute the process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol that is changing, at the same time. Appropriate processing can be executed for a plurality of special symbol fluctuations to be executed.

That is, in a configuration in which the variation processing related to the first special symbol and the variation processing related to the second special symbol are executed in order like the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the execution is performed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. By executing the variation processing (forced stop processing) of the second special symbol within the variation processing related to the first special symbol, the second special symbol is forcibly stopped at the timing when the variation processing related to the second special symbol is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the processing related to the second special symbol from being duplicated, and the processing can be smoothly executed.

In this embodiment, it is configured to execute a process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol at the timing indicating that one special symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol indicating a big hit. Not limited to, for example, when it is determined that one of the special symbols has won the jackpot, that is, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 36) ( In S405: Yes) of FIG. 36, the fluctuation of the other special symbol may be forcibly removed and stopped at the symbol. In this case, it is preferable to configure the other special symbol that has been forcibly disengaged and stopped to execute a special fluctuation that does not win the jackpot until the jackpot fluctuation of one special symbol ends. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the fluctuation of the special symbol of the other is forcibly stopped when the jackpot is won with the special symbol of one. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether or not the jackpot has been won by determining that the other special symbol change has been forcibly stopped and displayed.

In addition, when controlling the fluctuation of the other special symbol being executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol, the variation control content is configured to be different according to the lottery result of the other special symbol being executed. However, for example, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, and the lottery for the second special symbol is in a fluctuation (out-of-order fluctuation) to indicate that the lottery is out of order, the lottery may be performed. If the result is discarded and the forced stop process for forcibly stopping the deviation fluctuation is executed, and the lottery result of the second special symbol is in the fluctuation (hit fluctuation) to show that it is a big hit, the first After the jackpot game of one special symbol is completed, the interruption process may be executed so that the change of the second special symbol can be resumed.

In this case, while making the player interested in whether the new second special symbol change is executed or the suspended second special symbol change is restarted after the jackpot game of the first special symbol is completed. You can play games. Further, when such a configuration is used, it is configured to execute a suggestion effect for suggesting the situation (whether or not it is interrupted) of the second special symbol during the jackpot game of the first special symbol to the player. Then it is good.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a game that is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 35) and also one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S209 of FIG. 41) described later. The number-of-times update process (S308) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this game number update process (S308).

In the game number update process (S308), first, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0 or more, that is, whether the game state is the time reduction state (S851). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 or more (S851: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S852). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203h subtracted in the process of S852 is 0 (S853). When it is determined that the value of the subtracted time reduction counter 203h is 0 (S853: Yes), since it is the end timing of the time reduction state, the game state corresponding to the game state storage area 203k is set (S854). The process proceeds to S855. On the other hand, in the process of S851, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 or more (that is, it is 0) (S8511: No), it is not necessary to subtract the value of the time saving counter 203h, so that S852 -The process of S854 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S855.

After the processing of S851 or S854 is completed, it is next determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 or more, that is, whether the gaming state is the probability variation state (S855). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 or more (S855: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (S856). Then, next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203g subtracted in the process of S856 is 0 (S857). When it is determined that the value of the subtracted probability change counter 203g is 0, since it is the end timing of the probability change state, the game state corresponding to the game state storage area 203k is set (S858), and the process proceeds to S859. ..

On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation counter 203g is not 0 or more in the processing of S855 (S855: No), or when it is determined in the processing of S857 that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is not 0 (S857: No). , S859. In the process of S859, a state command indicating the value of the time reduction counter 203h, the value of the probability variation counter 203g, and the game state being set is set (S859), and this process is terminated.

Next, the second special symbol variation start processing (S209), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 34), will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change start processing (S209).

When the second special symbol change start process (S209) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 2 change stop flag 203o is set to ON (S901). That is, the lottery of the first special symbol (first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 36)) executed immediately before this process is executed (in the same special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34)). )) Determines whether or not the jackpot was won.

In the process of S901, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S9011: Yes), various processes for starting the fluctuation of the second special symbol are skipped, and the special figure 2 is skipped. The fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to off (S902), and this process is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 36), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, and the second It is prohibited to execute a new second special symbol change after the special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed by the off symbol. As a result, even if the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the variation processing related to the first special symbol, the control process can be executed without causing a problem.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to on in the process of S901 (S901: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set to off. Therefore, by setting the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, the second special symbol change start process (S212 in FIG. 41) can be skipped only once.

This is a lottery of the first special symbol (first special symbol) executed immediately before the second special symbol variation start process (S209) is executed (in the same special symbol variation process (see S104 of FIG. 34)). Only when the jackpot is won in the jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 36), if the second special symbol change start process (S209 in FIG. 41) executed immediately after is skipped, the first special symbol jackpot is subsequently executed. The jackpot game is started based on the jackpot information (big hit scenario) set in the determination process (see S306 in FIG. 36), and the jackpot game is completed by the process of S201 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34). This is because the second special symbol change start process (S209 in FIG. 41) is not executed until this is done.

With this configuration, it is possible to simplify the process of skipping the variation process of the other special symbol based on the lottery result of one special symbol, so that the control process executed by the main control device 110 can be simplified. The processing load can be reduced.

In this embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (big hit winning), the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed (stopped and displayed by a missed symbol), and one special symbol is displayed. In order to prevent new fluctuations (lottery) of the other special symbol from being executed until the jackpot game based on the symbol lottery result is executed, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set and the fluctuation processing of the other special symbol is performed. Is used, but other configurations may be used.

In other words, if the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (big hit winning), do not win the big hit in the other special symbol lottery (variation) until the big hit game based on the big hit winning is completed. It may be configured, and for example, when the jackpot control process (see S2404 in FIG. 54) for executing the jackpot game is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53) of the main control device 110 described later, the special figure 2 The fluctuation stop flag 203o may be configured to be set to off.

With this configuration, even if the timing to turn on the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is set before the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol, until the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to prohibit the execution of a new second special symbol change (lottery).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the second special symbol change start process (see S209 in FIG. 41) is executed with the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o set to ON, the change of the second special symbol is executed. It is configured to skip the process, that is, not to start a new fluctuation (keep the second special symbol stopped), but the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is turned on. If it is set, it may be configured to execute the variable display of the second special symbol dedicated to it.

In this case, the second special symbol is drawn using the special lottery that does not win the jackpot, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for the period corresponding to the variation pattern determined based on the result of the special lottery. It may be configured, or the period until the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning of the first special symbol is executed without executing the lottery of the second special symbol, and the period until the specific timing during the jackpot game is reached. Alternatively, the second special symbol may be varied and displayed during the period until the jackpot game ends. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol change has been forcibly stopped.

The content of the variation processing related to each of the above-mentioned special symbols is configured to be appropriately output to the voice lamp control device 113 side by setting a command indicating the content, and is configured to be output to the voice lamp control device 113 side as appropriate. The variable display of the third symbol and the fourth symbol displayed in the main display area Dm of 81 is configured to be synchronized with the display mode of each special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 described above. However, while the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is forcibly stopped, a command indicating that the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. In this case, the third symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol that is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used to execute the variable effect during forced stop. Is also good.

In this way, the actual second special is used on the third symbol display device 81, which is easy for the player to visually recognize, by using each symbol (third symbol, fourth symbol) that is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. Even when the symbol is configured to execute the variation effect during the forced stop, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol variation is forcibly stopped.

In the process of S901, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o is not set to ON, that is, the first special symbol is not stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol (S901: No), S903 to S910. Is executed, and this process is terminated. In the processes of S903 to S910, the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d and the first special symbol hold are performed for each of the above-mentioned first special symbol change start processes (S210 in FIG. 35) from S301 to S308. The value of the ball counter (N1), the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), and the second special symbol holding ball number. For the counter 203e, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter (N2), the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908), and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S909). Since they are the same except for the changed points, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S209 in FIG. 41), will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908). In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908), the type of the target special symbol is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol for the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 36). And some other processing was added.

The second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908 in FIG. 42) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 36) in the following points. That is, in the process of S1001 corresponding to the process of S401, the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) was changed to the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and S406 to S409. The difference is that the target is changed from the special figure 1 (first special symbol) to the special figure 2 (second special symbol) in the processes of S1006 to S1009 corresponding to the process of. Since the other processes are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S209 in FIG. 41), will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906).

The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906 in FIG. 43) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 37) in the following points. In the process of S1201 corresponding to the process of S501, the special figure 1 lottery result (the lottery result of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (the lottery result of the second special symbol), and S506 to S507. In each process of S1206 to S1207 corresponding to each process up to, the special figure 1 variation pattern command (variation pattern command of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 variation pattern command. Since other points are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (S210), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 34), will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation executing process (S210). The second special symbol variation executing process (S210) is updated in each of the processes S1401 to S1402 corresponding to the processes of S701 to S702 with respect to the above-mentioned first special symbol variation executing process (S204 in FIG. 38). The difference is that the target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, and from the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203r to the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203s. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S212), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 34), will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S212). In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S212), the processing target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol with respect to the above-mentioned first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S206 in FIG. 39). It's different. Since other points are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the control of the variation display between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be independently and in parallel to be executed. The special symbol and the second special symbol can be variablely displayed at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to execute a lottery game with more special symbols within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that the player will be given a big hit within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

Further, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variablely displayed at the same time and the lottery game is executed, if the jackpot game occurs on one of the first or second special symbols, the other Since the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105 in FIG. 45) determines which of the first entry port 64b1, the left second entry opening 64b2, and the second entry opening 640 the ball has entered (starting winning), and starts. If a prize is won, each counter value acquired up to the maximum number of holdings (maximum 4 at the first entry port 64b1, maximum 4 at the left second entry opening 64b2, and maximum 4 at the second entry opening 640) is used. This is a process of storing the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, respectively.

Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is stored. Alternatively, a process (so-called look-ahead process) for predicting a hit / fail determination result, a selected fluctuation pattern, or the like is executed in advance based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol reserved ball storage areas 203b. .. Hereinafter, the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 46) will be described.

In the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first entry opening 64b1 which is the first starting opening (starting winning) (S1701). Here, the ball enters the ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball entry port 64b1. It is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64b1 (there was a start prize) (S1701: Yes), and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S1702). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703).

That is, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for the first ball slot 64b1 is less than the upper limit of four at the present time (that is, whether or not the number of reserved balls is stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is added by 1 (1704), and the voice lamp control device 113 A hold ball number command for notifying the hold number of the first start port (the number of hold of the lottery right of the first special symbol) is set (S1705).

Then, each value of various counter values (first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, variation type counter CS1) is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball execution area of RAM 203 is used. Each is reserved (stored) in the storage area of the corresponding number of reserved balls of 203a (S1706).

Next, the first look-ahead process is executed (S1707). The first look-ahead process (S1707) will be described later with reference to FIG. 47, but the hit / fail determination result and the fluctuation pattern determined from each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. , The process of determining the stop type, etc. is executed. In this embodiment, it is configured to execute a process of discriminating a hit / fail judgment result, a determined fluctuation pattern, a stop type, etc. based on each newly stored counter value, but the present embodiment is limited to this. Without a hitch, for example, when there is a new start winning prize, the hit / fail determination result and the determined fluctuation pattern for all the reserved storages stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, It may be configured to execute a process for determining the stop type and the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, that is, when the lottery right of the first special symbol is newly acquired, the first special symbol is obtained. The content of the lottery right (winning information) is determined in advance, but the lottery right (winning information) of the second special symbol is not limited to this, and when the lottery right of the first special symbol is newly acquired. ) May be configured to be determined in advance.

Then, when the process of S1707 is executed, the process of S1708 is executed next. Further, when it is determined in the process of S1701 that the ball has not entered the first ball entry port 64b1 (S1701: No), or in the process of S1703, the number of reserved balls for the first ball entry port 64b1 is the upper limit at present. When it is determined that the value is (S1703: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S1708.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is added, the first look-ahead process (S1707) based on the added information regarding the winning prize (winning information) is performed. It is configured to be executed, but is not limited to this, for example, when it is determined in the process of S1703 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is the upper limit number (4) (S1703). : No), that is, the first look-ahead process (S1707) can be executed when a ball is inserted into the first entry port 64b1 while the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit. It may be configured so that it can be done. As a result, even when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the player can continuously play the game in order to execute the look-ahead process. In addition, since it is possible to add value when a ball is inserted into the first entry port 64b1 while the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the first special symbol is reserved. It is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play when a ball enters the first entry port 64b1 while the number of balls has reached the upper limit.

Next, each process from S1708 to S1714 is the same as the process performed for winning a ball to the first starting port (first ball entry port 64b1) executed in each process from S1701 to S1707. The only difference is that the process of is executed for the second ball entry port (left second ball entry port 64b2, second ball entry port 640), and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the first look-ahead process (S1707), which is one process of the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the first look-ahead process (S1707).

In the first look-ahead process (S1707 of FIG. 47), first, the random number counter C1 per first and the type counter C2 per first, which are various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area 203a, are used. , Each value of the variation type counter CS1 is read out (S1821). Then, the read data is stored in the vacant storage area of the look-ahead hold storage area in the area where the winning order is the smallest (S1822).

Then, when it is determined that the discrimination result in the processing of S1823 is a big hit (big hit only in the low probability state, big hit only in the high probability state, big hit in any of the low probability state and the high probability state) (S1823: Yes), the big hit type. The first winning command including the information indicating the fluctuation pattern and the information indicating the fluctuation pattern is set (S1824), and the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the discrimination result in the processing of S1823 is not a big hit (the special symbol is out of alignment in both the high probability state and the low probability state) (S1823: No), the information indicating the deviation and the fluctuation pattern are shown. The first winning command including the information is set (S1825), and this process is terminated.

Here, the first winning command set in the process of S1824 or S1825 is used as common information in addition to the above-mentioned information for indicating the winning / failing determination result (information having a different meaning based on the winning / failing determination result). Information for indicating the values of various counter values read out by the process of S1821 is also set. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S2401) executed in the main process (see FIG. 53) of the main control device 110.

On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when the winning command is received, the display mode of the holding ball is changed based on various information included in the winning command (for example, the color of the holding ball is changed to a different color from the usual one). It is possible to execute an effect (pre-reading effect) of displaying (variably) or displaying a notice symbol or the like before the start of the change to suggest the result of the hit / fail judgment to the player.

In the present embodiment, when the look-ahead process is executed, the hit / fail judgment result in the case of the high probability state of the special symbol and the hit / fail judgment result in the case of the low probability state of the special symbol are discriminated, and the result of each determination is determined. It is configured to set a winning command based on, but is not limited to this, for example, a judgment value that is determined to be a big hit regardless of whether the special symbol is in a high probability state or a low probability state ( The value of the random number counter C1 per first) may be specified, and a winning command indicating a big hit of a special symbol may be set only when the determination value is read out.

With this configuration, the winning command indicating the jackpot is output to the voice lamp control device 113 only when it is determined in advance that it is a specific jackpot, so that the look-ahead effect is not executed. It is possible to have a sense of expectation of winning a big hit against fluctuations.

Further, the game state when the special symbol lottery is performed based on the hold storage (winning information) stored (stored) in the first special symbol hold storage area 203a is accurately determined, and based on the game state. It may be configured to execute the pass / fail judgment. In this case, the selection of the fluctuation pattern is not variable depending on the number of reserved balls, but can be determined by selecting a constant fluctuation pattern regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the start of the fluctuation can be determined by determining the fluctuation order until the reserved ball starts to change based on the information stored in the hold.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a new reserved storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a, a look-ahead process based on the winning information is executed, and the look-ahead processing is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning information newly stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a in the look-ahead processing of the main control device 110 (is not limited to this). Even if the information indicating the content (each counter value) of the hold storage) is set as the winning command and the winning / failing judgment result is predicted based on the information included in the winning command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. good.

With such a configuration, the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced. Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 executes a process of determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and determines that the look-ahead effect is to be executed, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 is input. It is preferable to configure it for analysis (prediction of success / failure judgment result). As a result, when the look-ahead effect is not executed, the specific look-ahead process (prediction of the hit / miss determination result) is not executed, so that it is possible to suppress unnecessary control from being executed by the pachinko machine 10. In addition, it is possible to suppress a problem that the result of the pre-reading process executed untitled is illegally acquired by the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a new reserved storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a, a look-ahead process based on the winning information is executed, and the look-ahead processing is performed. However, the present embodiment is not limited to this, and a new hold storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol hold storage area 203a. Therefore, information indicating the look-ahead result based on all the winning information stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a may be set as the first winning command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, a second look-ahead process (S1714), which is one process of the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the second look-ahead process (S1714). The second look-ahead process (S1714 in FIG. 48) is based on the above-mentioned first look-ahead process (S1707 in FIG. 47) in which a ball enters the first start port (first entry port 64b1) (starting prize). While the process is to determine (look ahead) the pending data (winning information) in advance and make various judgments, the second start is based on the winning information based on the start winning of the target to be judged at the first starting port. It is only the point that the winning information is changed based on the start winning at the mouth (left second entrance 64b2, second entrance 640), and the other details are the same because the same processing is executed. The explanation is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, a normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol), the opening time of the electric accessory 64a, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation processing (S106 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S2001). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64a is performed after the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83 (after the hit symbol is stopped and displayed). Includes up to the middle (until the winning game is over). If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S2001: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S2001: No), it is determined whether the ordinary symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S2002). If it is determined that the normal symbol is not changing, that is, it is determined that a new normal symbol change (lottery) can be executed (S2002: No), then the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f. (M) is acquired (S2003), and it is determined whether the value is larger than 0 (S2004).

If it is determined in the process of S2004 that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S2004: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S2004: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S2005). That is, if it is determined in the processing of S2004 that the condition for executing a new normal symbol change (the winning information to be used for the normal symbol change is stored on hold) is satisfied, it is stored on hold. In order to execute the normal symbol variation using the winning information, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1.

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S2006). In the process of S2006, the data stored in the normal symbol hold 1 to the normal symbol hold 4 of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, normal symbol hold 1 → execution area, normal symbol hold 2 → normal symbol hold 1, normal symbol hold 3 → normal symbol hold 2, normal symbol hold 4 → normal symbol hold 4 and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S2007).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0, that is, whether or not the present is a high probability state of the normal symbol (S2008), and the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0. (S2008: Yes), the hit / fail judgment result (lottery result) is acquired based on the hit judgment value of the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 15B) for high probability (S2009). ), The process proceeds to S2011. On the other hand, when the value of the time saving counter 203h is not a value larger than 0 (that is, 0), that is, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the low probability state (S2008: No), the second for low probability time is used. Based on the hit determination value of the hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 15B), the hit / fail determination result is acquired (S2010), and the process proceeds to S2011.

In the processing of S2011, it is determined whether or not the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is a hit (S2011), and if it is determined to be a hit (S2011: Yes), the display mode of "○" is "○". The display mode is set (S2012), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined based on the normal map fluctuation pattern using the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter (S2014). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2011 that the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is not a hit (a miss) (S2011: No), the display mode of "x", which is the display mode at the time of the miss, is set. (S2013), the process proceeds to the above-mentioned process of S2014.

Here, the process for determining the variation time of the normal symbol (process of S2014) will be described using the contents specified in the normal symbol variation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 20). In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation is set to the set probability state of the normal symbol (high probability state, low probability state), the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f (normal symbol holding number), and the normal symbol holding number. It is configured to be variable based on. Then, the ease of entering the ball into the second entry port 640 (the length of the opening period of the electric accessory 640a per unit time) is configured to differ depending on the set fluctuation time of the normal symbol. ing.

As described above, the fluctuation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 20) defines a fluctuation time of 30 seconds when a low probability state of a normal symbol is set. Then, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the winning game (usually) based on the opening pattern in which the opening period of 0.7 seconds is set after the closing period (opening period) of 0.1 seconds. The game per figure) is executed. Therefore, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the game per normal figure is completed by the time the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640, so that the ball is It is configured so that the ball cannot enter the second ball entry port 640.

Then, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the winning game (usually) based on the opening pattern in which the opening period of 0.7 seconds is set after the closing period (opening period) of 0.1 seconds. The game per figure) is executed. Therefore, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second entry port 640 (1.6 seconds after passing through the through gate 67). Since the fluctuation of the normal symbol (variation for 30 seconds) is being executed, the ball is configured so that it cannot enter the second entry port 640, and a low probability state of the normal symbol is set. If this is the case, the game is being executed per game when the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640 (1.6 seconds after passing through the through gate 67). , The ball is configured to be able to enter the second entry port 640.

In this way, by configuring the ball to enter the second entry port 640 according to the length of the fluctuation time of the set normal symbol, the ball enters the second entry port 640. Since the ease of entering the ball can be easily changed according to the game state, various playability can be created.

Further, as described above, the ball is configured to be difficult to enter the second entry port 640 regardless of whether the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than the appropriate range or longer. Therefore, for example, even in a gaming state (for example, a probabilistic state) in which it is necessary to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the second entry port 640.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the normal symbol is set according to the game state of the normal symbol and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol, but the variation pattern of the normal symbol is not limited to this, for example, acquisition. It may be configured so that a different fluctuation time is set based on the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2.

On the other hand, in the process of S2002, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is changing (S2002: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. If it is determined (S2015) and it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S2015: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed in the processing of S2015 (S2015: Yes), then the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S2016). In the process of S2016, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol this time is a win, the second symbol display device 83 is set so that the “◯” symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up). On the other hand, when the lottery of ordinary symbols is out of order, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. That is, the setting for stopping and displaying the display mode set in the process of S2012 or S2013 described above is performed.

When the stop display is set by the processing of S2016, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 ends, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is the second in the display mode set in the processing of S2012 or the processing of S2013. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the symbol display device 83.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (S2017). When it is determined that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (S2017: Yes), a process for setting the opening / closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is not a hit (it is a mistake) (S2017: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the opening / closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a in the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing of determining the hit / fail of the normal symbol (timing of processing S2008 to S2011). Probability of the normal symbol set at the timing of executing the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol and setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a (the timing when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed in the processing of S2015). It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a based on the state (high probability state, low probability state).

That is, in the present embodiment, the variation processing (lottery process) relating to the normal symbol and the variation process (lottery process) relating to the special symbol are configured to be executed independently, and further, the variation process relating to the special symbol (lottery process). The probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol is configured to be variable based on the result of the lottery process). Therefore, depending on the result of the variation processing (lottery processing) related to the special symbol executed in parallel during the period in which the variation processing (lottery processing) relating to the ordinary symbol is being executed, the normal symbol may be determined at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not. At the timing when the high-probability state of the electric accessory 640a is set and the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is set, the low-probability state of the normal symbol may be set.

In such a situation, for example, the opening control mode (opening) of the electric accessory 640a is based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing of determining the hit / fail of the normal symbol. If the pattern) is set, the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long time (the opening pattern executed when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set) while the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. ) There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is determined, and the electric combination is based on the determination result. It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the object 640a. As a result, the electric accessory 640a can be opened in an opening pattern according to the set gaming state.

In the processing of S2017, if it is determined that the lottery result of the current ordinary symbol is a hit (S2017: Yes), then, in order to determine the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the current ordinary symbol. In addition, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0 (S2018), and the value of the time saving counter 203h is not a value larger than 0 (that is, it is 0), that is, the present is a low of the normal symbol. When it is determined to be in the stochastic state (S2018: No), as the open pattern for the low probabilistic state of the normal symbol, the open pattern "0.7 seconds x 1 time" that executes the open for 0.7 seconds once is used. Set (S2019).

On the other hand, in the process of S2018, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0 (S2018: Yes), the opening pattern for the high probability state of the normal symbol is set to open for 0.8 seconds. The opening pattern "0.8 seconds x 1 time" to be executed once is set (S2020). That is, in the present embodiment, the opening pattern for the high probability state of the normal symbol (0.8 seconds x 1 time) is larger than the opening pattern for the low probability state of the normal symbol (0.7 seconds x 1 time). , The electric accessory 640a is configured to be open for a long period of time. Therefore, as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a, the winning game in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is more advantageous to the player than the case where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set (No. 1). 2 The period in which the ball entry port 640 is open is extended). Next, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set based on the opening pattern set in the processing of S2019 or S2020 (S2021), and this processing is terminated.

In this embodiment, the opening control mode of the electric accessory 640a that executes the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol and moves it in the hit game of the normal symbol. The opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the (opening pattern), but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the pass / fail judgment of the normal symbol is performed. The high-probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing, and the high-probability state of the normal symbol is also set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a to be moved by the hit game of the normal symbol. The electric accessory 640a may be configured to be opened for a long time only when the electric accessory 640a is set, or the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set based on the gaming state set at the timing of determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct. It may be configured to be set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal map is determined from the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 20) based on the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2. As shown in FIG. 20, in the normal symbol variation pattern table 202f, the variation pattern of the normal symbol is set according to each game state and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. Except for the probabilistic state (probability change: with electric support), there is only one type of fluctuation pattern, and the same fluctuation time is always determined regardless of the value of the selected normal map fluctuation type counter.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the through gate passage processing execution (S107) executed in the first embodiment is performed. This process is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and if the ball has passed, the second hit. This is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area.

In the through gate passing process (S107 in FIG. 50), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S2101). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S2101: Yes), then it is determined whether the currently set gaming state is the normal state (S2102). If it is determined to be in the normal state (S2102: Yes), it means that the right-handed game is performed in the state in which the normal state is set, so a notification command for indicating a firing abnormality is set (S2103). , S2104.

When the notification command set by the processing of S2103 is output (notified) to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the abnormality notification process, and the third symbol display device 81 displays a firing abnormality. The first abnormality notification mode (not shown) is displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined by the processing of S2102 that the current gaming state is not the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) (S2102: No), then the current gaming state is latent. It is determined whether it is a probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) (S2104), and if it is determined to be a latent probabilistic state (S2104: Yes), a second notification indicating a firing abnormality is made. A command is set (S2105), and the process proceeds to S2106. If it is determined in the process of S2104 that the state is not in the probable change state (in the latent state) (S2104: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2106 as it is.

Here, when the second notification command set by the processing of S2105 is output (notified) to the voice lamp control device 113, the abnormality notification processing is executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and the third symbol display device 81 The second abnormality notification mode (not shown) indicating the firing abnormality is displayed at.

In this way, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is configured to determine that the right-handed game is being executed, in order to determine whether or not the right-handed game is being performed. Since it is not necessary to provide a dedicated detection means (for example, a sensor for detecting that the fired ball has reached the gaming area beyond the variable display device unit 80), the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to easily display different abnormality notification modes by setting different notification commands for indicating a firing abnormality according to the game state set at the time when the right-handed game is being performed. can.

In the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is configured to determine that the right-handed game is being executed, but the right-handed game is being executed. Any other configuration may be used as long as it has a configuration for detecting that, for example, a detection means for detecting that the operation handle 51 has been operated with a strength (operation amount) sufficient to launch a ball into a right-handed region. May be provided.

Returning to FIG. 50, the explanation will be continued. After finishing the processing of S2102 to S2103, the processing of S2104 is executed next. In S2104, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired, and then the value (M) of the acquired normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is not larger than 4 (the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol). Has not reached the upper limit value) (S2105).

If it is determined in the process of S2105 that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 4 (the upper limit value is 4) (S2107: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not larger than 4 (3 or less) (S2105: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set. 1 is added (S2106), a command for the number of reserved balls in the normal figure (a command for indicating the value (M) of the counter for the number of reserved balls in the normal symbol 203f) is set (S2107), and the value of the random number counter C4 per second is set normally. It is stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S2108), and this process is terminated.

Next, the NMI interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power disconnection occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S2201) as a setting of the power supply disconnection occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 52), first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S2301). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S2302). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S2303).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 4) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S2304), and if it is turned on (S2304: Yes), the process shifts to S2312. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S2304: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2305), and if it is not stored (S2305: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S2312 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2305: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S2306), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S2307: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data is destroyed, and the process is shifted to S2312 even in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S2312, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S2312). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S2313, S2314) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the initialization process (S2313, S2314) of the RAM 203 is executed.

In addition, the initialization process (S2313, S2314) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S2313, S2314), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S2313), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S2314). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S2310.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S2304: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (S2305: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S2307: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S2308). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S2309), and the process proceeds to S2310. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S2310). After that, interrupts are permitted (S2311). Then, it shifts to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the counter update process and the power cutoff process are roughly classified.

In the main process (see FIG. 53), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is controlled by each sub. The external output process to be transmitted to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S2401). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the prize corresponding to the number of acquired balls is given to the payout control device 111. Send a ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 34) and the start winning process (see FIG. 46) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output process (S2401 in FIG. 53), various commands set in various processes of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and various items are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Information for setting effects (variable effects, decorative effects, etc.). Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S2402). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2403), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the voice lamp control device 113 is used. A command for executing a jackpot effect is set, and a jackpot control process for opening or closing the variable winning device 65 is executed (S2404).

The detailed contents of the jackpot control process (S2404) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56, but in this jackpot control process (S2404), the variable winning device 65 (hereinafter, winning opening) is used for each round of the jackpot state. Etc.) is opened, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the winning opening or the like (variable winning device 65) has elapsed, or whether the specified number of balls have won in the winning opening or the like (variable winning device 65). Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the winning opening and the like (variable winning device 65) are closed. The opening and closing of the winning opening and the like (variable winning device 65) are repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S2404) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is executed (S2405). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S2021 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 49), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the period set by the processing of S2019 and the processing of S2020 in the normal symbol variation processing is completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S2406). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the first special symbol variation start process (S206 in FIG. 35) or the second special symbol variation start process (S209 in FIG. 41), the variation pattern is set according to the variation pattern. The variable display is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turns off and turns on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35) or the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 41) is completed. In addition, the variation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated, and the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 37) is performed by the first special symbol variation stop process (see S206 in FIG. 39). In the display mode set in S507 of (see), the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the second special symbol, the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by the same processing.

Further, in the present embodiment, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode (big hit symbol) indicating a jackpot, the other special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode (disengaged symbol) indicating a miss. It is configured, and the stop display for that is also executed.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S2407). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S2014 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 49), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process (S2407), when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S2016 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 49), it is executed in the second symbol display device. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the processing of S2012 or the processing of S2013 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 49). Lit display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2408), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2408: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S2409). If the predetermined time has already passed (S2409: Yes), the process is shifted to S2401 and each process after S2401 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S2409: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2410, S2411).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2410). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S2410 (S2411). In the process of S2411, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 is updated in the same manner as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Here, since the execution time of each process of S2401 to S2407 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated randomly, and similarly, the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the general figure variation type counter CS2 are also updated at random. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the processing content for updating the judgment value related to the lottery of the special symbol or the normal symbol, and it is possible to execute the illegal game aiming at the timing when the judgment value corresponding to the hit is acquired. It can be suppressed.

Further, in the process of S2408, if the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2408: Yes), the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 51 has been executed, the processing at the time of power cutoff after S2412 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S2412), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S2413). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S2414), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2415), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S2408 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S2401 to S2407, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S2410 and S2411 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S2401. That is, the process can be started from the process of S2401 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S2301). By setting a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S2401. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S2404) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S2404). This jackpot control process (S2404) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and information for executing various effects according to the jackpot when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol. It is a process for setting (command) and opening or closing a winning opening or the like (specific winning opening 650).

In the jackpot control process (S2404), first, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S2501). Specifically, the processing of S810 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S206 of FIG. 39) or S1509 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 45) is executed, and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol (big hit). If the scenario) is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S2501, when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is the start timing (S2501: Yes), the opening command is set (S2502), and the present process is terminated.

The opening command may be configured to be delayed (variable) according to the game state and the jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is updated regularly (every 4 ms) is provided. Then, when the big hit or the small hit of the special symbol is started, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and then the opening counter is set to a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for the big hit A and 5000 for the big hit B). If this happens, the opening command should be sent. By doing so, for example, in the case of a jackpot in a left-handed game, the time until the start of the jackpot is lengthened, and in the case of a jackpot in a right-handed game, the time until the start of the jackpot is increased. Can be shortened. In the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs during a left-handed game, it is necessary to switch to a right-handed game as a big hit game. According to the above configuration, when a big hit is made in a left-handed game, it is possible to secure a sufficient time to switch to a right-handed game (big hit game). As a result, the operational burden on the player can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the process of S2501, when it is determined that it is not the jackpot start timing of the special symbol (S2501: No), then it is determined whether the current is the jackpot of the special symbol (S2503). In the process of S2503, the game information about the winning game stored in the game state storage area 203k is read out and the determination is performed.

As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. It includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S2503, if it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit (S2503: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is in the jackpot (S2503: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S2504).

If it is determined in the process of S2504 that it is the start timing of a new round (S2504: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S2505). The details of this jackpot operation setting process (S2505) will be described with reference to FIG. 55, but the process corresponding to the open operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type (operation process of the variable winning device 65 and the switching member 650h) Will be executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 55, the jackpot operation setting process (S2505), which is one of the processes in the jackpot control process (S2404 in FIG. 54), will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S2505).

When the jackpot operation setting process (S2505) is executed, first, among the opening operation scenarios set corresponding to the current jackpot, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started this time is set. Read the operation scenario (S2641). The opening operation of the large opening is set based on the data read in S2641 (S2642), and then this process is terminated.

In this way, since each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Problems can be suppressed. Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S2504: Yes in FIG. 54), a round for showing that a new round game is executed. The command is configured to be set. The round command set here is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and is configured so that the progress status for the jackpot game being executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be determined. Therefore, based on the round command received from the main control device 110, it is possible to display in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 which round of the round game is currently in progress.

In the present embodiment, as the round command set by the main control device 110, a round command including information for indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be executed is set, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be configured to set a round command containing only information indicating that a new round game has been started. In this case, a means for measuring the number of round commands received during one big hit game is provided on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and what round is the round game executed this time on the voice lamp control device 113 side? Is calculated, and the display mode of the round number display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be set based on the calculation result. With such a configuration, the amount of information included in the round command set on the main control device 110 side can be reduced, so that the burden on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2504 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S2504: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2506). As for the start timing of the ending effect, the final round in the jackpot game (16th round in the case of jackpot A) is completed, the opening / closing door 65b is closed, and the waiting time (in the present embodiment) which is the ball ejection time. When 3 seconds) has elapsed, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2506: Yes), an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S2507), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2506, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2506: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2508). The end timing of the jackpot is specifically the end timing of the set ending effect. In the process of S2509, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (end timing of the ending effect) (S2509: Yes), the jackpot end process for setting the end of the jackpot is executed (S2509), and this process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the end of the big hit (S2508: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the details of the jackpot end processing (S2512) will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing (S2512). In this jackpot end process (S2512), a process of setting a high probability state of a special symbol or a high probability state of a normal symbol is executed according to the winning jackpot type.

When the jackpot end process (S2512) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type this time is jackpot A or jackpot B (S2701). If it is determined that the jackpot type this time is jackpot A or jackpot B (S2701: Yes), the probability variation counter 203g is the jackpot type in which the probability variation state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game ends. The value is set to 70 (S2702), and the process proceeds to S2703. On the other hand, in the process of S2701 when it is determined that the jackpot type this time is jackpot C (S2701: No), the process of S2702 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2703.

In the process of S2703, 70 is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203h (S2703). Then, a command indicating a change in the gaming state is set (S2704), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 57 to 76, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S4116 is performed by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") (see FIG. 58). ) Is started in the middle of execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 58, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S4113 in FIG. 58), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S4116. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S4116 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S4116 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S4116 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the data is transferred to S4008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the voice lamp control device 113 is being executed during the power-off processing of S4117. MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 58). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4116 is executed, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S4116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), after clearing the work area of the RAM in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4009) and setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), then , Interrupt permission is set (S4011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S4008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the processing of S4004 to S4006 is performed via the processing of S4008. This is the case when the process is reached or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S4010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010).

It should be noted that the reason for skipping the clearing process of S4009 is that when the processing of S4008 is reached from S4004 via the processing of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S4004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S4101 was executed (S4101). If it has not elapsed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4111 without performing the process of S4102 to S4110. In the process of S4101, it is the process related to the display (effect) that S4102 to S4110 determine whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4111 and the variation display setting process of S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S4111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on this, the settings related to the variable display effect can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, a command for transmitting various commands to the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4113 to the display control device 114. The output process is executed (S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process shifts to the process of S4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is a display control device as a command. It is transmitted to 114.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S4107), details will be described later with reference to FIG. 72, but the first frame button 22a or the second frame button 22b operated by the player in order to enhance the effect of the effect. (Hereinafter, when both frame buttons are collectively referred to, they are referred to as frame button 22.) It is set to monitor the input of whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed, and to perform an effect corresponding to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to do. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of button effects are set at the same time, a process of differentiating the button effects to be executed according to the priority is executed based on the information of the button effect hierarchy storage area 223 m. Further, when a plurality of button effects are executed in duplicate, a process for effectively setting the operation of the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b is executed.

After the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S4109, the liquid crystal display execution management process is executed (S4110). After that, the process proceeds to S4111. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the processing of S4110, the command determination processing (S4111) that performs the processing according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to the processing of S4112. The details of this command determination process (S4111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 59.

In the process of S4112, in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed by the display control device 114. Executes the variable display setting process, which is the process set to send to. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 67.

When the processing of S4112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S4115), and the power-off process is executed (S4116). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S4117), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to the process of S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4111). This command determination process (S4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .. Hereinafter, the details of the command determination process (S4111) will be described.

In the command determination process (S4111), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and a special figure is drawn from the main control device 110. 1 It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S4201). Here, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time, hit / miss determination result) of the first special symbol. If it is determined in the process of S4201 that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received (S4201: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start process is executed (S4202), and this process ends. The details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG. 60.

On the other hand, in the process of S4201, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S4201: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110. (S4203). The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

If it is determined in the process of S4203 that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received (S4203: Yes), the special figure 2 variation start process provided in the RAM 223 is executed (S4204), and this process is terminated. The details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 61. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is stored in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 67) described later. , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol). If you do).

If it is determined in the processing of S4203 that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4203: No), then whether or not the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received. (S4205). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4205: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S4206), and this process is terminated. The details of this stop type command reception process (S4206) will be described later with reference to FIG. 62.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received in the processing of S4205 (S4205: No), has the reserved ball number command been received from the main controller 110? Determine (S4207). Here, if it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S4207: Yes), the hold ball number process (S4208) is executed, and this process ends. The details of the reserved ball number processing (S4208) will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

Further, in the process of S4207, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S4207: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4209). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received in the processing of S4209 (S4209: Yes), the information of the winning information command received this time is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S4210), and this processing is terminated. ..

In the process of S4209, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4209: No), then it is determined whether or not the status command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S4211). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S4211: Yes), the status command reception process is executed (S4212), and this process is terminated. The details of this state command reception process (S4212) will be described later with reference to FIG. 64, but the gaming state (normal state, probability change state, latent state) of the pachinko machine 10 based on the state command output from the main control device 110. The process of setting the probability state) and the winning game state (during the big hit) in the slave state setting area 223k is executed.

Next, in the process of S4211 when it is determined that the status command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop related command has been received (S4213). When it is determined that the fluctuation stop-related command has been received in the processing of S4213 (S4213), a display command indicating the corresponding symbol stop is set based on the fluctuation stop-related command received from the main controller 110 (S4214). This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4213, when it is determined that the fluctuation stop related command is not received (S4213: No), it is determined whether the hit related command is received (S4215), and it is determined that the hit related command is received. In the case (S4215: Yes), the hit-related process is executed (S4216), and this process is terminated. The details of the hit-related process (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG. The process for causing the 81 to execute is performed.

If it is determined in the process of S4215 that the hit-related command has not been received (S4215: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S4217), and this process is terminated. In the processing of S4217, if the other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is performed. Is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

The command determination process (S4111 in FIG. 59) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment has been described above. However, in the command determination process (S4111), the order of determining whether or not various commands are received is described. , An order other than the order shown in the present embodiment may be used. For example, the process of determining whether or not a state command has been received is performed by either the special figure 1 variation pattern command or the special figure 2 variation pattern command. The discriminant order may be specified so as to be executed before the process of discriminating whether or not the command has been received.

With this configuration, when the fluctuation pattern command and the status command are output from the main controller 110 at the same time, that is, in the first special symbol variation start processing of the main controller 110 (see S210 in FIG. 35). In this case, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 37) is executed, the special diagram 1 variation pattern command is set, and then the state command indicating that the game state is changed is set. Also, the game state currently set on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be determined before the special figure 1 variation pattern command.

Further, it is necessary to specify the output order of various commands on the main control device 110 side by configuring the voice lamp control device 113 side to specify the reception order of various commands output from the main control device 110. Can be reduced. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S4202). This special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S4202) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is set to the game state set. Accordingly, a process of setting a display mode (main variation variation pattern, slave variation variation pattern) corresponding to the first special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

Then, the display control device 114 has a third symbol based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 67) described later. The display mode to be displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. With this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 in which a plurality of special symbols are variablely displayed at the same time (in parallel), priority is given to the variable display of the third symbol for showing the lottery result of one of the special symbols. Since it can be displayed on, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is set as the gaming state, the ball is made to flow into the ball entry unit 64 (see FIG. 2), and the first ball entry port 64b1 and the left second ball entry port are used. A left-handed game in which a ball is inserted into 64b2 is performed, and the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery are configured to be executed evenly.

In this case, it is conceivable to divide the display area of the third symbol display device 81 evenly and display both the variable display of the lottery result of the special figure 1 and the variable display of the lottery result of the special figure 2. When such a configuration is used, a plurality of variable displays (special figure 1 variable display, special figure 2 variable display) are executed at the same time, and the variable display (off-range fluctuation) indicating that the special figure lottery result is out of order is displayed. There was a problem that the motivation to play was reduced because it was displayed frequently. Further, there is a problem that a plurality of fluctuation displays are executed at different fluctuation speeds, and the eyes of the player who is watching the fluctuation display are tired.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the variation display showing the lottery result of the special figure 1 is set as the main variation display and displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 to show the lottery result of the special figure 2. The variation display is a slave variation display, and is configured to be executed in the small display area Dm4 of the three symbol display devices 81. Then, the special figure 2 variable display in which the dependent variable display is executed is configured to be switched to the main variable display when the lottery result of the special figure 2 satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, a big hit winning).

With this configuration, when the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery are executed evenly, it is difficult for the player to grasp the deviation variation of the special symbol (special figure 2) on the dependent variation display side. Therefore, it is possible to make a big hit with respect to the variable display number (the total number of the variable display number of the special figure 1 and the big hit variable display number of the special figure 2) that is variablely displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Since the ratio of the number of fluctuations indicating winning (the number of times the number of jackpot fluctuations in Special Figure 1 and the number of jackpot fluctuations in Special Figure 2 are added) can be increased, it is apparently higher than the actual jackpot probability. You can make it think that you won the jackpot with a probability.

Further, by configuring the variable display corresponding to one special symbol to be emphasized and executed among the plurality of special symbols, the player can be made to pay attention only to the variable display corresponding to one special symbol. Therefore, the fatigue of the player can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is used as the main variation display during the normal state, and the variation display of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is performed during the probabilistic state and the time saving state. Is configured to be the main variable display. That is, the special symbol to be displayed as the main variation is variably set according to the game state. That is, when the probabilistic state and the time saving state are set as the game state, the game of entering the ball into the second entrance 640 is executed by executing the right-handed game. The special figure 2 lottery is easier to execute than the lottery, and the special figure 1 lottery is hardly executed.

Therefore, during the probable change state and the time saving state, the special figure lottery is actually executed by configuring the variable display corresponding to the special figure 2 lottery (special figure 2 variable display) to be the main variable display. Regardless of this, it is possible to make it difficult for a situation in which variable display is not executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to occur, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

In this embodiment, there is a variation for showing the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state where a plurality of types of special figure lottery (special figure 1 lottery, special figure 2 lottery) are evenly executed. The display is set to be the main variable display, but the display is not limited to this, and the variable display for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery may be the main variable display, and the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure may be used. The benefits that can be given when a big hit is won in 2 lottery (the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game and the game state that is set after the big hit game is over) are different, and it is easy to give advantageous benefits to the player. The variable display corresponding to the special symbol on the side may be configured to be set as the main variable display.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special figure type to be the main variation display is variably set according to the set game state, but the special figure type to be the main variation display is variably set under different conditions. For example, in a gaming state in which a plurality of types of special drawing lottery (special drawing 1 lottery, special drawing 2 lottery) are evenly executed, a waiting state in which the special drawing lottery is not executed is in progress. It is preferable to configure the variable display corresponding to the special drawing lottery executed earlier to be the main variable display. As a result, even though the lottery conditions for the special drawing lottery (starting prize at the entrance) are satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the special symbol for which the lottery was executed earlier is set to the secondary variable display. It is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted because the variable display is not executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the player may be configured to select which special symbol is to be the main variable display.

When the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see S4202 in FIG. 60) is set, first. The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to on (S4301), the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command (S4302), and the detailed display mode is selected using the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a. ).

Next, the information set (stored) in the slave state setting area 223k (information indicating the current gaming state) is read out, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal state (S4304). If it is determined in the processing of S4304 that the current state is the normal state (S4304: Yes), a display command indicating the special figure 1 main fluctuation pattern is issued in order to make the fluctuation display of the first special symbol the main fluctuation display. Set (S4305) and end this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4304 that the current game state is not the normal state (time saving state, probability change state) (S4304: No), the change display of the second special symbol becomes the main change display. Since it is in a state (because the variation display of the first special symbol is a gaming state in which the slave variation display is used), a display command indicating the special figure 1 slave variation pattern is set (S4306), and this process is terminated.

Here, when a display command indicating the main fluctuation pattern of Special Figure 1 is set, it is output to the display control device 114 by the command output process (see S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 58) of the voice lamp control device 113. And stored in the display control device 114 side. When the display control device 114 receives a display command related to the special figure 1 fluctuation while the command indicating the special figure 1 main fluctuation pattern is stored, the display content corresponding to the command is displayed as the third symbol. Image data is generated so as to be displayed in the main display area Dm of the device 81. On the other hand, when the display control device 114 receives the display command related to the special figure 1 variation while the command indicating the special figure 1 slave variation pattern is stored, the display content corresponding to the command is the third symbol. It is controlled so that it is not displayed in the main display area Dm of the display device 81.

In this way, regardless of the setting status of the main fluctuation display and the slave fluctuation display, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the display command indicating the fluctuation effect corresponding to each special figure fluctuation, and the display control device 114 side. , Voice lamp control by configuring to generate image data to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the setting status of the main variation display and the slave variation display and the received display command. It is possible to omit the process of discriminating the setting status of the main variation display and the subordinate variation display on the device 113 side and setting the display command indicating the variation effect corresponding to the discrimination result, and the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. It can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204). This special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4204) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is set to the game state set. Accordingly, a process of setting a display mode (main variation variation pattern, slave variation variation pattern) corresponding to the second special symbol (special diagram 2) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

Then, the display control device 114 has a third symbol based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 67) described later. The display mode to be displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. Hereinafter, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204) will be described.

When the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4204) is set, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to ON (S4351), and the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command (S4352). , A detailed display mode is selected using the variation pattern selection table 222a (S4353).

Next, the information set (stored) in the slave state setting area 223k (information indicating the current gaming state) is read out, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal state (S4354). When it is determined in the process of S4354 that the current state is not the normal state (normal state, probable change state), that is, (S4354: No), the variation display of the second special symbol is the subordinate gaming state. Special Figure 2 A display command indicating the main fluctuation pattern is set (S4355), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4354 that the gaming state is the normal state (S4354: Yes), the variation display of the second special symbol is the subordinate gaming state (the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed). (Because it is the main gaming state), a display command indicating the special figure 2 follow-up variation pattern is set (S4356), and this process is terminated.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol (lottery) and the variation of the second special symbol (lottery) are executed simultaneously (in parallel), both special symbols are executed. While simultaneously displaying the variation effect display (variation display of the third symbol and the fourth symbol) corresponding to the variation display of the third symbol display device 81, each special symbol (first symbol) is set according to the game state to be set. By configuring the display mode (the size of the display area and the presence / absence of display as the third symbol) of the special symbol and the second special symbol to be variably set, the fluctuation status (lottery result and the number of fluctuations) can be changed at present. The player can easily grasp the special symbol type to be watched.

Therefore, even if a game specification is used in which a plurality of special symbol types simultaneously (parallel) change (lottery), it is possible to suppress the provision of a game that is difficult for the player to understand.

Next, the stop type command reception process (S4206) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this stop type command reception process (S4206). This stop type command reception process (S4206) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Hereinafter, the details of the stop type command reception process (S4206) will be described.

In the stop type command reception process (S4206), first, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received in response to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223 g is set to ON, and the special figure 2 is set. When the stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON (S4401). Next, the stop type (big hit A to big hit C, miss, reach miss, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S4402), and this process is terminated.

The stop type extracted in the process of S4402 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the second special symbol. It is identifiable that it is a stop type. As a result, even if the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) start to change at the same time, it is possible to manage the stop types respectively, and to execute an appropriate change display. Can be done.

Next, the contents of the reserved ball number processing (S4208) executed in the command determination process (see S4111 in FIG. 59) will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 shows the reserved ball number processing (S4208). In this hold ball number processing (S4208), when the hold ball number is the upper limit value, the process for setting the hold effect is executed.

When the reserved ball number processing (S4208) is executed, first, the symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the received command (reserved ball number command) are extracted (S4501). The value of the reserved ball number counter (first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d) corresponding to the extracted symbol type is updated (S4502), and the process proceeds to S4503.

In the process of S4503, it is determined whether or not the current number of reserved balls is the upper limit value (S4503). When it is determined that the number of reserved balls is the upper limit value (S4503: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the timing to execute the reserved effect (S4504). Specifically, a lottery for whether or not to execute the hold effect when the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit is executed, and it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a lottery result for executing the hold effect. Then, when it is determined that the hold effect is to be executed (S4504: Yes), a display command indicating the hold effect is set (S4505), and the value of the hold effect counter 223j is set to 8 (S4506). .. Then, other processes related to the hold are executed (S4507), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not the upper limit value in the processing of S4503 (S4503: No), or when it is determined that the holding effect is not executed in the processing of S4504 (S4504: No), S4505 to The process of S4506 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4507.

Next, the state command reception process (S4212) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this state command reception process (S4212). This state command reception process (S4212) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is executed according to the set gaming state. The process for setting the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to be different is executed. Hereinafter, the details of the status command reception process (S4212) will be described.

When the state command reception process (S4212) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the currently set gaming state is changed (S4601). Here, it is determined whether or not the gaming state set in the slave state setting area 223k and the gaming state indicated by the state command received this time are different. If it is determined in the process of S4601 that there is a change in the gaming state (S4601: Yes), it is determined whether the changed gaming state is the normal state (S4602).

In the process of S4602, when it is determined that the changed gaming state is the normal state (when the state command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (S4602: Yes), the main display area corresponding to the normal state. Set the setting command (S4603), set the display command indicating the normal mode (S4604), store (set) the information indicated by the status command received this time in the subordinate status setting area 223k (S4610), and perform this process. finish.

Here, the command set in the process of S4603 and the process of S4604 is notified to the display control device 114, so that the variation effect display in the normal state is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, in the voice lamp control device 113, the types of various display modes displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 based on the state command output from the main control device 110 ( The mode (mode, background) is set, and a command indicating the type is output to the display control device 114.

With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable effect display for each game state set on the voice lamp control device 113 side. That is, a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set game state and a variation pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol are output to the display control device 114. Only, based on the type command received on the display control device 114 side and the common command, the display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display mode corresponding to the current game state and the received variation pattern is displayed. Can be set. Therefore, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

As described above, when the display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by combining a plurality of commands received from the voice lamp control device 113 on the display control device 114 side, the display data is set. It is configured to output information (confirmation information) indicating the contents of the displayed data after setting from the display control device 114 side to the voice lamp control device 113 side, and the confirmation information received by the voice lamp control device 113 side is appropriate. A discriminating means for discriminating the existence is provided, and when it is determined that the discriminant result is not appropriate, a simple display variation pattern command indicating appropriate information is set, and the content of the display data already set is set. It is good to configure it so that it can be rewritten to simple display data.

With this configuration, when the voice lamp control device 113 does not set appropriate display data for various commands received from the main control device 110, simple display data indicating appropriate information is set. It is possible to display a variable effect display based on the simple display data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from being reduced due to the execution of the variable effect display having a content different from the actual game result (lottery result of the special symbol). Further, as the simple display data described above, for example, display data for displaying a special mode (for example, a mode with a black background) that does not correspond to any gaming state, or display data for executing variable display of the fourth symbol. It is sufficient to use display data having a smaller amount of data than the display data used in the normal variable effect display.

In this embodiment, the above-described configuration is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a display variation pattern command based on the current gaming state and the received variation pattern is set on the voice lamp control device 113 side. It may be configured to do so.

Returning to FIG. 64, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4602, if it is determined that the changed gaming state is not the normal state (when the state command received this time is not a command indicating the normal state) (S4602: No), then the changed gaming state is When it is determined whether the state is the probabilistic state (S4605) and the gaming state is the probable change state (the state command received this time is a command indicating the probable change state) (S4605: Yes), the probable change state is supported. The main display area setting command, that is, the command for the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol is set (S4606), the display command indicating the probability change mode is set (S4607), and the above-mentioned processing of S4610 is performed. Move to.

On the other hand, in the process of S4605, when it is determined that the game state after the change is not the probable change state (the state command received this time is not the command indicating the probable change state), that is, when the state command indicating the time saving state is received. (S4605: No), the main display area setting command corresponding to the time saving state is set (S4608), the display command indicating the time saving mode is set (S4609), and the process proceeds to the above-mentioned S4610.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, a hit-related process (S4220), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related process (S4220). In this hit-related process (S4220), as a result of the lottery of the special symbol, the process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won is performed. , Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 when the jackpot is won is executed.

In addition, when a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during the winning game (big hit game) is received, the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated and based on the cumulative result. The process of setting the display prize ball count command is executed.

In the hit-related process (S4220), first, it is determined whether the command received by the command determination process (see FIG. 59) is a jackpot-related command (S5001). If it is determined that the received command is a jackpot-related command (S5001: Yes), the jackpot-related process is executed (S5002), and then this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 66, the jackpot-related process (S5002), which is one of the hit-related processes (S4220 in FIG. 65) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S5002). In the jackpot-related processing, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, and when the jackpot is won, the main control device is used. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related process (S5002), first, it is determined whether the hit-related command received by the hit-related process (S4220 in FIG. 65) is the jackpot start command (S5101). If it is determined that the received command is a jackpot start command (S5101: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S5102), and then this process is terminated. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S5101, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S5101: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S5103). When it is determined that the round number command has been received (S5103: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number (S5104), and then this process is terminated. In this embodiment, since the main control device 110 transmits information indicating the number of rounds as a round number command, the display round number command is set based on the received round number command. In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the control unit 110, the voice lamp control unit is configured to transmit information indicating that a new round has started from the main control unit 110 as a round update command. When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of 113, a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and the current round is performed on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the value of the round number accumulation counter. It may be configured to calculate the number and set the display round number command.

On the other hand, in the process of S5103, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S5103: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S5105). If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S5105: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5105, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S5105: Yes), the display ending command is set (S5106), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 65, the description will be continued. In the process of S5001, when it is determined that the received command is not a jackpot related command (S5001: No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a prize ball command (S5003). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S5003: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is a prize ball command (S5003: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of the prize ball count counter (not shown) (S5004). A display prize ball number command corresponding to the value of the prize ball number counter after addition is set (S5005), and then this process is terminated.

Although detailed description will be omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the state command reception process (see S4212 in FIG. 64), the command was received during the period until the normal state is set (advantageous continuation period). The number of prize balls corresponding to the prize ball number command is configured to be accumulated by the prize ball number counter. Then, the number of prize balls corresponding to the cumulative value of the prize ball counter is displayed during the jackpot game or the latent state.

With this configuration, in the state where the normal state is set, the ball acquired during the period (advantageous continuation period) from the setting of the time saving state or the probabilistic state to the setting of the normal state again. The cumulative number can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Furthermore, the number of prize balls acquired in one game period within the advantageous continuation period (the period obtained by combining the jackpot game period and the time-saving state period until the next jackpot game is executed, or the probable change state period) is accumulated. It may be configured to be displayed. In this case, it is preferable to provide a storage means for storing the cumulative number of prize balls acquired during one game period as history information, and to display the information stored in the storage means in the history.

Further, as described above, when the configuration of cumulatively displaying the number of prize balls acquired within the advantageous continuation period is used, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the lottery result (big hit) which is advantageous to the player is displayed. Alternatively, the lottery probability that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the lottery result (big hit) that is advantageous to the player may be displayed.

With this configuration, it becomes possible for the player to analyze the lottery result of the special symbol executed during the advantageous continuation period and the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period, and the game is enthusiastically played. Can be done.

Further, when the game content (lottery result of a special symbol) during the advantageous continuation period satisfies a predetermined condition, a notification means for executing the condition achievement notification to indicate that fact may be provided. For example, a big hit is won. The condition achievement notification for indicating that the number of special symbol lottery executed up to this point (so-called number of times of harmony) has exceeded a predetermined number of times (100 times) may be executed. Further, the condition achievement notification for indicating that the number of prize balls acquired within one advantageous continuation period exceeds a predetermined number (5000) may be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the variation display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S4112). This variation display setting process (S4112 in FIG. 67) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (S4112 in FIG. 67) is performed on the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a variable pattern command (effect pattern) for displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set, and a process of transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop types (big hit A to big hit C), a process of setting a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the variation display setting process (S4112), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5301). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S5301: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S5305 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S5301: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S5302). Then, the special figure 1 button effect setting process (S5303) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 68, the special figure 1 button effect setting process (S5303), which is one of the processes in the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 button effect setting process (S5303). In this special figure 1 button effect setting process (S5303), a process for determining whether or not to execute the button effect as the variation effect of the current special figure 1 variation, and a process for setting the effect mode of the button effect. And are executed.

In the special figure 1 button effect setting process (S5303), first, the information stored in the slave state setting area 223k is read, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal state (S5401). When it is determined that the current gaming state is not a normal state (probability change state or time saving state) (S5401: No), the entire surface of the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used. The variable display of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is set as the main variable display which is the variable display, and the button effect based on the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is set. Since there is no need, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5401 when it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state (S5401: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 button effect flag 223q is on (S5402). The special figure 2 button effect flag 223q will be described in detail later, but is set to ON when the button effect is set based on the special figure 2 variation in the button effect mode setting process (S5303 in FIG. 71). Is. In the process of S5402, it is determined that the special figure 2 button effect flag 223q is on (S5402: Yes), that is, the button effect is set by the change of the second special symbol (special figure 2 change). In this case, since the button effect of the special figure 1 is not newly set, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 button effect flag 223q is not on (S5402: No), the button effect corresponding to the current special figure change is selected with reference to the button effect selection table 222c (S5403). .. Then, it is determined whether the button effect is selected (button effect can be executed) by the process of S5403 (S5404), and if it is determined that the button effect can be executed (S5404: Yes), the execution timing is set. The process (S5405) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5403 that the button effect is not selected (S5404: No), the process of S5405 is skipped and the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the execution timing setting process (S5405), which is one of the processes in the special figure 1 button effect setting process (see S5303 in FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. explain. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the execution timing setting process (S5405). In this execution timing setting process, a process for correcting the execution timing of the button effect set in the special figure 1 button effect setting process (see S5303 in FIG. 68) is executed.

That is, when the special figure 1 lottery (variation) and the special figure 2 lottery (variation) are configured to be executed at the same time (in parallel) as in the present embodiment, for example, special figure 1 The execution timing of the button effect set based on the variation may be the timing at which the variation is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot, and the button effect that is meaningless to the player is executed. There was a problem. In addition, in order to solve this problem, during the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation, or when the information indicating the jackpot is included in the hold storage of the special figure 2, the button effect is performed by the special figure 1 fluctuation. If a restriction is provided so as not to execute the button effect, the frequency of executing the button effect is reduced, and there is a possibility that a new problem may occur in which the effect of the button effect is reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the button effect corresponding to one special figure change (special figure 1 change) is set, the change state (lottery situation) of the other special figure change (special figure 2 change). Is analyzed, and based on the analysis result, a process of changing the execution timing of the button effect corresponding to one of the special figure fluctuations is configured to be executable.

With this configuration, when a big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, the button effect of the special figure 1 lottery is executed while avoiding the timing of notifying the player of the lottery result (the stop timing of the big hit symbol). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the button effect from being executed less frequently. In addition, when the button effect of the same mode is executed at a timing different from the usual time, the player feels uncomfortable, and the uncomfortable feeling can remind the player of a big hit (the big hit of the special figure 2 lottery). You can improve your interest.

In the execution timing setting process (S5405), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 lottery this time is a big hit (S5501). When it is determined that the special figure 1 lottery this time is a big hit (S5501: No), the prize information of the special figure 2 stored in the prize information storage area 223b is read out (S5502). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b read in the process of S5502 includes the winning information indicating a big hit (S5503). If it is determined that there is a big hit in the special figure 2 winning information (S5503: Yes), the time until the fluctuation corresponding to the winning information including the information indicating the big hit (special figure 2 big hit fluctuation) is calculated is calculated. (S5504), and the process proceeds to S5505.

In the process of S5505, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation start timing is later than the start timing of the fluctuation (S5505). That is, in the processing of S5505, the timing at which the fluctuation time set for the special figure 1 fluctuation to be executed this time elapses and the timing at which the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation is started are determined, and the special figure 1 fluctuation to be executed this time is dealt with. It is determined whether or not it is necessary to correct the effect mode (execution timing) of the variable effect (button effect) to be performed. In the processing of S5505, the start timing of the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation is not later than the timing at which the fluctuation time set for the special figure 1 fluctuation to be executed this time elapses, that is, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation to be described this time. If it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation will start (S5505: No), the timing at which the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation starts is within 15 seconds after the special figure 1 fluctuation to be executed this time starts. (S5506).

In the process of S5506, when the button effect set by the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed at the normal timing (see FIG. 24), the normal button is used to determine whether the button effect overlaps with the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation. It is determined whether the effect period (10 to 15 seconds from the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation) overlaps with the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation.

If it is determined in the process of S5506 that it is not within 15 seconds, even if the normal button effect is executed, the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation is not executed during the button effect. A predetermined period in the selection table 222c is set as the button effect execution period. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5506 that the start timing of the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation is within 15 seconds (15 seconds or more) (S5506: Yes), the execution timing of the button effect is corrected (variable). (S5507) is executed.

In the process of S5507, the effect information included in the button effect is corrected so that the button effect is executed in the period before the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation start timing. Then, the corrected effect mode (information) is set in the button effect hierarchy storage area (S5507), the special figure 1 button effect flag 23 is set to ON, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation is not after the special figure 2 (S5505: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation start timing is within 15 seconds (S5506: No), and the fluctuation start timing is 15 seconds. If it is determined that it is not within (S5506: No), the button effect execution period is set in the period before the start timing of the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation (S5507), and the corresponding area of the button effect hierarchy storage area 223 m is set. The button effect information is set (S5508), then the special figure 1 button effect flag 223s is set to ON (S5509), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S5506, if it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation start timing is not within 15 seconds (S5506: Yes), it is impossible to set the button effect, so this processing is terminated as it is. do.

Further, in the processing of S5501, when it is determined that the special figure 1 lottery this time is a big hit (S5501: Yes), or in the processing of S5503, when it is determined that there is no big hit in the special figure 2 winning information ( S5503: No), the execution period of the button effect in the variation of the special figure 1 is set as it is (S5510), and the process proceeds to the above-mentioned process of S5508. Further, in the process of S5555, even when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation start timing is later than the change (S5505: Yes), the process of S5510 is executed and the process shifts to the process of S5508.

As described above, in the execution timing correction process (S5405) in the present embodiment, the special figure stored in the special figure 2 hold (the special figure stored in the prize information storage area 223b) at the execution timing of the special figure 1 variation. Determining whether there is winning information having information indicating a big hit in the winning information corresponding to 2), and determining the execution (start) timing of the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the winning information including the information indicating the big hit. By using, the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed during the current special figure 1 fluctuation, or the start timing of the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 2 is determined, and the special figure 1 fluctuation is determined based on the determination result. It is configured to set the effect mode corresponding to, but is not limited to this, for example, the number of special figure 2 fluctuations until the special figure 2 big hit change is executed (out of the special figure 2 hold, the big hit hold). The number of special figures 2 held before the special figure 2 change based on the above is determined), and the jackpot change of special figure 2 is executed during the current special figure 1 change based on the determination result. It may be configured to determine whether or not.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the variable time and the special figure of the special figure 1 set in the gaming machine capable of simultaneously (parallel) executing the special figure 1 lottery (variation) and the special figure 2 lottery (variation). Each special drawing lottery (variation) is configured to be executed evenly without providing a large difference from the fluctuation time of 2, but for example, the special drawing 1 lottery (variation) and the special drawing 1 lottery (variation) are similarly performed as in the present embodiment. FIG. 2 In a gaming machine capable of simultaneously (parallel) executing a lottery (variation), one special figure lottery is efficiently executed according to a set game state, and the other special figure. In order to provide a game state in which the lottery is efficiently executed, a long time (for example, a deviation variation of 10 minutes, a hit variation) is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation on the side that makes it difficult to execute the special figure lottery in each game state. If the variable time of (set to 4 minutes) can be set, the special figure 2 change during execution or the special figure 2 to be executed next time in the game state in which the special figure 1 lottery is easy to be executed. FIG. 2 Only by determining whether or not the lottery (variation) is a big hit, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the big hit change of the special figure 2 is executed during the current change of the special figure 1.

Further, in this case, the maximum time set as the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 lottery is set when the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery that is difficult to be executed is a big hit in the gaming state where the special figure 1 lottery is easily executed. It is advisable to set the fluctuation time of each special figure so that it is shorter than the shortest fluctuation time. With such a configuration, it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed during the current change of the special figure 1.

Returning to FIG. 67, the explanation will be continued. After executing the special figure 1 button effect setting process (S5303), next, based on the extracted variation pattern, the variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is set and the variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is set. (S5304), the first special symbol reserved ball number counter is decremented by 1 (S5305), and the process proceeds to S5306. On the other hand, in the process of S5301 when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S5301: No), the process of S5302 to S5305 described above is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S5306.

In the process of S5306, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is ON (S5306). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is on (S5306: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to off (S5307), and the second special is based on the extracted fluctuation pattern. A variation pattern command for displaying a symbol is set (S5308), and then a special figure 2 button effect setting process (S5309) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 70, the special figure 2 button effect setting process (S5309), which is one of the processes in the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 button effect setting process (S5309).

In the special figure 2 button effect setting process (S5309), first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the normal state (S5601). If it is determined that the current gaming state is not a normal state (that is, a probable change or a time saving state) (S5601: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state is the normal state (S5601: Yes), the button effect is executed depending on whether or not the special figure 1 button effect flag 223s is on, that is, the change of the first special symbol. It is determined whether or not it is present (S5602). When it is determined that the special figure 1 button effect flag 223s is on (S5602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol this time is a big hit (S5603). If it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big hit (S5603: No), it is not necessary to give priority to the button effect of the second special symbol, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5603, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit (S5603: Yes), or in the processing of S5602, it is determined that the special figure 1 button effect flag 223s is not on. If this is the case (S5602: No), since it is the timing at which the button effect can be set even when the second special symbol changes, the button effect corresponding to this change is selected from the button effect selection table 222c (S5604).

Then, it is determined whether or not the button effect is feasible (S5605). If it is determined that the button effect is not feasible (S5605: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the button effect can be executed (S5605: Yes), the button effect mode setting process (S5606) is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 71, a button effect mode setting process (S5606), which is one process in the special figure 2 button effect setting process (S5309) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this button effect mode setting process (S5606). In the button effect mode setting process (S5606), when the button effect is set for both the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the process of setting the button effect according to the priority of the button effect is performed. Execute it, and set the button effect if it can be set more than once.

In the button effect mode setting process (S5606), first, the button effect information set in the button effect layer storage area 223 m is read (S5701), and then the button effect layer storage area 223 m read in the process of S5701 has the highest priority. It is determined whether or not there is production information in the area (S5702). If it is determined that there is effect information in the highest priority area (S5702: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no effect information in the highest priority area (S5702: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation during execution is a big hit (S5703). If it is determined that the special figure 1 change during execution is a big hit (S5703: Yes), the current special figure 1 big hit change is prioritized over the button effect with the special figure 2 change, so this process is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation during execution is not a big hit (S5703: No), the process proceeds to S5704.

In the process of S5704, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the button effect of the second special symbol set this time is during the button effect period of the first special symbol (S5704). If it is determined that the button effect period of the first special symbol is in progress (S5704: Yes), the duplicate button effect is performed during the period when the set first special symbol and the button effect period of the second special symbol overlap. Set (S5705). As described above, the duplicate button effect set here is during the period when the button effect of the first special symbol and the button effect of the second special symbol overlap when the fluctuation result of the second special symbol is a hit. Set the button effect C. By configuring in this way, the staging effect can be enhanced.

On the other hand, in the process of S5704, when it is determined that the execution timing of the button effect is not during the button effect period of FIG. 1 (S5704: No), the button effect is set in the highest priority area (S5706), and S5707. Is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S4107) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S4107). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S4107) is executed in the main process executed by the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process for starting or operating an effect using the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b. To execute. In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S4107), the button effect start process (S5801) is first executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 73, a button effect start process (S5801), which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S4107) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this button effect start process (S5801). In this button effect start process (S5801), each button effect information stored in the button effect hierarchy storage area 223 m is read, and when it is the start timing of the button effect, a process for executing the button effect is executed. To. Further, when the button effect having the highest priority (priority 1) is executed, a process for discarding the button effect being executed is executed. By executing such a process, it is possible to appropriately execute a plurality of button effects set at different triggers according to the priority. In addition, only the button effect with the highest priority (button effect with a high effect effect) can be surely executed even while other button effects are being executed, which improves the interest of the game. be able to.

In the button effect start process (S5801), first, the information in the button effect hierarchy storage area 223 m is read out (S5901). Next, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the button effect based on the read information (S5902). In the process of S5902, a plurality of information stored in a plurality of storage areas (first layer area 223 m1 to fourth layer area 223 m4) are configured to be read out in descending order of priority. Therefore, when the execution timings of the button effects are the same, the button effects having a high priority are executed.

In this embodiment, when the button valid period start timing (see FIG. 24) specified in the button effect selection table 222b is reached, it is determined that the button effect start timing is reached. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a range of 2 seconds (4 seconds) before and after the button valid period start timing may be defined as the same timing for determination. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the button effect from being complicatedly executed when the start timings of the plurality of button effects are stored so as to be slightly different.

Further, in addition to the above-mentioned contents, a plurality of button effects stored at timings where the valid periods set for each button effect overlap may be determined as button effects executed at the same timing. good.

Returning to FIG. 73, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5902 that it is not the start timing of the button effect (S5902: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the button effect (S5902: Yes), the button effect to be started this time is set to priority 1 with the information of the button effect hierarchical storage area 223 m read in the process of S5901. (S5902), if it is determined that the priority is 1, (S5903: Yes), it is determined whether or not other button effects are being executed (S5905).

If it is determined in the process of S5905 that another button effect is being executed (S5905: Yes), the button effect of priority 1 is preferentially executed, so that the button operation for the other button effect is invalidated. Set (S5906), set the button effect flag corresponding to the disabled button effect to off (S5907), and then set the display command indicating the button effect corresponding to the information of priority 1 this time. (S5908), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5905, when it is determined that the other button effect is not being executed (S5905: No), it is not necessary to invalidate the other button effect, so the process of S5906 to S5907 is skipped. , S5908.

On the other hand, in the process of S5903, when it is determined that the button effect of this time is not priority 1 (S5903: No), a display command indicating the button effect corresponding to the priority of this time is set (S5904). This process ends.

Returning to FIG. 72, the explanation will be continued. After executing the button effect start process (S5801), the button effect update process (S5802) is then executed. Here, with reference to FIG. 74, a button effect update process (S5802), which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S4107) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the button effect update process (S5802). In this button effect update process (S5802), a process of updating the value of the button valid timer 223n and setting a display command corresponding to the operation to the frame button 22 executed during the button effect is executed.

In the button effect update process (S5802), first, the value of the button valid timer 223n is read out (S6001). Next, it is determined whether the value of the button valid timer 223n read in the process of S6001 is larger than 0 (S6002). When the value of the button valid timer 223n is not a value larger than 0 (S6002: No), the operation valid period is set because it is not the operation valid period for effectively determining the operation to the frame button 22. The processing of S6002 to S6009 to be executed when the processing is performed is skipped, and the main processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the button valid timer 223n is larger than 0 (S6002: Yes), the value of the corresponding button valid timer 223n is subtracted by 1 (S6003). Next, it is determined whether the value of the button valid timer 223n subtracted in the process of S6003 is 0, that is, whether it is the end timing of the button effect (S6004). When it is determined that the value of the button valid timer 223n is not 0 (that is, it is a value larger than 0) (S6004: No), since the button effect is being executed, the value of the current button valid timer 223n is set to the current value. Set the corresponding display command (S6005). The display mode (remaining period display mode) of the validity period gauge 812a (see FIG. 9A) is generated by the display command set here.

Then, when the processing of S6005 is completed, the process proceeds to the second frame button setting processing (S6011) described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S6004 that the value of the button valid timer 223n is 0 (S6004: Yes), since it is the end timing of the button effect, the button effect flag of the corresponding special symbol (first). The button effect flag 223p and the second button effect flag 223q) are set to off (S6006), and then it is determined whether the operated flag 223s is set to on (S6007). That is, it is determined whether or not the player operates (presses) the frame button 22 so that the operation condition is satisfied during the operation valid period (during the button valid period).

Specifically, when the operation condition of the button effect executed this time is "perform an operation (press) once for the frame button 22", the frame button 22 is pressed once during the operation valid period. When the operated flag 223s is set to ON when pressed, and the operation condition is "operate (press) the frame button 22 50 times", the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) 50 times during the operation valid period. ), The operated flag 223s is set to ON. The condition for turning on the operated flag 223s is, for example, a predetermined lottery every time the frame button 22 is operated, in addition to the condition that is satisfied when the number of operations for the frame button 22 reaches a predetermined number of times. It may be executed, and a condition that is satisfied when the lottery result is a specific result, a condition that is satisfied when the period in which the frame button 22 is continuously pressed satisfies a predetermined period, and the like may be set.

When it is determined that the operated flag 223s is on in the process of S6007 (S6007: Yes), the display command corresponding to the operated (display command indicating that the button operation during the button production was successful). (S6008), the operated flag 223s is set to off (S6009), the process of S6011 is executed, and this process is terminated. Based on the display command set in the process of S6008, the display control device 114 generates image data corresponding to the success screen of the button effect (see, for example, FIG. 9B), and the third symbol display device 81. Display on.

On the other hand, in the process of S6007, when it is determined that the operated flag 223s is not set to ON (S6007: No), it is not operated (a concept including an operation to the extent that the operation condition is not satisfied during the operation valid period). The corresponding display command is set (S6010), the process of S6011 is executed, and this process is terminated. Here, based on the display command set in the process of S6010, the display control device 114 generates image data corresponding to the button effect failure screen (see FIG. 10) and displays it on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75, a second frame button setting process (S6011), which is one process in the button effect update process (see S5802 in FIG. 74) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. do. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the second frame button setting process (S6011). The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a first frame button 22a and a second frame button 22b as operation means that can be operated by the player, and usually the first frame button 22a is the operation target. It is configured so that the button effect is executed. Then, when a plurality of button effects are set in duplicate, the duplicate button effects for the second frame button 22b are configured to be executed. In this second frame button setting process (S6011), various processes related to the duplicate button effect are executed for the second frame button 22b.

In the second frame button setting process (S6011), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the button effect. (S6101). Then, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the button effect (S6101: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the duplicate button effect (S6102). When it is determined that it is the start timing of the duplicate button effect (S6102: Yes), the second frame button valid flag 223r is set to ON (S6103), and the process proceeds to S6104. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S6101 that it is not the start timing of the button effect (S6101: No), or when it is determined in the process of S6102 that it is not the start timing of the duplicate button effect (S6102: No). Since it is not the timing to enable the second frame button, the process of S6103 is skipped and the process proceeds to S6104.

In the process of S6104, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the button effect (S6104). If it is determined that it is not the timing to end the button effect (S6104: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the button effect (S6104: Yes), it is determined whether the end timing is the end timing of the duplicate button effect (S6105). When it is determined that it is the end timing of the duplicate button effect (S6105: Yes), the second frame button enable flag 223r is set to off (S6106), and a display command indicating the end of the button effect is set (S6107). ), End this process. On the other hand, in the process of S6105, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the duplicate button effect (S6105: No), it is not necessary to invalidate the second frame button, so the process of S6106 is skipped and described above. The process of S6107 is executed, and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 72, the explanation will be continued. After executing the button effect update process (S5802), the button pressing process is then executed (S5803), then other processes related to the button are executed (S5804), and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 76, a button pressing process (S5803), which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S4107) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this button pressing process (S5803).

In the button pressing process (S5803), first, it is determined whether or not the second frame button valid flag 223r is on (S6201). When it is determined that the second frame button valid flag 223r is off (S6201: No), it is determined whether or not the first frame button 22a is on, that is, whether or not the first frame button 22a is pressed (. S6202). When it is determined that the first frame button 22a is not pressed (S6202: No), neither the first frame button 22a nor the second frame button 22b is operated, so that the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second frame button valid flag 223r is on (S6201), it is determined whether or not the second frame button is pressed (S6203). If it is determined that the second frame button 22b is not pressed (S6203: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first frame button 22a is pressed (S6202: Yes) or the second frame button 22b is pressed (S6203: Yes), the value of the corresponding pressing counter 223t is incremented by 1. (S6204). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the press counter 223t added in the process of S6205 is a predetermined value (S6205). When it is determined that the value of the button press counter 223t is a predetermined value (S6205: Yes), the operated flag 223s is set to ON (S6206), and a display command corresponding to the post-operation effect is set (S6207). ), The value of the press counter 223t is cleared to 0 (S6208), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the pressing counter 223t is not a predetermined value, a display command corresponding to the counter value is set (S6209), and this processing is terminated.

As described above, in this embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed at the same time (in parallel). Moreover, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be easier to win the lottery result (big hit with many rounds) which is advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, but this is limited to this. Without, for example, only in the lottery of Special Figure 2, in some cases where the lottery result is not a big hit, a privilege different from the big hit game can be given to the player. It may be configured, and as a game state set after the end of the big hit game, winning the big hit in the special figure 2 is more advantageous to the player than winning the big hit in the special figure 1 (for example, a probable change state). ) May be configured to be easy to set.

In this case, the type of the special symbol in which the lottery is easily executed is variably configured according to the set gaming state, and when a specific first gaming state (for example, probabilistic state) is set, the second special symbol is set. It is preferable to configure the lottery so that the lottery can be easily executed, and if a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol during the first gaming state, the first gaming state is set again.

In addition, the latent probability state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) can be set as the game state, and the lottery of the second special symbol can be easily performed during the latent probability state. Similarly, even when the normal state, which is a low probability state of the normal symbol, is set, the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed, and in the normal state, the lottery of the second special symbol is frequently executed. In order to suppress this, a long-time (10 minutes) fluctuation time may be set.

However, the gaming machine configured in this way can execute the lottery of the second special symbol, although it is inefficient, in the normal state, and if the big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, There is a problem that a lottery result that is advantageous to the player is given.

On the other hand, when the lottery of the first special symbol wins the predetermined lottery result (big hit or small hit) in the state where the normal state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped or forcibly stopped. It is good to configure it to temporarily stop. As a result, it is possible to set the second special symbol so that it is difficult to win the jackpot in the state where the normal state is set.

In the first embodiment described above, the game state set after the end of the big hit game is determined based on the big hit type set when the big hit is won, but the game state is not limited to this, and the big hit is won. During the jackpot game executed based on the above, the ball passes through a specific area provided in the variable winning device 65, so that a high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game is completed. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, three game states (normal state, time saving state, and probability change state) can be set as game states, but four game states (normal state, latent state, and probability change state) can be set. It may be in a probabilistic state, a time saving state, or two or less.

Further, in the first embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are simultaneously executed in the normal state, but other configurations may be used. For example, a first ball entry port 64b1 is provided in the left side region, a first ball entry port with an electric accessory 640a is provided in the right side area, and a second ball entry port 640 without an electric accessory 640a is provided, and a probable change state is provided. When is set, the right-handed game may be configured to be the most advantageous game for the player.

In the case of such a configuration, during the normal state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation is set to be shorter than that of the special figure 2 fluctuation as in the first embodiment described above, and the fluctuation time is set so as to be easy to set, and the latent state is in the latent state. Is set so that a shorter fluctuation time is more easily set in the special figure 2 fluctuation than in the special figure 1 fluctuation as in the first embodiment described above, and the electric accessory 640a is released in the probabilistic change state and the time saving state. It is good to set it so that it is easy.

As a result, during the normal state, a game aiming for a big hit by the lottery of the first special symbol is performed by the left-handed game, and during the time saving state, the lottery of the first special symbol is performed more efficiently than in the normal state by the right-handed game. In the probabilistic state, the right-handed game is used to draw the first special symbol more efficiently and with a higher probability than in the normal state, and the game is aimed at the big hit. During the state, a right-handed game can be used to play a game aiming for a big hit by a lottery of the second special symbol.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 77 to 91, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 77, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is set in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM has a high speed. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S8001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S8001) will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S8001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it can sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S8101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S8102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S8101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to the predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S8102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S8102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S8103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S8104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S8001 in FIG. 76) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S8002 in FIG. 77) (S8105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S8001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 114. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 78, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S8101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S8101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S8102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 231a. Then, the processes of S8103 to S8105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S8101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S8101. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S8102 and S8102, the processes of S8103 to S8105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S8103 to S8105 without performing the processes of S8101 and S8102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary staging unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 77. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S8002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S8003). This transfer instruction includes a start address and a final address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, transfer destination information (here, resident video RAM 235), and a transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S8003, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S8004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S8004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S8005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 89 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S9502 in FIG. 89 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 79 (b)), the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is simply drawn. The command determination process (see S8308 in FIG. 79 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S8309 in FIG. 79 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64b1, the left second entry opening 64b2, or the second entry opening 640. When the instruction to start the variation effect is given from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period. It can be displayed on the screen to create a simple fluctuation effect. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, and it takes time to transfer the flash memory. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S8005, the interrupt permission is set (S8006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S8006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 79 (a). FIG. 79 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S8201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 79 (b). FIG. 79B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S8301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S8301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. The command determination process (S8302) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S8303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S8302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 80 to 85.

In the display setting process (S8303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S8302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 86 to 88.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S8304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S8303) or the simple display setting process (S8309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S8305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S8306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S8305), which are determined in the task process (S8304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 32 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S8306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S8307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S8307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / rear out reach, complete out) is set. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S8301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S8308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S8309) is executed to shift to the process of S8304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 80 to 85, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S8302), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 80, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S8401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S8401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S8401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S8303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S8402), and then the command. The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S8403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S8404). Then, if there is a variation pattern command for display (S8404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S8405), and the process returns to the process of S8401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S8405) will be described with reference to FIG. 81 (a). FIG. 80A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S8405). This variation pattern command process (S8405) executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S8501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed in the main control device 110 at a distance of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S8501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S8501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counting counter 233h (S8503), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S8504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S8505), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S8505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8501. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S8502e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 as the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S8503, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It should be noted that, for example, the player operates the operating means, or while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the effect mode corresponding to the variable display being executed is changed (rewritten) based on the effect mode set by another opportunity. When the display rewriting command for The rewriting process for rewriting the data after the display data is executed. Further, after receiving the display rewriting command, the image data based on the rewritten production mode is generated from the time when an interval of a predetermined period is left. As a result, it is possible to reliably execute the effect after rewriting after securing the time required for the rewriting process. Further, the configuration is not limited to the above, and for example, all the effects (predetermined number) that can be executed during the fluctuation in the fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, that is, the game. When the effect mode for causing a person to operate the operation means is executed, the effect is executed when the player properly operates the operation means, and the effect is executed when the player does not properly operate the operation means. It is necessary in the variation display data table corresponding to each effect information by including information indicating the effect to be performed and the effect to be executed when the number of special figure reserved balls reaches the upper limit value during the change. The image data of the sprite is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and then, based on the instruction command output from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 is actually used. It may be configured to determine the image data to be displayed on. Further, the fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol is made to execute the display corresponding to the effect that can be executed during the fluctuation on different layers (layers), and each layer is executed. On the other hand, by setting and controlling a visible state that can be seen by the player and an invisible state that the player cannot see, it may be configured to make it appear that only a specific effect is being executed.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 80. In the processing of S8404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S8404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S8406). If there is a stop type command for display (S8406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S8407), and the process returns to S8401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S8407) will be described with reference to FIG. 81 (b). FIG. 81B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S8407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of big hit A to G, small hit A to C, reach off, and complete off) indicated by the display stop type command. (S8601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 79 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S8602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S8602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set it on (S8603) and return to the command judgment process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S8602 is described. In the above-mentioned task processing (S8304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S8602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S8603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S8601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete deviation is set by the processing of S8602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will have a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out of order". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description will be continued. In the processing of S8406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S8406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S8408), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for (S8408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S8409), and the process returns to the process of S8401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S8409) will be described with reference to FIG. 82 (a). FIG. 82A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8701). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8702), and the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S8703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S8704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S8705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description will be continued. In the processing of S8408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S8408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S8410), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S8410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S8411), and the process returns to the process of S8401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S8411) will be described with reference to FIG. 82 (b). FIG. 82B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. Set to the table buffer 233d (S8801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S8803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8804). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S8805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description will be continued. In the processing of S8410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S8410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S8412), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S8412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S8413), and the process returns to the process of S8401.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S8413) will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S8901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S8903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S8903). S8904). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S8905), the ending command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description will be continued. In the processing of S8412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S8412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display fluctuation stop command among the unprocessed commands (S8414), and the display is performed. If there is a variable stop command (S8414: Yes), the variable stop command process is executed (S8415), and the process returns to the process of S8401.

Here, the details of the variable stop command processing (S8415) will be described with reference to FIG. 84 (a). FIG. 84A is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing. This fluctuation stop command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The display variation stop command is the end timing of the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S4112 in FIG. 66), that is, the end timing of each special symbol in the main control device 110. The display stop command (display stop command) output from the voice lamp control device 113 at the end timing (timing when the main control unit 110 sets the stop command) of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set in the process of setting the fluctuation pattern. It shows various display commands set in the normal stop command) and the variable stop processing (see S4214 in FIG. 59) of the voice lamp control device 113.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol independently (parallel). , When one special symbol is stopped (confirmed) and displayed with a symbol indicating a specific lottery result (for example, big hit), the other special symbol that is changing is terminated in a predetermined fluctuation pattern (variation time). Regardless of the presence or absence of, it is configured to stop and display with a symbol indicating the forced disconnection.

Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command set when forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the fluctuation stop processing (see S4214 in FIG. 59). , A display command (forced) for variable display of the display mode of the third symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation (variable display so as to correspond to the display mode of the special symbol that is forcibly stopped and displayed). It is configured to set the stop command).

In the present embodiment, even when the above-mentioned normal stop command has already been received, if the third symbol or the fourth symbol is not stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It is configured to execute the stop display based on the forced stop command received later. That is, the forced stop command is configured to be processed with priority over the normal stop command. As a result, the third symbol and the fourth symbol can be reliably displayed in the display mode corresponding to the control content of the main control device 110.

In addition, the display variable stop command also includes a display command indicating a temporary stop set in the variable stop process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S4214 in FIG. 59), and the display command indicating this temporary stop is also included. When (temporary stop command for display) is received, the data table in which the display data in which the symbol to be stopped is slightly fluctuated is determined as the variable stop display data is determined.

In the variable stop command processing, first, the variable stop data table indicated by the variable stop command for display is determined, the determined variable stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the variable stop data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (. S831). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8932).

Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8931, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S833), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S833). S8934). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S8935), the fluctuation stop command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description will be continued. In the processing of S8412, if it is determined that there is no fluctuation stop command (S8414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S8416), and the display notification is notified. If there is a command (S8416: Yes), the display notification command process is executed (S8417), and the process returns to the process of S8401.

Here, the details of the notification command processing (S8415) will be described with reference to FIG. 84 (b). FIG. 84B is a flowchart showing the notification command processing. This notification command processing executes processing corresponding to the notification command (for display) received from the voice lamp control device 113.

This notification command was output to the display control device 114 among the various notification commands set when the voice lamp control device 113 received a command for indicating various abnormal states set by the main control device 110. This is a process executed when the display control device 114 receives the display notification command.

In the notification command processing, first, a display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table buffer is used. It is set to 233d (S8951). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8952).

Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8951, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S8953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8954). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S8955), the notification command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

In this embodiment, among the various notification commands set by the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 determines only the display command indicating that the notification target is the third symbol display device 81 (display device). However, it is not limited to this, and it also receives related commands such as light emission commands other than display commands, audio output commands, and accessory drive commands, and processes the display control device 114. It may be configured to output the related command to the corresponding control device with the information for indicating the data content (display mode) set in.

Returning to FIG. 80, the description will be continued. In the processing of S8416, if it is determined that there is no display notification command (S8416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S8418), and the rear image is determined. If there is a change command (S8418: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S8419), and the process returns to the process of S8401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command process (S8419) will be described with reference to FIG. 85 (a). FIG. 85A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S9503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S9001). ). Then, among the bits of the rear image discrimination flag 233x provided for each rear image type (rear surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to ON, and other bits are set. The bit corresponding to the rear image type of is set to off (S9002), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set by the process of S9001 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is changed from the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S9002. Identify.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display either the back surface A or B according to the back surface type of the rear image specified in the display data table, the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by S9002 is used. The type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored ( (Whether it is a resident video RAM 235 or a normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S9002, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 80. In the processing of S8418, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S8418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S8420), and there is an error command. If (S8420: Yes), error command processing is executed (S8421), and the process returns to S8401 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S8421) will be described with reference to FIG. 85 (b). FIG. 85B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S9101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S9102). Ends the process and returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S9101, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S9102 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error discrimination flag corresponding to all the error types indicated by each error command is set to ON in the process in S9102. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 80. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S8416 (S8420: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S8422), and the process returns to the process of S8401. In the processing of S8422, command processing for various display commands output from the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. For example, when a display command for changing the timing at which a specific effect is executed is received, a process for changing the execution timing of the specific effect already specified in the variable display data table based on the timekeeping data. Is executed. In addition, it is for display to indicate which of the third symbol variation display regarding the special figure 1 variation and the third symbol variation display regarding the special figure 2 variation is the main variation display and which is the subordinate variation display. When a command is received, the received command is determined, whether it is different from the currently executing setting status (correspondence), and if it is determined to be different, the setting is made based on the fluctuation pattern command of each special figure fluctuation. The process of switching the display data table to be displayed between the main variation display and the secondary variation display is executed.

In the processing of S8401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S8401: Yes). ), The processing of S8402 to S8422 is executed again. Then, the processes of S8401 to S8422 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S8401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S8308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 79B) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment processing, only the commands required to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are used from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 81 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 81 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 81A) executed in this case, in the processing of S8501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S8502, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 86 to 88, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S8303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 86, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S9201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S9201: No). ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of S9202 to S9204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S9205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S9201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S9202), S9203 to S9204. Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S9203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S9203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S9203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S9204).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 87. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to and all the error discrimination set to ON is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S9301).

In the task processing (S8304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S9301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S9302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 86. After the warning image setting process (S9204) or in the process of S9203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is turned off (S9203: No), the process proceeds to the process of S9205.

In S9205, the pointer update process is executed (S9205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S9401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are sequentially started from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S9401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S9402). As a result, if it is End information (S9402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S9403), and if it is a demo display data table (S9403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S9404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S9405), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demo effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S9403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S9403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S9403: No). S9406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawing contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S9402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S9402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 86. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S9206). In the task processing (S8304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S9206 together with the warning image developed earlier, and for each sprite. , Display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing are determined.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S9207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S9208). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S9208: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (S9208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S9209).

As a result, if the definite display flag is off (S9209: No), the definite display effect has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the definite display effect. Therefore, first, the definite display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S92110), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S9211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the definite display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S9212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S9213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S9214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S9215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final symbol display effect of the stopped symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set as such. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. A wide variety of staging images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S9215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S8304), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S9215, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S9209, if the definite display flag is on (S9209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S9216). If the demo display flag is off (S9216: No), it means that the value of the timekeeping counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that a certain period of time has elapsed from the end of the final display effect. Later, a process for displaying the demo effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S9217), and the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S9218). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S9219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S9220), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S9221), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S9216, if the demo display flag is on (S9216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S8309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 79B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the image of the above is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S8305), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 89A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S9501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S9501: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S9502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 89 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S9501, that is, if it is off (S9501: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S9503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 90.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S9502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S8305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 89 (b). FIG. 89B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S9502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S9601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S9601: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S9602). In the process of S9602, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S9602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S9602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S9602: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S9603. Further, as a result of the processing of S9601, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S9601: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S9603.

In the process of S9603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S9603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S9603: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S9604), and this process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S9603 (S9603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S9605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 79 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S8308 in FIG. 79 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S8309 in FIG. 79 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 80 to 85) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 86 to 88) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 90) (see S9501: No in FIG. 89 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90, a normal image transfer setting process (S9503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S8305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S9503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S9205) of the display setting process (S8303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S9701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S9702), and if it is transfer data information (S9702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S9703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S9704), and the process proceeds to S9705.

Further, in the process of S9702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S9702: No), the processes of S9703 and S9704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S9705. In the process of S9705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S9705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S9705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S9706).

In the process of S9706, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S9706 that the transfer process has not been completed (S9706: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S9706: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S9707. Further, as a result of the processing of S9705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S9705: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S9707.

In the process of S9707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S9707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S9707: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S9708), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S9703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S9713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S9707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233w is on (S9709). If the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (S9709: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag 233w is on (S9709: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag 233w is set to off (S9710), it is provided for each rear image type. Among the rear image discrimination flags 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S9711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (transfer destination). The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S9712), and the process proceeds to S9713.

In the process of S9713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S9713). The discrimination in the process of S9713 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If, as a result of the processing of S9713, the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S9713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S9713 (S9713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S9714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 includes the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S9714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S9715), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S8306), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S8304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and a drawing list (FIG. 32) is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S8305) (S9801). That is, in the processing of S9801, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S8304). Then, the specified stored RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S8305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S9802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address is read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Then, in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the processing of S9802 (S9803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process (see FIG. 79 (b)) is performed every time the drawing process is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame. In the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the state where the variation display of 1 is executed, the other variation display may be configured to be infeasible. Then, if there is a reserved ball, the start winning prize may be changed in order from the oldest reserved ball. With this configuration, control can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 109. In the second embodiment, the configuration of the storage area for storing the priority of the effect to be executed is changed with respect to the first embodiment, and the effect other than the button effect (for example, the display effect) is also prioritized. A point that is configured to give In order to deal with the above-mentioned differences, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 and the processing contents are different.

In the first embodiment described above, the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variation of each special symbol. It was configured so that the button effect could be set as the effect. Then, in order to prevent the button effect set by another opportunity (the opportunity to set the variable effect of the special figure 1 and the opportunity to set the variable effect of the special figure 2) from being executed in duplicate, the button effect is executed. The button effect is given a priority for executing the effect, and the button effect is executed based on the assigned priority. As a result, even if the button effect is set at overlapping timings, the button effect having a high priority can be preferentially executed, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand effect.

In addition to this, in the second embodiment, the button effect can be set when the reserved ball is acquired. As a result, the chances of setting the button effect increase, so that more button effects can be provided to the player.

Further, in the first embodiment described above, a specific button effect (second button effect) is used as the variation effect of the special figure 2 during the execution of the button effect (first button effect) set as the variation effect of the special figure 1. Is executed, it is configured to execute a duplicate button effect (special button effect) in which the first button effect and the second button effect are fused.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the execution timing of the button effect set as the variable effect of the special figure and the execution timing of the button effect set based on the acquisition of the reserved ball overlap. Even in this case, the duplicate button effect (special button effect) is configured to be executed. As a result, even while the variable effect for showing the lottery result of the special figure is being executed, the player can be enthusiastically played to acquire a new reserved ball.

Further, in the second embodiment, the priority is given to the effect other than the button effect (for example, the advance notice effect executed during the variable effect of the special figure). As a result, it is possible to manage whether or not the button effect and the advance notice effect are executed at the same execution timing, so that it is possible to provide a player with a more understandable effect.

Further, in the second embodiment, the number of storage areas for storing information related to each effect to which priority is given is increased, and the player can select the range of the storage area to be used for executing the effect. It is configured in. With such a configuration, it is possible to adjust the quality (priority) and quantity of the effect to be executed, so that it is possible to provide the effect in the mode desired by each player.

<About the flow of production in the second embodiment>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 92 to 95, the contents of the characteristic effect executed in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 92 is a timing chart showing a flow in which a button effect (8-piece hold effect) is executed when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol reaches the upper limit number (8 pieces), and FIG. 93 is a special figure 1. As a variable effect of, during the execution of the button effect (button effect A), the duplicate button effect (super 8 hold effect) is executed based on the number of reserved balls of the special symbol reaching a predetermined number. It is a timing chart. And FIG. 94 and FIG. 95 are schematic diagrams showing the effect contents of the button effect (hold effect) executed based on the acquisition of the hold ball of the special symbol.

In the present embodiment, a maximum of 4 prize information of the first special symbol (special figure 1) can be stored and stored, and a maximum of 4 prize information of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be stored and stored. It is composed. Then, as shown in FIG. 2, the ball entry unit 64 is arranged at a lower position of the game area, and the ball flowing into the ball entry unit 64 can acquire the winning information of the special figure 1 first ball entry port. It is configured to be alternately distributed to 64b1 and the left second entrance ball opening 64b2 where the winning information of the special figure 2 can be acquired.

Therefore, in the normal state in which the game aiming at the entry unit 64 (left-handed game) is performed, the maximum number of reserved balls with a special symbol (reserved ball obtained by adding the reserved ball of the special figure 1 and the reserved ball of the special figure 2) is the maximum. A game in which 8 pieces can be obtained is performed. Then, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol reaches eight, the reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the eight reserved balls (see FIG. 94 (a)). ) Is used to execute the button effect. As a result, the player can be enthusiastically played to acquire eight reserved memories of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 92, the special figure special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation are executed, and the special figure reserved ball number (the total value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number and the special figure 2 reserved ball number). ) Is "6" (special figure 1 reserved ball number is "3", special figure 2 reserved ball number is "3"), the ball flows into the ball entry unit 64 and enters the first ball entry port 64b1. When the ball enters, the number of reserved balls in the special figure becomes "7" (the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "4" and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "3"). After that, when the ball that has flowed into the ball entry unit 64 enters the left second entry port 64b2 by the time a new special figure change (lottery) is executed, the number of special figure reserved balls is "8" (special figure). 1 The number of reserved balls is "4", and the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is "4").

In the present embodiment, when the number of reserved balls for special figures reaches the upper limit value (8), the pre-reading result of each winning information stored on hold (for the acquired winning information, a special drawing lottery using the winning information is performed. It is configured to execute a hold effect (see FIG. 94) for suggesting to the player the result of the preliminary determination performed until the execution, and in the hold effect, the player is given the first frame button 22a. A button effect (usually 8 hold effects) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 94, the effect contents of the normally eight hold effects executed in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when the normally eight-piece hold effect is executed, and FIG. 94 (b) shows the player usually in the eight-piece hold effect. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display content displayed after operating the 1st frame button 22a.

As shown in FIG. 94 (a), when the normally eight hold effects are executed, the hold symbols h1 to h8 indicating the number of hold balls of the special symbol are displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the reserved symbols displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. Similar to the first embodiment described above, the number of reserved balls in the special figure (the total value of the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2) is a predetermined number (the upper limit number in the present embodiment, "8". Until it reaches "), it is displayed in the small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a of the main display area Dm. Then, when the number of reserved special figures reaches a predetermined number, it is displayed in the small display area Ds1b of the sub-display area Ds as shown in FIG. 94 (a). The reserved symbols h1 to h8 are displayed in chronological order of the reserved memory, and although not shown, the displayed reserved symbols are the reserved symbols corresponding to the special figure 1 hold or the hold corresponding to the special figure 2 hold. Whether it is a symbol or not is displayed in a display mode that allows the player to identify it.

In the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 2, the ball flowing into the ball entry unit 64 can acquire the first entry slot 64b1 in which the winning information in the special figure 1 can be acquired, and the winning information in the special figure 2. Since it is configured to be alternately distributed to the left second entry port 64b2, when the game state is the normal state, basically, the hold symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 1 hold. FIG. 2 Hold symbols corresponding to hold are displayed alternately. However, both the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 have an upper limit set to be reserved and stored, and the fluctuation time in which the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation are different is set. It is configured to be runnable.

Therefore, for example, when the special figure 1 hold is 3 and the special figure 2 hold is 3 and a long-time (for example, 90 seconds) fluctuation time is set as the special figure 1 fluctuation, the long-time fluctuation is set. There may be a case where the special figure 2 variation is executed a plurality of times (for example, three times) by the end of. In such a situation, the number of special figure reservations stored on hold differs greatly between special figure 1 and special figure 2, and according to the above-mentioned example, special figure 1 hold "2" pieces, special figure 1 hold. FIG. 2 Hold “0” situations occur. Then, in this situation, if the ball is continuously flowed into the ball entry unit 64 and the number of special figure reserved balls is increased, the value of special figure 2 hold becomes "when the special figure 1 hold reaches the upper limit number (4). 2 ”occurs. In this case, if the ball is continuously inserted into the ball entry unit 64, even if the ball enters the first entry port 64b1, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has reached the upper limit. The new special figure 1 reserved ball cannot be acquired, and the special figure 2 reserved ball will be acquired continuously. As a result, the reserved symbols indicating the special figure 2 reserved are continuously displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the pachinko machine has a configuration in which special figure 1 hold (winning information corresponding to special figure 1) and special figure 2 hold (winning information corresponding to special figure 2) can be alternately acquired (holding storage is possible). In 10, the reserved symbols displayed in the order in which they are held and stored alternately display the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold according to the number of reserved balls acquired and the fluctuation time of the special figure change to be executed. Even if the situation is not met, by looking at the display mode of the secured symbol, the player can easily grasp the type of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game. can.

In this embodiment, when the number of reserved balls for the special figure reaches a predetermined number, the effect using the reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls for the special figure (holding effect) is executed. Another condition may be set as the execution condition of, for example, it is configured to execute the hold effect when a predetermined number (for example, two) of hold symbols indicating the same type of special figure hold are displayed side by side. Alternatively, the holding effect may be executed based on the combination of the arrangement order of the special symbol types indicated by each reserved symbol and the display number of the reserved symbols (the number of reserved symbols reserved).

With this configuration, when either the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 or the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 reaches the upper limit, the firing of the balls is stopped and the operation of the game is reduced. It can be suppressed.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 94 (a). The reserved symbols h1 to h8 displayed in the small display area Ds1b of the sub-display area Ds move to the running display area Ds1a formed in the small display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds every time the special figure fluctuation is started. The special figure is shifted and the display mode of the reserved symbol corresponding to the currently executed special figure change (display mode changed by the hold effect until the special figure change is executed) is displayed so as to be understandable to the player. Fluctuations are carried out. With this configuration, the effect result of the hold effect and the effect result of the variation effect executed in response to the change of the special figure are analyzed in a complex manner, and the lottery result of the special figure lottery is predicted to the player. It can be made easy to make.

Normally, when eight hold effects are executed, the display mode of the hold symbols h1 to h8 displayed in the small display area Ds1b of the sub display area Ds prompts the player to operate the first frame button 22a. It is variably displayed in a mode (a display mode imitating the first frame button 22a). Then, in the main display area Dm, a comment urging the player to operate the first frame button 22a eight times is displayed, and the first frame button 22a, which is usually an operation target in the eight hold effect, is displayed. The imitated button 812 is displayed. By displaying in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the game content to be executed during the normally eight hold effects in an easy-to-understand manner.

Then, when the player presses the first frame button 22a during the normally eight holding effect, the display mode of the reserved symbol h1 is variably displayed from the preparation display mode to the suggestion display mode (see FIG. 94 (b)). Then, the display mode is variably displayed in the order of the reserved symbols h2 to h8. Next, with reference to FIG. 94 (b), the content of the effect result of the normally eight hold effects will be described.

Normally, in the eight-piece hold effect, when the player operates the first frame button 22a, a suggestion display mode capable of suggesting the pre-reading result of each winning information corresponding to each hold symbol h1 to h8 to the player is displayed. .. This suggestion display mode suggests that the target winning information includes information indicating a jackpot, and a plurality of displays having different ease of selection when the information indicating a jackpot is included. The mode (color) is configured to be displayable.

Specifically, the display mode of "white-> blue-> green-> red" is defined in the order of difficulty in selection (low jackpot expectation) when information indicating a jackpot is included. That is, the reserved symbols normally displayed in the "white" display mode as the effect result of the eight reserved effects are difficult to win in the special figure lottery corresponding to the reserved symbols, and are displayed in the "red" display mode. The reserved symbol is configured so that it is easy to win a big hit in the special symbol lottery corresponding to the reserved symbol.

As a result, by grasping the effect result of the normally eight reserved effects before the special figure fluctuation is actually executed, a specific reserved symbol (for example, "red" display mode) is displayed even before the special figure lottery is executed. It is possible to play a game with a feeling of expectation for a big hit for the reserved symbol displayed in. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation for a big hit for a longer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the normal eight-piece hold effect of the present embodiment, as described above, the effect of operating the operation means (first frame button 22a) is configured to be executed as many times as the number of times corresponding to the number of the reserved symbols h1 to h8. However, the number of times the first frame button 22a is operated is not limited to this, and a number of times smaller than the number of reserved symbols may be set, or a large number of times may be set. Here, when the number of operations is set to be smaller than the number of reserved symbols displayed, the suggestion display with a high expectation of big hit is as a suggestion display mode suggesting the pre-reading result of the winning information stored in the hold. The reserved symbols h1 to h8 may be variably displayed by the number corresponding to the number of operations in the order in which the modes are set, or the reserved symbols h1 to h8 are operated in the order in which the suggested display modes with low jackpot expectations are set. It may be variably displayed by the number corresponding to the number of times.

Further, when the number of operations is set to be larger than the number of displayed reserved symbols, the suggestion display mode of one reserved symbol may be variably displayed a plurality of times. Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 94 (a), all the reserved symbols h1 to h8 are normally displayed in the same display mode as the preparatory display mode of the eight hold staging, and the player Is configured so that it is difficult to predict the content of the suggestion display mode until the player presses the first frame button 22a, so that the player positively presses the first frame button 22a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be used in which the player can predict the display mode of the suggestion display mode depending on the display mode of the preparation display mode, and a plurality of display colors of the preparation display mode may be used. It may be configured to be configurable so that the display color of the displayed preparatory display mode suggests the display mode of the suggestion display mode. For example, when the display color of the preparation display mode is "green", it is preferable to configure so that the suggestion display mode of "green" or "red" is displayed when the first frame button 22a is pressed. With such a configuration, the player can press the first frame button 22a in a state where the player has a feeling of expectation for a big hit, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display modes of the reserved symbols h1 to h8 are variably displayed based on the pre-reading result of the corresponding winning information, but the display mode is not limited to this and is stored on hold. Based on the pre-reading result of all the winning information, the display mode of the entire reserved symbols h1 to h8 may be variably displayed. In this case, for example, among the reserved symbols h1 to h8, the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by using the display mode of the reserved symbols h1 to h4 (the game state set after the jackpot game ends and the number of rounds of the jackpot game). It is preferable to set the display mode of each of the reserved symbols h1 to h8 so as to suggest the degree of expectation of the jackpot winning by using the display mode of the remaining reserved symbols h5 to h8.

With this configuration, it is possible to display one suggestion target content by combining the display modes of the plurality of reserved symbols, so that more detailed suggestion information can be provided to the player. Further, since the effect result of the hold effect is notified to the player by variably displaying the display mode of all the hold symbols, the first frame button 22a can be enthusiastically operated until the end.

In addition, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which only one operation means (first frame button 22a) is used as the operation means for the player to normally operate in the eight-piece hold effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. As a preparatory display mode corresponding to the reserved symbol on which the suggestion display mode (red) having a high jackpot expectation is displayed, a preparatory display mode indicating that an unusual operation means (second frame button 22b) is operated is displayed. However, the second frame button 22b may be operated when the display mode of the reserved symbol is variably displayed. As a result, it is possible to operate a plurality of types of operation means in one effect (usually eight hold effects), so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, since the jackpot expectation can be made different depending on the type of the operating means, it is possible to make the player interested in which operation means is to be operated.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of types of operating means, the operating means capable of accepting the operation of variably displaying the display modes of the reserved symbols h1 to h8 is set so as to be difficult for the player to identify (cannot be identified). It may be configured to determine whether or not to variably display the display mode of the reserved symbols h1 to h8 according to the operating means operated by the player. This makes it possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting an operating means for performing the operation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the button effect executed based on the special figure fluctuation and the button effect executed based on the number of special figure reserved balls (8 hold effects) are executed in duplicate. The flow of the game content in the case will be explained. FIG. 93 shows the flow of the effect when the button effect executed based on the variation of the special figure and the button effect executed based on the number of reserved balls of the special figure (8 hold effects) are executed in duplicate. It is a timing chart shown. Since the content of the button effect executed based on the special figure variation is the same as that of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 92, when the number of special figure reserved balls reaches eight, a button effect (usually eight reserved effects) using the reserved symbols h1 to h8 is executed. It is configured in. In addition to this, while the button effect is being executed based on the special figure fluctuation, the reserved symbols h1 to h8 are used under looser conditions (the number of special figure reserved balls reaches 7) than the normal 8 reserved effect. It is configured so that the button effect that was used is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to have the player continuously play the game even while the button effect is being executed based on the fluctuation of the special figure.

As shown in FIG. 93, while the button effect (button effect A (operation target is the first frame button 22a)) is being executed based on the variation of the special figure 1, the number of balls on the special figure hold (special figure 1 hold). When the total number of reserved storages in Fig. 2 and the number of reserved storages in Special Figure 2 reaches 7 (see FIG. 93 (a)), the super hold effect is executed instead of the button effect A (FIG. FIG. 95 (a)). Here, with reference to FIG. 95, the effect content of the super hold effect will be described. FIG. 95 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed when the super hold effect is executed. FIG. 95 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect result of the super hold effect.

This super hold effect is a hold effect that is executed by taking over the effect mode of the button effect A (see FIG. 9 (a)) being executed, and as shown in FIG. 95 (a), the main display area dm. Similar to the button effect A, the sleeping character 811 is displayed, and an effect of repeatedly hitting the operating means (second frame button 22b) to wake up the character 811 is executed. Then, each time the second frame button 22b is pressed, the suggested modes 811a to 811d appear from the character 811. The suggestion modes 811a to 811d are set based on the pre-reading result of the winning information corresponding to the reserved symbols h1 to h7 displayed in the small display area Ds1b of the sub-display area Ds, as in the above-mentioned normal eight holding effect. It is a suggestion mode that suggests the suggestion display mode of each of the reserved symbols h1 to h7.

Then, when the second frame button 22b is repeatedly hit and the character 811 rises up, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), various modes shown in the suggested modes 811a to 811d shift to the reserved symbols h1 to h7, and each of them It is displayed as a suggestion display mode indicating the degree of expectation of a jackpot of the reserved symbols h1 to h7. As described above, in the super hold effect, since the suggestion modes 811a to 811d are displayed for the above-mentioned normal eight hold effects, it is not known which hold symbol corresponds to which suggestion mode. Therefore, the player can be notified in advance of the display mode (color) that can be displayed as the suggestion display mode of the reserved symbols h1 to h7.

Therefore, when information (for example, red) indicating that the jackpot expectation is high is displayed as the suggestion mode, the suggestion display mode of the reserved symbols h1 to h7 is enthusiastically displayed in red. The two-frame button 22b can be operated. In this embodiment, all the modes displayed as the suggested modes 811a to 811d are configured so as not to shift to the suggested display modes of the reserved symbols h1 to h7. Thereby, for example, even when the display mode having a high expectation of big hit is not selected as the suggestion display mode of the reserved symbols set based on the pre-reading result of the winning information corresponding to the reserved symbols h1 to h7. Since the display mode (red) having a high expectation of a big hit can be displayed as the suggestion mode 811 in a pseudo manner, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to make the player know that the super hold effect has been executed by switching to the button effect A, the operation means (first frame button 22a) to be operated by the button effect A and the supermarket. The operation means (second frame button 22b) that is the operation target of the hold effect is configured to be different, but the operation target is not limited to this, and the same operation means is the operation target for any button effect. It may be configured as.

In this way, when one button effect is being executed and another button effect (a button effect that is executed with priority over the button effect being executed (higher priority)) is executed, the other button effect is executed. By configuring to execute the overlapping (fusion) effect (super hold effect) that inherits the effect content of the button effect being executed, the effect content of the button effect suddenly switches, making it difficult for the player to understand. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

Further, even if a button effect having a higher priority than the button effect being executed is established at a different trigger (a trigger that is not established at the start timing of the button effect being executed), the button with the higher priority is satisfied. Since the effect can be reliably executed, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 to 99. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. Other points are the same as those in the first embodiment, the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 96A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 96 (a), in the second embodiment, when setting whether or not the hold effect is executed using the hold symbol and the effect mode of the hold effect for the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the reserved effect selection table 223aa that is referred to and the simultaneous effect enable / disable setting area 223ab that is referred to when determining whether or not to execute each effect with the same priority at the same time are added. ing. The other elements are the same, and detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the second embodiment, priority is given to various notice effect contents specified in the variation pattern selection table 223a. As a result, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, when a plurality of button effects are set in duplicate, the button effects to be executed are determined based on the priority given to each button effect. In the second embodiment, in addition to the button effect, various notice effects (for example, comment effect, mini character effect, etc.) set based on the special figure change are set to determine the jackpot expectation of the special figure change during the special figure change period. Priority is also given to an effect that is executed so as to be completed in a specific period (for example, 2 to 5 seconds).

With this configuration, the button effect and the advance notice effect are executed in duplicate, and the effect is difficult for the player to understand (for example, when the effect with low jackpot expectation is displayed as the effect of the button effect). At about the same timing, the effect with high expectation of big hits will be displayed as a result of the effect of the notice effect, or the same character as the character appearing in the button effect will appear in the advance notice effect, and which character appeared. It is possible to further suppress the execution of an effect (such as an effect that makes it difficult to understand whether it is for the effect).

The hold effect selection table 223aa is a data table that is referred to when the presence / absence of execution of the hold effect using the hold symbol and the effect mode of the hold effect are set, and is the number of hold balls output from the main control device 110. It is referred to in the special hold effect process (see S4523 in FIG. 104) of the hold ball number process (S4208 in FIG. 103) executed when a command is received (S6309 in FIG. 104). Here, the contents of the holding effect selection table 223aa will be described with reference to FIG. 97.

FIG. 97 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the holding effect selection table 223aa in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 97, the holding effect selection table 223aa is included in the current number of reserved balls (the sum of the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 and the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2) and the winning information to be directed. Based on the hit / fail determination information and the acquired value of the second effect counter 223v, the effect pattern to be executed (the effect mode of the hold effect) and the priority are defined.

Specifically, the case where the number of reserved balls (the total value of the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 and the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2) is "1 to 3" and the hit / fail judgment information indicates "hit". In the range where the value of the acquired second effect counter 223v is "0 to 39", "do not execute the hold effect (indicated by"-"in FIG. 97)" is defined, and in the range of "40 to 99". , The effect pattern "hold A" and the priority "2" are defined. On the other hand, in the case where the hit / fail determination information indicates "off" and the value of the acquired second effect counter 223v is in the range of "0 to 94", the "hold effect is not executed" (in FIG. 97, "-"). Display) ”is defined, and the effect pattern“ Hold A ”and the priority“ 3 ”are defined in the range of“ 94 to 99 ”.

Next, the number of reserved balls (the sum of the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 and the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2) is "4 to 5", and the winning / failing determination information indicates "hit". In the range where the value of the second effect counter 223v is "0 to 59", "do not execute the hold effect (indicated by"-"in FIG. 97)" is defined, and in the range of "60 to 84", the effect is produced. The pattern "hold B" and the priority "2" are defined, and the effect pattern "button hold A" and the priority "1" are defined in the range of "85 to 99". On the other hand, in the case where the hit / fail determination information indicates "off" and the value of the acquired second staging counter 223v is in the range of "0 to 89", "holding staging is not executed" (in FIG. 97, "-"). Display) ”is specified, the effect pattern“ Hold B ”and the priority“ 2 ”are specified in the range of“ 90 to 94 ”, and the effect pattern“ Button hold A ”is specified in the range of“ 95 to 99 ”. , Priority "3" is specified.

Finally, the number of reserved balls (the sum of the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 and the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2) is "6,7", and the winning / failing judgment information indicates "hit". In the range where the value of the second effect counter 223v is "0 to 29", "do not execute the hold effect (indicated by"-"in FIG. 97)" is defined, and in the range of "30 to 69", the effect is produced. The pattern "hold C" and the priority "1" are defined, and the effect pattern "button hold A" and the priority "3" are defined in the range of "70 to 99". On the other hand, in the case where the hit / fail determination information indicates "off" and the value of the acquired second staging counter 223v is in the range of "0 to 79", "holding staging is not executed" (in FIG. 97, "-"). Display) ”is specified, the effect pattern“ Hold C ”and the priority“ 2 ”are specified in the range of“ 80 to 97 ”, and the effect pattern“ Button hold A ”is specified in the range of“ 98 to 99 ”. , Priority "1" is specified.

The simultaneous effect enable / disable setting area 223ab is a storage area referred to when determining whether or not to execute each effect given the same priority at the same time, and is a special operation (when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on). When the effect switching operation) is performed, information indicating whether or not the simultaneous effect can be executed is stored. Here, when the information indicating that the simultaneous effect is not executed is stored, it is stored in the first effect layer storage area 223ab1 (see FIG. 99 (a)) in the effect layer storage area group 223aa described later. It is controlled so that the effect referring only to the existing effect information is executed.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 96 (b). FIG. 96B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 96B, in the second embodiment, the effect layer storage area group 223aa is used instead of the button effect layer storage area 223 m for the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the effect level storage area 223ae is provided, and the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223f is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The effect layer storage area group 223aa is a storage area for temporarily storing the effect information set in various processes of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the assigned priority. Here, the contents of the staging layer storage area group 223aa will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. FIG. 98 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the staging hierarchy storage area group 223aa, and FIG. 98 (b) is each storage defined in the staging hierarchy storage area group 223aa. It is a schematic diagram which shows the area schematically. Further, FIGS. 99 (a) to 99 (d) are schematic views for explaining a flow of storing the set effect information.

As shown in FIG. 98A, the staging hierarchy storage area group 223aa is composed of a first staging hierarchy storage area 223ab, a second staging hierarchy storage area 223ac, and a second staging hierarchy storage area 223ad. .. Each of the storage areas (223ab to 223ad) has a storage area (area) capable of storing the effect information of different priorities (priorities 1 to 4) (see FIG. 98 (b)). ..

That is, in the above-described first embodiment, the button effect hierarchical storage area 223 m is provided as a storage area for storing the effect information for indicating the effect set in each process of the voice lamp control device 113, and the priority is given. Was configured to memorize one production information of "1", two production information of priority "2", and one production information of priority "3", whereas this second The embodiment is different in that a maximum of three production information having a priority of "1" to "4" can be stored.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the flow of the storage process of the staging information in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 (a) shows the first effect layer storage area 223ab of the effect layer storage area group 223aa, and FIG. 99 (b) shows the second effect layer storage area 223ac of the effect layer storage area group 223aa. c) shows the first effect layer storage area 223ad of the effect layer storage area group 223aa, and FIG. 99 (d) shows the concept of each process for setting the effect executed by the voice lamp control device 113. ing.

As shown in FIG. 99, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment has a total of 12 areas for storing the set effect information (see FIGS. 99 (a) to 99 (c)). , At least four processes for setting the effect information with priorities are provided (FIG. 99 (d)). Then, the effect (effect with priority) set in each process shown in FIG. 99 (d) is stored (stored) in each storage area according to the set order and the assigned priority. To.

The set effect information is stored (stored) in the storage area indicating the corresponding priority in the order of the first effect layer storage area 223ab, the second effect layer storage area 223ac, and the third effect layer storage area 223ad. That is, for example, when the effect of priority "2" is set, it is first determined whether or not the effect information is stored in the priority 2 area 223ab2 of the first effect layer storage area 223ab, and the effect information is not stored. In this case, the effect information is stored in the priority 2 area 223ab2 of the first effect layer storage area 223ab. On the other hand, when the effect information is stored in the priority 2 area 223ab2 of the first effect layer storage area 223ab, then whether the effect information is stored in the priority 2 area 223ac2 of the second effect layer storage area 223ac. After that, the same process is executed for the third staging layer storage area 223ad.

Then, when the effect information is already stored in the storage area of the corresponding priority of the third effect layer storage area 223ad (when the effect information is set in excess of the storable number), the effect set this time is set. It is configured to discard information. Not limited to this, the oldest effect information may be discriminated and the effect information to be discarded may be determined based on the determination result, or the effect may be produced in a storage area having a priority lower than the set priority. It may be configured to store information. In this case, for example, the priority of the set effect information may be changed to the priority corresponding to the stored storage area, or the original priority of the effect information stored in the storage areas having different priorities. May be temporarily stored, and when a vacancy in the storage area corresponding to the original priority occurs, the effect information may be stored in a predetermined storage area.

As shown in FIG. 99 (d), in the second embodiment, as an effect to which a priority can be given, a special figure 1 variable button effect capable of setting a button effect based on the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery. , Special figure 2 change button effect, special figure change display effect, and hold change effect (various effects selected by the hold effect selection table 222aa), which are set in each process. The storage area where the staging information can be stored is different. Specifically, as for the effect information indicating the button effect set as the button effect for change in the special figure 1, the priority 1 area to the priority 3 area of the first effect layer storage area 223ab1 are memorable areas, and the special figure 2 The effect information indicating the button effect set as the variable button effect is an area in which the priority 1 area to the priority 4 area of the first effect layer storage area 223ab and the second effect layer storage area 223ac can be stored.

Further, as the effect information indicating various advance notice effects set as the display effect for changing the special figure, the priority 2 area to the priority 4 area of the first effect layer storage area 223ab to the third effect layer storage area 223ad can be stored. The effect information indicating the hold effect (display effect, button effect) that becomes an area and is set as the effect for hold change is the priority 2 area to the priority 4 of the first effect layer storage area 223ab to the third effect layer storage area 223ad. The area becomes a memorable area.

In this way, by making the range of the storage area (storage area) in which the effect information indicating the effect is stored different according to the setting opportunity of various effects to which the priority is given, a predetermined regularity is given. It is possible to carry out the production.

The simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is a flag for indicating that the effects to which the same priority is given are not executed in duplicate, and is a state in which the effects of the same priority are not executed in duplicate. It is set to on if. The simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae allows the player to arbitrarily change the setting status, and the effect level selection process (see S6221 in FIG. 109) executed in the button pressing process 2 (see S5853 in FIG. 108). ) Is variably set based on the operation content of the player's operating means (S6605, S6606 in FIG. 109).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the player can arbitrarily select whether or not the effects of the same priority are executed in duplicate. Therefore, a player who wants to experience various effects is set to turn off the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae, and a player who wants to experience a simple effect is set to turn on the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae. Since the desired effect is executed only by doing so, it is possible to easily provide a game suitable for the player.

In the present embodiment, the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is used so that the execution mode of the effect can be selected from two types. However, any configuration may be used as long as the player can select an arbitrary execution mode, for example. Of the staging hierarchy storage area group 223aa, the staging level (staging level 1) in which the staging using only the staging information stored in the first staging hierarchy storage area 223ab is executed, and the first staging hierarchy storage area 223ab. , The effect level (effect level 2) in which the effect using only the effect information stored in the second effect layer storage area 223ac is executed, and stored in the second effect layer storage area 223ac and the third effect layer storage area 223ad. Of the staging level (staging level 4) in which the staging using the staging information is performed and the first staging hierarchy storage area 223ab to the third staging hierarchy storage area 223ad, the priority 1 area and the priority 2 area Of the staging level (staging level 5) in which the staging using the stored staging information is executed and the first staging hierarchy storage area 223ab to the third staging hierarchy storage area 223ad, the priority 3 area and the priority 4 area It may be configured so that the player can select an arbitrary production level from a plurality of production levels, such as the production level (production level 6) in which the production using the production information stored in is executed. ..

In this configuration, for example, when the effect level 6 is selected, it is possible to easily execute an effect that is normally difficult to be executed by a high-priority effect, so that an effect different from the usual one can be played. It can be easily provided to a person and the effect of production can be enhanced. In the present embodiment, the storage area of the effect layer storage area group 223aa is divided into a plurality of storage areas (first effect layer storage area 223ab to third effect layer storage area 223ad) and priorities 1 to 4. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute the effect based on the above-mentioned effect level only by limiting the range of the storage area to be read when the effect is executed.

In this embodiment, the same process (process for setting the effect mode) is executed when the effect is set, regardless of the restriction content for the effect to be executed, and after the effect mode is set. , Even if the range (effect level) of the effect to be executed by the player is variably set, the effect corresponding to the effect range (effect level) after the variable setting can be executed, but this is limited to this. Instead, when setting the effect mode of various effects, the range of the effect to be executed (effect level) may be determined, and whether or not the effect mode is set may be determined based on the determination result. This makes it possible to reduce the processing for setting the effect mode.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, when a special effect mode is set as a high priority effect (for example, an effect of priority 1), the priority related to the special effect mode is low. When an effect (for example, a special-related effect of priority 4) is set in the storage area, the special-related effect is executed with priority over the effects stored in the other priority areas 1 to 3. It is configured so that it can be done.

In this way, by linking an effect with a low execution frequency (effect with a low priority) to an effect with a high priority so that it can be executed, it is possible to provide the player with an effect that is difficult to be executed by itself. , The effect of production can be enhanced. Further, by correcting the execution timing of the special-related effect having a low priority before the execution timing of the special effect having a high priority, the special effect is executed after the special-related effect is executed. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. In this case, as the setting (execution) condition of the special effect, the player is executed with a low priority effect by prescribing the condition that is satisfied when the jackpot is won (or is) in the special symbol lottery. It is possible to enhance the staging effect at the time.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 to 109, the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment is controlled by the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. The explanation will focus on the differences from the processing. In the second embodiment, in the RAM initial value setting process (see S4010 in FIG. 57) executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 57) of the voice lamp control device 113 with respect to the first embodiment described above. The point of adding and executing the button effect initial setting process (see S4012 in FIG. 100) and the special figure 1 variation start process 2 (see S4252 in FIG. 101) instead of the special figure 1 variation start process (see S4202 in FIG. 60). (See) is replaced with the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (see S4204 of FIG. 61), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 2 (see S4254 of FIG. 102) is replaced with the reserved ball number processing (see S4208 of FIG. 63). Then, the reserved ball number processing 2 (see S4258 in FIG. 63) is replaced with the variable display setting process (see S4112 in FIG. 67), and the variable display setting process 2 (see S4112 in FIG. 105) is replaced with the button pressing process (see FIG. It differs in that the button pressing process 2 (see S5853 in FIG. 108) is executed instead of the button pressing process 2 (see S5803 in FIG. 108). The other elements are the same, and detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

First, the contents of the button effect initial setting process (S4012) will be described with reference to FIG. 100. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of the button effect initial setting process (S4012). In the second embodiment, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with an operating means (effect setting switch) at a position where the hall clerk can operate and the player cannot operate (for example, the back surface of the pachinko machine 10). When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the effect setting switch turned on, the setting information indicating the prohibition of simultaneous effect is stored in the simultaneous effect enable / disable setting area 222aa. Then, in this button effect initial setting process (S4012), when the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the simultaneous effect is executed based on the setting information stored in the simultaneous effect enable / disable setting area 222aa. The process of setting the presence or absence of is executed.

Specifically, when the button effect initial setting process (S4012) is executed, the setting information of the simultaneous effect enable / disable setting area 222aa is read (S4031), and when the read setting information is the setting information indicating the prohibition of simultaneous effect. The simultaneous production prohibition flag is set to on, and the simultaneous production prohibition flag is set to off when the setting information does not prohibit simultaneous production (S4032). With this configuration, it is possible to arbitrarily set the initial setting status regarding the simultaneous production in the pachinko machine 10.

In the present embodiment, the hall staff is configured to be able to operate the staging setting switch provided in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not limited to this, and after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped, it is not limited to this. The effect setting switch is placed at a position where the hall staff cannot operate (for example, inside the sealed base case), and it is set so that the presence or absence of simultaneous effect execution is not changed for each type of pachinko machine 10. It may be configured. In this case, for example, in a pachinko machine 10 in which the same production mode can be executed, a large number of productions are performed in a pachinko machine 10 having a special symbol jackpot probability and a different jackpot type (so-called pachinko machine 10 having different specifications). In the pachinko machine 10 that you want to execute (for example, the pachinko machine 10 that is set to have a low jackpot probability), the simultaneous effects are set to be executable, and the pachinko machine 10 that you do not want to execute a large number of effects (for example, the jackpot probability is high). In the pachinko machine 10) that has been set, it is advisable to set the simultaneous production to be infeasible.

With this configuration, it is easy to increase the amount of effect to be executed according to the length of the jackpot interval of the special symbol on the design value without changing the content of the process for setting various effects of the voice lamp control device 113. Can be adjusted to. Further, by operating the effect setting switch, not only the presence / absence of simultaneous effect execution but also the range to be read when executing various effects in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa can be set. good. Even with this configuration, the amount of effect to be executed can be easily adjusted according to the length of the jackpot interval of the special symbol on the design value.

As described above, when the effect setting switch is provided at a position where the player cannot operate and the amount of effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 is limited, the operation of selecting the effect amount by the player, which will be described later. (See FIG. 109) may be configured to be executed within a limited amount of effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the contents of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing 2 (FIG. 4252) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 2 (FIG. 4252). The special figure 1 variation start process 2 (FIG. 4252) has various effect modes (notice) selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table 222a with respect to the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process (see S4202 in FIG. 60). Of the effects, etc.), the effect mode to which the priority is given is different in that the process for storing the effect layer storage area group 223aa is executed, and the other aspects are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing 2 (FIG. 4252) is executed, first, the same processing of S4301 to S4302 as the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (see S4202 of FIG. 60) is executed, and then the fluctuation is executed. With reference to the pattern selection table 223a, a detailed effect mode (notice effect, etc.) is selected (S4321). Here, in the processing of S4321, the information indicating the pass / fail determination result included in the received variation pattern command, the information indicating the variation time, the information indicating the stop type, and the acquired effect counter (values are periodically updated). Based on the value of the random number value), various effect modes (the effect content of the advance notice effect and the presence / absence of the button effect), the execution timing, and the priority are set.

When the processing of S4321 is completed, from the effect modes selected this time, the effect mode with priority (preliminary effect, etc.) is extracted (S4322), and the information indicating the extracted effect mode (effect information) is dealt with. The effect layer storage area (first effect layer storage area 223ab to third effect layer storage area 223ad) is set (stored) in the priority 2 area to the priority 4 area (S4323). Here, since the staging information indicating the staging mode extracted by the process of S4322 is the special figure variation display staging (see FIG. 99 (d)), the staging information is stored in the storage range as shown in FIG. Is the priority 2 area to the priority 4 area of the first effect layer storage area 223ab to the third effect layer storage area 223ad. When the processing of S4323 is completed, the same processing of S4304 to S4306 as the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (see S4202 of FIG. 60) is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the contents of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 2 (S4254) will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 2 (S4254). The special figure 2 variation start process 2 (S4254) has various effect modes (preliminary effect) selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table 222a with respect to the above-mentioned special figure 2 variation start process (see S4204 of FIG. 61). Etc.), the effect mode to which the priority is given is different in that the process for storing the effect layer storage area group 223aa is executed, and the other aspects are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 2 (S4254) is executed, first, the same processing of S4351 to S4352 as the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (see S4204 of FIG. 61) is executed, and then the fluctuation pattern is executed. With reference to the selection table 223a, a detailed effect mode (notice effect, etc.) is selected (S4371). Here, in the process of S4371, the information indicating the pass / fail determination result included in the received variation pattern command, the information indicating the variation time, the information indicating the stop type, and the acquired effect counter (values are periodically updated). Based on the value of the random number value), various effect modes (the effect content of the advance notice effect and the presence / absence of the button effect), the execution timing, and the priority are set.

When the processing of S4371 is completed, from the effect modes selected this time, the effect mode with priority (preliminary effect, etc.) is extracted (S4372), and the information indicating the extracted effect mode (effect information) is dealt with. The effect layer storage area (first effect layer storage area 223ab to third effect layer storage area 223ad) is set (stored) in the priority 2 area to the priority 4 area (S4373). Here, since the staging information indicating the staging mode extracted by the process of S4372 is the special figure variation display staging (see FIG. 99 (d)), the staging information is stored in the storage range as shown in FIG. Is the priority 2 area to the priority 4 area of the first effect layer storage area 223ab to the third effect layer storage area 223ad. When the processing of S4373 is completed, the same processing of S4354 to S4356 as the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (see S4204 of FIG. 61) is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Next, the contents of the reserved ball number processing 2 (S4258) will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the contents of the reserved ball number processing 2 (S4258). In the reserved ball number processing 2 (S4258), with respect to the above-mentioned reserved ball number processing (see S4208 in FIG. 63), the reserved ball number processing 2 (S4258) is a process of storing the selected holding effect in the effect hierarchical storage area group 223aa and the reserved ball number processing. The difference is that the process of selecting the hold effect is executed when the upper limit value has not been reached. The other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the reserved ball number processing 2 (S4258) is executed, first, the same processing of S4501 to S4504 as the above-mentioned reserved ball number processing (see S4208 in FIG. 63) is executed. Here, in the processing of S4503, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls in the special figure) is not the upper limit value (8) (S4503: No), the special holding effect processing is executed (S4523), and S4507 It shifts to the process and ends this process. The details of the special hold effect process executed in S4523 will be described later with reference to FIG. 104, but the determination of whether to execute the super hold effect (see FIG. 95) and the number of reserved balls have not reached the upper limit. The selection process of the hold effect in the case is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the hold effect is to be executed in the process of S4504 (S4504: Yes), then the hold effect selection pattern (effect mode) is set using the hold effect selection table 223aa (S4521) and set. Information (effect information) indicating the effect mode of the hold effect is set (stored) in the corresponding storage area in the effect layer storage area group 222aa (S4522), the process proceeds to S4507, and this process ends.

Here, since the information (effect information) indicating the effect mode set in the process of S4521 is the effect for pending change (see FIG. 99 (d)), the effect information is as shown in FIG. 99 (d). The storage range is the priority 2 area to the priority 4 area of the first effect layer storage area 223ab to the third effect layer storage area 223ad.

Next, the contents of the special hold effect processing (S4523) will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special hold effect processing (S4523). This special hold effect process (S4523) is a process executed when it is determined in the hold ball number process 2 (S4258 in FIG. 103) that the number of hold balls is not the upper limit value (8 pieces), and is various types. This is a process in which the hold effect is set. That is, it is a process for setting a hold effect when the number of special figure hold balls is not the upper limit value.

When the special hold effect process (FIG. 4523) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 button effect is being executed (S6301), if it is determined that it is being executed (S6301: Yes), and then. , It is determined whether the special figure 1 button effect being executed is a button effect stored in the priority 1 area (S6302). Here, if it is determined that the special figure 1 button effect being executed has priority 1 (S6302: Yes), a new hold effect cannot be executed during that period, so this process ends as it is. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S6302, if it is determined that the special figure 1 button effect being executed is not priority 1 (S6302: No), then the current number of reserved balls (holding updated in S4502 of FIG. 103). It is determined whether the value of the ball count counter) is "7" (S6303), and if it is determined to be "7" (S6303: Yes), the priority 1 area 223ab1 of the first staging layer storage area 223ab is set. When it is determined whether the effect information is already stored (S6304) and when it is determined that the effect information is not stored (S6304: No), the information (effect information) indicating the special hold effect (super hold effect) is displayed. The priority 1 area 223ab1 of the first staging layer storage area 223ab is set (stored), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S6304 that the effect information is already stored in the priority 1 area 223ab1 of the first effect layer storage area 223ab (S6304: Yes), the effect information to be executed with priority is set. This process ends without executing the current hold effect (super hold effect). Further, when it is determined in the process of S6301 that the special figure 1 button effect is not being executed (S6301: Yes), or when it is determined in the process of S6303 that the number of reserved balls is not 7, (S6303: No). , S6306, and the presence / absence of execution of the hold effect and the effect mode (effect pattern) of the hold effect are selected (determined) based on the hold effect selection table 223aa.

Then, when the hold effect is selected as a result of the processing of S6306 (S6307), the information indicating the determined hold effect (effect information) is set in the corresponding storage rear in the effect layer storage area group 223aa (S6308). ), End this process. Here, since the information (effect information) indicating the hold effect set (determined) in the process of S6306 is the hold change effect (see FIG. 99 (d)), as shown in FIG. 99 (d). The storage range of the effect information is the priority 2 area to the priority 4 area of the first effect layer storage area 223ab to the third effect layer storage area 223ad.

As described above, in the second embodiment, regardless of the presence / absence and contents of various effects set by other triggers, various effects are set at each trigger and selected in each process ( The various effects that have been set) are configured to be set in the effect layer storage area group 223aa, and among the plurality of effect information stored in the effect layer storage area group 223aa, only the effects that satisfy the execution conditions are selected. It is configured to run. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to execute the discrimination process (process for discriminating the effect setting status at another opportunity) when setting various effects, so that the processing load can be reduced.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S4162) will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S4162). The variation display setting process 2 (S4162) is an effect for setting the variation display setting process (see S4112 in FIG. 67) with respect to the variation of the special figure 1 variation or the variation effect corresponding to the variation of the special figure 2. The difference is that the mode setting process (S5321 (S5322)) is executed, and the other aspects are the same. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the staging mode setting process (S5321) will be described with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the contents of the staging mode setting process (S5321). This effect mode setting process (S5321) is special when it is determined in the variation display setting process 2 (see S4162 of FIG. 105) that the variation start flag of the special figure 1 is set to ON (S5301: Yes). FIG. 1 Corresponds to the special figure 2 variation when it is executed to set the effect mode of the variation effect corresponding to the variation and it is determined that the special figure 2 variation start flag is set to ON (S5306: Yes). This is a process executed to set the effect mode of the variable effect to be performed, and is an effect that satisfies the execution condition among various effect information stored in the effect hierarchical storage area group 223aa at the change start timing of each special figure. This is a process for setting an effect mode based on information (high-priority effect information).

When the effect mode setting process (S5321) is executed, first, the effect information stored in the effect layer storage area group 223aa is read out (S6401), and the related effect setting process is executed (S6402). Here, the related effect setting process (S6402) will be described with reference to FIG. 107. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the contents of the related effect setting process (S6402). In this related effect setting process (S6402), the effect information of low priority (priorities 1 to 4) to be executed in association with (attached to) the effect information set to high priority (priority 1) is determined. A process for determining the non-priority effect information to be discarded in association with the effect information set to the high priority (priority 1) is executed.

When the related effect setting process (S6402) is executed, first, whether or not there is effect information indicating a specific effect having a related effect in the priority 1 area 223ab1 of the first effect layer storage area 223ab of the effect layer storage area group 223aa. Determine (S6501). That is, it is determined whether the effect to be executed with the highest priority is a specific effect that defines a related effect (another effect to be associated and executed, or another effect to be associated and discarded). If it is determined in the process of S6501 that the effect information indicating the specific effect is not stored (S6501: No), it is not necessary to perform the process related to the related effect, so this process is terminated as it is and the effect mode setting process (S6501: No). Return to S5321) in FIG. 106.

On the other hand, in the process of S6501 when it is determined that the effect information indicating the specific effect is stored (S6501: Yes), next, the effect information related to the specific effect is any of the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa. It is determined whether or not the image is stored in the storage area (S6502), and if it is determined that the image is not stored (S6503: No), it is not necessary to perform the process related to the related effect. The process returns to the mode setting process (S5321 in FIG. 106).

If it is determined in the process of S6502 that the effect information related to the specific effect is stored in any storage area of the effect hierarchical storage area group 223aa (S6502: Yes), then the related effect is associated. (S6503), and if it is determined that the stringing effect is executed (S6503: Yes), the execution timing of the stringing effect and the execution timing of the specific effect overlap. It is determined whether or not it is done (S6504).

Here, when it is determined that the execution timing of the stringing effect and the execution timing of the specific effect overlap (S6504: Yes), the execution timing of the stringing effect is the already stored execution timing. As a process for correcting to a different execution timing, the execution timing of the stringing effect is rewritten to before the execution timing of the specific effect (5 seconds before) (S6505), and the priority of the stringing effect is set to 1.5. (S6506), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S6504, when it is determined that the execution timing of the stringing effect and the execution timing of the specific effect do not overlap (S6504), it is not necessary to correct the execution timing of each effect. This process is skipped and this process is terminated.

That is, when the effect information corresponding to the stringing effect is stored among the related effects specified in the specific effect, the execution timing of the stringing effect included in the effect information is set to the execution of the specific effect. The process of rewriting before the timing (the timing at which the specific effect is executed after the stringing effect is completed) is executed, and the priority included in the effect information corresponding to the stringing effect is set to the specific effect. The process of rewriting and setting to the special priority (1.5 in this embodiment), which is the next highest priority, is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a low-priority effect (stringing effect) by linking it to a specific high-priority effect, so that only the high-priority effect is executed. It is possible to solve the problem of getting bored of the game early. Further, by correcting the execution timing so that the low-priority stringing effect is executed before the specific effect, when the stringing effect is executed, the specific effect is executed after that. It can make the player think that it is a game, and it is possible to have fun playing the game while predicting the content of the production to be executed in the future.

In addition, for a player who has the experience of executing a low-priority stringing effect independently, the execution timing of the stringing effect is corrected by understanding that the execution timing of the stringing effect is different from before. Since it is possible to determine in advance that the player is present, it is possible to give a sense of superiority to the player who has been playing the game for a long time. In order to exert this effect strongly, it is preferable to execute the correction process so that the execution timing after being corrected by the process of S6505 becomes an execution timing that cannot be set when the execution is performed independently. Further, it may be configured to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that the execution timing has been corrected.

In the present embodiment, in order to execute the specific effect after the end of the stringing effect, a process of correcting the execution timing of the stringing effect is executed, but the process is not limited to this, and for example, the execution of the specific effect is executed. The timing may be corrected (delayed), or the specific effect may be executed after the stringing effect is completed by making a correction that shortens the effect period of the stringing effect. Further, it is sufficient that the stringing effect is executed before the specific effect is executed, and the execution timing and the effect period may be corrected so that the specific effect is executed during the execution of the stringing effect.

Returning to FIG. 107, the description will be continued. In the process of S6503, when it is determined that the effect is not the stringing effect (S6503: No), that is, it is determined that the related effect stored in any storage area of the effect layer storage area group 223aa is not the stringing effect. In that case, next, it is determined whether the related effect is the exclusion effect (S6507), and if it is determined to be the exclusion effect (S6507: Yes), the effect information corresponding to the exclusion effect is stored in the effect hierarchy storage area group. Clear (discard) from the storage area of 223aa, and end this process. If it is determined in the process of S6507 that it is not an exclusion effect (S6507: No), the process of S6508 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, different triggers (triggers for setting the variable effect of the special figure 1, opportunity for setting the variable effect of the special figure 2, opportunity for setting the reserved effect when the number of reserved balls is variable), that is, Since various effects (button effect, display effect) are set at different timings, the execution timings of the various effects set in the effect hierarchy storage area group 223aa are set variously depending on the establishment timing of each opportunity. By determining the effect mode, priority, and execution timing of various effects that are irregularly set in this way and determining the effect to be actually executed, it is possible to simplify the effect setting process at each opportunity.

In addition, since it is possible to set the effect mode (execution timing of each effect) that is executed only when the timings when specific effects are executed accidentally overlap, a separate and independent setting opportunity is used in combination. It is possible to carry out the production that was done. Therefore, it is possible to perform various patterns of production that cannot be easily predicted by the player, and it is possible to enhance the production effect.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, a combination of effects that are not desired to be executed during one variable effect is defined in advance, and when one effect is executed, the other effect is excluded. Since it is configured to execute the process, it is possible to suppress the execution of a combination of effects that gives the player a sense of discomfort or distrust.

Returning to FIG. 106, the description will be continued. After finishing the processing of S6402, next, it is determined whether the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is set to ON (S6403), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S6403: No), the effect hierarchy storage area. When the processes of S6404 to S6406 for setting the effect mode for the effect information stored in all the storage areas of the group 223aa are executed and it is determined that the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is set to ON. (S6403: Yes), among the effect layer storage area group 223a, the processes of S6407 and S6408 for setting the effect mode for only the effect information stored in the first effect layer storage area 223ab are executed, and S6409 is executed. Move to the processing of.

Here, in the process of S6404, the effect execution period of each effect is determined from each effect information set (stored) in the first effect layer storage area 223ab, the second effect layer storage area 223ac, and the first effect layer storage area 223ad. Extracted (S6404), the storage area in which the effect information is set in the priority 1 area in the order of the first effect layer storage area 223ab, the second effect layer storage area 223ac, and the first effect layer storage area 223ad is specified, and the effect is produced. An effect mode corresponding to the effect information of each priority 1 area is set so that the execution periods do not overlap (S6405).

That is, in the present embodiment, the priority order is also defined for the plurality of storage areas, and the priority order is in the order of the first effect layer storage area 223ab, the second effect layer storage area 223ac, and the third effect layer storage area 223ad. Is stipulated. Therefore, when the effect information whose execution period overlaps is set (stored) in the priority 1 area 223ab1 of the first effect layer storage area 223ab and the priority 1 area 233ac1 of the second effect layer storage area 223ac. Is set to the effect mode corresponding to the effect information set (stored) in the priority 1 area 223ab1 of the first effect layer storage area 223ab.

On the other hand, when different execution periods are specified in the effect information set (stored) in the priority 1 area of each storage area, the effect mode corresponding to all the effect information is set. As a result, in the variation effect corresponding to one special figure variation, first, only the effect mode having the highest priority is set. As a result, it is possible to appropriately provide the player with an effect that should be preferentially executed. In the present embodiment, the priority order is defined in the order of the first effect layer storage area 223ab, the second effect layer storage area 223ac, and the third effect layer storage area 223ad. When setting, the priority may be set randomly. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the production mode to be executed preferentially, and it is possible to provide a game machine rich in interest.

When the processing of S6405 is completed, next, the effect information to be executed is selected from the stored effect information in the order of priority 2 area to priority 4 area so that the effect execution periods do not overlap, and the selected effect information is selected. (S6406). At this point, the stringing effect set in the process of S6402 is set prior to other effect information. Further, the effect information excluded (cleared) by the process of S6402 is excluded from the selection target. Then, a display command indicating a variable effect corresponding to each effect mode set in the processes of S6405 and S6406 is set (S6409), and this process is terminated.

Next, in the process of S6407, the effect execution period included in the information set in the first effect layer storage area 223ab is extracted (S6407), and the effect information whose effect execution periods do not overlap is selected in descending order of priority. , The effect mode corresponding to the selected effect information is set (S6408), the process proceeds to the process of S6409 described above, and this process ends.

Next, the contents of the button pressing process 2 (S5853) will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the contents of the button pressing process 2 (S5853). The button pressing process 2 (S5853) is configured to be executed by adding the effect level selection process (S6221) to the button pressing process (see S5803 in FIG. 76) of the first embodiment described above. Different, otherwise identical. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the button pressing process 2 (S5853) is executed, first, the effect level selection process (S6221) is executed, and then the same processing of S6201 to S6209 as the above-mentioned button pressing process (see S5803 in FIG. 76) is executed. Then, this process is terminated. Here, the content of the effect level selection process executed in the process of S6221 will be described with reference to FIG. 109.

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect level selection process (S6221). In this effect level selection process (S6221), a process for selecting the amount (level) of the effect to be executed by the player is executed. In the present embodiment, the effect information indicating various effects can be set (stored) in the effect layer storage area group 223aa, and the effect information set (stored) in which range of the set (stored) effect information is set. It is configured so that the player can select whether to use it to determine the actual effect to be performed.

With this configuration, for example, a player who prefers to execute a lively effect by executing a plurality of effects at various timings (including duplication) can set (memory) more storage areas. ) The effect information that has been set as the target when deciding the effect to be executed, and the player who prefers to execute a simple effect executes the effect information set (stored) in a small storage area. It can be a target when determining the effect, and each player can execute the desired amount of effect.

When the effect level selection process (S6221) is executed, first, the standby condition (for example, the state in which the special figure change is not executed continues for 3 seconds or more while the demo screen is currently in the demo screen (for example, the state in which the special figure change is not executed) continues. If it is determined that (S6601), and if it is determined that the demo screen is in progress (S6601: Yes), then whether the first frame button 22a is turned on. (Whether it is pressed) is determined (S6602).

In the process of S6602, if it is determined that the first frame button 22a is on (S6602: Yes), then it is determined whether the second frame button 22b is on (pressed) (S6603) and turned on. (S6603: Yes), it is determined whether the current setting status of the simultaneous production prohibition flag 223ae is ON (S6604). If it is determined in the process of S6604 that the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is set to on (S6604: Yes), the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is set to off (S6605), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is not set to on (set to off) (S6604: No), the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae is set to on (S6606), and this process is performed. finish.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is a predetermined state (during the demo screen), a special operation (an operation of pressing the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b at the same time) is executed for the operating means. By doing so, the setting of the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae can be switched. This makes it possible for the player to easily set a desired production level (amount).

Although detailed description is omitted, the current setting status of the simultaneous effect prohibition flag 223ae, that is, the amount of effect to be executed, is in an area that can be easily seen by the player, such as the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to display the effect level information for indicating (effect level). As a result, the player can variably set the effect level based on the amount and content of the effect actually executed and the displayed effect level information. Further, as a display mode displayed in the demo screen, a method of variably setting the effect level is displayed. This makes it possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the information of various effects to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set by various setting triggers, and the voice lamp is used. It is stored in the storage means (effect layer storage area group 223aa) possessed by the control device 113, and a display command corresponding to the effect to be actually executed is displayed based on the information stored in the storage means at the execution timing of each effect. Although the configuration for outputting to the control device 114 is used, the configuration is not limited to this, and commands indicating information of various effects set by various setting triggers are output to the display control device 114 and output to the display control device 114. The storage means (the storage means corresponding to the effect hierarchical storage area group 223aa) possessed by the side is stored, and the effect to be executed according to the execution timing of the effect is determined based on the information stored in the storage means. Is also good.

Further, in this case, the information indicating the content of the execution effect set on the display control device 114 side is output to the voice lamp control device 113 side, and is based on the information received from the display control device 114 on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Therefore, it is advisable to configure it so as to set a new effect. This makes it possible to determine whether or not to set a new effect according to the situation of the effect actually being executed.

Further, in the second embodiment, the configuration in which the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b are provided as the operation means that can be operated by the player is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the third symbol is shown. A touch sensor whose detection range is set at a position facing the display screen of the display device 81 (a position in front of the display screen) may be used. This touch sensor is a non-contact type detection means, and is an operation means for determining that the operation has been performed by detecting that the player has entered a hand within the detection range.

When such a touch sensor is used, since the detection range of the touch sensor is provided at a position facing the display screen, for example, "touch the character" on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. By displaying the comment and the character and setting the display position of the character to a position overlapping the detection range of the touch sensor, the player can positively operate the operation means (touch sensor). ..

Further, when the gaming machine provided with the touch sensor described above is provided with a variable decorative member that can be changed up to a position that covers the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, that is, at least a predetermined first position (initial position). ) And a variable member that can move (variable) between the second position (operation position), and the variable member is variably operated when the player operates the operating means (first frame button 22a). When configured as such, the decorative variable member moved to the second position invades the detection range of the touch sensor, and the button effect using the first frame button 22a (variable operation of the decorative variable member). There arises a problem that the button effect using the touch sensor cannot be executed during the execution of the effect).

In such a case, it is preferable to rewrite a part of the information of the effect contents of each button effect set in duplicate to execute the duplicate button effect. Specifically, at the timing of executing each button effect, the position of the decorative variable member and the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are determined, and based on the determination result, in advance. It is preferable to rewrite the operation means to be operated and the information indicating the operation content for the operation means among the defined effect modes of the button effect. As a result, the button effects can be duplicated and executed without changing the display mode of the button effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

In this embodiment, the effect mode (effect content, execution timing, execution period, priority, etc.) of each effect is independently set at each setting opportunity, and the effect is based on the information indicating the set effect mode. However, it is preferable to configure the execution timing to be executed after the execution timing correction process for correcting the execution timing of the effect mode independently set at each setting trigger is performed. With this configuration, for example, when button effects are set at a plurality of setting triggers and the plurality of button effects are executed in duplicate, the operation validity period set corresponding to each button effect is 0. . If there is a deviation of 1 second, the deviation of 0.1 seconds can be corrected, and at the same time, an effect can be executed in which the operation valid period is set. Therefore, the staging effect can be enhanced. Further, instead of correcting the effect mode of each effect actually set, only the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is corrected, and for example, the operation valid period is notified to the player. It may be configured to synchronize the timing at which the display mode (gauge 817a) is displayed.

Further, when the effect mode of the button effect is to variably operate the above-mentioned decorative variable member, the decorative variable member is to be positioned at the initial position in advance before the button effect is executed. It is necessary to execute a process (preparation process) and a process (origin confirmation process) for determining whether the decorative variable member is located at the initial position. Further, when the decorative variable member is variable (positioned at the operating position) and the button effect is switched to another button effect (high priority button effect), the player If the decorative variable member is located at a position that covers the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, it will interfere with other effects and the entire pachinko machine 10 will be disturbed. There was a risk that the effect of the production would be significantly reduced.

Therefore, a high priority (priority 1) is set for the button effect in which the effect mode for varying the decorative variable member is set. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the effect of the pachinko machine 10 as a whole is significantly reduced due to the execution of other button effects. Not limited to the above-described configuration, only various effects for moving the decorative variable member are stored in different storage areas (variable effect storage areas) having a plurality of different priorities, and are stored in the variable effect storage area. The staging information may be preferentially discriminated, and based on the discriminant result, it may be configured to determine whether or not to execute various staging stored in the staging hierarchy storage area group 223aa. As a result, the variable effect for varying the decorative variable member can be executed with priority over other effects, and the priority of execution can be given in the variable effect.

Further, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, as described with reference to FIG. 8, the player is notified of the operation valid period of the operating means, and the operating means is operated within the operation valid period. Although a button effect is provided to make the player operate, a special button effect that is executed based on the player operating the operating means may be provided. Specifically, when the operation means is operated during a part of the period during which the button effect is not executed without notifying the player of the operation validity period, the display screen of the three symbol display devices 81 is displayed. A special button effect may be provided in which an effect (lively effect) that changes various modes of effect being executed is executed.

In this case, a special timer different from the button enable timer set based on the execution of the button effect described above is provided, and it is determined that the predetermined button operation is executed while the predetermined period is set by the special timer. In this case, it may be configured to execute the special button effect, or it may be configured to execute the special button effect in duplicate for each button effect. As described above, since the special button effect does not notify the player of the operation validity period, even if the special button effect is executed in duplicate with other button effects, the duplicate effect is not given to the player. Can be executed.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 124. In the third embodiment, with respect to the first embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13, the types of gaming states set according to the lottery result of the special symbol, the configuration of the main control device 110, and the voice lamp control. Is different from the configuration of the device 113.

In the first embodiment described above, the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) (special figure 1 lottery) and the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) (special figure 2 lottery) are performed at the same time (parallel). It was configured to be executed. On the other hand, the third embodiment is different in that the special figure 2 lottery is preferentially executed with respect to the special figure 1 lottery.

Then, in the third embodiment, when a jackpot of a special symbol is won, a probabilistic state (until the next jackpot is won) is set as a game state set after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning. And, one of the time saving states (until the special figure fluctuation is executed 100 times without winning the jackpot, or until the jackpot is won) is set.

In other words, if the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol are continuously set until the next jackpot is won, so that the probability variation state is set. The probability of winning many prize balls was much higher. Here, the pachinko machine 10 in recent years is configured to continue the probabilistic state with a high probability, and by providing the player with the possibility of winning a large number of prize balls, the gambling of the game is enhanced. As a measure to prevent this, a measure for reducing the probability that the probabilistic state continues (for example, reducing the rate at which the probabilistic state continues to 65% or less) is being studied.

By taking such measures, it is possible to provide a sound pachinko machine 10 that does not give the player excessive expectations for the prize ball, but the probability change state is high as in the past. Among the effects used in the pachinko machine 10 that continues with a probability (for example, 80%) (effects for showing the lottery result of a special symbol), the effect when used in the pachinko machine 10 with countermeasures. However, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play is reduced.

Specifically, in the battle production that notifies that the probability change state will be set after the end of this jackpot game when the own character battles with the enemy character during the jackpot game and wins the battle. If the rate at which the probability change state continues decreases, the winning percentage of the battle effect executed during the jackpot game decreases, and the player's expectation (the probability change state is set) when the battle effect is executed. There was a problem that the expectation for doing things) diminished and the motivation to play was reduced.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, a continuous battle effect is provided in which the battle effect is continued from the end of the jackpot game until the predetermined end condition (for example, the special figure change is executed 30 times) is satisfied. It is configured to execute and execute the effect of winning the battle when the jackpot is won during the period from the end of the jackpot game to the establishment of the predetermined end condition. As a result, the probability of winning in the battle production can be increased, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play.

Further, in the third embodiment, when a probabilistic jackpot (a jackpot in which a probabilistic state is set after the jackpot game ends) is won, a battle effect is executed to win the battle during the jackpot game, and a time-saving jackpot (big hit) is executed. It is configured to execute the continuous battle effect only when the big hit) in which the time saving state is set after the end of the game is won. This makes it possible to increase the probability of winning in the battle production.

In addition, during the continuous battle production, the production result of the continuous battle is configured to be different depending on the type of the winning jackpot. For example, if the probability change jackpot is won during the continuous battle production, the battle victory production is performed. It is configured to execute the battle rematch production if the time saving jackpot is won during the continuous battle production. As a result, if a short-time jackpot is won during the continuous battle production, the defeat production that loses the battle is suppressed. Therefore, since the frequency of the defeat effect being executed after the battle effect is executed can be reduced, the rate of battle victory can be relatively increased.

Here, with reference to FIG. 110, the structure of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 110 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 110, the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is located below the gaming area with respect to the gaming board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the first ball entry port 164 is arranged instead of the ball entry unit 64. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, while the normal state is set as the game state, a game in which the ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 164 by a left-handed game is performed, and the special figure 1 lottery is performed. A game aiming for a big hit is executed. Then, when the jackpot is won and the probability change state or the time saving state is set as the game state, a game in which the ball is inserted into the second entrance 640 by the right-handed game is performed.

<Regarding the content of the production in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 111 to 114, the characteristic effect contents executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 111 is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect executed during the special figure change from the jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 111, in the present embodiment, a battle effect (probability change suggestion effect) for suggesting the game state after the end of the jackpot game to the player is executed during the jackpot game, and the battle effect (probability change suggestion effect) is executed according to the type of the winning jackpot. , The execution period of the battle production is different, and the production success rate (battle win rate) in the battle production is increased, and the expectation of the player for the battle production can be increased.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111 (a), when the probabilistic jackpot is won, the battle effect (see FIG. 111 (A)) executed during the jackpot game is used to win the battle. (See FIG. 111 (B)) is executed. Here, the production content of the battle effect executed during the jackpot game will be described with reference to FIG. 112.

FIG. 112 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when the battle effect is executed, and FIG. 112 (b) is a display displayed when the battle is won in the battle effect. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the contents. Since FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b) are schematic views showing a display example executed during the time saving state, the display modes of the small area Dm1 and the small area Dm2 show the time saving state. Since the mode of the battle effect executed in the main display area Dm is the same as the battle effect executed during the jackpot game, FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b) will be described. Further, among the elements of the display screen shown in FIG. 112 (a), the same elements as those in the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, when the battle effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 112 (a), the effect that the ally character 817 imitating a hero and the enemy character 818 imitating a monster perform a battle is executed. Then, the physical strength gauge 817a of the character 817 and the physical strength gauge 818a of the character 818 are displayed, and the effect that the character whose physical strength gauge becomes 0 first loses is executed.

On the upper side of the main display area Dm, a victory notification mode Dm7, a rematch notification mode Dm8, and a defeat notification mode Dm9 are displayed as result notification modes for notifying the result of the battle effect. All of the notification modes Dm7 to Dm9 are displayed as shown in FIG. 112 (a) immediately after the battle effect is started, and when a completely denied effect result occurs as the battle effect progresses. Is configured to hide the corresponding notification mode. As a result, the player can predict the effect result of the battle effect before the effect result of the battle effect (win or lose of the battle) is notified.

In addition, on the lower left side of the main display area Dm, a prize ball display area Dm5 for displaying prize ball number information for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game is formed, and a value of "1000" is displayed. ing. Further, a round number display area Dm6 for indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot game is formed on the right side thereof, and the value of "8" is displayed. As described above, since FIG. 112A shows the display content of the battle effect (continuous battle effect) in the time saving state, it is actually a game state in which the jackpot game is completed.

In such a gaming state, by displaying the prize ball display area Dm5 and the round number display area Dm6, the player is currently in a big hit game (for example, during the interval period or ending period between round games). It can be made to think that the battle effect being executed is the effect being executed during the jackpot game. In FIG. 112A, the small area Dm1 and the small area Dm2 are displayed in large size in order to explain the current gaming state in an easy-to-understand manner, but in reality, the player is changing the special figure. It is displayed in a size that makes it difficult to identify.

Then, at the time of FIG. 111 (B), the effect of winning the battle shown in FIG. 112 (b) is executed. In FIG. 112 (b), the physical strength gauge 818a of the character 818 becomes 0, the effect that the character 818 is defeated is displayed, and only the victory notification mode Dm7 is displayed. By executing this battle victory effect, the player is notified that the probability change state is set as the game state.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 111. After winning the battle, the production during the probable change state is executed, and if the jackpot is won again during the probable change state (time saving jackpot), the battle production (continuous battle production) is executed until the time saving 30 times elapses even after the jackpot game ends. (See FIG. 112 (a)). Then, when the special figure fluctuation is executed 30 times after the time saving state is set, the effect of losing the battle (defeat effect) is executed (see FIG. 111 (C)). Here, with reference to FIG. 113 (a), the contents of the production when the battle production is defeated will be described. FIG. 113A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents at the time of defeat of the battle.

As shown in FIG. 113A, the physical strength gauge 817a of the character 817 becomes 0, the effect that the character 817 is defeated is displayed, and only the defeat notification mode Dm9 is displayed. By executing this battle defeat effect, it is notified that the time saving state is set as the game state. In this embodiment, 30 times out of 100 time reductions set as the time reduction state at the time when the battle defeat effect is executed are elapsed, so that after FIG. 113 (a) is displayed. As a display during the time saving state (see FIG. 111 (D)), as shown in FIG. 114 (b), in the remaining time saving number display area Dm11 indicating the remaining period of the time saving state, "69" is displayed as the remaining time saving number. The value is displayed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the battle effect is executed during the period from the time reduction state is set until the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the probability that the victory effect will be executed in the battle effect. (Increase the probability of winning a probable change jackpot within 30 times of the time reduction state), and reduce the number of time reductions executed after the defeat production is executed in the battle production, so the special symbol is low. It is possible to shorten the period of the time-saving game performed in the state where the probability state is confirmed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's motivation to play.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 111. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), if a probabilistic jackpot is won during the continuous battle production (in the special drawing lottery at the 25th rotation after the time saving state is set), the battle wins during the probabilistic jackpot game. Is executed (see FIG. 112 (b)). As a result, internally, after shifting to the time-saving state once (conventionally, after the defeat production was executed in the battle production), the battle was won even though the probability change jackpot was won. Only the victory effect can be executed without executing the defeat effect of the effect. Therefore, the probability of victory in the battle production can be relatively increased.

In addition, according to the example shown in FIG. 111 (b), since the example in which the number of rounds is small as the probability variation jackpot (probability variation jackpot (2R)) is shown, the production result of the continuous battle effect is displayed during the jackpot game. However, it is not limited to this, for example, in the case of winning a (16R) probability variation jackpot with a large number of rounds, if it is determined by the look-ahead result that the 16 round probability variation jackpot is won, The winning effect of the continuous battle effect and the jackpot effect may be executed, and then the victory effect may be executed again in the battle effect executed during the jackpot game.

In addition, the interval period set after the end of the 8th round of the 16-round jackpot game is set longer than the other interval periods (for example, 1 minute), and the production result of the continuous battle production is set by the 8th round of the first half. After notifying, the effect result indicating that the jackpot was won in the simulated effect of executing the special figure fluctuation in a pseudo manner during the interval period of the 8th round is displayed, and the latter 8 rounds are used during the jackpot game. It may be configured to execute the battle effect of. With this configuration, more winning effects can be performed.

In this case, the interval period after the end of the 8th round of the 16-round jackpot game may be configured to be different depending on the game state. For example, a state in which a probability change state is set (a continuous battle effect is executed). In the non-existing state), an interval period having the same length as other interval periods may be set, and a long-term interval period may be set only in a state in which a time saving state is set. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which an unnecessarily long interval period is set and the game efficiency is lowered in the 16-round probability variation jackpot that was won during the probability variation state.

In addition, when the time reduction state is set, it is even better to configure the long interval period to be set only for the 16 round probability variation jackpot that was won within 30 times of the special figure fluctuation after the time reduction state was set. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), if the time saving jackpot (2R) is won during the continuous battle production (the 20th special figure change after the time saving state is set), the rematch effect is produced as the production result of the continuous battle production. Is executed. Here, with reference to FIG. 113 (b), the production content of the rematch effect will be described. FIG. 113B is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when the effect result of the battle effect is a rematch. As shown in FIG. 113 (b), the character 817 is displayed in a posture of fighting again, and the command 816 of "another match" indicating that the battle effect is executed again with the physical strength gauge 817a remaining is displayed. And the rematch notification mode Dm8 is displayed. In this case, the small display area Dm2 displays the display mode of "222" indicating the big hit winning.

In this embodiment, as the above-mentioned continuous battle effect, the defeat effect is executed when the special figure change is executed 30 times after the time saving state is set, so that the continuous battle effect is being performed. Is an effect in which the physical strength gauge 817a of the character 817 is reduced according to the number of times the special figure change is executed. Then, when the number of time reductions of 30 times, which is the end condition of the continuous battle effect, approaches, the display content shown in FIG. 114 (a) is displayed. FIG. 114 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents when the number of time reductions reaches the 30th time during the continuous battle production.

As shown in FIG. 114 (a), the physical strength gauge 817a decreases according to the number of times the special figure changes executed during the continuous battle production, and the suggestion mode suggesting the defeat of the battle (shaking in FIG. 114 (a)). Defeat notification mode Dm9 is displayed in (displayed in mode). With this configuration, it is possible to execute the 30th variation in the time reduction with the physical strength gauge 817a being small, so that the player can execute the defeat effect of the battle without discomfort.

In this embodiment, the number of time reductions is 30 times (the number of special figure fluctuations after the time reduction state is set is 30 times) as the end condition of the continuous battle effect (battle effect executed during the time reduction state). The case is set as the end condition, but the end condition is not limited to this, and the number of special figure fluctuations in which the end condition is satisfied may be variably set by the staging lottery means. In this case, it is preferable to provide a jackpot type that sets a value other than 100 times (for example, 20 times, 50 times, 80 times, etc.) as the number of continuations of the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the continuous battle production is executed, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of remaining time reductions after the end of the continuous battle production.

In addition, as a guarantee period notification effect for notifying the player of the period during which the continuous battle effect does not end (battle effect guarantee period), for example, the physical strength gauge 817a of the character 817 does not decrease, that is, there is no defeat. The effect indicating the invincible mode may be configured to be executable, and the invincible mode may be configured to notify the duration of the invincible mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the end condition of the continuous battle effect is set based on the number of times the special figure changes in the time saving state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the lottery result of the special symbol is other than a big hit. In a part of the game machine, which is configured to be able to win a small hit that can give a player less privilege (a privilege different from the big hit game) than the big hit game, based on the small hit winning (execution of the small hit game). (Inside) It is good to configure so that the end condition of the continuous battle production is satisfied.

In this case, as the small hit game executed at the time of winning the small hit, it is preferable to execute the small hit game in which the same variable winning device 65 as the big hit game is opened. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the defeat effect of losing the battle while the variable winning device 65 is open, so that the defeat effect is executed for the player as if during the jackpot game. It can make you think.

Further, it is preferable to configure the continuous battle effect to be terminated based on the condition that the special figure change number reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) in the time saving state, or if the small hit is won, the condition established earlier is used. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the continuous battle production from becoming excessively long and to make the duration of the continuous battle production indefinite.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 119. The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed.

First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPI 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 117. FIG. 115 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the third embodiment in a schematic diagram. As shown in FIG. 115, the ROM 202 of the third embodiment selects the first random number 3 table 202ba instead of the first random number table 202a for the ROM 202 of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb is provided instead of the table 202d, and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 116 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the random number 3 table 203ba per first. As shown in FIG. 116, the first random number 3 table 203ba is the same except that the values specified for the first random number table 203a described above are different. Specifically, when the gaming state is low probability (low probability state of the special symbol), the jackpot is defined in the range where the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0,1", and the gaming state is changed. In the case of high probability (high probability state of special symbol), a big hit is defined in the range where the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "2 to 11".

Next, the contents of the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb will be described with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb, and FIG. 117 (b) is a special figure 1 jackpot type included in the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the selection table 202bb1, and FIG. 117 (c) shows the contents specified in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202bb2 possessed by the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb. It is a schematic diagram shown schematically.

As shown in FIG. 117 (a), the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bb is a special figure 1 jackpot type for selecting the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). It has a selection table 202bb1 and a special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202bb2 for selecting the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is configured so that different jackpot types are selected according to the type of the winning special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 117 (b), the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202bb1 is a data table in which three types of jackpot types (big hits A to C) are defined, and the acquired first hit type counter C2. Each jackpot type is specified according to the value of. Specifically, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", "big hit A", in the range of "50 to 64", in the range of "big hit B", and in the range of "65 to 99". "Big hit C" is stipulated.

Here, the jackpot type "big hit A" is a jackpot type in which the jackpot game of 8 rounds is executed and the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game ends, the probability variation flag 203ba is set to ON, and the value of the time reduction counter 203h. This is a jackpot type in which "10000" is set. The jackpot type "big hit B" is a jackpot type in which a jackpot game of 16 rounds is executed and a probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends. The probability change flag 203ba is set to ON, and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is "10000". Is a jackpot type for which "" is set. The jackpot type "big hit C" is a jackpot type in which the jackpot game of 8 rounds is executed and the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed. The probability change flag 203ba is set to off, and the value of the time saving counter 203h is "100". Is a jackpot type for which "" is set.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1, the probability change state is set after the jackpot game is completed with a probability of 65%, and the time saving state is set with a probability of 35%. Therefore, the probability of winning the battle in the battle effect executed during the jackpot game (notifying that the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends during the jackpot game) is 65% at the maximum.

As shown in FIG. 117 (c), the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202bb2 is a data table in which five types of jackpot types (big hits D to H) are defined, and the acquired first hit type counter C2. Each jackpot type is specified according to the value of. Specifically, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 24", "big hit D", in the range of "25 to 34", in the range of "big hit E", and in the range of "35 to 64". "Big hit F" is specified, "Big hit G" is specified in the range of "65 to 89", and "Big hit H" is specified in the range of "90 to 99".

Here, the jackpot type "big hit D" is a jackpot type in which a jackpot game of two rounds is executed and a probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, the probability change flag 203ba is set to ON, and the value of the time reduction counter 203h. This is a jackpot type in which "10000" is set. The jackpot type "big hit E" is a jackpot type having the same content as the above-mentioned "big hit A", and "big hit F" is a jackpot type having the same content as the above-mentioned "big hit B".

"Big hit G" is a big hit type in which a big hit game of two rounds is executed and a time saving state is set after the big hit game is completed. The probability change flag 203ba is set to off, and "100" is set as the value of the time saving counter 203h. It is a jackpot type to be set, and "big hit H" is the same jackpot type as the above-mentioned "big hit C".

That is, in the present embodiment, even if the jackpot is won in the special figure 2, the probability of the probability change state is set after the jackpot game is completed with a probability of 65%, which is the same as the case of winning the jackpot in the special figure 1, and the probability is 35%. The time saving state is set with. Therefore, the probability of winning the battle in the battle effect executed during the jackpot game (notifying that the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends during the jackpot game) is 65% at the maximum.

In addition, the percentage (30%) in which "big hit F", which is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player, is selected is selected by "big hit B" (big hit type having the same content as "big hit F") in Special Figure 1. It is set higher than the ratio (15%). Therefore, the special figure 2 lottery is more advantageous to the player than the special figure 1 lottery.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 118. FIG. 118 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration defined in the RAM 203 of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118, the RAM 203 in the third embodiment is different from the RAM 203 in the first embodiment in that the probability variation flag 203ba is provided instead of the probability variation counter 203g. Other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The probability variation flag 203ba is a flag for indicating that the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and is set to ON when the high probability state of the special symbol is set. In the jackpot end process 3 (S2551 in FIG. 124), which is executed at the end of the jackpot game, the probability variation flag 203ba sets the probability variation state after the jackpot type ends the jackpot ("Big hits A, B, D, E,". It is set to on when it is "F"), and is set to off when the jackpot is won and the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot (when the jackpot game is started).

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration defined in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 119, the present embodiment differs from the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment described above in that the in-battle flag 223ca is added, and is otherwise the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The in-battle flag 223ca is a flag for indicating that the battle effect (continuous battle effect) is being executed, and is set to be turned on when the battle effect (continuous battle effect) is being executed. .. This in-battle flag 223ca is set to on when the jackpot game executed based on the winning jackpot is started in the state where the battle effect is not executed (see S6704 in FIG. 128), and the voice lamp control device 113 is set. When setting various effects in, it is referred to to determine whether the battle effect is currently in progress. Then, in the battle effect update process (see S4651 in FIG. 126) of the state command reception process 3 (see S4252 in FIG. 125), the end condition of the battle effect is satisfied (the number of remaining time reductions reaches 70 times (special feature in the time reduction state). When the number of fluctuations in the figure reaches 30)), it is set to off (see S6657 in FIG. 126).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the third embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 124. In the third embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are not executed at the same time (in parallel). It is significantly different from the control process of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above in that the lottery (variation) of FIG. 2 is preferentially executed. The other contents are the same. Therefore, in the third embodiment, only the content of the control process relating to the above-mentioned difference will be described, and the description thereof will be omitted for the other contents.

First, the contents of the special symbol variation processing 3 (S131) will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing 3 (S131). The special symbol variation process 3 (S131) determines that neither the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 is being changed with respect to the above-mentioned special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 34). The point configured to execute the process for starting the variation of the special figure 2 in preference to 1 and the process of updating the game state (update of the value of the time reduction counter 223h) are started to change the special symbol. The difference is that it is configured to be executed at the stop timing of the special symbol instead of the timing.

First, the special symbol variation processing 3 (S131) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation processing 3 (S131). This special symbol variation process 3 (S131) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 238), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display are performed. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in the device 81.

In this special symbol variation processing 3, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being hit (S251). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. It includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S251: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S251: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S252), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S252: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d (the number of holdings N1 of the variation display of the first special symbol (special figure 1)) and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e. (Holding number N2 of variable display in the second special symbol) is acquired (S253). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S254), and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e must be 0. (S254: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S255), and the number of reserved balls indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e changed by the calculation. Set the command (S256). The hold ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S2401) of the main process (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the second special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223d.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of S256, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S257). In the process of S257, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After the process of S257 is executed, the second special symbol change start process 3 is executed (S258), and this process is terminated. The second special symbol change start process 3 (S258) will be described later with reference to FIG. 121.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S254 that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S254: No), then the acquired first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is used. It is determined whether the value (N1) is 0 (S259). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S259: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S259, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S259: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d. Is subtracted by 1 (S260), and a hold ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S261). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S2401) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223c.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of S261, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S262). In the process of S262, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first special symbol change start process 3 is executed (S263). The first special symbol change start processing 3 (S263) will be described later with reference to FIG. 122.

On the other hand, in the process of S252, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S252: Yes), whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. Is determined (S264). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If has not elapsed (S264: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S265), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S264, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S264: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S266). The stop symbol is set in advance by the second special symbol variation start process 3 (S258) and the first special symbol variation start process 3 (S263), which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. When the second special symbol change start process 3 (S258) or the first special symbol change start process 3 (S263) is executed, the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol hold ball storage area are executed. A special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common with 203b. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the special hit random number counter C1, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it is a big hit according to the value of the special hit type counter C2. The type is determined.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S266 is completed, the stop display of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S266). Then, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, it is performed by the second special symbol variation start process 3 (S258) or the first special symbol variation start process 3 (S263). It is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol (the result of this lottery) is a big hit of the special symbol (S267). If the result of this lottery is a big hit with a special symbol (S267: Yes), set a big hit scenario, set the probability variation flag 203ba to off, set the value of the time reduction counter 203h to 0 (S268), and set the big hit medium flag. Set 203m on (S269). Then, a stop command is set (S270), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S267, if it is determined that the lottery result this time is not a big hit (S267: No), the game state update process 3 (S271) is executed. The game state update process 3 (S271) will be described later with reference to FIG. 123. Then, a stop command is set (S270), and this process is terminated.

Next, the second special symbol change start processing 3 (S258) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change start processing 3 (S258). The second special symbol variation start process 3 (S258) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 120) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and is a second special symbol hold ball. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the storage area 203b, a lottery (win / fail determination) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol omission" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 37 and the third. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the symbol display device 81.

In the second special symbol fluctuation start processing 3 (S258), first, various data (special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2, variation type counter) stored in the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Each value of CS1) is acquired (S1601). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is currently in the probability change period (high probability gaming state) (S1602). It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not it is the probability variation period is executed by determining whether or not the probability variation flag 203ba is on. This probability variation counter flag 203aa is set to on based on the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpots A, B, D, E, and F. On the other hand, it is set to off based on the start of the jackpot game.

If it is determined that the probability change is in progress (S1602: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of the special symbol, so the process proceeds to S1603. In the processing of S1603, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S1601 and the special symbol jackpot random number table (first hit random number table) 202a. (S1603). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 500 random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table (first random number table) 202a. As described above, 10 random numbers "0 to 9" are set as the big hits of the special symbol in the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol) (see FIG. 15A). When the value of the random number counter C1 per unit and the random number value corresponding to these match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After acquiring the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S1605.

On the other hand, in the process of S1602, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability state) of the special symbol (S1602: No), the process of S1604 is executed. In the processing of S1604, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S1601 and the special symbol jackpot random number table (first hit random number table) 202a. Acquire (S1604). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 500 random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table (first random number table) 202a. Two random numbers "0, 1" are set as the big hits of the special symbol in the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol), and the value of the random number counter C1 per first and these hits If it matches the random number value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After acquiring the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S1605.

In the processing of S1605, is the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S1603 or S1604 a jackpot of the special symbol (that is, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot random number table (that is,). (1st random number table) Whether it matches the judgment value set in 202a) is determined (S1605), and if it is determined to be a big hit of a special symbol (S1605: Yes), it is acquired by the processing of S1601. Based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the display mode at the time of jackpot is set (S1606). More specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 acquired in the process of S1601 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202bb2, and what is the jackpot type (D to H). To determine.

In this process of S1606, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type. Further, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S1607). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1607, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1.

In the fluctuation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the fluctuation time of the third symbol for notifying the hit / fail determination result, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the fluctuation time and the hit / fail determination result. The main control device 110 is configured so that even if the display mode of the out-of-reach is used, the voice lamp control device 113 can switch between the reach display mode and the non-reach display mode as long as the fluctuation time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and the effects can be diversified.

For example, as the variation pattern for disengagement, various types of "short disengagement", "long disengagement", "disengagement normal reach", and "disengagement super reach" are specified. As the fluctuation patterns shared by jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot D, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

On the other hand, in the process of S1605, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S1605: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (S1608). In the process of S1608, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-order symbol, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b is set. Based on the value, the fluctuation time (variation pattern) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S1609). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S1608, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is confirmed, and the normal reach is performed based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as super reach.

When the processing of S1607 or the processing of S1609 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the process of S1607 or the process of S1609 is set (S1610). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S1607 or the process of S1609 is set (S1611). When the processing of S1611 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing 3 (S131).

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the first special symbol change start processing 3 (S263) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing (S263). In the first special symbol change start process (S263), the type of the special symbol to be processed is changed from the special figure 1 to the special figure 2 with respect to the above-mentioned second special symbol change start process 3 (S258). The difference is that the various counters and tables for the special figure 2 are changed to the various counters and tables for the special figure 1 according to the difference. Since the other contents are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

Next, the game state update process 3 (S271) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the game state update process 3 (S271). The game state update process 3 (S271) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 120) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and is a process of subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203h. Is executed, the game state is updated based on the subtracted value, and a state command indicating the updated game state is set.

When the game state update process 3 (S271) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0, that is, whether the present is a high probability state (time saving state, probability change state) of a normal symbol. (S851). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0 (S851: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S852), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h after the subtraction is 0. (S853).

Then, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 in the processing of S853 (S853: Yes), the gaming state corresponding to the gaming state storage area is set (S854), and the current gaming state (time saving counter 203h) is set. A status command indicating (the value of, the setting status of the probability change flag 203ba) is set (S871), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S851, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not larger than 0 (0) (S8511: No), or in the processing of S853, the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 (). If it is determined (S853: No) that it is larger than 0), the process proceeds to S871 as it is.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot with the probability variation flag 203ba set to ON after the jackpot game ends, "10000" is set as the value of the time reduction counter 203h after the jackpot game ends, and the probability variation flag 203ba is set. When a jackpot that is not set to ON is won, "100" is set as the value of the time reduction counter 203h after the jackpot game is completed. Therefore, if the jackpot with the probability variation flag 203ba set to on after the jackpot game ends, the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability of normal symbol) is substantially from the end of the jackpot game until the next jackpot is won. State) is set and the probability change flag 203ba is not set to on after the big hit game. If you win the big hit, the time is shortened from the end of the big hit game until the special symbol change is executed 100 times (low probability state of the special symbol). , High probability state of normal symbol) will be set.

Next, the contents of the jackpot end processing 3 (S2551) will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process 3 (S2551). In the jackpot end processing 3 (S2551), the probability change flag 203ba and the value of the time saving counter 203h are set at the end of the jackpot game according to the jackpot type of the winning jackpot.

When the jackpot end process 3 (S2551) is executed, first, it is determined whether the jackpot type this time is "big hit A, B, D, E, F" (S2751), and "big hit A, B, D," If it is determined to be "E, F" (S2751: Yes), the probability variation flag 203ba is set to on (S2752), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to "10000" (S2753), and the jackpot medium flag is turned off. (S2754), a command indicating a change in the gaming state (a command indicating the current gaming state) is set (S2704), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2751 when it is determined that the jackpot type this time is not "big hit A, B, D, E, F" (S2751: No), "100" is set in the value of the time saving counter 203h (S2751: No). S2755), the process proceeds to S2754.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 125 to 128, the contents of the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, for the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment, the state command reception process 3 (see S4252 in FIG. 125) is replaced with the state command reception process (see S4212 in FIG. 64). 1 is replaced with the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see S4202 in FIG. 60) and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (see S4204 in FIG. 61), and the special figure change start process (see S4921 in FIG. 127) is executed. The difference is that the jackpot start processing (see S4212 in FIG. 128) is executed as a subroutine of the jackpot-related processing (see S5002 in FIG. 66). Since the other processing contents are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the state command reception process 3 (S4252) will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the contents of the state command reception process 3 (S4252). The state command receiving process 3 (S4252) is different in that the battle effect update process (S4651) is additionally executed with respect to the state command receiving process (see S4212 in FIG. 64) of the first embodiment described above. do. Since the other processing contents are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the state command reception process 3 (S4252) is executed, first, the battle effect update process is executed (S4651), and then the same processes of S4601 to S4604 as the above-mentioned state command reception process (see S4212 in FIG. 64) are executed. To execute. Here, in the process of S4602, if it is determined that the gaming state has been changed to a state other than the normal state (S4602: No), then it is determined whether the battle flag 223ca is set to ON (S4652) and turned ON. If it is determined that the setting is set to (S4652: Yes), the battle effect (continuous battle effect) is displayed, so that the display content is not changed due to the transition to the game state, and S4610 is displayed. Moves to the process of and ends this process. On the other hand, in the process of S4652, if it is determined that the battle flag 223ca is not set to ON (S4652: No), the process of S4605 to S4610 is the same as the above-mentioned state command reception process (see S4212 in FIG. 64). Is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the battle effect update process (S4651) will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the contents of the battle effect update process (S4651). In this battle effect update process (S4651), in the battle effect (continuous battle effect) during the time reduction state, a process for setting an effect mode corresponding to the update of the time reduction number of times is executed.

When the battle effect update process (S4651) is executed, it is first determined whether the battle flag 223ca is set to on (S6651), and it is determined that it is not set to on (set to off). In that case, since the battle effect is not updated, this process ends as it is. On the other hand, the flag 223ca during battle is set to on. That is, when it is determined that the current battle is being produced (S6651: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current time is being shortened (S6652).

This process of S6652 is executed by reading out the information indicating the gaming state set in the subordinate state setting area 223k. In the process of S6652, if it is determined that the current time is not shortened (S6652: No), since the current jackpot game is in progress, it is not necessary to execute the process of updating the battle effect, so this process is terminated as it is. do. If it is determined that the current state is in the time saving state (S6652: Yes), then, based on the information indicating the remaining period of the time saving state (information indicating the number of remaining time saving) included in the state command received this time. The value of the number of remaining time reductions is updated and set in the slave state setting area 223k.

When the processing of S6653 was completed, as a result of updating the value of the remaining time reduction number, it was determined whether the remaining time reduction number reached 70 times (S6654), and it was determined that it was not 70 times, that is, 71 to 99 times. In the case (S6654: No), a display command indicating the physical strength gauge value according to the number of remaining time reductions set this time is set (S6655), and this process is terminated. Here, when the display control device 114 receives the display command set by the process of S6655, as shown in FIG. 114 (a), the display mode of the physical strength gauge 817a during the continuous battle effect corresponds to the number of remaining time reductions. The image data of the display mode is generated and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S6654, when it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions has reached 70 (S6654: Yes), it is based on the fact that the end condition of the battle effect (continuous battle effect) executed during the time reduction state is satisfied. Then, a display command indicating battle defeat is set (S6656), the battle flag 223ca is set to off (S6657), and this process is terminated. When the display control device 114 receives the display command set in the process of S6656, the defeat effect in which the character 817 is defeated in the battle effect is executed as shown in FIG. 113 (a).

Next, the contents of the special figure fluctuation start processing (S4921) will be described with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure fluctuation start processing (S4921). This special figure change start process (S4921) is executed in place of the special figure 1 change start process (see S4202 in FIG. 60) and the special figure 2 change start process (see S4204 in FIG. 61) of the first embodiment described above. Is to be done. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, the special figure 1 lottery (variation) and the special figure 2 lottery (variation) are executed at the same time (in parallel), and therefore, for each special figure. In contrast to the configuration in which the fluctuation start processing is executed for each, in the third embodiment, since each special figure lottery (variation) is configured not to be executed at the same time (in parallel), the special figure variation is started. The processing to be executed at the timing is common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

When the special figure change start process (S4921) is executed, first, the special figure change start flag is set to ON (S4371), and then the same as the above-mentioned special figure 2 change start process (see S4204 in FIG. 61). The processes of S4352 and S4353 are executed, and then it is determined whether or not the special figure change (lottery) this time is a big hit (S4381). In this process, whether or not the jackpot is won is determined based on the information included in the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

If it is determined in the process of S4381 that the special figure change (lottery) this time is not a big hit (S4381: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure change (lottery) this time has won the jackpot (S4381: Yes), then it is determined whether the flag 223ca during the battle is set to ON (S4382). That is, it is determined whether or not the special figure change executed while the battle effect is being executed is the one that won the jackpot.

In the process of S4382, if it is determined that the battle flag 223ca is not set to ON (S4382: No), this process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that the battle flag 223ca is set to ON. (S4382: Yes) Next, it is determined whether the jackpot won this time is a time-saving jackpot (S4383), and if it is determined to be a time-saving jackpot (S4383: Yes), a display command indicating a battle rematch is set. (S4384), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4383, if it is determined that the time saving jackpot is not (probability variation jackpot) (S4383: No), the process of S4384 is skipped and the present process is terminated. When the display control device 114 receives the display command set in the process of S4384, the image data corresponding to the rematch effect shown in FIG. 113 (b) is generated and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. To.

Next, the contents of the jackpot start processing (S4212) will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot start process (S4212). In this jackpot start process (S4212), a process of performing various settings based on the effect status (whether or not a battle effect is being produced) at the timing when the jackpot game is started and the jackpot type of the jackpot won this time is executed.

When the jackpot start process (S4212) is executed, first, it is determined whether the battle flag 223ca is set to ON (S6701), and when it is determined that it is not set to ON, that is, outside the battle production period. When it is determined that the jackpot game has been executed (S6701: No), it is determined whether the jackpot this time is a probabilistic jackpot (S6702). In the process of S6702, the determination is performed based on the jackpot type stored in the subordinate state setting area 223k.

If it is determined in the process of S6702 that it is a probable change jackpot (S6703: Yes), a display command indicating a battle victory is set as a display mode of the battle effect executed during the jackpot game (S6703), and the battle flag is set. 223ca is set to on (S6704), and the process proceeds to S6709. On the other hand, in the process of S6702, if it is determined that the jackpot is not a probability variation jackpot (time saving jackpot) (S6702: No), a display command indicating the continuation of the battle is set as the display mode of the battle effect executed during the jackpot game. (S6705), the above-mentioned processes of S6704 and S6709 are executed, and this process is terminated.

Further, in the process of S6701 when it is determined that the battle flag 223ca is set to ON (S6701: Yes), it is determined whether the current jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot (S6706), and it is determined that the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot. If it is determined (S6706; Yes), a display command indicating a battle victory is set (S6707), the process proceeds to S6709, and if it is determined that the process of S6706 is not a probable change jackpot (S6706: No), A display command indicating the continuation of the battle is set, and in the process of S6709, a display jackpot start command is set, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when a jackpot of a special symbol is won, a probabilistic state (next jackpot) is set as a game state set after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning. It is configured to be set to either a time saving state (until the special figure fluctuation is executed 100 times without winning the jackpot, or until the jackpot is won).

In other words, if the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol are continuously set until the next jackpot is won, so that the probability variation state is set. The probability of winning many prize balls was much higher. Here, the pachinko machine 10 in recent years is configured to continue the probabilistic state with a high probability, and by providing the player with the possibility of winning a large number of prize balls, the gambling of the game is enhanced. As a measure to prevent this, a measure for reducing the probability that the probabilistic state continues (for example, reducing the rate at which the probabilistic state continues to 65% or less) is being studied.

By taking such measures, it is possible to provide a sound pachinko machine 10 that does not give the player excessive expectations for the prize ball, but the probability change state is high as in the past. Among the effects used in the pachinko machine 10 that continues with a probability (for example, 80%) (effects for showing the lottery result of a special symbol), the effect when used in the pachinko machine 10 with countermeasures. However, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play is reduced.

Specifically, in the battle production that notifies that the probability change state will be set after the end of this jackpot game when the own character battles with the enemy character during the jackpot game and wins the battle. If the rate at which the probability change state continues decreases, the winning percentage of the battle effect executed during the jackpot game decreases, and the player's expectation (the probability change state is set) when the battle effect is executed. There was a problem that the expectation for doing things) diminished and the motivation to play was reduced.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, a continuous battle effect is provided in which the battle effect is continued from the end of the jackpot game until the predetermined end condition (for example, the special figure change is executed 30 times) is satisfied. It is configured to execute and execute the effect of winning the battle when the jackpot is won during the period from the end of the jackpot game to the establishment of the predetermined end condition. As a result, the probability of winning in the battle production can be increased, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play.

Further, in the third embodiment, when a probabilistic jackpot (a jackpot in which a probabilistic state is set after the jackpot game ends) is won, a battle effect is executed to win the battle during the jackpot game, and a time-saving jackpot (big hit) is executed. It is configured to execute the continuous battle effect only when the big hit) in which the time saving state is set after the end of the game is won. This makes it possible to increase the probability of winning in the battle production.

In addition, during the continuous battle production, the production result of the continuous battle is configured to be different depending on the type of the winning jackpot. For example, if the probability change jackpot is won during the continuous battle production, the battle victory production is performed. It is configured to execute the battle rematch production if the time saving jackpot is won during the continuous battle production. As a result, if a short-time jackpot is won during the continuous battle production, the defeat production that loses the battle is suppressed. Therefore, since the frequency of the defeat effect being executed after the battle effect is executed can be reduced, the rate of battle victory can be relatively increased.

In this embodiment, the number of time reductions is 30 times (the number of special figure fluctuations after the time reduction state is set is 30 times) as the end condition of the continuous battle effect (battle effect executed during the time reduction state). The case is set as the end condition, but the end condition is not limited to this, and the number of special figure fluctuations in which the end condition is satisfied may be variably set by the staging lottery means. In this case, it is preferable to provide a jackpot type that sets a value other than 100 times (for example, 20 times, 50 times, 80 times, etc.) as the number of continuations of the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the continuous battle production is executed, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of remaining time reductions after the end of the continuous battle production.

In addition, as a guarantee period notification effect for notifying the player of the period during which the continuous battle effect does not end (battle effect guarantee period), for example, the physical strength gauge 817a of the character 817 does not decrease, that is, there is no defeat. The effect indicating the invincible mode may be configured to be executable, and the invincible mode may be configured to notify the duration of the invincible mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the end condition of the continuous battle effect is set based on the number of times the special figure changes in the time saving state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the lottery result of the special symbol is other than a big hit. In a part of the game machine, which is configured to be able to win a small hit that can give a player less privilege (a privilege different from the big hit game) than the big hit game, based on the small hit winning (execution of the small hit game). (Inside) It is good to configure so that the end condition of the continuous battle production is satisfied.

In this case, as the small hit game executed at the time of winning the small hit, it is preferable to execute the small hit game in which the same variable winning device 65 as the big hit game is opened. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the defeat effect of losing the battle while the variable winning device 65 is open, so that the defeat effect is executed for the player as if during the jackpot game. It can make you think.

Further, it is preferable to configure the continuous battle effect to be terminated based on the condition that the special figure change number reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) in the time saving state, or if the small hit is won, the condition established earlier is used. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the continuous battle production from becoming excessively long and to make the duration of the continuous battle production indefinite.

<First modification>
Next, a first modification in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 133. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, the special figure 1 lottery (variation) and the special figure 2 lottery (variation) are executed at the same time (in parallel), so that the special figure changes with respect to each special figure. The third symbol display device is configured to execute the start process, and as shown in FIG. 9A, only the variation effect corresponding to any special figure variation (special figure 1 variation in FIG. 9A) is displayed. It was configured to display in the main display area Dm of 81.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the variation effect corresponding to a plurality of special symbol variations is not simultaneously executed by the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can use the third symbol display device 81. It was possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the fluctuation effect to be executed was confused, but it was difficult to understand that multiple special symbol fluctuations were being executed at the same time (in parallel), and multiple special symbol fluctuations were executed at the same time. There is a problem that the game is performed without the player understanding the characteristic game property that the special symbol change is executed at the same time (in parallel).

On the other hand, in this first modification, one special figure variation is set as the main variation display, the other special figure variation is set as the sub-variation display, and the variation effect corresponding to the main variation display (main variation effect) is also the sub-variation display. The variation effect (subordinate variation effect) corresponding to the display is also configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The variable staging corresponding to the main variable display is configured to stand out more than the variable staging corresponding to the subordinate variable display.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the first modification will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 130 (a). FIG. 130A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the first modification. As shown in FIG. 130 (a), in the first modification, the main display area Dm of the display screen is the main variable area Dma and the dependent variable area Dmb with respect to the display screen of the first embodiment described above. It is different in that it is formed so as to execute the main variation effect in the main variation region Dma and the follow variation effect in the slave variation region Dmb, and the other elements are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 130A, the first modification is configured such that the main fluctuation region Dma is formed larger than the slave fluctuation region Dmb, and the main fluctuation effect is subordinated to the player. It is configured so that it can be executed more prominently than the variable effect. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to one of the plurality of variable effects being executed.

In this first modification, when a specific fluctuation effect (variation effect with high jackpot expectation (for example, super reach effect)) is executed as the variation effect executed on the slave variation region Dmb side, the main fluctuation region Dma It is configured to be able to execute the display switching process for switching between the variation effect executed in and the variation effect executed in the slave variation area Dmb. As a result, when the variation effect that the player should pay attention to is executed, the variation effect can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

However, when a specific fluctuation effect (variation effect that wins the jackpot (for example, super reach)) is set as the variation effect executed on the dependent variation region Dmb side, the expectation that the main fluctuation region Dma also wins (the jackpot is won). When a high degree of fluctuation effect (for example, super reach) is executed, the variation effect executed in the main fluctuation area Dma suddenly switches, and the effect is difficult to understand for the player. There was a problem that it would end up.

Further, for a player who wants to see the specific variation effect being executed in the main variation area Dma to the end regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, which is a variation effect that is difficult to be executed. There was a risk that the variable production would suddenly switch, giving a feeling of dissatisfaction.

On the other hand, in the first modification, when the variation effect (special figure 1 variation effect) executed in the main variation area Dma is executed (set), the slave variation area Dmb stored on hold is used. It is configured to determine the pre-reading result of the winning information corresponding to the variable effect to be executed (special figure 2 variable effect), and to determine whether or not the winning information for winning the jackpot is possessed. Then, when it is determined that the winning information for winning the jackpot is possessed, the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 can set a specific variation effect (for example, an out-of-order super reach effect). (For example, when the variation pattern is 90 seconds, it is not a specific variation effect but a normal variation effect (for example, a short-time deviation variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds (see FIG. 18)). It is configured to execute a special variation effect that executes the variation effect (variation effect set corresponding to) multiple times.

With this configuration, even if the variation effect executed in the main variation area Dma is switched from the special figure 1 variation effect to the special figure 2 variation effect, the main variation area Dma before the switching will have a normal deviation effect. Since the corresponding variable effect is only executed, the variable effect can be smoothly switched without giving the player a sense of discomfort or dissatisfaction.

Here, with reference to FIG. 129, the flow of the effect in the first modification will be described. FIG. 129 is a timing chart showing the flow of each effect when the variation display is switched between the main variation region Dma and the sub-variation region Dmb. As shown in FIG. 129, the timing for setting the variation effect (special figure 1 variation effect) of the special figure 1 variation (variation in which the lottery result is out of order and the variation time is 60 seconds) executed in the main variation area Dma (special figure 1 variation effect). At the timing of FIG. 129 (a)), the winning information of the special figure 2 is read from the winning information storage area 223ab, and the variation of the special figure 2 being executed is a jackpot variation, or the variation display is executed next. It is determined whether the winning information corresponding to the special figure 2 has the information indicating the jackpot winning.

As a result of the above-mentioned determination, if it is determined that the special figure 2 hold corresponding to the next execution of the special figure 2 variation (the second variation of the special figure 2) has the information indicating the jackpot winning, the special figure 2 is determined. As a variation effect of one variation, a special variation effect that pseudo-continuously executes a variation effect (short-time deviation variation effect) selected when the variation time is a deviation variation of 10 seconds is set and executed. As a result, the second variation of the special figure 2 is executed, and the variation of the special figure 1 variation is performed at the effect switching timing (timing of FIG. 129 (b)) for executing the special figure 2 variation effect in the main fluctuation region Dma. Since the variable effect is executed for a short time as the effect, the variable effect can be switched without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, at the timing of setting the fluctuation effect of the special figure 1 fluctuation, it is not necessary to accurately grasp the residual fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation to be executed in the future, and the like. Since it is possible to execute a normal deviation variation at the effect switching timing (timing of FIG. 129 (b)) for executing the special figure 2 variation effect in the variation area Dma, the process for setting the variation effect is performed. Can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 130 (b) and 131, the effect content displayed when the variable effect displayed in a variable manner is switched between the main variable area Dma and the subordinate variable area Dmb will be described. FIG. 130 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents at the time when the fluctuation effect of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is executed in the main fluctuation region Dma, and FIG. 131 is a variation display of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. Is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents at the time when is executed in the main fluctuation region Dma.

As shown in FIG. 130 (b), at a time point before the switching timing of the variation display, the variation effect of the special figure 1 variation (short-time deviation variation effect) is executed in the main variation region Dma, and the slave variation region Dmb is used. In the special figure 2, the fluctuation effect (reach generation) of the fluctuation is executed. After that, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 fluctuation develops into super reach, as shown in FIG. 131, the fluctuation effect of the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed in the main fluctuation region Dma so as to make the player stand out. A super reach effect (an effect in which a fish swims in the display area) is executed.

On the other hand, the variation effect of the variation in Special Figure 1 is displayed by switching to the slave variation region Dmb. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 131, the time point at which one of the short-time deviation fluctuation effects executed a plurality of pseudo times is completed is shown, and the third symbol displayed in the slave fluctuation region Dmb is a temporary stop mode (a temporary stop mode (). In FIG. 131, it is displayed as a swing stop). In this way, when the short-time deviation variation effect is configured to be executed a plurality of times in a pseudo manner, the third symbol is displayed in the temporary stop mode at the end of each short-time deviation variation effect to the player. Therefore, it can be made to think that the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed multiple times.

Further, in the first modification, the display position where the special figure 1 variation effect is executed (left side of the main display area Dm) and the display position where the special figure 2 variation effect is executed (right side of the main display area Dm). , Is configured to be variable in the main fluctuation region Dma and the slave fluctuation region Dmb without changing. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner which special symbol corresponds to the variable effect being executed. Not limited to this, the display position of the special figure 1 variation effect and the display position of the special figure 2 variation effect can be changed without changing the position of the main fluctuation region Dma and the position of the slave fluctuation region Dmb. It may be configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to fix the position where the variation effect to be watched is executed for the player, so that it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, in the first modification, the main fluctuation region Dma and the slave fluctuation region Dmb are formed before and after the switching timing of the fluctuation display without changing the same size, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after switching the fluctuation display, the main fluctuation region Dma may be formed larger than before the switching, and the slave fluctuation region Dmb may be formed smaller than before the switching. As a result, it is possible to further emphasize the fluctuation effect executed in the main fluctuation region Dma after switching, and it is possible to make the player interested. In addition to the configuration in which the size of each variable region is variable, for example, the frame mode for partitioning each variable region may be variable. For example, only the main variable region Dma after switching is the color of the frame mode. May be configured to have a red color different from the others, or the shape of the frame mode may be configured to have a circular shape different from the others.

Further, in this first modification, when setting the fluctuation effect of the special figure fluctuation executed on the main fluctuation region Dma side, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won based on the winning information of other special figure fluctuations (in advance). (Discrimination) is performed, and the effect mode of the variation effect is set based on the discrimination result. , And, the timing at which the special figure is stopped and displayed or the timing at which the variation effect is switched may be determined by the combination indicating the jackpot, and the variation effect may be set based on the determination result.

<Second modification>
Next, a second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. In the first modification described above, the main fluctuation region Dma and the slave fluctuation region Dmb are formed, and the fluctuation effect corresponding to the special figure fluctuation is executed in each fluctuation region, and the slave fluctuation region Dmb side. When a specific variation effect is executed by the special figure variation of, a special symbol corresponding to the variation effect executed in the main variation area Dma and a special symbol corresponding to the variation effect executed in the subordinate variation area Dmb. The variable effect switching process for switching is executed.

On the other hand, in the second modification, when a specific fluctuation effect is executed by the special figure fluctuation on the slave fluctuation region Dmb side, the main fluctuation region Dma and the slave fluctuation region Dmb are fused. The difference is that a fluctuation region is formed and a fluctuation effect corresponding to a plurality of special map fluctuations is executed within the special fluctuation region. Since the other elements are the same as those of the first modification described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the second modification, the variation display shown in FIG. 130 (a) of the first modification described above is executed in the normal variation state. Then, as in the first modification described above, the variation effect of the special figure 1 variation (the variation result is out of the lottery result and the variation time is 60 seconds) executed in the main variation region Dma (special figure 1 variation effect). At the timing of setting (timing of FIG. 129 (a)), the winning information of the special figure 2 is read from the winning information storage area 223ab, and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 during execution is a jackpot fluctuation or the next fluctuation. It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the special figure 2 on which the display is executed has the information indicating the jackpot winning.

As a result of the above-mentioned determination, if it is determined that the special figure 2 hold corresponding to the next execution of the special figure 2 variation (the second variation of the special figure 2) has the information indicating the jackpot winning, FIG. 132 The special fluctuation regions Dma to Dmd shown in (a) are formed. Here, with reference to FIGS. 132 (a) to 133 (b), the contents of the effect in the second modification will be described.

FIG. 132 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the special fluctuation regions Dma to Dmd, and FIG. 132 (b) is a special fluctuation region Dma at the time when the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 2 is started. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content of Dmd, FIG. 133 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content during the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 2, and FIG. 133 (b) is a special diagram. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents when the stop display is performed in a combination indicating a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 132 (a), the special fluctuation regions Dma to Dmd are formed from four fluctuation display regions, and the special fluctuation region Dma has a fluctuation effect corresponding to the special FIG. 1 fluctuation in the special fluctuation region Dmb. The variation effect corresponding to the special figure 2 variation is configured so that the decoration variation effect of the pseudo pattern is executed in the special variation area Dmc and the special variation area Dmd. Then, a "multi-reach" comment indicating that the special fluctuation regions Dma to Dmd have been formed is displayed in the sub-display region Ds.

After that, when the special variation 1 variation is stopped and displayed while the special variation areas Dma to Dmd are displayed, the state shown in FIG. 132 (b) is obtained. In FIG. 132 (b), the display mode “351” indicating that the lottery result of the special figure 1 variation is out of order is displayed in the special variation region Dma, and the reach display indicating that the special figure 2 variation is in the reach state is displayed. It is displayed in the special fluctuation area Dmb. Further, in the special fluctuation region Dmc and the special fluctuation region Dmd, the decorative variation display for suggesting the jackpot expectation of the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed is executed, and the reach display is also displayed in the special fluctuation region Dmc. There is.

In addition, the display area of the special fluctuation area Dma becomes smaller based on the fact that the out-of-order symbol is stopped and displayed in the special fluctuation area Dma showing the lottery result of the special figure 1 fluctuation, and the special fluctuation area Dmb in the reach state and the special fluctuation area Dmb in the reach state, and The display area of the special fluctuation area Dmc is formed large. In this way, by varying the size of each fluctuation region in the special fluctuation regions Dma to Dmd according to the fluctuation status in each fluctuation region and the fluctuation result, the player is informed of the region to be watched in an easy-to-understand manner. be able to.

After that, when the special fluctuation 2 variation display progresses, as shown in FIG. 133 (a), only the special fluctuation region Dmb is in the reach state, and the display mode indicating the deviation is displayed in the other fluctuation regions, and the sub-display region Ds is displayed. The comment of "Last chance" is displayed. In this state, the next variation display is executed for the special figure 1 variation, but on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the result of the previous special map variation is temporarily stopped and displayed in the special variation area Dma. The state is maintained.

With this configuration, even if the special variation 1 variation is newly executed, the multi-reach effect using the special variation areas Dma to Dmd does not give a sense of discomfort. If the newly executed special figure 1 fluctuation is a big hit, for example, the effect of starting the fluctuation of the third symbol again in the special fluctuation region Dma from the state shown in FIG. 133 (a) is executed. It may be configured to do so. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what kind of effect mode and how long the multi-reach using the special fluctuation areas Dma to Dmd will continue, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

Then, when the special figure 2 fluctuation is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 133 (b), the display area of the special fluctuation region Dmb becomes the largest, and the special fluctuation region Dmb is "big hit". Along with the comment, the third symbol "555" indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed. In this state, since the movement of the special figure 1 being executed is forcibly disengaged and stopped, "351" indicating that the special figure 1 is disengaged and stopped is displayed in the special fluctuation area Dma.

In addition, the decorative variation display executed in the special variation areas Dmc and Dmd is variablely displayed in an effect mode for suggesting the jackpot winning expectation of the special figure 2 variation, and the stop timing of the special figure 1 variation and the stop timing of the variation. Special Figure 2 The fluctuation period of each fluctuation display is set based on the stop timing of the fluctuation and the interval.

Specifically, when the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed and the multi-reach is displayed, that is, when the special figure 2 fluctuation which is a jackpot fluctuation is not started, the decoration executed in the special fluctuation regions Dmc and Dmd. The variable display is variablely displayed in a state where the effect mode is not set. Then, at the timing when the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed, the difference between the residual fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation during execution and the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation is calculated, and the special fluctuation region is calculated based on the calculation result. Set the variation time of the decoration variation display executed by Dmc and Dmd.

With this configuration, the period from the stop of the special figure 1 fluctuation displayed in the special fluctuation region Dma to the stop of the special figure 2 fluctuation displayed in the special fluctuation region Dmb may be short. Even if it is long, the multi-reach effect can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort. The configuration of the multi-reach effect is not limited to this. For example, when the difference between the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation during execution and the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation is within a predetermined time, the special fluctuation is performed. The regions Dmc and Dmd may be fused to execute one decorative variation display, or the decoration variation display may be executed only in the special variation region Dmc, and a mini character may appear in the special variation region Dmd and executed. It may be configured to perform a suggestion effect that suggests the jackpot expectation of the multi-reach inside.

In each of the above modifications, while the special variation effect (variation effect in which a plurality of pseudo-short-time deviation variation patterns are continuously executed during one variation period) is being executed. However, the fourth symbol displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 was configured to be displayed in the usual manner. That is, in the special variation effect, the fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol on which the special variation effect is executed is configured to continue the variation display even while the third symbol is temporarily stopped, but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the corresponding fourth symbol may be controlled to be temporarily stopped in synchronization with the temporary stop period during the execution of the special variation effect. With such a configuration, even if the player visually recognizes the fourth symbol during the execution of the special variation effect, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish whether or not the special variation effect is being executed. Therefore, before and after the switching timing of the variable display, it is possible to suppress the unnatural display content that the fourth symbol continues to be variablely displayed even though the third symbol is temporarily stopped. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. Further, for example, the fourth symbol may be configured to be difficult to see at least during the temporary stop period during the execution of the special variation effect. More specifically, for example, the fourth symbol is hidden, the fourth symbol display area is reduced and displayed, or a predetermined accessory is placed at a position where the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) is hidden. It may be configured to operate. With such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the display control of the fourth symbol as compared with the case where the display mode of the fourth symbol is synchronized during the temporary stop period of the special variation effect.

Further, as a method for making it difficult to recognize whether or not the special variation effect is executed, for example, by making the back image around the fourth symbol display area the same color as the fourth symbol at least during the temporary stop period. , It may be configured to make it difficult to visually recognize whether the fourth symbol is displayed in a variable manner or stopped. With such a configuration, the fourth symbol can be made difficult to see by an extremely simple control of changing the rear image, so that the display control can be further simplified. In addition, by changing the rear image, the player can feel as if an unusual effect is being executed, so that the expectation for a big hit can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Further, for example, while the main fluctuation area Dma and the subordinate fluctuation area Dmb are switched and the special figure 2 variation display is executed in the main fluctuation area Dma, the display area is enlarged to display the special figure 2 variation display. Depending on the content, the fourth symbol display area may be configured to be shielded. That is, in the example of FIG. 131, the image of the fish that is displayed as it develops into super reach is also displayed in the fourth symbol display area (the image of the fish is displayed on the layer in front of the display layer of the fourth symbol). It may be configured to be displayed), or the character "reach has occurred !!" may be displayed in the fourth symbol display area to make the fourth symbol difficult to see. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the special fluctuation effect is executed at least after switching the fluctuation region. Further, for example, during the execution period of the special variation effect, the meaning of the fourth symbol can be understood by changing the display position of the fourth symbol display area or reversing the arrangement of the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2. By making it difficult, it may be difficult to indirectly recognize whether or not it is the execution period of the special variation effect. Further, by changing the display mode of the fourth symbol (the display mode indicating that the variable display is in progress and the display mode indicating that the stop display is in progress) periodically or irregularly, the fourth symbol can be displayed. From the display mode, it may be difficult to understand whether or not the variation display is being performed, and it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the special variation effect is indirectly executed. Specifically, for example, the first display method and the fourth display method, which indicate that the symbol is in the variable display by performing the variable display, while the symbol is stopped and the stop display is in progress, and the fourth. The second display method and the fourth symbol display area, which indicate that the entire symbol display area is white to indicate that variable display is being performed, while the entire symbol display area is black to indicate that stop display is in progress, and the fourth symbol display area. It may be configured to switch between a third display method in which the left half blinks to indicate that the variable display is in progress, and the right half blinks to indicate that the variable display is in progress. As a result, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the special variation display is being executed.

In each of the above modifications, the fourth symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 are displayed separately in the fourth symbol display area, but the special figure 1 does not necessarily have to be used. It is not necessary to display both the corresponding fourth symbol and the fourth symbol corresponding to the special figure 2. For example, only the fourth symbol corresponding to the variation effect of the third symbol executed in the main fluctuation area Dma may be displayed in the fourth symbol display area. With such a configuration, not only the third symbol but also the fourth symbol, the symbol that the player should pay attention to is clarified, so that the convenience of the player can be improved. Further, after the display switching process is executed, only the fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol different from the special symbol on the side on which the special variation effect is executed is displayed in the fourth symbol display area. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the third symbol is temporarily stopped from the aspect of the fourth symbol.

In each of the above modification examples, each reserved ball (winning) of the special symbol (special figure 2) in which the variation display is executed in the slave variation region Dmb when the variation effect corresponding to the specific variation type is executed in the main variation region Dma. Information) The lottery result is pre-read, and when it is determined that there is a reserved ball (winning information) corresponding to the jackpot, the variation effect executed in the main variation area Dma is set as the special variation effect. It is not limited to this. For example, even when it is determined that the reserved ball (winning information) contains a variation type deviation (for example, a deviation super reach) with a relatively high expectation of a big hit, a predetermined ratio (for example, 1) is also determined. The special variation effect may be executed at a ratio of / 5). With this configuration, even if the player notices that the player is temporarily stopped (the third symbol is swinging) during the temporary stop period in the special fluctuation effect, the jackpot is confirmed. Therefore, even after the variation effect (special variation effect) executed in the main variation area Dma and the variation effect executed in the slave variation area Dmb are switched by the display switching process, the main variation area Dma is displayed. You can pay attention to the fluctuation effect after switching. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the second modification, when the multi-reach effect is executed, the decorative variation display is executed in the special variation areas Dmc and Dmd. That is, the configuration is such that the fluctuation period is set according to the interval between the fluctuation stop timing of the fluctuation effect executed in the special fluctuation region Dma and the stop timing of the fluctuation effect executed in the special fluctuation region Dmb. It is not something that can be done. For example, it may be synchronized with the fluctuation display period of the special figure fluctuation based on each reserved ball held at the start of the multi-reach effect. With this configuration, the fluctuation stop period of the fluctuation effect executed in each special fluctuation region Dma to Dmd can be combined with the fluctuation stop period of the fourth symbol, so that a more natural appearance of the effect mode can be obtained. Can be provided.

<About the ball entry unit 64 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 134, FIGS. 134 (a) and 134 (b) illustrating the ball entry unit 64 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above schematically show the internal structure of the ball entry unit 64. It is a figure shown as a target. In reality, a cover body is arranged on the front side thereof, and the cover body is composed of a member whose inside can be seen through, and a spiral handle is colored on the surface so that the inside cannot be seen through or is difficult to see through. It is configured so that the inside is difficult to see.

A passage port through which the game ball can enter is provided in the upper part of the ball entry unit 64, and a transmissive ball entry sensor 64c that can detect that the game ball has passed through the passage port is arranged. There is. The game ball that has passed through the passage port is alternately distributed by the distribution member 900 to the first ball entry port 64b1 and the left second ball entry port 64b2 arranged below the game ball.

The distribution member 900 receives the entered game ball at the accommodating portion 900a or 900c of the distribution member 900. When the game ball is received by the accommodating portion 900a, the distribution member 900 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 134 (a)) due to the weight of the game ball, and the game ball is first inserted into the ball. Guide to mouth 64b1. Here, the distribution member 900 is configured to be rotatable about 30 degrees around each of the left and right sides, and a magnet 900b is provided on the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 900a and the accommodating portion 900c.

A magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 is arranged on the base body provided on the back surface side of the ball entry unit 64, and a base side magnet 901 is arranged at a position on the center line of the passage port. The magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 and the base side magnet 901 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip portion. The base side magnet 901 is arranged and fixed so that the tip portion thereof faces the distribution member 900 side.

Similar to the base side magnet 901, the magnet 900b is also composed of a rod-shaped magnet, and is fixed to the distribution member 900 so that the tip portion faces the base side magnet 901 side. The base side magnet at the position where the distribution member 900 rotates and the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 900a and the accommodating portion 900c comes directly above (on the center line of the interval at which the game ball at the passing port can enter about one ball). The position where the 901 and the magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 are closest to each other (the tips thereof face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged so as to have the same polarity (for example, N pole and N pole), the magnets may stop at a position where the boundary wall of the distribution member 900 faces directly upward due to repulsion. It will be maintained at the position where it is rotated to the left or right.

As a result, when the magnet 900b is located on the center line (upper position) of the passage port, the distribution member 900 repels the magnet 900b and the base side magnet 901, so that the distribution member 900 is left or right. The magnet rotates so that either the accommodating portion 900a or the accommodating portion 900c faces the side (upper side of the gaming machine) that receives the gaming ball entering the first ball entry device 64. Therefore, by accepting the entered game ball in either the accommodating portion 900a or the accommodating portion 900c, the game ball can be appropriately placed in either the first entry port 64b1 or the left second entry port 64b2. Can be sorted.

Further, when the magnet 900b and the base side magnet 901 repel each other, for example, the accommodating portion 900a receives the game ball and rotates about 15 degrees to the left to guide the game ball to the first entry port 64b1. It is possible to prevent the distribution member 900 from rotating clockwise (the accommodating portion 900a faces upward). As a result, after guiding the game ball to the first entry port 64b1, the accommodating portion 900b is in a state of facing upward, and then the gaming ball that has entered the entry unit 64 is received by the accommodating portion 900b. The distribution member 900 rotates about 30 degrees to the right due to the weight of the game ball, and guides the game ball to the left second entry port 64b2. In this way, the distribution member 900 can alternately guide the game ball entering the ball entry unit 64 to the first entry port 64b1 and the left second entry port 64b2. Therefore, the game balls can be evenly distributed to the first entry slot 64b1 and the left second entry opening 64b2 to win a prize, and the lottery game (special) resulting from the winning of the first entry opening 64b1 described later. It is possible to efficiently execute the lottery game (FIG. 1 lottery game) and the lottery game (special figure 2 lottery game) resulting from winning a prize in the left second entrance 64b2.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are performed simultaneously (in parallel). It is configured to be executable. Therefore, the ball that has passed through the passing port of the ball entry unit 64 alternates between the first ball entry port 64b1 that triggers the execution of the special figure 1 lottery and the left second ball entry port 64b2 that triggers the execution of the special figure 2 lottery. By providing the distribution member 900 so that it can be distributed to the above, the lottery (variation) of each special symbol can be efficiently performed.

In the first embodiment, the ball that has flowed into the ball entry unit 64 (the ball that has flowed into the specific area formed on the game area) is referred to the first ball entry port 64b1 (starting as a lottery trigger in FIG. 1). A distribution member 900 (distribution means) for alternately distributing the winning opening) and the left second entry opening 64b2 (starting winning opening that triggers the lottery in FIG. 2) is provided, but the limitation is limited to this. Instead, a sorting means for regularly sorting the first ball entry port 64b1 and the left second ball entry port 64b2 at different ratios (for example, 2: 1) may be provided. It is preferable to configure so that the distribution ratio is high with respect to the entry port corresponding to the special figure type on the side where a short fluctuation time is easily selected as the fluctuation time. With this configuration, each special map fluctuation can be efficiently executed.

Further, the balls flowing into the ball entry unit 64 can be distributed to the first entry port 64b1, the second entry port 64b2, and other entry openings (for example, the general entry port 63). A member 900 (sorting means) may be provided. Further, in the first embodiment, a configuration is used in which the balls sorted by the distribution member 900 surely enter each entry port, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the distribution member 900 is used for each entry port. The ball may be distributed to a flow path that can enter the ball.

Further, the ball distributed to a specific flow path by the distribution member 900 may be configured to be able to enter a plurality of entry ports. For example, the distribution member 900 may be configured to have a first flow path and a second flow path. The ball can be distributed to the flow path, and the ball distributed to the first flow path goes to the first ball entry port 64b1 at a rate of 80%, and to the left second ball entry unit 64b2 at a rate of 10%. It may be configured to enter the general entrance 63 at a rate of 10%. In this case, the ratio of the balls distributed to the first flow path and the balls distributed to the second flow path may be different from each other, and in the case of using such a configuration. Even if there is, distribution that can distribute the ball into a flow path that can (easily) enter the first ball entry port 64b1 and a flow path that can (easily) enter the left second entry port 64b2. Included in the concept of means.

In addition, a rolling region is provided in which the ball flowing into the ball entry unit 64 can go around, a plurality of passage ports are formed in the rolling region, and the balls passing through each passage opening have different entry openings (Special Figure 1). It may be configured so that the ball can be entered into the first ball entry port 64b1 that triggers the lottery, the left second ball entry port 64b2 that triggers the special figure 2 lottery, and the general ball entry port 63). When such a configuration is used, the passage port through which the ball that has rolled in the rolling region passes can be changed by the momentum of the ball that rolls in the rolling region, so that the ball that has flowed into the ball entry unit 64 can be changed. Can be passed through each passage irregularly, and the number of balls entering the entry opening, which is advantageous for the player, is larger than the number of balls entering the other entrances. You can have the potential. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while entertaining which passage port the ball flowing into the ball entry unit 64 passes through, and by extension, which entry port the ball enters. It should be noted that such a configuration, that is, a configuration in which the balls flowing into the ball entry unit 64 are irregularly distributed toward the plurality of ball entry ports is also included in the concept of the distribution means.

Further, in the present embodiment, the configuration of the distribution means provided with one distribution member 900 whose distribution destination is variable based on the passage of the sphere is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the distribution destination is periodically operated by an electric drive source. The distribution destination may be varied, or a plurality of distribution means may be used to change the distribution destination of the sphere. Further, in the present embodiment, the ball entering means is provided so that only the balls distributed by the distribution member 900 can enter the ball, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the balls distributed by the distribution member 900 can enter the ball. The ball entry port may be arranged at a position where a ball that has not been distributed to the distribution member 900, that is, a ball that has not flowed into the ball entry unit 64 can also enter. In this case, the ball that has flowed into the ball entry unit 64 (the ball that has been distributed to the distribution member 900) is configured to be easier to enter the ball entry port than the ball that has not flowed into the ball entry unit 64. good.

With such a configuration, it is possible to gaze at the ball flowing down the game area while expecting the ball to flow into the ball entry unit 64, and it is possible to provide a game that does not get tired. Further, since a ball that has not flowed into the ball entry unit 64 may also enter the ball entry port, it is possible to have expectations for the ball that has not flowed into the ball entry unit 64 until the end. ..

Further, when the number of balls flowing into the ball entry unit 64 exceeds a predetermined number within a predetermined period, the ball is distributed to a specific entry slot which is more advantageous to the player than other entry openings by the distribution means. It may be configured to be easy. With this configuration, the player can enthusiastically play a game (launching a ball) in order to allow a large number of balls to flow into the ball entry unit 64 in a short period of time.

Although the sorting means (sorting member 900) having various technical ideas has been described above, a sorting means that appropriately combines each of the above-mentioned technical ideas may be provided.

<Third modification example>
Next, a third modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 141. In the third embodiment described above, when the time reduction state is set after the end of the jackpot game for the battle effect executed during the jackpot game, until the number of special figure fluctuations in the time reduction state reaches a predetermined number (30 times). It was configured to run continuously. Then, when the number of special map fluctuations in the time-reduced state reaches a predetermined number of times (30 times), the battle effect is terminated and the effect of entering the time-reduced state (see FIG. 114 (b)) is executed. Was there.

On the other hand, in this third modification, in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), a privilege different from the jackpot game executed at the time of winning the jackpot is given in a part of the lottery results other than the jackpot. It is configured so that a small hit can be won in which a small hit game is executed. Further, when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the effect executed during the jackpot game (for example, the effect of displaying the ending screen of the jackpot game) is a predetermined end condition (special figure variation) during the time saving state. It is configured to be continuously executed until the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times (30 times) or a predetermined lottery result (for example, a small hit) is established as a lottery result of a special symbol, and the end condition is satisfied. After that, the time saving rush effect (see FIG. 135 (b)) indicating that the time saving state is set is executed. By configuring in this way, it can be made to think that the time saving state is set at the timing when the end condition is satisfied. Regarding the control of winning a small hit in the special drawing lottery, the target of the control related to the big hit winning in each of the above-described embodiments is changed to a small hit, and the winning determination value (value of the first random number counter C1) is set. When the small hit game is executed by setting the range different from the range corresponding to the big hit winning, the small hit operation scenario different from the big hit operation scenario (for example, the round game is one round and the variable winning device 65 is used. A variable winning device 65 is operated based on a round game to be opened, and as a condition for ending the round of the round game, either five balls are won or the opening period is 0.5 seconds. Since the points are different and the others are the same, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the third modification, the predetermined end condition is configured to have an end condition (small hit winning) in which the timing of establishment is irregular. With this configuration, even if a certain number of time saving states (for example, 100 times of time saving) are internally set, various time saving states are set depending on the timing at which the time saving rushing effect is executed. Can be made to think that is set, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Here, with reference to FIG. 135, the production contents of the third modification will be described. FIG. 135 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen having a display mode that can be executed during the jackpot game displayed after the end of the jackpot game (during the reduced working hours), and FIG. 135 (b) is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the time saving rush screen. In each element displayed in each figure, the same elements as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 135 (a), when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the ending screen displayed on the ending screen of the jackpot game is continuously displayed. On this ending screen, a display mode Dm5 indicating the number of prize balls acquired by the player during a period (continuous chan period) in which a game state (probability change state, time saving state, jackpot game state) advantageous to the player is continuously set. And, the display mode Dm10 indicating the number of big hit games executed during the continuous Chan period is displayed. Since the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) is internally a time-saving state, a variation display mode (arrow) indicating that the special FIG. 2 variation is executed is displayed in the small display area Dm2. .. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that the jackpot game is continuing even though the time saving state is set. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, since the game board 13 is configured so that the game executed during the time saving state and the game executed during the jackpot game are the same game (right-handed game). , The current gaming state is not determined by the player depending on the gaming method.

Next, when the end condition is satisfied during the time saving state, the time saving rushing effect is executed as shown in FIG. 135 (b). Here, in the third modification, when the end condition is satisfied by the small hit winning, the number of remaining time reductions at that time is determined, and the determined remaining time reduction number is a good value (for example, the last digit is When it is not "0"), the correction number obtained by correcting the actual remaining time reduction number is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the number of time reductions (remaining time reductions) displayed when the time reduction rush effect is executed can be set to a good value, so the time reduction state is set when the time reduction rush effect is executed. It can remind you of the timing.

In the figure shown in FIG. 135 (b), 80, which is the number of corrections, is displayed in the remaining time reduction number display area Dm11. Then, in the small display area Dm2, the display mode of "341" indicating that the special figure 2 has won the small hit is displayed. In the third modification, the winning game in which the same variable winning device 65 is changed is executed depending on whether the small hit is won or the big hit is won. Therefore, when the time saving rushing effect is executed based on the small hit winning, the time saving rushing effect is executed based on the execution of the winning game in which the variable winning device 65 is variable. On the other hand, the time when the time saving rush effect is executed can be reminded of the timing when the time saving state is set.

In this modified example, the time-saving rushing effect shown in FIG. 135 (b) is executed when the small hit game is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit winning fluctuation and the small hit game start. Occasionally, it may be configured to perform a time-saving rush effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the electrical configuration in the third modification will be described. The electrical configuration of the third modification is different in that the battle end flag 223ca, the corrected flag 223acb, and the correction number storage area 223cc are added to the above-mentioned third embodiment, and the other points are the same. Is. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In this third modification, among the display modes displayed during the jackpot game, the "big hit ending screen (see FIG. 135 (a))" is used as the display mode displayed even after the jackpot game is completed. In that respect, it differs from the above-mentioned third embodiment (among the display modes displayed during the jackpot game, the "battle effect screen" is displayed as the display mode displayed even after the jackpot game ends), but for convenience of explanation, for convenience of explanation. An explanation will be given using the flag names (battle in-battle flag 223ba, battle end flag 223ca) used in the third embodiment. That is, in this third modification, it is shown that the jackpot ending screen (see FIG. 135 (a)) is displayed when the battle flag 223ba is set to ON, and the battle end flag 223ca described later is set. When it is set to ON, it indicates that the condition for ending the display of the jackpot ending screen (see FIG. 135 (a)) is satisfied.

The battle end flag 223ca is a flag for indicating that the end condition is satisfied based on the small hit winning, and is set to ON when the ending condition is satisfied by the small hit winning.

The corrected flag 223acb is a flag for indicating that the displayed number of remaining time reductions has been corrected, and is set to ON when the number of remaining time reductions is corrected. By setting this corrected flag 223acb to ON, an effect mode (correction effect mode) for adjusting the difference between the corrected time reduction number and the actual time reduction number is executed as the variation effect of the special figure fluctuation. ..

The correction number storage area 223cc is a storage area in which a value indicating the number of correction remaining time reductions after correcting the number of remaining time reductions and a value indicating the difference between the number of correction remaining time reductions and the actual number of remaining time reductions are stored. Based on the value stored in the correction number storage area 223cc, the correction effect mode set as the variation effect of the special figure variation is set.

Next, the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 to 141. In the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third modification, the small hit end process during the small hit game is changed from the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment described above. The difference is that the battle effect update process is changed to the battle effect update process 4 and the special figure change start process is changed to the special figure change start process 4. Other than that, they are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in the third modification, among the display modes displayed during the jackpot game, the display mode displayed even after the jackpot game is completed is "battle effect display" with respect to the third embodiment described above. The difference is that "big hit ending screen display" is used instead of "", but for convenience of explanation, the process related to the battle effect in the above-mentioned third embodiment is used as it is. In this third modification, when the process related to the battle effect is executed, the process related to the jackpot ending screen is executed.

First, the contents of the small hit end processing 4 (S2571) will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit end process 4 (S2571). When the small hit end process 4 (S2571) is executed, first, in order to determine whether the battle is being produced at the present time, it is determined whether the battle flag 223ba is set to on (S2791), and then turned on. If it is determined that there is (S2791: Yes), the battle flag 223ba is set to off (S2792), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is off (S2791: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the battle effect update process 4 (S4651) will be described with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the contents of the battle effect update process 4 (S4651). In this battle effect update process 4 (S4651), it is determined that the first end condition (the number of remaining times reaches 70) has not been completed while the battle effect is being executed for the battle effect update process described above. If this is the case (S6654: No), it is determined whether the battle end flag 223ca is set to ON (S6671), and if it is determined to be ON (S6671: Yes), the number of times correction process (S6672) is executed. It differs in that it is the same otherwise. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the number correction process (S6672) will be described with reference to FIG. 139. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the contents of the number of times correction process (S6672). In this number of times correction process (S6672), a process for correcting the number of remaining time reductions at the time when the battle effect is completed to a good number of times is executed.

When the number correction process (S6672) is executed, first, the number of remaining times is extracted (S6691), and it is determined whether the last digit of the extracted number of remaining time reductions is "0" (S6692), "0". If it is determined to be (S6692: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the last digit is not "0" ("1 to 9") (S6692: No), the number of corrections (correction remaining) in which the last digit of the number of remaining time reductions is corrected to "0". The time reduction number) is set (S6693), the set correction number is stored in the correction number storage area 223cc (S6694), the corrected flag 223acb is set to ON (S6695), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the special figure fluctuation start processing 4 (S4921) will be described with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure fluctuation start processing 4 (S4921). The special figure variation start process 4 (S4921) is different in that the correction number of times corresponding process (S4391) is executed for the above-mentioned special figure variation start process, and is the same except for the above-mentioned special figure variation start process 4. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

Here, the content of the correction count correspondence process (S4391) will be described with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the contents of the correction count correspondence process (S4391). In this correction count correspondence process (S4391), when the remaining time reduction number displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is the correction remaining time reduction number, the difference between the correction remaining time reduction number and the actual remaining time reduction number. The process for setting the variation effect for setting to 0 is executed.

When the correction count correspondence process (S4391) is executed, it is first determined whether the corrected flag 223acb is set to ON (S6801), and if it is set to ON (S6801: yes), the current fluctuation time. Is 30 seconds or more (S6802). When it is determined in the process of S6802 that the time is 30 seconds or more (S6802), the value stored in the correction number storage area 223cc and the actual remaining time reduction number are read out (S6803), and the difference is calculated (S6804).

Then, the display mode corresponding to the difference value referred to in the process of S6804 is set (S6805), and the value (difference value) stored in the correction number storage area 223cc is updated according to the selected display mode (S6805). S6806), it is determined whether the difference value after the update is 0 (S6807). If it is determined that the difference value is 0 (S6807: Yes), it is not necessary to set the correction effect any more, so the corrected flag 223acb is set to off (S6808), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that S6801: No, S6802: No, and S6807: No, the present process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S6802, it is a process of determining whether or not it is possible to execute the remaining time reduction number correction effect (the effect of bringing the number of remaining time reductions on the display closer to the actual remaining time reduction number) as the variation effect this time. In this modification, it is a condition for executing the remaining time reduction number correction effect that the fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more is set, but the execution condition is not limited to this, and the remaining time reduction number correction effect is performed according to the length of the fluctuation time. It may be configured to make the effect mode (the range of the value of the number of remaining time reductions to be updated) variable.

As described above, in the third modification, the effect executed during the jackpot game (for example, the effect of displaying the ending screen of the jackpot game) is set when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. Continues until a predetermined end condition (the number of times the special figure changes reaches a predetermined number of times (30 times), or a predetermined lottery result (for example, a small hit) is won as a lottery result of a special symbol) is satisfied during the time saving state. After the end condition is satisfied, the time saving rush effect (see FIG. 135 (b)) indicating that the time saving state is set is executed. By configuring in this way, it can be made to think that the time saving state is set at the timing when the end condition is satisfied.

Further, in the third modification, the predetermined end condition is configured to have an end condition (small hit winning) in which the timing of establishment is irregular. With this configuration, even if a certain number of time saving states (for example, 100 times of time saving) are internally set, various time saving states are set depending on the timing at which the time saving rushing effect is executed. Can be made to think that is set, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the third modification, when the number of remaining time reductions is corrected, the correction processing is executed to correct the number of remaining time reductions to a value smaller than the actual number of remaining time reductions. Of the reference values (for example, the last digit is "0" or "5"), the correction process for correcting to the value with the smallest difference may be executed. In this case, the number of time reductions after correction (correction remaining time reduction number) may be larger than the actual number of remaining time reductions. It may be configured to execute a variation effect in which a plurality of values of the number of remaining time reductions (corrected value of the number of remaining time reductions) are subtracted. Specifically, a variation effect is performed in which the third symbol is temporarily stopped and restarted after 30 seconds have elapsed, as if the special figure variation was executed twice for one variation effect (for example, 60 seconds). It may be configured to execute and subtract 1 from the value of the number of remaining time reductions displayed according to the temporary stop timing. As a result, the number of remaining time reductions on the display can be brought closer to the actual number of time reductions without giving a sense of discomfort.

Further, in the third modification, a configuration is used in which the remaining period (the number of remaining time reductions) in which the time reduction state is set is notified to the player by the time reduction rush effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the effect mode. In a gaming machine in which the probability change state is set for a predetermined period (for example, 100 times) by changing the game state to be from the time saving state to the probability change state, the remaining period (remaining probability change number) in which the probability change state is set is changed. A configuration that notifies by a rush effect may be used.

Further, when the special figure lottery is executed in the state where the probability change state is set, a fall lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to end the probability change state is provided separately from the jackpot lottery means for performing the jackpot lottery. In the period in which the probability change state is set (for example, 100 times), in addition to the first end condition (special figure fluctuation 30 times) and the second end condition (small hit winning), each condition of the third condition (falling winning) It may be configured to change the effect mode to be executed according to the establishment of.

In this case, for example, when the second end condition is satisfied, if the third condition is not satisfied, the probability variation notification effect is executed, and if the third condition is satisfied, the probability variation notification effect is changed. It is preferable to configure it to execute the above-mentioned time saving notification effect. Further, when the second end condition is satisfied, if the third condition is not satisfied, the definite notification effect is not executed, and the time saving notification effect is executed only when the third condition is satisfied. You may.

In this third modification, among the display modes displayed during the jackpot game, the "big hit ending screen (FIG. 135 (a))" is used as the display mode displayed even after the jackpot game is completed. Any display mode may be used to make the player think that the current jackpot game is in progress. For example, the interval screen displayed during the interval period may be displayed, or the display displayed during the jackpot game. A dedicated display mode having at least a part of the mode (for example, a display mode displayed in the small area Dm5 or the small area Dm6) may be used.

<Fourth modification>
Next, a further modification to the battle effect in the above-mentioned third modification will be described. In the third modification described above, when a time-saving jackpot is won, a predetermined end condition (after the time-saving state is set) after the end of the jackpot game is completed (the number of special figure fluctuations is a predetermined number of times (30 times)). Is configured to continue to execute the battle effect until a predetermined lottery result (for example, a small hit) is established as a lottery result of a special symbol. It was configured to execute the production that won the battle (battle victory production) when the jackpot was won. By configuring in this way, the execution frequency of the production that lost the battle at the end of the time-saving jackpot game (battle defeat production) is suppressed, the winning percentage of the battle production (execution ratio of the battle victory production) is increased, and the player is given. It was intended to make it possible to get interested in the production result.

However, in the above-mentioned third modification, if the time-saving jackpot is won during the battle production in the time-saving state, the rematch production is executed, so that the period of one battle production is extended and the player can perform the production. There was a problem of getting bored. In addition, even though the jackpot was won a plurality of times, the victory or defeat was not displayed as the production result of the battle production, and there was a possibility that the production would be difficult for the player to understand.

On the other hand, in the fourth modification, the variation pattern selection table referred to when the time reduction state is set is changed 30 times after the time reduction state is set (as a condition for ending the battle effect). It is configured so that different fluctuation times are selected for the first time reduction period until the elapse of the set special figure fluctuation number) and the second time reduction period after that, and the jackpot was won during the first time reduction period. In this case, a variable time (30 seconds) that can be set between the victory effect period in the battle effect and the pseudo-probability effect period in which the probability change effect executed during the probability change state is simulated is selected. ing.

With this configuration, if a jackpot is won during the first time-saving period (during battle production), the production result of the battle effect being executed is performed regardless of the type of jackpot won (probability variation jackpot, time-saving jackpot). It is possible to surely execute the production to win the battle (battle victory production). Therefore, it is possible to further increase the winning percentage of the battle effect (execution rate of the battle victory effect) so that the player can be interested in the effect result.

Further, it is configured to execute different effects according to the jackpot type of the jackpot won during the first short period. Specifically, when the probability change jackpot (8 rounds, 16 rounds) is won during the first short time period, the effect of winning the jackpot is executed during the above-mentioned pseudo probability variation effect period, and the game shifts to the jackpot game. Then, in the jackpot game that is executed after that, a new battle effect (battle victory effect) is executed. On the other hand, if the probability change jackpot (2 rounds) is won during the first short time period, the pseudo battle effect period is set after the pseudo probability change effect period during the jackpot fluctuation, and the jackpot is won during the pseudo probability change effect period. After executing the production, the pseudo battle production is executed, the jackpot game is started during the battle production, and the production result (battle victory production) of the pseudo battle production is displayed during the short jackpot game period of 2 rounds. It is configured in. As a result, if the probabilistic jackpot is won during the first short period of time, it is possible to execute two battle victory effects by the end of the probabilistic jackpot game, so that it was used in the above-mentioned third modification. It is possible to increase the winning percentage of the battle effect (execution rate of the battle victory effect) rather than the configuration so that the player can be interested in the effect result.

In this fourth modification, when a big hit is won during the first short period, a certain fluctuation time (30 seconds) is selected regardless of the big hit type, but this is limited to this. If you win the jackpot type in which the pseudo battle effect is executed, the fluctuation time is longer than when you win the other jackpot types, that is, the fluctuation time is longer by the effect period of the pseudo battle effect (for example, 50 seconds). It may be configured so that can be selected. As a result, the period until the pseudo-battle effect is executed can be set to a certain period, so that it is possible to prevent the jackpot type of the jackpot won this time from being determined by the time the pseudo-battle effect is executed. Can be done.

On the other hand, if the time-saving jackpot is won during the first time-saving period (during the battle production), the first battle victory effect is executed during the jackpot fluctuation and the pseudo-probability change effect is executed, as in the case of the above-mentioned probability-changing jackpot. do. Then, in the second battle production (battle production during the jackpot game or pseudo battle production), a battle production that continues from the end of the jackpot game until the end condition is satisfied is executed.

With this configuration, even if the time-saving jackpot is won during the first time-saving period, one battle victory effect can be executed, so the winning percentage of the battle effect (execution rate of the battle victory effect). ) Can be further enhanced so that the player can be interested in the production result. Further, since the battle victory effect can be executed the number of times according to the number of big hit wins during the battle effect, it is possible to provide the effect that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

Here, although detailed description will be omitted, the content of the pseudo-probability variation effect will be described. In the fourth modification, when the probability variation state is set as in the third embodiment and the third modification described above, the probability variation effect in which the character 811 runs on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. .. During the pseudo probabilistic effect, an effect (concept including the same effect) including at least a part of the effect modes executed when the probabilistic state is set is executed, and during the effect period. It is configured to execute a pseudo-variation effect that makes it seem that the special figure variation is executed multiple times.

As a result, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the pseudo-probability effect that is executed during a part of the special figure variation (big hit variation) and the probability variation effect that is executed over a plurality of special figure fluctuations. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the contents of the probability variation / time saving table 202de2 will be described as the variation pattern table used in the fourth modification. FIG. 142 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the probability change / time saving table 202de2. The probability variation / time reduction table 202de2 is different from the above-mentioned probability variation / time reduction table 202e2 (see FIG. 19) in that the table to be referred to is different based on the value of the time reduction counter 203h, and each of the variation type counter CS1. They differ in that the types of fluctuation patterns specified according to the values are different, and are otherwise the same. The detailed description of the same content will be omitted.

Specifically, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is "100 to 71", that is, the period from when the time reduction state is set until the number of special map fluctuations reaches 30 times (first time reduction period). If the judgment result is a hit (big hit, small hit), the time-saving A big hit fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and if the hit / fail judgment result is wrong, the fluctuation type counter. Regardless of the value of CS1, it is stipulated that the time saving A deviation fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is selected.

On the other hand, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is "70 to 1", that is, the period after the number of special map fluctuations has elapsed 30 times after the time reduction state is set (second time reduction period), and the hit / fail determination result is correct (the second time reduction period). In the case of (big hit, small hit), the time-saving B big hit fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is selected regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In the range of "0 to 179", the time-saving B out-of-time fluctuation pattern 1 with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is selected, and in the case of the range of "180 to 198", the time-saving B out-of-time fluctuation pattern 2 with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is selected. Is stipulated to be.

In this fourth modification, by using the above-mentioned probability change / time saving table 202de2, the time saving period (first time saving period) in which the battle effect is executed and the time saving period (second time saving period) in which the battle effect is not executed are performed. And, it is configured so that different fluctuation times can be selected. Then, during the first time saving period, if the special drawing lottery is missed, a shorter fluctuation time than the second time saving period is selected, while if the special drawing lottery is successful, the fluctuation is longer than the second time saving period. Since the time is configured to be selected, the degree of advantage in the time saving state does not differ greatly between the first time saving period and the second time saving period.

Further, in the fourth modification, if a small hit is won during the first short period and the end condition of the battle effect is satisfied, the battle victory effect is once performed in the same manner as the effect executed at the time of the big hit winning described above. It is configured to execute, then execute the pseudo-probability change effect, and then execute the pseudo-battle effect to be executed during the small hit fluctuation until the effect of losing the battle. As a result, the battle production can be completed without giving the player a sense of discomfort. In this case, the fluctuation time of the small hit fluctuation is longer than that when the other big hit types are won, that is, the fluctuation time longer by the period until the effect result of the pseudo battle effect is displayed (for example, 60 seconds). It is good to configure it so that you can select.

Further, although detailed explanation is omitted, if a small hit is won during the first time reduction period and the end condition of the battle production is satisfied, the period from the end of the small hit game to the end of the first time reduction period. It is configured so that the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation executed in is selected based on the data table to be referred to during the second time saving period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the variable time corresponding to the various effects during the battle effect from being selected even though the battle effect is completed.

As described above, in the third modification and the fourth modification, when the jackpot is won, it is possible to set a time saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state and a probability variation state that is more advantageous than the time saving state after the jackpot game is completed. The effect of notifying that the time saving state, which is disadvantageous to the player, is set among the probable change state and the time saving state is executed after the time saving state is set and the predetermined end condition is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving state and the probable change state may be set based on the small hit winning.

Further, in the time saving state set when the time saving jackpot is won in the big hit lottery, the fluctuation time (for example, 5 to 60 seconds) of the special figure fluctuation is slightly shorter than the normal state (concept including the same). It is configured to be easy to select, and if a small hit is won during the time saving state, the data table to be referred to when selecting the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation is switched, and the short fluctuation time (for example, 0.5 to 0.5 to 5 seconds) may be configured to be easily selected. In addition, as for the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, as with the fluctuation time of the special figure described above, it is easier to select a shorter fluctuation time after winning a small hit during the time reduction state than when the time reduction state is set. It is good to configure it so that it becomes.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that the time saving state is set based on the winning of the small hit, and the number of remaining time saving at the time of winning the small hit is apparent. Since the number of time reductions is set, it is possible to have the player play a game in which various time reductions are set. In such a case, by using the technique of the third modification described above, it is possible to provide the player with a more comfortable game.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the big hit until multiple (for example, two or three times) big hits occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a combination of probabilities (commonly known as a setting) related to a big hit lottery is provided in a plurality of stages and the setting can be changed on the game store side. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In addition, as a pachinko machine provided with a setting of a plurality of stages, a combination of jackpot probabilities (combination of a jackpot probability in a low probability state and a jackpot probability in a probabilistic state) may be one of a plurality of stages (for example, 6 stages). A typical example is one that can be set to, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, the ratio of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined when a jackpot is hit is implemented as a pachinko machine that can be changed according to the setting. You may. That is, the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player may be changed according to the setting, or the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player may be changed. More specifically, for example, the ratio at which the jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) is determined. The ratio may be changed according to the setting to change the degree of advantage for each setting. Further, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot to which a large number of time reductions (for example, 100 times) is given after the end of the jackpot can be changed according to the setting, or the jackpot to which a small number of time reductions (for example, 0 times) is given can be changed. The ratio at which is determined may be changed according to the setting. Further, the rate at which the jackpot that shifts to (or is easy to shift to) an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probable change state) after the end of the jackpot is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the disadvantageous gaming state (for example, the normal state) can be determined. ) May be changed according to the setting. In addition, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type is provided, in which the ratio determined only in a specific setting is significantly high (almost never determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, the setting is configured to be configurable in 6 steps from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set 6. In setting 6, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2% in the case of a jackpot, while in other settings, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. It may be configured. With this configuration, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to pay attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot to play the game. be able to. Further, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 time reductions are given after the jackpot is completed may be configured to be higher than other settings. With this configuration, it is possible to focus on the number of times the time saving state ends and play the game. In addition to or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or an accessory inside the jackpot) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured to be provided so that the jackpot type can be easily determined by a specific setting (the ratio of determination is high). In addition, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is changed according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability is increased as the setting is advantageous to the player, while in the probabilistic state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It may be configured to increase the jackpot probability as much as possible. This configuration is a type in which it is easy to increase the number of balls held as the number of lottery of special symbols increases (the number of prize balls to be paid out tends to be larger than the number of game balls fired), especially in the probabilistic state. It is effective in gaming machines. More specifically, for example, by applying it to a gaming machine of a type in which the probability change state continues until the next big hit is won, and the probability change state is a small hit with a high probability, the advantage of the high setting is achieved. You can improve your sex. That is, if the probability of becoming a big hit in the probable change state is low, the number of lottery until the next big hit tends to increase, so that there are many chances to win a prize ball as a small hit. Therefore, in the probable change state, it becomes easier to win more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

Further, in the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operating means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls can be solved.

Each of the above-described embodiments and each control example may be configured by combining all or a part thereof. For example, the configuration of the pass detection sensor 228 of the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment may be applied to other embodiments. For example, by applying to the first embodiment, the gauge number of the chance meter CM during the execution of the standby state effect can be accurately linked by the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. More specifically, the passing number counter 223k in the sixth embodiment is also provided in the RAM 223 in the first embodiment, and the value of the passing number counter 223k is updated by the same method as in the fourth embodiment (FIG. 87). See S4211, S4212, S4219, S4220). Then, during the execution of the standby state effect, every time the value of the passing number counter 223k is updated, the mode of the chance meter CM is updated so that the gauge number corresponds to the updated counter value. As a result, the mode of the chance meter CM can be set to match the situation of the upper surface of the actual opening / closing door 65f1. For other embodiments, the configuration of the sixth embodiment can be diverted by the same method.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Characteristic group A> (Set whether or not to execute the button effects in duplicate)
An effect executing means for executing an effect based on a predetermined priority, an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means, and the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. The mode information storage means for storing the mode information for storing the mode information in a plurality of storage areas having different priorities, and the plurality of storage areas are configured to be capable of storing a plurality of the same priority. It has an execution effect setting means for setting whether or not to execute the effect corresponding to the plurality of the mode information stored in the plurality of the same priority order in the effect execution means. A game machine A1 characterized by.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, the suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result can be executed, and the player can enjoy the period until the lottery result is notified. Further, as a suggestion effect, a gaming machine has been proposed in which the effect of the suggestion effect is further enhanced by executing various effects at various timings (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). Further, in a gaming machine having the above-described configuration, as a suggestion effect, a player-participation-type suggestion effect is executed by executing an operation effect that causes the player to operate a predetermined operation means, thereby performing the game. There are gaming machines that have improved the taste. However, since there are some players whose motivation to play is reduced due to the execution of many suggestion effects, it is possible to execute an effect that satisfies a plurality of players simply by executing the suggestion effects according to a predetermined rule. There was a problem that it could not be done and the interest of the game was lowered. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game having an improved interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine A1, the mode information for indicating the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means is stored in a plurality of storage areas having different priorities. The plurality of storage areas are configured to be able to store a plurality of mode information of the same priority, and the execution effect setting means executes the effect on the plurality of mode information stored in the same priority. It is decided whether to do it.

With this configuration, it is possible to variably set the presence or absence of duplicate execution of the effect corresponding to each mode information stored in a plurality of storage areas in which the same priority is defined. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, each mode information is set so that duplicate execution is possible, and when the staging is actually executed, the mode of the staging to be executed is changed according to the setting contents of the execution staging setting means. Therefore, even if the interval between the effect setting timing in which the effect mode is set and the effect execution timing in which the effect based on the effect set effect mode is executed is significantly different, the execution effect setting means at the effect execution timing There is an effect that the effect according to the setting contents of is easily executed.

In the gaming machine A1, when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the aspect information storage means transfers the aspect information stored in the specific storage area to a predetermined storage area other than the specific storage area. A gaming machine A2 characterized by being memorized.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, when the transition condition is satisfied, the mode information already stored in the specific storage area is transferred and stored in a storage area different from the specific storage area. As a result, it is possible to change the mode of the effect to be executed depending on whether or not the transition condition is satisfied, so that it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. ..

In the game machine A1 or A2, when the effect mode having the same priority is set by the effect mode setting means, the order determination means capable of discriminating the order in which the effect mode is set and the plurality of order determination means. The erasing means has an erasing means for erasing the aspect information stored in the storage area of the above, and the erasing means has the same number of the effect modes in which the same priority is set by the effect setting means. When the number of storage areas is set to be larger than the number corresponding to the priority order of the above, the order stored in the aspect information storage means is deleted in order from the oldest aspect information based on the determination result of the order determination means. A game machine A3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the setting mode in which the same priority is set is set when the number of storage areas corresponding to the priority is set to be larger than the number of storage areas. The order is erased in order from the oldest effect mode. Therefore, since it is possible to easily execute the production corresponding to the most recently set production mode, it is possible to provide the player with a production that does not give a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

If the configuration of the gaming machine A1 is used and it is set to execute only the effect corresponding to the mode information stored in one storage area for the same priority, it is the latest. It is preferable to configure the mode information corresponding to the set effect mode to be stored in one storage area, and to erase the other mode information by the erasing means.

In the game machine A1 or A3, the effect executing means stores the first aspect information in a predetermined first storage area among the plurality of storage areas of the aspect information storage means, and the specific first storage area is stored. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that when a specific second aspect information different from the first aspect information is stored in a second storage area different from the above, the effect of the special effect mode is executed.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are played. That is, when the mode information stored in the plurality of storage areas is stored in a predetermined combination, the effect of the special effect mode is executed. As a result, for the process of storing the aspect information in the storage area by the aspect information storage means, the process for storing the already set effect mode and the process for establishing the execution condition of the effect of the special effect mode. , Can have a dual role. Further, since it is possible to give a role for executing the effect of the special effect mode even for the mode information having a low priority in which the corresponding effect is difficult to be executed, it is possible to effectively utilize the stored mode information. can. Therefore, there is an effect that various effects can be efficiently executed.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the effect executing means includes an operation means that can be operated by the player and an operation determination means that determines that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. A5 is characterized in that, at least, it is possible to execute an operation effect in which the effect mode is changed based on the determination result of the operation determination means.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines A1 to A4, it is possible to execute an operation effect using an operation means that can be operated by the player, so that the player is interested in the effect to be executed. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine A5, the staging mode setting means can set, as the staging mode, an operation staging mode in which an operation valid period for effectively discriminating the discrimination result of the operation discriminating means is set, and the staging execution. In the means, as the first aspect information, the first aspect information corresponding to the operation effect mode is stored in the first storage area, and as the second aspect information, the second aspect information corresponding to the operation effect mode is stored. The gaming machine 6 is characterized in that when it is stored in the second storage area, the special effect mode is executed.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A5, it is possible to execute a special effect in a situation where a plurality of operation effect modes are executed, so that the player is interested in the effect to be executed. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine A6, the effect executing means is set to the operation valid period set in the operation effect mode corresponding to the first aspect information and the operation effect mode set in the operation effect mode corresponding to the second aspect information. When the operation valid period overlaps, the effect of the special effect mode is executed, and the effect of the special effect mode is characterized in that the effect of setting the operation effect mode is executed. Game machine A7.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the operation effects are set in duplicate, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the special effects. Further, when the operation valid period is set to overlap, the effect of the special effect mode can be executed as the operation effect. Therefore, the effect of the special effect mode is executed while the effect of operating the operation means is continued. be able to. Therefore, since the effect of the special effect mode can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort, there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristic group B> (The area for storing the button effect is changed according to the setting opportunity)
An effect executing means for executing an effect based on a predetermined priority, an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means, and the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. The mode information storage means for storing the mode information for indicating the above in a plurality of storage areas having different priorities, and the effect mode setting means is at least as a setting condition for setting the effect mode. It has a predetermined first setting condition and a second setting condition different from the first setting condition, and the mode information storage means is established when the staging mode is set by the staging mode setting means. The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the range of the plurality of storage areas for storing the mode information is different according to the setting conditions.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, the suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result can be executed, and the player can enjoy the period until the lottery result is notified. Further, as a suggestion effect, a gaming machine has been proposed in which the effect of the suggestion effect is further enhanced by executing various effects at various timings (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). In addition, there are also gaming machines that are configured to execute more suggestive effects so that the suggestive effects can be set at various occasions. However, there is a problem that a lot of suggestive effects set by various triggers are executed, so that complicated effects are executed as a whole and the motivation for playing is reduced. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming that can suppress a decrease in motivation for playing due to an effect to be executed and improve the interest of the gaming.

According to the game machine B1, when the first setting condition or the second setting condition is satisfied, the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means is set by the effect mode setting means, and the set effect mode is set. The aspect information for showing is stored in a plurality of storage areas having different priorities by the aspect information storage means. Then, the range in which the mode information is stored can be changed from the plurality of storage areas according to the setting conditions that are established when the effect mode is set. As a result, the priority can be limited according to the setting condition of the effect mode, so that the effect executed based on each effect mode set under a plurality of conditions can be given regularity. .. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the execution of complicated effects, it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation for the game due to the effects to be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine B1, the plurality of storage areas are configured to be capable of storing a plurality of the same priorities, and the plurality of embodiments stored in the staging execution means in the same priority order. The gaming machine B2 is characterized by having an execution effect setting means for setting whether or not to execute the effect corresponding to information.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, the mode information for showing the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect executing means is stored in a plurality of storage areas having different priorities. The plurality of storage areas are configured to be able to store a plurality of mode information of the same priority, and the execution effect setting means executes the effect on the plurality of mode information stored in the same priority. It is decided whether to do it. With this configuration, it is possible to variably set the presence or absence of duplicate execution of the effect corresponding to each mode information stored in a plurality of storage areas in which the same priority is defined. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, each mode information is set so that duplicate execution is possible, and when the staging is actually executed, the mode of the staging to be executed is changed according to the setting contents of the execution staging setting means. Therefore, even if the interval between the effect setting timing in which the effect mode is set and the effect execution timing in which the effect based on the effect set effect mode is executed is significantly different, the execution effect setting means at the effect execution timing There is an effect that the effect according to the setting contents of is easily executed.

In the gaming machine B2, when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the aspect information storage means transfers the aspect information stored in the specific storage area to a predetermined storage area other than the specific storage area. A gaming machine B3 characterized by being memorized.

According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2. That is, when the transition condition is satisfied, the mode information already stored in the specific storage area is transferred and stored in a storage area different from the specific storage area. As a result, it is possible to change the mode of the effect to be executed depending on whether or not the transition condition is satisfied, so that it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. ..

<Characteristic group C> (Premier production for low priority production)
An effect execution means for executing an effect for a predetermined period based on a predetermined priority, an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means, and an effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode. The effect information storage means for storing the mode information for indicating the effect mode set by the above in a plurality of storage areas having different priorities, and the effect mode setting means has an execution period of the effect. The effect mode can be set so as to overlap, and has an effect end means for ending the running effect before the predetermined period elapses when a predetermined end condition is satisfied. The gaming machine C1 characterized by being.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, the suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result can be executed, and the player can enjoy the period until the lottery result is notified. Further, as a suggestion effect, there is a gaming machine in which various effects are executed at various timings to further enhance the effect of the suggestion effect. In such a game machine, priorities are set in advance for a plurality of suggestion effects. It has been proposed to execute a suggestion effect having a high priority when the execution timings of the suggestion effect overlap (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200589). In such a game machine, the suggestion effect is executed according to a predetermined priority. Therefore, for example, by setting a high priority for the suggestion effect having a high effect effect, the suggestion effect having a low effect effect is executed. By doing so, it was possible to solve the problem that the suggestive effect with a high effect of the effect is not executed and the interest of the game is lowered. However, when it is configured to execute the suggestion effect to be executed based on the predetermined priority, it becomes difficult to execute the suggestion effect having a low priority, and the suggested effect to be executed becomes monotonous. There was a problem that the player got tired of the game early. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by executing various suggestion effects.

According to the game machine C1, the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means is set by the effect mode setting means, and the mode information for showing the set effect mode has different priority depending on the mode information storage means. Stored in multiple storage areas. Then, if the end condition is satisfied during the execution of the effect, the effect is ended before the predetermined period predetermined by the effect end means elapses. As a result, the execution period of the effect can be different depending on whether or not the end condition is satisfied, and it is possible to easily execute the effect based on the mode information having a lower priority among the mode information set in the overlapping period. .. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine C1 has an operation means that can be operated by the player and an operation determination means that determines that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the determination result of the operation determination means is predetermined. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the end condition is satisfied when it is the determination result of.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, the end condition is satisfied based on the player operating the operating means, so that the player can select the period during which the effect is executed. Can be done. Therefore, since the amount of the effect to be executed can be changed according to the player's willingness to participate in the effect, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine C1 or C2, a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination, and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game capable of giving a privilege to a player when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result. The first effect mode is easy to set when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result, and the second effect is more difficult to set than the first effect mode. Aspects can be set, and the mode information storage means stores the first mode information for showing the first effect mode and the second mode information for showing the second effect mode. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that it is stored in a storage area having a lower priority than the storage area.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C1 or C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first effect mode, which is easy to set when the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined determination result on which the privilege game is executed, is set to have a lower priority than the second effect mode, which is difficult to set. Will be done. As a result, it is easier to execute the effect corresponding to the second effect mode by satisfying the end condition and shortening the effect period of the effect being executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a new playability that the effect being executed is expected to end at an early stage, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic D group> (linking different priority effects)
An effect executing means for executing an effect based on a predetermined priority, an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means, and the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. The effect information storage means for storing the mode information for storing the mode information in a plurality of storage areas having different priorities, and the effect executing means corresponds to one priority among the plurality of storage areas. When the first aspect information stored in the first storage area satisfies a predetermined effect condition, the second aspect stored in the second storage area corresponding to another priority lower than the one priority. The gaming machine D1 characterized in that the effect according to the information is also associated and executed.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, the suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result can be executed, and the player can enjoy the period until the lottery result is notified. Further, as a suggestion effect, there is a gaming machine in which various effects are executed at various timings to further enhance the effect of the suggestion effect. In such a game machine, priorities are set in advance for a plurality of suggestion effects. It has been proposed to execute a suggestion effect having a high priority when the execution timings of the suggestion effect overlap (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200589). In such a game machine, the suggestion effect is executed according to a predetermined priority. Therefore, for example, by setting a high priority for the suggestion effect having a high effect effect, the suggestion effect having a low effect effect is executed. By doing so, it was possible to solve the problem that the suggestive effect with a high effect of the effect is not executed and the interest of the game is lowered. However, when it is configured to execute the suggestion effect to be executed based on the predetermined priority, it becomes difficult to execute the suggestion effect having a low priority, and the suggested effect to be executed becomes monotonous. There was a problem that the player got tired of the game early. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by executing various suggestion effects.

According to the gaming machine D1, the effect corresponding to the aspect information stored in the plurality of storage areas having different priorities depending on the aspect information storage means is executed by the effect executing means based on the priority. Further, when the first aspect information stored in the first storage area corresponding to one priority satisfies a predetermined effect condition, the second storage area corresponding to another priority lower than one priority is stored. The effect corresponding to the stored second aspect information is performed in association with each other. As a result, the effect having a low priority can be linked to the effect having a high priority and executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide various effects to the player, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine D1 has an effect period setting means capable of setting a period during which the effect is executed by the effect execution means, and the effect period setting means executes a first effect corresponding to the first aspect information. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the first effect period and the second effect period in which the second effect corresponding to the second aspect information is executed are set differently.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B1, each effect period is such that the first effect period in which the first effect is executed and the second effect period in which the second effect is executed do not overlap. Is set by the effect period setting means, so that it is possible to reliably notify the player of a plurality of effects to be executed, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine D2, a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game capable of giving a privilege to a player when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result. The effect mode setting means has at least the first effect, which is easy to set when the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined determination result, and the second effect, which is more difficult to set than the first effect. A gaming machine D3 characterized by being configurable.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D2, the following effects are played. That is, when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result in which the privilege game is executed, the first effect that is easy to set and the second effect that is difficult to set can be executed in association with each other. Further, the second effect is an effect having a low priority to be executed independently. As a result, when the second effect is executed, it is possible to make the execution of the second effect this time seem to be related to the first effect, and there is a sense of expectation that the privilege game will be executed. Can be enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine D2 or D3, the staging period setting means sets the second staging period before the first staging period.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D2 or D3, the second effect period is set before the first effect period, so that the second effect is executed before the first effect. It will be. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed before the second effect, and the expectation of the player at the time when the second effect is executed is impaired. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay attention to the continuously executed effect and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines D2 to D4, the effect period setting means executes the second effect in association with the first effect and the second effect without relating to the first effect. The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the period in which the second effect period is set differs depending on the case.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D2 to D4, the second effect of this time is executed in connection with the first effect based on the period during which the second effect is executed. Since it is possible to predict whether or not the game is played, it is possible to make the player interested in the performance to be performed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

<Characteristic E group> (Special effect when switching the target of the main variation effect)
The first discrimination means that executes the first discrimination when the first discrimination condition is satisfied, and the second discrimination means different from the first discrimination condition when the second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition is satisfied. The discrimination results of the second discrimination means, the first effect execution means for causing the display means to execute the first effect for showing the discrimination result of the first discrimination means for a predetermined period, and the discrimination result of the second discrimination means are shown. The second effect execution means for causing the display means to execute the second effect for a predetermined period, the effect mode of the first effect executed by the first effect execution means, and the second effect execution means. An effect mode setting means capable of setting the effect mode of the second effect, and an effect switching means for switching the first effect being executed to the second effect when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the effect mode setting means sets a special effect mode as an effect mode of the first effect executed in a state where the switching condition can be satisfied.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, the suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result can be executed, and the player can enjoy the period until the lottery result is notified. Furthermore, as a suggestion effect, there is a game machine in which various effects are executed at various timings to further enhance the effect of the suggestion effect, and in such a game machine, the suggestion effect is set at different timings based on different moments. However, if another suggestion effect is executed while one suggestion effect is being executed, the running one suggestion effect is forcibly terminated and the other suggestion effect is executed. There is a game machine (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-209952). In such a gaming machine, even while one suggestion effect is being executed, another suggestion effect can be executed, so that the types of effects to be executed can be increased and the effect can be enhanced. be. However, since the above-mentioned gaming machine is configured to execute another suggestion effect regardless of the effect status of one suggestion effect being executed, the player suddenly switches the suggestion effect to be executed. There was a problem that the player's motivation to play was reduced. Further, when the suggestion effect being executed indicates a predetermined process change (for example, story development), the predetermined process change mode ends in the middle by switching the suggestion effect. Therefore, there was a problem that the player was more confused. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by executing various suggestion effects without confusing the player.

According to the gaming machine E1, when the switching condition is satisfied, the first effect being executed is switched to the second effect by the effect switching means. Then, a special effect mode is set as the effect mode of the first effect executed in a state where the switching condition can be satisfied. As a result, the effect mode of the first effect is set to the special effect mode, and the effect of the special effect mode is executed when switching to the second effect, so that various suggestion effects can be executed without confusing the player. , It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the effect mode setting means sets, as the special effect mode, a related effect mode related to the effect mode of the second effect.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1, an effect mode related to the effect mode of the second effect is set as a special effect mode, so that the game is played when switching from the first effect to the second effect. It has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game without confusing the person.

The game machine E2 has an operation means that can be operated by the player and an operation determination means that determines that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and has the first effect executing means and the first effect execution means. The 2 staging execution means can at least execute an operation staging in which the staging mode is changed based on the discrimination result of the operation discriminating means, and the staging mode setting means is the staging operation staging as the second staging. When is set, the gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the effect mode corresponding to the operation effect is set as the special effect mode of the first effect.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the staging mode setting means is a first staging mode that is easily set as the staging mode of the first staging when the discriminating result of the first discriminating means is a specific discriminating result. And the second effect mode, which is more difficult to set than the first effect mode, can be set, and the second effect mode is set as the special effect mode of the first effect. Game machine E4 to play.

According to the gaming machine E4, when switching from the first effect to the second effect, the effect mode of the first effect being executed can be set to an effect mode in which the player is less interested. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play by switching from one effect to the second effect.

<Characteristic F group> (Continued execution of probabilistic promotion after the big hit)
The discrimination means capable of executing a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means for a predetermined period, and the dynamic display execution means dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. A privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and a setting after the end of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. A game having a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state that is advantageous to the player and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state as the game state to be played. The machine has at least a notification effect executing means capable of executing a notification effect capable of notifying that the second game state is set as an effect result during the execution of the privilege game, and the notification effect executing means The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that when the privilege game in which the first game state is set ends after the end of the privilege game, the notification effect is executed until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. ..

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, after the end of the privilege game, it is possible to set either an advantageous game state in which it is easy to win or a disadvantageous game state in which it is difficult to win, and during the privilege game, after the end of the privilege game. It has been proposed to make a suggestion effect for suggesting a set gaming state feasible (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200589). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to experience the enjoyment of acquiring benefits during the privilege game and the enjoyment of predicting the set game state at the same time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. rice field. However, if it can be determined that the game state set after the end of the privilege game is a disadvantageous game state by the suggestion effect executed during the privilege game, the motivation for the game after the end of the privilege game is reduced. There was a problem. Further, the rate at which the advantageous gaming state is set is predetermined depending on the type of the gaming machine. For example, in a gaming machine in which the rate at which the advantageous gaming state is set is set low, it is suggested that the game is executed during the privilege game. There is a problem that it becomes difficult to execute an effect suggesting that an advantageous gaming state is set in the effect, and the suggestion effect itself causes a decrease in the player's motivation to play. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by providing an effect capable of suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation to play the game.

According to the game machine F1, when the first game state is set for the notification effect executed during the execution of the privilege game by the notification effect execution means, a predetermined end condition is satisfied after the privilege game is completed. It will be executed until you do. As a result, the first game state is set after the end of the privilege game, and the second game state is set after the end of the privilege game during the first game state until the end condition is satisfied. Is executed, it is possible to set a notification mode for notifying that the second gaming state is set as the effect result of the notification effect. As a result, it is possible to increase the ratio of setting the notification mode for notifying that the second game state is set as the effect result of the notification effect, as compared with the case where the notification effect is executed only during the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can execute the notification effect with a sense of expectation and can improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine F1 has a measuring means capable of measuring the number of discriminating times of the discriminating means, and a measuring discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the discriminant number measured by the measuring means has reached a predetermined number of times. Is a gaming machine F2, which is established when it is determined by the measurement determining means that the number of times the first gaming state has been set has reached the predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, the ending condition is satisfied based on the number of times the discrimination means are discriminated. It is possible to execute the discrimination by. Therefore, as a result of the effect of the notification effect, there is an effect that the ratio of setting the notification mode for notifying that the second game state is set can be increased.

Based on the fact that the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode different from the specific display mode in the game machine F1 or F2, the game is played by the privilege game. From the first state when the special privilege game execution means that can execute the special privilege game that can grant the special privilege different from the privilege that can be given to the person and the privilege game or the special privilege game is executed. It has a variable means that can be changed to a second state, and the end condition is satisfied when the special privilege game is executed while the first game state is set. The gaming machine F3 featuring.

According to the gaming machine F3, since the end condition is satisfied when the special privilege game in which the variable means is variable is executed, the end condition is set for the player as if the privilege game was executed. It can be made to think that it was established. Therefore, it is possible to make the period until the end condition is satisfied to be considered as a privileged game, and there is an effect that the notification effect can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the notification effect executing means is a case where the privileged game in which the first game state is set is executed by the privileged game executing means by the time the end condition is satisfied. Is a gaming machine F4, characterized in that the notification effect is executed until the end condition is satisfied after the end of the privileged game.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F3, it is not possible to notify that the second game state is set while the notification effect is being executed. As long as the player wins, the notification effect can be continuously executed, so that it is difficult to execute the notification effect indicating that the second game state is not set as the effect result of the notification effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the ratio of the effect result of the notification effect to the notification result indicating that the second gaming state is set can be relatively increased.

In the game machines F1 to F4, when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the special game execution means capable of executing the special game for a predetermined period and the special game execution means are used to perform the special game. The special period setting means that can set the special period to be executed, the remaining period determining means that can determine the remaining period of the special period set by the special period setting means, and the special period determining means that can determine the remaining period. It has a special period notification means capable of notifying the remaining special period information for indicating the remaining period of the period, and the special period notification means notifies the remaining special period information when the end condition is satisfied. The gaming machine F5 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the following effects are played. That is, since the remaining period of the special period is notified after the end condition is satisfied and the notification effect is completed, the remaining period indicated by the remaining special period information can be changed according to the timing at which the end condition is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the length of the special period set when the first gaming state is set. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is difficult for the player to predict, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic G group> (Short-time rushing effect by winning a small hit during the time-saving state)
The discrimination means capable of executing a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means for a predetermined period, and the dynamic display execution means dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. A privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and a setting after the end of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. A game state setting means capable of setting at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state as the game state to be performed, and an effect capable of executing a predetermined effect. The effect executing means has an execution means, and when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the first notification condition is satisfied from the end of the privilege game until the first notification condition is satisfied. It is more difficult to execute the first effect when the second gaming state is set based on the fact that the first notification condition is satisfied than when the first gaming state is set. 2 A game machine G1 characterized in that it executes a production.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a special game that was executed. Then, after the end of the privilege game, one of the first game state, which is more advantageous than the normal state, and the second game state, which is more advantageous than the first game state, can be set for a predetermined period, and the privilege is set. It has been proposed to enable a suggestion effect for suggesting a gaming state set after the end of the privileged game during the game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-2000489). In such a gaming machine, when the first gaming state is set after the end of the privilege game, the gaming is performed for a predetermined period with the regret that the second gaming state is not set, and the privilege game is performed. There was a problem that the motivation to play after the game was reduced. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation to play the game.

According to the gaming machine G1, even if the first gaming state is set, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the first gaming state has been set until the first notification condition is satisfied, so that the privilege game ends. It is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being reduced later. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G1, a period setting means for setting a period in which the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, a remaining period determining means for determining the remaining period of the period set by the period setting means, and a remaining period determining means. The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that the second effect includes a notification mode for notifying the remaining period of the first gaming state at least when the first notification condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine G2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1. That is, since the remaining period of the first gaming state at the time when the first notification condition is satisfied is notified, the remaining period of the first gaming state at the time when the first gaming state is set, that is, it is set by the period setting means. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that the period of a larger number of types is set by the period setting means than the number of types actually set as the period of the first gaming state, so that it is various. It has the effect of being able to provide games.

In the gaming machines G1 or G2, it is possible to execute a special game in which a privilege different from the privilege game can be given to the player based on the fact that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special display mode different from the specific display mode. When the special game is executed while the first effect is being executed by the suggestion effect execution means, the first notification condition is satisfied. The featured gaming machine G3.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1 or G2, the first notification condition is satisfied when the special game is executed. Therefore, the timing at which the first notification condition is satisfied depending on the determination result of the determination means. Can be different. Therefore, since the timing at which the second effect is executed can be set irregularly, it is possible to execute an effect that is difficult for the player to predict, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G3, when a predetermined opening condition is satisfied, the variable is changed from the first state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the gaming ball is easier to enter than the first state. Those having a ball-entry means, and when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, or when the special game is executed by the special game execution means, the predetermined opening condition can be satisfied. The gaming machine G4 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G3, when the privilege game or the special game is executed, the variable ball-entry means is changed to the second state, so that the special game is executed. When 1 notification condition is satisfied, it can be made to think that the second effect is executed based on the execution of the privilege game. Therefore, since the remaining period notified by the second effect can be regarded as the period (initial value) set by the period setting means, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the effect executing means executes an effect using at least a part of the effect modes of the privilege game effect executed during the privilege game as the first effect. A gaming machine G5 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the following effects are played. That is, since it is possible to make the player think that the period until the first notification condition is satisfied is during the privileged game, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing when the first game state is set, and the interest of the game. Has the effect of being able to improve. When using the configuration of the gaming machine G2, by making it difficult to understand the timing at which the first gaming state is set, it is easy for the player to know how long the first gaming state has been set this time. It has the effect of making it difficult to distinguish.

In any of the gaming machines G2 to G5, a remaining period condition determining means for determining whether the remaining period of the first gaming state at the time when the first notification condition is satisfied satisfies a predetermined remaining period condition, and the remaining period thereof. The period condition determining means includes a remaining period correction means for executing a predetermined correction process for the remaining period when it is determined that the remaining period condition is not satisfied, and the effect executing means is described as described above. The gaming machine G6 is characterized in that the notification mode included in the second effect is executed in place of the correction remaining period notification mode indicating the corrected remaining period corrected by the remaining period correction means.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G2 to G5, if the remaining period of the first gaming state at the time when the first notification condition is satisfied does not satisfy the remaining period condition, the remaining period remains. The remaining period is corrected by the period correction means, and the corrected remaining period notification mode indicating the corrected remaining period is executed as the second effect. As a result, when the value indicating the remaining period of the first gaming state is a halfway value, the corrected value after being corrected to an appropriate value can be notified to the player. Specifically, for example, when the period of the first gaming state is set based on the number of changes in the special figure, the value of the remaining period (number of changes in the special figure) at the time when the first notification condition is satisfied is If the last digit is not "0" or "5" (for example, "81"), the correction process is executed and the value of the remaining period is corrected to be "0" or "5" (for example). , "80"), the corrected value is notified to the player. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of a good value of sharpness, so that it is easy for the player to think that the timing at which the second effect is executed is the timing at which the first game state is set. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. The identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time, provided that the prize is won (or passed through the operating port). Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There is a game in which an advantageous privilege game is executed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).
However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of games.
The present technical idea was made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 dynamically displays a discrimination means capable of executing a predetermined discrimination and identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means for a predetermined period. A means and a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode. As the game state set after the end of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the first game state which is advantageous to the player and the second game which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. It has a game state setting means capable of setting a state, and at least during the execution of the privilege game, it is possible to execute a notification effect capable of notifying that the second game state is set as an effect result. The notification effect execution means has the notification effect execution means, and after the end of the privilege game in which the first game state is set, the notification effect can be executed until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. be.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is a measuring means capable of measuring the number of discriminations of the discriminating means in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, and whether or not the discriminant number measured by the measuring means has reached a predetermined number of times. It has a measurement discriminating means for discriminating, and the end condition is satisfied when it is determined by the measurement discriminating means that the discriminant number of times since the first game state is set has reached the predetermined number of times. It is something to do.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 has a predetermined display mode in which the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing means is different from the specific display mode in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2. A special privilege game execution means capable of executing a special privilege game that can grant a special privilege different from the privilege that can be given to the player by the privilege game based on the stopped display, and the privilege game, or the above-mentioned When the special privilege game is executed, it has a variable means that can be changed from the first state to the second state, and the end condition is the special state in which the first game state is set. It is established when the privilege game is executed.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, and the notification effect executing means is the first by the privileged gaming executing means by the time the end condition is satisfied. 1 When the privilege game in which the game state is set is executed, the notification effect is executed until the end condition is satisfied after the end of the privilege game.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 5 executes a special game for a predetermined period when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means in the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 4. It is possible to determine the possible special game execution means, the special period setting means that can set the special period in which the special game is executed by the special game execution means, and the remaining period of the special period set by the special period setting means. The special period notification means includes a remaining period determining means and a special period notifying means capable of notifying the remaining special period information for indicating the remaining period of the special period determined by the remaining period determining means. , The remaining special period information is notified when the end condition is satisfied.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, a discrimination means capable of executing a predetermined discrimination, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means for a predetermined period, and a dynamic display executing means thereof. A privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and the privilege game execution thereof. As the game state set after the end of the privileged game executed by the means, a first game state that is advantageous to the player and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. A notification effect execution means that has a game state setting means that can be set, and can execute a notification effect that can notify that the second game state is set as an effect result, at least during the execution of the privilege game. The notification effect execution means can execute the notification effect until a predetermined end condition is satisfied after the end of the privilege game in which the first game state is set.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1. That is, it has a measuring means capable of measuring the discriminant number of the discriminating means and a measuring discriminating means for discriminating whether the discriminant number measured by the measuring means has reached a predetermined number of times, and the end condition is the above. This is established when it is determined by the measurement determination means that the number of determinations since the first game state is set has reached the predetermined number of times.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 or 2. That is, based on the fact that the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode different from the specific display mode, it can be given to the player by the privilege game. A special privilege game execution means that can execute a special privilege game that can grant a special privilege different from the privilege, and when the privilege game or the special privilege game is executed, the state changes from the first state to the second state. It has a variable means that can be changed, and the end condition is satisfied when the special privilege game is executed in a state where the first game state is set.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, if the privilege game for which the first game state is set is executed by the privilege game execution means by the time the end condition is satisfied, the notification effect execution means is after the end of the privilege game. The notification effect is executed until the end condition is satisfied.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in any one of the technical ideas 1 to 4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, a special game execution means capable of executing a special game for a predetermined period and a special period in which the special game is executed by the special game execution means. A special period setting means capable of setting, a remaining period determining means capable of determining the remaining period of the special period set by the special period setting means, and the remaining period of the special period determined by the remaining period determining means. It has a special period notification means capable of notifying the remaining special period information for indicating, and the special period notification means notifies the remaining special period information when the end condition is satisfied.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
S306 Discrimination means S2404 Bonus game execution means S2512 Game state setting means

Claims (5)

Discrimination means that can execute a predetermined discrimination,
A dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for a predetermined period of time to show the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and a dynamic display execution means.
A privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode.
As the game state set after the end of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the first game state which is advantageous to the player and the second game which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. In a gaming machine having a gaming state setting means capable of setting a state and a state.
At least, it has a notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect capable of notifying that the second game state is set as an effect result during the execution of the privilege game.
The game machine characterized in that the notification effect execution means is capable of executing the notification effect until a predetermined end condition is satisfied after the end of the privilege game in which the first game state is set. .. A measuring means capable of measuring the number of times the discrimination means are discriminated,
It has a measurement discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the discriminant number measured by the measuring means has reached a predetermined number of times.
The claim is characterized in that the end condition is satisfied when it is determined by the measurement determination means that the number of determinations since the first gaming state is set has reached the predetermined number of times. 1 The gaming machine described. Based on the fact that the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode different from the specific display mode, the privilege that can be given to the player by the privilege game Is a special privilege game execution means that can execute a special privilege game that can grant different special benefits,
It has a variable means that can be changed from a first state to a second state when the privilege game or the special privilege game is executed.
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the termination condition is satisfied when the special privilege game is executed while the first gaming state is set. If the privilege game for which the first game state is set is executed by the privilege game execution means by the time the end condition is satisfied, the notification effect execution means ends after the end of the privilege game. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the notification effect is executed until the condition is satisfied. When the first game state is set by the game state setting means, a special game execution means capable of executing a special game for a predetermined period and a special game execution means.
A special period setting means capable of setting a special period in which the special game is executed by the special game execution means, and a special period setting means.
Remaining period determination means that can determine the remaining period of the special period set by the special period setting means, and
It has a special period notifying means capable of notifying the remaining special period information for indicating the remaining period of the special period determined by the remaining period determining means.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the special period notification means notifies the remaining special period information when the end condition is satisfied.

Images